Auerbach_Standard_EDP_Reports_196609_Volume_8_Univac Auerbach Standard EDP Reports 196609 Volume 8 Univac
User Manual: Pdf Auerbach_Standard_EDP_Reports_196609_Volume_8_Univac
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 954
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
AUERBACH STANDARD EDP REPORTS
An Analytical Reference Service
for the Electronic Data Processing Field
Prepared and Edited by .
AUERBACH Corporation
Philadelphia, Penna.
8
Published by
I
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
I
AUERBACH Standard EDP Reports
Prepared and Edited by AUERBACH Corporation
Editor ................................................. John R. Hillegass
Associate Editor ........................................ Alan E. Taylor
Assistant Editors ........................................ Fonnie H. Reagan, Jr.
Myra C. Weisgold
Consulting Editors. '.' .................................... John A. Gosden
Roger L. Sisson
Norman Statland
Production Manager ..................................... Cecil C. Hamilton
Staff ................................................. Lenna W. Holt
Susan J. Lehman
Frances G. Maslin
Robert O. MacBride
George Neborak
Sally D. Nester
Director of Customer Relations ............................. R. G. Scott
President ............................................. Isaac L. Auerbach
Director of Information Products Group ................... Robert E. Wallace
Publisher ............................................. Richard K. Ridall
The information contained herein has been obtained from reliable sources
and ha.s been evaluated by technical teams with extensive working experience
in computer design, selection and application. The informatioJ1o, however, is
not guaranteed.
AcknowledgemE!nt is made of the inspiration and guidance provided by the
Information Systems Branch of Office of Naval Research which has supported
data gathering activity by Auerbach Corporation infields similar to some
covered in these reports. The data contained and formats used in STANDARD
EPD REPORTS were not prepared under any contract with the U. S. Government; and they are the exc!usi've property of the copyright holders.
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
55 n. seventeenth street
philadelphia, pa. 19103
215-locust 7-2930
7/64
UNIVAC 1004
Univac
(A Division of Sperry Rand Corporation)
,r--
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN
u.s.
A.
UNIVAC 1004
Univac
(A Division of Sperry Rand Corporation)
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
770:001.001
UNIVAC 1004
Contents
CONTENTS
§
001.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
S.
9.
10.
11.
12.
14.
15.
20.
21.
22.
Introduction ..•.• . . • • • . . • . • • . . . . • • • • • . • • • • • • • • • • • • .
Data Structure. • . . • • . . • . . • .'. • • . . . • • . • • . • • . • • . • • . • • • .
System Configuration •..•.•.•..••.••.••.•••••.•••••.••
I
Typical Card System (UNIVAC 1004 I) .•..•.••••••
I-A Typical Card System (UNIVAC 1004 II) .••••.••••••
II
4-Tape Business System (UNIVAC 1004 Ill) ••••••••
Internal Storage
Core Storage •.•••.•••••••.••..••••.••••.••••
Central Processors
UNIVAC 1004 I, Models 1 through 7 ..••••••••••.••••
UNIVAC 1004 II, Models 1 through 7 ••••••.••••••.••
UNIVAC 1004 III, Models 1 through 7 ..••..•••••.••••
Optional Features ..••.••••••••••••••••••.•••.
Console .••••••.•.••••..•••.•••••.•.••.••••••.•••.
Input-Output; Punched Card and Tape
Standard Card Reader. • • • • . . • • • • • • • . . • • • • •
Auxiliary Card Reader •..•••••••••••••••••
0704
2009
Card Punch (SO-column) .•••••••••.••••••••
2011
Card Punch (90-column) .•••.••••.••...•...
2009
Card Read/Punch (SO-column) .•.•••••••• ~ •••
2011
Card Read/Punch (90-column) .•••••••••••••.
0902
Paper Tape Reader ••••••••••••••••••••••
FO'606 Paper Tape Punch .••..••••••••••••••••••
Input-Output; Printer ...••..•...•••••••• ; ••••••.••••••
Input-Output; Magnetic Tape
OS57
UNIVAC 1004 Uniservo ••.••••••••••••.••••
Input-Output; Other
F05S5 Data Line Terminal, Type 1. ••.•••••••.•••••
F0611 Data Line Terminal, Type 2 ••.•••••.••••••••
Simultaneous Operations •..••••••.•••••••••••••••••••••
Instruction List .••••••••••.•••••••.•••••••••••••••••
Data Codes ••••.••.••.•••••••••••.•••••••..••••••••
Problem Oriented Facilities
Utility Routines .••.•••.••••••.•••••.•••••••••
Report Writing•••••••••••••••••••••.•••••••••
Multiplication/Division Routines •••.•••••••••••••••
Editing Routines •.•••..••.•••••••••••••••••••
Scientific Routines •.••..•••• ; ••••••.••••••••••
System Performance
Notes on System Performance ••..••••••••••••••••
Worksheet Data Table .••.••••••••••.•••••••••••
Generalized File Processing Problem •••••••••.•.•••
Physical Characteristics . . . • . . . . . • . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . • . • •
Price List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • • . . . • . • • • • . . • • • . ',' ••...
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
770:011
770:021
770:031
770:031.1
770:031. 2
770:031.3
770:041
770:051
770:051
770:051
770:051.123
770:061
770:071
770:071
770:072
770:072
770:072
770:072
770:074
770:074
770:0S1
770:091
770:101
770:101
770:111
770:121
770:141
770:151. 1
770:151.14
770:151.17
770:151. 17
770:151.17 .
770:201.001
770:201. 011
770:201. 100
770:211
770:221
8/64
770:001.002
UNIVAC 1004
Ii 001.
UNIVAC 1004 CARD PROCESSOR
Photograph courtesy of UNIVAC Division of Sperry Rand Corp.
8/64
770:011.100
UNIVAC 1004
Introduction
INTRODUCTION
§
011.
The UNIVAC 1004 is a compact, plugboard-programmed computer. Its two basic models, the
1004 I and 1004 II, can process punched card input at speeds of about 340 and 600 cards per
minute, respectively, including the necessary allowances for a typical amount of computation
and for I/O interlocks. (Card reading and printing can proceed simultaneously, but cannot be
overlapped with computation. )
Rentals for the basic 1004 system (consisting of processor, card reader, and printer in a single
cabinet) range from $1,150 to $1,625 per month. Additional peripheral equipment that can be
connected includes a card punch, a second card reader, a card read/punch unit, paper tape
equipment, and data communication terminals. A special processor model, the 1004 ill, can
control one or two magnetic tape units in addition to the above equipment.
First deliveries of the UNIVAC 1004 I were made in January 1963, and over 1,300 systems
have been installed to date. The faster 1004 II and 1004 III were announced in March 1964.
The 1004 is most commonly used as an independent data processing system for small business
applications. As such, it is attractive to many organizations considering a step upward from
conventional tabulating installations because the 1004 requires less retraining of their staffs
than a stored-program computer system would require. Furthermore, the 1004 offers economic
advantages over stored-program systems for many applications whose processing and internal
storage requirements are relatively small.
The 1004 can serve as a satellite system for a larger computer, such as a UNIVAC 490 or 1107.
It is also suitable for use as a small computer in a branch office, communicating with a larger,
home-office computer either by means of direct communication lines or simply through physical
interchange of card decks or tape reels.
Where the 1004 is used as a complete data processing installation, there is no larger programcompatible computer system into which the installation can grow as its workload increases.
UNIVAC, however, has announced provisions for connecting a 1004 system to its larger 1050
series of computers (described in Computer System Report 777:). The 1050 can then be used
in conjunction with, and perhaps eventually replace, the 1004.
The UNIVAC 1004 can be used with more than one coding system. It normally operates with
either the standard UNIVAC XS-3 code or with the Remington Rand 90-column card code. Which
code is to be used is program-selectable, so it is possible to use both codes within a single program. This allows, for instance, reading a mixture of 80-column and 90-column cards, or
reading 80-column cards and punching 90-column cards.
Codes other than the XS-3 and 90-column codes can be automatically translated to either of these
codes by a special Translate Feature, provided that there are no more than 6 data bits per character in the original code. In particular, the IBM BCD codes used on the 1401 and other IBM systems can be translated, thus allowing the 1004 to be used as a satellite to many non-UNIVAC
computer systems.
The UNIVAC 1004 has 961 alphameric character positions of core storage. Each core position
contains six data bits. Core storage cycle time is 8. 0 microseconds in the UNIVAC 1004 I and
6.5 microseconds in the UNIVAC 1004 II and III.
i
\
"
The plugboard of the basic machine has a capacity for 31 program steps (expandable to 62).
Each step can specify two operand addresses, and multiple operations can be performed in a
single program step. Arithmetic operations include add and subtract (both algebraic and
absolute) and compare. Multiply and divide operations require the use of wired subroutines.
Seven types of transfer processes are provided, including several with editing facilities. Inputoutput areas are assigned fixed locations in core storage. Input-output commands can be
combined in the same step with other operations.
Operands can be of any length up to the capacity of core storage. Operand length is specified by
the operand addresses wired in each program step. Instructions are executed at the rate of
about 6,500 instructions per second in the 1004 I processor and about 8,000 instructions per
second in the 1004 II and III.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
8/64
UNIVAC 1004
770:011.101
§ 011.
INTRODUCTION (Contd.)
The 1004 can read cards and print simultaneously, but neither of these operations can be overlapped with computation. Card punching can overlap either computing or other peripheral
operations. The optional peripheral devices may:
(1) be able to overlap both computing and card reading and/or
printing (e.g., the paper tape punch or the card read/punch
operations) ;
(2) be able to overlap computing but not card reading or printing
(e.g., the auxiliary card reader or the paper tape reader); or
(3) be unable to overlap any other operation (e. g. , the Data Line
Terminals) .
The 1004 is available in 80-column, 90-column, or 80/90-column models. The basic system
consists of a card reader, central processor with plugboard control, and printer. All are
housed in a single compact cabinet. The card reader in the 1004 I Processor has a rated
speed of 300 cards per minute, and the printer has a rated speed of 300 lines per minute.
These rated speeds include an allowance for 35 milliseconds of computation per card or line,
which has been found to be quite conservative. In typical applications, computation time is
about 5 milliseconds per card, and reading and/or printing speeds of about 340 cards/lines
per minute are obtained.
In the 1004 II and III, the card reader operates at a speed of 615 cards per minute, and the
printer operates at 600 lines per minute; both these speeds are based on 5 milliseconds of
computation per record.
A card punch can be connected to the UNIVAC 1004. It punches at a speed of 200 cards per
minute. The card punch is available in a read/punch model which reads and/or punches
cards at a speed of 200 cards per minute. The read/punch enables a 1004 system to read
data from and punch results into the same card. A 400-card-per-minute Auxiliary Card
Reader can also be used with the 1004 Processor.
Two different Data Line Terminals are available. The Data Line Terminal, Type 1, can be
used to communicate with a UNIVAC 1050, 490, 1107, or another 1004. The Data Line Terminal, Type 2, permits communication with magnetic tape terminals such as the Digitronics
Dial-O-Verter.
A 400-character-per-second paper tape reader and a 110-character-per-second paper tape punch
can be used with the 1004.
One or two Uniservo magnetic tape units can be connected to the UNIVAC 1004 III processor only.
Three density levels - 200, 556, and 800 pulses per inch - provide speeds of 8,000, 23,000,
and 34,000 characters per second, respectively. These magnetic tapes can be written in a mode
compatible with either UNIVAC or IBM standards, although programmed translation may be required.
The software available with the 1004 is naturally limited. It consists primarily of short subroutines for handling multiplication, division, and a number of common commercial problems.
These include suggested methods for handling reconciliations, deleting subtotals where there
has only been a single card to be totaled, handling missing numbers in a matching operation,
checking the sequence of alphanumeric identification numbers, and verifying check digits.
In addition, a number of complete programs are available.
These include standard listing and
transcription programs, and at least one General Purpose Program, which is a report writer
that can facilitate setting up the equipment for new reports. A start has been made on supplying
some scientific routines, such as sine-cosine and square root routines, and a Critical Path
Method routine has been announced.
Software routines are circulated by the UNIVAC Division to 1004 users.
8/64
770:015.100
UNIVAC 1004
Additions and Changes
ADDITIONS AND CHANGES
§
015 .
.1
AUXILIARY CORE STORAGE UNIT
An Auxiliary Core Storage (ACS) Unit that doubles the internal storage capacity of a
UNIVAC 1004 I, II, or III processor was announced by UNIVAC on September 29, 1964. The new
optional unit provides 961 additional character positions of program-addressable core storage,
expanding the total core storage capacity of any 1004 processor to 1,922 characters. Programs
written for a 1004 with the standard 961-character storage capacity can be run without alteration
on a 1004 equipped with the new ACS unit.
The additional storage provided by the ACS will conSiderably increase the amount of
processing that can be performed by a 1004 during a single pass. The ACS will also increase
the efficiency of 1004 Data Line Terminal communications by permitting the transmission of
longer messages. In 1004 III systems, the ACS will permit the use of longer magnetic tape blocks,
enabling the 1004 III to meet the block length requirements for efficient use in many satellite system applications.
Delivery of Auxiliary Core Storage Units for 1004 processors will begin in late
December, 1964. Rental for the ACS is $100 per month, and purchase price is $2,950 .
.2
UNIVAC BANK PROCESSOR IV
A new check processing system, the UNIVAC Bank Processor IV, was introduced by
UNIV AC on September 28, 1964. The system consists of a UNIVAC 1004 processor (with built-in
card reader and printer), an MICR document sorter-reader, and a card punch. UNIVAC states
that this combination will handle all accounting operations in most banks with deposits of less than
50 million dollars.
Numerous optional features and peripheral devices can be added to the basic Bank
Processor IV. It can be connected by common-carrier communications facilities to a remote
large-scale computer, enabling a bank to tie in all of its branches with a central computer.
Compatibility with competitive computers can be achieved via magnetic tape. Input can be in the
form of MICR documents, punched cards, paper tape, or messages from remote points.
The MICR sorter-reader has a peak sorting rate of 1,200 documents per minute. It
will be available in models with 6, 12, and 18 pockets, and can be used as a free-standing document sorter while the 1004 processes· other work. The sorter-reader will accept intermixed
paper and card documents of varying size and thickness, will use radial stackers to control document alignment, and will handle endorSing and automatic batch numbering with no reduction in the
document handling rate. Pocket capacity is 2,000 documents, and the feed bin will hold 3,000
documents.
Rental prices for the UNIVAC Bank Processor IV system begin at $3,480 per month,
and purchase prices begin at $139, 200.
© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
10/64
770:021.100
UNIVAC 1004
Data Structure
DATA STRUCTURE
§
021 •
.1
STORAGE LOCATIONS
Name of Location
Size
Purpose or Use
Character:
6 bits
Punched card:
80 or 90
basic addressable data
storage unit; holds 1
letter, numeral, or
special symbol.
primary 1004 input-output
medium; generally holds
1 character per column •
columns
.2
INFORMATION FORMATS
Type of Information
Representation
Numeral: .•.•.•.••.•......•.•... 1 character.
Letter or special symbol: .•....••..•. 1 character.
Field: . . . • . . . . . . • . . • • • . . . • • . • . • . 1 to 961 characters, delimited by plugboard
wiring.
Instruction: .....••...••.•••.•••.• plugboard wiring; instructions are not stored
internally.
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
8/64
770:031.001
UNIVAC 1004
System Configuration
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§
031.
A UNIVAC 1004 system includes the following units:
•
One 1004 Model I, II, or III Processor with built-in
console and 961-character core memory.
•
One Card Reader - peak speed is 400 cpm in 1004 I;
615 cpm in 1004 II and III.
•
One Printer - peak speed is 400 lpm in 1004 I;
600 lpm in 1004 II and III.
Other peripheral equipment that can be connected to a 1004 includes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
One Card Punch or Card Read/Punch (200 cpm).
One additional Card Reader (400 cpm).
One Paper Tape Reader.
One Paper Tape Punch.
One Data Line Terminal, Type 1 or Type 2.
One or two Uniservo Magnetic Tape Units (on
1004 III only).
© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
8/64
770:031.100
UNIVAC 1004
§ 031 .
.1
TYPICAL CARD SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION 1.(10041)
Deviations from Standard Configuration I: . . . . . . . . . . • . core storage is 75% smaller.
62 "steps" instead of 1,000
instructions.
no index registers.
printer is 60% slower.
reader is 60% slower.
Equipment
Core Storage:
961 positions
1004 I Card Processor,
Model C: S J1.sec cyCle,
SO-column
$1,500
Card Reader:
400 cpm max.
Printer: 400 lpm max.
2009 Card Punch:
200 cpm
TOTAL:
S/64
300
$l,SOO
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§
.2
770:031.200
031.
TYPICAL CARD SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION I-A (1004 II)
Deviations from Standard Configuration I:
core storage is 75% smaller.
62 "steps" instead of 1,000
instructions.
no index registers.
printer is 37% slower.
reader is 40% slower.
Equipment
Core Storage:
961 positions
1004 I Card Processor','
Model C: 6.5 Jl.sec
cycle, 80-column
$1,625
Card Reader:
615 cpm m~.
Printer: 600 lpm max.
2009 Card Punch: 200 cpm
TOTAL:
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
300
$1,925
8/64
770:031.300
UNIVAC 1004
§ 031 .
.3
4-TAPE BUSINESS SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION II (1004 lIT)
Deviations from Standard Configuration II: ...••.•.•••• core storage is 75% smaller.
62 "steps" instead of 1,000
instructions.
2 tapes instead of 4.
reader is 23% faster.
printer is 20% faster.
punch is 100% faster.
tape is 120% faster.
Equipment
Rental
Core Storage:
961 positions
1004 III Magnetic Tape
Processor, Model C:
6.5 /Lsec cycle, 80column
$1,625
Card Reader: 615 cpm
max.
Printer: 600 lpm max.
2009 Card Punch: 200 cpm
300
0857 Uniservos (2 tape
drives and 1 control):
8/23/34KC
800
TOTAL:
8/64
$2,725
770:041.1 00
UNIVAC 1004
Internal Storage
Co re Stora ge
INTERNAL STORAGE: CORE STORAGE
§
.16
041.
.1
Reserved Storage
GENERAL
Purpose
• 11
Identity: . • . . . . • . • . Core Storage; contained in 1004 I Card Processor.
1004 II Card Processor.
1004 III Magnetic Tape
Processor.
• 12
Basic Use: . • . . . . . . working storage for data.
• 13
Description
Each of the six cores comprising a character location is in a separate core plane, and each of the
six planes consists of a 31-by-31 matrix (31 "rows"
by 31 "columns"). A storage location is designated
by an address made up of its row number (the R
Address) and its column number (the C Address).
For example, address R15/C3 refers to the third
character location in the 15th row.
Input-output areas for card reading, card punching,
and printing are fixed for any specific 1004 system;
these areas are part of the 961-character core
memory and can be used as working storage when
not required for input-output purposes. Instructions
are wired into a plugboard - not held in working
storage as in all stored-program digital computers.
No parity checking, or any other form of redundancy
checking, is performed upon data transferred into
or out of core storage.
none.
none.
none.
80, 90, or 160 char* none.
80, 90, or 160 char* none .
none.
132 char*
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Storage Medium: . . . . magnetic core •
• 22
Physical Dimensions
.221 MagnetiC core storage
Array size: . . • . . . . 31 by 31 by 6 bits.
.23
Storage Phenomenon: . direction of magnetization.
.24
Recording Permanence
.241 Data erasable by
program: . . • . . . . . yes.
.242 Data regenerated
constantly: . • . . . . . no.
• 243 Data volatile:. • . • . . . no.
.244 Data permanent: . . . . • no.
.245 Storage changeable: •. no.
.27
Interleaving Levels: .. no interleaving.
.28
Access Technique: .•. coincident current •
.29
Potential Transfer Rates
Availability
1004 I: .•••••••••. 3 months.
1004 II: •••...•••. 6 months.
1004 III: . • . . • . . • . . 6 months.
.15
Locks
*Areas or portions of areas not used for I/O can
be made available for working storage.
Each UNIVAC 1004 processor contains a core
memory consisting of 961 six-bit character locations, each one of which is individually addressable.
Core storage cycle time is 8.0 microseconds in the
1004 I processor and 6.5 microseconds in the newer
1004 II and ill processors.
• 14
Index registers:
Arithmetic
registers:
Logic registers:
I/O control Card read area:
Card punch area:
Printer area:
Number of
. Locations
First Delivery
1004 I: . • • . . . . . • . January, 1963.
1004 II: . . . • . . . . . . June, 1964.
1004 III: .•.•.••... July, 1964.
.292 Peak data rates
Cycling rates 1004 I: . . . • • . . • .
1004 II and III: . . . .
Unit of data: ••..•.
Conversion factor: .•
Data rate1004 I: . . . . . . . •
1004 II and III: . . . .
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
125,000 cps.
154,000 cps.
character
6 bits/character.
125,000 char/sec.
154,000 char/sec.
8/64
·770:041.300
8041.
•3
.4
DATA CAPACITY: •.. 961 characters (one core
storage module) per
UNIVAC 1004 system.
CONTROLLER: ••••• no separate controller
required.
.5
ACCESS TIMING
• 51
Arrangement of
Heads: .••..••.•. 1 access device per system.
• 52
Simultaneous
Operations: ••••••. none.
• 53
Access Time Parameters and Variations
.531 For uniform access
Cycle time1004 I: .•.•••••• 8.0 Jtsec.
1004 nand m: .... 6.5 Jtsec.
For data unit of:. • . • 1 character.
8/64
UNIVAC 1004
.6
CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: •••..•• no •
.7
PERFORMANCE
.72
Transfer Load Size: .• 1 to N characters, limited
only by capacity of core
storage •
.73
Effective Transfer Rate (With Self)
1004 I: •••..••••• 62,400 char/sec.
1004 n and III: ...••. 76,700 char/sec •
.8
ERRORS. CHECKS,
AND ACTION: ••... no error checking is
provided on core storage
operations.
770:051.100
UNIVAC 1004
Central Processor
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§ 051.
.12
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: .•
.12
Description (Conte!.)
lations between the XS-3 code and the 90-column
code automatically .
. UNIVAC 1004 Processing
Section:
1004 I.
1004 II.
1004 III.
Description
The UNIVAC 1004 processor is an externallyprogrammed computer that works with variablelength fields. All processing is performed on a
character-by-character basis. The 1004 has
decimal addition, subtraction, and comparison
facilities, and powerful editing features that include
character insertion, zero suppression, and check
protection. Functions such as multiplication,
division, code translation, and table look-up can
be accomplished through the use of simple wired
subroutines.
The "processing steps" that constitute a UNIVAC
1004 program are wired into a plugboard, not held
in core storage. A maximum of 62 steps can be
directly wired into the standard plugboard. Model
A processors are able to use only 31 of these steps,
Model B processors can use 47 steps, and Model C
processors can use all 62 steps.
There are 21 different versions of the 1004 processor, with varying plugboard capacities, core storage speeds, and input-output capabilities. All 21
versions are listed in the Price Data section, Page
775:221. 100. The following designations are used
to distinguish between the various versions.
o
These indicate the memory cycle time, and the
ability to use one or two magnetic tape drives.
The UNIVAC 1004 I Card Processor was first delivered in January 1963. It has 961 character positions of core storage with a cycle time of 8 microseconds per character, and can accommodate
punched card, printer, and paper tape input-output
equipment and data communication terminals, but
not magnetic tape.
The 1004 II and III processors, announced in March
1964, have 961 character positions of core storage
with a cycle time of 6.5 microseconds per character - 23% faster than the 1004 I. The 1004 II
has the same input-output capabilities as the 1004 I,
while the 1004 III can control one or two magnetic
tape units in addition to the other facilities.
Model I processors have a cycle time of 8.0
microseconds, and cannot use magnetic tapes.
Model II processors have a cycle time of 6.5
microseconds, and cannot use magnetic tapes.
Model III processors have a cycle time of 6.5
microseconds, and can use magnetic tapes.
o A, B, and C versions
This designation indicates how much of the plugboard has been activated. All models use the
same size plugboard, but in some models some
parts of it are not functional.
Typical processing times for 5-digit operands on
the three 1004 models are as follows:
1004 I
Addition:
Mul tiplication
(subroutine) :
Division (subroutine):
Models I, II, and III
A versions have one-half of the plugboard
activated (31 steps).
1004 II and III
112 J.!sec
91 J.!sec
B versions have approximately three-quarters
of the plugboard activated (47 steps).
3,800 J.!sec
7,100 J.!sec
3,100 J.!sec
6,000 J.!sec
C versions have the entire plugboard activated
(62 steps).
The 1004 processor is able to handle two numeric
machine codes - either the 80-column XS-3 code
or the 90-column card code. The arithmetic circuits can use either code, as specified by plugboard
wiring. The 90-column card code is already a 6bit code, so no translation is required for 90-column
systems. The 80-column code is a 12-bit code, and
automatic translation is performed when 80-column
cards are read or punched. Letters are regarded
as bit patterns only, so a number of different codes
can be used provided that the printer can be made
to recognize the correct characters. An optional
feature - Code Conversion - performs trans-
~
80-column, 90-column, and 07 or 80/90 versions.
Where a system uses one type of card exclusively,
it is called an 80-column system or a 90-column
system. Where both types of cards areused, itis
called an 80/90 system and designated by an 07
after the actual model number (e. g., the 1004 107). In these 80/90 systems, the full 62-step
plugboard is always activated.
The following section briefly explains the main concepts of external programming as practiced on the
UNIVAC 1004. This is followed by a description of
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
8/64
UNIVAC 1004
.770:051.120
. 121 Programming the 1004 (Contd.)
iii 051.
.12
Description (Contd.)
The basic instruction format is two-address, but
some function codes do not use any operands. These
include the input-output commands Read, Print,
Punch, etc., which use fixed input-output areas so
that the simple commands themselves are sufficient.
An operation that requires no operand addresses can
be specified at the same time as one of the twoaddress instructions. The programmer simply
wires the plugboard so that when the particular step
is "pulsed, " the pulse is conducted to a hub for the
appropriate operation. This pulse is picked up internally, and the operation is performed in parallel
with the two-address instruction. Figure 2 shows
how a Card Read operation can be wired on the same
step as an Add operation.
the major facilities of the processor plugboard,
which can be read independently. A diagram of the
complete plugboard is shown in the Instruction List
section, on page 770: 121,102.
. 121 Programming the 1004
The UNIVAC 1004 uses two-address instructions
called "processing steps." The programmer specifies these by using wires to physically interconnect
hubs on the processor plugboard. He may, for example, connect the hub for the function code of Step
Number 3 to the hub representing Addition, the hub
for' Operand 1 of the same step to core storage address 213*, and the hub for Operand 2 to address
545, as illustrated in Figure 1. These actions
would be equivalent to writing the machine-code instruction "Add 213, 545" for an internallyprogrammed computer. When a plugboard is used,
the processor does not need to interpret the meaning of each instruction by means of a network of
logical AND and OR gates. Instead, an electrical
pulse is sent to the hubs which represent the program step and is picked up again from the hubs
representing the correct function and operands,
having passed along the wires which were inserted
by the programmer when he "wired" the plugboard.
The function codes that use the two-address format
are Add, Subtract, Transfer, and Compare; all are
variable-length operations. Editing is performed
during Transfer operations. The result of a Compare operation is to set a physical relay (called a
"comparator") to one of three conditions, usually
corresponding to positive, negative, or zero. Other
interpretations of these three positions are possible,
depending upon the specific type of comparison which
was performed (e.g. , greater, less than, or equal
results for a direct comparison, or identical or not
identical results for an alphanumeric operation).
Figure 3 shows the plugboard wiring for a typical
Compare operation.
* The UNIVAC 1004 actually uses a more complex
form of addressing, which is described in paragraph (1) of the next section. This form is used
to simplify the illustrations in this section.
+
PROCESSES
o
The setting of a comparator can be used to. change
the order of computation or the choice of operands,
depending upon the program requirements. Operand
READ PUNCH
0
0
Connecting wire joining two
hubs, specifying the operation "Add"
STEP NO.
1
2
4
5
PROCESS
0
0
0
0
OPERAND 1
0
0
OPERAND 2
0
0
6
Empty hubs
Connecting wires setting
Operand 1 address at 213
and Operand 2 address at
545
ADDRESS
Figure 1: Partial view of a simplified plugboard showing electrical
hubs for various program steps, addresses, and processes.
Step 3 is shown wired for "Add the contents of 213 to the
contents of 545."
8/64
/'.-
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§
770:051.121
05l.
. 121 Programming the 1004 (Contd. )
PUNCH
READ
+
0
PROCESSES
STEP NO.
1
PROCESS
OPERAND 1
OPERAND 2
6
5
2
6 g
6 6
6 6
6 6 6}
6 6 6
6 6 6
Double. hubs enable more
than one connection to be
wired to one point
Figure 2: Partial view of a simplified plugboard showing double electrical hubs being used to specify an input operation without
the use of an additional program step. Step 3 is shown
wired to both an Add operation and a Card Read operation.
[
0
---------------
STEP NO.
1
OPERAND 2
COMP
+
1.
0
2.
0
3.
0
0
ADDRESS
212
FIGURE 3:
\
"
4
5
6
6 6 6 6
6 6 6 6
6 6 6 6
OPERAND 1
,
0
3
PROCESS
(,
~AD ~CH~
+
PROCESSES
0
0
0
0
0
0
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
545
546
547
548
549
550
0
0
0
0
0
0
Partial view of a simplified plugboard showing the setting
of a switch based upon the result of a comparison. Step 1
performs a comparison of the operands stored in locations
212 and 543 and sets Comparator 1 accordingly.
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
8/64
UNIVAC 1004
770:051.1211
II 051.
• i21 Programming the 1004 (Contd.)
stored next to each other, all can be generated by a
single instruction. For instance, if 1 is to be added
to 5034, $5.67 to $10,389.00, and 28 to 30, the
whole job can be done by a single instruction adding
000 001 000 000 567 000 028 to 005 034 001 038 900
000 030. By using the appropriate field length - in
this case 21 digits - all the additions are performed
in the same step; the processor simply works its
way through the field in character-by-character
fashion.
.121 Programming the 1004 (Contd.)
selection is performed by connecting the plugboard
hub representing each of the possible conditions to
the operand which is wanted under that condition. At
the same time, an input hub to the comparator is
used as the operand address of the instruction step.
Then, when the electrical pulse is sent to the hubs
for that particular instruction step, it will be picked
up internally only at the operand position which
corresponds to the current setting of the comparator. Figure 4 shows how a comparator setting can
be used to select an operand in this manner.
A further use of the plugboard for control purposes
can occur while the character-by-character operation is taking place. After each character is processed and immediately before it is stored, an electrical pulse is sent ("emitted") to the plugboard hubs
which represent its storage position. If its address
position is not wired, then the character is storedin
the normal way. However, if wires are connected to
the appropriate hubs on the plugboard, electrical
circuits are completed which can modify the store
command so that some desired action can be taken
at the same time.
Processing in the UNIVAC 1004 is performed in a
serial, character-by-character manner. Operands
can, therefore, be of any desired length. This
capability is frequently utilized during the setting up
of a plugboard program to make one operation perform a number of functional actions upon contiguous
data fields. The most common case is where there
are a number of sums to be generated. If these are
+
STEP NO.
PROCESS
OPERAND 1
8/64
6 6
6 6
6 6
0
0
3.
0
0
0
0
0
ADDRESS
212
213
214
FIGURE 4:
4
6
6
2.
1.
0
3
~
COMP
PUNCH
0
1
0
0
OPERAND 2
READ
0
PROCESSES
o
6
6
6
6
+
0
0
217
o
218
o
Partial view of a simplified plugboard showing the use of
a switch to select an operand. Step 2 adds the' contents
of location 216 to one of three different locations, depending
upon the present setting of Comparator 1.
219
o
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§
770:051.1212
051.
. 121 Programming the 1004 (Contd.)
.121 Programming the 1004 (Contd.)
There are two main ways in which these store commands can be modified. In some cases, the operation itself may be changed. This provides the ability
to insert characters, zero-suppress fields to be used
for output purposes, delete characters, etc. In
zero-suppression, for example, the plugboard addresses of the first and last characters of a field to
be zero-suppressed are wired to the hubs "Start
Zero-suppression" and "End Zero-suppression."
Then, when the starting address is reached during a
transfer, the store operation is modified to replace
any leading zeros with space codes. Storing, with
zero-suppression in operation, will continue until an
address is reached which, when pulsed, allows the
pulse to flow into the hub marked "End Zerosuppression."
Other cases where the store operation itself is modified mainly involve editing. Asterisks can be inserted instead of blanks for check protection
purposes. Other characters, such as spaces, dollar signs, decimal points, commas, or zeros, can
be inserted into a field; the character which would
normally have been stored in that particular location
is held back and stored in the next location.
The other way in which a store command can be
modified brings the bit pattern of the character being stored directly to some hubs on the plugboard.
This can be done by emitting a pulse for each "one"
bit in the pattern from a set of hubs representing
the six bit positions of the character being stored. *
These pulses can be used to change the paths of
some of the electrical connections, allowing
changes to be made in the program sequence or in
the choice of operands simply because some particular character has been stored in a specific location, and without any action of the program steps.
A plugboard program, therefore, has two independent, complementary portions: a sequential portion
much like ordinary internally-stored programs, and
another portion which is sensitive to the data and
environment factors. The power of plugboardprogrammed systems like the UNIVAC 1004 is often
restricted mainly by the physical configuration of
the plugboard and the ability of the programmer to
get the wires into position, rather than by the
logical limitations of the instruction facilities.
. 122 The 1004 Plugboard
The UNIVAC 1004 plugboard is a large one, having
a maximum size of 80 by 64 hubs. Not all of these
hubs are activated in all options. The plugboard's
main components are:
(a)
There are 31 steps in the basic system (Model
A) ; 47 or 62 steps are available in Model B or
C, respectively. Each program step has six
hubs that can be connected to operands, processes, arid other facilities.
(bl
*
The UNIVAC 1004, in fact, has two hubs for each
of the six bit positions. One is pulsed if the corresponding bit is a "one," and the other if it is a
"zero."
Operations
o Addition and subtraction: Available in both
algebraic and absolute form. No multiplication or division facilities are directly available; the standard multiply and divide subroutines require four and seven steps,
re spectively.
o
The programmer wires the board so that when electrical pulses representing the character being
stored are emitted from the hubs, a pulse will pass
tl:rough if, and only if, the desired character is
being stored. Then the presence or absence of the
pulse can be used to govern a two-way switch that
is similar in other ways to the three-way comparators mentioned above. These two-way switches,
called "selectors," can later be used by the programmer to route the program according to his
needs.
For instance, suppose that the first column of a
card is a control column, with different punchings
to represent an issue note, a receipt, or some
other type of transaction. Then by properly wiring
core storage position 1 (which is the first column
position of the standard card input area), the storage of the control character into this location will
automatically cause the changes which the programmer desires in the various wired networks. No
change in the program itself is needed - the source
of control here is the actual data being stored.
Program Steps
Transfers: Transfers of any length can be
programmed. Editing can be done during
transfers. Facilities include the insertion
and deletion of characters, zero suppression and replacement with either spaces or
asterisks, optional deletion of zero balances,
bit superimposition, and specialized treatments of signs and zone bits.
o Input/Output Operations: Card Read, Card
Punch, Print, Printer Space (under control
of a two-level paper tape loop), Magnetic
Tape Read, Write, Write and Check, Backspace, and Rewind operations are available,
as well as special operations for other
peripheral devices.
Some of these operations can overlap other
input/output operations; details are given in
the Simultaneous Operations section
(770:111).
(c)
Other Facilities
A number of other hubs are used to control
various modes of operation. These include the
types of editing available, overflow and sentinel
tests, printer control Signals, and specific
character generators for C, D, G, R, T, $,
*, -, +, period, and comma. Bit generators
can be used to create other desired characters.
©1964 Auerbach Corparation and Info, Inc.
8/64
UNIVAC 1004.
770:051.122
~
. 123 Optional Features
05l.
. 122 The 1004 Plugboard (Contd.)
(d)
Code Image: Permits two characters in the 6-bit
XS-3 code to be read from or punched into each
column of a standard SO-column card by suspending
the automatic translation between the usual HoUeritl:
card code and the XS-3 internal code. This doubles
the effective data capacity of an SO -colum'n card to 160
characters. The Code Image feature is available in
two forms: for card reading only or for both reading and punching.
Switches
These are two or three-way switches which
are set by the program, by data, or by the
operator. The switches are used as the variable connectors in the networks which control
the program. The full plugboard has ten 3way comparators, sixty 2-way general purpose
selectors, each with four sets of switches;
twenty 2-way program selects; and four 2-way
holds reflecting the setting of console switches.
(e)
Code Conversion: Allows automatic translation between the XS-3 (SO-column card) code and the 90column card code. It is available only with processors which have a 62-step plugboard, and prevents
the installation of a Data Line Terminal in the
processor. When Code Conversion is installed, the
printer can print from either of the two internal
codes, as selected by program, and the card
readers can read either type of card. Any card
punches connected to the system are restricted to
being either SO-column or 90-column punches, but
either type of punch can be connected and serviced
by a computer with the Code Conversion feature.
In an installation which has both types of punch
available, changing over from one punch to the
other is a manual operation which takes two or
three minutes.
Auxiliary Hardware
To set up the switching networks needed for
the program, a large number of auxiliary connectors are needed. Sometimes it is necessary to bring a number of paths together. For
this purpose a connector is used. The UNIVAC
1004 plugboard has 102 such connectors,
mostly consisting of S hubs connected to 2 hubs.
Sometimes, on the other hand, a single pulse
must be sent along a number of paths. For
this purpose, "distributors" are used, and the
full plugboard has 160 of these.
(f)
Translate Feature: Allows automatic conversion
between any two six-bit codes. (A five-bit code, or
any code with less than six bits, can be regarded
as a six-bit code.) The translation process uses a
table stored in memory containing the 64 characters
of the code to be used. These character codes are
stored in addresses based on the binary patterns of
the 64 characters of the code they are to replace.
Where translation is to take place in both directions,
or where more than one code is to be translated,
additional 64-character tables are required.
Store Address Hubs
There are two complete sets of "store address"
hubs on the plugboard. One set is used for
Operand 1 references and the other set for
Operand 2 references. The core memory is
considered as a 31-row by 31-column matrix
holding 961 alphanumeric characters in all. To
wire the address of a particular location, both
the row number and the column number of the
location must be connected to the Operand hubs
of the program step concerned. To indicate a
field, the addresses of both its first and last
character positions must be wired.
Further control is provided by SO "address
combines." These usually emit a pulse if the
following conditions are simultaneously satisfied: (1) the presence of a specific pulse
coming from the storage address being used
and the data to be stored during an operation,
and (2) the absence of an inhibiting pulse from
anywhere else on the board. The address
combines are often used to restrict some
special function (such as editing) so that it
will occur only when the data is moved by one
particular program step.
S/64
Card Processor Expansion Kits: The UNIVAC 1004
is capable of field conversion either by increasing
the capacity of the plugboard beyond its basic size
of 31 steps or by converting a 1004 I into a 1004 II
or III. The Card Processor Expansion Kits are designed to increase the plugboard from either 31
steps (an A model) to 47 steps (a B model) or from
the 47-step B model to a full 62-step C model. A,
B, and C model processors are available for either
SO-column or 90-column cards, and for 1004 I, II,
or III processors.
.13
Availability
1004 I: . . . . . . . . . . . 3 months.
1004 II: . . . . . . . . . . . 6 months.
1004 III: . . . . . . . . . . 6 months.
. 14
First Delivery
1004 I: . . . . . . . . . . . January, 1963.
1004 II: . . . . . . . . . . . June, 1964.
1004 III: . . . . . . . . . . July, 1964.
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§
770:051.200
051.
.2
PROCESSING FACILITIES
.21
Operations and Operands
Operation and
Variation
.211 Fixed point Add-subtract:
Multiply:
Divide:
.212 Floating point:
.213 Boolean AND:
Inclusive OR:
.214 Comparison Numbers:
Absolute:
Letters:
Mixed:
Provision
Radix
Size
automatic
subroutine
su brou tine
none.
decimal
decimal
decimal
1 to N char.
1 to N char.
1 to N char.
binary
1 to N char.
none.
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
1
1
1
1
to
to
to
to
N
N
N
N
char.
char.
char.
char.
CoUating sequence:
Only numeric data is regarded as having a collating
sequence, which is 0 through 9. Letters and
special characters are regarded as "patterns"
which, when compared, can only be found "identical" or "not identical. "
Where there is a direct relationship between the
binary magnitudes of the codes assigned to the
. 215 Code translation:
Provision
automatic
automatic*
automatic*
various alphabetic characters (as in 80-column
card systems), then a routine can be written which
effectively provides alphanumeric comparisons.
Where such a direct relationship does not exist (as
in the 90-column systems), then such a routine will
not work.
Between
internal XS-3
code
XS-3 code
any 6-bit
code
And
Size
80-column card
code
90-column card
code
any 6-bit
code
1 to SO
columns.
1 to N
characters.
1 to N
characters.
* With optional equipment.
.216 Radix conversion: . . . . none.
Provision
.217 Edit format Alter size:
Suppress zero:
Round off:
Insert point:
Insert spaces:
Insert CDGRT. ,
$*-+
Float $:
Protection:
.218 Table look-up:.
.22
automatic
automatic
none.
automatic
automatic
. 231 Basic instruction
structure: . . . . .
Size
1 to N
characters.
automatic
none.
automatic
. subroutine.
Special Cases of Operands
.221 Negative numbers 80-column systems: . zone bit in least significant
digit.
90-column systems: . zero bit in least significant
digit.
.222 Zero: . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 forms: ""0 and -0.
. 223 Operand size determination: . . . . . . . . location of least and most
significant digits is specified in each operand
address.
.23
. plugboard wiring defines
process to be performed
and 2 operands. The operands are chosen at execution time. and the choice
may be conditional upon
the setting of various
switches.
.232 Instruction layout: ... wired in "steps" on plugboard; each step contains
the following hubs:
Instruction Formats (See Description, Paragraph
. 12. for complete description)
o
Process
Z
Z
Operand 1
o
Step Sequence Change
Operand 2
. 233 Instruction parts
Name
Process: . . . . . . .
Operands 1 and 2:.
Step Sequence
Change: . . .
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
Purpose
· operation to be performed.
· most significant location
and least significant location of each data field to
be operated upon.
· used to initiate changes in
program sequence.
S/64
UNIVAC 1004
770:051.234
§
051.
. 234 Basic addrcss structure: . . . . . . . . . . . 2-address steps; operands
are addressed by row and
column numbers of their
most significant and least
significant locations (e. g. ,
R1C2-R1C9 indicates field
begins at row 1, column 2
and ends at row 1, column
9).
.235 Literals: . . . . . . .
. one character, for comparisons and tests only.
. 236 Directly addressed
operands: . . . . . .
1 to 961 characters, in corc
storage .
. 237 Address indexing: ..•. none.
.238 Indirect addressing: . none .
. none.
. 239 Stepping:... . . • .
. 24
.3
SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES
. 31
Instruction Sequencing: sequencing is either:
(1) indicated by plugboard
wiring; or
(2) implied (i. e. , next
higher numbered step)
if not wireo.
.32
Look-Ahead:
· none.
.33
Interru2tion:
• none •
. 34
Multi-running: ..
· none .
. 35
Multi-sequencing: .
· none.
.4
PROCESSOR SPEEDS
.41
Instruction Times in Microseconds
Special Processor
Storage: . . . . . . . . . none.
.411 Fixed point Add-subtract:
Multiply:
Divide:
.413 Additional allowance
for unlike signs:
.414 ControlCompare:
Branch:
. 415 Counter control:
• 416 Edit:
.42
D
C
operand length in decimal digits.
operand length in characters.
1004 I
1004 II and III
32 + 16D
Subroutine
Subroutine
26 + 13D
Subroutine.
Subroutine.
16D
13D
40 + 16C
32.5+ 13C
no additional
no additional
time
time .
none
none .
32 + 16E + 16S 26 + 13E + 13S
where E
number of characters
in edited field;
S
number of fields with
specialized treatment
(zero-suppress,
superimpose, etc.)
Processor Pcrformancc in Microseconds
.421 For random addresses
c ~ a + b:
b = a + b:
Sum N items:
c = ab:
c = alb:
.422 For arrays of data:
.423 Branch based on
comparison:
1004 I
1004 II
64 + 32D
:l2 + 16D
(32 -I 16D)N
2,000 to 8 ,000*
3,000 to 16 ,000*
**
52 + 26D
26 + 13D
(26 + 13D)N
1,800 to 6,500*
2,700 to 14,000*
**
**
**
* These multiplication and division times are
based on 4- to 8-digit operands and will vary
depending upon data values, choice of subroutines,
etc.
** No performance times are listed for items
.422 and. 423 because the standard methods
for computing these times are not suitable
for the plugboard-programmed 1004.
8/64
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
nO:OS1.424
r;J
051 .
. 424 SwitchingUnchecked:
Checked:
List search
(N items):
.425 Format control, per
character Unpack:
Compose:
.426 Table look up, per
comparison For a match:
For least or
greatest:
For interpolation
point:
.428 Moving:
.5
no additional
time
no additional
time
no additional
time.
no additional
time.
120N
97.5N
17.6
20.3
14.3
16.4
120
97.5
176
136.5
120
32 + 16C
97.5
26 + 13C
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Error
Check or
Interlock
Action
Overflow:
check
set programtestable switch.
Underflow:
Zero divisor:
none.
software
check
none.
check
none.
check
none.
none.
Invalid data:
Missing operation:
Arithmetic error:
Invalid address:
Receipt of data:
Dispatch of data:
as programmed.
processor stalls.
processor stalls.
© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
8/64
770:061.100
UNIVAC 1004
Console
CONSOLE
§
061.
. 12
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: .•
. 12
Description
Description (Contd. )
the Display Panel to isolate the particular points of
immediate interest to whoever is operating the
system - be it operator, programmer, or
engineer - allows operations to be conducted in a
simple and efficient manner •
.• Display Panel.
Control Panel.
Test Switch Panel.
Display Panel
The UNIVAC 1004 does not have a separate console.
A Control Panel and a Display Panel are mounted in
open view on the main frame, while a Test Switch
Panel is covered during normal running. There is
no provision for an operator's seat or for working
space; the system is normally controlled by a standing operator. See page 770:001. 002 for an illustration of the UNIVAC 1004 Card Processor showing
its console control facilities.
The Control Panel handles initialization and similar
actions; the Test Switch Panel sets up the conditions
under which the system will operate (continuous
running or step-by-step, etc.); and the Display Panel
monitors the existing conditions during operation.
Further details of these three panels are presented
below.
Operator communication with the 1004 system is
more restricted than in most internally-programmed
computer systems; however, it is adequate for the
types of operation handled by the system. Use of
The Display Panel is located on the upper front of
the Processor at the extreme right. This panel
contains some 280 indicator lights to portray different phases of the Processor's operation. The
design of the Display Panel is unusual and provides
a programmer with most of the necessary program
checkout facilities.
The internal panel housing the indicators contains
36 rows of eight indicators per row. The Display
Panel cover contains four horizontal slots in which
four rows of eight indications are visible at anyone
time. The remaining 32 rows of indicators are
masked by this cover and are not visible. The set
of indicators displayed at anyone time is termed a
"Display Mask." The inner panel housing the indicators is positioned vertically by means of a Imurled
wheel at the left of the panel; Each display mask is
lettered appropriately for simple reading. The
functions of the nine Display Masks are listed in
Table I.
TABLE I: FUNCTIONS OF THE DISPLAY MASKS
Mask No.
Display Items
Display Usage
1
displays' bit or character generation.
program analysis.
2
decoding chart for storage locations of
operands.
program analysis.
3
displays contents of the Data Register and
control conditions during Arithmetic or
Transfer steps.
program analysis.
4
indicates reason for Processor stoppage
during continuous operation, and displays
I/O operations.
normal operation monitoring.
indicate step just completed when the STOP
indicator is lit during continuous operation.
program analysis.
7
indicates processes, transfers, and test
results.
program analySiS.
8
indicates the six Processor cycles and
Program Select Power.
program analySiS.
9
indicates present comparator results.
program analysis.
5 and 6
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
8/64
770:061.120
.12
§ 061.
. 12
UNIVAC 1004
Description (Contd. )
Description (Contd. )
Test Switch Panel
Control Panel
The Control Panel consists of three sections. Control Panels 1 and 2 are located on the left portion
of the Processor on either side of the printing
section. They contain controls to turn the power
on and off and to adjust the printer. The third
section of the Control Panel is the Central Control
Panel. This is located to the right of Control
Panel 2 and provides switches for altering, clearing, starting, and stopping a program and for manual card feeding.
8/64
The Test Switch Panel is a covered section of the
console, located below the Central Contr?l Panel.
By means of the switches on this panel:
•
Program Select Control can be set.
•
The Step Counter can be adjusted to start at,
stop at, or repeat a particular step.
•
The contents of a location in core storage can be
read.
•
A character or bit pattern can be written into a
core storage location.
•
One or more cards can be fed arbitrarily.
770:071.100
UNIVAC 1004
In put-Output
Card Readers
INPUT-OUTPUT: CARD READERS
§
071.
. 12
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
Description
.••. UNIVAC 1004 I Card
Reader.
UNIVAC 1004 II/III Card
Reader.
Model 0704 Auxiliary Card
Reader.
A card reader which can read either SO-column or
90-column cards is included as an integral part of
each 1004 processor. The reader operates at a .
peak speed of 400 cards per minute in 1004 I systems and 615 cards per minute in 1004 II and III
systems. There is only one stacker on the reader,
so it is not possible to sort cards as part of the input process.
In systems using SO-column cards, it is possible to
mix standard card punching with binary punching,
thus allowing a larger amount of data to be held on
a single card. Plugboard control can be used to
switch the type of translation as required, on a
column-by-column basis.
In a Model 07 processor, both SO-column and 90column translation logic is available, and SO-column
and 90-column cards can be read by the same reader
and intermixed if desired.
A second, optional reader is available, which is
functionally identical to the standard reader in the
1004 I processor except that it has three output
stackers so that limited sorting operations can be
performed on a card file during processing. The
optional reader also has a wait station after the
reading station to allow time for program selection
of the stackers.
All the readers are photoelectric and read a column
at a time. Error checking of the actual read operation is not provided; instead, UNIVAC relies on
checking that each of the photoelectric cells is operational before each card is read. The use of a wait
station before the actual read station is said to minimize problems related to card positioning, card size
variation, and card friction.
Description
Card reading can be overlapped with printing and
card punching, but not with processing. When full
cards are being read, the maximum speed of the
1004 I and 1004 II/m readers is 365 and 615 cards
per minute, respectively. This reading speed can
be maintained only if the amount of processing per
card is comparatively small - under five milliseconds. The card reading speed is proportionately
reduced as the amount of processing per card increases. However, the time available for processing at a specific speed can be increased when only
the first portion of the card image is needed. Card
reading is done on a column~by-column basis and
can be stopped at any particular position; but, once
it has been stopped, reading cannot be restarted on
the same card. The speed achieved is related to
the number of columns read. Details of this mode,
and other factors which differ among the eight different readers available for the 1004 system, are
presented in Table I.
Fixed input areas in the core store are used for
card read operations. The actual position of these
areas depends on the reader models involved. In
the case of SO-column readers, the size of the area
differs depending upon whether the cards are being
used normally (one character per column, which is
automatically translated into the internal 6-bit code
during the read operation) or whether column binary
cards are being read. Column binary cards use the
12 punch positions in each card column to hold two
6-bit characters. These are read into the core
memory untranslated, so a single card fills up to
160 character positions.
The operator uses Display Mask 4 during normal
running. This provides him with a display indication when the card reader requires attention loading, unloading, clearing card jams, etc. The
frequency of such attention depends on the operational speed, as well as on the size and number of
the hoppers. All the input hoppers can hold 1,000
cards, and the Auxiliary Card Reader has 3 output
hoppers which will handle 1,500 cards each. Selection of the output hoppers is accomplished by programming. Under full reading speed conditions,
some attention by the operator will be needed at
least 3 times every 5 minutes.
Optional Features
Card reading can also be handled by the Card Read/
Punch units which are described in the next section
of this report (770:072. 100).
A major advantage of having two card readers online with a 1004 system is that this enables two
separate card files to be processed together without
any need for collation or decollation of the cards.
Typically, a master inventory file and a daily transaction file could be processed together to produce
the necessary documentation from the printer.
Short Card Feeding: Allows the reader to feed and
read stub cards (51-column or 66-column cards in
the SO-column mode, 29-column cards in the 90column mode). The device consists of two inserts
for the input magazine and a filler for the card
stacker.
SO/90-Column Read: Permits both SO-column and
90-column cards to be read by the same reader. A
62-step (Model C) processor is a prerequisite.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
S/64
UNIVAC 1004
770:071.120
§
071.
TABLE I: DETAILS OF THE CARD READERS FOR UNIVAC 1004 SYSTEMS
Maximum Speed,
cards/min.
Speed Decrease
Processing Time
per msec of
Available at Max.
Speed, msec
Added Processing
Add'l. Processing
Time per Colu:mn
Not Read, msec
1004
Model
Reader
Model
I
Std.
400
(365 when full
cards are read)
none
2 cards/min.
1.4
2.5
II or III
Std.
615
5.5
3 cards/min.
0.8
1.4
I, II,
or III
0704
Aux.
Reader
400
(365 when full
cards are read)
none
2 cards/min.
1.4
2.5
80-column
90-column*
* A "column" here consists of the upper and lower character positions in one column of a 90-column
card; e. g., character positions 1 and 46 are in the first card column, positions 2 and 47 are in the
second column, etc. It should be noted that a "90-column" card actually contains only 45 vertical
columns, each of which normally holds two characters.
S/64
770:072.100
UNIVAC 1004
Input-Output
Card Punches
INPUT-OUTPUT: CARD PUNCHES
§
072.
. 12
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity:
. 12
Description
... Card Punch, Models 2009
and 2011.
Read/Punch Units, Models
2009, 2011.
No card punch is included as an integral part
of the 1004 processor, although the standard
card reader and printer are physically incorporated into the processor cabinet. An optional
punch unit operates at a maximum speed of 200
cards per minute. It is available either as a
simple punch or as a read/punch unit produced
by incorporating a read station in front of the
punch station.
Description (Contd.)
depends upon the punch models involved and, in
the case of SO-column cards, on whether column
binary punching is being done. Column binary
cards use the 12 punch positions in each column
to hold two 6-bit characters, thus doubling the
potential data capacity of the card.
The operator uses Display Mask 4 during normal
running. This provides him with a display indication when the equipment requires attention - card
loading or unloading, forced stalls, or other contingencies. The frequency with which such attention will be needed depends on the operational
speeds as well as the 1, OOO-card capacity of the
input hopper and the 1, OOO-card capacity of the
main output stacker. Under full speed operation,
some attention will have to be given at least 2 times
every 5 minutes.
There are two output stackers on the card punch
units - a normal stacker and an error stacker
for cards where some punch malfunction has
been detected. In the basic unit the program
cannot deflect a card into the second (error)
stacker, but an optional modification is available
which provides this facility.
A weighted hole count check is performed after
each punch operation. This provides protection
against any single punching error, or against
compensating errors provided that they do not
occur in the same row. If an error is found, the
card is diverted into an error stacker which can
hold up to 1,000 cards. At the same time, the
processor can optionally be stalled.
In any specific system, either an SO-column or
a 90-column card punch model must be used. It
Optional Features.
is not possible to use the same unit to punch both
SO-column and 90-column cards.
•
Card Punch Selective Stacker: Allows the
program to divert a card into the second
(error) stacker.
•
Scored Card Feature: Allows scored cards
to be punched on the card ~ches.
Ii
Card Read/Punch Feature: Adds a read
station in front of the punch station. Cards
can be read only, punched only, or both read
and punched. This feature is available for
both SO-column and 90-column punches.
g
Code Image: Allows cards to be punched,
either wholly or in part, in the internal machine
code rather than the conventional card code.
This feature applies only to SO-column card
punches, and provides a theoretical maximum
data capacity of 160 characters per card.
The major advantage of having a punch within the
system is that updated card files can be maintained
automatically. A read/punch unit has the additional
advantages of being able to punch processor-generated results directly into each transaction card
or serve as a second card reader.- This allows
two separate files to be processed together without any need for collation or decollation of cards.
Card punching and/or reading, once initiated, can
be overlapped with any other input-output operation
or with processing. Punching is a row-by-row
operation, and there is no limit on the number of
holes which can be punched into a single card.
Fixed output areas are used for punching. The
actual position of these areas in core storage
,
"
"
© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
S/64
770:074.100
UNIVAC 1004
Input-Output
Paper Tape Equipment
INPUT-OUTPUT: PAPER TAPE EQUIPMENT
§
074.
.12
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
Description
. . . . . . • . . Paper Tape Reader,
Model 0902.
Paper Tape Punch,
Model F 0606.
The Model 0902 Paper Tape Reader operates at
400 characters per second, and the Model F 0606
Paper Tape Punch punches at 110 characters per
second. One reader and/or one punch can be
connected to any UNIVAC 1004 in addition to any
other peripheral equipment. Field connection of
the paper tape units is possible.
Paper tape with 5, 6, 7, or 8 tracks can be read
and punched; the different tape widths involved are
handled by a manual adjustment. Because the
basic character code of the UNIVAC 1004 has six
bits, special arrangements are needed for 7- or
8-tracktape. This is handled in one of two ways,
depending on whether or not there are more than
six data bits in the paper tape character:
•
If there are more than six data bits, each
character is split into two portions; one
consisting of six hits, and the other consisting of the remaining one or two bits.
These are stored in contiguous character
positions in the core storage, two UNIVAC
1004 character positions being allocated for
each paper tape character.
•
If there are only six data hits, the additional
bits are stripped off during input or generated
during output, and the six data· bits are stored
in a single core position.
The second situation occurs when, as in most
current paper tape codes, the additional tracks
are used for such purposes as parity checks and
control functions (e.g., for an "end-of-line"
indication). Odd parity can be checked by the
hardware during input and generated during output.
Even parity checking and generation is available by
Description (Contd.)
special request. The presence of a control character can be used to generate a pulse from the
appropriate plugboard hub during input, and can
be similarly created by such a pulse during output.
The position of the various tracks on the paper
tape (data tracks 1 through 6, the parity track,
the control track, etc.) is important, because,
while they can be rearranged to suit the installation, this rearrangement is fixed before
the installation takes place, and cannot be varied
to suit a particular program or a particular tape
source. These track positions are rearranged
before the data enters or leaves the computer.
This facility provides flexibility in dealing with
certain paper tape codes which might otherwise
require more complex internal processing.
Special translation routines exist for the Flexowriter paper tape code and a version of the
ASCII code.
Data blocks of up to 960 internal characters (480
tape characters if two internal characters are
being used to store one tape,character) can be
handled in a single paper tape input or output instruction. Reading can overlap printing, but not
card reading (some of the circuits are shared)
or processing. Paper tape punching can overlap
printing or processing, but not card punching. A
photoelectric system is used for, the reading
operation, while punching is handled by a conventional die punch system. Chadless tape (where
the holes are not fully punched) is not acceptable
to this equipment. In both the reader and the
punch, the operation is character-by-character,
and the equipment is able to stop between characters.
The F 0606 Paper Tape Punch is the familiar
Teletype BRPE unit. Physically, the paper tape
equipment is of small size and is mounted on the
main frame of the 1004. The reader is mounted
on the side of the punched card reader, and the
punch on the side of the printer or card punch.
© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
8/64
770:081.100
UNIVAC 1004
Input-Output
Printer
INPUT-OUTPUT: PRINTERS
§
OS1.
.12
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: . . . . . . . . . . UNIVAC 1004 I Printer.
UNIVAC 1004 111m Printer.
. 12
Description
A printer is included as an integral part of each
1004 processor. Its rated speed is 300 lines per
minute in the 1004 I and 600 lines per minute in
the later 1004 II and III systems. Field conversion
of the original printers so that they work at the
faster rate is possible, and is part of the general
conversion of 1004 I systems to 1004 II or III systems.
The print line consists of 132 positions at 1/10thinch horizontal spacing and either 1/6th- or l/Sthinch vertical spacing, at the operator's option.
Sixty-three printable characters are available on
the standard print drum, and the operational speeds
quoted above assume that all these are in use. If
fewer than 63 different characters are used, the
asynchronous operation of the printer permits increased speeds, as shown in the accompanying
graphs.
Skipping speeds for all printers is 20 inches per
second, and the paper forms may be from 4 inches
to 22 inches wide. Format control is provided by
a three-column paper tape loop.
Description (Contd.)
The same printer model is used in both SO-column
and 90-column 1004 systems. The different codes
used in these systems for the various printable
characters are' interpreted appropriately under control of the plugboard hub which indicates which code
is being used in the processor .
Printing can be overlapped with card reading or
card punching, but not with processing. Paper
movement, which takes place after the printing has
been completed, is handled as an off-line operation
and can be overlapped with computation.
The characters are stored on the print drum in the
order A through Z, followed by 0 through 9, and
then the characters _ * . I , $ + ( , ) = ;
!
?J6" ,l@%#andJj.
>:([
A fixed output area in core storage is used to hold
the data to be printed.
No error checks are made on the accuracy of the
actual printing.
Only one printer can be connected to a single
UNIVAC 1004 system.
The printer delivery and availability is the same as
that of the 1004 system itself; i. e., first deliveries
of the original 1004 I in January 1963, the 1004 II in
June 1964, and the 1004 m in July 1964. Availability is between 60 and ISO days, depending on the
processor model.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
S/64
.nO:081.l20
§
UNIVAC 1004
081.
EFFECTIVE SPEED: 1004 I PRINTER
1,000
900
800
700
600
500
I',
400
Effective Speed:
Printed Lines
Per Minute
"-
300
"
~
~
. - ...
r---......
200
........ .....
------ ..............
..
--- --
100
o
1
2
3
4
5
Inter-Line Pitch in Inches
- - - - - - Using 63 print characters
_ _ _ _ Using 47 print characters
EFFECTIVE SPEED: 1004 IT/ill PRINTER
1,000
900
800
I
i
:
700
600
I'~
500
Effective Speed:
Printed Lines
Per Minute
......
400
,
".....
~
~
~
~
300
~_a
.............
~~
.
~~
200
....... - .... r---_
~
~
100
o
1
2
3
Inter-Line Pitch in Inches
- - - - - - Using 63 print characters
8/64
-
- - Using 47 print characters
4
5
770: 091. 100
UNIVAC 1004
Input-Output
Magnetic Tape
INPUT-OUTPUT: MAGNETIC TAPE
§
091.
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: . . • . . . . . • . Uniservo and Control,
Model 0857 -00.
Uniservo (without Control),
Model 0857-02.
. 12
Description
A UNIVAC 1004 III Magnetic Tape System can have
one or two Model 0857 Uniservo magnetic tape units
with a maximum transfer rate of 33, 664 characters
per second. Any 1004 system can be field-converted
into a 1004 ill, and can subsequently accept either
magnetic tapes written by UNIVAC systems using
XS-3 coding or, with program translation, tapes
using other 6-bit coding systems such as the IBM
BCD code. Recording densities of 200, 556, or 800
characters per inch can be used and odd or even
parity is program-selectable. These Uniservo
magnetic tape units also have the same read-afterwrite error checking as IBM 729 and 7330 magnetic
tape units, so properly recorded magnetic tapes
can be interchanged between the 1004 and computer
systems of the IBM 1400 and 7000 series.
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Drive Mechanism
.211 Drive past the head: ... pinch roller friction; capstan drive .
.212 ReservoirsNumber:. . . . . .
.2.
Form: . . . . . . . . . . vacuum.
Capacity: . • . . . . . . 1 foot of tape .
. 213 Feed drive: . . . . . . . . electric motor .
.214 Take-up drive: . . . . • . electric motor.
.22
.221 Recording system: . . . erase head followed by a
magnetic write head.
.222 Sensing system: . . . . . magnetic read head.
.223 Common system: ..•. no.
.23
Multiple Copies: . . . . . none.
· 24
Arrangement of Heads
Magnetic tape r:eading or writing can be overlapped
with printing or card reading, but not with internal
processing. The relatively high speed of the tape
units, compared to the mechanical speeds of the
reader and punch unit, makes it possible to run cardto-tape and tape-to-printer data transcription
operations in parallel.
Because a maximum of two tape servos can be connected when file updating operations are in process,
it is normally not possible to avoid losing the rewind
time through tape swapping or similar means. The
rewind speed of 190 inches per second controls the
time lost through rewinds, and rewinding a 2,400foot reel takes under 3 minutes.
• 13
Availability: . . . . . • . 6 months .
. 14
First Delivery:
.. July, 1964 .
Use of station: . . . • . .
Stacks: . . . . . . • . . . .
Heads/stack: . . . . . . .
Method of use: . . . . . .
erase.
1.
7.
1 row at a time.
Use of station: . . . . . .
Stacks: . . . . . . . . . . .
Heads/stack: . . . . . . .
Method of use: . . . . . .
write.
1.
7.
1 row at a time.
Use of station: . . . . • .
Stacks: . . . • . . . . • • .
Heads/stack: . . . . . . .
Method of use: . . . . . .
read.
1.
7.
1 row at a time.
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
· 31
Form of Storage
.311 Medium: . . . • . . . . . . mylar tape.
· 312 Phenomenon: • • . . . . . magnetization.
.32
Data can be recorded in variable-length blocks
separated by a three-quarter inch interblock gap.
The input-output area in core storage can be any
length up to 961 characters. The programmed
operations for magnetic tape are Read Forward,
Write Forward, Backspace One Block, Transport
Select, and Data Ignore. The Data Ignore instruction allows tape blocks which are larger than the
core memory size to be read into the UNIVAC 1004.
This is done by reading part of the block, coasting
over the rest of the block, backspacing, coasting
over the first portion of the block and reading the
second portion, etc.
Sensing and Recording Systems
Positional Arrangement
.321 Serial by: . . . . . . . . . 1 to 961 rows, at 200, 556,
or 800 rows/inch.
.322 Parallel by: . . . . . . . . 7 tracks.
.324 Track use Data: . . . . . . . . . . . 6.
Redundancy check: .. l.
Timing: . . . . . . . . . o.
Control signals: . . . . o.
Unused: . . . . . . . . . o.
Total: . . . . . . . . . . . 7.
.325 Row use Data: • . . . . . . • . . . all.
Redundancy check: . . 1 per block.
Timing: .•..•••.. o.
Control signals: . . . . o.
Unused: . . . . . . . • . o.
Interblock gap: • . . . . 0.75 inch.
© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
8/64
770:091.330
§
UNIVAC 1004
. 52
091.
.33
Coding: . . . . . . . . . . . any 6-bit data code; UNIVAC
XS-3 or IBM BCD codes
are most commonly used.
. 34
Format Compatibility
Other device or system Code translation
Other UNIVAC systems using Uniservo
ill C, IV C, or VI C
tape units: . . . . . . . . no translation required.
IBM or "IBM-compatible" systems: ... program translated, with
optional special translate
feature.
.35
.521 Input: . . . . . . . . . . . . read forward 1 block (with
select or data ignore).
. 522 Output: . . . . . • . . . . • write forward 1 block.
. 523 Stepping: . . . . . . . . . . backspace one block .
. 524 Skipping:. . . . . . . . . . none .
. 525 Marking: . . . . . . . . . . none .
. 526 Searching: . . . . . . . . . none.
.53
Code Translation: . . . . matched codes or programmed translation.
.54
Format Control': . . . . . none.
. 55
Control Operations
Physical Dimensions
Disable: . . . . . . . . . .
Request interrupt: ...
Select format: . . . . . .
Select code: . . . . . . . .
Rewind: . . . . . . . . . .
Unload: . . . . . . . . . . .
. 351 Overall width: . . . . . . 0.5 inch.
. 352 Length: . . . . . . • . . . . 2,400 feet per reel.
.4
CONTROLLER
. 41
Identity: . . . . . . . • . . controller is part of first
Uniservo (Model 857 -00)
attached to 1004 ill
Processor.
. 42
. 56
no.
at end of tape only .
no .
no.
yes .
no .
Testable Conditions
Disabled: . . . . . . . . .
Busy device: . . . . . . .
Output lock: . . . . . . . .
Nearly exhausted: . . . .
Busy controller: . . . . .
End of medium marks: .
Connection to System
. 421 On-line: . . . . . . . . . . 1 controller per 1004 III.
. 422 Off-line: . . • . . . • . . • none.
· 43
Input-Output Operation's
no.
no .
no.
no .
no .
yes.
Connection to Device
.431 Devices per controller: . . . . . . . .
lor 2 .
. 432 Restrictions: .. . . . . . one tape drive is included
with controller; one additional drive may be
attached.
.6
PERFORMANCE
.61
Conditions: . . . . . . . . performance varies with
recording density, as
indicated below.
· 44
.62
Speeds
Data Transfer Control
.441 Size of load: . . . . . . .
• 442 Input-output areas: ...
. 443 Input-output area
access: . . . . . • . . . .
· 444 Input-output area
lockout: . • . • • . . . .
· 445 Table control: ..
. 446 Synchronization:.
1 to 961 characters.
core storage.
each character.
none; but processor is interlocked during tape reading
or writing.
. . none .
. • automatic.
.5
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
.51
Blocks
.511 Size of block: . . . . . . . 1 to 961 characters.
· 512 Block demarcation Input: . . . . • . . . . . . interblock gap.
Output: . . . • . • . . . . least-significant and mostsignificant addresses are
wired on plugboard.
8/64
.621 Nominal or peak speed 200 Char/inch: . . . • . 8,416 char/sec .
556 char/inch: . . . . . 23,396 char/sec .
800 char/inch: . . . . . 33,664 char/sec.
.622 Important parameters Tape speed: . . . . . . . 42.08 inches/sec.
Rewind speed: . . . . . 190 inches/sec.
Density: . . . . . . . . . 200, 556, or 800 char/inch.
Read start: . . . . • . . 9. 5 msec .
Read stop: . • . . . . . . 10.5 msec .
Write start: . . . . . • . 8.2 msec .
Write stop: . . . . . . . 9. 0 msec.
Read start after backspace: . . . . . . . . . 12.0 msec.
Backspace start after
read: . . . . . . . . . . 12.0 msec.
Backspace start after
write: . . . . . . . . . . 7.2 msec.
Backspace stop: . . . . 10.5 msec.
Write check: . . . . . . 7. 0 msec.
Transport select: ... 6. 0 msec.
770:091.620
INPUT OUTPUT: MAGNETIC TAPE
§
091.
· 62
Speeds (Contd.)
· 623 OverheadRead: . . . . .
Write: . . . .
. . . . 20.0 msec/block
. . . . 17.2 msec/block
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
Loading and Unloading
· 731 Volumes handled: . . . . 2,400 feet per reel.
.732 Replenishment time: .. 0.5 to 1. 0 minute; tape unit
needs to be stopped.
· 734 Optimum reloading
period: . . . . . . . .
11.4 minutes.
.8
.624 Effective speeds, in char/sec.
At 200 char/inch Reading: . . . . . . . . 8, 416N/(N + 168)
Writing: . . . . . . . . 8, 416N/(N + 145)
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Error
Recording:
At 556 char/inch Reading: . . . . . . . . 23, 396N/(N + 468)
Writing: . . . . . . . . 23, 396N/(N + 402)
Reading:
At 800 char/inch Reading: . . . . . . . . 33, 664N/(N + 673)
Writing: . . . . . . . . 33, 664N/(N + 579)
Input area
overflow:
Output block
size:
Invalid code:
N = number of characters per block.
See also Graph 770:091.900.
· 63
.7
· 73
Demands on System: .. processor is interlocked
except during stop or
transport select times and
during rewind operations.
Exhausted
medium:
Imperfect
medium:
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
Check or
Interlock
read-afterwrite parity
check
row and track
parity
check
pulse to plugboard.
pulse to plugboard.
pulse to plugboard.
not possible.
all codes are
valid.
check
pulse to plugboard.
read-afterwrite parity
check
data not recorded on
bad spot
8/64
UNIVAC 1004
770:091.900
!l 091.
EFFECTIVE SPEED: MODEL 857 UNISERVO
10,UOO,000
7
4
2
1,000,000
7
4
2
100,000
7
Characters
per Second
4
(ncb
2
~~
10,000
7
~~
~
~
2
I~
1,000
~
~
~
(ncb
550 cbar 1-
I
200 char/inch
//
//
4
.., "'"
V
I..., e~
V
,
7
4
~
"
2
100
2
10
4
7
2
4
7
100
Characters per Block
8/64
2
1,000
4
7
10,000
770: 101.100
UNIVAC 1004
Input-Output
Data line Terminals
INPUT-OUTPUT: DATA LINE TERMINALS
.12
!3 101.
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity:
• 12
Description
••.. Data Line Terminals,
Type 1 and Type 2.
Two types of Data Line Terminals are available
for the UNIVAC 1004. Type 1 is suitable for
transmission at instantaneous rates of 300 to 350
characters per second to another UNIVAC 1004,
490, or 1107.
The Type 2 Data Line Terminal is suitable for
transmission at slightly lower instantaneous rates
(250 to 300 characters per sccond) to or from
another UNIVAC 1004 or a Digitronics Dial-OVerier Magnetic Tape Terminal. The Dial-O-'Verier translates and records the transmitted
information on magnetic tape in UNIVAC or some
other 6-bit code. The magnetic tape it creates
is suitable for operation on almost any magnetic
tape computer system, including IBM 1400 and
7000 series computers. This type of communication
link can provide fast data transmission and conversion capabilities between UNIVAC 1004 systems
and larger tape-oriented computer systems typically, the computers at a headquarters operational center.
Using either type of Data Line Terminal, the
practical rate is considerably less than the
instantaneous transmission rate. Before each
message is transmitted, it is necessary to confirm that the previous message was correctly
received. To do this, two "turn-arounds" must
be made between transmission and receiving.
Except in the case of full-duplex private wire lines,
each turn-around takes 150 milliseconds, so that
a minimum of 300 milliseconds is required between
successive messages. This reduces the effective
transmission rate to about 125 cards per minute
for a 1004 card processor. A tape processor may
be able to obtain operational speeds approaching
the instantaneous transmission speed, provided that
messages of some 500 characters per tape block
are pre-recorded on tape.
Bell System model 201A or 201B Data Sets, or
their equivalents, are required at each transmitting
and receiving location. Public telephone lines or
private voice-grade communication facilities can
be used. In an attended operation, connection is
first established by the sending operator telephoning
the receiving operator and ascertaining that the
distant equipment is ready for operation. Both
operators then switch their phones to data communication and lay the handsets aside. The receiving
operator starts his 1004, which initiates the actual
transmission of data.
The transmission follows a strict message format.
The six data bits in each character are transmitted
serially and are protected by an individual parity
Description (Contd.)
bit. A longitudinal parity check also protects the
entire messagc. If any chr.racter is found to have
wrong parity upon reception, transmission is
interrupted .
At the end of the message, the receiving computer
becomes .the transmitting computer and advises
whether or not the message was received correctly.
If not, the message will be retransmitted automatically. A count of the number 'of retransmissions
needed is kept, and if for any particular message
this number exceeds a program-provided parameter. the system halts transmission and stalls.
Display lights keep the operator informed about
repeated transmissions.
If the message is apparently received correctly,
but is not of the expected length, an indication
of this condition is sent to the plugboard. The
action to be taken is then under program control.
In thtl case of transmission to a UNIVAC 490 system, intervention by the 490 operator is not
necessary if the 490 system is operating in the
"unattended state." In this state, the presence
or absence of a "burst tone," which the 1004
operator can hear on the phone connection, will
indicate whether the transmission can be accepted
by the 490 system. In all other ways, the operation
is identical with the operator-controlled 1004-to1004 transmission.
Operation with the Digitronics Dial-O-Verter follows
the same general pattern, except that during transmission an eighth bit is transmitted with each
character. This is a synchronizing bit, used to
identify the character position on magnetic tape.
Table I summarizes the timing details for the
various types of Data Line Terminal operation.
Programming techniques used for data transmission
operations in UNIVAC 1004 systems are mainly related to two major possibilities for improved
performance. One of these is to use the
extensive editing capabilities of the computer to
reduce the amount of data that needs to be transmitted. These editing facilities are described in
the Central Processor section (770:051).
The second technique is to program the transmission
to obtain the maximum amount of overlapping operation between messages. During this period, an
interlock is necessary while checks are made to
verify that the previous transmission was in order.
This time can be used for reading cards, processing,
or initiating punching operations, depending upon
the program requi rements.
Data transmission cannot be overlapped with
processing, magnetic tape operations, card
reading, or printing. It can be overlapped with
card punching or paper tape punching.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
8/64
770: 101.120
§
UNIVAC 1004
101.
. 12
Description (Contd. )
TABLE I: CHARACTERISTICS OF DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS INVOLVING THE UNIVAC 1004
Data Line
Terminal
Type
Normal
Direct
Connections
Normal
Indirect
Connections
Transmission
Rate
(char/sec)
InterMessage
Time (msec)
Message
Protection
1
Bell 20lA, over
dialed exchange
lines
UNIVAC 1004
UNIVAC 490
UNIVAC 1107
None
286
332
Character
and Message
Parity
1
Bell 20lB, over
private halfduplex lines
UNIVAC 1004
UNIVAC 490
UNIVAC 1107
None
295
330
Character
and Message
Parity
2
Bell 201A
UNIVAC 1004
Dial-O-Verter
to most
250
340
Character
and Message
Parity
Bell 201B, over
private 2-wire
lines
UNIVAC 1004
Dial-O-Verter
to most
300
330
Character
and Message
Parity
Bell 201B, over
private 4-wire
lines
UNIVAC 1004
to most
300
40
Character
and Message
Parity
2
2
8/64
Data Set
Model
computer
systems
via magnetic tape
computer
systems
via magnetic
tape
computer
systems
via magnetic tape
770: 111.1 00
UNIVAC 1004
Simultaneous Operations
SIMUL TANEOUS OPERATIONS
13 111.
Processing in the UNIVAC 1004 can be fully overlapped by card punch, paper tape
punch, or card read/punch operations. The processor is interlocked during all other inputoutput operations, with the exception of printer spacing and magnetic tape stop and rewind times.
Punching can occur simultaneously with any other input-output functions, Reading of cards or
paper tape can be overlapped with printing. The following rules and the chart on the next page
describe the UNIVAC 1004's capabilities for simultaneous operations.
RULES
•
When processing, magnetic tape input-output, or data
transmission is in process, only the card read/punch
or the paper tape punch can proceed.
•
When processing, magnetic tape input or output, or data
transmission is not in process, a card or paper tape
reader, the printer, and a card or paper tape punch can
proceed,
•
Processing, magnetic tape input-output, and data transmission are all mutually exclusive.
•
Paper spacing on the printer and rewinding of the magnetic tape units can proceed, once initiated, without
regard to other activities of the system.
(
'-
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
8/64
UNIVAC 1004
770: 111.1 01
§
111.
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS WITH THE 1004 PROCESSOR
Start Time
Operation
Cycle Time,
msec
Time,
msec
Processor
Interlocked
Processor
Interlocked
Time,
msec
Processor
Interlo~ked
Card Reader,
365/400 cpm
165
0
-
165
yes
0
-
Card Reader,
615 cpm
93
0
-
93
yes
0
-
Auxiliary Card
Reader, 400 cpm
165
0
-
165
yes
0
-
Card Punch
200 cpm
300
40
no
240
no
20
no
Card Read/Punch,
200 cpm
300
40
no
240
no
20
no
Paper Tape Reader,
400 cps
2.5
10
yes
variable
yes
?
no
Paper Tape Punch,
110 cps
9.1
40
no
variable
no
?
no
Printer, 400 lpm
170 +
BLS
0
-
150
yes
20 +
BLS
no
Printer, 600lpm
100 +
BLS
0
-
BO
yes
20 +
BLS
no
Magnetic Tape read
-
9.5
yes
variable
yes
10.5
no
Magnetic Tape write (B, 23, or
34 KC)
-
B.2
yes
variable
yes
9.0
no
Data Line Terminal
3.3
0
-
variable
yes
0
LS = number of lines skipped between successive printed lines.
B/64
Stop Time
Data Transmission
Time,
msec
-
770: 121.100
UNIVAC 1004
Instruction List
INSTRUCTION LIST
§ 121.
There are three basic groups of machine operations for the UNIVAC 1004. Certain
allowable combinations of these operations can be executed in a single program step. The chart
below (Figure 1) shows the possible combinations. To use the chart, find the principal operation to be performed in the step in the Principal Operations column. Reading across the page,
any auxiliary operation marked with an X may be combined with the principal operation in any
one program step.
Each of the UNIVAC 1004 operations mentioned in Figure 1 is explained in detail on
the next page. Subsequent paragraphs describe some of the possible modifications, testable
conditions, etc. Figure 2 is a diagram of the complete plugboard, or "connection panel."
FIGURE 1: ALLOWABLE COMBINATIONS OF UNIVAC 1004 MACHINE OPERATIONS
AUXILIARY OPERATION
PRINCIPAL
OPERATIONS
~~-
--
.. _.
-_... _- -_.- ---_. ----- ._-- -
ADD ADD SUBT SUBT SIGN
COMP TRF
ALG ABS ALG ABS COMP
X
ADD. ALG.
--
IDS
ID
{Aa-
cending
only)
-_ ..
-
---
--- ---- - ----
DOB
CD.·
5cend.
ing
only)
a·t;
--- ---
a··
IN
X
--- - X
1-SUBT. ABS.
--- - - - .-
c-----
.
Xl
Xl
Xl
~---
------ ----
-- - -
--- - -
Xl
X2
ID
X
IDS
X
X2
X3
..
X
X
- - --_.X
X
PR
RD
X
X
X
X
_._-
EX
...
X
__
._-.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X4
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X3
X3
X4
X4
X
X
X
X
X
X
X3
X3
X4
X4
X
X
X
X
X
X
X3
X3
X4
X4
X4
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X4
X4
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X4
X4
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X2
X2
a· •
X
X2
X2
IN
X
X2
X2
X
X3
X3
X
X2
X2
X
X3
X3
Xl
Xl
X5
X5
X
X2
X2
X
X3
X3
Xl
Xl
Xl
X5
X5
X
X2
X2
X
X3
X3
X4
X4
X
Xl
Xl
Xl
X5
X5
X
X2
X2
X
X3
X3
X4
X4
X
Xl
Xl
Xl
X5
X5
X
X2
X2
X
X3
X3
X4
X4
X
X
X
Xl
Xl
Xl
Xl
X5
X5
X
X2
X2
X
X3
X3
X4
X4
X
X
X
X
Xl
Xl
Xl
Xl
X5
X5
X
X2
X2
X
X3
X3
X4
X4
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-- I - Xl
SK (1.4)
Xl
PR
Xl
RD
Xl
EX
PU (H.C)
Xl
X
X
DaB
SI
X
-
X3
0·"
SP (1.2)
PU
(H·C)
X
X
X
X
X
X
- - - - - - - - - - . "_._- _ ..- - - X
X
X
X
X
X
_.- -- ._--- - - - - - ----- -_._- - - - .----X
X
X
X
X
X
COMPo
TRF.
SK
SP
(1.2) (1·4)
SI
X
ADD. ABS.
SUBT. ALG.
SIGII COMPo
-GROUP III
INPUT.OUTPUTt
GROUP II
LOGICAL
GROUP 1
ARITHMETIC
X
X4
X4
NO PRO.
X
X
X
NOTES: A. Only one operation wltll a like Sub-number (1 through 5) can be performed on anyone step .
.B. Group 1and Group II operations can not be combined on the same step. Groups I and III, or Groups II and III are allowable combinations.
Reproduced from UNIVAC 1004 Card Processor, Publication UT 2543 REV. lA, page 67.
t
Other instructions are available for the various optional I/O devices.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
8/64
UNIVAC 1004
770:121.101
§
121.
Group III: Input-Output (Contd.)
UNIVAC 1004 OPERATIONS
•
Print (PR) - alerts printer to perform a Print
operation when an Execute order is given.
•
Read (RD) - alerts reader to perform a Read
operation when an Execute order is given.
•
Execute (EX) - causes reading and/or printing
operations previously alerted to be performed.
•
Punch Hold - punches without altering contents
of the punch storage area.
•
Punch Clear - punches and clears punch storage area to spaces.
•
Punch Test - tests whether a punching operations is in process, and, if it is, delays step
advance until punching is completed.
No Process (NO PRO) - must be wired if an
Arithmetic or Logical process is not included
as part of a step.
Group I: Arithmetic
•
Add Algebraic (ADD ALG) - adds the algebraic
values of two signed operands.
•
Add Absolute (ADD ABS) values of two operands.
•
Subtract Algebraic (SUBT ALG) - subtracts the
algebraic values of two signed operands.
•
Subtract Absolute (SUBT ABS) - subtracts the
absolute values of two operands.
•
Compare (COMP) - compares two operands in
one of three manners:
adds the absolute
(1)
Numeric - signs and magnitudes are considered, but zone bits are ignored; result is
condition greater, less, or equal.
•
(2)
Sign Compare - performed on same step as
Add or Subtract; sign is +, -, or zero.
MODIFICATIONS, TESTABLE CONDITIONS, ETC.
(3)
Alphanumeric - bit-for-bit comparison;
result is match or nonmatch.
The following plugboard hubs can be used to provide
the indicated additional processing capabilities.
•
F. O'F. (form overflow) - emits during the
time a line is being printed if, when the order to
execute that line of print was given, the carriagecontrol loop was positioned so that the overcapacity punching was sensed.
•
TEST ~ - indicates whether a zero is present
in a location tested.
•
TEST SENT - indicates whether a sentinel is
present in a location tested.
•
TEST O'FLOW - indicates whether an arithmetic overflow has occurred.
•
CHARACTER GENERA TORS - indicate characters to be inserted or superimposed.
•
BIT GENERATORS - internally generate any
specified character or special code.
•
HALT -
Group II: Logical
•
Transfer (TRF) - moves data from one core
storage location to another.
•
Zone-Delete (ZD) - transfers data, stripping
off all zone bits and minus signs.
•
Zone-Delete with Sign (ZDS) - same as ZD except sign is not removed (ascending transfers
only).
•
•
Delete Zero Balance (D~B) - transfers data except when zero-balance indicator is set. In that
case, spaces are transferred to receiving field
(descending transfers only).
Zero-Suppress with Space Fill (~- II ) - transfers data, replacing nonsignificant zeros with
spaces.
•
Zero-Suppress with Asterisk Fill (~-*) - transfers data, replacing nonsignificant zeros with
asterisks.
•
INDICATORS - four indicators which are associated with display lights on the console and
indicate the reason for halting.
•
Insert (IN) - transfers data, inserting specified
characters at specified locations.
•
T. LOC - tests a location for presence or absence of a zero or sentinel.
•
Superimpose (SI) - transfers data, superimposing bits or characters onto the contents of specified locations.
•
NO RC - suspends automatic recomplementation of a complementary result obtained during
an arithmetic step.
•
ADDRESS EMITTERS - instruct the machine to
insert characters, start or stop certain operations, determine control punching, etc.
•
BIT PRESENT EMITTERS and BIT ABSENT
EMITTERS - search a storage location to determine whether certain bits are absent or present (used in control punching in cards).
Group III: Input-Output
8/64
stops the processor.
•
Space 1-2 (SP) - advances paper form in printer
one or two lines.
•
Skip 1-4 (SK) - advances paper form in printer
to one of seven codes in the carriage-control
loop.
INSTRUCTION LIST
770:121.102
§ 121.
13
14
15
16
17
18
IS
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
U
29
o
o
0
o
Q
51
0
~
o
0
~.
o
0
53
52
, ,
0
S4
0
S5
, ,
Q
.
.
o
>. <
=
0
0
o
-
56
00--050
,
c.p
ill
0
,
0
0
,
0
a
0
0
0
0
ill
0
,
o
ill
0
0
0
0
0
0
3'
0
5
0
6
0
1
0
8
0
Q
0
0
0
0
0,00000
532
0
0
0
a
13
14
IS
16
11
]8
19
~
21
12
0
13
14
15
16
11
18
19
20
21
0
n
23
24
000000
533
535
o
, ,
,
,
0
o
o
25
o
"0
0
2829
30
o
0
0
o
0
0
0
0
0
b
t
d
II.
d
000000000000
0
0
.
537
0000000000
547
0
0
,
Q
0
0
0
.
0
0
o
0
000000'00
a
~
o
0
0
o
~
o,ur
0
0
0
0
0
0
.
0
0
0
0
"0
0
0
0
0
,
000
0
010
0
a
o
0
o
o
"
ID
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
a
0
0
0
b
~
dab
e
d
7-8 • (apas.)
12-3-8 • (poriad)
12-4-8
12-5-8
12-6-8
<
12-7-8
11-3-8
$
11-4-8
01 1101
10 1110
01 0001
11 1110
10 0000
01 0010
11 1101
00 1111
01 1110
01 1111
10 0010
100001
11-5-8
1
11-6-8 ;(.omi-eal)
11-7-8
0-2-8
0-3-8 , (comma)
0-4-8
%
(
0-5-8
0-6-8
"0-7-8
)
00
00
10
11
11
11
10
DO
11
If
•
'"
""
Blank Spaeo N.P.
0001
1110
1111
0000
0010
0001
1101
1101
1111
00 0000
Reproduced from UNIVAC 1004 Card Processor SO Column, Publication UT 2543 REV. lA, page 4.
© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
S/64
770:142.100
UNIVAC 1004
Data Code Tobie
90-Column Processor
DATA CODE TABLE NO.2
§
142 •
•1
Use of Codes: ••.••. internal and 90-column
punched card code, and
printer characters .
•2
Character Codes:
PRINTED
CHARACTERS
gO-CO LUMN
CARD CODE
A
B
C
1-5-9
1-5
0-7
0-3-5
0-3
1-7-9
0
E
F
G
H
1
J
K
L
M
5-7
3-7
3-5
1-3-5
3-5-9
0-9
0-5
7
7
7-9
9
8
9
&
(- minus)
?
/
+
/I
@
: (colon)
P
1-3-7
3-5-7
1-7
1-5-7
3-7-9
0-5-7
):!
0-3-9
0-3-7
0-7-9
----1-3-9
5-7-9
0
1
1-9
3
1
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
- -y- Z
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
3-9
5
5-9
----,--
>
• (apos.)
0~5-9
Q
0-1-3-5-7
0-3-5-7
0-1-3
0-3-7-9
3-5-7-9
1-5-7-9
0-1-5-7
0-1-3-7
1-3-7-9
I (exclam.)
N
0
1-3
90-COLUMN
CARD CODE
PRINTED
CHARACTERS
• (period)
[
<
=
$
•
t-
l
0-3-5-7-9
0-1-5-7-9
1-3-5-9
--------------0-1-3-9
0-5-7-9
0-1-5-9
--:-0-1-3-5-7-9
0-1-3-5-9
0-1
----------
; (sem ... colon)
/':,.
I
1-3-5-7
1-3-5-7-9
0-1-7
-- ----------
, (comma)
%
(
\
)
SPACE N.P.
0-1-7-9
0-3-5-9
0-1-5
0-1-9
0-1-3-7-9
0-1-3-5
BLANK
Reproduced from UNIVAC 1004 Card Processor 90 Column, Publication UT 2541 REV. 1B, page 4.
8/64
770: 151.1 00
UNIVAC 1004
PrQblem Oriented Fac;ilities
PROBLEM ORIENTED FACILITIES
13 151.
.1
. 14
.14
Report Writing (Contd.)
UTILITY ROUTINES
Description (Contd.)
UNIVAC has, in the past, made no commitments
to provide software support for the 1004 beyond
the basic multiply and divide subroutines. Many
of the advanced software facilities that are now
offered for most stored-program computers
(assemblers, compilers, sorts, operating systems,
etc.) are simply not applicable to plugboard-programmed computers like the 1004. Nevertheless,
a number of specialized programs and subroutines
developed by 1004 users and by UNIVAC branch
offices are now available for distribution. These
include a variety of listing methods, and some
sophisticated programs such as the report generator described below. A report generator is
a program which uses a description of a required
report - showing the fields to be accumulated, the
position of various subtotal and total lines, etc. to automatically create the desired program. Such
generators can be valuable time-savers where
special reports are needed in a hurry.
The report produced by the program contains
a heading, body, and totals. Provisions are made
for a one-line report title and for page headings.
In the body of the report, the list fields must be to
the left of the accumulating fields. Four editing
options are allowed for accumulating fields: no
insertions, no decimal point (insertion of commas
and sign), one decimal place (insertion of commas,
sign, and decimal point), and two decimal places,.
The accumulating fields may be added to each other
or "crossfooted", with the result being placed in
another field, usually to the right. There may be
several levels of totals, controlled by the Alternate Hold Switches. The total lines are marked
with asterisks - the lowest level with one
asterisk and an additional one for each higher
level. These totals may be either spaced an
extra space below the body of the report or printed
at the bottom of the page. In either case, the
paper can be advanced to the next page if desired .
Report Writing
By use of other Alternate Hold Switches, it is
possible either to suppress all accumulating,
fields or to print only total lines. In the 80-column
version of the program, certain fields can be deleted under card control.
General Purpose Program
Reference: . • . . . . . . Preliminary Specifications:
UNIVAC 1004 General
Purpose Program.
Date Available: . . . . . December, 1963.
. 15
Data Transcription: .. no specific routines .
. 16
File Maintenance: .. , no specific routines.
.17
Other
Description:
The General Purpose Program is available for
both 80-column and 90-column 1004 systems,
Models C (62 steps) and A (31 steps). The program
requires about 1,800 wires, and ,consists of two
phases. The first phase loads core storage with
headers and other control information and defines
what is to be done with the various quantities in the
input deck. The second phase consists of printing
the desired report from the data cards. The 80column version permits the punching of cards for
totals. Three types of fields can be indicated on
the data cards: accumulating fields (numbers to
be totaled), list fields (data to be printed directly),
and control fields (which indicate when totals are to
be computed and printed)'. Restrictions are imposed
upon the position, length, and number of these fields.
A number of standard commercial routines are
available, including methods for floating dollar
sign, check-digit verification, elimination of
report lines when only a single total is involved,
sequence checking of alphanumeric keys on 80column card machines, packing of numerical data
so that three digits can be stored in two character
positions, etc.
Since-cosine and square root routines have been
released, and a Critical Path Method routine has
been announced.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
8/64
770:201.001
UNIVAC 1004
System Performance
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§ 201.
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING (770:201.100)
These problems involve updating a master file from information in a detail file and producing a
printed record of each transaction. This application is one of the most common commercial
data processing jobs and is fully described in Section 4:200.1 of the Users' Guide. Standard
File Problems A, B, and C differ in that three different record sizes are used in the master
file. In Standard File Problem D, the amount of computation performed upon each transaction
is increased by a factor of three. Performance upon each problem is estimated for activity
factors (ratios of number of detail records to number of master .records) ranging from zero to
unity. In all cases a uniform distribution of activity is assumed.
Because the UNIVAC 1004 is programmed by means of plugboard wiring, the sequence and
grouping of instructions in the Users' Guide were modified to conform with wired program
"steps. " One notable change is that the control column test is made as the card is being read
into core storage, and is used to set a switch which is executed later in the program.
Because of the lack of a floating-dollar editing capability and the limitations of plugboard wiring,
the floating dollar sign requirement for the report file was waived, and check-protect editing
was used instead. It was also assumed that items in the detail file were zero-filled if used in
computations. The five-millisecond delay for selectors was found not to be important.
In Configurations I and I-A, the master and detail input files are on the card reader. The output files are on the card punch (updated master file) and printer (report file). For Problems
A and C in Configuration I, the 200-cpm card punch is the controlling factor on overall" processing time. For Problems B and D, the Central Processor time (which includes the time
the processor is interlocked during card reader operations) is controlling. For Configuration
I-A, the punch is the controlling factor for all Problems A, B, C, and D. (Note: It is assumed
that an off-line collator will be used to remove all inactive records from the master card file
before processing, so only the processing times at an activity factor of 1. 0 are shown for
Configurations I and I-A.)
In Configuration II, the master files are on magnetic tape, blocked three records per block
because of the limited capacity of the 1004's core storage. The detail file is assigned to the
card reader and the report file to the printer. In Problems A, B, and C, the master file tapes
and the printer (which overlaps the card reader) are the controlling factor at all activities from
zero to unity. For Problem D, the Central Processor is controlling at activities from 0.1 to
1. 0, while the tapes and printer are controlling at activities below 0.1.
The UNIVAC 1004 was deemed unsuitable for execution of our other standard measures of system performance: Sorting, Matrix Inversion, and Mathematical Processing.
© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
8/64
770:201.011
UNIVAC 1004
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
Ii 201.
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 1 (STANDARD FILE PROBLEM A)
CONFIGURA TION
ITEM
I
1
InputOutput
Times
Char/block
(File 1)
Reeords/blook
K
msee(block
File 1 / File 2
80
(File 1)
---_.-
165/300
29.7/26.9
1 - - - - - - -- - - - - - - t - - - - 165
93
93
File 4
msec/switch
210
mseo/block
mseo/record
mseo/detail
msec/work
mseo/report
F = 1. 0
140
93/0.5
-- - - - -1----- - - - - - - 1 - - -165/0.6
19.2/17.9
93
93
150
80
80
I-- - - . - - - - - 1 - - - - - - - - - 1 - - - - - - -
4.1
4.1
~---.- r-- . - - - ---.- - 1 - - - - - - - - - 1 - - - - - - 1.0
0.8
0.8
~---.- f - - - - - - 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1.1
1.1
~--.- 1 - - - - 1.4
---- - 1-------- - - - - - - - 30.8
~9_ _ _ _
I-- - - - - - - . b7 + b 8
2.4
C.P.
Punch
5.1
1--_.-
165.0
File 2 Master Out
0.0
1--------- - - - - 2.0
C.P.
2.0
C.P.
Punch
_._84.3
93.0
I - - - -r - - - I--- -
300.0
0.0
300.0
File 4 Reports
300.0
158.1
300.0
4
Standard
File
Problem A
Space
Unit of measure
**
270.4
Icharaoter~ \
Std. routines
*
.
* ---1---- - 1----_.-\---Fixed
1------
3 (Blooks 1 to 23)
---- -------
8/64
17.9
29.7
---
__
- - - I-- **
-279.0
- - ~20.0**
406.9
476.6
* ----------
*
*
*
1 - - - - - - - - -1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - 520
1--------
_ _ _848
____
Working
100
100
100
Total
620
620
948
Instructions are wired into a plugboard, so no core storage space is required.
The cyoles for the oard reader and printer are overlapped; thus only the longer time is used.
4:200.114
26.9
* - - -1 - - - - - - I---'-- - - - . -'- 1 - - - - - -1 - - 6 (Blooks
24 to
48)
---'-.
. --'*
*
Files
- - - - 1 - - -520
----- -
*
**
19:2
1-----
1 - - - - - - . - 1 - - - - 1 - - - 1 - - -1 - - - File 3 Details
82.5
46.5
1--._--1--- 1--1--;* - 1 - - -
Total
I/O
4.1
14.1
---
4:200.1132
25.0
- - _ . - 1 - - - - r - - - - -.---1 - - -_.- ~~ f - - - 2.4 \ - - -
17.3
File 1 Master In
25.0
4.1
1--~---a2 K
1 - - - - _ . - I-.~
a3 K
4:200.112
1-------
165
5.1
3
usee/blook
for C.P.
and
dominant
oolumn.
140
~1/File2
File 4
standard
File
Problem A
93/300
o .
~l/File~ 1- _ _ _0_._ _ _ _ _ _ 0_ _ _. -1 - - --File 3
0
0
0
1--'----- 1 - - - - - -- - - - - t - - - - File 4
0
0
0
~3--.--
Central
Processor
Times
3
0.5
File 3
- - - 1 - - - - - - - - - - - -1 - - - - - -
msec penalty
2
324·
80
0.5
REFERENCE
m
I-A
4:200.li51
770:201.100
UNIVAC 1004
System Performance
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§ 201.
.1
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING
. 11
Standard File Problem A
.111 Record sizes
Master file: . • . . . .
Detail file: . . . . . . .
Report file: . • . . . .
. 112 Computation: •.•..•.
108 characters.
1 card.
1 line .
standard, with modifications
as described on Page
770:201. 001.
. 113 Timing basis: • . . . . . using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.113 •
.114 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . .see graph below .
. 115 Storage space required
Configuration I: . . . . 620 characters. *
Configuration I-A: .• 620 characters. *
Configuration II: ..•• 948 characters. *
*Program steps are wired into a plugboard, so no core
storage space is required.
4
2
I, I-A
100.0
7
4
2
~
10.0
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
----
-
...,
7
JI'
4
./
/
2
1.0
7
4
2
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
8/64
770:201.120
§
UNIVAC 1004
• 122 Computation:
201.
770:201. 001.
.123 Timing basis: • . . . . . using estimating procedure
Standard File Problem B
• 12
• . . . . . standard, with modifications
as described on Page
outlined in Users' Guide,
.121 Record sizes
4:200.12 •
• 124 Graph: ... . . . . . . . . see graph below.
Master file:· . . . . . . 54 characters.
Detail file: . . . . . . . 1 card.
Report file: .••.... 1 line.
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
7
I\~
I-A
4
-----~
2
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
10.0
~
7
./
4
2
/
/
II'"
1.0
7
4
2
0.1
0.0
0.1
1.0
0.33
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
8/64
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
770:20l.130
.132 Computation: . • . • . . . standard, with modifications
as described on Page
770:201. 001.
.133 Timing basis: • . . . . . using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.13.
.134 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . . see graph bclow.
§ 201.
.13
Standard File Problem C
.131 Record sizes
Master file: •.••.. 216 characters.
Detail file: •.•...• 1 card.
Report file: .•.•.•. 1 line.
1,000.0
7
4
I, I-A
2
100.0
7
4
II
2
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
~
10.0
~
~
7
4
2
1.0
7
4
2
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations. )
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
8/64
UNIVAC 1004,
770:201.140
§
201.
. 14
• 142 Computation: .•..•.. trebled.
.143 Timing basis: . . • . . . using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.14 .
• 144 Graph: . . . . . . • . . . . see graph below •
Standard File Problem D
. 141 Record sizes
Master file: .•.•.• lOS characters.
Detail file: •..•.•• 1 card.
Report file: • . . . . . . 1 line.
1,000.0
7
4
2
I, I-A
100.0
7
4
2
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
10.0
,
7
4
.-.-
-~
~-
/'
V
2
1.0
7
4
2
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
S/64
770:211.101
UNIVAC 1004
Physical Characteristics
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
§ 211.
Width,
inches
Depth,
inches
1004 I Processor*
1004ll Processor*
1004 ill Processor*
71
71
71
63
63
63
55
55
55
Auxiliary Card Reader
Card Punch
Card Read/Punch
31
42
42
24
25
25
-
Unit
Paper Tape Reader+
Paper Tape Punch t
Uniservo, Model 857-00
Uniservo, Model 857-02
Data Line Terminal, Type 1 t
Data Line Terminal, Type 2t
Power
KVA
BTU
per hr.
2,021
2,021
2,021
3.0
3.0
3.0
8,500
8,.500
8,500
42
49
49
415
870
870
0.3
1.5
1.5
683
3,500
3,500
-
-
-
-
-
-
27
52
32
32
72.5
72.5
470
920
1.0
1.4
4,700
5,220
-
-
-
-
Height,
inches
-
Weight,
pounds
-
-
-
-
-
-
General Requirements
Operating temperature: • • . . . • . . . . . . . • . . . . . . 50 to 90 of.
Relative humidity: . . . . . . . . • . • . . . • . . . . . . . . 20 to 85%.
Power: • . . . . . • . . . • . . . • • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208-230 volt, 60-cycle,
I-phase, 3-wire AC.
* Standard card reader and printer are housed in Processor cabinet and included
thes e figures.
~n
t These units are mounted inside or outside the Processor, and are included in
the measurements of the Processor.
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
8/64
· tit.
770:221.100
UNIVAC 1004
Price Data
PRICE DATA
PRICE DATA
§ 221.
PRICES
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
No.
Name
Monthly
Rental
Monthly
Maintenance
Purchase
$
$
$
Card Processor (includes 300 cpm
Reader and 300 lpm Printer)S fJ.sec cycle time
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
1004 1-01
10041-02
10041-03
10041-04
10041-05
10041-06
10041-07
Model A - 90-column
Model A - SO-column
Model B - 90-column
Model B - SO-column
Model C - 90-column
Model C - SO-column
SO/90 column
1,150
1,150
1,400
1,400
1,500
1,500
1,650
205.00
205.00
225.00
225.00
235.00
235.00
250.00
46,000
46,000
56,000
56,000
60,000
60,000
66,000
1,275
1,275
1,525
1,525
1,625
1,625
1,775
270.S3
270.S3
290.S3
290.S3
300.S3
300.S3
315. S3
51,000
51,000
61,000
61,000
65,000
65,000
71,000
1,275
1,275
1,525
1,525
1,625
1,625
1,775
270.S3
270.S3
290.S3
290.S3
300.S3
300.S3
315. S3
51,000
51,000
61,000
61,000
65,000
65,000
71,000
40
10.00
1,000
40
10.00
1,000
25
5.00
1,000
25
3.00
1,000
Card Processor (includes 615 cpm
Reader and 600 lpm Printer)6.5 fJ.sec cycle time
1004 II-01
1004 11-02
1004 11-03
100411-04
1004 II-05
100411-06
100411-07
Model A - 90-column
Model A - SO-column
Model B - 90-column
Model B - SO-column
Model C - 90-column
Model C - SO-column
SO/90 column
Magnetic Tape Processor
(includes 615 cpm Reader and
600 lpm Printer) - 6.5 fJ.sec
cycle time
1004 III-Ol
1004 III-02
1004 III-03
1004 III-04
1004 III-05
1004111-06
1004111-07
Model A - 90-column
Model A - SO-column
Model B - 90-column
Model B - SO-column
Model C - 90-column
Model C - SO-column
SO/90 column
Optional Features
F05S6-00
\
F0621-00
F05S7-00
F05SS-00
Short Card Feeding 51-column cards in SO-column
code;
29-column cards in 90-column
code
Short Card Feeding 66-column cards in SO-column
code
Code Image Read - SO-column
processor only
Code Image Punch - SO-column
processor only
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
S/64
770:221.101
UNIVAC 1004
PRICE DATA (CoRtd.)
§ 221.
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
No.
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
F0590-00
(Contd.)
F0594-00
F0595-00
F0601-00
F0602-00
F0599-00
?
INPUTOUTPUT
Name
PRICES
Monthly
Rental
Monthly
Maintenance
Purchase
$
$
$
0Etional Features
Code Conversion
Card Processor Expansion Kit
(Model A to Model B)
Card Processor Expansion Kit
(Model B to Model C)
SO/90 Read - SO-column processor
SO/90 Read - 90-columnprocessor
Processor Form Stacker
Special Print Code Wheel
1,000
10.00
4,000
250
20.00
10,000
100
150
150
10.00
15.00
15.00
4,000
6,000
6,000
90
395
-
-
-
Punched Card EguiEment
2009-00
2011-00
2009-01
2011-01
0704-00
Card Punch - SO -column - 200 cpm
Card Punch - 90-column - 200 cpm
Card Read/Punch - 90-column 200 cpm
Card Read/Punch - 90-column 200 cpm
Auxiliary Card Reader - 400 cpm
300
300
90.00
90.00
12,000
12,000
450
140.00
1S,000
450
ISO
140.00
37.0S
1S,000
7,200
15
15
6.17
6.17
600
600
0Etional Features
I
F0619-00
F0619-01
F0591-00
F0592-00
F0620-00
F0620-01
F0619-02
F0619-03
0902-00
F0606-00
Scored Card - SO-column Punch
Scored Card - 90-column Punch
Double Punch - Blank Column
Detection Device
Selective Stacker
Card Punch Read - SO-column
Card Punch Read - 90-column
Scored Card - SO-column Read/
Punch
Scored Card - 90-columnRead/
Punch
PaEer TaEe EquiEment
Paper Tape Reader - 400 cps
Paper Tape Punch - 110 cps
-
15
5
150
150
50.00
50.00
600
200
6,000
6,000
15
15
6.17
6.17
600
600
150
250
15.00
33.33
6,000
10,000
500
300
124.5S
75.42
20,000
12,000
200
200
20.00
20.00
S,OOO
S,OOO
Magll.etic TaEe (on 1004 ill only)
OS57-00
OS57-02
First Uniservo and Control
Second Uniservo
Communications EguiJ2ment
F05S5-00
F0611-00
S/64
Data Line Terminal, Type 1
Data Line Terminal, Type 2
UNIVAC 55 80/90
MODEll
Univac
(A Division of Sperry Rand Corporation)
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
UNIVAC 55 80/90
MODEll
Univac
(A Division of Sperry Rand Corporation)
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
771 :001.001
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Model I
Contents
CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Introduction....
Data Structure • . .
System Configuration
Configuration I, Typical Card System
Configuration II, 4-Tape Business System
Configuration III, 6-Tape Business System
Configuration IV, 6-Tape Auxiliary Storage.
Internal Storage
Magnetic Drum • • • •
RANDEX Drum Storage •
Synchronizer • .
Central Processor
Central Processor •
Console
Central Processor Control Panel.
Input-Output: Punched Tape and Cards
High Speed Reader (SO-column)
High Speed Reader (90-column)
Read Punch (SO-column)
Read Punch (90-column)
Paper Tape Reader
Paper Tape Punch •
Input-Output: Printers
High Speed Printer •
Card Punching Printer
Input-Output: Magnetic Tape
Uniservo Magnetic Tape Unit
Synchronizer . . . .
Simultaneous Operations
Instruction List
Coding Specimen
X-6 . .
S-4 • . • • •
Data Codes
Internal and Printer
XS-3 • . • . . . •
Binary Card Code •
Collating Sequence .
Problem Oriented Facilities
Process Oriented Languages.
Machine Oriented Languages
X-6 • • • • • • • • • •
S-4
Program Language Translator
X-6 • . . . . • .
S-4 . . • • . • .
Operating Environment
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Revised
771:011
771:021
Revised
771:031
Revised
771:031. 101
771 :031. 102
771:031. 103
771:031.104Revised
771:041
771:043
Revised
771:043.4
771:051
Revised
771:061
771:071
771:071
Revised
Revised
771:~72
771:072
771:073
771:074
771:081
771:082
771:091
Revised
771:091. 4
771:111
Revised
771:121
771:131
771:132
771:141
771:142
771:143
771:144
771:151
771:161
771:171
771:172
Revised
771:181
771:182
771:191
Revised
5/63
UNIVAC SS 80/90 MODEL I
771 :001.002
CONTENTS (Contd.)
20.
21.
22.
771:201
Revised
771:201. 011
771:201. 1
771:201. 2
Revised
771:211
771:221
Revised
System Performance . • • • •
Worksheet Data • • . . • .
Generalized File Processing
Sorting • • • • . . •
Physical Charac~ristics
Price Data. • . . • • •
f!iJ
!
A-U-ER-BA-CH-:-j
"-1
5/63
771 :011.100
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Model I
Introduction
I NTRODUCTI ON
§Oll.
The UNIVAC Solid - State Model I was originally introduced in 1958 as a punched card
processing computer. The two main features of the Model I were its solid-state design,
which reduced installation and maintenance costs, and its fully buffered card reader, punch,
and line printer. The storage drum and the actual computation times were not in themselves
major attractions, but in combination with each other, they were well able to .\(eep up with
the input-output.
In the 5 years since the original introduction of the Model I, a number of changes
have been made. The three major changes are the introduction of:
•
Magnetic tapes.
•
Variable storage capacity drums.
CI
The Solid-State Model II with core and drum storage.
The Model II, which has very different performance characteristics, is presented in
a separate report (See Computer System Report 772:). Introduction of the two other features,
namely the tape units and the variable storage capacities of the drums, increased the applications range of the Solid-State 80/90 systems. The tapes allow large files to be used;
however, their slow speed (effectively 16,400 characters per second) and the fact that only
one tape can operate at any time place a limit on the over-all throughput of the system.
The introduction of the variable storage capacity drum also increased the number of
situations in which the Solid-State 80/90 could be used, mainly by allowing a considerable
reduction in price. This reduction came after the introduction of the mM 1401, which showed
how much work could be done with a small internal storage capacity.
The Model I has been one of the more popular computer systems marketed so far.
While the number of systems sold does not compare with the number of mM 1401 systems
sold (more than 5,000), there are more than 500 Solid-State Model I systems presently in
use. Some of these systems are now available as used systems at purchase prices which
can be negotiated. Such systems could be good buys, as the problem of maintenance for
obsolescent solid-state computers is much simpler than for the obsolescent vacuum-tube
computers.
The Model I processor handles data in words of 10 digits plus a sign bit. Each digit
has an odd parity bit associated with it. Parity is checked during all data movements to or
from storage. The central computer uses only numeric data, whereas the peripheral units
use alphameric card data. This difference is resolved by splitting each alphameric word
(10 characters) into 2 words, 1 zone and 1 numeric. The computer has three I-word arithmetic registers A, X, and L. Register A is the accumulator and forms one half of a double
length register, (combined AX), which is used for shifts and multiplication instructions.
Programming for the SS 80/90 Model is Similar to programming for the IBM 650. As
in most drum storage computers, latency problems emphasize the importance of program
complexity. The instruction form is 1 + 1, (known as one and one half address). This instruction form uses the second address to state the location from which the next instruction
is to be taken. There are 62 instructions including arithmetic (fixed point only), logical
masking instruction, comparison instructions, a right-shift and a left-shift instruction, a
zero-suppress instruction, and automatic translation instructions. These all operate on
full words. Character manipulation is performed by a combination of shifts and logical
AND and OR instructions.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Revised 4/63
UNIVAC 55 80/90 MODEL I
771:011.101
INTRODUCTION (Contd.)
§
OIl.
The Model I has three index registers, which can be used to modify the first address
in an instruction. Normally this address is the operand, but it can be a transfer-of-control
address. The second (or Next-instruction) address cannot be modified by index registers.
Data is held on the drum in 200-word "bands". There are two types of bands, with
either one or four read/write heads. The access time to a particular operand is either
from 0 to 3.4 milliseconds or 0 to 0.875 milliseconds respectively for either one or four
heads. These are much longer times than the actual instruction times themselves. (Addition only takes 0.085 millisecond.)
,/
The primary differences between the Solid-State 80 and the Solid-State 90 processors
are the code translation instructions and the buffer storage pattern arrangements. Each is
peculiar to the kind of card handled, 80- or 90-column. The buffer patterns on the drum
optimize input-output transfers to peripheral units. This optimizing involves the "interlaced"
positioning of input-output data in order to achieve greater efficiency.
UNIVAC Solid-State systems are buffered so that virtually all of the peripheral
units can operate simultaneously with computing. The exception is the input-output channels
which are used with the synchronizers. These synchronizers can control up to 10 magnetic
tape units and 10 RANDEX drum units. Only one unit connected to a synchronizer can be
read or written upon at a time. The Model I can have only one synchronizer, while the
Model II can have a second synchronizer which permits an additional 10 magnetiC tape units
to be connected to the system. In Model I systems, only simultaneous read/compute or
write/compute are possible. In Model II systems, read, write, and compute operations can
be handled simultaneously through the use of a second synchronizer.
Input/ output buffer areas are held on the drum, and when the data are transferred from
the buffer bands to the actual drum, "interlaces" are used in the main storage. In the main
storage, an 80-column card image is split into 16 words, 8 of which represent the zone
punches, and 8 of which represent the balance of the card. These 16 words are entered on
the drum in scattered locations on the same band which are called the "card interlace".
Similar interlaces exist for all input/ output units in different pos itions .
The input-output units connected to anyone system in addition to the synchronizers
can include the following:
•
600 card per minute Card Reader.
•
150 card per minute Card Read-Punch.
It
600 line·per minute Printer.
•
500 character per second Punched Tape Reader and/or 100 characters per second
Punch.
The card reader operates at 600 cards per minute and each card is read at two
separate read station.s. These readings are not compared in the reader itself, but both
images are read into storage and are compared there for accuracy. Optionally the reader
can be equipped with three stackers instead of one; and with an automatic program interrupt
system; otherwise, the program has to make constant checks during card reads as to the
current status of the reader.
The Read-Punch unit operates at 150 cards per minute and can use only a single file
of cards for reading and punching. The unit has two read stations, one which reads before
and one which reads after punching. No accuracy checking of punching occurs in the unit
itself; all checking is handled by the stored program. The punch is able to handle all standard Hollerith or 90-column code punching but cannot handle all possible binary punching
operations. Optionally, this unit can include two read stations and two output stackers.
Without this option, no check is made on the accuracy of the output cards.
~
A-U-ER-BA-CH-I-'~
r-I
4/63
Revised
~
\.
INTRODUCTION
771 :011.102
INTRODUCTION (Contd.)
§Oll.
The High Speed Printer is a 600 line per minute printer with basically the same
printing mechanism as has been used in UNIVAC printers since 1952. A constantly revolving drum holds 51 print characters, and the firing of the print hammers occurs at a fixed
time. The printed line can be 100, 110, 120, or 130 characters long. No paper loop controls
the format; all controls are effected internally. Echo checks are performed to text the
accuracy of the printing, and the printer is "disabled" if the checks fail.
The Central Processor, the drum, the card reader, the read punch and the printer
make up the basic system. Additional units which can be included are the magnetic tape
system, the RANDEX System, the Paper Tape System, and the Card-Punching Printer. The
magnetic tape system can either read or write While computing, but cannot do both. The
fixed block length (normally 1,100 characters) provides an effective speed of 16,400 characters per second. Up to 10 tape decks 'ian be connected, via a synchronizer.
The Tape Synchronizer can also control up to 10 RANDEX Units. Each unit consists
of two large drums mounted one above the other, with a single read/write head assembly
which moves on a boom between the drums. The drums revolve once each 70 milliseconds
and carry some 24 million characters. Records made up of forty-eight lO-digit words can
be accessed within 600 milliseconds, irrespective of their position on the drums.
A Paper Tape system can also be included with UNIVAC Solid-State systems. The
card-punching printer is used primarily in utility billing, in which a card must have the
accounting details punched into it and the address printed on both sides, all at the same time.
Development of software for the Model I has had a number of false starts. The Model
I was originally advertised as being designed for programming in FLOW-MATIC Source
language (the precu.rsor of COBOL); however, the plans for this never materialized. A
COBOL-60 compiler was also announced for the system, but now has been withdrawn. No
FORTRAN-type of compiler has been announced, but one is rumored to be currently under
field test.
The software situation has a positive Side, however, which is encouraging. Two
assembly systems are being used in the United States, and a number of specialized programs have been developed by UNIVAC branches and by users. These programs include
versions of the BELL Interpretive system and a numerical control system for machine tool
control.
The software provided for the systems includes service routines, mathematical
functions and routines, linear programs, and two assembly programs (X -6 and the more
recent S-4). X-6 is an elementary drum-type assembly program for Model I processors and
·S-4 is a more advanced system for both processors. Problems coded in X -6 can, with
minor revisions, be assembled using S-4. At present, no proce~s oriented languages have
been implemented for these systems.
\
."--
(
""' ..
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Revised 4/63
771 :021.100
_STANDARD
II
REPORTS
EDP
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Model I
Data Structure
DATA STRUCTURE
§ 021.
.1
.2
STORAGE LOCATIONS
Name of
Location
Size
Purpose or use
Digit:
4 bits
Word:
41 bits
Decimal digit, algebraic sign.
Instruction or 10 digits and sign.
10 characters.
Magnetic drum.
RANDEX Store.
RANDEX Store.
RANDEX Store.
RANDEX Store.
RANDEX Store.
20 digits
2 Words:
Band:
200 words
Block:
48 words
. 12 blocks
Track:
Sector:
20 tracks
Drum Half: 100 sectors
4 drum halves
Units:
© 1963
DATA FORMATS
Type of Information
Representation
Numeral:
Alphabetic: .
Instruction: .
Number: .
Interlace:
1 digit.
2 digits.
1 word.
10 digits + sign.
Refers to input-output
area of each peripheral
unit. It consists of a
number of words on a
single 200-word band
of the drum, the
arrangement and number being fixed by the
peripheral unit and
the type of data
transmission.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Revised
4/63
771 :031.101
•
STANDARD
II
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Modell
System Configuration
REPORTS
ED
P
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§
I.
031.
TYPICAL CARD SYSTEM
Deviations from standard configuration:
80% more storage.
full simultaneity included.
Card Reader 40% slower.
Printing 40% slower.
Rental. . • . . . . . . . • • • . . . . . • . . . . . . . . .
$4,325
Equipment
Rental
Processor and Console:
2,600 Word Drum.
$1,735
High Speed Card Reader:
600 cards/min.
255
Read Punch:
150 cards/min.
725
High Speed Printer:
600 lines/min.
935
Optional Features Included: . . . . . . . . • • . • • . • . . • • • • . Multiply-divide.
20 print positions.
Stacker-Select on
Reader.
Post Read Station on
Read Punch.
Stacker-Select on
Punch.
Program Interrupt
400
30
35
100
50
60
TOTAL
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
$4,325
Revised
4/63
UNIVAC SS 80/90 MODEL I
771 :031.1 02
§
031.
n.
4-TAPE BUSINESS SYSTEM
Deviations from standard configuration: • . • • • • • . • . . . . ••
80% more storage.
full simultaneity included.
indexing iitcluded.
Rental: .
$7,125.
Equipment
Rental
Processor and Console:
2,600 Word Drum
High Speed Reader:
600 cards/min.
255
Read Punch:
150 cards/min.
725
High Speed Printer:
600 lines/min.
935
Control: Synchronizer
4 Uniservo lIs
16,400 char/min.
Optional Features Included: . • . • . . . . . • • • • • • • • • • • • .
Multiply-divide.
20 print positions.
Stacker Select on Reader
and Punch.
Post- Read Station on
Punch.
Program Interrupt.
TOTAL
4/63
Revised
$1,735
1,000
1,800
400
30
85
100
60
$7,125
771:031.103
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§ 031.
III. 6-T APE BUSINESS SYSTEM
Deviations from standard configurations: . . . • . . . . . . . . . .
Rental: .
. ..
.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. ..
.
full simultaneity included.
no console typewriter.
magnetic tape units 50% slower.
$7,400
Equipment
Rental
Processor and Console:
2,800 Word Drum
$2,010
High Speed Reader:
600 cards/min.
255
Read Punch:
150 cards/min.
725
High Speed Printer:
600 lines/min.
935
Control: Synchronizer 1,000
6 Uniservo lIs
1,800
16,400 char/sec
Optional Features Included:. . . • . . . . . . . . . . . • • • • • ••
Multiply-divide.
20 print positions.
Stacker-Select on Reader
and Punch.
Post- Reader Station on
Punch.
Program Interrupt
400
30
85
100
60
TOTAL
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
$7,400
Revised
4/63
UNIVAC SS 80/90
771 :031.104
§
~ODEL
03!.
v.
6-TAPE AUXILIARY STORAGE
Deviation from standard configuration:
no console typewriter.
full simultaneity included.
magnetic tape units 50% slower.
Rental: .
$9,900
Equipment
Rental
Store:
21. 5 million characters
in 2 RAND EX File
Drum Units.
Control: Synchronizer
6 Uniservo lIs
16,400 char/sec.
Processor and Console:
2,800 Word Drum
Optional Features Include:
Revised
1,000
1,800
2,010
High Speed Reader:
600 cards/min.
255
Read Punch:
150 cards/min.
725
High Speed Printer:
600 lines/min.
935
Multiply-divide.
20 print positions.
Stacker-Select on Reader
and Punch.
Post- Read Station on
Punch.
Program Interrupt.
TOTAL
4/63
$2,500
400
30
85
100
60
$9,900
J
771 :041.100
.STAND"D
ED]?
•
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Model I
Internol Storoge
Mognetic Drum
"PORIS
INTERNAL STORAGE: MAGNETIC DRUM
§ 041.
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: .
SS 80/90 Magnetic Drum,
Model I and Model II.
. 12
Basic Use: .
working storage.
. 13
Description
The Magnetic Drum is the major store for all
UNIVAC Solid-State systems. The drum rotates
once every 3. 4 milliseconds, and any reference to
an operand or an instruction must wait until the drum
is correctly positioned under the read/write heads.
This action can take up to the 3.4 milliseconds necessary for a full revolution; however, for 1, 2, 3, 4,
5 or 8 bands of the drum, the maximum is reduced
to 0.85 millisecond by the use of 4 read/write heads
spaced 90 degrees apart around the circumference of
the drum. (fhe nomenclature of these portions is
confusing and has varied over the years. The official terminology is "Fast Access" for the slower access area of the drum, and "High Speed Access" for
the faster access areas. Alternatively,. the terms
''Normal'' and "Fast" have also been used to describe the same respective areas. )
Information is arranged on the drum in bands of 200
words, each of eleven 4-bit characters, and is operated upon in the Model I as words of 10 numeric
characters with sign bit. However, the Model II
uses the full four- bit sign character. Two models
of the drum are available, a 25-band (5, ODD-word)
drum, and a 46-band (9, 200-word) drum. These
numbers for bands do not include the buffer bands,
which are also actually located on the drum. The
smaller drum can be supplied with only 13 or more
of the 25 bands being usable as in the STEP (Simple
Transaction to Economical Processing). The other
bands, however, are still physically present. Each
band has either one or four read/write heads, so
that the respective maximum access time is either
one complete revolution or one-fourth of a revolution (3.4 milliseconds).
The decreased price which results from reduction in
the drum storage capacity accounts for the greatest
part of the price difference between the basic UNIVAC Solid-State system, and the reduced systems.
. 1'1
Availability: . .
10 months.
.15
First Delivery:
1958.
. 16
Reserved Storage
Purpose: . . . . .
Number of locations:
I/O control.
2 to 4 bands, 200 words
each.
© 1963
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
· 21
Storage Medium: .
.22
Physical Dimensions
. magnetic drum.
.222 Drum or Disc
Diameter: . . . . . . approx. 5.
Thickness or length: . approx. 8.
Number on shaft:. •
1.
.23
Storage Phenomenon:
• 24
Recording Permanence
.241 Data erasable by
program: . . . .
· 242 Data regenerated
constantly: . . .
.243 Data volatile: . .
· 244 Data permanent: .
.245 Storage changeable:
.25
magnetization.
yes.
no.
no.
no.
no.
Data Volume Per Band of 5 Tracks
Words with sign: .
Characters:
Digits: • . . .
Instructions: .
200.
1,000.
2,000.
200.
.26
Bands Per Physical Unit: 15 to 49 per drum.
• 27
Interleaving Levels: .
.28
Access Techniques
. 281 Recording method: .
.283 Type of access
Description of Stage
Wait for drum
rotation: . . . . .
Read or write word:
.29
P~tential
1.
fixed heads.
Possible Starting Stage
yes.
no.
Transfer Rates
.291 Peak bit rates
Cycling rates:
Track/head speed: •
Bits/inch/track: •
Bit rate per track:
• 292 Peak data rates
Unit of data: . . •
17,670 rpm.
4,628 inches/sec.
153.
707,000 bits/sec/track.
word (5 alpha or 10 numeric
char).
60 bits/word.
5 tracks/band.
Conversion factor: .
Gain factor: . . . .
Loss factor (degree of
interleaving): •
none.
Data rate: • . . . . . 58,825 words/sec.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
771 :041.300
UNIVAC 55 80/90 MODEL I
§ 041.
.3
DATA CAPACITY
.31
Module and System
Sizes: . . • . . . .
. see table.
Rules for Combining
Modules: . . . . . •
. 32
any combination of
increments is possible.
•4
CONTROLLER:.... none.
·5
ACCESS TIMING
· 51
Arrangement of Heads
• 511 Stacks per system:
Stacks per module:
Stacks per yoke: . .
Yokes per module:.
• 512 Stack movement: . .
.513 Stacks that can access
any particular
location: . . . . . . •
18 to 79.
18 to 79.
1, 2, or 4.
18 to 49 •
none.
.7
AUXILIARY STORAGE PERFORMANCE
. 71
Data Transfer:. . . . . data can be transferred
from the drum to any
part of the computer store.
.72
Transfer Load Size
1 word, or 200 via tape
buffer.
1 to 200 words.
With core:
.73
Effective Transfer Rate
High speed store with
self: • • • . . . . .
High speed store with
fast store: . . • . .
Fast store with self: .
1 per band, fast access.
4 per band, high speed
access.
.8
1,850 words/sec.
460 words/ sec.
460 words/ sec .
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
o to 3,400 p.sec.
17p.sec.
1 word.
Errors
Check or
Interlock
Invalid address:
none
Receipt of data:
Dispatch of data:
Conflicting commands:
Recovety of data:
parity
parity
yes
parity
MODULE AND SYSTEM SIZES
Identity
Drums:
Words:
Characters ~
Instructions:
Bands:
Digits:
Modules:
4/63
Minimum
Storage
1
2,600
13,000
2,600
13
26,000
1
1,700.
425.
CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: . . . . . • none .
Access Time Parameters and Variations
• 531 For uniform access
Access time: .•
Cycle time: . • .
For data unit of:
Example
.6
With self:
• 514 Accessible locations
By single stack: •.
200 words .
. 515 Relationship between
stacks and locations: . Band (Address/200).
Band position Address
(mod 200).
.53
.532 Variation in access time
Stage
Time
Wait for word to
reach head
Fast: . . . . •
o to 3,400 p.sec.
High Speed: .
o to 850 p.sec.
Transmit word:
17 p.sec.
"Fast"
Increment
High Speed
Increment
-
-
200
1,000
200
1
2,000
400
2,000
400
2
4,000
-
-
Maximum
Storage
1
8,800
44,000
8,800
44
88,000
1
Action
accesses a predictable
address •
sets indicator.
processor stop.
processor stop.
processor stop.
771 :043.100
•
STANDARD
II
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Modell
Internal Storage
Randex Drum
R£PORTS
EDP
INTERNAL STORAGE: RANDEX DRUM
§
043.
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
Basic Use: ••
.13
Description:
. RANDEX Drum Storage
Types No. 7965, 7957, and.
7966.
RANDEX.
.15
First Delivery:
· January, 1962.
.16
Reserved Storage:
· none .
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
. 21
Stora~
.22
Physical Dimensions
Each drum is mounted with its axis horizontal and
pairs are mounted one above the other. A .common
yoke mounted between them carries two heads, one
to access a tra.ck on the upper drum and one to access a track on the lower drum.
Each drum is divided into 2, 000 bands of 1 track
each. Each track of 576 words. is divided into 12
sectors of 48 words each. Only One sector in the
RANDEX system can be accessed at a time.
. 222 Drum or Disc
Diameter: . .
.24.3 inches.
Thickness or length: . . 44 inches.
Number on shaft: . . 1.
.23
Storage phenomenon:
.24
Recording Permanence
.241 Data erasable by
program: . . . .
.242 Data regenerated
constantly:. . •
.243 Data volatile: . .
.244 Data permanent:.
. 245 Storage changeable: .
.25
These instructions read and check a lO-character
word against the labels on a 6- block area. Up to
four labels per block can be used, thus providing a
maximum search area of 24-records or six 48-word
blocks, whichever is smaller. Fifteen areas per
record can be searched.
Access time varies from 5 to 540 milliseconds and
a typical time to locate, read, and update data in a
subsector is approximately 450 milliseconds. However, except for 7 milliseconds of this tirpe, all
other simultaneity is preserved, provided that
magnetiC tapes on the RANDEX Synchronizer are
not used.
This store is accessed as a peripheral device using
a Buffer band and a Synchronizer which needs a special adaptation for the first RANDEX module only.
Only one Synchronizer can be used.
The Synchronizer is capable of handling up to
10 RANDEX Drum units and up to 10 magnetic tape
units.
· magnetization.
· yes.
· no.
.no.
.no.
· no.
pata volume per band of 1 track
Words: . . . .
Characters: .
Digits: . . . .
Instructions: •
Model 1 packed
characters:. .
Model 2 packed
characters: •.
Each sector can be considered also as four subsectors, each containing 1 key word and 11 data
words. Special "search-read" and "search-write"
instructions can be used with reference to subsector keys.
Availability:
· magnetic drums.
. auxiliary storage.
The RANDEX Drum storage provides the auxiliary
storage for the Solid-State system. Each module
has either the capacity for one or two drums. Each
drum has a capacity of 1,152,000 words of 44 data
bits each, plus parity bits. A maximum system
contains 10 such pairs of drums, for a capacity of
23,040,000 words.
. 14
Medium: .
.576
.2,880.
.5,760.
.576.
.3,840.
.3,600.
.26
Bands per physical unit:. 2,000.
.27
Interleaving Levels: . . . 1.
.28
Access Techniques
.281 Recording method:.
.282 Reading method:. .
.283 Type of access
• moving heads.
· same.
Description of stage
Wait for synchronizer
not busy: . . . . .
Move head to selected
track: . . . . . .
(If writing) Fill buffer: .
Wait for selected
sector: . . . . .
(If reading) Empty
buffer: . . . . .
Access to a record
can occur at any
one of these stages,
prOViding the drum
is in the correct
position.
.9 months.
© 1963 .by
Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Revised
4/63
771 :043.290
§
UNIVAC SS 80/90 MODEL I
043.
• 29
.44 . Data Ti:ansfer Control
...
.441 Size of Load:
. 442 Input-Output area:.
Potential Transfer Rates
. 291 Peak bit rates
Cycling rates: .
Track/head speed:.
Bits/inch/track: . .
Bit rate per track: .
. 292 Peak data rates
Unit of data (character or word): • . .
Conversion factor
(bits for unit):. •
Gain factor (tracks
per band):. . . • .
Loss factor (degree
of interleaving): ..
Data rate: . • • .
.870 rpm.
• 1,108 inches/sec.
.650
.720,000 bits/sec/track.
· 44 bits/word.
. 1.
• 12.
· 696 words/sec/device.
.3
DATA CAPACITY
.31
Module and System Sizes
[See table below]
. 32
Rules for Combining
Modules: . . • . • .
· none. or 1 7965; or 1 7957;
or up to 9 7966 1 s with
a 7965 or a 7957.
access: . . • . . .
CONTROLLER
.41
Identity: .
.42
lockout:
. 43
. ..
.5
ACCESS TIMING
.51
Arrangement of Heads
· none, test busy required in
program to protect area .
· automatic.
· test busy.
· none.
.511 Stacks per system:
• 20 maximum.
Stacks per module:
.2.
Stacks per yoke: . .
.2.
Yokes per module:
.1.
.512 Stack movement: • . · across length of drum •
. 513 Stacks that can access
any particular location:. • . • . . . . . entire drum accessible.
.514 Accessible locations
By single stack
With no movement: . . 12 blocks.
With all movement: .. 12,000 blocks .
By all stacks
With no movement:. '124 blocks per mOdule.
240 blocks per system.
Access Time Parameters and Variations
.532 Variation in access time
Stage
· Synchronizer.
Type No. 7914.
Wait for Synchronizer
not busy:
Move head to selected
track:
Fill buffer (writing):
Wait for selected block:
Write or read:
Empty buffer (reading):
Total:
Connection to System
.421 On-line: .
.422 Off-line:, .
· entire block.
.444 Input-Output area
.53
.4
· buffer band in Magnetic
Drum .
.443 Input-Output area
. 445 Synchronization:. . .
.446 Synchronizing aids: .
.447 Table control:. .
. word.
.48 words .(1 block) .
.1.
. none.
Variation,
msec.
Example,
msec.
o to 15
0.0.
0, or 125 to 540
3.4
o to 69
34.5
3.4
300.0
3.4
20.0
34.5
0.0.
357.9•
Connection to Device
.431 Devices per controller: . 1 to 10.
.432 Restrictions:
• see Paragraph . 13.
.6
CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: .
..
. none .
MODULE AND SYSTEM SIZES
Maximum
Storage
Minimum
Storage
Identity:
Drums:
Words:
Characters:
Instructions:
Blocks:
Digits:
Model 2 packed
character:
Model 1 packed
character:
Modules:
4/63
Revised
No. 7965
No. 7957
No. 7966
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1,152,000
5,760,000
1,152,000
24,000
11,520,000
2
2,304,000
11,520,000
2,304,000
48,000
23,040,000
2
2,304,000
11,520,000
2,304,000
48,000
23,040,000
20.
23,004,000.
115,200,000.
23, 040, 000.
480,000.
230,400,000.
0
7,680,000
15,360,000
15,360,000
153,600,000.
0
0
7,200,000
1
14,400,000
1
14,400,000
1
144,000,000.
10.
771:043.700
INTERNAL STORAGE: RANDEX DRUM
§
- .8
043.
.7
AUXIllARY STORAGE PERFORMANCE
.71
Data Transfer
Pair of storage units possibilities
With self: . . . . . . . no.
With Magnetic Drum: . yes.
. 72
Transfer Load Size
With Magnetic Drum,
Model 2: . . . . . .
With Magnetic Drum,
Modell: . . . . . .
.73
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Check or
Interlock
Action
Invalid address:
Receipt of data:
Dispatch of data:
Off Normal·:
Physical record missing:
Parity
check
check
check
check
check
check
sets
sets
sets
sets
sets
sets
o Off Normal includes: • • • • ••
. units of 320 packed
characters.
. units of 300 packed characters or 240 characters.
indicator.
indicator.
indicator.
indicator.
indicator.
indicator •
Buffer overflow
Buffer underflow
Block size
Bad spot
Bad uack
Faulty operation
Interlock
Effective Transfer Rate
With Magnetic Drum,
Model 2: . . . . . .
With Magnetic Drum,
Modell: . . . . . .
.4,640 packed char/sec.
.4,350 packed char/sec or
3,480 char/sec.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Revised
4/63
771:051. 100
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Model I
Central Processor
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§
• 12
OSI.
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
Description
. . . . . . . Central Processor.
Model I.
The Central Processor is a solid state device with a
basic operating cycle of 17 microseconds which operates on fixed length, fixed point decimal words of
IO-digits size. Numbers are held in sign and absolute value; a zero may have either sign. Alphameric
characters are regarded as two numeric characters,
and alphameric comparison requires a short programming subroutine.
Preparing a line of print in accordance with a given
format requires complex programming. No code
conversions are normally required and zero suppression is available; however, all other editing functions
(check protect, comma insertions, etc.) must be internally programmed. Transfer of data to the print
buffer track, which consists of 26 words, must .. also
be so programmed.
Programming of the Model I is basically governed by
two factors:
(1) The input-output volume determines the minimum
amount of central processor time to be used. If
the time allotted to input-output provides sufficient time for the related internal processing, no
reduction in overall timing can be effected. On
the other hand, if internal processing should exceed input-output time, the total time for the
problem will be the central processor time plus
10 per cent of the input-output time.
(2) The allocation of instructions and data on the
drum so as to reduce instruction latency.'" In
general, the machine instructions are kept on
either portion of the drum (i. e., either the fast
or the normal), but an attempt is made always to
keep the data on the fast portions.
The overall speed capacity of the Model I system is
approximately 14,000 additions per second, if no
input-output operation is in process. Wifh. all inputoutput units operating, the speed is reduced to approximately 12,000 additions per second, or approximately 1,200 possible instructions for each card
read in. There are three arithmetic registers, three
index registers, and one instruction register. The
Magnetic Drum is also contained in the same cabinet.
... The "latency" of an operand or an instruction is the
time spent waiting for it to come under the read/
write heads. Programming the UNIVAC Solid State
is often concerned with minimizing latency, and
many techniques are used for this purpose.
© 1963
Description (Contd. )
The control of simultaneous operations is extremely
simple because, in general, each peripheral device
has a separate buffer band and controller circuits.
The transfers between Buffer bands and working
storage are different on the 80-column and gO-column
versions and are again different for each type of
peripheral device.
The Model I processor handles data in words of 10
digits plus a sign bit. Four bits are used for each
digit, and a biquinary code is for the numbers 0 to 9.
The other six characters of the code are called
"undigits" and are written as A, B, C, F, G, and H.
Each digit has an odd parity bit associated with it.
Parity is checked during all data movements to or
from storage. The central computer uses only numeric data, whereas the peripheral units use alphameric card data. This difference is resolved by
splitting each alphameric word (10 characters) into
2 words, 1 zone and 1 numberic. The computer has
three I-word arithmetic registers A, X, and L.
Register A is the accumulator and forms one half of
a double length register, (combined AX), which is
used for shifts and multiplication instructions.
Programming for the SS 80/90 Model is similar to
programming for the IBM 650. As in most drum
storage computers, latency problems emphasize the
importance of program complexity. The instruction
form is 1 + 1, (known as one and one half address).
This instruction form uses the second address to state
the location from which the next instruction is to be
taken. There are 62 instructions including arithmetic (fixed point only), logical masking instruction,
comparison instructions, a right-shift and a leftshift instruction, a zero-suppress instruction, and
automatic translation instructions. These all operate on full words. Character manipulation is performed by a combination of shifts and logical AND
and OR instructions.
The Model I has 3 index registers, which can be used
to modify the first address in an instruction. Normally this address is the operand, but it can be a
transfer-of-control address. The second (or nextinstruction) address cannot be modified by index registers.
Data is held on the drum in 200-word "bands". There
are two types of bands, with either one or four
read/write heads. The access time to a particular
operand is either from 0 to 3. 4 milliseconds or 0 to
O. 875 millisecond respectively for either one or four
heads. These are much longer times than the actual
instruction times themselves. (Addition only takes
O. 085 millisecond. )
The data processing speed of the processor depends
not only on the type of storage in which the instructions are held, but also on the degree of optimization
by Auerbach Corporation andBNA incorporated
4/63
nl:051.120
§
UNIVAC 55 80/90 MODEL I
051.
• 12
Description (Contd.)
estimates of data processing speeds are based on the
assumption that standard practice has been followed.
These are outlined in the performance section.
attained. Both of the assembly programs do a considerable amount of automatic optimization. The
.219 Others:. . . • • . • . • in tape systems, the tape
buffer may be utilized to
transfer a band of 200
words from one part of the
store to another. During
the transfer all words move
cyclically back one word in
relative position, thus word
number 6 becomes word
number 5. Word number 1
becomes word number a
and number a becomes
number 199.
• 13
Availability: ••
10 months •
• 14
First Delivery:
June, 1959 .
•2
PROCESSING FACILITIES
• 22
· 21
Operations and Operands
• 221 Negative numbers:. • • least significant 4 bits of
each word always contain
sign digit, a for positive,
and 5 for negative.
• 222 Zero: . • • • . . . . . • both plus and minus zero can
occur and are not equal in
comparisons.
.223 Operand size
determination:
fixed.
Operation and
Variation
Provision
Radix
Size
yes
decimal
10 digits + sign.
sentinel
yes
decimal
decimal
2 to 8 + sign.
10 digits + sign.
no.
yes
decimal
2 to 10 digits + sign.
subroutine
subroutine
subroutine
decimal.
decimal.
decimal.
• 211 Fixed point
Add-Subtract
Multiply
Short:
Long:
Divide
No remainder:
Remainder:
o
.23
212 Floating point
Add-Subtract:
Multiply:
Divide:
Special Cases of Operands
Instruction Formats
• 231 Instruction structure:
.232 Instruction layout:
1 word •
• 213 Boolean
AND:
Inclusive OR:
yes }
yes
Binary
40 bits.
40 bits.
· 214 Comparison
Numbers:
Absolute:
Letters:Mlxed:-
10 digits.
10 char.
10 char.
10 char.
yes
subroutine
subroutin~
subroutine
- requires 9 instructions (6 executed).
· 215 Code translation: • . . all UNIVAC Solid-State systems except 90-column
card systems have automatic code translation
during card operations.
All systems can translate
word-by-word, between
the internal coding and the
appropriate card codes,
and for the purposes of
compatibility with UNIVAC
I, II, etc., to Excess-3
code.
· 217 Edit format
Alter size:
Suppress zero;
Round off:
Insert point:
Insert spaces:
Insert:
Float:
Protection:
Provision
no.
yes
no.
no.
no.
yes
no.
no.
--Comment
Size.
also commas
10 chars.
see Boolean
10 half chars.
• 218 Table look-up: • . . •. subroutine.
4/63
• 233 Instruction parts
Name
OP:
Purpose
operation code.
memory address (indexable)
m: ••
second instruction address,
or operation .variation.
c: • • • . • • • • • . next instruction address.
S: • • • . . • . . • . Index Register.
.234 Basic address structure: 1 + 1.
• 235 Literals
only set register to zero.
Arithmetic: .•••
Comparisons and
tests: • . . . . .
none.
• 236 Incrementing
modifiers: •• •
yes.
.236 Directly addressed operands
• 2361 Internal storage type
Volume accessible
Min. size
Magnetic Drum:
9, 200 wordS.
1,280 words.
Magnetic Core:
23,040,000 words.
RANDEX:
• 2362 Increase address
not needed •
.capacity: •••••
· 237 Address indexing
• 2371 Number of methods:
2•
Indexing.
. 2372 Names: • • . .
Band Modification.
increment added to instruc• 2373 Indexing rule: •
tion address. Under certain
circumstances the address
is made to cycle within a
band (200 words) of drum
store. Otherwise, it cycles
either modulo 5, 000 or
modulo 10, 000 depending
on the store size.
771:051.2374
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§
051.
. 2374 Indexing specification: by the programmer: numbers 1 to 3 on the coding
sheet.
in the machine instruction:
use of the sign bit, and 1
bit of the operation code.
.2375 Number of potential
indexers:
3.
.2376 Addresses which can
be indexed:
all.
• 2377 Cumulative indexing: . none.
.2378 Combined index and
step: . . . . . • • .
no.
· 238 Indirect addressing: .
none.
• 239 Stepping
• 2391 Specification of
in stepping instruction.
increment: • .
positive; complemeI1ts used
• 2392 Increment sign: •
for decrements.
4 digits (16 bits used hexa.2393 Size of increment:
decimally in Model 2 when
addressing core).
in test instruction .
• 2394 End value: . . . .
· 2395 Combined step and
no.
test: . . . • . . .
.....
· ....
• 24
Special Processor Storage
.241 Category of storage
Number of
locations
Size in
words
Register:
4
1
Index:
Buffers:
3 or 9
3 to 5
0.4
200
Register:
Index:
Buffers:
Program usage
arithmetic, temporary storage,
and control.
indexing.
input-output.
Physical Form
hardware
3 in hardware, 6 in core
drum bands
.3
SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES
• 31
Instruction Sequencing::
. 32
Look-Ahead: •
. 33
Interruption
· ....
.331 Possible causes
In-out units:
...
. 34
Multi-running:: ••
none •
.35
Multi - sequencing::
none.
.4
PROCESSOR SPEEDS
.41
Instruction Times inJ,Lsec:
.411 Fixed point
Add-subtract:
Multiply: . . .
Divide: . • • .
• 412 Floating point: .
.413 Additional allowance for
Indexing: . • • . • •
Indirect addressing:
Re-complementing:
.414 Control
Compare:, . . . . .
Branch: •••.
Compare & branch:
.415 Counter control
Step:
Step and test:.
Test: .
. 416 Edit: ••
.417 Convert:
• 418 Shift: . .
...
.242 Category of storage
Total No.
of
locations
4
3 or 9
3 to 5
.335 Interruption process
Disabling interruption: none .
Registers saved: .
next instruction stored in
fixed location.
Destination:
a fixed location.
.336 Control methods
Determine cause:
implicit.
Enable interruption:
always enabled.
Access
time
psec
Cycle
time
psec
17
17.
17.
17
3,400
3,400
to
5,100
1 + 1 addressing.
yes, the next instruction.
High Speed Reader Buffer
Loaded (optional).
.332 Program control
Individual control:
Method: • . . . . .
High Speed Reader.
executing a Card Read instruction will activate interruption when Read
buffer is loaded.
none.
Restriction:
.333 Operator control: . . . none .
.334 Interruption conditions: buffer loaded.
· ....
© 1963
.....
.42
85.
85 + 1700.
85 + 1870.
none.
17.
none.
none.
none.
34.
51.
68.
none.
51.
68 (10 char zero suppress) •
51 (10 char).
51 + 170•
Processor Performance in J,Lsec
. 421 For random addresses
For the following times, it has been assumed that
the instructions are held on the Normal access portion of the drum in known positions, and that the data
are held in random positions on the High speed portion.
c =a +b: . . .
833.
b=a+b:. . .
1,411 •
289N.
Sum N items: •
867 + 187D.
c = ab: , . . •
867 + 1870•
c = alb: • . • .
.422 For arrays of data
For the following times, it is assumed that the instructions are stored on Normal access portions of
the drum, but executed in the Fast portion. This
effectively reduces the time lost at the end of each
iteration of the loop because of poor latency. It
does involve some additional word in actually transferring the data, and this is shown separately under
Set- Up Time.
Set-Up
Execution
3,400
1,700.
3,400
1,700.
1,700
85ON.
3,400
2,55ON.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
771 :051. 423
§
OSl.
.423 Branch based on comparison
For the following times, it is assumed that the instructions a,;-e stored on Normal access portions of
the drum, but executed in the Fast portion. This
effectively reduces the time lost at the end of each
iteration of the loop because of poor latency. It
does involve some additional word in actually transferring the data, and this is shown separately under
Set-Up Time.
Set- Up
Execution
Numeric data:
3,400
1,700.
Alphabetic data:
. 5,100
1,870.
• 424 Switching
For the following times, it has been assumed that
the instructions are held on the Normal access portion of the drum in known positions, and that the
data are held in random positions on the High speed
portion.
Unchecked: .
SION.
Checked: . .
799N.
List search:
8SON .
• 425 Format control per character
For the following times, it has been assumed that
the instructions are held on the Normal access
portions of the drum in known positions, and that
the data are held in random positions on the High
speed portion.
Unpack: . . . • . . • SIN.
Compose: • • • • • . 485N•
• 426 Table look up per comparison
For the follOWing times, it is assumed that the instructions are stored on Normal access portions
of the drum, but executed in the Fast portion.
This effectively reduces the time lost at the end of
each iteration of the loop because of poor latency.
It does involve some additional word in actually
transferring the data, and this is shown separately
under Set-Up Time.
4/63
UNIVAC SS 80/90 MODEL I
.426 Table look up per comparison (Contd.)
Execution
Set-Up
1,70ON.
For a match:
340
For least or
greatest: .
510
1,70ON.
For interpolation
point: . . . . •.
510
1,70ON.
.• 427 Bit indicators
For the following times, it has been assumed that
the instructions are held on the Normal access portion of the drum in known positions, and that the
data are held in random positions on the High speed
portion.
Set bit in separate
location:. • • . .
340.
Set bit in pattern: .
I, 122.
Test bit in separate
location:. • . . .• 374.
Test bit in pattern:. 442.
Test AND for B bits: 442.
Test OR for B bits:. 442.
.5
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Check or
Interlock
overflow:
Underflow (float-pt):
Zero divisor:
Invalid data:
Invalid operation:
Arithmetic ·error:
Invs"lld address:
Receipt of data:
Dispatch of data:
check
none.
check
not possible.
some checks
some checks
checks
error word
error word
Action
program jump.
program jump.
stops or parrial execution.
sometimes stops.
modulo store size.
program jump.
program jump.
771:061.100
_STANOAAD
EDP
•
REPORTS
Univac SS
Console
80/90
CONSOLE
§
.232 Starts
061.
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity:......... Central Processor Control
Panel.
.12
.24
The digits 0 through 9
Plus and minus enter keys
An Alert key that clears a preselected
input register
Any combination of four bits can be entered. A lamp lights on the keyboard after
pushing the Alert key indicating that the
processor is ready to accept input from
the keyboard.
.2
CONTROLS
.21
Power
.25
Tape Check:
button
Start:
button
button
button
Completes partially-executed
tape commands •
Starts processor.
Selects next address of two.
Addresses to which control
will be transferred when the
Start button is depressed •
StePEing:
Name
Form
Function
W/O Index Regs:
button
W Index Regs:
button
Continuous :
button
execute one instruction without index registers when
stan button pushed.
execute one instruction with
index registers when start
button pushed.
executes instructions under
program control when start
bu tton pushed •
Resets
.
Name
Form
Function
AC:
button -light
button -light
button-light
button-light
button -light
tums off AC and DC power.
turns off DC power.
tums on AC and DC power.
turns off AC and DC power.
turns power to Uniservos on
and off.
DC:
DC Ready:
Drum:
Uniservo:
Function
c:
The keyboard has 13 keys which include:
1.
2.
3.
Form
m:
Associated Units: . . • . Processor Keyboard standing on the desk.
. 121 Description:
Name
Connections :
.23
Stops and Restarts
Form
Function
General Clear:
button
resets indicators and logic.
.26
Loading: .
.27
Special
. no positive indication .
. 22
Name
. none.
Name
Form
--,-
Function
No Print:
button -light
96 Check:
button -light
No Punch
button -light
print orders executed but no
printing occurs •
causes stop if card buffer is
not emptied fast enough.
punch orders executed but no
punching occurs •
• 231 Stops
Name
Form
Function
Tape:
button
HSP:
button
FR:
button
RPU:
button
Comparison Stop:
button
Stop:
button
Causes Tape Off-Normal
condition.
Causes High Speed Printer
Off-Normal condition.
Causes High Speed Reader
Off-Normal condition.
Causes Read Punch OffNormal condition.
Causes Stop on compare
instructions.
Stop Processor.
©
.3
DISPLAY
.31
Alarms: .
.32
Conditions
. . none •
Name
Form
Function
Printer:
Fast Reader:
Read Punch:
Processor:
Test:
Tape Sync.:
light
light
light
light
light
light
Off-Normal
Indicates that a malfunction
has occurred in the particular unit.
1963 by Auerbach Carparation and BNA Incorporated
Reprinted 4/63
771:061.330
UNIVAC 55 80/90
§061.
• 33
.41
Into Control Registers: . same as Control Registers
but via a control register
plus executing store instruction, also keyed in.
.5
CONVENIENCE
• 51
Communication: •
• none.
• 52
Clock: •.>
· none.
. 53
Desk Space: •
· length 22", depth 6",
height 48".
.54
View:
· operator must be standing
to operate console; view
is unobstructed by peripheral units Punch,
Printer, and Reader •
Control Registers
Function
Static Register:
Sign:
two 5, 4, 2, 1
bit neon decades
two neons
Display Register:
ten decades
.34
Storage: .
.4
ENTRY OF DATA
4/63 Reprinted
indicates statically and dynamically what instruction
is being executed,
indicates the sign of quantity in display register.
in one of the following registers: rA, rC, rL, or rX,
depending upon which display button is pushed.
displayed in the Display
register via rA, rC, rL,
or rX.
I AUERBACH I .$J
••
nl:071.100
•
.11
STANDARD
EDP
REPORTS
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Model I
Input-Output
High Speed Reader
INPUT-OUTPUT: HIGH SPEED READER
§
071.
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity: •
High Speed Reader.
I: 80-Column Reader.
Unit No. 7935.
II: 90-Column Reader.
Unit No. 7945.
.12
Description
.13
Availability:..
.3 months.
.14
First Delivery:
· November, 1958 - 90-Col.
December, 1959 - 80-Col.
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21 Drive Mechanism
.211 Drive past the head:. . . pinch roller.
.212 Reservoirs: . . . . . . . none.
.22 Sensing and Recording Systems
. 221 Recording systems: . . none .
. brush .
. 222 Sensing system: .
. none.
.223 Common system:
The high speed reader reads up to 600 cards per
minute using two read stations, translating card images into machine codes and transferring them into
the computer store. During 95 per cent of the time
.23
involved in the transfer, the central processor can
continue operations. A standard subroutine function
.24
which uses up 7 per cent more of the card cycle time
compares the card images, giving a total effective
performance of 3,600 cards per minute read, translated, and verified with 88 per cent central processor
overlap.
Both types of the 600 cards per minute reader are
equipped with a hopper, 2 read stations, and optionally, 3 stackers. The only difference between the two
types is the number of columns sensed by the read
stations. A vacuum system to assist card feeding
is standard equipment. A Stacker Select and an
Automatic Program Interrupt feature are available
as options.
The buffer between the reader and processor receives card images from both read stations whenever
a card passes either. Should either of the stations be
empty, the empty station will transmit the image of a
card with every hole punched. Another feature of the
reader is that a card is passed by both read stations
and is moved into a stacker without stopping. A control routine is required to prevent the image from the
first read station being overwritten by another image
transmitted when the card passes the second read
station unless the Automatic Program Interrupt option is used. When this option is available, the processor performs the following operations when the
buffer is loaded. First the current instruction is
completed and the next instruction is stored in a fixed
location. Control is then transferred to a subroutine.
The last instruction of the subroutine causes control
to be returned to the fixed location from which normal program sequencing is resumed.
Correctness of card reading is verified by routines
in the processor and not in the reader. This internal
redundancy check is more secure than hole counts
and similar reader checks because it also covers the
transfers between the reader and internal storage.
However, this check requires both processor time
and storage space to hold the separate images which
are not required by automatic input checking systems.
When checking is desired, an area must be reserved
in storage for both images so that the comparison
may be performed.
© J963
.3
Multiple Copies:.
· none.
Arrangement of Heads
Use of station: • • • • • • • • •
•••••••••
Stacks:
Heads/stack: • • • • • • • • •
Method of use:. • • • • • • . ,
SO-Column
Read
1
80
1 row at a time
90-Column
Read.
1.
45.
1 row at a time.
Use of station: •
Distance:
Stacks:
•
Heads/stack: •
Method of use:.
Verify read
15 rows
1
80
1 row at a time
Verify read.
15 rows.
1.
45.
1 row at a ti'me.
• • • • • • • •
• • • • • • ••
• • • • • • ••
• • • • • • .,
EXTERNAL STORAGE
.31 Form of Storage
. 311 Medium: •.•
.312 Phenomenon: . • .
· Standard punched card .
• punched holes;
rectangular on 80-column;
round on 90-column.
.32 Positional Arrangement
.12 rows .
. 3.21 Serial by:
.80- or 45-columns .
. 322 Parallel by:
• 35
· 80-column (Hollerith,
binary, column binary).
90-column (standard 90
column code).
Format Compatibility:. · 80-column card, any 80column equipment.
90-column card, any 90column equipment.
Physical Dimensions: • • standard punched card.
.4
CONTROLLER
.41
Identity: . . . .
.42
Connection to System
.33
. 34
Coding: •.
· built into Central Processor
and the unit. Contains a
special buffer band on the
processor's drum to transmit and receive card images.
.421 On-line:.
• 1.
.422 Off-line: . . • . . . • . • none.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Revised 4/63
UNIVAC SS 80/90 MODEL I
771:071.430
§
/\
071.
.43
Connection to Device
.431 Devices per controller: . 1.
.432 Restrictions: . • • • . • none.
. 44
Data Transfer Control
.441 Size of load: • • . • •
.442 Input-Output areas: •
. 443 Input-Output area
access: • . • • • •
. 444 Input-Output area
lockout:
.....
•445 Table control: . . . •
.446 Synchronization:. . .
.447 Synchronizing aids: .
.2 cards.
· 2 i~terlaces on buffer band
of 200 words.
.1 band.
· area insecure without program tests unless Automatic Interrupt feature
is used.
. none.
• automatic.
· interrupt.
.5
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
• 51
Blocks
.6
PERFORMANCE
.61
Conditions:
• 62
Speeds
.621 Noml.na.l or peak speed: .600 c.p.m •
.622 Important parameters:
.52
Cycle time:.
Select stacker time
span: • . . • • •.
Feed card instruction
time span: • • .•
Unload buffer time
span: . •
.
.623 Overhead: • . • . ••
· 1 card .
• fixed size (80- or 90.column).
• 522
. 523
.524
• 525
.526
Output:. .
Stepping:.
Skipping:.
Marking:.
Searching:.
• one image from each of two
stations if a card was
read at either.
. none .
. none.
· none.
. none.
• none.
.53
Code Translation: •
• instruction provided.
. 54
Format Control: .•
• none .
. 55
Control Operations
Disable: . . • • • •
Request interrupt:.
Offset card: . .
Select stacker:
Select format: •
Select code: .
Unload: • . • .
.56
.no.
· no.
· no.
· yes.
.no.
4/63 Revised
Demands on System
msec
I!er card
Coml!0nent
Condition
Central Processor:
Central Processor:
unload ima sea
verify overhead
.7
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
.71
Adjustments: . . . . • . none.
.72
Other Controls
Function
• yes.
• Off-Normal Is a general term for
any abnormal condition including: empty stations.
full stacker.
empty hopper.
card jam.
equipment malfunction.
.100\msec.
3.5
7.0
Petcentage
or
or
3.0.
6.0
Note 2~ The data read into the buffer band are
stored in interleaved locations around the drum .
To maximize processing efficiency, these data
should be processed from the interleaved locations,
since outputting computed results requires another
kind of interleaved pattern which is best loaded
from the input interleaved array •
.no.
· no.
· yes.
.no.
.no.
· yes.
· no.
· yes.
• yes.
. 100 m sec.
Note 1: If the second read station is used to veri fy the reading at the first read station, the central
processor must unload the second image and perform the comparison .
Form
Comment
Clear:
buttonturn off "Off-Normal".
light
Computation: 2 buttons stops and starts processor.
Testable Conditions
Disabled: • • . • •
Busy device:. . • •
Output lock: • . • •
Nearly exhausted: .
Busy controller: . . . .
End of medium marks:
Inpu~ buffer full:. . • .
Off - Normal*: • . • . .
. 100 m sec .
• 15.msec.
• 1 clutch point •
Note: up to four read
orders can be stacked by
this unit .
. 624 Effective speeds: . . . • (600-C) c.p.m •
C = number of clutch points
missed per minute .
Input-Output Operations
.521 Input: .
Value
Name
.63
.511 Size of block:
.. 512 Block demarcation
Input: • • . . • . .
. . • • no variation •
.73
Loading and Unloading
.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Hopper: • • . . . •
Stackers (3): • . .
.732 Replenishment time:
• 733 Adjustment time: •
.734 Optimum reloading
period: • . • . • •
Capacity
· 1,000 cards.
· 1, 200 cards each.
.0.2 to 1.0 min.
does not need to be stopped.
· 1 to 5 minutes.
· 1. 66 minutes.
INPUT-OUTPUT: HIGH SPEED READER
§
771 :071.800
071 •
•8
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Errors
Check or
Interlock
Reading:
Input area overflow:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Off-Normal·:
none.
fixed.
ail legal.
see "Off-Normal".
none.
progr am stall.
wait.
check.
set indicator.
• Off-Normal includes: •
Action
• exhausted medium.
equipment malfunction.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Revised 4/63
771:012. 100
UNIVAC 55 80/90
Input.Output
Read Punch
INPUT-OUTPUT: READ PUNCH
§
072.
.22
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity:
· Read Punch.
SO-column Punch Unit.
No. 7936.
90-column Punch Unit.
No. 7946.
.12
SenSing and Recording Systems
.221 Recording system:. . . · punch and die.
90 char, round holes .
SO char, rectangular holes.
.222 Sensing system: ,
· brush.
.223 Common system:
.no •
. 23
Multiple Copies:
. 24
Arrangement of Heads
Description:
These two card punching units are able to process
cards at a peak speed of 150 cards per minute, using a single point clutch.
Type 7936 contains 5 card stations: read, wait,
punch, wait and read. The punch station is fitted
for SO-column cards.
Type 7946 contains 3 card stations: read, punch
and read. The punch station is fitted for 90-column
cards.
The read stations are optional and can be fitted to
read either SO- or 90- column cards in either type,
although it is unlikely that mixtures are required.
Each type has one hopper and two stackers, but the
stacker select feature is optional.
There are automatic input code translations and four
special instructions are available to perform some
translation (see Internal Storage, Magnetic Drum,
paragraphs 1.3) either for 80-column patterns or 90column patterns.
The optional read stations are intended for use in
conjunction with the punch. The last station permits
sending an image of the card to enable verification
in a routine. The first station permits reading partpunched cards before completing the punching. Note
that two input and one output images are transmitted
on any stimulated cycle of the device.
.13
Availability:. .
.14
First Delivery:
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Drive Mechanism
..
BO-Column
90-Column
• Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/stack:
Method of use:
read
1
80 or 45
1 row at a time
read.
1.
45 or 80.
1 row at a time.
Use of station:
Distance:
Stacks:
Heads/stack:
Method of use:
wait
5 card rows.
none.
none.
none.
Use of station:
Distance:
Stacks:
Heads/stack:
Method of use:
punch
5 card rows
N. A.
1
80
1 row at a time
gse of station:
Distance:
Stacks:
Heads/stack:
Method of use:
wait
5 card rows.
none.
none.
• Use of station:
Distance:
Stacks:
Heads/stack:
Method of use:
read
5 card rows
1
80 or 45
1 row at a time
punch.
1 card.
1.
45.
1 row at a time.
none.
N. A.
read.
1 card.
1.
45 or BO.
1 row at a time.
• These stations are optional.
.33
EXTERNAL STORAGE
.7 months.
.31 Form of Storage
· No. 7936 - December,1959.
.311 Medium:
No. 7946-June, 1958.
.312 Phenomenon:. . •
.32
. 211 Drive past the head: .
. 212 Reservoirs: .
Number: .
Form:
CaPilcity: .
• 213 Feed drive:
.214 Take-up drive:
· none.
· pinch rollers.
· Type 7936 only.
.2.
· wait stations.
· 1 card each.
· pinch rollers.
· pinch rollers.
©
Positional Arrang:ement
.321 Serial by:
.322 Parallel by:
.33
· standard punch card.
· punched holes.
SO char rectangular.
90 char round.
Coding:
· row (lout of 12).
· 80 colon 80 char card.
45-colon 90 char card.
. . . . . . . · Hollerith,
column binary,
binary, on 80-col card .
1963 by Auetbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Standard 90-col card
code.
Reprinted
4/63
771:072.340
§
UNI VAC SS 80/90
072.
.34
.55
Format
ComEatibilit~
SO-column:
90-column:
.
. 35
Physical Dimensions:
.4
CONTROLLER
• 41
Identity:
Disable: '.
Request interrupt:.
Offset card: •
Select stacker:
Select format: ..
Select code:
Unload:
· any SO-column equipment.
• any 90-colmnn equipment.
· standard punched card.
• 56
• 42
• built into Central Processor
and the unit. Contains a
special buffer band on the
processor's drum to
transmit and receive
card images.
Connection to System
. 421 On-line: .
.4 22 Off -line: .
. 43
.441 Size of load:. • • .
.442 Input-output areas:
· 3 cards (2 input and 1 output) •
.3 interlaces on 1 buffer
band.
.443 Input-output area
access:
.444 Input -output area
lockout:
· band.
· ...
· ...
. 445 Table control:. •
• 446 Synchronization: •
.51
•
•
.
.
•
.
* Off Normal includes:
• empty stations.
full stackers •
empty hopper .
card jam.
equipment malfunction •
• punch area of buffer is
locked out until punches
are set up from previous
instruction.
· none.
· automatic.
.6
PERFORMANCE
.61
Conditions:
.62
SEeeds
no.
yes .
no.
no.
yes.
no.
. yes.
. yes .
.150 c.p.m.
Value
.400 m.sec •
.116 m.sec.
.133 m.sec.
.136 m.sec.
1 clutch point .
· (150-C) c.p.m.
C = number of clutch points
missed per minute .
Demands on S},:stem
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
Blocks
.511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Input:
Output: .
· ....
· 1 card.
.52
Input-Output Operations
.521
. 522
. 523
• 524
. 525
. 526
Input:
Output: .•
Stepping:.
Skipping:.
Marking:.
Searching: .
.2 cards .
.1 card .
• none .
• none .
· none .
· none.
.53
Code Translation: .
· automatic.
.54
Format Control:. •
· none.
..
4/63 Reprinted
ComEonent
Condition
Central Processor
Central Processor:
load buffer 1
unload buffers 2
Central Processor:
note 1 below
&3
• fixed.
· fixed.
/
.••• none'.
.621 Nominal or peak speed
.622 Important parameters
Name
Cycle: . • . . •
Stacker select
time span: .•
Start time span:
Buffer unload time
span: . . • .
.623 Overhead:
.624 Effective speeds:
. 63
.5
Disabled: . •
Busy device:.
Output lock: .
Nearly exhausted:.
Busy controller:. •
End of medium marks:
Off Normal *: . . . . .
Input buffer full:. . . .
Connection to Device
Data Transfer Control
.no.
· no.
.no.
· yes.
• no .
· yes.
.no •
Testable Conditions
. 1 max.
. none.
.431 Devices per controller: • 1 max .
.432 Restrictions: . . • . . • none.
.44
Control Operations
m.sec.
Eer card
Percentage
3.5
or
0.9.
3.5
or
or
0.9.
2.7.
10.4
Note 1: If the second read station is used to verify
the reading at the first station plus the punching
done at the punch station, the program must merge
the punch and first read images and compare punch
and second read images.
Note 2: The data read into the buffer hand are
stored in interleaved locations around the drum. To
maximize processing efficiency, these data should
be processed from the interleaved locations as the
output computed results require another kind of
interleaved pattern which is best loaded from the
interleaved array upon input.
I AUERBACH I
!Bn
INPUT-OUTPUT: READ PUNCH
§
072.
.8
.7
EXTERNAL FACIUTIES
.71
Adjusttnents: . . • • . . none.
• 72
Other Controls
Function
Fonn
Comment
starts & stops processor.
Computation 2
Buttons
.73
Loading and Unloading
. 731 Volumes handled
Storage
Hopper: . • . •
Stackers (2): •
• 732 Replenishment time:
• 733 Adjusttnent time: .
• 734 Optimum reloading
period: . • . • • .
"
771:072.700
Capacity
600 cards.
1,200 cards each.
.0.25 to 1 mins.
does not need to be stopped.
.1 to 2 mins.
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Check or
Interlock
Recording
Reading:
Input area overflow:
OUtput block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Off Normal·:
none.
none.
not possible.
fixed.
Action
none~
see "off normal".
none •
interlock
check
wait.
set indicator.
• Off Normal inCludes:. • • • • • • punch bin full.
hopper empty•
stacker full.
card jam•
malfunction •
.4 mins.
,
©
1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Reprinted 4/63
771 :073.1 00
_STANDARD
EDP
•
REPORTS
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Model I
Input-Output
Paper Tape Reader
INPUT-OUTPUT: PAPER TAPE READER
§
073.
.1
.5
GENERAL
controlled by plugboard and parity checking is controlled by a rotary switch. The reader shares both
these controls with the punch unit.
The paper tape reader and punch are two separate
units housed in the same cabinet with their jOint controller. The photoelectric reader operates at 500
characters per second. Five-, six-, seven-, or
eight-channel tape can be read, checked for parity,
translated into six-bit biquinary code, and stored in
a 20-character buffer found in the synchronizer that
is part of the entire paper tape unit.
The program is able to test the buffer to transfer 10
characters at a time into the arithmetic registers of
the computer. The time involved is 187 microseconds per transfer, or less than I per cent of the
overall computer capacity.
•2
"Ignore" characters and blanks are suppressed before
the buffer is loaded. The program can test for
whether the buffer is loaded or whether'the unit is
disabled. but cannot distinguish between the various
possible disabling causes, such as torn tape. plugboard not in place, overheating, or no paper .
.6
PHYSICAL FORM
During the reading of the tape, the buffer is first
filled; then its contents are transferred to the automatic registers. Transfer of the buffer contents to
the registers takes place each 20 millisecorids, or
within from 6 to 7 drum revolutions. This operation
takes only 0.20 millisecond, including subsequent
transfer of data to storage as well. The transfer to
storage can take an additional 3.4 milliseconds or
O. 85 millisecond, depending upon whether the store
data is in Normal or Fast areas of the drum.
EXTERNAL STORAGE
Normal punched tape, with fully punched holes, is
used. Five-, six-, or seven-channel tapes can be
used normally. An eight-channel tape can be used,
but the eighth channel is restricted to some special
function, as all other channels must be unpunched
when the eighth is punched.
.7
The parity control switch sets the unit to check a specific channel for odd or even parity. or to ignore that
channel altogether.
The optional spooler holds a SOO-foot reel, which can
be read in 2 minutes. Changing reels takes about
I minute. Take-up facilities are standard.
CONTROLLER
The cent.ral processor in a UNIVAC Solid-State system is the controller. Only one paper-tape system
can be connected to a system. Access is directly
in~o the arithmetic registers, and occurs only upon
request. The amount transferred each time is 10
characters. The paper tape synchronizer contains a
20-character buffer. After the buffer has been filled,
the reader pauses until it becomes unloaded.
.5
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
The plugboard which controls the code translation can
be changed in approximately 20 seconds if ,a new one
is available, or it can be rewired in less than
20 minutes.
Various codes can be accommodated, including Teletype, Flexowriter and DaSPan. Each installation
decides its own "End of Message" and "End of Tape"
signals, which can be two or three characters long.
In addition, an installation-chosen signal is used as
the "ignore" signal. Neither the "ignore" nor
"blank" characters are read into the buffer.
.4
PERFORMANCE
The. peak speed of the reader is 500 characters per
second. The effective speed is the same, provided
that the buffer is unloaded once each 20 milliseconds.
If not, the cost is the '1 -millisecond stop-start
time, which would otherwise be overlapped •
A friction drive mechanism is used, with two I-foot
capacity reservoirs. A spooler can be added as an
optional extra to take up the paper tape after it has
been read.
.3
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE (Contd.)
.8
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Parity is checked during reading, and buffer overflow
is avoided by an automatic pause, or interlock.
These errors effectively cause the unit to be
"disabled" :
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
Reading, once started, continues until either a stop
character is read or a stop instruction is executed.
Failure to unload the 20-character buffer causes an
.indefinite pause in reading. Translation is
© 1963
Torn Tape.
Power Off.
Overheating.
Improper Airflow .
Plugboard Not in Place •
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
771:074.100
•
STANDARD
EDP
•
REPORTS
UNIVAC 55 80/90 Model I
Input-Output
Paper Tape Punch
INPUT-OUTPUT: PAPER TAPE PUNCH
§
.4
074.
.1
The program is able to test the buffer and to transfer 10 characters at a time into the computer's
arithmetic registers. The time involved is 85 microseconds per transfer, or less than 0.1 percent of
the overall central processor capacity.
.2
tape synchronizer has a lO-character buffer, which
is tested to determine whether the previous operation has been completed.
GENERAL
The paper tape reader and punch are two separate
units housed in the same cabinet with their con24 Skipping: .
. 525 Marking: .
.526 Searching:
row (1 of 13).
column (70). .53
Code Translation:
automatic .
.54
Format Control: .
none.
.55
Control Operations
Disable:
..
Request interrupt: .
Offset card: . .
Select stacker: .
Select format:
Select code: . .
Format Compatibility
Other device or system Code translation
Any 80- column equipment: . . . . . . . ..
none if Hollerith code
used.
.35
Physical Dimensions:
.4
CONTROLLER
. 41
Identity:
.42
Connection to System
...
.421 On-line:
. 422 Off-line:
. 43
standard post or punch
card.
.56
Testable Conditions
Disabled: ..
Busy device:. .
Output lock: .
Nearlyexhaused:
Busy controller:
End of medium marks:
Off Normal *:. . . . .
*Off Normal includes:
uses buffer bands in the
Central Processor normally used by the Read
Punch and High Speed
printers.
no.
no.
no.
yes.
no.
no.
1 max.
none .
no .
no.
no.
no.
yes.
no.
yes.
equipment malfunction.
stacker full.
hopper empty.
punch chip box full.
print error .
Connection to Device
.431 Devices per controller: 1 max .
. 432 Restrictions: . . . . . . none.
.44
Data Transfer Control
Printer
Punch
.6
PERFORMANCE
.61
Conditions:
. . . none.
.441 Size of load:, ..
. 442 Input-output areas:
.5
2 line image 2 card images . . 62 Speeds
1 buffer
1 buffer band .
band
.621 Nominal or peak speed:
Input-output area
.622 Important parameters
buffer.
buffer
access: . . .
Name
Input-output area
Punch cycle: . . .
when print- when buffer is
lockout: ..
being loaded.
ing
Feed printed card: .
none.
Advance and print 2
none
Table control:
automatic.
automatic
Synchronization: .
lines:
....
Advance additional
lines:
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
.623 Overhead: . . . .
. 51
Blocks
.443
.444
.445
.446
.624 Effective speeds:
. 511 Size of block:
80-column punching .
,21ines of printing .
. 512 Block demarcation
Input: .
Output: ..
fixed.
fixed.
4/63
Reprinted
150 cards/minute.
Value
4OOii1. sec (for other
parameters, see Punch).
20 m. sec.
67 m.sec.
9 m. sec each.
1 clutch point in punch
section .
The minimum of 150 or
60,000/(250 + 58P} cpm.
P = average number of lines
printed on the side of the
card with the most printing on it (13 max).
INPUT-OUTPUT: CARD PUNCH PRINTER
§
771 :082.630
082 .
. 63
. 73
Demands on System
.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Hopper: . . " ..
Stackers (3): ..
. 732 Replenishment time: .
Component
Condition
m. sec per card
Cenu al Processor:
load buffer to
punch
unload buffer
from punch
load buffer to
print
verify punch
images
arrange print
to punch
3. 5
or
0.9
3. 5
or
0.9
10. 1 to 262.6
or
2.5 to 14.2. .
3. 5
or
0.9
8.0 to 208.0
or
2.0 to 11.2.
Note:
Percentage
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
.71
Adjustments:
. 72
Other Controls
.8
. . . . none.
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Check or
Interlock
Recording:
Reading:
Input area overflow:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Off Normal·:
see "Off Normal".
none.
not possible.
not possible.
Check
see "Off Normal".
none.
interlocks
check
• , Off Normal includes: • • • • •
Function
Form
Comment
Computation: 2 buttons starts and stops processor.
1 button resets interlocks.
Clear:
© 1963
Capacity
1, 000 cards.
1,000 cards each.
0.5 to 2.0 mins.
no need to be stopped.
1 to 2 mins.
. 733 Adjustment time:
734 Optimum reloading period: . . . . . . . . . . 6.7 mins.
The following operations are performed
by routines previous to the actual punching and printing operations when needed:
compare, verify, and punch images, and
arrange into print interleaved patterns.
.7
Loading and Unloading
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Action
set indicator.
wait.
set indicator.
equipment malfunction •
exhausted medium.
stacker full.
hopper empty.
punch chip box full.
print error.
Reprinted
4/63
II
771 :091.100
STANDARD
EDP
_
REPORTS
UN IV AC SS 80/90 Model I
Input-Output
Uniservo Magnetic Tape Unit
INPUT-OUTPUT: UNISERVO MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
§
09l.
.12
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: . . . . . . . Uniservo Magnetic Tape
Unit.
Type No. 7915.
. 12
The program can also switch the level, but the
operator can override its choice upward .
Extra protection is provided to the tape and head
both electrostatically and mechanically by a plastic
guard interposed between the tape and the heads .
Description
A write lock-out is obtained by inserting a ring in
a reel.
The UNIVAC Solid-State system normally reads
1, 100-alphameric-character blocks at an effective rate of 16,400 characters per second. (ThiEl
block length is related to a band on the UNIVAC
Solid-State drum, but other block lengths are
possible to provide compatability with other
UNIVAC systems. )
Only tapes that have been edited to mark the flaws
should be used. Tapes are edited by first·recording a pattern of "all ones" along the tape and then
reading and checking. When errors occur while
using metallic tape, a special hand punch is used to
perforate the tape in that area. When Mylar tape
is used and errors occur, its oxide is manually
scraped off, leaving a clear spot on the tape. The
clear spots indicate the start and end of the flaw.
This operation requires at least two passes through
the tape plus manual punching time.
Internally, the system uses four- bit characters,
but the magnetic tape characters are 6-bits.
The difference is resolved by:
(1) Upon Reading: Using two 4-bit storage
characters per 6- bit tape
character read.
(2) Upon Writing: Recording on magentic tape
only six bits out of each
two 4-bit characters.
Some format problems result but the effective
transmission rate is not reduced.
The tape is buffered into and out of the unit with
an overlap of 95 percent of the elapsed time between the central processor and tape transmission.
The tape buffer can also be used to move 200-word
bands from one part of storage to another if no
tape transmission is in progress.
The Uniservo II tape unit can be used in a variety
of ways in which the tape material, packing
density, block size and amplifier gain can be
varied. They are used in conjunction with
Synchronizers. There can be up to two Synchronizers, each of which may have up to 10 tape units
connected to it. One Synchronizer may also serve
any RANDEX system attached. The address of
each unit can be chosen by a patch panel on its
Synchronizer.
The recording can be made on metal O:i Mylar
tapes and is compatible with UNIVAC I, II & III,
File Computer, 490 and 1107. There is a spechil
translate instruction for data in XS-3 code.
A second station is used to read-back tape and
check the row parity, setting an indicator when a
check fails. Three levels of amplification can
be used when reading: low, normal, and high.
Conventional practice is for the operator to read
low to minimize noise; then, if difficulties arise,
switch to normal or high on the SynchronIzer.
© 1963
Description (Contd.)
. 13
Availability:..
.7 months.
. 14
First Delivery:
· May, 1960 .
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Drive Mechanism
. 211 Drive past the head: .
.212 Reservoirs
Number: .
Form: ..
Capacity:.
. 213 Feed drive:
. 214 Take-up drive.
.22
· pinch roller .
.2.
· vacUum.
· 6 feet of tape.
· electric motor .
· electric motor .
Sensing and Recording Systems
.221 Recording system:.
. 222 Sensing system: .
.223 Common system:
. erase head followed by a
magnetic write head.
· magnetic read head .
common magnetic
read/write head.
. 23
Multiple Copies:. . . . . none .
.24
Arrangement of Heads
Use of station:.
Stacks:
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:.
Use of station:.
Stacks:
Heads/stack: .
Method of use: .
by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incorporated
· erase .
. 1.
.8
· all tracks
· read/write
.1.
.8.
· all tracks read or write.
Revised
4/63
771 :091.300
UNIVAC 55 80/90 MODEL I
§ 091.
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
.31
Form of Storage
.312 Phenomenon:. . . . . . . magnetization.
Positional Arrangement
.321 Serial by:
.322 Parallel by:
. 323 Bands:
.32. Track use
Data:
Redundancy check: .
Timing:. . . . .
Control signals:
Unused:
Total:
.. 325 Row use
Data:
Redundancy check: .
Timing:
..
Control signals:
Gap:
...
.33
Coding:
. 34
Format Compatibili!y
· I, 100 or 720 or 120 frames
at 125 or 250 per inch.
.8 tracks.
.1.
· 6 bits per character.
.1 parity.
. 1 clock
· O.
• O.
.8.
· I, 100 or 720 or 120· O.
• O.
· O.
· see .622.
· SS 80/90 six-bit or
UNIVAC XS-3.
Other device or system Code translation
,XS-3translate instrUcUni\rac I n ill:
tion in. 80/90.
Univac High Speed
Printer: . . . . .
special write instruction.
program translation to be
Univac 490, 1107: .
handled by 490/1107.
,.35
...
.41
Identity: .
.42
Connection to Srstem
. 421 On-line: • . • • • . .
. 422 Off-line: . . . • • • •
.2,400 ft.
.1,500 ft.
.53
Code Translation: .
· program
.54
Format Control:
Control: .
Format alternatives:
Rearrangement: .
Suppress zeros: .
Insert Point: .
Insert spaces: .
Recording density:
Section sizes: .
· program
· none.
· none.
· none .
· none.
. none.
· yes.
· yes.
Control Operations
Disable: .
Request interrupt:
Select format: .
Select code: .
Rewind:
Unload:
Amplifier gain:
· yes.
· no.
· no.
• XS3 or SS 80/90.
· yes.
· no.
· yes (3 levels).
.55
. 442 Input-output areas:
.443 Input-output area "
access: . . . . . . .
. 444 Input-output area lockout:
.....
. 445 Table control: ..
. 446 Synchronization:.
Revised
.56
• 1 max .
· none.
.6
.61
Testable Conditions
Disabled: . . . . .
Busy device: . . . .
Output lock: . . . .
Nearly exhausted: •
Busy controller:. .
End of medium marks:
Error Type:. . .
PERFORMANCE
Conditions
Case
II
n;
Data Transfer Control
· 1,100 or 720 or 120
characters.
· buffer band of 200 words .
· band.
· yes, and testable.
· no.
· automatic .
.1,100 or 720 or 120
characters .
.512 .Block demarcation
Input: . . . . . •
· fixed.
Output:. . . . . .
· fixed.
.52 Input-Output Operations
. . . . . . . . . mmimum 720 characters
.521 Input:
(Could be six 120character blocks with gap
as delimiter) .
. 522 Output: . . . . . . . . . . 1, 100 or 720 or 120.
character block, forward
only .
. 523 Stepping:.
· none .
.524 Skipping:.
· automatic over pre-edited
marked flaws.
.525 Marking:.
· holes punched in tape
indicate beginning and
flaws.
. 526 Searching: .
· none.
· Synchronizer.
Type No. 7914.
Connection to Device
.441 Size of load: . . . .
4/63
Blocks
· 0.5 inch.
• 431 Devices per controller:· 10.
.432 Restrictions: . . • . • • none.
.44
.51
Phrsical Dimensions
. 351 Overall width: .
.352 Length
Plastic: .
Metal:
CONTROLLER
.4
. 43
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
.511 Size of block:
•iHl Medium: . . . . . . . . . metal or plastic tape.
.32
.5
ill:
IV;
V:
· yes .
· yes.
· yes .
· no.
· yes.
· no .
· yes .
Char/block
1;100
720
1,100
720
120
.62 Speeds
• 621 Nomiruil or peak speed: I:
n:
ill:
IV:
V:
Char/inch
250
250
125
125
125
25,000
25, 000
12,500
12,500
12,500
char/sec .
char/sec .
char/sec.
char/sec .
char/sec.
INPUT-OUTPUT: UNISERVO MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
§
091.
. 72
.622 Impor.tant parameters
Name
Value
Read start/stop
125 cpi: . . . .
.18.3/16.3 msec.
Read start/stop
250 cpi;t. . . .
.12. 1/9. 2 msec.
Write start/stop
125 cpl: . . . . .
.18.8/17.8 msec.
Write start/stop
250 cpi:' . . . . .
.12.0/11.1 msec.
Gap 125 cpi/250 cpi:.
. 2.4/1. 05 inches
.623 Overhead; . . . .
.. . start/ stop time
.624 Effective speeds: . . . . I:
16,400 char/sec.
II.
13,600 char/sec.
III.
8,800 char/sec.
IV.
7,800 char/sec.
V.
2,600 char/sec.
.63
Demands on System
Coml!0nent
Central
Processor:
Condition
select unit
load or unload
buffeD
rewind
msec I!er block
Percentage
0.3
or
0.2 - 0.7
3.5
600.
or
2.6 - 7.6
Note: When computation is to be performed on
UNIVAC XS-3 coded information read from tape,
the data must be converted,to SS 80/90 code. Similarly, when preparing XS-3 coded information to
write on tape, the inverse conversion must be programmed. The cost in either case is a subroutine
which has an inside loop length of 3 instructions
requiring no less than O. 2 millisecond per word
using a translate instruction.
\.
771 :091.622
.7
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
.71
Adjustments
Adjustment
Metallic to Plastic:
Method
switch
© 1963
Other Controls
Function
Form
button
2 button lights
~:
Forward Backward:
.73
Comment
rewinds tape.
forces direction.
Loading and Unloading
.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Reel of Plastic
tape:
Capacity
.2,400 ft. or 5,500,000
Ci:har or more at 250
pulses per inch.
Reel of Metal tape:. . .1,500 ft. or 2,000,000
char at 125 pulses per
inch.
. 732 Replenishment time:
.733 Adjustment time:
.734 Optimum reloading
period: .
.....
.8
.1 to 6 minutes .
yes needs to be stopped .
. 0.5 to 1. 0 minutes.
.6.0 minutes.
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Check or
Interlock
Recording:
Reading:
Input area overflow:
OUtput block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
row parity
row parity
not possible.
not possible.
check
mechanical
interlock
Timing conflicts:
Noise in gap:
No sprocket pulse:
interlock
check
check
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Action
set indicator.
set indicator.
set indicator
turns off unit •
wait (tape passes) set
indicator.
wait.
set indicator.
set indicator.
Revised
4/63
771:111.100
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Model I
Simultaneous Operations
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
§
111.
The pasic Model I system consists of a central processor with almost totally buffered
input and output facilities, except for the limitation of only one magnetic tape operating at any
given time. The buffering would be complete except that it takes time to actually transfer the
data block from the drum buffer bands to the main drum storage area.
This transfer of a data block takes one drum revolution (3.4 milliseconds) per transfer,
except for transfers to the print buffer band, which take three revolutions per transfer. The
extent to which the peripheral units are used determines the load on the central processor.
When all units of a card system are working, the central processor penalty is less than 15
percent; for a tape system the delay is still less than 20 percent.
This simultaneity between all peripheral units and the computer applies only to a
basic system which has no RANDEX Drum. This uses the buffers otherwise allocated to the
tape units. Thus, there can be no simultaneity between reading or writing the RANDEX Units
and the Magnetic Tapes.
Tables
The following operations can progress simultaneously:
Processing.
Reading a card by means of High Speed Card Reader.
Reading paper tape.
Punching paper tape.
Printing a line.
Reading and/or punching a card by means of the Read-Punch Unit.
Reading or writing of a block of tape or a block from RANDEX.
Reposition any RANDEX heads not otherwise in use.
Rewinding any tape units, not otherwise in use.
I
"-.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Revised
4/63
nl:121. TOI
•
II
STANDARD
EDP
"fORIS
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Model I
Instruction List
§
121.
INSTRUCTION LIST
INSTRUCTION
OPERATION
OPERATION
ABSOLUTE X-6 or S-4
M
C
ARITHMETIC
70
ADD
75
85
SUB
MUL
55
M C
M C
M C
DIV
M
20
C
M
M
onoo
onoo
62
BUF
ERS
SHR
SHL
ZUP
-
C
00
JMP
M
C
35
32
37
67
82
87
82·
87·
C
C
C
C
HLT
TEQ
TGR
TEA
M C
M C
TGA
M
C
M
C
M
C
(M) + (rA)
(rA) - (M)
(rL) x (M)
(M)
(rL)
---"
--_"
--_"
---"
(rA)
(rA)
(rA)
(rA)
LOGIC
(rA) "OR" (M) _
(rA)
(rA) "AND" (M) (rA)
Shift (rA) and (rX) right, circular
Shift (rA) left Z e r o _ rA LSD
Zero and comma suppress (rA)
Jump
Halt, go to M or C depending on start button pushed
Compare (rA) to (rL); if =, go to M; if 'I , go to C
Compare (rA) to (rL); if =, go to M; if 'I, go to C
Compare (rA + bits 1 & 2 of rX); to (rL + bits 4 lit 5 of rX); if =, go
to M; if
go to C.
Compare (rA + bits 1 lit 2 or rX) to (rL + bits 4 lit 5 of rX); if = ,
go to M; if f' go to C
+,
• Bit is sign digit set (Model U only)
LIR
1IR
M
C
07
M
C
12
17
C3
Cl
CTM
MfC
MfX
XTM
-
C
C
25
IDA
60
05
STA
65
30
STX
50
77
STL
ATL
CLA
CLL
CLX
CM
CAX
02
26
31
06
36
86
IDX
IDL
M
C
M
C
M
M
M
M
M
M
-
M
M
M
M
M
MISCELLANEOUS INTERNAL
M _
Index Register
M
+ (Index Register)
" (Index Register), and m of (rA)
Zeros _
balance of rA
Translate card to computer code
Translate computer to card code
Translate XS-3 to computer code
Translate computer to XS-3 code
DATA TRANSFER
_
(rA)
(M)
(rA)
-(M)
(M)
C
(rX)
(rX)
C
(M)
_
(rL)
(M)
C
_
(A)
(rL)
CQ
_
(rL)
(rA)
C
_
(rA)
cot.... o
C··
o
(rL)
_
(rX)
C··
o
C" o
(rA), save sign
o
(rA), and (rX)
C
C
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Reprinted
4/63
771 :121.1 02
§
UNIVAC SS 80190 MODEL I
121.
INSTRUCTION LIST -Contd.
INSTRUCTION
OPERATION
OPERATION
ABSOLUTE X-6 or S-4
23
90*
FO*
BS'*
BO*
05 *
06*
CTA
SML
SMA
TCD
TDC
LSX
ZSR
M
C
M
-
M
M
M
M
M
M
C
C
C
C
C
C**
(rC)
• (rA)
M. S. D. of (M) Sign of (rL)
Sign of (M) M. S. D. of (rA)
1 to 200 words of Core Drum
1 to 200 words of Drum _
Core
(Bits 1 & 2 of M) (Bits of 4 & 5 of rX)
o
• Subregisters 3 and 4 of rX; sign +.
* Model
II only
CARD READ-PUNCH
S1
Sl
RCC
RCC
aaOO C
aaOl C
46
46
22
RBU
RBU
RBT
aaOO C
aaOl C
M C
57
RSS
C
72
HCC
96
96
42
HBU
HBU
HBT
aaOO C
aaOl C
47
HSS
OaOO C
Load punch buffer with binary image from band aa
Load punch buffer. translating the band aa machine code to card
image
Unload punch buffer transferring the binary image to band aa
Unload punch buffer translating to machine code into band aa
Test buffer; if loaded, go to M, (rC) ----r+ (rA); if not, go to
C
Select Stacker
HIGH SPEED READER
M
C
M C
Feed Card; if interlocked, go to M & (rC) _
(rA); if not,
ga to C
Unload buffer with binary image into band aa
Unload buffer translating to machine code into band aa
Test buffer; if loaded, go to M & (rC) (rA); if not, go
to C
Select stacker a
HIGH SPEED PRINTER
11
PRN
PFD
PBT
16
27
aann C
OOnn C
M C
Feed nn lines loading the print buffer from band lj.a
Feed nn lines
Test printer; if free, go to M, (rC) _
(rA); if not, go to C
MAGNETIC TAPE
C2
TST
M
C
C6
C7
F2
F2
F6
G2
TBL
TRW
TRW
TBU
TRD
aaOO
M
OaOO
0a20
aaOO
Oabc
C
C
C
C
C
C
H2
C6
TWR
TBL
OabO C
BXXX C
FX
TLB
IBXXX C
**
4/63
TBT
Synchronizer test; if free, go to M & (rC) _
(rA); if not,
ga to C
Load tape buffer from band aa (Drum)
Buffer Test; if free, go to M & (rC) _
(rA); if not, go to C
Rewind tape a
Rewind and disable tape a
Transfer contents of tape buffer to band aa
Read block from tape a, mode and density b, direction and gain
C
Write block on tape a, mode and density b
Load tape buffer from core, where BXXX is beginning word
address
Transfer contents of tape buffer to core address BXXX. BXXX
&s beginning word address (core)
If next instruction is to be found in core, then "M" and "C" must be same address.
Reprinted
INSTRUCTION LIST
§
771: 121.1 03
121.
INSTRUCTION LIST -Contd.
INSTRUCTION
OPERATION
ABSOLUTE X-6 or S-4
OPERATION
M
C
RANDEX
40
18
92
43
28
38
48
58
68
F6
C6
C7
LSR
POH
OBT
OPT
OWT
ORO
OWC
OSW
OSR
TBU
TBL
TBT
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
aaOO
aaOO
M
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C2
TST
M
C
Load Synchronizer Instruction Register
Position Head
Test HPFF, if set go to M; if not, go to C
Test head position; if positioned, set HPFF
Write a record
Read a record
Write and check a record
Find record and write
Find record and read
Transfer contents of tape buffer to band aa
Transfer contents of band aa to tape buffer
Test Tape buffer: if free, rC _ r A and go to M; if not, go
to C
Test Synchronizer: if free, rC
• rA and go to M; if not,
go to C
N. B.
l.
There are 4 special registers:
rA:
rC:
rL:
rX:
Accumulator
Command (complete instruction)
Lower accumulator
Used for comparisons and code conversions
2. Next instruction specified by C unless otherwise
stated.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Reprinted
4/63
771:131.100
.STANDIRD
EDP
•
REPORTS
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Model I
Coding Specimen
X-6
CODING SPECIMEN: X - 6
§ 131.
.1
CODING SPECIMEN
SAMPLE LISTING
The following is a sample of the listing produced by X-6 which affords the programmer a detailed correlation of machine and X-6 code.
X6B90
OP
CD
LOCA OP MMMM CCCC K
A TAG
e
OP
M TAG
e TAG
TP
CD
ADDRESS
AAR
0200 5D 4002
AAR
0204 3 I
AAR
4 0207 25 4009
AARIN
STL AAR5F AAR2N
AAR2N
eLL
21 I
8
LDA W
TEO
AAR
0211
414
214
AAR3N
AAR
0414 50 4116
218
19N
STL W
AAR
0218 30 4002
254
AAR
0214 05 4009
261
IN
LOX W
AAR
82
204
207
9026126
o
AAR3N
19N
IN
LOL AAR5F MARIN
8
o
e LA
264
8
13
071659
COMMENTS
AAR
0001
SET EXIT
0002
REENTRY
0003
pppppuuuuu
0004
SWITCH
0005
ZERO TO
0006
GD TO MEMORY AVAILA81LITY RDUTINE
0007
PPPPPuuuuu
8
0008
8
0009
POINT CIRCLE
I A SETTING
10 0264 32 0500
272
SHR
0500
AAR
I I 0272 20
T
276
8UF
RX
0010
UUUUUPPPPP
AAR
12 0276 35 4028
280
ERS
29
00 I I
DDDDTDDODT
284
LOL
RA
0012
DDDOUOOOOP
8
AAR
13 0280 30
AAR
14 0284 06
AAR
15 0287 32 0500
295
SHR
0500
8
0014
AAR
16 0295 37 0500
303
SHL
0500
8
0015
AAR
17 0303
12
306
CTM
8
0016
0000000000
AAR
18030617
309
MTC
8
0017
RA
AAR
19 0509 32 0500
317
AAR
20 0317 37 0500
AAR
21032520
T
AAR
22 0329 82
AAR
CLX
48N
I
LDX AAR6N
0013
47N
SHR
0500
0018
325
SHL
0500
0019
329
8UF
RX'
532
332
TEQ
23 0532 25 4009
361
LOA W
AAR
2'4 0361
35 4013
365
ERS K
AAR
25 0365 37 0500
373
SHL
© 1963
2
FN I ND I CATOR
AAR
287
PAG E
ANALYSIS ROUTINE
0020
IS
IIIIUIIIII
RX
IS OOOOPOOOOO
OOOOUOOOOP
0021
IF NOT EQUAL OIGIT 5
0
0022
pppppuuuuu
8
0023
TTTTTTOOOO
0500
0024
UNPRIMEO PART OF OIGIT
6N
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
IS ALPHA
I 000000000000
5/63
771: 132.100
•
STANDARD
ED:!?
_
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Model I
Coding Specimen
S-4
RlPORTS
CODING SPECIMEN: S-4
§
132 •
•1
TRANSLATOR LISTINGS
CD NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
LOCA.
OP
0400
0404
0408
0611
0614
0418
0621
0416
0406
0414
0411
0421
25
30
87
82
30
87
82
67
67
67
MMMM CCCC
4999
0000
0400
0700
0402
0404
0406
0408
0611
0411
0414
0614
0416
0418
0621
0421
0411
0414
00005
00000
00007
00000
0005
0414
0411
0006
0004
0421
S
SYMA
RANGE
CC05
CC07
EQU
OUT
IN
OP
BLR
BLA
LDA
LDL
TGR
TEQ
LDL
LGR
TEQ
HLT
HLT
HLT
IR
SYMM SYM C
4999
0000
0400
0700
X
CC07
OUT
EQU
CC05
IN
EQU
OUT
5
7
0005
EQU
0006
OUT
0004
IN
remarks
Without Forward Search
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0400
25
0404
0408
0411
0414
0418
0621
0416
0406
0624
0424
0421
30
87
82
30
87
82
67
67
67
0000
0400
0402
4999
0700
0404
0406
0424
0624
0416
0421
0624
00000
00000
0005
0006
0004
0408
0411
0414
0418
0621
0424
00005
00007
0624
0424
0421
RANGE
CC05
CC07
EQU
OUT
IN
With Forward Search
The listings on the right show the symbolic coding;
those on the left show the final machine coded
program. The path of the program goes from RANGE
to the three possible end-points IN, OUT, or .. EQUAL.
Two of these, EQU and OUT, can·be reached from
two separate points in the program sequence.
BLR
BLA
LDA
HED
LDL
TGR
TEQ
LDL
TGR
TEQ
0000
0400
X
B
CC07
OUT
EQU
CC05
IN
EQU
HLT
HLT
HLT
0005
0006
0004
4999
0700
OUT
5
7
EQU
OUT
IN
When Forward search is not used, these are allocated
as soon as the first point is reached, wasting a drum
revolution each time the second path is taken. With
Forward search, the allocation starts with the later
path, and the delay is reduced to 13-word times (as
against 187 in the former case).
nl:141.100
•
STANDARD
II
REPORTS
EDP
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Model
Data Code Table
Internal
DATA CODE TABU: NO.1
§
141.
·1
.2
.21
• 22
. 23
USE OF CODE: • • . • . internal and printer.
STRUCTURE OF CODE
Character Size: ••
• 6 bit (split between two
words: Most significant =
zone or unprimed.
Least significant = numeric or primed).
Character Structure
.221 More significant
pattern: ••••
· 222 Less significant
pattern: • . • .
· 2 bits values for pattern
16, 32, 0, O.
• 4 bits values for pattern
I, 2, 4, 8.
© 1963.
Character Codes
LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
MOST SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
0
0
~
2
3
4
Space
16
32
NO
PRINT
A
J
B
K
C
L
M
D
$
:
)
&
5
6
7
8
9
E
F
G
H
I
*
48
+
/
S
T
U
,
%
N
V
0
W
P
Q
R
X
y
Z
(
..;
#
Reprinted
4/63
771: 142.100
•
II
STANDARD
EDP
REPORTS
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Model
Data Code Table
XS3
DATA CODE TABLE NO.2
§
142.
.1
.2
.21
.22
• 23
USE OF CODE:
. XS3 use to communicate
with other UNIVACMachines.
STRUCfURE OF CODE
Character Size: .
.6 bit:
Most significant = zone
or unprimed.
Least significant = numeric or unprime.
Character Structure
.221 More significant
pattern:
.222 Less significant
pattern:
.
. 2 bits: 16, 32.
.4 bits: I, 2, 4, 8.
© 1963
Character Codes
LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
by Auerbach Corporation and RNA Incorporated
MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
0
16
32
Space
,
..
;
)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
J
0
1
Z
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
.
48
:
H
I
#
K
L
M
N
0
P
Q
R
+
/
S
T
U
V
W
X
y
Z
&
(
Reprinted
4/63
771: 143.100
•
STANDARD
EDP
_
REPORTS
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Modell
Data Codes
Card Codes - Untranslated
DATA CODE TABLE NO, 3
§
.2
143.
.1
USE OF CODE:
In reading or punching
cards with non-standard
punching.
.2
STRUCTURE OF CODES
SO-Column
The SO-column punched card is represented in the
computer as 24 words. Each group of 10 columns
STRUCTURE OF CODES (Contd.)
SO-Column (Contd.)
forms a data word of 3 images called the unprimed,
primed and duo-primed images. Each image is a
computer word and is an exact representation of the
holes appearing on a particular section of the card a punch equals a "1" bit. The signs of all images
are positive.
Rows
y
X
o
1
---2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Columns
Word
0
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
0'
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
0"
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
1
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
I'
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
1"
(10 4-bit
chars}
Word
2
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
2'
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
2"
(10 4-bit
chars)
1-10
11-20
21-30
Word
3
(10 4-bit
cha;rs)
Word
3'
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
3"
(10 4-bit
chars)
31-40
Word
4
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
4'
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
4"
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
5
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
5'
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
5"
(10 4-bit
chars)
41-50
Word
6
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
6'
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
6"
(10 4-bit
chars)
51-60
61-70
Word
7
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
7'
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
7"
(10 4-bit
chars}
71-80
Row
90-Column
o
The 90-column punched card is represented in the
Central Processor as 20 words. Each group of 10
columns forms a data word of 2 images called the
umprimed and the primed images or a word-pair.
(Columns 41-45 and 86-90 are each treated as 10column groups and are placed into the 5 least significant digit positions in the computer words.)
Each image is a computer word and is an exact representation of the holes appearing on a particular
section of the card - a punch equals a "I" bit. The
signs of all images are positive.
© 1963
1
3
5
7
9
Columns
0
1
2
3
0'
l'
2'
3'
4
4'
1.10
11·20
21·30
31·40
41·45
5
6
7
8
9
5'
6'
7'
8'
9'
o
1
3
5
7
9
Columns
46·55
56·65
by Auerbach Corporation ond BNA Incorporated
66·75
76·85
86·90
4/63
UNIVAC SS 80/90 MODEL I
771:143.300
§
143 •
.3
EXAMPLES (80-Column card)
Card Column
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Alphabetic
Character
K
L
M
N
0
P
Q
R
S
T
y
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
X
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
3
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
4
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
9
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
Card
Row
lO-digit
Unprimed
Word
lO-digit
Primed
Word
I
lO-digit
Duo-primed
Word
Note:
Holes would appear in the punched card wherever a "I" occurs in the above table.
In bi -quinary. the three words would be:
Unprimed word:
4
4
4
4
4
.4
4
4
2
2
5
4
2
1
0
0
0
0
5
4
0
0
0
0
5
4
2
1
0
0
Primed word:
Duo-primed word:
4/63
771: 144.100
•
STANDARD
II
REPORTS
EDP
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Model I and II
Data Code Table No.4
Collating Sequence
DATA CODE TABLE NO.4
§
.3
144.
.1
USE OF CODE: .
.2
NUMERIC CODE
comparisons.
ALPHAMERIC CODE
(in ascending sequence)
0
1
2
(in ascending sequence)
o
1
3
2
4
3
4
Undigit A
Undigit B
Undigit C
5
Space
)
5
6
7
6
8
7
9
8
(
A
J
B
K
C
D
L
M
$
&
E
F
G
H
I
#
*
/
S
T
U
,
%
N
V
0
W
P
X
Q
R
y
Z
+
9
Undigit F
Undigit G
Undigit H
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
771: 151.100
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Modell
P.O. Facilities
PROBLEM ORIENTED FACILITIES
§
151.
. 13
.1
UTILITY ROUTINES
. 11
Simulators of Other
Computers:. . . .
none.
Simulation by Other
Computers:. . . .
none.
. 12
.13
Data Sorting and Merging (Contd. )
standard tape conventions (labels, sentinels, block
counts, etc.) .
Similar routines are available for 5, 10, 25, and
50 word items .
.14
Report Writing:
none.
Data Sorting and Merging
.15
Data Transcription: .
SR 012
Reference:
Record size:
Block size:
Key size:
File size:
Number of tapes:
Date available:
Description:
a body of input- output routines are available which
can be easily connected
for data transcription purposes.
.16
File Maintenance: .
none.
.17
Other
SROI2.
1 to 100 words.
100 words.
1 to 12 words.
4,800 block reel.
4 to 10.
currently.
SR 012 accepts as input a file of 12-word items
in the standard interlace from a tape written in USS
mode. It produces as output the same items in sequence, in the standard interlace, on a tape written
in USS mode. One full reel may be sorted at a
time; however, the input data may appear on more
than one tape. Both input and output tapes adhere to
© 1963
Program testing procedures, and a tape input-output
system (Mascot II) are available. A series of
mathematical function routines are available.
.2
PROBLEM ORIENTED LANGUAGES
A linear programming package is available.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
771:161.100
•
STANDARD
EDP
•
REP1lRTS
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Model I
Process Oriented Language
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE
§
161.
• 12
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
Process Oriented languages.
FLOW MATIC
COBOL
UNITRAN.
© 1963
Description
These systems have been announced at various times
for one or more parts of the UNIVAC 88 80/90
series. They have now been withdrawn.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
771 :171.100
.STAl Clown to lU.
:W Clown tOb
SEARCH: • . . . .
. 522 Checking only: . • . . • 100 down to 10 120 down to 10•
• 523 Translating without
70 down to 10 90 down to 10.
FORWARD SEARCH:
The number instruction per
minute decreases as the
store fills, therefore requiring that the tables be
searched more before allocation can take place.
. 53
In estimating where such a location could be, the assembler uses either the maximum instruction times
for the specific instruction or the time given with
the instruction .
yes .
no.
yes, by omitting punching
the object program.
yes, Re~Set card inserted
between decks automatically causes
re- initialization.
yes, as for patching.
Bulk: Translating:
yes, by halting output of
object program .
yes.
no.
yes, Re-Set card inserted
between decks automatically causes re-inltialization.
Optimizing Data
The assembler allocates the nearest-to-optionallocation available whenever it comes to a previously unallocated symbol. This allocation· is made under control of the programmer's general instructions as to
which level of store should be used •
When FORWARD SEARCH is in progress, this allocation is finally made backwards, which tends to prevent uneven distribution of data around the drum, and
prevents the loss of a cycle in some simple branch
and rejoin operations. The effect of FORWARD
SEARCH overall has not been determined and it is
unlikely to lead to an improvement in running time of
more than 20 percent .
Special Features
• 431 Alter to check only:
• 44
.46
Size Limitations
.231 Maximum number of
source and data
statements:
• 32
Program Diagnostics: . none can be inserted
directly, but the object
program can be made
compatible with the
standard diagnostic
programs.
Form
.221 Input media:
. 23
.45
. 54
Object ProgTam Performance
With full utilization of the 12 different control operations, FORWARD SEARCH, and of the Word Time
column on the coding sheet, timing efficiency should
approximate 90 per cent at the start of an assembly
and drop to about 70 per cent when the store is nearly
full.
With only simple coding, the efficiency factors are
probably 75 per cent and 50 per cent under the same
circumstances.
771: 182. 540
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: S-4
§
182.
• 62
Target Computer
.54
.621 Minimum configuration: any UNIVAC Solid-State
system.
The loss of efficiency, even in the best care, occurs .622 Usable extra facilities: card reader, card punch,
because the assembler is unable to judge the comparand printer.
ative costs of and value of the allocation it makes, and
core storage for UNIVAC
therefore cannot juggle them around to obtain optional
Solid-State II system.
overall performance.
RANDEX units.
Paper Tape units.
The object program requires no more space than machine code programmer's does.
.6
COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS
.61
Translating Computer
Object Program Performance (Contd.)
.7
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Check or
lnterlotk
.611 Minimum configuration: UNIVAC Solid-State Model I
with 5,000 word drum
(either SS 80 or SS 90
systems can be used).
Missing enuies:
Unsequenced entries:
Duplicate names:
Improper format:
}
Incomplete entries:
. 612 Larger configuration
advantages:. . • • •
Target computer
overflow:
check
Inconsistent program:
none
magnetic tapes give faster
compilation and better
re-assembly and library
facilities.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Action
none.
none.
none.
various checks. to ensure
apparently valid entry. error rotation on
output •
fictitious entry
placed in all
positions.
assembly continues.
4/63
771: 191.100
.STAIIDARD
EDP
•
REPORlS
UN IV AC SS/80/90 Model I
Operating Environment
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
§
191.
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
· 12
Description
. 23
Loading Sequence: .
.3
HARDWARE
ALLOCATION: .
. . . • . . . no integrated system
available.
.4
No comprehensive superv,isor system has been published or announced for the UNIVAC Solid-State Systerns. The facilities described in this section must
be covered by incorporating specific routines in each
program.
RUNNING
SUPERVISION:
.51
Dynamic
........
.512 Snapshots: . •
presently available.
. 14
Originator: .
various.
. 15
Maintainer:
lJNIVAC Division of
Sperry Rand.
.2
PROGRAM LOADING
.21
Source of Programs
.211 Libraries:
can be held on cards and
physically chosen, or held
on tape and be loaded
under control of the tape
control system .
. 212 Independent programs: loaded from card and tape.
.213 Data: . . • . . . . . . . normally via card reader,
possible via Read/Punch
unit, or via tape.
· 214 Master routines:. . . . as for independent
programs.
• 22
Library subroutines:
can be inserted at translation time using the S-4 or
X-6 library facilities, if
they are written in the appropriate symbolic language; otherwise must be
treated as independent
programs.
© 1963
as incorporated in user's
program.
PROGRAM DIAGNOSTICS
.511 Tracing:
Availability:
as incorporated in user's
program.
.5
Normally, one 200-word band on the drum is reserved for loaders, dumps, traces, etc., and is not
used for the actual program.
.13
manual sequencing of card
decks or program tapes •
Instruction - by-instruction
trace available, provided
1 complete 200-word band
on the drum is reserved.
not available.
available provided 1 complete 200-word band on the
drum is reserved . (This
band may be the same one
used for loaders and for
tracing).
.52
Post Mortem:
.6
OPERATOR CONTROL: as incorporated in user's
program.
•7
LOGGING: • • • • • • . as incorporated in user's
program.
.8
PERFORMANCE
.81
System Requirements
.813 Reserved equipment:
.82
normally the first 200
words of the drum.
System Overhead
.821 Loading time: . .
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
condensed card decks at
3, 200 instructions or constants per minute.
Program tapes at 90, 000
instructions per minute
after the tape has been
positioned.
4/63
771 :201.011
_STANDARD
II
RePORTS
EDP
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Modell
System Performance
UNIVAC SS 80/90 MODEL I
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
©
1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
771:201.012
UNIVAC SS 80/90 MODEL I
UNIVAC SS 80/90 MODEL I SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 1
Configurotlon
Worksheet
Item
Reference
I
1
Char/block
Records/block
(FUe 1)
File 1 = File 2
msec/block
INPUTOUTPUT
TIMES
80
(File 1)
K
2
msec/block
8
100/400
67
File 3
100
100
File 4
133
133
-------
-------
File 3
File 4
msec penalty
1,000
0.5
File 1 = File 2
msec/switch
OTHERS
4:200.112
File 1 = File 2
3.4
3.4
File 3
3.4
3.4
File 4
10.2
10.2
al
19.9
13.1
a2
15.4
15.4
b6
7.0
7.0
msec/record
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR msec/detail
TIMES
msec/work
b5
+ b9
31.4
31.4
msec/report
b7
+ b8
43.0
43.0
msec
al
3
STANDARD
PROBLEMA
for C. P.
and
dominant
column.
a2 K
7.7
123.0
a3 K
40.7
651.0
File 1 Mas ter In
3.4
3.4
File 2 Master Out
3.4
File 3 Details
1.7
27.2
File 4 Reports
5.2
83.0
1,133.0
904.1
1,133.0
Total
STANDARD
PROBLEMA
SPACE
Unit of measure
400
82.0
400
3.4
(10-digit words)
Std. routlnes
600
600
Fixed
200
200
3 (Blocks 1 to 23)
300
300
6 (Blocks 24 to 48)
240
240
Files
500
500
Working
100
100
1,900
1,900
4:200.1151
Totsl
4/63
Prlnter
13.1
4:200.114
F= 1.0
4
C.P.
19.9
4:200.1132
771:201.100
_STANDARD
EDP
•
REPORTS
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Modell
System Perform once
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
.112 Computation: .
.113 Timing Basis: .
. standard.
. using estimating
procedure outlined in
Users' Guide, 4:200.113 .
. 114 Graph:. . . . . . . .
see graph below.
1,900 words •
. 115 Storage Space Required
201.
·1
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING
· 11
Standard File Problem A
· 111 Record Sizes
Master File:
Detail File:
Report File:
108 characters.
1 card.
1 line.
1,000.0
7
4
2
I(~
100.0
7
4
Time in Minutes
to Process
10, 000 Master
File Records
----
2
~III'V
10.0
.-
7
~
4
V
/
2
1.0
7
4
2
O. 1
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Fa.ctor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
© 1963
by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incorporated
Revised
4/63
771 :201.120
UNIVAC SS 80/90 MODEL I
§ 201.
• 12
.122 Computation:
. 123 Timing Basis:
. standard .
using estimating
procedure outlined in
Users' Guide, 4:200.12 •
• 124 Graph: • . . . . . • . . see graph below .
Standard File Problem B
• 121 Record Sizes
Master File:
Detail File:
Report File:
• 54 characters.
1 card .
. lUne.
1,000.0
7
4
2
10
100.0
7
4
Time in Minutes
to Process
2
10, 000 Master
File Records
~II'V
-
10.0
7
.JII'
4
~
./
'"
2
1.0
7
4
2
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.33
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
4/63
Revised
1.0
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
n1:201.130
201.
. 13
.132 Computation:
.133 Timing Basis:
Standard File Problem C
.131 Record Sizes
Master File:
Detail File:
Report File:
216 characters.
1 card.
1 line.
. 134 Graph:. . . . • . • . •
standard.
using estimating procedure outlined in Users'
Guide, 4:200.13
see graph below •
1,000.0
7
4
2
I(~
100.0
7
4
Time in Minutes
to Process
10, 000 Master
File Records
2
~
10.0
.-
7
-
~
4
I-'
./
2
1.0
7
4
2
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
© 1963
by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incorporated
Revised
4/63
UNIVAC SS 80/90 MODEL I
771 :201.140
§
.142 Computation: .
.143 Timing Basis: .
201.
. 14
Standard File Problem D
. 144 Graph:. . . . . .
.141 Record Sizes
Master File:
Detail File:
Report File:
trebled.
using estimating procedure outlined in Users'
Guide, 4: 200 .14.
see graph below •
108 characters.
1 card.
1 line.
1,000.0
7
4
2
I(~
100.0
7
4
Time in Minutes
to Process
10, 000 Master
File Records
2
10.0
---
7
4
---
-----
~I'I1I'V
./
/
2
1.0
7
4
2
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.33
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
4/63 . Revised
1.0
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
771:201.200
201.
.212 Key size: . . .
. 213 Timing Basis: .
.214 Graph:
.2
SORTING
.21
Standard Problem ,Estimates
.211 Record size:
· 8 characters.
· as in 4:200.22 .
· see graph below .
. . . . . . 80 characters.
1,000
7
4
-
.
.
2
-
/
/
100
'/ /
/
7
/
/
11/ /
4
//
0/ V
2
Time in Minutes to
Put Records Into
Required Order
V
V
10
7
Y
V
1/
/
17
/
4
1/
/
V/
2
/
/
[/
l/
1/
/
1//
1/
7
/
4
2
0.1
/
/ / V
V/ V V
V/ V
4
2
7
2
1,000
100
4
7
2
10,000
4
7
100,000
Graph E. Number of Records
©
1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Reprinted
.5/63
771:211.101
II",,"'"'
II
EDP
"PORTS
UNIVAC SS 80/90 MODEL I
Physical Characteristics
UNIVAC SS 80/90 MODEL I
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
©
1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
UNIVAC SS 80/90 MODEL I
771:211.102
UNIVAC SS 80/90 MODEL I PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Central
Processor
High Speed
Printer
High Speed
SO-Col. Reader
Card Read
SO-Col.
Punch Unit
Model Number
SEE PRICES
7912
7935
7936
Height x width x depth, inches
69xl08~x32
53x72~x32
48x.50x24
54x49x27
3,532
1,538
758
950
27 13"
25 1 1"
24 17"
26 1 11"
26 13"
3
ToCP
27 10"
Cables
Ullit Name
IDENTITY
Weight, pounds
PHYSICAL
Maximum cable lengths
Power
Data
2711"
From CP
To CP
ToCP
Storage
Temperature, of.
NOT AVAll..ABLE
Ranges
Humidity, %
Working
Temperature, of.
60 0
85°
60 0
85°
60° - 85°
60° - 85 0
30 -70
30 -70
30 -70
30 -70
27,660
11,910
3,396
3,780
2,100
550
200
200
_
_
ATMOSPHERE
Ranges
Humidity, %
Heat dissipated, BTU/hr.
Air flow, cfm.
Nominal
208 - 240
Contained in Central Processor
Tolerance
± 10"/. into
regulator
Contained in Central Processor
60
Contained in Central Processor
±0.5
Contained in Central Processor
Single phase
3 wire
Contained in Central Processor
16.9
Contained in Central Processor
Voltage
Nominal
ELECTRICAL
Cycles
Tolerance
Phases and lines
Load KVA
1. Maximum floor loading.
150 Ibs./sq. ft.
2. For all equipment 90%
Filtration per US Bureau of
Standards. Dust Spot Discoloration Test.
NOTES
~
Ir-A-U-ER-BA-CH-,7""@]
5/63
Revised
3. Internal dust filtera are
provided.
PHYSICAL CHARACT ER ISTICS
771:211.103
UNIVAC SS 80190 MODEL I PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS (Contd.)
Unlservo II
Magnetic
Tape Unit
First Randex
24 Million
Digits Unit
First Randex
12 Million
Digits Unit
Additional
Randex
24 Million
Digits Unit
Synchronizer
7915
7957
7965
7966
7914
69x 76x33
69 x 76x33
69x76x33
69x76 x32
69 x48 x31
2,335
2,335
2,335
2,566
1,284
69 x31 x31
758
Randex Power
Control Unit
,
I
18'10"
Drum to Synchronizer 67 ft. maximum.
21'S"
Information not currently
To SYNC
22'4"
available
To SYNC
58 ft. to
Synchronizer
To SYNC
To SYNC
FromCP
NOT AVAILABLE
60° _ 85 0
60 0 _85°
60° - 85 0
60°-85°
60° _ 85°
60° - 85°
30 -70
30 -70
30 -70
30 -70
30 -70
30 -70
8,160
7,140
7,140
7,140
11,520 to
15,180
4,080
300
550
550
S50
2,100
360
See Note 4
208 - 240
See Note 4
± 10'J1. to
regulator
±10%
InfoJmation not curre'ntly
60
60
available
±O.S
±O.S
lor 3
1 .r 3
4.3 KVA
2.4 KVA per
Drum
FROM RANDEX
PO~ER
1¢ 3 wire
2.7 each
2.4 KVA each
4. Contained
in Synchronizer
©
1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Revised
5/63
771:221.101
•
STANDARD
EDP
mom
•
§
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Model I
Price Doto
PRICE DATA
221.
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
Name
No.
MODELl
STEP
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
7944
7934
7947
7937
90-Column Card
80-Column Card
90-Column Card
80-Column Card
Monthly
Rental
Monthly
Maintenance
$
Purchases
$
$
Only
Only
and Tape
and Tape
Standard Equipment:
2,400 Words 1.7 msec. average
access store
200 Words 0.4 msec. average
access store
3 Index Registers
Options:
Program Interrupt
Multiply and Divide
200 Words of 0.4 msec.
average access store (800
word max.).
400 Words of 1. 7 msec.
average access store (1,600
word max.).
MODEL I
7907
STANDARD 7909
7933
CENTRAL 7913
PROCESSOR
PRICES
1,735
350
110,000
60
400
70
3,000
12,000
275
20
10,250
400
25
12,500
600
213,000
90-Column Card Only
80-Column Card Only
90-Column Card and Tape
80-Column Card and Tape
Standard Equip ment:
4,000 Words 1. 7 msec. average
access store.
1,000 Words 0.4 msec. average
access store.
Multiply and Divide
3 Index Registers
Options:
Program Interrupt
MODEL 1
7940
EXPANDED 7930
4,835
60
-
3,000
90-Column Card and Tape
80-Column Card and Tape
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
Standard Equipment:
5,635
620
248,200
7,600 Words 1. 7 msec.
average access store
1,600 Words 0.4 msec.
average access· store
Multiply and Divide
3 Index Registers
i
Options:
Program Interrupt
© 1963
60
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
-
3,000
Revised 5/63
772:221.102
§
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Model II
221:
PRICE OAT A (Contd.)
PRICES
lDENfITY OF UNIT
CLASS
No.
Name
Monthly
Rental
$
INPUT-
OUTPUT
7945
7935
600 cpm 90-Column Card Reader
(or)
600 cpm 80-Column Card Reader
(1 max)
Monthly
Maintenance
$
Purchase
$
255
55
11,200
255
55
11,200
Stacker Select
50
10
2,300
80-Column Read Feature
35
18
1,350
90-Column Read Feature
35
18
1,350
725
200
32,000
725
200
32,000
100
100
50
20
2Q
10
4,200
4,200
2,300
1,000
250
50,000
Uniservo II (max 10 per
synchronizer)
450
112
20,.000
Paper Tape Reader
700
Options:
7946
7936
150 cpm 90-Column Read Punch
(or)
150 cpm 80-Column Read Punch
(1 max)
Options:
Preread'(80- or 90-Column)
Post read (80- or 90-Column)
Stacker Select
7914
7915
Synchronizer (Tape and Randex)
(2 max)
Paper Tape Punch
100
)
35,000
170
5,000
Options:
Spooling Feature
STORAGE
7965
7957
7966
5/63
100
-
5,000
RANDEX Unit (First)
(max 1) 12 million digits
1,900
565
125,000
RANDEX Unit (First)
(max 1) 24 millio digits
2,500
650
140,000
RANDEX Unit 24 million digits
(Additional) (max 9)
1,900
195
85,000
PRICE DATA
§
771:221.103
221.
PRICE DATA (Contd.)
PRICES
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
No.
Name
Monthly
Rental
$
INPUTOUTPUT
7914
7915
Synchronizer (Tape and Randex)
(1 max)
Monthly
Maintenance
Purchases
$
$
1,000
250
50,000
Uniservo II (max 10 per
synchronizer)
450
112
20,000
Paper Tape Reader
700
Paper Tape Punch
170
100
l
35,000
5,000
Options:
Spooling Feature
STORAGE
7965
7957
7966
100
-
5,000
RANDEX Unit (First)
(max 1) 12 million digits
1,900
565
125,000
RANDEX Unit (First)
(max 1) 24 million digits
2,500
650
140,000
RANDEX Unit 24 million digits
(Additional) (max 9)
1,900
195
85,000
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and RNA Incorporated
Revised 5/63
\
'----
(
UNIVAC 55 80/90
MODEL II
Univac
(A Division of Sperry Rand Corporation)
~
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
..
UNIVAC SS 80/90
MODEL II
Univac
(A Division of Sperry Rand Corporation)
. AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
772:001.001
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Model II
Contents
CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7•
8.
9.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
17.
18.
19 .
futroduction....
Data Structure • • .'
System Configuration
4-Tape Business System
6-Tape Business System
12-Tape Business System
6-Tape Auxiliary Storage
6-Tape Business/Scientific.
futernal Storage
Magnetic Drum
Magnetic Core
RANDEX Drum Storage
Synchronizer
Central Processor.
••••••
Console
Central Processor Control Panel
fuput- Output: Punched Tape and Cards
High Speed Reader (80 column)
High Speed Reader (90 column)
Read Punch (80 column)
Read Punch (90 column)
Paper Tape Reader •
Paper Tape Punch
fuput- Output: Printers
High Speed Printer
fuput-Output: Magnetic Tape
Uniservo Magnetic Tape Unit
Synchronizer
Simultaneous Operations
fustruction List
Coding Specimen
S-4
Data. Codes
futernal and Printer
XS-3
••
••
Binary Card Code
Collating Sequence
Problem Oriented Facilities .
Machine Oriented Languages
S-4.
• .•
Program Language Translator
S-4 • • •
Operating Environm ent • • .
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
772:011
772:021
772:031
772:031. 101
772:031. 102
772:031. 103
772:031. 104
772:031. 105
772:041
772:042
772:043
772:043.4
772:051
772:061
772:071
772:071
772:072
772:072
772:073
772:074
772:081
772:091
772:091.4
772:111
772:121
772:131
772:141
772:142
772:143
772:144
772:151
772:171
772:181
772:191
5/63
UNIVAC SS 80/90 MODEL II
772:001.002
CONTENTS (Contd.)
20.
21.
22.
5/63
System Performance . • • • • • . • • .
Worksheet Data • . . . • •
Generalized File Processing •
Sorting •.
Physical Characteristics
Price Data . . . • • • •
772:201
772:201.011
772:201.1
772:201.2
772:211
772:221
n2:011.100
UNIVAC 55 80/90 Model "
Introduction
INTRODUCTION
§ OIl.
The UNIVAC Solid-State Model II computer system consists of a central processor
with a drum store, a core store of 1,240 words (a word consists of 10-digits plus a sign),
and buffered peripheral units. Standard peripherals include a 600 card per minute card
reader, 150 card per minute read punch unit, 600 line per minute printer, and up to 20 tape
units. RANDEX mass storage drums, paper tape equipment, etc., can all be added; however, inclusion of these units in a configuration is comparatively rare as yet.
The principle advantage of the Model II over the Model I is that a greater amount of
internal processing can be performed in a given time than was the case with the Model I.
Concurrently, the complexities of programming involved in getting an efficient input-output
limited program working for the Model I have been greatly reduced in the Model II through
the use of the core store, new instructions, and faster instruction execution for certain conditions. (See Central' Processor, Section :051)
The Model II has a fixed word length of 10 digits plus a sign digit. Data not conforming to the word size exactly must be extracted by means of the logical and shift instructions, and isolated before being used. Similarly, data for output by printer or punch may
have to be prepared by the reverse process. Alphameric data are considered as two
numeric digits and held in separate words; therefore, all manipulations to isolate or pack
such data must be repeated.
The UNIVAC Solid-State system originally was conceived as an integrated card
system, with cards being read and punched, output being printed all at the same time, and
the central processor powerful enough to keep up with this loading. The system has now
been expanded by the addition of the tapes, but in many ways it is still card-oriented, using
the tapes for large volume files. The tape format, when placed on the drum storage is
awkward, owing to the different character representation (six-bit character rather than
four- bit character).
The performance of the Model II is basically limited by the input-output speeds of
its peripherals, all of which can operate in parallel with processing. Computation, however, can proceed at any speed up to 10 times faster than the Model I, and is frequently
faster than on the IBM 1401. Applications which require several thousand words of storage
(drum) and/or use a considerable amount of computation can be conveniently handled.
Model II processors can have from 2, 600 to 8, 800 words of drum storage. The
Model II processor contains 9 index registers and 1,280 words of magnetic core storage as
standard equipment. The Model II processor also has an expanded instruction complement
which permits block transfer of words between core and drum, data packing, and easier
programming of alphameric operations.
Both processors handle data in words which contain 10 digits plus a sign bit. Each
digit has an odd parity bit associated with it. Parity is checked during all data movements
to or from storage. Both alphameric and numeric data can be handled and comparisons
made. Additional program steps are required for alphameric comparisons. Standard subroutines facilitate this operation.
The primary differences between the Solid-State 80 and the Solid-State 90 processors
are the code translation instructions and the buffer pattern arrangements. Each is peculiar
to the kind of card handled, 80- or 90-column. The storage of data words on the drum
optimizes input-output transfers to peripheral units. This involves the "interlaced" positioning of input-output data in order to achieve greater efficiency in the use of drum storage.
UNIVAC Solid-State systems are fully buffered so that virtually all the peripheral
units can operate simultaneously with computing. The exception is the input-output channels
© 1963 by
Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
UNIVAC SS 80/90 MODEL II
772:011.101
INTRODUCTION (Contd.)
§ all.
which are used with synchronizers. These synchronizers can control up to 10 magnetic
tape units and 10 RANDEX drum units. Only one unit connected to a synchronizer can be
read or written upon at a time. The Model I can have only one synchronizer, while the
Model II can have a second synchronizer which permits an additional 10 magnetic tape units
to be connected to the system. In Model I systems, only read/compute and write/compute
are possible. In Model II systems, read, write, and compute operations can be handled
simultaneously through the use of a second synchronizer.
The input-output units connected to anyone system in addition to the synchronizer
can include the following:
600
150
600
500
card per minute Card Reader.
card per minute Card Read-Punch.
line per minute Printer.
character per second Paper Tape Reader and/or 100 character per second Punch.
The software provided for the system includes service routines, mathematical
functions and routines, linear programs, and two assembly programs (X-6 and the more
recent S-4). X-6 is an elementary drum-type assembly program for Model I processors
and S-4 is a more advanced system incorporating provision to call in symbolic library routines for either Model I or Model II Processors. Problems coded in X-6 with minor revisions can be assembled using S-4.
From the pOint of view of software, very few programs which are written specifically for the Model II presently exist in the library. Most appear to be adaptations 'of their
Model I equivalents, and do not fully utilize the faster facilities. (Software support for the
Model I appears to be phasing out presently, and while users can look forward to new programming during the current year, it appears doubtful that anything other than maintenance
can be expected thereafter.)
Other systems carried over from the Model I include a BELL interpretive system
(user developed) and a numerical control system. No COBOL or FORTRAN systems are
presently available.
The Model II is essentially a modified ModelL For details, refer to the Introduction
for that system (Report 771:).
4/63
,/
772:021.100
.STANDAR'
II
REPORTS
EDP
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Model II
Doto Structure
DATA STRUCTURE
§
021.
.1
.2
STORAGE LOCATIONS
Name of
Location
Size
Purpose or use
Digit:
4 bits
Word:
44 bits
2 Words:
Band:
Block:
Track:
Sector:
Drum Half:
Units:
20 digits
200 words
48 words
12 blocks
20 tracks
100 sectors
4 drum halves
Decimal digit,
algebralic sign
Instruction or 10 digits
·and sign.
10 characters.
Magnetic drum.
RANDEX store.
RANDEX store.
RANDEX store.
RANDEX store.
RANDEX store.
© 1963
DATA FORMATS
Type of Information
Representation
Numeral: •.
Alphabetic: •
Instruction:
Number: •
Interlace: •
1 digit.
It or 2 digits.
I word.
10 digits + sign.
refers to input-output area
of each peripheral unit. It
consists of a number of
words on a single 200word band of the drum, the
arrangement and number
being fixed by the peripheral
unit and the type of data
transmission.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
772:031.101
•
STANDARD
II
R£PORTS
EDP
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Model II
System Configuration
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§
031.
.1
4-TAPE BUSINESS SYSTEM
Deviations from standard configuration:.
160% more storage.
full simultaneity included.
indexing included.
Equipment
Rental
Processor and Console:
2, 600 Word Drum.
1,280 Word Core Store.
$3,235
High Speed Reader:
600 cards/min.
255
Read Punch:
150 cards/min.
725
High Speed Printer:
600 lines/min.
935
Control:
4 Uniservo lIs
16,400 char/sec.
Optional Features Included:. • . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Interrupt.
Multiply-divide.
20 print positions.
Stacker-Select on Reader
and Punch.
Post-Read Station on
Punch.
TOTAL
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
1,000
1,800
60
400
30
100
100
$8,640
5/63
UNIV AC SS 80/90 MODEL II
772:031..102
§
031 .
.2
6-T APE BUSINESS SYSTEM
Deviations from standard configuration:
full simultaneity included.
no console typewriter.
magnetic tapes 50% slower.
6 extra Index Registers.
Equipment
Rental
Processor and Console:
2,600 Word Drum.
1 ..280 Word Core.
$3,235
High Speed Reader:
600 cards/min.
255
Read Punch:
150 cards/min.
725
High Speed Printer:
600 lines/min.
935
Control:
6 Uniservo lIs
16,400 char/sec.
Optional Features Included: • • • • . • • . • • • • • • ••
Program Interrupt.
Multiply-divide.
20 print positions.
Stacker Select on Reader
and Punch.
Post- Read Station on Punch.
TOTAL
5/63
1,000
2,700
60
400
30
100
100
$9,540
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§
. 772:031.{03
031.
.3
12-TAPE BUSINESS SYSTEM
Deviations from standard configuration:
900 words less storage.
no console typewriter.
Printer and Card Reader 40% slower.
Magnetic Tapes 75% slower.
Equipment
Rental
Control:
5 Magnetic Tape Units
16,400 char/sec.
$1,000
2,250
Core Storage:
1,280 words.
5,935
Processor and Console:
5,000 word Drum.
High Speed Reader:
600 cards/min.
255
Read Punch:
150 cards/min.
725
High Speed Printer:
600 lines/min.
935
Control:
7 Uniservo ITs
16,400 char/min.
Optional Features Include: . • • • • • . . . • • . . .
Program Interrupt.
Multiply-divide.
20 print positions.
Stacker-Select on Reader
and Punch.
Post- Read Station
on Punch.
TOTAL
© 1963
by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incorporated
1,000
3,150
60
400
30
100
100
$15,940
5/63
UNIVAC SS 80/90 MODEL II
772:031.104
§
03l.
.4
6-TAPE AUXILIARY STORAGE
Deviation from standard configuration:
no console typewriter.
full simultaneity included.
magnetic tape units 50% slower.
Equipment
Rental
Store:
21. 5 million characters in
2 RANDEX File Drum Units.
$2,500
Control:
6 U,niservo lIs
16,400 char/sec.
Processor and Console:
2, 600 word Drum.
1,200 core store.
Optional Features Include: • • • • . . . . . . . • . .
¥1
I
5/63
A-U-ER-BA-CH----:-c'
3,235
High Speed Reader:
600 cards/min.
255
Read Punch:
150 cards/min.
725
High Speed Printer:
600 lines/min.
935
Program Interrupt.
Multiply-divide.
20 print pOSitions.
Stacker- Select on Reader
and Punch.
Post- Read Station
on Punch.
TOTAL
'-1
1,000
1,800
60
400
30
100
100
$11,140
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§
772:031.105
03!.
.5
6-T APE BUSINESS/SCIENTIFIC
Deviations from standard configuration: •
no floating pOint.
no console typewriter.
full simultaneity included.
magnetic tape units 50% slower.
Equipment
Rental
Core Storage:
1,280 words.
$7,135
Processor and Console:
8,800 Word Drum.
High Speed Reader:
600 cards/min.
255
Read Punch:
150 cards/min.
725
High Speed Printer:
600 cards/min.
935
Control:
6 Uniservo lIs
16,400 char/sec.
1,000
2,700
Optional Features Include: . . • • • • . . . • • . • • . Program Interrupt.
20 Print Positions.
Stacker Select on
Reader and Punch.
Post-Read Station
on Punch.
60
30
100
100
TOTAL
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
$13,040
5/63
772:041.100
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Model II
Internal Storage
Magnetic Drum
INTERNAL STORAGE: MAGNETIC DRUM
§
041.
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.1
GENERAL
. 21
Storage Medium: .
.11
Identity: • . . . . . . . SS 80/90 Magnetic Drum,
Model I and Model II.
.22
Physical Dimensions
. 12
Basic Use: .
. 13
Description
working storage .
. magnetic drum .
. 222 Drum or Disc
Diameter: . . . • • . approx. 5 inches.
Thickness or length: . approx. 8 inches.
Number on shaft: •.
1.
magnetization.
The Magnetic Drum is the major store for all UNIvAc Solid-State systems. The drum rotates once
every 3.4 milliseconds, and any reference to an operand or an instruction must wait until the drum is
correctly positioned under the read/write heads.
This action can take up to the 3.4 milliseconds necessary for a full revolution; however, for I, 2, 3,
4, 5 or 8 bands of the drum, the maximum is reduced to O. 85 millisecond by the use of 4 read/write
heads spaced 90 degrees apart around the circumference of the arum. (The nomenclature of these
portions is confusing and has varied over the years.
The official terminology is "Fast Access" for the
slower access area of the drum, and "High Speed
Access" for the faster access areas. Alternatively,
the terms ''Normal'' and "Fast" have also been used
to describe the same respective areas.)
.23
Storag:e Phenomenon:
.24
Recording: Permanence
.25
Data Volume Per Band of 5 Tracks
Information is arranged on the drum in bands of 200
words, each of eleven 4-bit characters, and is operated upon in the Model I as words of 10 numeric
characters with sign bit. However, the Model II
uses the full four-bit sign character. 'TWo models
of the drum are available, a 25-band (5, OOO-word)
drum, and a 46-band (9, 200-word) drum. These
numbers for bands do not include the buffer bands,
which are also actually located on the drum. The
smaller drum can be supplied with only 13 or more
of the 25 bands being usable as in the STEP (Simple
Transaction to Economical Processing). The other
bands, however, are still physically present. Each
band has either one or four read/write heads, so
that the respective maximum access time is either
one complete revolution or one-fourth of a revolution (3. 4 milliseconds).
.26
Words with sign: •
Characters:
Digits: .
Instructions: .
Bands Per Physical Unit:
. 27
Interleaving Levels: •
.28
Access Techniques
The decreased price which results from reduction
in the drum storage capacity accounts for the
greatest part of the price difference between the
basic UNIVAC Solid-State system, and the reduced
systems.
.14
Availability:
10 months.
.15
First Delivery:
1958.
.16
Reserved Storage
Purpose: . . . . .
Number of locations:
.241 Data erasable by
program: . . . .
.242 Data regenerated
constantly: . . .
.243 Data volatile:
. 244 Data permanent: .
.245 Storage changeable:
yes.
no.
no.
no.
no.
·.
· ..
·.
. 281 Recording method: .
• 283 Type of access
..
Description of Stage
Wait for drum
rotation:
Read or write word:
·.
.29
.291 Peak bit rates
Cycling rates:
Track/head speed: .
Bits/inch/track:
Bit rate per track:
.292 Peak data rates
Unit of data:
fixed heads.
Possible Starting Stage
yes.
no.
17,670 rpm.
4,628 inches/sec.
153.
707,000 bits/sec/track.
word (5 alpha or 10
numeric char).
60 bits/word.
5 tracks /band.
Conversion factor: .
Gain factor: ·
Loss factor (degree of
interleaving): .
none.
58,825 words/sec.
Data rate:
...
© 1963
1.
Potential Transfer Rates
· ..
I/O control.
2 to 4 bands, 200 words
each.
200.
1,000.
'2,000.
200.
15 to 49 per drum.
· .....
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Model II
772:041.300
§
041.
•3
DATA CAPACITY
• 31
Module and System
Sizes: • • • • . . •
• 32
see table.
Rules for Combining
Modules: •.•
•4
CONTROLLER:
.5
ACCESS TIMING
.51
Arrangement of Heads
any combination of increments is possible.
CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: . • . . . . none .
.7
AUXILIARY STORAGE PERFORMANCE
.71
Data Transfer: . . . . data can be transferred
from the drum to any part
of the computer store .
. 72
Transfer Load Size
none.
With self:
18 to 79 .
• 511 Stacks per system:
18 to 79.
Stacks per module:
Stacks per yoke: . .
I, 2, or 4.
none .
. 512 Stack movement: . .
. 513 Stacks that can access
any particular
location: • . • . • . ". 1 per band, fast access.
4 per band, high speed"
access •
• 514 Accessible locations
200 words.
By single stack: ..
· 515 Relationship between
stacks and
Band (Address/200).
locations:. . . . • .
Band position
Address (mod 200) .
• 53
.6
. 1 word, or 200 via tape
buffer •
. " 1 to 200 words.
With core:
.73
Effective Transfer Rate
High speed store
with self: • . .
1,850 words/sec.
High speed store
with fast store:
460 words/sec.
Fast store with self:"
460 words/sec.
High speed or fast store
magnetic core:
. . lD,OOO words/sec.
Access Time Parameters and Variations
.531 For uniform access
Access time:. .
Cycle time:. . • .
For data unit of: .
.532 For variable access
Stage
Wait for word to
reach head
Fast: . . . . •
High Speed:
Transmit word:
Total:
.8
o to 3,400 p.sec.
17 p,sec.
1 word.
Example
Time
o to 3,400 p,sec
o to 850 p,sec
17 p,sec
1,700.
425.
17.
. 2,142.
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Errors
Check or
liiterlock
Action
Invalid address:
none
Receipt of data:
Dispatch of data:
Conflicting
commands:
Recovery of data:
parity
parity
accesses a predictable
address.
sets indicator.
processor stop.
yes
parity
processor stop.
processor stop •
MODULE AND SYSTEM SIZES
Identity:
Drums:"
Words:
Characters:
Instructions:
Bands:
Digits:
Modules:
4/63
Minimum
Storage
"Fast"
Increment
1
2,600
17,333
2,600
13
26,000
200
1,333
200
1
2,000
I
"-
-
High Speed
Increment
-
400
2,666
400
2
4,000
-
Maximum Storage
1
8,800
59,000
8,800
44
88,000
1
772:042.100
.STANDAAO
EDP
•
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Model II
Internal Storage
Magnetic Core
REPORTS
INTERNAL STORAGE: MAGNETIC CORE
§
.16
042.
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity:
Magnetic Core .
Core.
. 12
Basic Use:
working storage .
. 13
Description:
Reserved Storage
Purpose
The magnetic core store is the major difference between a Model II UNIVAC Solid-State system and a
ModelL The effect of this difference has been to
increase considerably the amount of processing that
can be perfo;nned in a given time period. This increase means that many applications which were formerly computer-limited become input-output limited.
Naturally, applications which are initially input-output limited will not be affected.
Transfer of a Model I program to Model II may not
automatically relieve computerbound applications.
The reason is to be found in the means of addressing the core. Addressing the core uses non-numeric
characters, which are not always as easy to handle
as the numeric addresses of the drum store. As a
result, currently running applications may require
reprogramming to capitalize fully on the potential
advantages of the faster core store.
The core store is actually faster than the basic
machine word time (13.5 microseconds rather than
17). Thus, any word in the core store can be
accessed only each 17 microseconds. The tape
units can use the core store as their input-output
areas, but data from input-output units must first
be entered onto the actual drum store, and then
transferred to core separately.
The magnetic core contains 1,280 words of 44 bits,
and is divided into two logically separate areas:
Index registers:
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
. 21
Storage Medium:
.22
Physical Dimensions:
Storage phenomenon: .
magnetization .
.24
Recording Permanence
.28
. 15
First Delivery: .
July, 1962.
© 1963
yes.
no.
yes.
no.
no.
Access Techniques
. 281 Recording method:
. 282 Reading method:
.283 Type of access:
.3
DATA CAPACITY
.31
Module and System Sizes
Both areas can operate as working storage for both
data· and instructions, but area (b) is intended for
use as index registers and other special uses, and
it has two restrictions: first, any instruction that uses
index registers or causes overflow, error jumps, or .4
block transfers is not executed correctly from this
area; second, any address to core storage formed by .5
indexing is effected in a non-standard manner.
.53
Transfers to core are possible directly to and from
the input- output area buffer bands but must be made
from sections commencing at an address which is a
~. 531
multiple of 200.
10 months .
magnetic core .
. 23
(a) the first 1,000 locations
(b) the last 280 locations.
Availability:
none.
64 by 64 bits.
16.
.241 Data erasable by program:
.242 Data regenerated
constantly:
.243 Data volatile:
.244 Data permanent:
.245 Storage changeable:
Locks
6
.221 Magnetic ·core type
storage
Array size:
No. of arrays
Words:
Characters:
. 14
Number of
Locations
Instructions:
Digits:
Digits and Signs:
Modules: .
coincident current.
sense wire .
uniform.
Only Size
1,280
64, 000 or 85, 333 depending
on packing.
1,280
12,800
14,080
1
CONTROLLER:
None.
ACCESS TIMING
17 msec/word.
Access Time Parameters and Variations
For unifo;rm access
Access time:
Cycle time:
For data unit of:
For actual unit of: .
by Auerbach Corporation and 'BNA Incorporated
13.5 fJ sec.
17fJsec.
44 bits.
48 bits (i. e., with 4 parity
bits).
4/63
UNIVAC. 55 80/90
772:042.600
§
.8
042.
.6
CHANGEABLE STORAGE: . . . . . .
none.
.7
AUXILIARY STORAGE PERFORMANCE
.71
Data. Transfer . . . . data. can be transfer:red between ,the core and the
drum.
.72
Transfer Load Size
With self: . . . • •
With drum:
.73
1 word.
1 to 200 words.
Effective Transfer Rate
With self (using
program loop): . • . . 7.356 words per second.
4/63
~ODEL
J1
ERRORS. CHECKS AND ACTION
Errors
Check or
Interlock
Invalid address
none
Receipt of data:
Dispatch of data:
Conflicting com mands:
Physical record
missing:
Recovery of data:
parity
parity
Action
any specific invalid address
will refer to a
predictable but
incorrect
address.
stop.
stop.
not possible.
not possible.
parity
stop.
m:043.100
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Model II
Internal Storage
Randex Drum
INTERNAL STORAGE: RANDEX DRUM
§
043.
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: .
. 12
Basic Use: .
. 13
Description:
RANDEX Drum Storage
Types No. 7965, 7957,
and 7966.
RANDEX.
auxiliary storage.
The RANDEX Drum storage provides the auxiliary
storage for the solid- state system. Each module
has the capacity for either one or two drums. Each
drum has a capacity of 1,152,000 words of 44 data
bits each, plus plrity bits. A maximum system
contains 10 such pairs of drums for a caplcity of
23, 040, 000 words.
Each drum is mounted with its axis horizontal and
plirs are mounted one above the other. A common
yoke mounted between them carries two heads, one
to access a track on the upper drum and one to access a track on the lower drum.
Each drum is divided into 2,000 bands of 1 track
each. Each band of 576 words is divided into 12
sectors of 48 words each. Only one sector in the
RANDEX system can be accessed at a time.
First Delivery:
.16
Reserved Storage:
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Storage Medium:
.22
Physical Dimensions
Access time varies from 5 to 540 milliseconds and a
typical time to locate, read, and update data in a
random subs ector is approximately 450 milliseconds.
However, except for 7 milliseconds of this time, all
other simultaneity is preserved, provided that magne~ic tapes on the RANDEX Synchronizer are not
used. As these figures indicate, designing the data
layqut on the drum can very greatly affect the overall timings.
This store is accessed as a peripheral device using
a Buffer band and a Synchronizer which needs a special adaptation for the first RANDEX module only.
Only one Synchronizer can be used.
The Synchronizer is capable of handling up to 10
RANDEX Drum units and up to 10 magnetic tape units.
. 14
Availability: . . . . . 9 months.
© 1963
...
.222 Drum or Disc
Diameter: .
Thickness or
length:
Number on shaft:
.23
.24
Storage phenomenon:
.25
magnetic drums.
. 24.3 inches .
. 44 inches.
.1.
magnetization.
yes.
no.
no.
no.
no.
Data volume per band of I track
Words:
Characters:
Digits:
Instructions:
Model 1 packed
characters:
Model 2 packed
characters:
.26
none .
Recording Permanence
.241 Data erasable by
program:
.242 Data regenerated
constantly:
.243 Data volatile:
.244 Data permanent:
.245 Storage changeable:
Each sector can be considered also as 4 subsectors,
each containing 1 key word and 11 data words.
Special "search-read" and "search-write" instructions can be used with reference to subsector keys.
These instructions read and check a lO-character
word against the labels on a 6-block area. Up to
four labels per block can be used, thus prOViding a
maximum search area of 24 records or six 48-word
blocks, whichever is smaller. Fifteen areas per
record can be searched.
January, 1962.
.15
576
2,880.
5,760.
576.
3,840.
3,600.
Bands per physical
unit:
2,000.
.27
Interleaving Levels:
1.
.28
Access Techniques
. 281 Recording method: .
.282 Reading method:
.283 Type of access
moving heads.
same.
Description of stage
Wait for synchronizer Access to a record
not busy: . . . . .
can occur at anyone of
Move head to selected
these stages, providing
track: . . . . . . .
the drum is in the correct
(If writing) Fill buffer: position.
Wait for selected
sector: . . . . .
(If reading) Empty
buffer: . . .
by, Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
772:043.290
§
UNIVAC SS 80/90 MODEL \I
043.
.29
Potential Transfer Rates
. 291 Peak bit rates
Cycling rates:
Track/head speed:
Bits/ inch/track:
Bit rate per track:
.292 Peak data rates
Unit of data (character or word): .
Conversion factor
(bits for unit):
Gain factor (tracks
per band):
Loss factor (degree
of interleaving):
Data rate: .
.3
DATA CAPACITY
. 31
Module and System
Sizes
·
·
·
·
870 rpm.
1,108 inches/sec.
650
720,000 bits/sec/track.
Rules for Combining
Modules:
CONTROLLER
.41
Identity:
.42
Connection to System
Synchronizer.
Type No. 7914 .
.421 On-line:
.422 Off-line:
.. 43
1.
none.
Connection to Device
word.
.431 Devices per controller: .
•
.432 Restrictions:
44 bits/word.
1 to 10 .
see Paragraph. 13.
r.
1.
.44
12.
696 words/sec/device.
Data Transfer Control
.441 Size of Load:
.41:2 Input-Output
area: .
.443 Input-Output area
access: .
. 444 Input-Output area
lockout:
[See table below]
.32
.4
none, or 1 7965; or 1
7957; or up to 9 7966's
with either a 7965 or a
7957.
.445 Synchronization:
. 446 Synchronizing
aids:
.#7 Table control:
48 words (1 block).
buffer band in Magnetic
Drum .
entire block.
none, test busy required
in program to protect
area.
automatic .
test busy.
none.
MODULE AND SYSTEM SIZES
Minimum
Storage
ACCESS TiMING
.51
Arrangement of Heads
. 511 Stacks per system: . . . . . .
Stacks per module:
Stacks per yoke:
Yokes per module:
. 512 Stack movement:
.513 Stacks that can access
any particular location: . . . . . . . ·
4/63
No. 7957
No. 7966
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1,152,000
5,760,000
1,152,000
24,000
11,520,000
2
2,304,009
11,520,000
2,304,000
48,000
23,040,000
2
2,304,000
11,520,000
2,304,000
48,000
23,040,000
20.
23,004,000.
115,200,000.
23,040,000.
480,000.
230,400,000.
0
7,680,00.0
15,360,000
15,360,000
153,600,000.
0
0
7,200,000
1
14,400,000
1
14,400,000
1
144,000,000.
10.
No. 7965
Identity:
Drums:
Words:
Characters:
Instructions:
Blocks:
Digits:
Model 2 packed
character:
Model 1 packed
character:
Modules:
.5
Maximum
.St.9r age
20 maximum.
2.
2.
1.
across length of qrum .
entire drum accessible.
.514 Accessible locations
By single stack
With no movement: . . .
With all movement: . . .
By all stacks
With no movement: . . .
12 blocks.
12,000 blocks.
24 blocks per module.
240 blocks per system.
INTERNAL STORAGE: RANDEX DRUM
§
772:043.530
043.
.53
.72
With Magnetic Drum,
Model 2: • • . • •
Access Time Parameters and Variations
. 532 Variation in access time
~p
Wait for Synchronizer
not busy:
Move head to selected
track:
Fill buffer (writing):
Wait for selected
block:
Write or read:
Empty buffer (reading):
Total:
.6
Variation,
Example,
m~.
m~
o to
0.0.
15
0, or 125 to
540
3.4
With Magnetic Drum,
Modell: • . . . •
. 73
20.0.
34.5.
34.5
3.4
0.0.
357.9.
CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: . . . . . none.
.7
AUXILIARY STORAGE PERFORMANCE
. 71
Data Transfer
.8
© 1963
units of 300 packed characters or 240 characters.
4,640 packed char/sec.
4,350 packed char/sec or
3,480 'char/sec.
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Invalid address:
Receipt of data:
Dispatch of
data:
Off Normal *:
Physical record
missing:
Parity
*
Pair of storap units possibilities
With self: . . .
no.
With Magnetic
Drum: . . . • . . . yes.
units of 320 packed
characters .
Effective Transfer Rate
With Magnetic Drum,
Model 2: . . • • .
With Magnetic Drum,
Modell: . •
300.0.
3.4.
o to 69
Transfer Load Size
Check or
Interlock
Action
check
check
sets indicator.
sets indicator .
check
check
sets indicator.
sets indicator.
check
check
sets indicator.
sets indicator .
Off Normal.includes. . .. . Buffer overflow
Buffer underflow
Block size
Bad spot
Bad track
Faulty operation
Interlock
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
772:051.100
•
STANDARD
EDP
_
'EPO'TS
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Model II
Central Processor
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§
.2
. 21
OSl.
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity:
. 12
Description
Central Processor .
Model II.
PROCESSING FACILITIES
Operations and Operands
Operation and
Variation
Provision
.211 FiJled point
Add-Subtract:
Multiply
Short:
Long:
Divide
No remainder:
Remainder:
The UNIVAC Solid-State Model II Central Processor
is designed to process alphameric data from card
and magnetic tape input-output media. The use of
the core store as the primary program execution area
.212 Floating point
makes optimization much easier and results in more
Add-Subtract:
operations per second. All operations occur in decimal,
Multiply:
fixed point mode. The division order provides a
Divide:
remainder, and alphameric comparison instructions
.213 Boolean
are included in the repertoire.
A zero suppress instruction is included in the instruction repertOire, and translation to or from card
code is automatic. Commercial format, particularly
for output purposes, is not simple because the other
editing functions (punctuation, check protection,
etc. ) must be programmed. Also, the drum storage
interlace introduced in the Model I to speed iriputoutput operations is still used in the Model II,
although it is no longer so advantageous.
AND:
Inclusive OR:
This capability, which is an improvement of 40 per
cent over the UNIVAC Solid-State Model I, has been
achieved by overlapping within instructions rafuer
than by changing instruction logic.
Availability: . .
10 months.
.14
First Delivery:
June, 1962.
© 1963
yes
decimal
10 digits + sign.
sentinel
yes
decimal
decimal
2 to 8 + sign.
10 digits + sign.
no.
yes
decimal
2 to 10 digits + sign.
subroutine
subroutine
subroutine
decimal.
decimal.
decimal.
1 Binary
J
40 bits.
40 bits.
yes
subroutine
subroutine
subroutine
10.
10 char.
10 char.
10 char.
yes
yes
Numbers:
Absolute:
Letters:"
Mixed:·
• requires 5 instructions (5 executed).
.215 Code translation:
. . . all UNIVAC Solid-State systems except 90-column
card systems have automatic code translation during card operations. All
systems can translate
word - by-word between the
internal coding and the appropriate card codes, and
for the purposes of compatibility with UNIVAC I, II,
etc., to Excess 3 code.
Provision
Alter size:
Suppress zero:
Round off:
Insert point:
Insett spaces:
Insert:
Float:
Protection:
no.
yes
no.
no.
no.
no.
no.
no.
Comment
Size
also commas
10 chars.
.218 Table look-up:
subroutine.
,219 Others: . . . •
in tape systems, the tape
buffer may be utilized to
transfer a band of 200
words from one part of the
store to another. During
the transfer all words
move cyclically back one
word in relative position,
thus word number 6 becomes word number 5.
Word number 1 becomes
word number 0 and number
o becomes number 199.
Operands and instructions which are stored in the
core are accessed in parallel with other parts of the
instruction cycle. An add to accumulator instruction, which formerly took five word times, is now
completed in three word times.
• 13
Size
.214 Comparison
The programming technique used on the Model II is
an extension of the Model I technique. Data is preferentially held in core storage, and with it, those instruction loops which would operate inefficiently if
held on the drum. Such inefficiencies could be due to
the fact that they were not optimally programmed,
they did not fit exactly within the duration of the drum
revolution, or they used multiplication and division
instructions. These two instructions are variable~
time instructions which preclude optimal program. 217 Edit format
ming of ensuing instructions.
The over-all speed capability of the Model II system
is approximately 20,000 additions per second. With
all input-output fully operating, this speed is reduced
from 16,000 to 17,000 additions per second because
complete overlap is possible more than 80 per cent
of the time.
Radix
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Model II
772:051.220
§ OSlo
• 22
Special Cases of Operands
• 221 Negative numbers:. . . least significant 4 bits of
each word always contain
sign digit, 0 for positive,
and 5 for negative.
· 222 Zero:. . . . . . . . .
both plus and minus zero
can occur and are not
equal in comparisons.
• 223 Operand size
determination:
fixed.
· 23
Instruction Formats
• 238 Indirect addressing: . • none.
• 239 Stepping
• 2391 Specification of
in stepping instruction.
increment: . .
positive; complements used
.2392 Increment sign: .
for decrements.
4 digits.
• 2393 Size of increment:
in test instruction.
.2394 End value: • . . .
· 2395 Combined step and
no.
test: • . . . • . .
· 24
Special Processor Storage
.241 Category of storage
Number of
locations
Register: 4
.231 Instruction structure:. 1 word.
.232 Instruction layout:
Part
Size (digits)
• 233 Instruction parts
Name
Purpose
operation code.
m: ..
memory address (indexable) second instruction
address, or operation
variation.
c: . • . . . . . . . . next instruction address.
S: • . . . . • . . . • Index Register.
• 234 Basic address structure: 1 + 1.
· 235 Literals
Arithmetic:. . . .
only set register to zero.
Comparisons and
tests: . . . .
none.
Incrementing
modifiers: .••
yes .
• 236 Directly addressed operands
• 2361 Internal storage type
Volume accessible
Min. size
Magnetic Drum: 2, 600 words 8,800 words.
Magnetic Core: 1,280 words 1,280 words.
RANDEX:
optional
23, 040, 000 words.
• 2362 Increase address
capacity: • . . . .
not needed..
• 237 Address indexing
2.
· 2371 Number of methods:
Indexing.
• 2372 Names: . . . .
Banil Modification.
increment added to instruc.2373 Indexing rule:
tion address. Under certain circumstances the address is made to cycle
within a band (200 words)
of drum store. Otherwise,
it ~yc1es either modulo
5,000 or modulo 10,000 depending on the store size.
. 2374 Indexing specification: by the programmer; number
1 to 9 on the coding sheet.
in the machine instruction:
use of the sign char. and 1
bit of the operation code.
• 2375 Number of potential
ind~xers: • . . . .
9.
• 2376 Addresses which can
be indexed: . . . • . all.
• 2377 Cumulative indexing:. none.
· 2378 Combined index and
step: . . . . . . . . • no.
CW:.
4/63
Index:
Buffers:
9
3 to 5
.242 Category of storage
Total no.
of
locations
Register: 4
Index:
9
Buffers:
3 to 5
Size in
words Program usage
1
arithmetic.
temporary
storage. and
control.
0.4
indexing.
input-output.
200
Physical
form
hardware
3 in hardware,
6 in core
drum 'bands
Access
time
",sec
17
17
Cycle
time
3,400
to
5.100
3.400•
J,£seQ
17.
17.
.3
SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES
.31
Instruction Sequencing:
1 + 1 addressing.
. 32
Look-Ahead: •.
yes, for the next infltruction.
.331 Possible causes
In -out units:
High Speed Reader Buffer
Loaded (optional) .
.332 Program control
Individual control:
Method: . . • . . .
High Speed Reader.
transfer to special location
when card reader buffers
are loaded.
none.
Restriction:
none.
Operator control:
Interruption conditions: buffer loaded.
Interruption process
Disabling interruption: none .
next instruction stored in
Registers saved: •
fixed location.
a fixed location.
Destination:
Control methods
implicit.
Determine cause:
always enabled.
Enable interruption:
.....
.333
.334
.335
...
...
.336
. 34
Multi-running: •.
none.
.35
Multi - sequencing:
none.
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§
772:051.400
OSl.
.4
.41
. 411
. 412
.413
.414
.41S
.416
.417
. 418
• 42
.423 Branch based on comparison
For the following times, it is assumed that the instructions are stored on Normal access portions of
PROCESSOR SPEEDS
the drum, but executed in the core storage. This
effectively reduces the time lost at the end of each
Instruction Times in
iteration of the loop be~ause of poor latency. It
p.sec: • • • • • . • •
the times given assume that
does involve some additional work. in actually transboth instructions and opferring the data, and this is shown separately under
erands are contained in
Set-Up Time.
the core.
Set-Up
Execution
Numeric data:
306
4S9 .
Fixed point
Alphabetic data:
. 340
505.
Add-subtract:
51.
424 Switching
~ultiply~ . . .
68 + 170D.
For the following times, it has been assumed that
Divide: . . . .
51 + 170D.
the instructions are held on the Normal access pornone.
Floating point: .
tion of the drum in known positions, and that the
Additional allowance for
data is held in Random positions on the core.
17.
Indexing: . . . . . .
Unchecked: .
238N.
Instructions on the
Checked: . . . . . . 459N.
drum: . . . . . . .
17 plus latency of 0 to
List search: • . . . 2S5N.
3,400.
425 Format control per character
Operands on the drum: 17 plus latency of 0 to
For the following times, it has been assumed that
3,400.
the instructions are held on the Normal access porControl
tion of the drum in known positions, and that the
Branch: . . . . . . . . 34.
data is held in Random positions on the core.
Compare and branch: Sl.
Unpack: . . . . . . . 27N.
Counter control
Compose: • • . . . , 19ON.
Step: . • . . .
68.
426 Table look up per comparison
none.
Step and test: .
For the following times, it is assumed that the inTest: . . . . .
Sl.
structions are stored on Normal access portions of
Edit
the drum, but executed in the core storage. This
10-character zero
effectively reduces the time lost at the end of each
suppression:
68.
iteration of the loop because of poor latency. It
Convert:
S1.
does involve some additional work in actually transShift:. . . . . .
51 + 17D•
ferring the data, and this is shown separately under
Set- Up Time •
Processor Performance
Set-Up
Execution
m p.sec: • . . . • . . it is assumed that in addiFor a match:
221
442N.
tion to the specific condiFor least or
tions which follow, the
greatest:
255
459N.
program has been written
For interpolation
for the ~odellI, and not
point:
25S
459N .
simply transferred from
.427 Bit indicators
the ~odel 1.
For the following times, it has been assumed that
For random addresses
the instructions are held on the Normal access
For the following times, it has been assumed that
portion oithe drum in known positions, and that
the instructions are held on the Normal access porthe data is held in Random positions on the core.
tion of the drum in known positions, and that the data
Set bit in separate
is held in Random positions on the core.
location:. . . . . . 68.
c = a + b: . . .
136.
Set bit in pattern:.. 102.
b = a + b: . . .
136.
Test bit in separate
Sum N items: .
SIN.
location:. . . • . . 136.
c = ab: . . . •
119 + 17OD.
Test bit in pattern:. 170.
c = alb: . . . .
119 + 17OD.
Test AND for B bits: 170.
For arrays of data
Test OR for B bits:. 170.
For the following times, it is assumed that the in- . 428 ~oving: • . . . . . . . See Internal Storage. 73 •
structions are stored on Normal access portions of
the drum, but executed in the core storage. This
.5
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
effectively reduces the time lost at the end of each
iteration of the loop because of poor latency. It
Check or
does involve some additional work in actually transError
Interlock
Action
ferring the data, and this is shown separately under
program jump.
check
Set-Up Time.
Overflow:
Uuderflow (float-pt):
none.
Set-Up
Execution
program jump.
check
Zero divisor:
238
374.
ci = ai + bf .
not possible.
Invalid data:
238
340.
bj =ai +bf •
stops or partial execution.
some checks
Invalid operation:
sometimes stops.
Sum N items: .
153N.
204
some checks
Arithmetic error:
modUlo store size.
checks
Invalid address:
238
2,057N.
c = c + aibj:' .
......
.421
. 422
Receipt of data:
Dispatch of data:
4/63
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
error word
error word
program jump.
program jump.
/
772:061.100
•
II
STANDARD
EDP
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Model II
Console
R(I'ORTS
CONSOLE
§
.232 Starts
06l.
.1
GENERAL
Name
.
.11
Identi~:
.12
Associated Units:
. Central Processor Control
Panel.
. Processor Keyboard standing on the desk.
.121 Description:
.24
The keyboard has 13 keys which include:
l.
2.
3.
The digits 0 through 9
Plus and minus enter keys
An Alert key that clears a preselected
input register
Any combination of four bits can be enteredo A lamp lights on the keyboard after
pushing the Alert key indicating that the
processor is ready to accept input from
the keyboard.
.2
CONTROLS
.21
Power
Form
Funcrion
AC:
DC:
DC Ready:
Drum:
Uniservo:
button -light
button -light
button -light
button -light
button -light
turns off AC and DC power.
turns off DC power.
turns on AC and DC power.
turns off AC and DC power.
turns power to Uniservos on
and off.
.
.22
Connections:
.23
Stops and Restarts
Function
button
Start:
m:
c:
button
button
button
Completes partially-executed
tape commands.
Starts processor.
Selects next address of two.
Addresses to which control
will be transferred when the
Start button is depressed.
Name
Form
Function
wlO Index Regs:
button
w Index
button
execute one instruction without index registers when
start button pushed.
execute one instruction with
index registers when start
button pushed.
executes instructions under
program control when start
button pushed.
StePEing
Regs:
button
Continuous :
.25
Name
Form
Tape Check:
Resets
Name
Form
General Clear:
button
.26
Loading: •
.27
Special
• no positive indication.
. Function
resets indicators and logiC.
• none.
Name
Form
Function
No Print:
button -light
96 Check:
button -light
No Punch
button -light
print orders executed but no
printing occurs •
causes stop if card buffer is
not emptied fast enough.
punch orders executed but no
punching occurs •
. 231 Stops
Name
~
Function
Tape:
button
HSP:
button
FR:
button
RPU:
button
Comparison Stop:
button
Stop:
button
Causes Tape Off-Normal
condition.
Causes High Speed Printer
Off-Normal condition.
Causes High Speed Reader
Off-Normal condition.
Causes Read Punch OffNormal condition.
Causes Stop on compare
insttuctions.
Stop Processor.
© 1963
.3
DISPLAY
.31
Alarms: •
.32
Conditions
..
. none •
Name
Form
Function
Printer:
Fast Reader:
Read Punch:
Processor:
Test:
Tape Sync.:
light
light
light
light
light
light
Off-Normal
Indicates that a malfunction
has occurred in the particular unit.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
n2:061.330
UN IV AC SS 80/90 MODEL II
§061.
. 33
Into Control Registers: . same as Control Registers
but via a control register
plus executing store instruction, also keyed in.
.5
CONVENIENCE
• 51
Communication: .
· none.
. 52
Clock: . . . •
· none.
. 53
Desk Space: .
· length 22", depth 6",
height 48".
.54
View:
• operator must be standing
to operate console; view
is unobstructed by peripheral units Punch,
Printer, and Reader .
Control Registers
~
Static Register:
Sign:
two 5, 4, 2, 1
bit neon decades
two neons
Display Register:
ten decades
indicates statically and dynarnicall y what instruction
is being executed.
indicates the sign of quantity in display register.
in one of the following registers: rA, rC, rL, or IX,
depending upon which display button is pushed.
.34
Storage: .
•4
ENTRY OF DATA
4/63
.41
displayed in the Display
register via rA, rC, rL,
or rX.
772:071.100
.STANCARD
EDP
•
REPORTS
UN IV AC SS 80/90 Model II
Input-Output
High Speed Reader
INPUT-OUTPUT: HIGH SPEED READER
§
071.
· 12
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: .
Correctness of card reading is verified by routines
in the processor and not in the reader. This internal redundancy check is more secure than hole
counts and similar reader checks because it also
covers the transfers between the reader and internal
storage. However, this check requires both processor time and storage space to hold the separate
images which are not required by automatic input
checking systems. When checking is desired, an
area must be reserved in storage for both images
so that the comparison may be performed.
High Speed Reader.
I: 80-Column Reader.
Unit No. 7935.
II: 90-Column Reader.
Unit No. 7945.
.12
Description
The high speed reader reads up to 600 cards per
· 13
minute using two read stations, translating card
images into machine codes and transferring them
.14
into the computer store. During 95 per cent of the
time involved in the transfer, the central processor
can continue operations. A standard subroutine
·2
function which uses up 7 per cent more of the card
cycle time compares the card images, giving a total · 21
effective performance of 3,600 cards per minute
read, translated, and verified with 8S per cent
.211
central processor overlap.
".212
Both types of the 600 cards per minute reader are
equipped with a hopper, 2 read stations, and 3
stackers. The only difference between the two typeS
is the column size of the read stations. Although
the unit will function without it, a vacuum system to
assist card feeding is standard equipment. A
Stacker Select and an Automatic Program Interrupt
feature are available as options. The buffer between the reader and processor receives card
images from both read stations whenever a card
passes either . Should either of the stations be
empty, the empty station will transmit the image of
a card with every hole punched. Another feature of
the reader is that a card is passed by both read stations and is moved into a stacker without stopping.
A control routine is required to prevent the image
from the first read station being overwritten by
another image transmitted when the card passes the
second read station unless the Automatic Program
Interrupt option is used. When this option is available, the processor performs the following operations when the buffer is loaded. First, the current
instruction is completed and the next instruction is
stored in a fixed location. Control is then transferred to a subroutine. The last instruction of the
subroutine causes control to be returned to the fixed
location from which normal program sequencing is
resumed.
Card images are represented internally in either
translated or untranslated form. In the translated
form, the internal code equivalents of the characters are punched tnto each column. In the untranslated form, an image of the physical card, each
hole position is. represented by a bit. Details of
this presentation are given in the Data Code Tables.
© 1963
Description (Contd. )
· 22
Availability:..
7 months.
First Delivery:
November, 1958 - 90-Col.
December, 1959 - 80-Col.
PHYSICAL FORM
Drive Mechanism
Drive past the head:.. . pinch roller.
Reservoirs: . . . . . . none.
Sensing and Recording Systems
none.
brush.
none.
· 221 Recording systems:
· 222 Sensing system: .
· 223 Common system:
· 23
Multiple Copies: .
none.
· 24
Arrangement of Heads
SO-Column
90-Column
Use of station: .
Stacks: .
Heads/stack: .
Method of use: .
.
Read
1
80
1 row at a time
Read.
Use of station: .
Distance: •
Stacks: .
Heads/stack: .
Method of us e: •
Verify read
15 rows
1
80
1 row at a time
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
· 31
Form of Storage
.311 Medium: • . .
. 312 Phenomenon: . . .
· 32
1.
45.
1 row at a time.
Verify read.
15 rows.
1.
45.
1 row at a time.
standard punched card •
punched holes;
rectangular on SO-column;
round on 90-column.
Positional Arrangement
.321 Serial by: .
· 322 Parallel by: . ,
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
12 rows.
SO- or 45-columns.
4/63
n2:071.330
§
UNIVAC 5580/90 MODEL"
071.
.33
Coding: . . . . , . . . . 80-column (Hollerith,
binary, column binary).
90-column (standard 90- "
column code).
• 34
Format Compatibility: . 80-column card, any 80column equipment.
90-column card, any 90column equipment.
. 35
Physical Dimensions:
.4
CONTROLLER
.41
Identity:
.42
Connection to System
Format Control: . . . . none.
.55
Control Operations
Disable: • . . . . .
Request interrupt: .
Offset card: . .
Select stacker: .
Select format:
Select code:
Unload: . . . .
· 56
no.
no.
no,
yes.
no.
yes.
no •
Testable Conditions
Disabled:. .
Busy device:
Output lock:
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller: .
End of medium marks:
Input buffer full: . . . .
Off-Normal*: . . . . .
built into Central Processor and the unit. Contains a special buffer
band on the processor's
drum to transmit and receive card images.
. 421 On-line:
. 422 Off-line: . . . . . • .
. 43
standard punched card.
.54
no .
yes.
no.
no.
yes.
no.
yes.
yes.
* Off-Normal is a general term
for any abnormal condition including:
empty stations .
full stacker .
empty hopper,
card jam •
equipment malfunction .
1.
none.
Connection to Device
. 431 Devices per controller: 1.
. 432 Restrictions:. • : . . . none .
. 44
Data :rransfer Control
.441 Size of load: . . . .
,442 Input-Output areas:
. 443 Input-Output area
access: . • . . •
. 444 Input-Output area
lockout: .
....
.445 Table control: . . .
. 446 Synchronization: • •
.447 Synchronizing aids:
2 cards.
2 interlaces on buffer band
of 200 words •
1 band.
area insecure without program tests unless Automatic Interrupt feature
is used.
none.
automatic.
interrupt.
.5
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
. 51
Blocks
. 511 Size of block:
. 512 Block demarcation
Input: • . . . . . .
. 52
1 card.
fixed size (80- or 90column) .
Input-Output Operations
4/63
Code Translation:
PERFORMANCE
· 61
Conditions: .
.62
Speeds
instruction provided.
. , . no variation.
.621 Nominal or peak speed: 600 c. p. m.
· 622 Important parameters
Name
Value
Cycle time: . . . "
100 msec.
Select stacker time
span: , . . . . . . 100 msec .
Feed card instruction time span:.
100 msec.
Unload buffer time
spam
15 msec •
. 623 Overhead: . • . . ..
1 clutch point. Note: Up to
four read orders can be
stacked by this unit .
.624 Effective speeds: . . . (600-C) c. p. m.
C = number of clutch points
missed per minute .
· 63
Demands on System
Component
.521 Input:. . . . . . • . . • one image from each of
two stations if a card was
read at either.
.522 Output: . .
none .
. 523 Stepping:.
none.
.524 Skipping:.
none .
. 525 Marking:.
none .
none.
. 526 Searching:
.53
.6
Condition
Central
Processor: unload images
Central
Processor: verify overhead
msec
per card
Percentage
3.5
or
3. O.
7.0
or
6. O.
Note 1: If the second read station is used to verify
the reading at the first read station, the
central processor must unload the second
image and perform the comparison.
INPUT-OUTPUT: HIGH SPEED READER
§
772:071.630
071.
.63
. 73
Demands on System (Contd.)
Note 2: The data read into the buffer band are stored
in interleaved locations around the drum.
To maximize processing efficiency, these
data should be processed from the interleaved locations, since outputting computed
results requires another kind of interleaved
pattern which is best loaded from the input
interleaved array.
.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Hopper: • . • .
Stackers (3): •
.732 Replenishment time:.
.733 Adjustment time: •
• 734 Optim urn reloading
period: . . . . • •
.8
.7
Loading and Unloading
Adjustments:...... none.
. 72
Other Controls
Function
Form
Error
Comment
Clear:
button- turn off "Off-Normal".
light
Computation: 2 buttons stops and starts processor.
© 1963
1. 66 minutes.
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
.71
Capacity
I, 000 cards.
I, 200 cards each.
O. 2 to 1. a min.
does not need to be stopped.
1 to 5 minutes •
Reading:
Input area overflow:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Off-Normal·:
Check or
Interlock
Action
none.
fixed •
all legal.
see "Off-Normal".
none.
program stall
check
wait.
set indicator.
• Off-Normal includes: exhausted medium
equipment malfunction.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
772:072.100
•
11
STANDARD
EDP
Rfl'DRIS
UNIVAC 55 80/90 Model II
Input-Output
Read Punch
INPUT-OUTPUT: READ PUNCH
§
072.
.22
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity:
.221 Recording system:.
· Read Punch .
80-column Punch Unit.
No. 7936.
90-column Punch Unit.
No. 7946.
.12
Sensing and Recording Systems
.222 Sensing system: .
.223 Common system:
· punch and die.
90 char, round holes.
SO char, rectangular holes.
· brush.
· no .
. 23
Multiple Copies:
· none.
. 24
Arrangement of Heads
Description:
These two card punching units are able to process
cards at a peak speed of 150 cards per minute, using a single point clutch.
Type 7936 contains 5 card stations: read, wait,
punch, wait and read. The punch station is fitted
for 80-column cards.
Type 7946 contains 3 card stations: read, punch
and read. The punch station is fitted for 90-columrr
cards.
The read stations are optional and can be fitted to
read either 80- or 90- column cards in either type,
although it is unlikely that mixtures are required.
Each type has one hopper and two stackers, but the
stacker select feature is optional.
There are automatic input code translations and four
special instructions are available to perform some
translation (see Internal Storage, Magnetic Drum,
paragraphs 1.3) either for 80-column patterns or 90column patterns.
The optional read stations are intended for use in
conjunction with the punch. The last station permits
sending an image of the card to enable verification
in a routine. The first station permits reading partpunched cards before completing the punching. Note
that two input and one output images are transmitted
on any stimulated cycle of the device.
.13
Availability:.
. 14
First Delivery:
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Drive Mechanism
.
90-Column
• Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/stack:
Method of use:
read.
1.
45 or 80.
1 row at a time.
Use of station:
Distance:
Stacks:
Heads/stack:
Method of use:
wait
5 card rows.
none.
none.
N. A.
none.
Use of station:
Distance:
Stacks:
Heads/stack:
Method of use:
punch
5 card rows
punch.
1 card.
1.
45.
1 row at a time.
Use of station:
Distance:
Stacks:
Heads/stack:
Method of use:
wait
5 card rows.
none.
none.
• Use of station:
Distance:
Stacks:
Heads/stack:
Method of use:
read
5 card rows
1
SO or 45
1 row at a time
1
SO or 45
1 row at a time
SO
1 row at a time
none.
N. A.
read •
1 card.
1.
45 or 80.
1 row at a time.
• These stations are optional.
.33
EXTERNAL STORAGE
.7 months.
.31 Form of Storage
• No. 7936 - December, 1959 .
No. 7946 -June, 1955.
.311 Medium:
. 312 Phenomenon:. •
.32
. 211 Drive past the head: .
. 212 Reservoirs:
Number: .
Form: .
Capacity:.
.213 Feed drive:
. 214 Take-up drive:
SO-Column
read
· pinch rollers.
• Type 7936 only .
.2.
· wait stations .
· 1 card each.
• pinch rollers .
• pinch rollers.
© 1963
Positional Arrangement
.321 Serial by:
.. 322 Parallel by:
.33
· standard punch card.
· punched holes .
SO char rectangular.
90 char round.
Coding:
· row (lout of 12).
• 80 colon SO char card .
45-colon 90 char card.
. .. . . . . . · Hollerith,
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
column binary,
binary, on SO-col card.
Standard 90-col card
code.
4/63
UNIVAC 55 80/90 MODEL II
772:072.340
1072.
.34
.55
Format Compatibility
SO-column:
90-column: . . . . .
· any SO-column equipment ..
• any 90-column equipment.
. 35
Physical Dimensions:
· standard punched card.
.4
CONTROLLER
• 41
Identity: . • . •
. 42
Connection to System
Disable: . . . • • •
Request interrupt:.
Offset card: • • .
Select stacker: .
Select format: ..
Select code:
Unload: . • • • •
. 56
. 421 On-line: .
. 422 Off-line:.
.. 43
• built into Central Processor
and the unit. Contains a
special buffer band on the
processor's drum to
transmit and receive
card images.
.441 Size of load:. • • •
.442 Input-output areas:
· 3 cards (2 input and 1 output) .
· 3 interlaces on 1 buffer
band.
.443 Input-output area
access:
. 444 Input-output area
lockout:
• band.
.. . .
....
. 445 Table control: . .
• 446 Synchronization: .
. 51
* Off Normal includes:
. empty stations.
full stackers .
empty hopper .
card jam.
equipment malfunction .
· punch area of buffer is
locked out until punches
are set up from previous
instruction.
· none.
· automatic.
PERFORMANCE
.61
Conditions:
.62
Speeds
• • . . none.
.621 Nominal OJ: peak speed
.622 Important parameters
Name
Cycle: . . . . •
Stacker select
time span: .•
Start time span:
Buffer unload time
span: . • . .
.623 Overhead:
.624 Effective speeds:
Demands on
no.
yes .
no.
no.
yes.
no.
• yes.
• yes .
.150 c.p.m.
Value
.400 m.sec .
.116 m.sec.
.133 m.sec.
.136 m.sec.
1 clutch pOint .
· (150-C) c.p.m.
C = number of clutch points
missed per minute .
S~stem
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
Blocks
.511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Input:
Output: . . . . • .
· 1 card.
• fixed.
· fixed.
.52
Input-Output Operations
.521
. 522
. 523
:.524
. 525
. 526
Input:
Output: .•
Stepping:.
Skipping:.
Marking:.
Searching: .
.2 cards .
. 1 card .
· none.
. none •
. none .
. none.
.53
Code Translation: .
· automatic.
.54
Format Control:. •
· none.
4/63
•
.
.
.
•
.
.6
. 63
.5
Disabled: . .
Busy device:.
Output lock: .
Nearly exhausted:.
Busy controller:..
End of medium marks:
Off Normal *: • . . • .
Input buffer full:. . . .
Connection to Device
Data Transfer Control
.no.
.no.
.no.
· yes.
.no .
· yes.
• no .
Testable Conditions
. 1 max.
. none.
.431 Devices per controller: . 1 max.
·.432 Restrictions: . . . . . • none.
.44
Control Operations
..
ComEonent
Condition
Central Processor
Central Processor:
load buffer 1
unload buffers 2
Central Processor:
note 1 below
&3
m.sec.
Eer card
Percentage .
3.5
or
0.9.
3.5
or
or
0.9.
2.7.
10.4
Note 1: If the second read station is used to verify
the reading at the first station plus the punching'
done at the punch station, the program must merge
the punch and first read images and compare punch
and second read images •
Note 2: The data read into the buffer hand are
stored in interleaved locations around the drum. To
maximize processing efficiency, these data should
be processed from the interleaved locations as the
output computed results require another kind of
interleaved pattern which is best loaded from the
interleaved array upon input.
INPUT-OUTPUT: READ PUNCH
§
772:072.700
072.
.8
.7
EXTERNAL F ACIUTIES
.71
Adjustments: • . • • . . none.
. 72
Other Controls
Form
Comment
Function
starts & stops processor.
Computation 2
Buttons
. 73
Loading and Unloading
. 731 Volumes handled
Storage
Hopper: • • • .
Stackers (2): .
. 732 Replenishment time:
• 733 Adjustment time: .
• 734 Optimum reloading
period: . • . . • .
Capacity
600 cards.
1, 200 cards each.
.0.25 to 1 mins.
does not need to be stopped.
.1 to 2 mins.
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Check or
Interlock
Recording
Reading:
Input area overflow:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhawted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Off Normal·:
none.
none.
not possible.
fixed.
none.
see "off normal".
none •
interlock
check
• Off Normal includes: •
Action
wait.
set indicator.
punoh bin full.
hopper empty •
stacker full.
card jam•
malfunction •
.4 mins.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporatian and BNA Incorporated
4/63
"fl2:073,lOO
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Model II
Input-Output
Paper Tape Reader
INPUT-OUTPUT: PAPER TAPE READER
§
073.
.1
.5
GENERAL
indefinite pause in reading. Translation is controlled
by plugboard and parity checking is controlled by a
rotary switch. The reader shares both these controls with the punch unit.
The paper tape reader and punch are two separate
units housed in the same cabinet with their joint controller. The photoelectric reader operates at 500
characters per second. Five-, 6-, 7-, or 8-channel
tape can be read, checked for parity, translated into
6-bit biquinary code, and stored in a 20-character
buffer found in the synchronizer that is part of the
entire paper tape unit.
The program is able to test the buffer and then
transfer 10 characters at a time into the arithmetic
registers of the computer. The average time
involved is 187 microseconds per transfer, or less
than 1 percent of the overall computer capacity.
.2
"Ignore" characters and blanks are suppressed before
the buffer is loaded. The program can test for
whether the buffer is loaded or whether t..he unit is
disabled, but cannot distinguish between the various
possible disabling causes, such as torn tape, plug
board not in place, overheating, no power.
.6
PHYSICAL FORM
EXTERNAL STORAGE
Normal punched tape, with fully punched holes, can
be used. Five-, six-, or seven-channel tapes can be
used normally, An eight-channel tape can be used,
but the eighth channel is restricted to some special
•7
function, as all other channels must be unpunched
when the eighth is punched.
Various codes can be accommodated, including
Teletype, Flexowriter, and DaSPan. Each installation decides its own "End of Message" and "End of
Tape" signals, which can be two or three characters
long. In addition, an installation-chosen signal is
used as "the "ignore" signal. Neither the "ignore"
nor "blank" characters are read into the buffer.
.4
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
Reading, once started, continues until either a stop
character is read or a stop instruction is executed.
Failure to unload the 20-character buffer causes an
© 1963
During the reading of the tape. the buffer is first
filled; then its contents are transferred to the automatic registers. Transfer of the buffer contents to
the registers takes place each 20 milliseconds, or
within from 6 to 7 drum revolutions. This operation
takes only O. 20 millisecond, including subsequent
transfer of data to storage as well. The transfer to
storage can take an additional 3. 4 milliseconds or
0.85 millisecond, depending upon whether the store
data is in Normal or Fast areas of the drum.
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
The plugboard which controls the code translation
can be changed in approximately 20 seconds if a new
one is available, or it can be rewired in less than 20
minutes.
The parity control switch sets the unit to check a
specific channel for odd or even parity, or to ignore
that channel altogether.
The optional spooler holds a SOO-foot reel, which can
be read in 2 minutes. Changing reels takes about 1
minute. Take-up facilities are standard.
CONTROLLER
The central processor in a UNIVAC Solid-State system is the controller. Only one paper-tape system
can be connected to a system. Access is directly
into the arithmetic registers, and occurs only upon
request. The amount transferred each time is 10
characters. The paper tape synchronizer contains a
20-character buffer. After the buffer has been
filled, the reader pauses until it becomes unloaded.
.5
PERFORMANCE
The peak speed of the reader is 500 characters per
second. The effective speed is the same, provided
that the buffer is unloaded once each 2Q ]I1illiseconds .
A friction drive mechanism is used, with two I-foot
capacity reservoirs. A spooler can be added ~s an
optional extra to take up the paper tape after'it has
been read.
.3
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE (Contd.)
.8
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTIONS
Parity is checked during reading, and buffer overflow
is avoided by an automatic pause, or interlock.
The following conditions effectively cause the unit
to be "disabled":
Torn tape
Power off
Overheating
Improper airflow
Plugboard not in place
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incarporated
4/63
772:074.100
_STANDARD
EDP
•
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Model "
Input-output
Paper Tape Punch
REPORTS
INPUT-OUTPUT: PAPER TAPE PUNCH
§
074.
.1
.5
GENERAL
The paper tape reader and punch are two separate
units housed in the same cabinet with their controller. The punch operates at 100 characters per second. Tape with five, six, seven, or eight channels
can be punched, with or without parity being generated for each character, a plugboard is used to
translate from six-bit biquinary code to output code.
A lO-character buffer in the synchronizer is used to
store the data being punched.
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
Punching occurs serially in sets of 10 characters.
Six characters can be punched ,accompanied only by
four blanks. The punch buffer is not automatically
protected, and a program check must be made prior
to loading. Translation is controlled by plug-board,
and parity checking by a rotary switch. Both these
controls are shared with the reader.
.6
The program is able to test the buffer and to transfer
10 characters at a time into the computer's arithmetic registers. The time involved is 85 microseconds per transfer, or less than O. 1 percent of the
overall central processor capacity.
PERFORMANCE
Both the peak and effective speeds are 100 characters
per second.
.2
PHYSICAL FORM:. . . A sprocket drive mechanism
is used.
.7
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
The plugboard which controls the code translation can
be changed in approximately 1 minute if a new one is
available, or can be rewired in less than 20 minutes.
Normal punched tape, with fully punched holes, can
be used. Tapes with five, six, or seven channels
can be used normally. An eight-channel tape can be
used, but the eighth channel is restricted to some
special function, as all other channels must be unpunched when the eighth is punched.
The parity control switch sets the unit to check a specific channel for odd or even parity, or to ignore that
channel altogether. An additional option is the ability
to punch Teletype code.
The supply spooler has a SOO-foot reel which can be
punched in 10 minutes. Changing reels takes approximately 1 minute. Take-up facilities are standard.
Various codes can be accommodated, including
Teletype, Flexowriter, DaSPan, etc .
.4
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
CONTROLLER
The central processor functions as the controller ,
and only one paper-tape system can be connected to
a UNIVAC SS 80/90 system. The rather unusual
procedure for providing data to the punch is directly
from the arithmetic registers, and 10 characters are
transferred each time. The paper tape synchronizer
has a 10-character buffer, which is tested to determine whether the previous operation has been completed.
© '963
.8
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTIONS
Parity is checked during reading, and buffer overflow
is avoided by an automatic pause, or interlock.
Physical conditions which cause the unit to become
disabled include torn paper, overheating, insufficient airflow, and no power.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
772:081.100
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Model II
Input-Output
High Speed Printer
INPUT-OUTPUT: HIGH SPEED PRINTER
§
• 24
081.
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
· 12
Use of station: .
Stacks: . . .
Heads/stack: . .
High Speed Printer.
Printer.
Unit No. 7912.
Method of use: .
· 25
Description
The print line can contain lOa, 110, 120 or 130 positions at a pitch of 10 per inch; lines may be
spaced at either 6 or 8 per inch as set by the
operator.
Inter-line spacing can be controlled only by specifying the number of line spaces between printed lines
in the program. There is no form control loop and
a program must count its way over pre-printed
forms.
The stationery must be sprocket-punched, card or
paper stock.
. 13
Availability: .•
10 months.
· 14
First Delivery:
June, 1958.
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
· 21
Drive Mechanism
.211 Drive past the head: .
. 212 Reservoirs: . . . . .
· 22
Sensing and Recording Systems
· 221 Recording system: .
· 222 Sensing system: .
· 223 Common system:
· 23
sprocket push-pull.
none.
on-the-fly hammer stroke
against print wheels.
none.
none.
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
.31
Form of Storage
.311 Medium: . .
• 312 Phenomenon: . . .
· 32
© 1963
/ +.
&
51..
paper stock .
printing.
• 321 Serial by:
. 322 Parallel by:
line .
100 to 130 positions .
.33
Coding:
6-bit printer code.
· 35
Physical Dimensions
· 351 Overall width: • . .
· 352 Length:. . . . . . .
• 353 Maximum margins
Left: . . . . .
Right: . . . . .
.4
CONTROLLER
.41
Identity:
.42
Connection to System
· 43
special ribbon and form.
special form.
0- 9.
A - Z.
: , $ - # * %;
none.
no.
see note.
Positional Arrangement
.421 On-line:
.422 Off-line: . . . . . . .
5.
none.
10
26
15
Note: With a substitution of the apostrophe (') for the
required COBOL quotation mark ("), this would
be an acceptable required COBOL set.
Multiple Copies
· 231 Maximum number
Interleaved carbon at
least: . . . . .
Carbon creep:
• 233 Types of master
.Multilith: . . .
. .
Spirit: . . . . . . . .
print.
1.
100 - 130 (increments of
10).
line at a time.
Range of Symbols
Numerals:
Letters:
Special:
Alternatives: .
FORTRAN set:.
Basic COBOL set:
Total: . . . . .
The High Speed Printer has been used with UNIVAC
systems since 1952. Its peak speed is 600 lines per
minute, dropping to 300 lines per minute for 2!-inch
spacing of lines.
The printer has a set of 51 characters engraved on
print wheels and up to 5 carbon copies can be produced.
Arrangement of Heads
4 to 21 inches.
any length is acceptable .
3.5 inches .
3.5 inches .
built into Central Processor
and the unit contains a
special 200-word buffer
band on the processor's
drum which transmits the
print data to the unit.
1.
none.
Connection to Device
.431 Devices per controller: 1.
.432 Restrictions:. . . . . . none.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Revised 5/63
I ()
UN IV AC 55 80/90 MODEL II
772:081.. 440
§ 081.
. 44
Data Transfer Control
. 441 Size of load: . • . .
. 442 Input-output areas:
. 443 Input-output area
access: . . . . .
. 444 Input-output area
lockout: . . .
I line .
buffer band .
1 band.
locked out while Printer is
printing or spacing.
none.
automatic.
.445 Table control:
.446 Synchronization: .
.622 Important parameters
Value
Name
Vertical speed: .
20 inches/sec, max.
number of lines spaced
.623 Overhead: . • . .
before printing.
.624 Effective speeds:
60,000/(100 + 8 (L-1» lines
a minute .
L = average number of lines
skipped per line printed .
· 63
Demands on System
Component
Condition
msec
Percentage
per line
.5
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
Central Processor: load buffer
Central Processor: (note)
.51
Blocks
Note: As data must be arranged in the print interleaved pattern, 26 words must be moved.
. 511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Input: .
Output: . . . . . .
1 line .
.7
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
none.
fixed.
.71
Adjustments
Adjustment
.52
Input-Output Operations
.521 Input: . • .
. 522 Output: .•
.523 Stepping: .
. 524 Skipping: .
. 525 Marking: .
.526 Searching:
none.
1 line .
feed 0-79 lines alone or as
a preliminary to printing.
none.
none.
none.
.53
Code Translation:
none.
. 54
Format Control: .
none.
.55
Control Operations
.
Disable: . . .
Request interrupt: .
Select format:
Select code:
Unload: .
.
no •
no.
no.
no.
no .
..
.56
Testable Conditions
Disabled: . .
Busy device:
Output lock:
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller: .
End of medium marks:
Off Normal*:. . . .
.
.
see Off Normal.
yes.
no.
no.
yes.
no.
yes .
* Off Normal includes: no paper.
no ribbon.
equipment malfunction.
.6
PERFORMANCE
. 61
Conditions: .
.62
Speeds
...
none .
. 621 Nominal or peak speed: 6001pm .
5/63 Revised
Method
Function
Form
Comment
Computation:
button
starts/stops Central
Processor.
advances paper 1 line.
rewinds ribbon.
resets error interlocks.
Loading and Unloading
.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Bin: . . . . . .
· 732 Replenishment time: .
· 733 Adjustment time: .
.734 Optimum reloading
period: . . . . • .
.8
normally disengaged.
Other Controls
Paper Feed:
button light
Change Ribbon: button
General Clear: button light
.73
10.1
4.0
Comment
Form tractors: set screws
Vertical
aIigyment:
clutched
drive
. 72
10.1
4.0
Capacity
1,000 sets.
2 to 5 minutes.
printer needs to be stopped.
2 to 5.minutes.
100 minutes.
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Check or
Interlock
Recording:
Reading:
Input area overflow:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Off-Normal-:
none.
none.,
not possible.
fixed.
check
see "Off Normal" •
none •
interlock
check
Action
set indicator•
wait.
set indicator.
- Off Normal: includes: • • • paper feed check.
equipment malfunction.
INPUT ·OUTPUT: HIGH SPEED PRINTER
772:081.800
EFFECTIVE SPEED
(Unit No. 7912)
6,000
5,000
4,000
3,000
2,000
1,000
900
800
700
600
Effective Speed:
Lines per
i'"",,-
500
~~
Minute
400
I--.
300
-----
200
--------- ~
r--
-----
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
o
1
2
3
4
5
Inter-Line Pitch in Inches
©
1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
772:091.100
•
STANDARD
_EDP
.,-,
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Model II
Input-Output
Uniservo Magnetic Tape Unit
R£roRTS
INPUT·OUTPUT: UNISERVO MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
§
091.
· 12
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity:
.12
Description (Contd. )
Extra protection is provided to the tape and head both
electrostatically and mechanically by a plastic guard
interposed between the tape and the heads .
. . . . . . . Uniservo Magnetic Tape
Unit.
Type No. 7915.
A write lock-out is obtained by inserting a ring in a
reel.
Description
Only tapes that have been edited to mark the flaws
should be used. Tapes are edited by first recording
a pattern of "all ones" along the tape and then reading
and checking. When errors occur while using metallic
tape, a special hand punch is used to perforate the
tape in that area. When Mylar tape is used and errors
occur, its oxide is manually scraped off, leaving a
clear spot on the tape. The clear spots indicate the
start and end of the flaw. This operation requires at
least two passes through the tape plus manual punching time.
The UNIVAC Solid-State system normally reads
I, 100-alphameric-character blocks at an effective
rate of 15,000 characters per second. (This block
length is related to a band on the UNIVAC Solid-State
dnun, but other block lengths are possible to provide
compatibility with other UNIVAC systems.)
Internally, the system uses four- bit characters, but
the magnetic tape characters are 6- bits. The difference is resolved by:
(1) Upon Reading: Using two 4-bit storage characters per 6-bit tape character read.
• 13
Availability:
7 months.
· 14
First Delivery:
May, 1960.
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
(2) Upon Writing: Recording on magnetic tape only
six bits out of each two 4-bit characters.
Some format problems result but the effective transmission rate is not reduced.
The tape is buffered into and out of the unit with an
'. 21 Drive Mechanism
overlap of 95 percent of the elapsed time between the
pinch roller.
central processor and tape transmission. The tape
• 211 Drive past the head:
buffer can also be used to move 200-word bands from • 212 Reservoirs
Number: .
2.
one part of storage to another if no tape transmission,
Form: . .
vacuum.
is in progress.
Capacity: .
6 feet of tape.
electric motor.
· 213 Feed drive:
The Uniservo II tape unit can be used in a variety of
.214 Take-up drive:.
ways in which the tape material, packing density,
electric motor.
block size and amplifier gain can be varied. They
are used in conjunction with Synchronizers. There
· 22 Sensing and Recording Systems
can be up to two Synchronizers, each of which may
.221 Recording system:.
erase head followed by a
have up to 10 tape units connected to it. One Synmagnetic write head.
chronizer may also serve any RANDEX system at• 222 Sensing system: .
tached. The address of each unit can be chosen by
magnetic read head .
a .patch panel on its Synchronizer.
.223 Common system:
common magnetic
read/write head.
The recording can be made on metal or Mylar tapes
and is compatible with UNIVAC I, II & III, File Com- .23 Multiple Copies: . . . . none.
puter, 490 and 1107. There is a special translate instruction for data in XS-3 code.
.24 Arrangement of Heads
A second station is used to read-back tape and check
the row parity, setting an indicator when a check
fails. Three levels of amplificat'ion can be used
when reading: low, normal, and high. Conventional
practice is for the operator to read low to minimize
noise; then, if difficulties arise, switch to normal or
high on the Synchronizer. The program can also
switch the level, but the operator can override its
choice upward.
© 1963
Use of station: .
Stacks: • . . . .
Heads/stack: . .
Method of us e: •
Use of station: .
Stacks: . • . . .
Heads/stack: . .
Method of use: .
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
erase.
1.
B.
all tracks
read/write.
1.
B.
all tracks read or write.
4/63
772:091.300
§
UNIVAC SS 80/90 MODEL II
. 442 Input-output areas:
.443 Input-output area
access: • . . • .
.444 Input-output area
lockout: • . . . .
.445 Table control: . .
. 446 Synchronization:.
091.
•3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
• 31
Form of Storage
· 311 Medium: . . .
. 312 Phenomenon: . . .
• 32
metal or plastic tape.
magnetization .
• 322 Parallel by:
.323 Bands: . .
• 324 Track use
Data: . .
Redundancy check: .
Timing: . • . . .
Control signals:
Unused: .
Total: .
. 325 Row use
Data: .
Redundancy check: .
Timing: . . . .
Control signals:
Gap:
• 33
Coding: .
• 34
Format Compatibility
1,100 or 720 or 120 frames
at 125 or 250 per inch.
8 tracks.
1.
6 bits per character.
1 parity.
1 clock.
UNIVAC I, II, III:
UNIVAC High Speed
Printer: . . . • . .
UNIVAC 490, 1107:
PROGRAM F ACILITIES AVAILABLE
.51
Blocks
.512 Block demarcation
Input: . • • . . . .
Output: • . . . . .
8.
1,100 or 720 or 120.
O.
O.
O.
.52
see.622.
SS 80/90 six-bit or
UNIVAC XS-3.
XS-3 translate instruction
in 80/90.
special write instruction.
program translation to be
handled by 490/1107.
.4
CONTROLLER
. 41
Identity:.. . .
Code Translation:
· 54
Format Control
Control: • . . .
Format alternatives:
Rearrangement:
Suppress zeros: . .
Insert point: . • . .
Insert spaces: . . .
Recording density: .
Section sizes: • . .
0.5 inch .
2,400 ft.
1,500 ft.
Synchronizer .
Type No. 7914.
1 max (Model I).
2 max (Model II).
none.
Connection to Device
.56
· 44
Data Transfer Control
.441 Size of load: . . . • . . 1,100 or 720 or 120
characters.
,...----:- &
4/63
program.
none.
none .
none.
none.
none.
yes.
yes .
yes.
no.
no .
XS-3 or SS 80/90.
yes .
no.
yes (3 levels).
Testable Conditions
Disabled: •.
Busy device:
Output lock:
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller: .
End of medium marks:
Error type: . . . . . .
• 431 Devices per controller: 10.
. 432 Restrictions:. . . . . . none.
program.
Control Operations
Disable: . . . • . .
Request interrupt: .
Select format:
Select code:
Rewind: . . .
Unload: . . • .
Amplifier gain:
Connection to System
.422 Off-line:
fixed.
fixed.
Input-Output Operations
.53
· 55
. 421 On-line:
1,100 or 720 or 120
characters.
.521 Input:. • • . . . . . . . minimum 720 characters
(could be six 120-character
blocks with gap as
delimiter).
.522 Output: .•
1,100 or 720 or 120-character block, forward only.
.523 Stepping:.
none.
.524 Skipping:.
automatic over pre-edited
marked flaws.
.525 Marking: .
holes punched in tape indicate beginning and flaws.
. none.
.526 Searching:
Physical Dimensions
. 351 Overall width:
. 352 Length
Plastic: ..
Metal:
· 43
yes, and testable.
no .
automatic.
·5
.511 Size of block:
O.
O.
Other device or system Code translation
. 42
band.
Positional Arrangement
.321 Serial by: . .
.35
buffer band of 200 words •
I AUERBACH / ~
yes.
yes .
yes.
no.
yes.
no.
yes.
INPUT-OUT: UNISERVO MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
§
772:091.600
091.
.6
PERFORMANCE
.61
Conditions
Case
Char/block
II:
III:
IV:
V:
.62
.71
Adjustments
250.
250.
125.
125.
125.
• 72
Speeds
. 621 Nominal or peak speed
I: .
25,000 char/sec.
25,000 char/sec.
12,500 char/sec.
12,500 char/sec.
12,500 char/sec.
.73
II: .
III:
IV:
V:.
.622 Important parameters
Name
Value
Read start/stop
125 cpi: . . . •
18.3/16.3 msec.
Read start/stop
250 cpi: • . . .
12. 1/9. 2 msec.
Write start/stop
125 cpi: . . . .
12.0/11. 1 msec.
Gap 125 cpi/250 cpi: 2.4/1. 05 inches •
• 623 Overhead: . . • •
start/stop time.
.624 Effective speeds;
I: .
16,400 char/sec.
II: .
13,600 char/sec.
III:
8,800 char/sec.
IV:
7,800 char/sec.
V:.
2,600 char/sec .
• 63
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
Char/inch
1,100
720
1,100
720
120
I:
.7
Adjustment
Method
Metallic to Plastic:
switch
Other Controls
Function
Form
Comment
Rewind:
Forward
Backward:
button
rewinds tape.
2 button lights
forces direction .
Loading and Unloading
.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Reel of Plastic
tape: • • . . .
Capacity
2,400 ft. or 5,500,000
char or more at 250
pulses per inch.
Reel of Metal
tape: . • . . .
.732 Replenishment time:.
.733 Adjustment time:
.734 Optimum reloading
period: ••.
1,500 ft. or 2,000,000
char at 125 pulses per
inch.
1 to 6 minutes.
yes, needs to be stopped.
0.5 to 1. 0 minute.
6.
a minutes.
Demands on System
Component
Condition
Centra!.:
Processor: select unit
load or unload buffer
rewind
Msec
block
eer
Percentage
.8
0.3
or
0.2- 0.7
3.5
600.
or
2.6- 7.6
Note: When computation is to be performed on UNIVAC XS- 3 coded information read from tape, the
data must be converted to SS 80/90 code. Similarly, when preparing XS- 3 coded information
to write on tape, the inverse conversion must
be programmed. The cost in either case is a
subroutine which has an inside loop length of 3
instructions requiring no less than O. 2 millisecond per word using a translate instruction.
© 1963
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Check or
Interlock
Recording:
Reading:
Input area overflow:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
row parity
row parity
not possible.
not possible.
check
mechanical
interlock
Timing conflicts:
Noise in gap:
No sprocket pulse:
interlock
check
check
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Action
set indicator.
set ind ica tor.
set indicator.
turns off unit.
wait (tape passes)
set indicator.
wait.
set indicator.
set indicator.
4/63
772: 111.100
UN IV AC SS 80/90 Model II
Simultaneous Operations
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
§
111.
The basic Model II system consists of a central processor with almost totally
buffered input and output facilities, except for the limitation of only one magnetic tape per
synchronizer operating at any given time. The buffering would be complete except that it
takes time to actually transfer the data block from the drum buffer bands to the main drum
storage area.
This transfer of a data block takes one drum revolution (3.4 milliseconds) per transfer,
except for transfers to the print buffer band, which take three revolutions per transfer • The
extent to which the peripheral units are used determines the load on the central processor.
When all units of a card system are working, the central processor penalty is less than 5
percent.
This simultaneity between all peripheral units and the computer applies only to a
basic system which has no RANDEX Drum. This uses the buffers otherwise allocated to one of
the synchronizer tape units. Thus, there can be no simultaneity between reading or writing
the RANDEX Units and the Magrietic Tapes on that synchronizer.
Tables
The following operations can progress Simultaneously:
Processing.
Reading a card by means of High Speed Card Reader.
Reading paper tape.
Punching paper tape.
Printing a line.
Reading and/or punching a card by means of the Read-Punch Unit.
Reading or writing of a block of tape or a block from RANDEX via the
RANDEX Tape Synchronizer.
Reading or writing a block of tape via the Tape Synchronizer.
Reposition any RANDEX heads not otherwise in use.
Rewinding any tape units, not otherwise in use.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
772:121.101
UNW AC SS 80/90 Modell!
Instruction list
INSTRUCTION LIST
§
121.
INSTRUCTION
OPERATION
OPERATION
ABSOLUTE X-6 or S-4
M
C
M
M
M
M
C
C
C
C
ARITHMETIC
70
75
85
55
ADD
SUB
MUL
DIV
(M) + (rA)
(rA) - (M)
(rL) x (M)
(rL)
(M)
•
(rA)
(rA)
• (rA)
• (rA)
•
7
LOGIC
20
35
32
37
62
00
67
82
87
82
BUF
ERS
SHR
SHL
ZUP
JMP
HLT
TEQ
TGR
TEA
M
M
onoo
onoo
87
-
M
M
C
M
M
M
C
C
C
TGA
M
C
02
07
LIR
IIR
M
M
C
C
12
17
C3
C1
CTM
MTC
MTX
XTM
-
C
C
C
C
M
M
(rA) "OR" (M) - - - . (rA)
(rA) "AND" (M) (rA)
Shift (rA) and (rX) right, circular
Shift (rA) left Z e r o _ rA LSD
Zero and comma suppress (rA)
Jump
Halt, go to M or C depending on start button pushed
Compare (rA) to (rL); if =, go to M; if f , go to C
Compare (rA) to (rL); if =, go to M; if 7-, go to C
Compare (rA + bits 1 & 2 of rX); to (rL + bits 4 & 5 of rX); if =, go
to M; if f ' go to C.
Compare (rA + bits 1 & 2 or rX) to (rL + bits 4 & 5 of rX); if = ,
go to M; if 7-, go to C
C
C
C
C
C
C
MISCELLANEOUS INTERNAL
M _
Index Register
M
• (Index Register), and m of (rA)
+ (Index Register)
Zeros _
balance of rA
Translate card to computer code
Translate computer to card code
Translate XS-3 to computer code
Translate computer to XS-3 code
DATA TRANSFER
25
60
05
65
30
50
77
26
31
06
36
86
LOA
STA
LOX
STX
LDL
STL
ATL
CLA
CLL
CLX
CAA
CAX
M
M
M
M
M
M
-
M
M
M
M
M
C
C
C
C
C
CQ
C
C"'*
C**
C**
C**
(M)
(rA)
(M)
(rX)
(M)
---------
(rA)
(M)
(rX)
(M)
(rL)
(A)
(rL)
(rA)
(rL)
(rX)
(rA), save sign
(rA), and (rX)
-
(rL)
(rA)
0
0
0
0
0
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
772: 121.1 02
§
UNIV AC SS 80/90 MODEL "
121.
INSTRUCTION LIST (Contd.)
INSTRUCTION
OPERATION
OPERATION
ABSO.f..UTE X-6 or S-4
23
90
FO
B8
BO
05
06
CTA
SML
SMA
TCD
TDC
LSX
ZSR
M
C
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
C
C
C
C
C
C**
(rC)
• (rA)
M. S. D. of (M) Sign of (rL)
Sign of (M) M. S. D. of (rA)
1 to 200 words of Core Drum
1 to 200 words of Drum - _ Core
(Bits 1'& 2 of M) (Bits of 4 !It 5 of rX)
o
• Subregisters 3 and 4 of rX; sign +.
CARD READ-PUNCH
81
81
RCC
RCC
aaOO C
aaOI C
46
46
22
RBU
RBU
RBT
aaOO C
aaOl C
M C
57
RSS
C
72
HCC
96
96
aaOO C
aaOl C
42
HBU
HBU
HBT
47
HSS
Oaoo
Load punch buffer with binary image from band aa
Load punch buffer translating the band aa machine code to card
image
Unload punch buffer transferring the binary image to band aa
Unload, punch buffer translating to machine code into band aa
Test buffer; if loaded, go to M, (rC) _
(rA); if not, go to
C
Select Stacker
HIGH SPEED READER
M
C
M C
C
Feed Card; if interlocked, go to M & (rC) _
(rA); if not,
go to C
Unload buffer with binary image into band aa
Unload buffer translating to machine code into band aa
Test buffer; if loaded, go to M & (rC) _
(rA); if not, go
to C
Select stacker a
HIGH SPEED PRINTER
11
16
27
PRN
PFD
PBT
aann C
OOnn C
M C
Feed nn lines loading the print buffer from band $.a
Feed nn lines
Test printer; if free, go to M, (rC) _
(rA); if not, go to C
MAGNETIC TAPE
C2
TST
C6
TBL
TBT
TRW
TRW
TBU
TRD
aaOO C
C6
TWR
TBL
OabO C
BXXX C
FX
TLB
BXXX C
C7
F2
F2
F6
G2
H2
M
M
C
OaOO
0a20
aaOO
Oabc
C
C
C
C
** If next instruction is
5/63
C
to
Synchronizer test; if free, go to,M & (rC) _
(rA); if not,
go to C
Load tape buffer from band aa (Drum)
Buffer Test; if free, go to M & (rC) _
(rA); if not, go to C
Rewind tape a
Rewind and disable tape a
Transfer contents of tape buffer to band aa
Read block from tape a, mode and density b, direction and gain
C
Write block on tape a, mode and density b
Load tape buffer from core, where BXXX is beginning word
address
Transfer contents of tape buffe;zo to core address BXXX. BXXX
,is .beginning word address (co!e)
be found in core, then "M" and
"c" must be same address.
INSTRUCTION LIST
§
772: 121.103
121.
INSTRUCTION LIST (Contd.)
INSTRUCTION
OPERATION
ABSOLUTE X-6 or S-4
OPERATION
M
C
RANDEX
40
18
92
43
28
38
48
58
68
F6
C6
C7
LSR
POH
OBT
OPT
OWT
ORO
OWC
OSW
O$R
TBU
TBL
TBT
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
aaOO
aaOO
M
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C2
TST
M
C
Load Synchronizer Instruction Register
Position Head
Test HPFF, if set go to M; if not, go to C
Test head position; if positioned, set HPFF
Write a record
Read a record
Write and check a record
Find record and write
Find record and read
Transfer contents of tape buffer to band aa
Transfer contents of band aa to tape buffer
Test Tape buffer: if free, rC - r A and go to M; if not, go
to C
Test Synchronizer: if free, rC rA and go to M; if not,
go to C
N. B.
1. There are 4 special registers:
rA:
rC:
rL:
rX:
Accumulator
Command (complete instruction)
Lower accumulator
Used for comparisons and code conversions
2. Next instruction specified by C unless otherwise
stated.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporotion and BNA Incorporated
5/63
772: 131.100
·STlNDARD
EDP
•
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Model II
Coding Specimen
S-4
"'PORTS
CODING SPECIMEN: S-4
§
131 •
.1
TRANSLATOR LISTING
eDNO.
1
LoeA.
OP
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
0400
0404
0408
0611
0614
0418
0621
0416
0406
0414
0411
0421
25
30
87
82
30
87
82
67
67
67
MMMM
ecce
0000
0400
0402
0406
0400
0414
0416
0421
0414
00000
00000
0005
0006
0004
4999
0700
0404
0408
0611
0614
0418
0621
0411
00005
00007
0414
0411
0421
S
SYMA
RANGE
ee05
ee07
EQU
OUT
IN
OP
IR
SYMM
SYM e
0000
0400
4999
0700
BLR
BLA
LDA
LDL
TGR
TEQ
LDL
LGR
TEQ
ee07
OUT
EQU
ee05
IN
EQU
HLT
HLT
HLT
0005
0006
0004
OUT
5
7
EQU
OUT
IN
BLR
BLA
LDA
HED
LDL
TGR
TEQ
LDL
TGR
TEQ
0000
0400
4999
0700
remarks
X
Without Forward Search
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0400
25
0404
0408
0411
0414
0418
0621
0416
0406
0624
0424
0421
30
87
82
30
87
82
67
67
67
0000
0400
0402
4999
0700
0404
0406
0424
0624
0416
0421
0624
00000
00000
0005
0006
0004
0408
0411
0414
0418
0621
0424
00005
00007
0624
0424
0421
RANGE
X
B
Ce07
OUT
EQU
eeos
IN
EQU
ecos
ee07
EQU
OUT
IN
HLT
HLT
HLT
0005
0006
0004
OUT
5
7
EQU
OUT
IN
With Forward Search
The listings on the right show the symbolic coding;
those on the left show the final machine coded
program. The path of the program goes from
RANGE to the three possible end-points IN, OUT,
or EQUAL. Two of these, EQU and OUT, can be
reached from two separate pOints in the program
sequence.
© 1963
When Forward search is not used, these are allocated as
soon as the first point is reached, wasting a drum revolution each time the second path is taken. With Forward
search, the allocation starts with the later path, and the
delay is reduced to 13-word times (as against 187 in the
former case).
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
772: 141.1 00
•
STANDARD
II
REPORTS
EDP
UN IV AC 55 80/90 Model II
Data Code Table
Internal
DATA CODE TABLE NO.1
§
141.
·1
.2
.21
· 22
. 23
USE OF CODE: . • . • • internal and printer.
STRUCTURE OF CODE
Character Size: . • • • . 6 bit (split between two
words: Most significant =
zone or unprimed.
Least significant = numeric or primed).
Character Structure
.221 More significant
pattern: • • . .
· 222 Less significant
pattern: ••••
Character Codes
LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
. 2 bits values for pattern
16, 32, 0, O.
.4 bits values for pattern
1, 2, 4, 8.
© 1963
10
11
12
13
14
15
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA incorporated
MOST SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
0
0
1
2
3
4
-
Space
)
5
6
7
8
9
16
32
NO
PRINT
A
J
B
K
C
L
D
M
:
&
E
F
G
H.
I
48
+
/
S
T
U
$
,
*
%
N
0
P
Q
R
V
W
X
y
Z
(
;
I
#
4/63
772: 142.1 00
.srANDARD
II
EDP
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Model II
Dota Code Table
XS3
"I'QRTS
DATA CODE TABLE NO.2
§
142.
.1
.2
• 21
.22
. 23
USE OF CODE:
. XS3 use to communicate
with other Univac
Machines.
STRUcrURE OF CODE
Character Size: .
.6 bit:
Most significant = zone
or unprimed.
Least significant = numeric or unprime.
Character Structure
Character Codes
LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN·
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
.221 More significant
pattern:
.222 Less significant
pattern:
• 2 bits: 16, 32.
• 4 bits: 1, 2, 4, 8.
© 1963
12
13
14
15
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
0
16
32
Space
,
..
0
1
Z
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
,
48
:
;
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
#
)
J
+
/
K
L
M
N
0
P
S
T
U
Q
y
R
23
V
W
X
&
(
4/63
772: 143.100
·SIANDARD
EDP
•
R£roR1S
UNIVAC 55 80/90 Model II
Data Codes
Card Codes - Untranslated
DATA CODE TABLE NO.3
§
.2
143.
.1
USE OF CODE:
In reading or punching
cards with non - standard
punching.
.2
STRUCTURE OF CODES
aO-Column
The aO-column punched card is represented in the
computer as 24 words. Each group of 10 columns
Rows
y
X
o
--21 - -3
4
5
_....J _ _ _
6
7
a
9
Columns
STRUCTURE· OF CODES (Contd.)
aO-Column (Contd.)
forms a data word of 3 images called the unprimed,
primed and duo-primed images. Each image is a
computer word and is an exact representation of the
holes appearing on a particular section of the card a punch equals a "1" bit. The signs· of all images
are positive.
Word
0
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
0'
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
0"
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
1
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
1'
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
I"
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
2
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
2'
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
3
(10 4-bit
cha;rs)
Word
3'
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
4
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
4'
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
5
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
5'
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
6
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
6'
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
7
(10 4-bit
charsJ_
Word
7'
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
2"
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
3"
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
4"
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
5"
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
6"
(10 4-bit
chars)
Word
7"
(10 4-bit
chars)
1-10
11-20
21-30
31-40
41-50
51-60
71-ao
61-70
Row
90-Column
o
The 90-column punched card is represented in the
Central Processor as 20 words. Each group of 10
columns forms a data word of 2 images called the
umprimed and the primed images or a word-pair.
(Columns 41-45 and a6-90 are each treated as 10column groups and are placed into the 5 least significant digit positions in the computer words.)
Each image is a computer word and is an exact representation of the holes appearing on a particular
section of the card - a punch equals a "1" bit. The
signs of all images are positive.
© 1963
1
3
5
7
9
Columns.
0
1
2
3
4
0'
I'
2'
3'
4'
1·10
11·20
21-30
31-40
41-45
5
6
7
8
9
5'
6'
7'
8'
9'
o
1
3
5
7
9
Columns
46-55
56-65
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
66-75
76-85
86-90
5/63
UNIVAC SS 80/90 MODEL II
772: 143.300
§
143 •
.3
EXAMPLES (80-Column card)
Card Column
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2a
Alphabetic
Character
K
L
M
N
0
P
Q
R
S
T
y
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
X
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
0
1
1
1
a
a
0
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
2
1
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
1
a
3
a
1
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
1
4
a
a
1
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
5
a
a
a
1
a
0
a
a
a
a
6
a
a
a
a
1
a
a
a
a
a
7
a
0
a
a
a
1
a
a
a
a
8
a
a
a
a
a
a
1
a
a
a
9
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
1
a
a
Card
Row
<
lO-digit
Unprimed
Word
la-digit
Primed
Word
lO-digit
Duo-primed
Word
Note:
Holes would appear in the punched card wherever a "1" occurs in the above table.
In bi -quinary. the three words would be:
Unprimed word:
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
5
4
2
1
a
a
a
a
5
4
a
a
a
a
5
4
2
1
a
a
Primed word:
Duo-primed word:
5/63
772: 144. 100
•
II
STANDARD
EDP
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Model II
Data Code Table
Collating Sequence
REPORTS
DATA CODE TABLE NO.4
§
144.
.3
.1
USE OF CODE: .
.2
NUMERIC CODE
comparisons.
(in ascending sequence)
ALPHAMERIC CODE
(in ascending sequence)
0
A
1
B
2
C
D
3
4
o
1
Space
)
5
6
2
3
4
Undigit A
Undigit B
Undigit C
5
6
]
K
L
M
$
*
&
E
F
N
0
P
G
Q
R
7
H
8
9
(
I
#
/
S
T
U
,
%
V
W
X
y
Z
+
7
8
9
Undigit F
Undigit G
Undigit H
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
772:151.100
UNIVAC S5 80/90 Model II
P. O. Facilities
PROBLEM ORIENTED FACILITIES
§
151.
.1
UTILITY ROUTINES
• 11
Simulators of Other
Computers:. . . .
none.
Simulation by Other
Computers:. . . .
none .
. 12
• t3
Data Sorting and Merging
SR 012
Reference:
Record size:
Block size:
Key size:
File size:
Number of tapes:
Date available:
Description:
SR012.
1 to 100 words.
100 words.
1 to 12 words.
4, 800 block reel.
4 to 10.
currently.
.14
Report Writing: . .
. none .
.15
Data Transcription:
. a body of input-output routines are available which
can be easily connected
for data transcription purposes .
.16
File Maintenance:
.17
Other
none.
Program testing procedures, and a tape input-output
system (Mascot II) are available. A series of
mathematical function routines are available.
.2
PROBLEM ORIENTED LANGUAGES
A linear programming package is available.
SR012 accepts as input a file of 12-word items
in the standard interlace from a tape written in USS
mode. It produces as output the same items in sequence, in the standard interlace, on a tape written
in USS mode. One full reel may be sorted at a
time; however, the input data may appear on more
than one tape. Both input and output tapes adhere to
standard tape conventions (labels, sentinels, block
counts, etc.).
Similar routines are available for 5, 10, 25, and
50 word items.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
772: 171. 100
_STANDARD
EDP
•
REPORTS
UNIV AC 55 80/90 Model II
Machine Oriented Language
5-4
MACHINE-ORIENTED LANGUAGE: 5-4
§
171.
.14
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity:
S - 4
.12
Origin:
UNIVAC Division.
. 13
Reference:
S-4 Assembly, General
Manual.
UP - 1774-6, Revision I.
S-4 Assembly For 90 Card
Configura tion.
UP-1774.7
. 14
Description (Contd.)
Allocation Control (Contd.)
selected allocation cannot be made optimal. When
this condition exists, the programmer has a choice
of using a higher level store to attempt to obtain
optimal allocation before accepting a non-optimal
allocation.
Compatibility Controls
S-4 provides for compatibility with both actual programs and symbolic programs .
Description
The compatibility with actual programs comes from
the design of the Availability Table. This table is a
storage map which indicates to the assembler which
positions are available for allocation. At any time
in the program, this allocation can be changed by
reading in a new availability table. The change can
be a complete or partial replacement of the availability table or the addition of reservations. Similarly, the whole table can be punched out as needed
to allow for similar subsequent uses, permitting:
The S-4 assembler is the standard assembler for
UNIVAC Solid-State systems, Models I and II. S-4
is machine oriented, its decimal operands being
arranged in lO-digit fixed point words exactly as in
the normal machine instruction.
S-4 is an assembly language which produces one
machine instruction for each symbolic instruction.
However, S-4 contains a set of 20 controls which
are independent of the machine language and provide
various facilities at assembly time. An S-4 programmer can use these controls to relieve himself
of the machine language coding problems.
(1) Existing programs to have their own avail-
ability tables to be read in, and therefore
reserved, prior to an assembly.
(2) Overlays to be created at any position in the
assembly.
These facilities are of two types:
Symbolically, programs can be merged into assembly programs either by physically adding cards or
by calling the programs to be added from a tape
unit .
• Allocation Controls, which, while comprehensive·,
do not provide the same result as hand coding.
• Compatibility Controls.
The S-4 language itself is a simple representation
of the standard machine instructions. Thus, ADD is
the mnemonic used for 70, the addition machine code.
Similar to the machine instruction, the S-4 representation must have a location, an operation code,
an operand address, and a next instruction address.
However, the programmer's job in keeping track of
the addresses is eased by:
Allocation Control
Model I systems use magnetic drums as basic stor-.
age and have a minimum of two levels of storage.
Model II systems also have core stores, while a tape
system uses the tape buffer. The efficiency of any
program depends more on the allocation of operands
to storage than on the actual instructions. A wellallocated add instruction (one optimized as to the
number of word cycles that must elapse before the
operand is available) takes 85 microseconds. Normally, this instruction takes 20 times as long, and,
in the worst case, it would take 80 times as long.
S-4 provides three levels of allocation control to the
programmer: provisional, general, and by exception.
At the first level, each label contains a character
position which defines the label as being provisionally allocated to either normal or fast drum storage,
or to core storage. In any part of a program, these
provisional labels can be overridden (the second
level of control). Thus, allocations coded for the
normal drum access are forced into fast access, but
the reverse is not true. The third control level is
provided for situations in which the provisionally
© 1963
(1) Using blanks if the address is obvious and
will not be referred to again.
(2) Using "Local Reference Points" (up to 20 can
be operational at a given time) to denote points
which are only of local importance; that is,
normally within 20 to 50 lines of coding.
(3) Using Temporary Tags for all those labels
which are only used within a segment of the
program.
(4) Using specialized labels for each word of the
input-output areas defined in the program, an"
for the registers.
(5) Using specialized tags for tables (up to 30 of
these can be defined at anyone point).
. 15
Publication Date: . . .
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
1962.
4/63
772: 171. 200
§
UN IV AC SS 80/90 MODEL II
171.
LANGUAGE FORMAT
.2
OPERATION
LINE
NO.
.22
SYMBOLIC
Legend
LINE: .
LINE NO:
SYMBOLIC a:
OPERATION:
IR: . . . . .
SYMBOLIC m:
SYMBOLIC c:
SYMBOLIC m & c
combined:
WORD TIME:
. 23
line of coding on the coding
sheet.
line number optionally allocated by programmer,
always reallocated by the
translator.
location of the instruction in
the store. May be in absolute or symbolic form.
defines the type of constant
which follows; or is the
instruction in symbolic
form.
Index Register Modification,
if it is to be used.
the address of an operand,
in symbolic or absolute
form.
the address of the next instruction' in symbolic or
absolute form.
10 digits, to be treated as
an absolute constant.
3 digit number which directs the compiler as to
time to be allowed to the
instruction.
II
.3
LABELS
.31
General
Mil
SYMBOLIC
"en
Labels are used in S-4 to define parts of a program
and units of the computer. In general, five alphameric characters are used to provide a label, and
the fact that specific positions either are or are not
numeric distinguishes one type of label from
another. Position of characters in label fields is
critical.
.32
Universal Labels
.321 Labels for instructions
Existence: . . .
Formation rule
First character:
Last character:
Others: . . . . .
Number of characters:
.323 Labels for constants
or variables: . .
.324 Labels for files or
records: . . . .
Corrections
Insertions, deletions, and corrections can be made
by altering the original coding. Special pseudo operations are available in the language which make it
unnecessary to do more than nominate what parts of
a previous assembly should be omitted and require
the programmer to provide only full details of any
additions (including changes).
.24
SYMBOLIC
"AI!
.327 Labels for regions
and tables
Existence: . . .
Formation rule
First character:
Others: . . . .
Number of characters:
optional.
must not be numeric.
designating type of storage
(i. e., fast or normal
drum or core) for provisional allocation or overflow control.
alphameric.
5.
same as instructions.
no; but there are labels
reserved for I/O areas .
yes; i.e., A A A A A
alphabetic character.
0000 to 9200.
1 label, 4 element.
Special Conventions
A number of conventions are used to simplify programming or assembly, which add considerably to the
writing speed, ease of insertions, etc. in addition
to readability.
BLANKS are used in the location, the operand and/or
the next instruction addresses within each 'instruction when normal sequencing is desired.
Constants can be given in some simple form, with an
additional instruction (a designator) as to what part
of the given constant is wanted. These instructions
include:
for I/O codes:
for general use:
4/63
Unprimed, primed, or
double primed; numeric or
zone portions.
either the negative or the reciprocal of the given instruction.
.33
Local Labels
Temporary labels are used extensively in S-4. The
three methods of writing them are:
1) Local Reference Points, which are constantly
redefined. These are numbered 1 through 9
and 0, and a reference applies to the nearest
reference point in the indicated direction.
2) Temporary Tags. These differ in formation
from permanent tags (They have numerics in
the center of the tag; e.g., BI23N) and are all
cleared at once from the symbol table by a
control card.
3) Permanent Tags. However, any permanent
tag can be made local by clearing it from the
symbol table, and then redefining it as the
new value.
,/
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: 5-4
772: 171.333
§ 171.
.333 Labels for library routines
Formation rule
First character:
must not be numeric.
Last 2 characters:
designating type of storage
for provisional allocation.
Others: .
numeric.
Number of characters:
5.
.4
DATA
.41
Constants
.411 Maximum size constants or literals: .
.42
.43
.545 Other
Allocation is handled by three methods.
(1) Explicity. Each label is coded to indicate
whether it should be placed in core storage,
or onto the fast access or normal access
portion of the drum.
(2) By policy statements which overrule the explicit statements. Special pseudo codes are
available which cause the translator to allocate core store, or fast store to all subsequent labels despite the allocation instruction
implicit in the actual label. (This is very
helpful when utilizing subroutines. )
(3) By directing the translator to leave a specific
amount (entered in the word time column on
the coding sheet) of time between particular
instructions. This provision overrules the
amount of time which would be generally used
for the specific instruction.
10 hexadecimal or decimal
digits or one part.
10 alphabetic characters
(i. e., numeric or zone
portion) .
Working Areas: .. ' . . complied by use, or by definition as reserved or
table areas .
.6
SPECIAL ROUTINES
AVAILABLE: . . . .
none in 8-4 language.
Input-Output Areas
.431 Data layout: . . . .
.5
PROCEDURES
.51
Direct Operation Codes
controlled by parameters
preset for units connected
to system.
.7
All machine codes are given mnemonic codes, such
as ADD, LDA (Load Register A). These, or their
absolute equivalents, can be used interchangeably.
.52
Macro-Codes: .
none.
.53
Interludes: . .
none.
.54
Translator Control
. 541 Method of control:
. 542 Allocation counter
Set to absolute:
Set to label: .
Step forward: '.
Step backward:
Reserve area:
. 543 Label adjustment
Set labels equal:
Set absolute value: .
Clear label table: .
.544 Annotation
Comment phrase:
Title phrase: . .
a large number of pseudo
operation codes give direct
control over the translator. .8
In addition, the translator
includes a load feature,
.81
which allows its own
tables to be overwritten by .82
new data in the middle of
an assembly .
LmRARY FACILITIES
Libraries can be created and held on magnetic tape.
These libraries consist of regular S-4 programs,
and are called in by naming the first and last statement number which is to be incorporated into the assemblyand the tape unit where it is to be found. No
program is named by these instructions, and it is the
responsibility of the programmer to position the
tapes correctly.
A special Constants Library facility is available during assembly. All library constants are read and
their labels checked against the list of labels. If the
label has been used previously in the program, the
value of the constant is entered. If no such use has
been made, no entries are created in the object program .
MACRO AND PSEUDO TABLES
Macros: . . . . . . . none.
Pseudos
ASSEMBLY CONTROL PSEUDO OPERATION
RST:
END:
yes.
yes.
yes.
yes.
yes .
Initialize for Assembly.
End Card Output.
STORAGE ALLOCATION PSEUDO OPERATIONS
yes.
yes.
yes, local, relative and
specific permanent labels
can be cleared separately.
yes.
yes.
BLR:
BLA:
REG:
INT:
SYN:
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Block Reservation.
Block Availability.
Regional Specifications,
providing labels and reading space.
Interlace Pattern Reserve,.
revising an I/O and providing labels.
Synonym.
4/63
772: 171.820
UNIVAC 55 80/90 MODEL II
§ 171.
. 82
• 82
Pseudos (Contd.)
TAPE ASSEMBLY PSEUDO OPERATIONS
ALLOCATION-CONTROL PSEUDOOPERATIONS
HEDB:
HEDA:
HEDD:
HEDH:
HEDE:
HEDF:
HEDG:
HEDJ:
HEDN:
HEDZ:
HEDY:
WDT:
Initiate Forward Search.
End Forward Search.
Extend in High-Speed
Memory.
Extend in Core Memory.
Terminate HED D and HED
H Functions.
Assign High-Speed Storage_.
Assign Core Storage.
High-Speed Tags to Core
Storage.
Cancel effect of HED F, G,
and I.
Allocate in Normal Speed
Storage. Execute in High
Speed Storage.
Terminate HED Z Control.
Word-Time Conttol.
TAG TABLE CONTROL PSEUDO OPERATIONS
EQU:
HEDC:
4/63
Pseudos (Contd.)
Equivalence.
Clear Temporary Tag
Table.
HEDT:
HEDI:
HEDO:
Accept Tape Input, from
indicated tape.
Rewind Input Servo.
from indicated tape.
Rewind Output Servo.
CONSTANT LIDRARY PSEUDO OPERATIONS
HEDL:
HEDK:
Process Constant Library,
inserting any constants
which have been called.
End Constant Library Processing.
PROGRAM TESTING PSEUDO OPERATIONS
HEDX:
HEDM:
HEDP:
PPA:
PAT:
SYP:
Printer Output.
Tape Output.
Resume Punch Output.
Print and Punch the Availability Table.
Print Availability Table.
Print Symbol Table.
772:181.100
.STANIlAAD
II
EDP
UN IV AC SS 80/90 Model II
Program Transl ator
S-4
REPORTS
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: S-4
§
181.
12
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity: .
.12
Description (Contd. )
(3) When two or more variables which are to be considered for allocation to a particular position are
considered, space allocation is provided on a
first come, first served basis. This allocation
gives fair, but far from the best results.
S-4 80 Card Assembly
System.
S-4 80 Card-Tape-Core
Assembly System.
S-4 90 Tape-Core
Assembly System.
The S-4 Translator includes "Forward Search, " a
facility which, if carefully used, can reduce the impact of the first two disadvantages just enumerated.
This facility allocates space backwards from the next
fixed point. This allocation tends to be random, relieves the overcrowding, and optimizes on the last of
a series of exits. A group of a maximum of 10 instructions can be handled at anyone time.
Description
The most interesting factor about the S-4 Translator
relates to the source card design. The input is keypunched into the second half of the card and is reproduced in the same relative position on output. During input the first half of the card is ignored; however, the output object program is punched into it.
As a result:
S-4 Translators differ according to the machines on
which they are run, or basically according to the following characteristics:
(1) The output deck contains a complete, up-dated
• Whether 80-column or 90-column cards are used.
record of machine code and symbolic code, in
addition to comments. The output deck is therefore independent of the input deck, which can be
discarded or dispersed to its original sources.
Up-to-date documentation, particularly of new
routines, is therefore much easier to obtain
Simply by listing the object program deck.
• Whether the system is the Model I or Model II.
• Whether the minimum drum size is 2,600, 5,000,
or 8,800 words.
• Whether the system is a card or tape system.
(2) As the actual input area of the card does not coincide with the input area of the other UNIVAC
Solid State Assembly System, X-6, one card can
hold a code in both languages. Thus, routines
can be issued which are suitable for compilation
by either the S-4 or the X-6 assembly.
It can be seen that there are 24 possible basic configurations, and it is not surprising that some of them
have been omitted. What is surprising is that the
Model II users, who have no other assembly system
available, have a very restricted choice. Only two
versions are available:
The assembly time for the S-4 is computer-limited.
Tape or card input-output can be used, and translation speeds of approximately 60 instructions per
minute can be obtained under favorable circumstances. These speeds are drastically reduced when
the drum is filling up. A single large assembly can
require an hour.
(1) If a user's drum capacity is less than 5,000
words, a specialized, restricted version of the
language must be used.
The object program is "optimized" by using the first
available location whenever a new allocation has to
be made. Normally, this is done in a forward direc- .13
tion, which means that no other point is referenced.
However, the method has three disadvantages:
. 14
(1) In a program relying heavily on subroutines,
parts of the drum can become unnecessarily
crowded, causing delays in other parts of the
program because of latency.
(2) If a location is jumped to from a number of positions, it is "optimized" as relative to the first
jump encountered, even if this results in nearly
the worst possible latency time for all other
entries, (which often happens.)
© 1963
(2) If a user's drum capacity is 5,000 words or more,
the Model IS, ODD-word drum version can be used,
which means that during the compilation, programs can utilize only the 5, ODD-word drum, and
can make. no use of the core.
Originator: .
UNIVAC Division.
Maintainer:
UNIVAC Division.
. 15
Availability:
April, 1962 .
.2
INPUT
.21
Language
• 211 Name: • .
.212 Exemptions:
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
• S-4 .
variable for different
versions.
4/63
772:181.220
§
UNIV AC SS 80/90 MODEL II
181.
• 22
Bulk Translating:
• 45
Program Diagnostics: . none can be inserted directly. but the object program
can be made compatible
with the standard
diagnostic programs .
.46
Translator Library: . • notle .
.5
TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE
.51
Object Program Space
Form
.221 Input media:
• punched cards.
magnetic tape.
.222 Obligatory ordering: • • program sequence.
.223 Obligatory grouping: •
no.
• 23
.44
Size Limitations
• 231 Maximum number of source
and data statements:
1 per word available
in store.
.232 Maximum size source
statements: • • • • • 1 card.
.3
OlITPUT
. 31
Object Program
.511 Fixed overhead: . . . . normally 200 words for
loader .
. 513 Approximate expansion
of procedures: • . .. 1-for-1 correspondence
between input and output •
.52
The object program is put out both in machine language code and in symbolic S-4 coding. The latter
is suitable for re-entry during an updating run.
The output can be punched into cards (one card per
instruction) or recorded on magnetic tape (one tape
block per instruction).
.32
Translation Time
.521 Normal translating, including FORWARD
SEARCH: . . . . .
.522 Checking only: . • . .
.523 Translating without
FORWARD SEARCH:
Conventions
It is assumed that specific loaders will be used to
load the output deck.
. 33
side~by
• 53
.4
TRANSLATING PROCEDURE
• 41
Phases and Passes:
..
one pass only through the
source program is
required.
. 424 Patching: .
• 425 Updating: •
yes •
no.
yes, by omitting punching
the object program.
yes, provided the object
program is on tape.
yes, as for patching.
Special Features
.431 Alter to check only:
yes, by halting output of
object program.
.432 Fast translate, by
omitting the Forward
Search feature:. . .
yes.
.433 Short translate on
restricted program: • no.
Optimizing Data
In estimating where such a location could be, the assembler uses either the maximum instruction times
for the specific instruction or the time given with
the instruction •
When FORWARD SEARCH is in progress, this allocation is finally made backwards, which tends to prevent uneven distribution of data around the drum, and
prevents the loss of a cycle in some simple branch
and rejOin operations. The effect of FORWARD
SEARCH overall has not been determined and it is
unlikely to lead to an improvement in running time of
more than 20 per cent.
Optional Mode
.421 Translate: . •
. 422 Translate and run:.
.423 Check only:
4/63
70down to 10 90down to 10.
The number instruction per
minute decreases as the
store fills, therefore requiring that the tables be
searched more before allocation can take place .
The assembler allocates the nearest-to-optionallocation available whenever it comes to a previously
unallocated symbol. This allocation is made under
control of the programmer' s general instructions as
to which level of store should be used.
Details of the symbol table and a storage map are
provided by inserting the appropriate control cards.
.43
Instruction Per Minute
Card System Tape System
20down t05
25 down to 10.
100down to 10 120down to 10.
Documentation
The source and object programs are listed
side, including indications of the errors.
.42
yes, Re-Set card inserted
between decks automatically;
causes re-initialization •
• 54
Object Program Performance
With full utilization of the 12 different control operations, FORWARD SEARCH, and of the Word Time
column on the coding sheet, timing efficiency should
approximate 90 per cent at the start of an assembly
and drop to about 70 per cent when the store is nearly
full.
With only simple coding, the efficiency factors are
probably 75 per cent and 50 per cent under the same
circumstances.
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR
§
772:181.540
. 62
181.
.54
Object Program Performance (Contd. )
The loss of efficiency, even in the best care, occurs
because the assembler is unable to judge the comparative costs of and value of the allocation it makes,
and therefore cannot juggle them around to obtain optional overall performance.
The object program requires no more space than machine code programmer's does.
.6
COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS
. 61
Translating Computer
© 1963
.621 Minimum configuration: any UNIVAC Solid-State
system .
. 622 Usable extra facilities: card reader, card punch,
and printer.
core storage for UNIVAC
Solid-State II system.
RANDEX units.
Pa per Tape units.
.7
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Check or
Interlock
Error
.611 Minimum configuration: UNIVAC Solid-State Model
I with 5. 000 word drum
(either SS 80 or SS 90
systems can be used).
.612 Larger configuration
advantages: •
magnetic tapes give faster
compilation and better reassembly and library
facilities.
..
Target Computer
Missing entries:
Unsequenced entries:
Duplicate names:
Improper format:
Incomplete entries:
}
none •
none.
none.
various checks, to ensure apparently valid
entry.
Target computer
overflow:
check
Inconsistent program:
none
by Auerboch Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Action
error rotation on
output.
fictitious entry
placed in all
pOSitions.
assembly
continues.
4/63
772: 191.100
•
STANDARD
EDP
_
REPORTS
UNIVAC 55 80/90 Model "
Operating Enviroment
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
§
191.
.3
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
Description
no integrated system
available.
No comprehensive supervisor system has been published or announced for the UNIVAC Solid-State Systems. The facilities described in this section must
be covered by incorporating specific routines in
each program.
Normally, one 200-word band on the drum is reserved for loaders, dumps, traces, etc., and is not
used for the actual program.
. 13
Availability:
presently available.
.14
Originator:
various.
.15
Maintainer:
UNIVAC Division of Sperry
Rand.
.2
PROGRAM LOADING
.21
Source of Programs
.4
HARDWARE
ALLOCATION:
RUNNING
SUPERVISION:
.5
PROGRAM DIAGNOSTICS
.51
Dynamic
.511 Tracing: .
.512 Snapshots: .
.52
Post Mortem:
.6
OPERATOR
CONTROL:
.211 Libraries: .
can be held on cards and
physically chosen, or held
on tape and be loaded unLOGGING: .
.7
der control of the tape
control system .
. 212 Independent programs: . loaded from card and tape .
PERFORMANCE
. 213 Data:
normally via card reader,
.0
possible via Read/Punch
.81 S~stem Requirements
unit, or via tape .
. 214 Master routines:
as for independent programs.
.813 Reserved equipment:
.22 Library
subroutines:
can be inserted at translation time using the S-4
.82 System Overhead
or X - 6 library facilities,
if they are written in the
.821 Loading time:
appropriate symbolic language; otherwise must be
treat«:d as independent programs.
.23
Loading Sequence:
manual sequencing of card
decks or program tapes.
© 1963
as incorporated in user's
program.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
as incorporated in user's
program.
instruction - by- instruction
trace available, provided
1 complete 200-word band
on the drum is reserved.
not available .
available provided 1 complete 200-word band on the
drum is reserved. (This
band rna y be the same one
used for loaders and for
tracing) .
as incorporated in user's
program.
as incorporated in user's
program.
normally the first 200
words of the drum.
condensed card decks at
3,200 instructions or constants per minute.
Program tapes at 90,000
instructions per minute
after the tape has been
positioned.
4/63
772:201.011
_ST"OM'
II
~EPilRrs
ED
P
UNI VAC SS 80/90 Model II
System Performance
UNIVAC SS 80/90 MODEL II
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
©
1963 by Auerbach Carparation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
772:201.012
UNIVAC SS 80/90 MODEL II
UNIVAC SS 80/90 MODEL II SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 1
Confi guration
Worksheet
Item
Reference
All
I
Char/block
Records/block
K
(File 1)
1,000
(File 1)
&
File 1 = File. 2
maec/block
File 3
100
File 4
133
File 1 = File 2
INPUTOUTPUT
TIMES
maec/switch
File 3
File 4
msec penalty
2
maec/block
maec/record
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR msec/detail
TIMES
maec/work
3
STANDARD
PROBLEM A
67
-------
File 1 = File 2
3.4
File 3
3.4
File 4
10.2
al
9.2
a2
7.2
b6
8.0
b5 +b9
16.5
maec/report
b7 +b8
36.0
msec
al
for C. P.
and
dominant
column.
C.P.
9.2
a2 K
57.6
a3 K
480.0
File 1 Maater In
3.4
File 2 Master Out
3.4
4:200.114
File 3 Details
27.2
File 4 Reports
83.0
1,133
663.0
1,133
Total
STANDARD
PROBLEM A
SPACE
Unit of meaaure
(Word)
Std. routine a
550
Fixed
200
3 (Blocks 1 to 23)
300
6 (Blocks 24 to 48)
240
Files
440
Working
100
4:200.1151
Total
5/63
4:200.1132
Printer
F= 1.0
4
4:200.112
1,830
772:201. 100
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Model II
System Performance
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
201.
.112 Computation: .
. 113 Timing Basis: .
.1
GENERALIZED .FILE PROCESSING
. 11
Smnda:rd File Problem A
. 111 Record Sizes
Master File:
Detail File:
Report File:
. standard .
• using estimating procedure outlined in Usere'
Guide, 4:200.113.
.114 Graph: . • . . . • . . . see graph below .
.115 Storage Space Required: 1,830 words .
108 characters.
1 card.
1 line.
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
7
4
Time in Minutes
to Process
10, 000 Master
File Records
2
~IV'VI
-
10.0
A'"
7
.".
/'
4
2
1.0
./
II,II1,VI
"
I'
V
7
4
2
-
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configuration)
© 1963
Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
8/63
772:201.120
§
UNIVAC SS 80/90 MODEL II
201.
.12
• 122 Computation: •
.123 Timing Basis: •
Standard File Problem B
• 124 Graph:. . • . •
. 121 Record Sizes
Master File: •
Detail File: .•
Report File: •
standard •
using estimating procedure outlined in Users'
Guide, 4:200.12.
see graph below •
54 characters.
1 card.
1 line.
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
7
4
Time in Minutes
to Process
10, 000 Master
File Records
2
~IV'VI
-
10.0
7
/
4
2
1.0
II, ill, VJ
1J
/
/'
--
II'
'i1
7
4
2
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configuration)
8/63
A
AUERBACH
®
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
772:201.130
201.
. 13
.132 Computation: •
. 133 Timing Basis: .
. standard •
• using estimating procedure outlined in Users'
Guide, 4:200.13 .
. 134 Graph:. . . . • . • . . • see graph below •
Standard File Problem C
• 131 Record Sizes
Master File:
Detail Rile:
Report File:
216 characters.
1 card.
1 line.
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
7
Time in Minutes
to Process
10, 000 Master
File Records
4
-------
2
~I'IV'VI
10.0
~
7
-'
II,IlI,VI/
4
/
IV
2
1.0
7
4
2
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configuration)
© 1963
Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
8/63
772:201.140
UNIVAC 55 80/90 MODEL "
§201.
• 14
• 142 Computation: •
.143 Timing Basis: •
trebled •
using estimating procedure outlined in Users'
Guide, 4:200.14 •
see graph below •
Standard File Problem D
• 141 Record Sizes
Master File:
Detail File:
Report File:
• 144 Graph: ••••
108 characters.
1 card.
1 line.
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
7
Time in Minutes
to Process
10, 000 Master
File Records
4
~
2
~'VI
10.0
..,
7
.~
4
II,I1I,VI V
/
r-7
2
~v
1.0
7
4
2
O. l'
0.0
0.1
1.0
0.33
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configuration)
8/63
A
AUERBACH
®
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
772:201.200
201.
.212 Key size: ••
.213 Timing basis:
.2
SORTING
. 21
Standard Problem Estimates
8 characters.
using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.213 •
see graph below •
. 214 Graph: • • • .
• 211 Record size: • . • • • 80 characters.
1,000
7
4
I;~
~
2
~ I;
/
100
"
,/
7
IL:
/
IlL V
4
I/In/
II~
2
V
!I lIiI
V !I
Time in Minutes
to Put Records
Into Required
10
Order
V
/
7
,/
4
/
I
2
1/
,/
7
/
II'"
/
/
/
2
V/
0.1
//
/'
I
,
I
V
/
V/ /
.J
1/
/
1/
,/
/
V
[/IV V
V
V
1/
,j
V
IL
:/
/
V/
1/
/
/
,/
4
~
/
1I1/ i/
/
,/
/
V
/
/
2
4
7
2
4
7
1,000
100
2
10,000
4
7
100,000
Number of Records
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
172:211.101
UNIVAC SS 80/90 MODEL II
Physical Characteristics
UNIVAC SS 80/90 MODEL II
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
©
1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
772:211.102
UNIVAC 5S 8P/90 MopeL II
UNIVAC SS 80/90 MODEL II PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Central
Pracessor
High Speed
Printer
High Speed
SO-Col. Reader
Card Read
SO-Col.
Punch Unit
Model Number
SEE PRICES
7912
7935
7936
Height x width x depth, inches
69x108%x32
53 x 72Yt x 32
48x.50x24
54x49x27
3,532
1,538
758
950
Unit Name
IDENTITY
Weight, pounds
PHYSICAL
Maximum cable lengths
Power
Data
From CP
27'3"
25'1"
26'11"
27'1"
24'7"
26'3"
3
ToCP
ToCP
27'0"
Cables
ToCP
ATMOSPHERE
Storage
Temperature, of.
Ranges
Humidity, %
Working
Temperature, OF.
Ranges
NOT AVAILABLE
Humidity, %
Heat dissipated, BTU/hr.
Air flow, elm.
60 0
_
85 0
60 0
_
85 0
60 0
_
85 0
60 0
_
85 0
30 -70
30 -70
30 -70
30 -70
27,660
11,910
3,396
3,780
2,100
550
200
200
Nominal
208 - 240
Contained in Central Processor
Tolerance
±10% into
regulator
Contained in Central Processor
60
Contained in Central Processor
±0.5
Contained in Central Processor
Single phase
3 'wire
Contained in Central Processor
16.9
Contained in Central Processor
Voltage
Nominal
ELECTRICAL
Cycles
Tolerance
Phases and lines
Load KVA
1. Maximum floor loading.
150 lbs./sq. ft.
NOTES
5/63
2. For all equipment 90%
Filtration per US Bureau of
Standards. Dust Spot ~iscoloration Test.
3. Internal dust filters are
provided.
7n:211.103
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
UNIVAC SS 80/90 MODEL II PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS (Contd.)
Uniservo II
Magnetic
Tape Unit
First Randex
24 Million
Digits Unit
First Randex
12 Million
Digits Unit
Additional
Randex
24 Million
Digits Unit
Synchronizer
7915
7957
7965
7966
7914
69 x31 x31
69x 76x 33
69x 76 x33
69x76 x33
69x76 x32
69x48 x31
758
2,335
2,335
2,335
2,566
1,284
22'4"
58 ft. to
18'10"
Randex Power
Control Unit
Drum to Synchronizer 67 ft. maximum.
21'S"
Information not currently
To SYNC
available
To SYNC
Synchronizer
To SYNC
To SYNC
From CP
I
I
....
NOT AvAn.ABLE
I
I
i
:
60° - 85 0
30 -70
i
I
60° - 85°
60° _ 85°
60° - 85°
60°_85°
60° - 85°
30 -70
30 ..... 70
30 -70
30 -70
30 -70
1,140
7,140
7,140
11,520 to
15,180
4,080
S50
550
550
2,100
360
I
8,160
!
I
300
I
See Note 4
i
208 - 240
See Note 4
± 10% to
regulator
±10%
Info~mation not currJnuy
60
60
available
±0.5
±0.5
lor 3
1 er 3
4.3 KVA
2.4 KVA per
Drum
FROM RANDEX POWER
I
I:
i
I
Ii
1rp 3 wire
2.7 each
2.4 KVA,each
4. Contained
in Synchronizer
©
1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA. Incorporated
5/63
772:221.101
.SfANDARD
II
REPORIS
EDP
UNIVAC SS 80/90 Model II
Price Doto
PRICE DATA
§
221.
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
Name
No.
MODEL II
BASIC
7961
7962
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
PRICES
Monthly
Rental
$
Monthly
Maintenance
$
Purchase
$
90-Column Card and Tape
80-Column Card and Tape
Standard EqUipment:
2,400 Words 1.7 msec.
average access store
200 Words 0 ..4 msec. average
access store
1,280 Words 0.017 msec. access
store
9 Index Registers
Options:
Program Interrupt
200 Words 1.7 msec. average
access store (800 word max)
400 Words 0.4 msec. average
access store (1,600 word max)
Multiply and Divide
MODEL II 7963
EXPANDED 7964
3,235
560
177,500
3,000
60
275
70
10,250
400
400
20
25
12,500
12,000
7,135
830
315,700
90-Column Card and Tape
80-Column Card and Tape
Standard Equipment:
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
7,600 Words 1. 7 msec.
access
1,200 Words 0.4 msec. access
1,280 Words 0.017 msec. access
Multiply and Divide
9 Index Registers
Options:
Program Interrupt
lNPUTOUTPUT
7912
600 lpm 100-Column Printer
(1 max)
3,000
60
-
935
335
41,100
20
30
5
10
800
L,320
NONE
15
275
Options:
10-Column additional
20-Column additional
(maXImum 130 columns)
Variable 6 or 8 inch line
spacing
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA incorporated
5/63
UNIV AC S$ llO '90 MODR I
771:221.102
§
221.
PRICE DATA (Contd.)
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
Name
No.
INPUTOUTPUT
7912
6001pm 100-Column Printer
(1 max)
PRICES
Monthly
Rental
$
Monthly
Maintenance
$
Purchases
$
935
335
41,100
20
30
5
10
800
1,320
15
275
255
55
11,200
255
55
11,200
Stacker Select
50
10
2,300
80-Column Read Feature
35
18
1,350
90-Column Read Feature
35
18
1,350
Options:
10-Column additional
20 -Column additional
(maximum 130 columns)
Variable 6 or 8 inch line
spacing
7945
7935
600 cpm 90-Column Card Reader
(or)
600 cpm 80-Column Card Reader
(1 max)
None
Options:
INPUTOUTPUT
7946
7936
150 cpm 90-Column Read Punch
(or)
150 cpm 80-Column Read Punch
(1 max)
725
200
32,000
725
200
32,000
100
100
50
20
20
10
4,200
4,200
2,300
Options:
Preread (80- or 90-Column)
Post read (80- or 90-Column)
Stacker Select
5/63 Revised
UNIVAC III
Univac
(A Division of Sperry Rand Corporation)
, / ..... .
l
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
UNIVAC III
Univac
(A Division ctf Sperry Rand Corporation)
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
774:001.001
UNIVAC III
Contents
CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
S.
9.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Introduction.....
Data Structure. • • •
System Configuration
III 6-Tape Business System.
VI 6-Tape Business/Scientific· System
VIIA lO-Tape General System (Integrated) •
VIlIB 20-Tape General System (paired)
Internal Storage
4l22.Core Storage • • . • . • . . •
Central Processor
4121 Arithmetic and Program Control
Console
4124 Console • . • • • • • . . • •
Input-Output; Punched Tape and Card
4133 SO-Column Card Reader ••
41S2 90-Column Card Reader. • •
Card Reader Synchronizer.
4127 SO-Column Card Punch •
41S3 90-Column Card Punch ••
Card Punch Synchronizer •
• • • •
Punched Paper Tape Unit (Reader and Punch).
Paper Tape Unit Synchronizer •
Input-Output; Printers
4152 High Speed Printer • . • • . •
Input-Output; Magnetic Tape
4209 Uniservo IlIA Magnetic Tape Units
Uniseryo IlIA Synchronizer
Uniservo IIA Tape Units • . . .
Uniservo IIA Synchronizer • • •
Uniservo mc Magnetic Tape Units
Uniservo mc Synchronizer
Sim ultaneous Operations
Instruction List •
Coding Specimen
Salt Assembler
UTMOST • • •
Data Codes
Internal Alphameric Code
High Speed Printer Code •
SO-Column Card Code . .
90-Column Card Code • .
Console Typewriter Code
Internal Collating Sequence
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
774:011
774:021
774:031.1
774:031. 2
774:031. 3
774:031. 4
774:041
774:051
774:061
774:071
774:071
774:071.4
774:072
774:072
774:072.4
774:073
774:073.4
774:0S1
774:091
774:091.4
774:092
774:092.4
774:093
774:093.4
774:111
774:121
774:131
774:132
774:141
774:142
774:143
774:144
774:145
774:146
7/63
n4:001.002
UNIVAC III
CONTENTS (Contd.)
15.
Problem Oriented Facilities
UNIVAC IIII Simulator Program
Soda Sort/Merge
20-Word Sort Routine
Support III Subroutines •
Process Oriented Languages
COBOL
FORTRAN IV.
Machine Oriented Languages
UTMOST.
SALT
Program Translators
ALMOST.
UTMOST.
SALT
COBOL
FORTRAN
Operating Environment
SALT Executive Routine (CHIEF) •
DUTY
BOSS.
System Performance
Notes on System Performance
Worksheet Data •
Generalized File Processing
Sorting.
Matrix Inversion
Generalized Mathematical Processing •
Physical Characteristics
Price Data
· ·
16.
17.
18.
··
·
········
·· ··
· ··
· ··· · ·
· ·· • • • • • .
···.
·
19.
20.
21.
22.
· ···
··
·····
····
· · · · ·· ·
··· ·
·
·········.. .·
INA = Information Not Available.
7/63
.···
774:151.11
774:151. 13
774:151.13
774:151. 17
774:161
774:162
774:171
774:172
774:181
774:182
77 4: 183
77 4: 184
774:185
(INA)
(INA)
(INA)
(INA)
(INA)
774:191
774:191
774:192 (INA)
774:201. 001
774:201. 011
774:201.1
774:201. 2
774:201. 3
774:201. 4
774:211
774:221
·
I
774:011.100
STANDARD
EDP
REPORTS
UNIVAC III
Introduction
INTRODUCTION
§
OIl.
The UNIVAC III is a large scale data processing system suitable for both business
and scientific applications. System rentals range from approximately $19,000 to $40,000
per month, and most installations will probably fall within the $25,000 to $35,000 range.
By means of the software operating system, it is possible to utilize hardware facilities for
simultaneous processing of a number of independent programs. Hardware facilities that
have been incorporated to help achieve this objective are:
• A series of interrupt levels which permit varied peripheral equipments to
make their demands on the central processor .
• Provision of scatter-read and gather-write facilities through the use of
function specification words to specify address assignments.
Cil
Availability of 9 or 15 index registers plus indirect addressing.
o Four one-word arithmetic registers, which may be used individually
or in combination in ascending order only.
" Control of all input-output operations by independent input-output channels.
Up to 13 channels can be connected, and all channels can operate simultaneously with each other and with the central processor.
The central processor can perform additions or subtractions on binary or decimal
operands. These operands can be distributed over one to four words of 27 bits each. Each
UNIVAC III word uses two bits for modulo 3 checking. The remaining 25 bits can contain
an instruction word, four 6-bit alphameric characters plus a sign bit, six 4-bit numeric
characters plus a sign bit, or 24 binary data bits plus a sign.
Multiplication and division can be performed on decimal data only. The UNIVAC III
can perform logical AND and inclusive OR functions and binary comparison operations.
Branching, alphameric-to-decimal and decimal-to-alphameric conversion, and zero
suppression capabilities ease data manipulation and program control; however, most editing functions, floating point arithmetic, and conversion of data to floating point format must
be handled by subroutines. Scatter-read and gather-write facilities provide fast means of
assembling data into and disseminating data from core storage.
Core storage capacity ranges from 8, 192 to 32,768 word locations in increments of
8,192. Cycle time is 4 microseconds per word, but the majority of instructions take 8
microseconds.
A wide range of input-output equipment is offered for the UNIVAC III. A system
can include a maximum of 32 Uniservo IIIA Magnetic Tape Units, 6 Uniservo IIA Magnetic
Tape Units, and a total of 8 units of the following equipments in any combination: High
Speed Card Readers, High Speed Printers, Card Punch Units, Punched Paper Tape Units,
and Uniservo IIIC Magnetic Tape Synchronizers controlling from 2 to 8 tape units each.
Two models of both card readers and card punches are available. Cards can be
read at a peak rate of 800 cards per minute and punched at a peak rate of 300 cards per
minute. Punched paper tape can be read at 250, SOD, or 1,500 characters per second,
and punched at 110 characters per second. The line printer has 128 print positions
and a set of 51 characters, and can print 700 alphameric or 922 numeric single- spaced
lines per minute.
:, 'J 1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
(
\
3/63
UNIVAC III
774:011.101
INTRODUCTION (Contd.)
§
all.
Three types of Uniservo Magnetic Tape Units are available for the UNIVAC III
system, the Uniservo IlIA, IIA, and IIIC.
The Uniservo IlIA Magnetic Tape Unit operates at peak data transfer rates of
133, 000 alphameric characters or 200, 000 numeric digits per second with a density of
I, 000 frames (1,330 characters or 2, 000 digits) per inch. Tape can be read forward or
backward, but data can be recorded in the forward direction only. Tape can be read or
written in either the Start- Stop mode or tOe Non- Stop mode. A read-after-write check is
made upon recording.
The Uniservo IIA Magnetic Tape Unit operates at peak data transfer rates of
25, 000 or 12,500 characters per second at densities of 250 or 125 characters per inch
respectively. When recording at 250 characters per inch, the format is compatible
with the UNIVAC II; the 125 character per inch recording makes the format compatible
with the UNIVAC 1.
The Uniservo IllC Magnetic Tape Unit operates at peak data transfer rates of 22,500
or 62,500 characters per second at densities of 200 and 556 characters per inch. The
block lengths are variable and the format is IBM-compatible. Tape can be read or written
either with or without translation. When translation is specified, the six-bit mM tape code
is converted to six-bit excess three code or vice versa. A read-after-write check is made
upon recording.
Major emphasis has been placed on development of software packages to achieve the
maximum throughput capabilities of the system and to simplify programming. These
packages provide complete input-output control, the means of associating and running independently prepared programs simultaneously, the ability to call many routines and subroutines, and the ability to incorporate new routines or subroutines in the library. Program
testing aids such as SNAPshot, DUMP, and TRACE have also been incorporated in the software packages. Data sorting and merging are provided by a sort generator which generates
the instructions for the sort or merge from a set of parameters outlined by the user. The
original input and final output routines are the responsibility of the user. Input-output
routines provided for the intermediate collating pass use any available tape in the system
(even the unused portion of data tapes).
Two complete machine oriented software packages are available for the UNIVAC Ill;
however, no compatibility exists between them. One package consists of SALT, a machine
oriented language; DUTY, a library of routines and subroutines; and CHIEF, an executive
routine. The other consists of UTMOST, a machine-oriented language; SUPPORT Ill, a
library of routines and subroutines; and BOSS III, an executive routine. New developments
and innovations will be incorporated in the already more sophisticated UTMOST, SUPPORT
III, and BOSS III package; however, both packages will be maintained.
Both SALT and UTMOST provide an easily understandable mnemonic representation
of instructions, pseudo operations for directing the assembler, and the ability to perform ..
operations to develop the operand address. UTMOST is more extensive than SALT in the
functions that it provides.
DUTY and SUPPORT III each provide the ability to update and maintain a library of
routines and subroutines, and an independent library of object programs for the system.
Both CHIEF and BOSS III are comprehensive operating systems that control the
scheduling, loading, and multi-running of programs; handle most errors; and permit twoway communication between the operator and the system. All functions of these executive
routines are initiated by and closely integrated with the hardware interrupt facilities.
Both COBOL-6l and FORTRAN IV have been implemented for the UNIVAC Ill. Object
programs produced by both the COBOL and FORTRAN compilers can be run under the
control of BOSS Ill.
3/63
INTRODUCTION
774:011.102
INTRODUCTION (Contd.)
§ Oll.
UNIVAC ill COBOL is essentially Required COBOL-1961. Several useful electives
have been implemented, including segmentation of the object program and arithmetic
operands up to 18 digits in size. Extensions to COBOL-61 include a SORT facility, a
MONITOR verb that facilitates program testing, and the ability to add independently compiled COBOL subprograms to a main program at run time.
The UNIVAC III FORTRAN language is largely compatible with the mM 7090/7094
implementation of FORTRAN IV. Most FORTRAN II statements will also be accepted and
correctly interpreted by the translator. Double precision and complex variables, however,
are not permitted.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
774:021.100
·STANCARP
EDP
•
UNIVAC III
REFORTS
Data Structure
DATA STRUCTURE
§
.2
021.
.1
DATA FORMATS
STORAGE LOCATIONS
Type of Information
Representation
Name of Location
Size
Purpose or Use
Decimal Digit
Word:
27 bits
Record (Segment):
Block:
1 to 511 words
1 to N segments
data or Instruction; basic
storage location.
magnetic tape.
rna gnetic ta pe.
Alphameric Character
Instruction
Decimal Word
4 bits (expressed in excess -three
code).
6 bits.
1 word.
6 decimal digits plus 1 sign plus
2 check bits.
4 alphameric characters plus 1
sign plus 2 check bits.
24 bits plus 1 sign plus 2 check
bits.
File:
Unit Record:
(N segments are
limited to available core storage)
1 to N records
magnetic tape.
80- or 90-column punched card
paper tape.
© 1963
Alphameric Word
Binary Word
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
774:031.100
.S"'OARO
II
EDP
UNIVAC III
RlP
10
26
18
Alternatives: .
FORTRAN set: .
Basic COBOL set:
Total: . . . . . .
none.
yes.
yes.
54.
© 1963
see below.
*
<:
$
(
>
+
)
#
/
%
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
• 31
Form of Storage
• 312 Phenomenon: .
continuous fan-fold sprocketpunched stationery .
printing.
Positional Arrangement
.324 Track use: •
· 325 Row use: .
1 line at 6 or 8 per inch.
128 columns at 10 char per
inch.
all for data.
all for data.
· 33
Coding:..
etched character font .
.34
Format Compatibility:. none.
· 321 Serial by:
.322 Parallel by:
. 212 Reservoirs: . . . . • • none.
0 to 9.
A to Z.
blank
• 32
1 set of sprocket drives on
each side.
printing.
1.
128.
1 line at a time.
Range of Symbols
.311 Medium: . . .
Availability: . .
yes.
yes.
Special Characters
Program-testable indicators are set for: successful
completion of a printing function, modulo 3 data
error check, fault error check for a physical printer
defect, and an out-of-paper warning.
• 13
1 +5.
Arrangement of Heads
Use of station: .
Stacks: . . . . .
Heads/stack: . .
Method of use: .
Each printer output operation requires one initiate
instruction word and one function specification word.
The initiate instruction word causes the function
specification word to be placed in the printer standby location. Execution of the function is under control of the printer Synchronizer. The central processor is free for other operation after the Synchronizer has loaded itself with the 32 consecutive core
storage words that are to be printed. One printer
and its Synchronizer may be connected to any of the
eight general purpose channels.
One original with up to five carbon copies can be
produced.
Multiple Copies
· 231 Maximum number
Interleaved carbon:
• 233 Types of master
Multilith: •
Spirit: . . . . .
• 24
on-the-fly hammer stroke
against etched drum .
none.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
774:081.350
§
UNIVAC III
081.
· 35
· 54
• 353 Maximum margins
Left: .
Right: . . . . . • .
.4
CONTROLLER
.41
Identity:
.42
4 to 22 inches by vernier.
1 to 22 by 1/6 inches at 6
lines/inch.
i to 22 by 1/8 inches at 8
. lines/inch.
.55
18 inches.
18 inches.
• 56
max. of 8 allowable in a
system.
none.
.422 Off-line:
Connection to Device
.6
PERFORMANCE
.61
Conditions
.44
.62
Data Transfer Control
1 line of 128 characters.
core storage.
.441 Size of load: . . . .
• 442 Input-output areas:
.443 Input-output area
access: . . . . .
.444 Input-output area
lockout: . . . . .
.445 Table control: . .
· "446 Synchronization:.
each word.
no.
no.
automatic by line; by program for successive line
steps.
· 447 Synchronizing aids: . . interruption.
.5
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
.51
Blocks
1 line of 128 characters.
.511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Output: . • . . . .
.52
32 sequential storage
locations.
Input-Output Operations
. 521 Input: •.
. 522 Output: . .
.523 Stepping: •
• 524 Skipping: .
• 525 Marking: .
• 526 Searching:
. 53
Code Translation:
.
none.
I line forward with programmed format control.
step 1 to 63 lines (via combined step and print
instructions ).
none .
none .
none.
automatic, by controller .
Speeds
.621 Nominal or peak speed: 700 lines per minute (condition 1 with single spacing) .
922 lines per minute (condition 11 with single spacing).
.622 Important parameters
Skipping speed:. • .
first line 14 inches/sec.
succeeding lines
20 inches/sec.
Paper stabilization:
lOmsec.
skipping time in msec:
.623 Overhead:
t = 20 + K(L - 1).
L = number of lines
skipped.
K = 8.3 for 6 lines/inch
spacing or 6.25 for
8 line/inch spacing.
· 624 Effective speeds:"
Condition 1:. . .
alphameric data at 6 lines
per inch spacing:
60
lines/
0.085+0. 0083(N -1) min.
Condition 1: . . . . . . alphameric data at 8 lines
per inch spacing:
60
lines/
0.085+O.00625(N-l) inch
Condition 11: ••••• numeric data at 6 lines per
min. spacing:
922 lines/min, where N< 6.
461 lines/min, where
5 i.
Binary (ARi ) + (M')-ARi.
Binary (A~) + (M')-+ARi', where I' > i.
Binary (A~) - (M') -+ARI.
Binary (A~) - (M')_ARi', wherei' >i.
(A~) - (M')_ARi.
(ARi) - (M')-+ARi', where i' > i.
(ARl, AR2) of (M')-+ARI remainder, AR2 quotient.
(M') X (ARl)---.AR2 6MSD, AR36LSD.
(XO)±(M') 9LSB-XO.
Logic
Jump to M if Equal indicator is set.
Jump to M if High indicator is set.
Jump to M if Low indicator is set.
Jump to M if Sign of Arithmetic Register is positive.
Jump to M unconditionally.
Transfer 1 plus contents of Control Counter on designated memory address counter into M' and
replace the contents of the counter with M' + 1.
Jump to M if Sense indicator specified is set.
Jump 1 instruction if Contingency indicator specified
is reset.
Jump 1 instruction if Processor-Error indicator
specified is reset.
Jump 1 instruction if Input-Output indicator
specified is reset.
Jump to M if Inhibit Input-Output Interrupt indicator
Is set.
(X0i) + 9LSB (M') -XOi;
I (XO i ) I : I (m ') I bits 10 through 24.
Appropriate comparison indicator set after
comparison.
(ARi) OR (M') -.. ARi.
(ARi) AND (M') -+ ARi.
(ARi) : (M'); algebraic comparison; appropriate comparison indicators set.
I (A~) I : I (M') I ; absolute value comparison;
appropriate comparison indicators set.
(A~) : (M') for I-bits; if M' contains I-bit in every
position ARi has I-bit, equal indicator set; otherwise high indicator set.
(ARi) : (M') for O-bits; if M' contains O-bit in every
position where A~ contains I-bit equal Indicator
set; otherwise high indicator set.
Data Transfer
(M')---+ARi •
- (M')-+A~.
by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
UNIVAC III
774: 121.1 02
§
INSTRUCTION LIST (Contd.)
121.
INSTRUCTION
OPERATION
SALT
CODE
IA/FS
X
OP
AR/XO/CH/OI
MlSC/IND/CI
EXT
ST
STCS
SR
SL
SAR
SAL
SBC
IA/FS
IA
IA
IA
IA
IA
IA
IA
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
14
10
40
41
42
43
44
AR
AR
AR
AR
AR
AR
AR
AR
M/IND
M/IND
M/IND
SC
SC
SC
SC
SC
LX
STX
ATD
IA
IA
IA
X
X
X
51
50
72
XO
XO
AR
M/IND
M/IND
M/IND
DTA
IA
X
71
AR
M/IND
ZUP
IA
X
73
AR
M/IND
IOF
IA
X
70
CH
M/IND
ACT
WT
RT
0
IA
0
0
X
0
66
02
01
0
OI
AR
Binary O's
M/IND
Binary O's
RIO
AIO
PIO
IA
0
0
X
65
61
62
CH
OI
OI
CI
SSI
RSI
RCI
RPE
NOP
STMC
STCR
WAIT
LT
0
0
IA
IA
-
OI
OI
OI
OI
-
X
X
IA
IA
IA
0
X
X
X
0
62
61
65
65
00
04
05
77
76
DIS
IA
X
03
3/63
-
-
-
-
11
-
OI
OI
-
-
CI
CI
-
AR
M/IND
M/IND
M
Binary D's
0000
M/IND
-
Data Transfer (Contd. )
(M')-".~ (M' is defined by field select word).
(A~)---"M •
- (ARi)-+M'.
Shift (A~) right SC. decimal digits.
Shift (A~) left SC decimal digits.
Shift (ARi ) right SC alphameric characters.
Shift (A~) left SC alphameric characters.
Shift (ARt) binary circ.ular right SC bit positions with
sign.
(M') 15LSB ---.. XO.
(XO) -+ M' 15LSB.
Convert alphameric to decimal (M' - 2, M' - 1,
M')-..ARi - 1, ARi'
Convert decimal to alphameric (A~ - I, A~) ~
M' - 2, M' - 1, M'.
Zero suppress (M')-" ARi; replaces the following
leading alphameric characters with space codes:
semicolon, minus, zero, comma.
Input -Output
Initiate I/O function; (M')-+channel stand-by location; set stand-by location Interlock indicator.
Activate typewriter keyboard.
Type one character.
Add alphameric character in typewriter buffer register to AR designated.
Reset I/O indicator(s) specified.
Allow I/O interrupt.
Prevent I/O interrupt.
Miscellaneous
Sense indicator specified set.
Sense indicator specified reset.
Contingency indicator(s) specified reset.
Processor Error indicator(s) specified reset.
No operation.
Memory Address counter (MAC)-+M' 15LSB stored.
Tape Control Word register (TCWR) - . M' stored.
Stop; then Jump to M'.
Clock -+ ARi; if time valid Jump 1 instruction; if
time invalid, go to next instruction.
Display memory (M') - . Memory Information display
on the engineer's maintenance panel.
774:121.103
INSTRUCTION LIST
§
INSTRUCTION LIST (Contd.)
121.
OPERATION
INSTRUCTION
SALT
CODE
SERVO
!A/FS NUMBER
(SN)
FUNCTION
CODE (FC)
AUTO
INTERRUPT
LADDRESS
(NOT
INDEXABLE)
FC
FC
FC
FC
FC
FC
FC
FC
FC
FC
FC
FC
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
L-ADD
L-ADD
L-ADD
L-ADD
L-ADD
L-ADD
L-ADD
L-ADD
L-ADD
L-ADD
-
Uniservo III Tape Units
BackWard contingency scatter read.
Backward 1 block read.
Backward scatter read.
Backward contingency block read.
Forward contingency scatter read.
Forward 1 block read.
Forward scatter read.
Forward contingency block read.
Gather write.
Write bad spot pattern, then gather write.
Rewind to load point.
Rewind with interlock.
SN
SN
SN
SN
SN
FC
FC
FC
FC
FC
FC
FC
FC
FC
FC
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
L-ADD
L-ADD
L-ADD
L-ADD
L-ADD
L-ADD
L-ADD
L-ADD
L-ADD
L-ADD
Uniservo II Tape Units
Compatible backWaid read high.
Compatible backward read low.
Compatible backward read normal.
Compatible forward read high.
Compatible forward read low.
Compatible forward read normal.
Compatible rewind.
Compatible rewind with interlock.
Compatible write.
Compatible write subdivide.
FS
-
FC
AI
L-ADD
CSl
FS
-
FC
AI
L-ADD
CS2
FS
FC
AI
L-ADD
CT
FS
FC
AI
L-ADD
CTSl
FS
FC
AI
L-ADD
CTS2
FS
-
FC
AI
L-ADD
FC
FS
-
FC
AI
L-ADD
FCS!
FS
FC
AI
L-ADD
FCS2
FS
FC
AI
L-ADD
FCT
FS
FC
AI
L-ADD
FCTSl
FS
FC
AI
L-ADD
FCTS2
FS
-
FC
AI
L-ADD
CCS
PC
FS
FS
FC
FC
AI
AI
L-ADD
L-ADD
PCS
FS
FC
AI
L-ADD
PCT
FS
FC
AI
L-ADD
PeTS
FS
FC
AI
L-ADD
BCSR
BBR
BSR
BCBR
FCSR
FBR
FSR
FCBR
GWT
OWT
RW
RWI
FS
FS
FS
FS
FS
FS
FS
FS
FS
FS
FS
FS
SN.
CBRH
CBRL
CBRN
CFRH
CFRL
CFRN
CRW
CRWI
CWRT
CWSD
FS
FS
FS
FS
FS
FS
FS
FS
FS
FS
SN
SN
SN
CAD
SN
SN
SN
SN
SN
SN
SN
SN
SN
SN
SN
SN
SN
-
-
© 1963
High Speed Reader
No feed, read card, place previous card in
stacker O.
No feed, read card, place previous card in
stacker 1.
No feed, read card, place previous card in
stacker 2.
No feed, read card, place previous card in
stacker O.
No feed, read card, place previous card in
stacker 1.
No feed, read card, place previOUS card in
stacker 2.
Feed card, read card, place previous card in
stacker O.
Feed card, read card, place previous card in
stacker 1.
Feed card, read card, place previous card in
stacker 2.
Feed card, translate card, place previous
card in stacker O.
Feed card, translate card, place previous
card in stacker 1.
Feed card, translate card, place previous
card in stacker 2.
Card Punch
Select stacker 1.
Feed card, punch card, place previOUS card
in stacker O.
Feed card, punch card, place previous card
in stacker 1.
Feed card, translate card, place previous
card in stacker O.
Feed card, translate card, place previous
card in stacker 1.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
UNIVAC III
774:121.104
§
INSTRUCTION LIST (Contd.)
121.
OPERATION
INSTRUCTION
SALT
CODE
SERVO
IA/FS NUMBER
(SN)
FUNCTION
CODE (FC)
AUTO
INTERRUPT
LADDRESS
(NOT
INDEXABLE)
PAD
PRT
FS
FS
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
AI
AI
L-ADD
L-ADD
High Speed Printer
Paper advance.
Paper advance, print 1 line.
PTP
FS
FS
FS
Note 2
Note 2
Note 2
Note 2
Note 2
Note 2
AI
AI
AI
L-ADD
L-ADD
L-ADD
Paper Tape
Punch (specified nmnber of words).
Read (specified nmnber of words).
Back space (1 frame).
PTR
PTB
Note 1: Field specifies nmnber of lines of vertical spacing and function code.
Note 2: Field specifies nmnber of words and function code.
INSTRUCTION LIST NOMENCLATURE
Symbol
Definition
AI: .
Allow interrupt indicator (1 =allow interrupt,
o = inhibit interrupt).
Any arithmetic register.
Arithmetic register designated.
Arithmetic register designated (higher than i).
Arithmetic register 1.
Arithmetic register 2.
Arithmetic register 3.
Arithmetic register 4.
Channel for I/O operation.
Contingency indicator.
Function code.
Field Selection indicator.
Indirect Address indicator.
Indirect address.
Unindexed address of operand.
Least significant bit.
Least significant digit.
Address of operand.
Contents of operand.
Memory Address counter.
Most significant digit.
Object indicator address.
Octal Operation Code.
Shift count.
Tape unit number.
Tape Control Word register.
Incrementing Index Register.
Object Index Register.
AR: •
ARi:
ARi':
ARl:
AR2:
AR3:
AR4:
CH: •
CI: •
FC: . .
FS: .
IA: •
IND:
L-ADD:.
LSB:
LSD: .
M: •.
M': •.
MAC:.
MSD:
01:
OF:
SC:
SN:
TCWR:
X: ••
XO: •.
3/63
......
""
......
w
......
(")
sI::G,'1E'~T
llE.M NO.
001
TAG
I'ARALLf.L.
SALT
cooEDIT
OF
h.ll'T1Nf.
C i'll~'1 •••••••••••••••• CONTENT ••••••••••••••••
~ro~.
DEL. 51:.T.
M~
U
lu,;.P..l.
"4
All
C..ll
AI
o
I
TLO. ~ TAr
uO
00'162
008 32 011300116 ..
07
:;<11000
00316
008 33 30620316
oo'H3
o
o
o
01
00
uS
001<17
008 3'1 070121<17
00474
o
07
541000
00320
ouB 36 36620320
00 4 75
o
o
o
0.11
07
00
07
00150
008 37 0701;'150
251000
00220
ovB 38 3526·)220
01
Of:!
0<)'162
008 39
0101
006 110
0,,472
0101
,C,I,
THII
F-»,
H/I
a
~TAr
c:
09).
"
T... I.po.
CD
C-
00<116
00<117
I.4o,L.2, ,
w
00502
005u3
o
o
o
o
uO
:r
-ao·
a0'
u),
C,;;', A/(
o
IJ,"",
lU
0051,/4
Oo~oS
TL.O,STAKTJ+l'"
o
o
.2. 00/3 ,
~Tt.2,T+K'
005 ... 6
00507
o
o
o
o
o\l300116~
006 111 20510000
00;500
OOB <12 3<171030n
V>
u7
!>1
Ou211
110B L18 352::'.:.217
0:;
1002uO
00372
008 119 2'11110372
oS
o
00510
o
07
1210..,0
~A.l·T+9,
o
00511
241000
Ou20'
003"
008 52 2522037',
o
o
00512
o os
o 05
101000
0..,37:1
008 53 2<1<120373
00513
aS
100200
Ou37]
008 S17
005 .. 0
IMA«oS
6S.i.Od/,71.
1:.0 12
o
OnS"l
o
o
o
C')
"tJ
z
"">-
r-
-I
>m
V>
vo
~
III
r-
m
;:a
"tJ
;:a
Z
-I
o
c:
-I
OllS .,9 36610326
008 (,0
01
60
07
0015:!
009 01 07016152
07
250200
0..,270
009 02 3525')27"
01
0"
00
00501
Ou9 03 04300507
1101]
.F,..;,t\"
6j.sTA~T
11
00522
TU'J,X3,
.(.P4.K
ooB
Tu .••• X2.
THI,sTAJ{T3+1t.
*
~O
11161
1110
Xi>A«~
oOt!
TI:.("PO'
C.,.A/I
1'"
o
n
00000
L., , • 5t.RVOI:."IJ.
ST.l.T+9.
~
Z
1~0200
co
Z
8
~
120200
0100
:;-
~
0<1
"o
"a..
>
~
07
0001
o
006 35
E~
o
o
z
O
n
n
HL.~
0012
wO oCTAL wn
vonc:
Co Z
:;"s,,:c:
>-"'>CIt IC n
CIt vo
4 04 1033
All
A? RA5ELOCA'
03J?
03 043&
1043b
03 10 04 1104
511
A?TS
0313
03 0437
10437
03 "1 02 1104
LX
2.T<:
0314
0.3 0440
10440
03 12 10 1117
LA
AI • pn
0311',
03 0441
10441
03 '54 02 1110
C
A:'\.['O
0311'>
03 0442
10442
03 1",0 0& 0452
JF
STO
0317
03 0443
10443
03 21 02 1151
ns
A3,['I)0
031P
03 0444
10444
03 54 U2 1110
C
A:,\.r)O
0319
03 0445
1044~
03 60 06 0450
JF
5T2
0320
03 044'"
10446
03
Jt.
STI
0321
03 0447
10447
03'?4 10 1114
ST3
RII
A' • Q 1
03n
03 0450
10450
03 24 10 1114
5T2
All
A' .R 1
0323
03 0451
11'l4S1
03 24 10 1114
STl
All
Al,Q!
03::>4
03 0452
10452
03 10 10 1113
STO
SA
AI.SL
o 3::> !'-
03 0453
10453
-03 06 00 0367
J
.. F' P,I{)HE AO
03?f,
03 0454
10454
00
03:;>7
03 0455
1045~
03 "il 04 1172
LX
4,S"'"GAD
03::>A
03 0456
10456
02 12 14 0001
LII
Al?o1.2
0320.
03 0457
10457
-03 43 14 1113
A5L
AI2,*SL
0330
03 0460
10460
04 10 10 1035
SA
Al,SP-SWlC,4
03:'11
03 0461
10461
03 53 04 1224
IxC
4. (<;1.\(+16,1'
033::>
03 0462
10462
-03 60 06 0454
..IF.
"'LO"P
0333
03 0463
10463
03 53 C2 1165
IXC
2, Ll MT
nO
no
05 0451
00 0000
LOOP
NOP
Legend
A: 4-digits, line number assigned by UTMOST.
B:
C:
0:
E:
F:
G:
n digits of ERROR codes, alpha or special character.
2 digits, index register covering the object code.
4 digits, the segment relative location counter from 00008 to 20008'
5 digits, the program relative location counter from 000008 to the limit of program memory.
10 digits, octal representation of assembled object code.
n digits, original source code input to UTMOST.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporalion and BNA Incorporaled
4/63
774:141.100
UNIVAC III
Data Code Table
Internal Code
DATA CODE TABLE NO.1
§
. 23
141.
.1
USE OF CODE:
·2
STRUcrURE OF CODE
· 21
Character Size:
· 22
Character Structure
.221 More significant pattern:
.222 Less significant
pattern:
internal alphameric data.
Character Codes
LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN
MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
0
16
0
Blank
+
1
&
)
2 bits; 32, 16.
2
-
4 bits; 8,4, 2, 1.
3
0
4
1
A
J
/
5
2
B
K
S
6
3
C
L
T
7
4
D
M
U
8
5
E
N
V
9
6
F
0
W
10
7
G
P
X
11
8
H
Q
y
12
9
I
R
13
:
=
14
<
15
>
6 bits.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA incorporated
32
48
!
*
$
(
,
I
Z
3/63
•
774:142.100
STANDARD
_EDP
-"
REPORTS
UNIVAC III
Data Code Table
Printer Code
DATA CODE TABLE NO.2
§
142.
• 23
•1
USE OF CODE;
. . . . High Speed Printer.
·2
STRUcrURE OF CODE
· 21
Character Size;. . .
· 22
Character Structure
6 bits.
• 221 More significant pattern: 2 bits; 32, 16.
· 222 Less significant
pattern;
4 bits; 8, 4, 2, 1.
© 1963
Character Codes
LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN
MORE SIGNIF.ICANT PATIERN
0
16
32
48
*
(
$
,
0
Space
+
1
;
)
2
-
3
0
4
1
A
J
/
5
2
B
K
S
6
3
C
L
T
7
4
D
M
U
8
5
E
N
V
9
6
F
0
W
10
7
G
P
X
11
8
H
Q
y
12
9
I
R
Z
13
:
=
14
<
15
>
by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incorporated
I
3/63
•
774:143.100
STANDARD
_EDP
. . .'
REPORTS
UNIVAC III
Data Code Table
Card Code
OAT A CODE TABLE NO.3
§
143.
• 23
Character Codes
punched cards. (80-column).
.1
USE OF CODE:
.2
STRUCTURE OF CODE
. 21
Character
Size:
. . . . . . 1 column.
OVERPUNCH
UNDERPUNCH
© 1963
None
None
12
Blank
+
-----
------
-----
------
----- -----
11
---
--
-----
0
--- ------
0
0
1
1
A
J
/
2
2
B
K
S
3
3
C
L
T
4
4
D
M
U
5
5
B
N
V
6
6
F
0
W
7
7
G
P
X
8
8
H
Q
y
9
9
I
R
Z
--------
-----
-----
8-3
=
8-4
T
1-4-8
;
4-6-8
:
4-5-8
<
3-5-8
>
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
-----
-----
$
)
*
(
3/63
774:144.100
UNIVAC III
Data Code Table
90-Column Card Code
DATA CODE TABLE NO.4
§
144.
. 23
.1
USE OF CODE:
punched cards (90- column).
.2
STRUcrURE OF CODE
. 21"
Character Size:. . . . 6 punch positions per character; 2 characters per
card column.
Character Codes
Upper entry represents the card punching positions .
Lower entry represents the character .
The table parameter represents the character
structure in Core Storage .
LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN
0
1
MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
Blank
16
01357
Space
1357
1379
0
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
-
0
0
1
1
19
2
3
3
39
4
5
5
59
(,
7
7
79
8
9
9
01379
:
48
+
)
0357
32
1359
01
*
01359
$
015
(
.
0359
1579
1
159
A
15
135
B
K
07
C
035
09
L
05
M
059
N
13
D
03
E
179
F
57
G
37
H
35
I
0157
J
359
3579
/
157
S
379
T
057
U
039
V
037
0
W
137
079
P
357
0
17
R
X
139
Y
579
Z
=
13579
<
0579
>
3/63
774:145.100
_STANDARD
EDP
•
UNIVAC III
Data Code Table
Console Typewriter Code
REPORTS
DATA CODE TABLE NO.5
§
145.
. 23
.1
USE OF CODE:
.2
STRUCTURE OF CODE
.21
Character Size:
.22
Character Structure
Character Codes
Console Typewriter.
LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN
6 bits.
.221 More significant
2 bits; 32, 16.
pattern:
.222 Less significant pattern: 4 bits; 8, 4, 2, 1.
MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
0
16
32
48
0
Space
+
5
$
1
:
)
*
(
2
-
$
,
3
0
CR&
LF
RB
4
1
A
J
/
5
2
B
K
S
6
3
C
L
T
7
4
D
M
U
8
5
E
N
V
9
6
F
a
w
10
7
G
P
X
11
8
H
Q
y
12
9
I
R
Z
13
:
=
2
:
14
<
-
HT
15
>
0
4
I
FF
U
CR & LF - Carriage return and line feed.
RB - Ring bell.
HT - Horizontal tab.
FF - Form feed.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
774:146.100
UNIVAC III
Data Code Table
Collating Sequence
OAT A CODE TABLE NO.6
§
146.
.1
USE OF CODE:
.2
STRUCTURE OF CODE
internal collating sequence.
In ascending sequence:
blank
&
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
<
>
H
*
$
J
K
L
M
N
0
P
Q
R
(
+
)
/
S
A
T
B
C
U
V
D
E
W
X
Y
Z
F
G
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporalion and BNA Incorporaled
3/63
774: 151.100
•
II
STANDARD
EDP
REPORTS
UNIVAC III
P. O. Facilities
PROBLEM ORIENTED FACILITIES
§
151.
.11
.1
UTILITY ROUTINES
.11
Simulators of Other Computers
UNIVAC Illl
Reference :
Off-Line Card-to-tape Converter Simulator
This routine operates within maximum card
reader speed and requires approximately l, 000
UNIVAC III core storage locations, one card
reader, and one Uniservo III tape unit.
UNIVAC Publication
UT 2505.
currently available.
Off- Line Tape-to-Card Converter Simulator
This routine operates within maximum card punch
speed and requires approximately 600 UNIVAC III
core storage locations, one Uniservo III tape unit,
and one card punch unit.
Date available: .
Description:
The UNIVAC IIII Simulator enables a UNIVAC III
system to simulate UNIVAC I and II systems, including off-line peripherals. The Simulator package consists of the following seven routines:
Off-Line High Speed Printer Simulator
This routine operates within maximum printing
speed and requires approximately 2,000 UNIVAC
III core storage locations, one Uniservo III tape
unit, and one high speed printer.
UNIVAC Illl Dynamic Interpretative Simulator
This routine interprets the original machine instructions and performs their functions on
UNIVAC III by duplicating the memory registers,
adder, and control circuitry of UNIVAC I or II.
The Simulator is a tape-to-tape processing program which requires 16,000 UNIVAC III core
storage locations and as many Uniservo IlIA Tape
Units as the UNIVAC I/ll system being simulated.
The input data (converted from UNIVAC IIII tape
by a routine to be described later) must be written
on Uniservo III tapes. The original format and
character structure of UNIVAC IIII tapes is maintained.
It is not possible to carry alphabetics in the simulated control counter. No error indication is provided for the foregoing restrictions; therefore, it
is important to know that this condition will never
occur, regardless of the input data used, before
simulation is attempted. The Simulator does not
have the ability to simulate the addition of a
space code (bit structure 000001) to an ignore
code (bit structure 000000).
Run time of the simulator approximates that of the
UNIVAC II. A trace routine, which can be optionally activated or ignored by the user, is included
within the Simulator.
Instruction Tape Copier, UNIVAC IIII to UNIVAC III
This routine operates within tape speed and requires approximately 600 UNIVAC III core storage
locations, one Uniservo II tape unit, and one
Uniservo III tape unit.
Data Tape Copier, UNIVAC III to UNIVAC Illl
This routine operates within tape speed and requires approximately l, 000 UNIVAC III core storage locations; two Uniservo II tape units, and two
Uniservo III tape units.
Data Tape Copier, UNIVAC IIII to UNIVAC III
This routine operates within tape speed and requires approximately l, 000 UNIVAC III core storage locations, two Uniservo II tape units, and two
Uniservo III tape units.
© 1963
Simulators of Other Computers (Contd.)
.12
Simulation by Other
Computers: . . . . . . none.
.13
Data Sorting and Merging
SODA SORT
Reference:
UNIVAC Publication
UT 2504.
variable by full words; 511
Record size:
words maximum without
own coding.
Block size: . . . . • • variable by full words; determined by available
storage, or key may contain as many words as the
item.
up to 3 words; no limit to
Key size: . . . . .
number of keys.
File size: . . . . .
1 reel of magnetiC tape.
3 to 6 units.
Number of tapes: .
currently available.
Date available: •.
Description:
The SODA Sort is a sort generator that produces a
sort routine which will become an integral part of
a run. The initial input and the final output must
be handled by "own coding". The intermediate input-output passes are handled by the generated
routine. Provision has been made to facilitate
handling "own coding" routines in each merge
pass of the sort.
The first pass of the sort operates on a replacement selection method, thereby taking advantage
of biased input to form longer strings - the cascade method of merging is used in all collating
passes. The user can control the amount of core
storage and the number of tape units made available to the sort routine. The sort will operate
under control of CHIEF, the UNIVAC III Executive
routine, making it capable of concurrent operation
with other programs.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
UNIVAC III
774:151.130
§
151.
• 13
• 15
Data Transcription:
none .
Data Sorting and Merging (Contd.)
.16
File Maintenance: .
none.
SORT III
The SORT III will be available for sorting, however, specifications are not currently available.
.17
Other
SUPPORT III
UNIVAC Publication U 3519.
Reference:
Date available: •
currently available.
Description
SUPPORT III is a library consisting of the followingroutines and sub-routines for UNIVAC III:
On - Line Binary Card Loader routine for loading
binary cards from the on-line reader into the locations, specified on each card.
SODA MERGE
Reference: •
UNIVAC Publication
lIT 2504.
Record size:
variable by full w,ord; 511
words maximum without
own coding.
Block size: . . . • . • variable by full word; determined by accessible
storage.
Key size: • . . . •
key may contain as many
words as the item.
File size: • • • . .
one reel.
Number of tapes: .
3 to 6 units.
Data available: ..
not currently available.
Description
The SODA merge is a merge generator that produces a merge routine which becomes an integral
part of a run. The cascade method of merging is
used, and the user can control the amount of core
storage and the number of tape units made available to the routine. The merge operates under
control of CHIEF, the 'UNIVAC III Executive routine, making it capable of concurrent operation
with other programs.
Composite Card Loader routine for loading absolute instruction or data in octal, decimal, and
.alphameric formats, using the on-line
80-column reader.
Card Reader Routine 1. 0003 is a routine used
for maintaining a flow of 700 cards per minute
through the card reader in either translated or
untranslated format.
Boot is a routine for loading specified routines
from the system tape or from binary punched
cards.
WST (Write System Tape) is a routine that reads
binary cards and control cards through the card
reader and writes corresponding records on the
system tape.
20 WORD SORT ROlITlNE
Reference: •
UNIVAC Publication
lIT 2506.
Record size:
20 words.
Block size:
20 words.
Key size: •.
1 to 10 words.
File size: •.
1 reel of tape.
Number of tapes: .
4 tape units required.
Date available: . .
currently available.
Description
The 20-Word Sort Routine will accept 20-word
items and sort them into ascending sequence on a
key occupying the first 10 words of each item.
The key size can be manipulated from 1 to 10
words by physically altering a part of the routine.
The initial input and final output must be handled
by own coding.
On-Line Memory Dump is a routine for providing a memory dump on the printer. This routine
can be activated either through a programmed
calling sequence or through typewriter input.
Editing Routines provide for editing input or output information on a character-by-character
basis. These routines have the ability to delete
or insert blanks and to accept octal, decimal, or
alphameric information.
Move Procedure provides a routine for moving N
. words from one area of core storage to another.
Floating Dollar Sign and Edit Routine generates
a routine for editing an ll-character field,
floating a .dollar sign, and inserting a decimal
pOint and commas where required.
This routine will operate under control of CHIEF,
the UNIVAC III Executive Routine, making it
capable of concurrent operation with other programs.
.2
• 14
Report Writing: . . . • none.
3/63
PROBLEM ORIENTED
LANGUAGES: •. • • none •
774: 161.100
•
STANDARD
EDP
•
REPORTS
UNIVAC III
Process Oriented Language
COBOL-61
PROCESS ORI ENTED LANGUAGE: COBOL -61
§
161.
. 14
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity:
UNIVAC III COBOL.
. 12
Origin: .
Computer Sciences
Corporation.
.13
Reference: .
. 14
Description
Description (Contd. )
areas pooled together. PRESELECTION only saves
storage space. (This feature has not been implemented as yet.) The various files have their keys in
the same relative positions in the records.
Input-output control also provides for a rerun feature
based on 'the number of records in a specified file;
i. e., RERUN ON ERROR-LISTING EVERY 10, 000
RECORDS OF EDIT-SHIPMENTS.
UNIVAC III COBOL
Programmer's Guide,
Publication U-3389.
UNIVAC III COBOL is a version of COBOL-61, the
most widely implemented pseudo-English common
language for business applications. It represents a
nearly complete implementation of Required COBOL61 (though there are a few omissions), along with 15
COBOL electives and several useful extensions. The
deficiencies of UNIVAC III COBOL with respect to
Required COBOL-61, the extensions, and the facilities of Elective COBOL-61 that have and have not
been implemented are tabulated at the end of this description. No part of UNIVAC III COBOL has been
implemented in a manner contrary to the COBOL
definition.
Useful extensions to the COBOL-61 language include
a SORT facility, a MONITOR verb that facilitates
program testing, the ability to sequence files in
either ascending or descending order, and a facility
that permits interchange of data between independently prepared subprograms. See Paragraph. 143 for
more details on these extensions.
The most significant omission from the list of electives implemented for the UNIVAC III is the COMPUTE verb. COMPUTE permits arithmetic operations to be expressed in a concise formula notation
similar to that of FORTRAN; e. g. :
File and Record Descriptions and Procedure Division
entries can be copied into the user's programs from
the UNIVAC III COBOL Library, but Environment
Division entries cannot. Furthermore, the nonstandard COPY verb allows only single-paragraph
procedures to be inserted without alteration, whereas
the more flexible INCLUDE verb of Elective COBOL61 (not implemented for the UNIVAC III) allows
library procedures consisting of sections, independent paragraphs, or paragraphs within sections to be
inserted, with replacement of any number of names
in the procedure by other names specified by the programmer. The elective verb ENTER, as implemented for the UNIVAC III, makes it possible to enter
either an independently compiled COBOL-coded subprogram or a closed subroutine in relocatable machine language fOrm. Parameters can be listed by
the main 'program for use by the subsidiary program,
thus partly covering the same ground that the
INCLUDE verb is designed to cover. A non-standard
verb, RETURN, is used to denote the end of such
subprogram linkages.
Segmentation is handled as in Elective COBOL-61,
except that the SEGMENT LIMIT feature has not
been implemented. A particular segment must either
be part of the main program or an overlay. It cannot
be specified to be stored "if there is space available. "
The following priorities are available:
• 'Sections with assigned priorities of 1 through 49
will be present in Core Memory at all times.
COMPUTE X = (A - B)/C
Without the COMPUTE verb, only one type of arithmetic operation can be performed in each COBOL
,statement, so the above formula must be expressed
as:
•
Sections with assigned priorities of 50 through 89
will be grouped into segments by priority number.
One segment at a time will be loaded (in the order
referenced) into a single Core Memory area whose
size is equal to that of the largest segment.
•
Sections with assigned priorities of 90 through 99
are treated similarly, but a diagnostic print-out
is produced if they are called more than once.
SUBTRACT B FROM A GIVING T
DIVIDE C INTO T GIVING X
The decision not to implement this useful verb is
hard to understand in the case of a system with the
speed and power of the UNIVAC III.
Tape reading and writing is partly under the programmer's control in that he can specify the
PRESELECTION method of reading if he wishes, and
can determine which files shall have their input-output
© 1963
Data items upon which arithmetic is to be performed
can be represented internally in decimal form with
either 6 or 4 bits per digit by speCifying USAGE IS
DISPLAY or COMPUTATIONAL, respectively.
Operands can be up to 18 decimal digits. Arithmetic
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
7/63
UNIVAC IIi
n4:161.140
§
161.
· 14
.142 Deficiencies with respect to Required
COBOL-61 (Contd.)
Description (Contd. )
can be perfonned upon mixed DISPLAY and
COMPUTATIONAL items; radix conversion and point
alignment will be automatically perfonned when
necessary.
The UNIVAC III COBOL Compiler will operate under
control of the BOSS III operating system. Minimum
configuration requirements are 7 Uniservo IlIA Magnetic Tape Units, a 16, 384-word core store, and 9
index registers.
Compilation is divided into six logical phases. Documentation will consist of a source program listing,
diagnostic messages, and an object program listing
containing symbolic instructions, locations, and machine words, with interspersed references to the
source program listing. Four different types of
error diagnostics are included within the translator;
they are interpreted as follows:
•
Precautionary diagnostic - print warning
messages and continue compilation.
•
Correctible error - make a reasonable attempt
at correction, print explanatory message, and
continue compilation.
•
Uncorrectible error - when a reasonable guess of
the programmer's intent cannot be made, print
message, reject the statement or clause, and
continue.
•
Destructive errors - when errors have multiplied
to the point where it is probable that no more useful diagnostic information can be produced, terminate the compilation at the end of the current
phase.
There are no specific limitations on the number of
data names, procedure names, or other source program entities. When the COBOL segmentation facility
is used, there are no practical limits on object program size. No infonnation on compilation speed is
yet available.
· 141 Availability
Language:
Translator: .
October. 1962.
no release date has been
deSignated.
· 142 Deficiencies with respect to Required COBOL-61
Environment Division
•
7/63
SOURCE-COMPUTER, OBJECT-COMPUTER, and
SPECIAL-NAMES paragraphs cannot be copied
from the Library.
Data Division
•
The integer-4 TO option of the RECORD
CONTAINS clause is not pennitted; there is no
provision for efficient handling of variable length
records; i. e. , the compiler will consider all
records to be the size of the largest record
within a given fUe.
•
The VALUE clause of the File Description entry
can apply only to "IDENTIFICATION" or "ID, "
a specific item that appears in the standard label
record.
Procedure Division
•
The option of the PERFORM verb that permits
loop control based upon a varying subscriptname has not been implemented.
.143 Extensions to COBOL-61
•
A SORT facility is provided. It consists of subroutines that arrange related records in either
ascending or'descending sequence. Input and
output procedures must be supplied by the COBOL
programmer. While functions of the UNIVAC III
SORT facilities are similar to those of the SORT
verb as defined in COBOL-61 Extended, the fonnat
of the required source coding is entirely different.
•
The operational symbol H can be used in a
PICTURE clause to specify that the field is to be
represented in four-bit decimal form; the effect
is the same as that of the clause USAGE IS
COMPUTATIONAL.
•
Files can be sequenced in either ASCENDING or
DESCENDING order.
•
Procedures can be copied from the COBOL library
into a program.
•
Provision is made for intercommunication between
separately prepared parts of a program by use of
either a COMMON storage section and/or a parameter list provided with the ENTER verb.
•
An augmented error recovery system is included.
This includes procedures which are programmerstipulated for errors other than tape read/write
errors. These procedures are entered after the
standard executive routine error control function
has been completed. They are executed by a
parameter-controlled section of the standard
executive routine.
774: 161.144
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: COBOL-61
§
161.
.144 COBOL-61 Electives Implemented (see 4:161. 3)
Key No.
3
4
Elective
Characters and Words
Semicolon
Long literals
11
File Description
SEQUENCED ON
24
Verbs
ENTER
26
USE
27
30
33
Verb Options
LOCK
ADVANCING
Operand size
41
Environment Division
OBJECT-COMPUTER
46
I-O-CONTROL
47
Identification Division
DATE-COMPILED
48
Special Features
Library
49
Segmentation
Comment
, , always ignored.
up to 128 characters.
allows a list of keys to be specified for ASCENDING or
DESCENDING sequencing.
permits entry to independently compiled COBOL
subprogram s .
allows additional handling of error conditions.
locks rewound tapes.
permits paper advance of the specified number of lines.
up to 18 digits.
includes all clauses except SEGMENT-LIMIT and ASSIGN
OBJECT- PROGRAM.
only the APPLY and RERUN clauses may be written.
current date will be inserted automatically.
procedures in source language can be called from the
Library (but implementation is non-standard)'.
object programs can be segmented.
7/63
774: 161.145
§
UNIVAC III
161.
.145 COBOL-61 Electives NOT Implemented (see 4:161. 3)
Key No.
Comment
Characters and Words
Figurative constants
Figurative constants
Computer-name
HIGH-BOUND(S); LOW-BOUND(S).
HIGH-VALUE(S); LOW-VALUE(S).
no alternative computer-names.
8
9
10
12
File Description
BLOCK CONTAINS
FILE CONTAINS
Label formats
HASHED
no range can be specified.
approximate file size cannot be shown.
labels must be standard or omitted.
hash totals cannot be created.
13
16
17
Record Description
Table-length
RANGE IS
RENAMES
18
19
20
21
SIGN IS
SIZE clause option
Condition~l range
Label handling
5
6
7
22
23
25
Verbs
COMPUTE
DEFINE
INCLUDE
28
29
32
34
Verb Options
MOVE CORRESPONDING
OPEN REVERSED
Formulas
Relationship
35
36
37
38
39
Tests
Conditionals
Compound conditionals
Complex conditionals
Conditional statements
40
42
7/63
Elective
Environment Division
SOURCE-COMPUTER
SPECIAL-NAMES
43
44
FILE-CONTROL
PRIORITY IS
45
I/O CONTROL
items cannot be specified in binary •
value range of items cannot be shown.
alternative groupings of elementary items cannot
be specified.
no separate signs allewed.
variable item lengths cannot be specified.
a conditional value cannot be specified as a range.
only standard labels (or none) may be used
without specialized programming.
algebraic formulas may not be used.
new verbs cannot be defined.
library subroutines cannot be called in the
standard COBOL manner.
each item in a record must be individually moved.
tapes cannot be read backward.
algebraic formulas may not be used.
IS UNEQUAL TO, EQUALS. and EXCEEDS are not
provided; similar forms are available.
IF I I IS NOT ZERO form is not provided.
no implied objects with implied subjects.
ANDs and ORa cannot be intermixed.
not permitted.
only ON SIZE ERROR or AT END conditions may
follow an imperative statement.
only computer-name can be specified.
ACCEPT, WRITE, and DISPLAY verbs
use standard hardware.
cannot be taken from library.
no file priorities can be assigned for
multiprogramming.
cannot be taken from library.
774: 162.100
.~TANDAllO
EDP
•
UNIVAC III
REFORIS
Process Oriented Language
FORTRAN IV
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: FORTRAN IV
§
162.
• 14
·1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity:
UNIVAC III FORTRAN.
. 12
Origin:.
UNIVAC.
· 13
Reference:.
UNIVAC Publications
U-3S17, U-3S49.
· 14
Description
Description (Contd. )
Restrictions (Contd.)
(4) The magnitude of an integer data value may not
exceed 106 , versus 2 35 (or slightly over 1010) in
7090/7094 FORTRAN IV .
Extensions:
(1) Seven additional library functions are provided
(see Paragraph. 411).
(2) The magnitude of a floating point data value can
ran~ from 10- 51 to 10+ 49 , versus 10- 38 to
1O+-S 8 in 7090/7094 FORTRAN IV.
No formal standard for FORTRAN IV exists. This
report uses as a basis for its comparison the advance
specifications for IBM 7090/7094 FORTRAN IV as
contained in IBM Publication J28- 6197 - O.
The UNIVAC III FORTRAN language is largely compatible with the FORTRAN IV language as implemented for the IBM 7090/7094. A reasonable degree
of compatibility with the IBM 709/7090 FORTRAN II
language is also maintained by accepting and correctly interpreting the following FORTRAN II statements:
. 15
Publication Date:. • • . June, 1962 .
.2
PROGRAM STRUCTURE
.21
Divisions:....... one division, composed of
the following types of
statements.
Procedure statements:. algebraic formulae.
comparisons and jumps.
input and output.
Data statements: . • . . FORMAT: describes the
layout, size, scaling, and
code of input-output data.
EQUIVALENCE: causes two
variables to have a common location or specifies
synonyms.
COMMON: causes data storage areas to be shared by
more than one subprogram.
DIMENSION: specifies the
maximum number of elements in each dimension of
an array or set of arrays.
TYPE: specifies mode of a
list of variables; INTEGER,
REAL, LOGICAL.
DATA: assigns constant
values to variables at load
time.
EXTERNAL: declares the
following identifiers to be
function names.
IF ACCUMULATOR OVERFLOW nl' n2
IF QUOTIENT OVERFLOW n1' n2
IF DIVIDE CHECK nl' n2
IF (SENSE LIGHT i) n l' n2
IF (SENSE SWITCH i) nl' n2
PRINT Format, List
PUNCH Format, List
READ i, List
READ INPUT TAPE i, Format, List
READ TAPE i, List
SENSE LIGHT i
WRITE OUI'PlIT TAPE i, Format, List
WRITE TAPE i, List
CALL EXIT
The FREQUENCY statement of FORTRAN II will be
ignored if it appears in a program. Symbolic, double
preCision, and complex statements will not be accepted. It is not clear how the incompatibilities between FORTRAN II and FORTRAN IV in the handling
of Boolean (LOGICAL) operations and in COMMONEQUIVALENCE interactions will be reconciled.
Restrictions and extensions of the UNIVAC III
FORTRAN language relative to IBM 7090/7094
FORTRAN IV are summarized below.
. 22
Restrictions:
(1) DOUBLE precision and COMPLEX variables are
not permitted.
(2) A variable name may not appear in an
EXTERNAL type statement.
Procedure Entities
Program: . .
Subroutine: •
Function: .
Statement: •
(3) Octal digits may not be defined in a DATA
statement.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
composed of statements,
subroutines, and functions.
composed of statements.
composed of statements.
composed of characters;
blanks are ignored except
when part of alphameric
literals.
4/63
UNIVAC III
774:162.230
§
162.
. 23
Data Entities
Array: . . . .
a group of variables of any
one of the following
classes, referenced by
subscript notation.
Item: . . . . . . . . . . integer variable or constant.
floating point (REAL) vari'ble or constant.
Boolean (LOGICAL) variable
or constant.
Hollerith item.
alphameric item.
Hollerith item:. . . . . alphameric item that can
only be used for output; it
is not named.
Alphameric: . . . . . . alphameric item that can be
used for output or as a
format statement; it is
named.
. 24
Dynamically set: .
yes.
no.
yes.
no .
EQUIVALENCE statement
causes sharing of storage
locations.
no.
information not currently
available.
. 26
Number of Names: .
.27
Region of Meaning of Names
In the straightforward use of FORTRAN, each name
is established iil a subp.rogram and is local to that
particular subprogram. A name can be made to reference the same storage location in 2 or more subprograms by specifying the name in the corresponding position of a COMMON statement in each subprogram .
Names
.241 Simple name formation
Alphabet: . . . . .
Size: • . . . . . .
Avoid key words:.
Formation rule:
. 242 Designators
Procedures
Statement label:
Function label: .
A to Z, a to 9.
1 to 6 char.
yes.
first char must be a letter.
unsigned integer.
governed by the rules of the
reSUlting variables.
Subroutine label: • . no designator.
Data (if not specified in a TYPE statement)
Integer variable:
initial I, J, K, L, M, N.
Floating point
variable:
any other initial letter.
Equipment
Card: .••
implied by verbs READ,
PUNCH; or by reference to
a logical input-output
table.
Magnetic tape: . . . use key word TAPE; or
READ, WRITE; or by reference to a logical inputoutput table.
Printer: . . . . . . . implied by verb PRINT; or
by reference to a logical
input-output table.
Comments: . . . . .
C in col. 1 of statement.
Translator control:
key words EQUIVALENCE,
COMMON, TYPE.
.25
.252 Subscripts (Contd;)
Fonn may be
Integer only: .•
Signed: . . . . .
Truncated fraction:.
Rounded fraction:.
. 253 Synonyms
Preset: . . . . . . .
Structure of Data Names
.251 Qualified names:. .
. 252 Subscripts
Number per item:
Applicable to:
Class may be
Special index
variable: .
Any variable: .
Literal: . . .
Expression: . .
4/63
.3
DATA DESCRIPTION FACILITIES
· 31
Methods of Direct Data Description
.311 Concise item picture:
· 312 List by kind: . . . . .
.313 Qualify by adjective: .
· 314 Qualify by phrase: .
.315' Qualify by code: .•
.316
. 317
· 318
.319
DIMENSION ARRAY (4,7).
FORMAT (14).
FORMAT (514).
FORMAT (F8. 3, ElO. 4) for
+999.999 and +. 9999E+99.
· 32
Files and Reels: . . . . own coding.
· 33
Records and Blocks
.331
. 332
.333
· 334
Variable record size:
Variable block size: .
Record size range: .
Block size
READ TAPE, WRITE
TAPE: . . . . . . . .
READ INPUT TAPE,
WRITE OUTPUT
TAPE: . • . . .
READ, PUNCH: .
PRINT: . . . • . .
Choice of record size:.
Choice of block size:
Sequence control: . .
In-out error control:
Blocking control: .. '
none •
a to
3.
all variables.
no.
only integer variables.
yes; except Hollerith.
at most C * N ± C', where C
and C' are literals and N
is an integer variable.
Hierarchy by list: .
Level by indenting:
Level by coding: . .
Others
Array size: . . . .
Four-digit integer:.
Five four-digit
integers: . . . .
Two floating point
items: • . . . . .
FORMAT statement only .
yes; TYPE declarations.
no.
no.
first letter of name if not
listed by TYPE.
no .
no.
no.
.335
.336
· 337
.338
· 339
dynamic .
?
1 to N blocks.
? words.
? characters (BCD format).
80 or 90 columns.
128 characters.
READ, WRITE statement.
?
own coding.
automatic.
?
774:162.340
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: FORTRAN IV
§
162.
• 34
by name or TYPE
declaration.
.342 Possible classes
yes.
Integer: . . . .
no.
Fixed point: .•
yes.
Floating point: •
yes.
Logical: . . . .
no.
Double precision:
no.
Complex: • . . . .
yes.
Alphameric: . . .
• 343 Choice of external
FORMAT statement.
radix: . . . . . . .
· 344 Possible external radices
Decimal: . . . . . .
yes.
Octal:. . . . . . . .
yes.
.345 Internal justification:
alpha automatic left
justified.
integers automatic right
justified.
.346 Choice of external code: FORMAT statement and
READ. WRITE statement.
• 347 Possible external codes
yes.
Decimal: .
yes.
Octal: • . . .
yes.
Hollerith:. .
yes.
Alphameric:
• 348 Internal item size
fixed.
Variable size:
none.
Designation: . .
Range
Fixed point numeric: fixed. 1 word.
Floating point
fixed. 2 words.
numeric: .
fixed. 1 word.
Logical: . . .
fixed. 1 word of up to 4
Alphameric:
characters.
optional.
.349 Sign provision: .
Data Values'
• 351 Constants
Possible sizes
Integer: . . .
Fixed point: .
Floating point:
Alphameric: •
Logical: . • . .
Subscriptible: •
Sign provision: .
• 352 Literals: •.
· 353 Figuratives: • . .
±220.
none.
10- 51 to 104 9.
? characters.
. TRUE. or. FALSE. only.
yes.
optional.
same as constants.
own coding; e. g.. TEN =
10.0.
;'354 Conditional variables:. computed GO TO.
· 36
OPERATION REPERTOIRE
.41
Formulae
Data Items
.341 Designation of class:
.35
.4
Special Description Facilities
.361 Duplicate format:
• 362 Re-definition: ' . .
.363 Table description
Subscription: . .
Multi - subscripts:
Level of item:
.364 Other subscriptible
entities:
.....
by multiple references to a
single FORMAT statement.,
COMMON statement.
EQUIVALENCE statement.
mandatory in DIMENSION
statement.
1 to 3.
variables.
input-output units.
© 1963
.411 Operator List
Arithmetic
addition. also unary.
subtraction. also unary.
multiplication.
division.
exponentiation.
is set equal to.
+
*
/
**
Functions
ABS( ).
absolute value; floating
argument and function.
absolute value; fixed
lABS (
argument and function.
truncate; reduce to integer
AINT( ).
value; floating argument
and function.
truncate; reduce to integer
INT ( ) . . .
value; floating argument
and fixed function.
remainder A .;. B; floating
AMOD (A.B)
argument and function .
remainder A .;. B; fixed
MOD (A.B) •
argument and function.
AMAXO (A ••.• )
maximum value; fixed argument and floating function.
AMAXI (A .... ).
maximum value; floating
argument and function.
AMXO (A .... )
maximum value; fixed
argument and function.
MAXI (A •..• )
maximum value; floating argument and fixed function.
AMINO (A •• ," ),'
minimum value; fixed argument and floating function.
AMINI (A •••. )
minimum value; floating
argument and function.
MINO (A .... ).
minimum value; fixed
argument and function.
MINI (A .... ).
minimum value; floating argument and fixed function.
FLOAT ( ).
float an integer; fixed argument and floating function.
IFIX ( )
fix a floating point variable;
floating argument and fixed
function.
SIGN (A.B) .
transfer sign of A to B;
floating argument fmd
function.
ISIGN (A. B) •
trahsfer sign of A to B; fixed
argument and function .
DIM (A.B) . .
diminish A by A or B.
whichever is smaller;
floating argument and
function.
!DIM (A.B) . . . • . diminish A by A or B.
whichever is smaller;
fixed argument and
function.
SIN ( ) . . .
sine .
COS ( ) . .
cosine.
tangent.
TAN ( )
arcsine.
ASIN ( )
ACOS ( )t.
arccosine.
ATAN ( )
arctangent.
hyperbolic sine.
SINH (
COSH ( H.
hyperbolic cosine.
TANH ( ) •
hyperbolic tangent •
**..
)*.
by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
UNIVAC III
774: 162.411
§
162.•
.443 Multiple results:. .
,444 Missing operands: .
.411 Operator List (Contd.)
Functions (Contd. )
SQRT ( ) ••
EXPN ( ) . . .
EXPI0 ( ) t .
ALOG ( ) •.
ALOGlO ( ) t
t
square root.
exponential (eX).
exponential (lOX).
natural log.
common log.
denotes functions which are extensions of the
language relative to IBM 7090/7094 FORTRAN
IV.
Logical
AND: •
Inclusive OR: .
Exclusive OR:
NOT: . .
Relational
Equal: . .
Not Equal:
Greater than: .
Less than: . ,
Greater than or
equal: . . . .
Less than or
equal: . . . .
.412 Operands allowed
Classes: . . •
Mixed scaling:
Mixed classes: .
Mixed radices: .
Literals: . . . .
.413 Statement structure
Parentheses
a - b - c means:
a +b x c means:
a + b + c means:
c
a b means: . . .
Multi-results: . . •
. 414 Rounding of results: .
• AND •.
. OR.•
none.
. NOT ••
. EQ..
.NE ..
. GT.,
.LT.,
. GE ..
.LE ..
INTEGER, REAL,
LOGICAL.
yes, floating point.
only in exponentiation and
functions.
no.
yes.
. 43
illegal; parentheses must be
used.
no .
truncation of integers at
each step in expression.
Floating
. 44
Operations on
Arrays: • . . . . . . . by own FORTRAN coding
only.
Other Computation:
4/63
subprograms in symbolic or
COBOL language may reference or be "referenced by
FORTRAN subprograms.
Data Movement and Format
. 441 Data copy exam pIe:
. 442 Levels possible: .
Alignment rule
Numbers: .
Alpha: . . .
Filler rule
Numbers: .
Alpha: • . .
Truncating rule
Numbers: . • .
Alpha: . . . . .
Variable size
destination:
.446 Editing possible
Change class:
Change radix:
Insert editing symbols
Actual point: • . .
Suppress zeroes: .
Insert: . . .
Float: . . . • . . .
· 447 Special moves:.. . .
. 449 Character manipulation:
· 45
Y =X .
items.
implied, except for alpha or
input-output.
right justified or
normalized.
left justified.
zeros.
blanks.
truncate at left.
truncate at right.
no .
yes .
yes.
automatic.
automatic.
automatic point.
minus sign only.
none .
none.
File Manipulation
Open: . . . . . . .
own coding.
Close: . . . . , ,
own coding.
Advance to next record: READ, WRITE, PUNCH,
PRINT.
Step back a record:
BACKSPACE.
Set restart point:
none.
Restart: . . . .
none.
Start new reel:.
own coding.
implied in each input-output
Start new block:
statement.
Search on key: .
none.
Rewind:
REWIND.
Unload: . . . . .
none.
(a-b) - c.
a + (b x c).
(a + b) + c.
. 415 Special cases Fixed
x = -x:
K =-K
X = -X.
x = x + 1:
K = K +1
X=X+l.
x = 4. 7y:
K =47*L/10
X =4.7 * Y.
x = 5x107 +y2: 50000000+L**2 X =5.E7+Y**2.
x = Iyl: ! - '
K = lABS (!.)
X = ABS (Yt
x = integer
part of (y):
K = AINT (L)
X = INT (Y)
. 416 Typical examples:
. X = (-B+SQRT(B*B-4.0*A*
C»/(2. 0* A).
.42
· 445 Size of operands
Exact match: . .
none.
not possible.
.46
Operating Communication
,461 Log of progress:. . ; . PRINT uses on -line printer.
.462 Messages to operator: . same as log (error messages are automatically
typed on console typewriter).
.463 Offer options:
PAUSE and type decimal
integer.
PRINT message and PAUSE .
.464 Accept option: . . . , , none.
· 47
Object Program Errors
Error
Discovery
Special Actions
Overflow:
In-out:
Invalid data:
IF clauses
automatic
format checks
own coding.
by executive routine •
typed messages.
.5
PROCEDURE SEQUENCE CONTROL
.51
Jumps
.511 Destinations allowed:
. 512 Unconditional jump:
statement •
GO TO N .
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: FORTRAN IV
§
.536 Nesting limit:
...
· 537 Automatic recursion
allowed: • . . • . .
162.
.513 Switch: . . • . . .
GO TO M, OR GO TO M,
(35, 47, 18).
. 514 Setting a switch: .
.515 Switch on data: •.
ASSIGN 35 TO M •
GO TO (35, 47, 18), I.
.52
Conditional Procedures
.521 Designators
Condition:
Procedure:
. 522 Simple conditions: .
.523 Conditional relations
Equal: ••.•
Not equal: • • . . .
Greater than: . . • .
Less than: . • .
Greater than or equal:
Less than or equal:
.524 Variable conditions: . .
. 525 Compound Conditionals
IF x AND y:
....
IF x OR y: . • . . . •
IF x DO a AND y DO b:
IF x DO a OR y DO b:
.526 Alternative designator:
:.527 Condition on alternative:
.528 Typical examples: . . .
. 53
774:162.513
IF.
implied.
expression or variabl~
versus zero.
.EQ.
.NE ..
.GT ..
. LT ..
.GE ..
.LE •.
true or false for logical
expres s ions.
less than, equal to, or
greater than zero for
arithmetic expressions .
yes.
yes.
no.
no.
none.
no.
IF (X**2. 0-3. 0) 29, 37, 18:
go to 29, 37 or 18 if X2-3
is respectively less than,
equal to, or greater than
zero.
IF «(A*B).GT.C).AND.(D.
EQ. E» GO TO 7: go to 7
if the expression is true
and to the next statement
if false.
Subroutines
• 531 Designation
Single statement: .
Set of statements
First: . • . . . •
Last: • . • . • .
.532 Possible subroutines:
• 533 Use in-line in program:
. 534 Mechanism
Cue with parameters:
Number of
parameters:
Cue without
parameters:
Formal return: .
Alternative return:.
.535 Names
Parameter call by
value: . . • • . .
Parameter call by
name: . . . . • •
Non-local names:
Local names: .
Preserved own
variables:. .
not possible.
• 54
.56
no.
Function Definition by Procedure
.541 Designation
Single statement: •
Set of statements
First: . • . • . .
Last:
..•
. 542 Level of procedure:
· 543 Mechanism
Cue:
..
Formal return: .
. 544 Names
Parameter call by
value: •.
Parameter call by
name: •.
Non-local names:
Local names:.
Preserved own
variables:. .
· 55
?
Operand Definition by
Procedure: •
same as set.
FUNCTION.
END.
any number of statements •
by name in expression.
RETURN .
yes.
no.
use COMMON •
all.
all.
none.
Loop Control
.561 Designation of loop
Single procedure:
First and last
procedures:. .
.562 Control by count:
.563 Control by step
Parameter
Special index:.
Any variable: .
Step: • . . . . .
Criteria: • . . .
Multiple parameters:
.564 Control by condition:
.565 Control by list:
.566 Nesting limit: . • . .
.567 Jump out allowed: . .
.568 Control variable exit
status:
none.
current place to numbered
end; e.g:, DO 173 I = 1,
N,2.
indirect.
no.
integer only.
positive integer.
greater than.
require nested loops.
no.
no .
?
yes •
available.
SUBROUTINE.
END.
any number of statements.
no •
.6
EXTENSION OF THE
LANGUAGE: • . • • . new functions can be added
to the library •
CALL XXX (X, Y, Z).
.7
LlBRARY FACILITIES
?
.71
Identity:
CALL XXX.
RETURN at least once.
more RETURN statements.
· 72
Kinds of Libraries
.721 Fixed master: . .
. 722 Expandable master:
no .
yes.
yes.
.73
Storage Form: .
no.
use COMMON.
all.
magnetic tape; variable
length blocks in
relocatable binary format.
. 74
Varieties of Contents: . subroutines .
functions.
service routines.
all.
© 1963
..•.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
?
4/63
774: 162.750
§
UNIVAC IIJ
162.
• 75
· 83
no.
Target Computer
Environment:
no .
Mechanism
· 84
• 751 Insertion of new item:. separate run •
. 752 Language of new item:. FORTRAN •
. 753 Method of call:. .
named in procedures.
• 76
Translator
Environment:
• 85
Program Documentation
Control:
• . . . . no •
.9
TARGET COMPUTER ALLOCATION CONTROL
.91
Choice of Storage Level: none .
Types of Routines
.761 Open routines exist: . . ?
.762 Closed routines exist:. yes.
. 763 Open-closed is variable: no.
.8
TRANSLATOR CONTROL
.92
Address Allocation: . . none.
• 81
Transfer to Another
Language: . . . .
· 93
Arrangement of Items in
Words in Unpacked
Form: . , . . . . . . standard; no control is
provided.
.94
Assignment of InputOutput Devices: .
· 82
via subprograms in symbolic or COBOL language.
Optinl.izing Information Statements
• 821 Process usage
statements:
• 822 Data usage
statements:
4/63
none.
COMMON, EQUIVALENCE.
.95
specified in input-output
table statements.
Input-Output Areas: • • none.
774:171.100
.STAIlDMlO
EDP
_
REI'ORTS
UNIVAC III
Machine Oriented Language
UTMOST
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: UTMOST
§
171.
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
UTMOST (UNIVAC III
Machine Oriented
Symbolic Translator)
.2
LANGUAGE FORMAT
. 21
Diagram: .
.22
Legend
Label:
identifies either a symbolic
line of coding or a word of
data .
Operation: . . . . . . . can contain a mnemonic
machine operation code.
an expression representing
a machine function or
assembler directive, a
label associated with a
directive, or a data gathering code .
Operand: . . . . • . . . expression defining the information required by the
operation field of the line.
. 12
UTMOST: . . . . . . . UNIVAC.
.13
Reference
UTMOST:
• 14
. • . . . . UNIVAC Publication U-3S20.
Description
UTMOST, the basic machine oriented language for
the UNIVAC III, is a straightforward symbolic assembly system that permits access to library routines and connection with executive routines for full
utilization of the system's capabilities. Coding
sheets are designed so that no strict adherence to
column definition for label, operation, operand, and
comments is necessary; however, very rigid specifications for format of these fields must be followed.
Use and contents of literals may be specified in a
variety of ways.
. 23
Corrections:...... the control directive COR
permits insertions, deletions, and alterations to be
made before reassembling
a program.
The COR option is written in
the operation field followed
by n, a decimal sequence
line number, in the operand
field. Line n will be replaced and followed by all
lines following the COR line
until another COR line is
encountered. COR 9999
ends the operation. The
INS option is written in the
operation field followed by
n, a decimal sequence line
number, in the operand
field. The lines following
the INS line will be inserted
following n. INS and COR
are part of the Updating
Control (UPCO).
. 24
Special Conventions
UTMOST has 16 "assembly directives". Fifteen are
used as pseudo operation codes for generation of
data, reserving areas, forming subroutines, etc.
One of the directives, DO, is used as a macro instruction. The PROC and DO assembly directives
are especially useful, since they effectively allow the
coder to set up a library of subroutines using the
PROC directive and then call the subroutines into any
part of the program using the DO directive. These
are 13 operand "operators" which may be used to
perform arithmetic or logical operations while generating the address or data desired.
Communication with other inaependently written routines is facilitated by referencing a label that does
not appear in the program or defining a label that is
to be considered externally available to other programs or segments. The actual linkage between external references and definitions are consummated
when the programs or segments are loaded at object
time.
The final output of UTMOST is in the form of relocatable binary program either on card or tape media
and a listing of the original symbolic coding together
with an octal representation of the word generated.
.241 Compound addresses:
.242 Multi-addresses:
'. 243 Literals
Alphabetics:
Octal: .
Decimal:
.15
Publication Date: . . . . ?
© 1963
see Section 774:132 .
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
13 forms available (see
Paragraph . 83).
none.
enclose alphameric characters within apostrophes (').
precede the desired value
(in base 8) with a zero.
non-zero digit followed by
decimal (0- 9) digits.
4/63
774: 171. 243
§
UNIVAC III
171.
· 243 Literals (Contd. )
BCD (binary-coded
decimal, excessthree): . . •
Floating point
numbers: . .
· 244 Special coded
addresses: .
.3
LABELS
.31
General:
precede the value with a
colon (:).
a number expressed decimally and preceded by a
colon (:) will produce excess 50 floating point format with 10 digit mantissa
and a 2-digit
characteristic.
.322 Labels for
routines:
.323 labels for
• 324 Labels for
. 325 Labels for
.326 labels for
.33
...
Formation rule
First character:
Others: . .
.334
.335
• 336
.337
· 3i2
• 313
· 314
• 315
.316
· 32
· 321
4/63
as
as
as
as
as
procedures.
procedures.
procedures.
procedures.
procedures.
local to PROC routine in
which they appear.
mandatory tl referenced.
local, provided they are
within another procedure.
alphabetic.
alphabetic or numeric, no
blank or special char.
Number of
characters: •
1 to 8.
Labels for library
routines: • . . . .
none.
Labels for constants:
same as
Labels for files: . • . • same as
Labels for records: .
same as
Labels for variables:
same as
umn 1 of the coding sheet
by definition. Exception:
a label of the operand of a
DO line must immediately
follow the separating comma of the DO line by defiDATA
nition. The asterisk may .4
be appended as a suffix to
a label to designate that it .41 Constants
is available to the region
.411 Maximum size constants
in which it is a subset.,
Integer
The labels of Procedures,
Decimal:
NAME lines and DO lines
Octal: .
have special denotations.
Binary:
Maximum number of
Fixed numeric: .
labels: . . . . .
no practical limit.
Floating numeric
Common label
Decimal:
formation rule: •
1 to 8 alphabetic or numeric
characters; First character must be alphabetic;
Octal: .
there must be no blanks
Hexadecimal: .
nor special characters.
Alphabetic: .
none, since any label may
Reserved labels:
Alphameric:
be regional.
.
.412 Maximum size literals
procedure or name labels
Other restrictions:
Integer
should not conflict with
Decimal:
mnemonics or directives.
Octal: .
Designators:. . . . . . permitted via EQU
Binary:
directive* is an indirect
Fixed numeric:.
address or field select in-'
Floating numeric
dicator. ( ) is a literal
Decimal:
indicator where grouping
is not intended.
Octal: .
Synonyms permitted:
via EQU directive and via
Hexadecimal: .
Procedure directive.
Alphabetic :
Alphameric:
Universal labels
Labels for procedures
.42 Working Areas
Existence: . . . .
mandatory li referenced.
Formation rule
.421 Data layout
First character:
letter.
Implied by use: •
Others: . . . . .
letters or numerals; no
Specified in program:
blanks or special charac- .422 Data type:
ters except *
. 423 Redefinition: .
Number of
characters:
1 to 8.
.
.311
.....
.332 Labels for procedures
Existence:
Region: •. .
.333
same
same
same
same
same
Local labels
.331 Region: . . . .
$ refers to this address.
* refers to indirect address
or external definition of
address.
o refers to literal address.
A label must begin in col-
library
.....
constants:
files: • . •
records: .
variables:
procedures.
procedures.
procedures.
procedures.
12 decimal digits.
16.
25.
none.
lO-decimal-digit mantissa
and 2-decimal-digit
characteristic.
none.
none.
alphameric characters.
alphameric characters.
12 characters.
16.
25.
none.
lO-digit mantissa and 2digit characteristic.
none.
none.
8 characters.
same as alphabetic.
no.
by reserving area.
implied by use.
yes; EQU, RES, SEG
pseudo.
774: 171.430
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: UTMOST
§
171.
, 43
Data Editing:. .
yes, in SUPPORT III.
.642 Format control:
yes, in SUPPORT III.
• 64
Input-Output Areas
.431 Data layout:
'.432 Data type:
.433 Copy layout:
explicit layout.
not required.
PROC directive will define
common statement. DO
directive will cause the
common statement to be
copied the specified number of times.
.65
Input-Output Control
· 651
.652
· 653
• 654
File labels:
Reel labels:
Blocking: • •
Error control: •
• 655 Method of call:.
.5
PROCEDURES
.66
.51
Direct Operation Codes
.661 Facilities:
· 511 Mnemonic
Existence:
Number:
Example: •
.512 Absolute
Existence:
practical.
74.
DA = decimal add.
.52
Macro-Codes:
none.
• 53
Interludes: •.
none.
· 54
Translator Control
Allocation counter:
Label adjustment:
Annotation:. • . • •
.542 Allocation counter
Set to absolute:.
Set to label: ••
Step forward: ••
Step backward: •
Reserve area:
.543 Label adjustment
Set labels equal:
Set absolute value: •
Clear label table:
Limit label table:
• 544 Annotation
Comment phrase:
Title phrasE;: • . .
• 545 Other
Allocation mode: •
EQU pseudo.
EQUpseudo.
none.
to area of Procedure, or
within DO loop.
any card, separated from
operand by a period (. )
and a blank.
preceded by a period (. )
and a blank.
relocatable.
·6
SPECIAL ROUTINES AVAILABLE
• 61
Special Arithmetic: • • to be provided in SUPPORT
III; see Paragraph
772:151. 113.
.62
• 63
.671 Dumps: .•
.7
LIBRARY FACILITIES
.71
Identity: • • • . . •
.72
Kinds of Libraries
.721 Fixed master: . • •
.722 Expandable master:
.723 Private: • • • • . •
pseudo.
pseudo.
pseudo.
pseudo.
pseudo.
Special Functions: • . . library access, maintenance, designation
control.
SUPPORT III dump on
printer .
none .
in form of memory dump at
intervals specified by inline coding•
SUPPORT III.
no.
yes.
private facilities may be
added.
.73
Storage Form: • • . • . card. or tape.
.74
Varieties of Contents:. routines and subroutines.
• 75
Mechanism
.751 Insertion of new item: . physically before reference
in program.
.752 Language of new items: UTMOST., or binary.
• 753 Method of call: • . • •
EQU pseudo op •
.76
Insertion in program
.761
. 762
• 763
.764
Open routines exist: •
Closed routines exist: .
Open-closed is optional:
Closed routines appear
once: • . . • . • • . •
yes •
yes •
yes.
yes.
.8
MACRO AND PSEUDO TABLES
.81
Macros
Code: •.
Description:
Overlay Control:. . . . yes, DECO (Segment,
Chain).
© 1963
SODA Sort; see Paragraph
772:151. 113.
20-word Sort; see Paragraph
772:151. 113.
Library Reference.
Diagnostics
. 672 Tracers: .
• 673 Snapshots:
pseudo operation.
pseudo operation.
see Paragraph. 544.
RES
RES
RES
RES
RES
Sorting
· 662 Method of call: .
• 67
may be set up as constants
or literals and interpreted
with form directive.
by use.
by use.
by use.
under control BOSS III
Executive System •
EQU pseudo op.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
DO directive.
generates designated
line(s) of coding .
5/63
774:171.820
§
UNIVAC III
171.
.82
• 83
Pseudos
Code
Description
EQU: .
equate operand value to
label field.
reserve memory locations.
assign index registers for
area addressing.
designate arbitrary word
format.
specify field selection
pattern.
designate end of program or
procedure.
specifies the followfng in a
subroutine.
qualify procedural coding.
set index register to
assumed value.
means to transfer within a
PROC.
rename mnemonic code.
generate a word in suitable
format for incrementing
and comparing an index
register.
generate a 2-word constant.
generate a word of data
these may be compounded.
RES:
USE:
FORM: .
FLO: .
END: .
PROC:
NAME: .
SET:
GO:.
NACL:
ICW:
.
. .
TWC:.
,+, -, * , ( ):
5/63
Operators:....... used in operand portion of
instruction to form compound addresses or data
words. also used for
decision-making.
Code
Description
·.
·.
'/" · .
·.
++:.
-- .
arithmetic sum.
arithmetic difference.
arithmetic product.
arithmetic quotient.
logical sum (OR).
logical difference
(exclusive OR).
logical product (AND)
covered quotient
(al Ib = a + ~ - 1 ).
equals.
greater than.
a"'+b = a*lob.
a"'-b = a"'10- b •
less than.
+
"'* :.
II: •
=
>
·.
"'+: .
'" :.
-
..
Note:
=.
> , < are used to develop truth statements
which generate a binary value depending on
truth or falseness of statement.
774: 172.100
_STANDARD
EDP
•
-
REPORTS
'--
UNIVAC III
Machine Oriented Language
SALT
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: SALT
§
172.
• 22
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
SALT.
.12
Origin:.
UNIVAC.
.13
Reference:.
UNIVAC Publication U2558.
. 14
Description
Legend (Contd.)
C -class Field: .
Form Field: .
Content Field:
used for defining the disposition of the level it is
associated with.
used for defining the content field.
used for representing either
instructions, control words,
data words, or comments .
· 23
SALT is an assembly language for the UNIVAC III
System, which, in conjunction with the UNIVAC III
SALT executive routine and SALT service library,
forms a complete assembly system. Generally a
one-to-one correspondence exists between source
statements not including macros or subroutines and
machine language instructions. Through the use of
macro and subroutine statements, the programmer
can call and cue open or closed library routines at
will, thereby reducing coding time and effort. Userdefined macros and subroutines can be inserted into
the library.
The SALT executive routine provides complete control and all necessary macro operations to handle all
multi-running control functions, input-output functions, checkpoints, and error checking. Information
pertaining to hardware and core storage requirements for a program must be included in the source
routine in the form of a series of descriptive entries.
Hardware facilities can be assigned either by a specific assignment in a descriptive entry in the source
routine or by letting the executive routine assign the
facilities at object time.
Program documentation is implemented with a side
?y side listing of source and object program, includmg error codes.
No compatibility exists between the SALT and
UTMOST (see Paragraph 774:171) language. Even the
mnemonic codes differ.
.15
Publication Date:. . . . July, 1961.
.2
LANGUAGE FORMAT
• 21
Diagram:.
refer to Appendix A.
.22
Item Number:
sequence number of lines,
through which any desired
relationship among lines
may be imposed.
Tag Field: . . . . . . . names the location of an instruction or data item.
local reference point if one
digit numeric tag is used.
© 1963
Corrections:...... 1. spare lines of coding sheet
and gaps in line number
sequence if corrections
are to be made to program
source card deck.
2. correcting routine on existing library (tape) by use
of systems routines,
Source Code Service One,
if any routine in the library
is to be assembled,
Source Code Service Two,
if no routine is to be
assembled.
3. by object code corrections
to Master reference File
and/or Master instruction
tape during Object Code
Service routine. It is suggested that minor corrections be made at 3 above,
major corrections be
made through 2. above and
no corrections be made
through 1. above.
· 24 Special Conventions
.241 Compound addresses:
BASE ± ADJUSTMENT ±
ADJUSTMENT where BASE
is any label or a reflexive
address ($ HERE), which
causes SALT to assign an
address equal to the address
of the line containing the reflexive address, and ADJUSTMENT is: a permanent
tag; a decimal number, or
the symbol $ SEG i which
represents an amount equal
to all the lines in the ith
segment .
.242 Multi-addresses: • . . in defining parameters of
subroutines and macroinstructions only.
· 243 Literals:. . . . . . . . any valid representation of
data, instructions, and control words appearing as the
address portion of an instruction in the format: (f:r)
where f is a valid form field
entry and r is a representation of the type indicated by
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
f.
5/63
UNIVAC III
774:172.243
§
172.
.244 Special coded
addresses: (Contd) .
• 243 Literals (Contd.)
DCML:
DDML:
BINY: •
DTOB:
OTOB: . . . . . • . .
ALPH:
INST: •
INAD:.
FSEL:
XMOD:
SCAT:
STOP:.
DATE:
SGAD: . . . . . . . .
LOCA: .. "
....
AREA:
XLOC:
XFAD:
XLST:
TCON:
WID: • • . . . . • . .
IOFS: .
XFRE:
244 Special coded
addresses: .
decimal number: maximum
of 6 digits plus sign.
decimal number: maximum
of 12 digits plus sign.
binary number: 1 to 24 bits
plus sign.
decimal number plus sign in
the range of 0 to
16,777,215, which is to be
converted to binary.
octal number with sign in
the range of 0 to
77, 777, 777, which is to be
translated to binary.
up to four alphameric
characters.
instruction.
indirect address control
word.
field select control word.
Index Register Modification
control word.
Scatter Read or Gather
Write control word.
stop control word.
defines an alphameric symbol which will occupy one
computer word. The value
specified by this form may
be replaced in the program
by another value after
assembly.
defines program relative
address of first line in
segment which contains label line referred to by this
form.
defines program relative
address of label referred
to in this form.
defines space to
accommodate data.
defines termination of program, overlay request or
memory dump request.
defines control word used in
requesting memory dumps.
defines input-output control
word.
define the length, direction,
and location of typewriter
message.
defines a five-word program load identifier for
the executive routine.
defines input-output function
specification control word.
releases or assigns hardware facilities to a file.
• 245 Other
Actual core storage
addresses:
· ...
.3
LABELS
.31
General
decimal number ranging
from 0 to I, 023 for relative addressing of any line
in a segment.
• 311 Maximum number of labels
Procedures:
no limit.
Constants:
same as procedures.
Riles:. .
same as procedures.
Record:. .
same as procedures.
Items: .•
same as procedures.
• 312 Common label formation
rule: . . . . . .
yes, except for local labels;
see Paragraph . 332.
.313 Reserved labels: .
none .
• 314 Other restrictions:
Duplicate labels will cause
error notation on codedit .
• 315 Designators: . . . .
none .
. 316 Synonyms permitted:
yes; 2 or more labels may
refer to the same storage
area address form entry.
.32
Universal Labels
.321 Labels for procedures
Existence:
...
Formation rule
First character:
Others: ..
.323
• 324
.325
.326
Number of
characters:
Labels for library
routines: .. ·
Labels for constants:
Labels for files: . . .
Labels for records: .
Labels for variables:
.33
Local Labels
.322
..
.331 Region: .
... · ....
• 332 Labels for procedures
Existence:
Reflexive Address - $HERE
causes SALT to assign an
address equal to the address of the line containing the reflexive address.
Temporary Storage Tag
address - $Tn where n
Region: ..
Formation rule
First character:
Number of
characters: . :
I
5/63
is a decimal number in the
range of 1 to 1024. SALT
allocates storage for temporary use by reserving as
many locations as the maximum "n" occurring in any
$Tn address. Standard Location address - $LOCn
which allows object program
to communicate with the
executive routine .
I'A-U-ER-BA-CH--;--'~
;
mandatory if referenced by
other procedures.
alphabetic.
alphameric: A through Z and
o through 9.
1 to 8.
same
same
same
same
same
as
as
as
as
as
procedures.
procedures .
procedures.
procedures.
procedures.
local to area until same
number is used again.
mandatory if referenced by
another procedure.
local to area until same
number is used again.
o through 9.
1.
774: 172.333
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE : SALT
§ 172.
• 333 Labels for
routines:
· 334 Labels for
· 335 Labels for
• 336 Labels for
• 337 Labels for
.4
DATA
.41
Constants
library
••..•
constants:
files: • . .
records: •
variables:
same
same
same
same
same
as
as
as
as
as
procedures.
procedures.
procedures.
procedures.
procedures.
• 411 Maximum size constants
Machine form
External form
Integer
Decimal: .
12 decimal digits.
Octal: . . .
none.
none.
Hexadecimal:
24 bit binary number plus
Binary:
sign.
decimal number with sign in
Binary:
the range of 0 to
16,777,215.
Binary: . . .
octal number with sign in the
range of 0 to 77, 777, 777.
Fixed numeric
Decimal: . .
none.
none.
Octal: • . . .
none.
Hexadecimal:
Floating numeric
none.
Decimal: •.
none.
Octal: • . . .
Hexadecimal: . .
none.
4 alphameric characters.
Alphameric: • . .
.412 Maximum size literals
Machine code
External code
Integer
12 decimal digits.
Decimal: .
Octal: • . .
none.
none.
Hexadecimal:
24-bit binary number plus
Binary:
sign.
Binary:
decimal number with sign in
the range of 0 to
16,777,215.
Binary: . . .
octal number with sign in the
range of 0 to 77, 777, 777.
Fixed numeric
none.
Decimal: •.
none.
Octal: . . . •
none.
Hexadecimal:
Floating numeric
none.
Decimal: •.
none.
Octal: . • . .
none.
Hexadecimal:
4 alphameric characters.
Alphameric:
. 42
Working Areas
.421 Data layout: .
.422 Data type: •.
• 423 Redefinition:.
.43
.432 Data type: •
• 433 Copy layout:
PROCEDURES
.51
Direct Operation Codes
. 511 Mnemonic
Existence:
Number: .
Example: .
implied by writing
procedures.
not required.
implied by writing.
© 1963
optional.
61.
Arm - add contents of
storage location to
arithmetic register r •
• 512 Absolute
Existence:
Number: .
Example: .
.52
optional.
50.
20 r m = add contents of
storage locatipn m to
arithmetic register r.
Macro-Codes
.521 Number available
Input-output: . .
Arithmetic: • . .
Math Functions:
Error Control: •
51.
2.
24.
none, included in executive
routine "CHIEF".
.522 Examples
Simple: .
Elaborate:
or;
or;
or;
.523 New macros: . . . . . .
.53
implied by use ..
not required •
yes; by defining a temporary
storage area assigned to a
pool
Input-Output Areas
. 431 Data layout:
.5
MCRO DPMOl,
SUBR - MOVE ~~, P,
INDX Xl, X2, X3, X4
SLCT STRATOPN,:
STRAIGHT LINE coding,
open Subroutine
SLCT STRATCLS,:
STRAIGHT LINE coding,
closed Subroutine
SLCT ITRATOPN,:
Iterative coding, open
subroutine
LSCT ITRATCLS,:
Iterative coding, closed
subroutine
where p = n = number of
words to be moved. (straight
line) or number of words to
be moved per iteration
(iterative)
XI = Index register for coding
X2 = Starting address of area
containing the words to
be moved.
X3 = Starting address of area
in which to move words.
X4 =Number of times to
iterate.
can be inserted into program or put on the library
tape in a separate run .
Interludes
Statements
Description
defines the interrelationship
of segments within a program and the first item in
the segment.
LOAD: . . . . . . . • . defines an unbroken sequence
of segments that are to be
in core storage at the same
time •
SGMT: • . .
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
UNIVAC III
774: 172.530
§
172.
.53
Interludes (Contd.)
Statements
Description
MAPS: . . .
equates a segment line with
a particular index register
designation.
designates unexpected overflow condition routine.
designates invalid operation
routine.
designates the starting
address of a program.
assigns a label to an actual
or symbolic address.
assigns a label relative to
a data storage area.
OVER:
!NOP:.
STRT:
EQUL:
EQDX:
. 54
Translator Control
.541 Method of control
Allocation Counter:
label adjustment:
Annotation: . . . .
.542 Allocation counter
Set to absolute: .
Set to label: •.
Step forward:. •
Step backward: .
Reserve area:
.543 label adjustment
Set labels equal:
Set absolute value: .
Clear label table:
· 544 Annotation
Comment phrase:
Title phrase: . . .
pseudo operations.
pseudo operation.
see.544.
none.
EQUL
SGMT
SGMT
AREA
pseudo.
pseudo.
pseudo.
pseudo.
.641 RADIX conversion (Contd. )
MCRO C3DTB: . . . converts a three-word decimal number into three
binary words.
MCRO C4DTB:..
converts a four-word
decimal number into
four binary words.
MCRO CIBTD:..
converts one binary word
into one or two decimal
words.
MCRO C2BTD:.
converts two binary words
into three decimal words.
.642 Code Translation: .
this is accomplished as a
hardware feature or as a
translation parameter in the
software package. There
are no special routines
available to translate images
which entered memory using
the untranslated parameters
in the software package .
· 643 Format control
function of hardware.
Zero suppression:
supplied by user.
Size control: . . .
function of hardware.
Sign control: . .
supplied by user.
Special characters:
for radix conversions; macro
· 644 Method of call:. . .
statements, for others;
mnemonic or absolute
operation codes.
.65
Input-Output Control:
.66
Sorting
EQUL pseudo.
none.
none.
colon (:) followed by comment in the contents field.
colon (:) followed by title in
the contents field or title
appearing in contents field
of a LABEL card.
SPECIAL ROUTINES AVAILABLE
· 61
Special Arithmetic
.611 Facilities: . . .
.612 Method of call: .
· 62
.662 Method of call:.
memory print available .
analyzes each instruction of
a program to determine that
it stops fn memory allocated to that program, then
puts printable record of the
instruction on tape.
selective by specifying parameters or by conditional basis.
• 671 Dumps: . .
.672 Tracers: .
see macros - 521.
see macros - 521.
see macros - 521.
see macros - 521.
Overlay Control
.631 Facilities: • . .
.623 Method of call: .
". 64
Diagnostics
Special Functions
· 621 Facilities: • . .
• 622 Method of call: •
.63
none - a sort of the type defined in the users guide is
not available.
none.
· 661 Facilities:
· 67
·6
load and execute segment of
object language.
use XLOC Control word.
.7
LIBRARY FACILITIES
. 71
Identity:
. 72
Kinds of Libraries
..
. ...
Data Editing
. 641 RADIX conversion
MCRO ClDTB:.
MCRO
5/63
converts a one-word decimal number into a oneword binary number.
C2DTB:... converts a two-word decimal number into two
binary words.
normally handled by the
executive routine with provision for incorporating
"own coding" if desired.
1. Standard Super Library
(SALT source code of all
subroutines and macros
maintained by UNIVAC).
2. option of user .
. 721 Fixed masters: . .
.722 Expandable master:
.723 Private: • . . .
yes.
yes.
yes.
.73
magnetic tape.
Storage Form: .
774: 172.740
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE : SALT
§
172.
.74
.75
.81
Varieties of Contents: . Programs, subroutines, and
macro's in SALT source
code.
Macro (Contd.)
Code
Description
MCRO M * ENDR
f, P2,:
Mechanism
terminate current,reel of file
"f" and write label on next
reel of file "f. "
.751 Insertion of new item:
MCRO M * END
f, P2,:
.76
Insertion in Program
Area Source Macro set - Type One - Index Register
Comm unication
.761
.762
• 763
.764
Open routines exist: .
Closed routines exist: •
Open-closed is optional:
Closed routines appear
once:
restricted to special library
runs.
.752 Language of new item: . SALT source.
. 753 Method of call: .
pseudo operation.
yes.
yes .
yes.
Code
MCRO
yes.
.8
MACRO AND PSEUDO TABLES
.81
Macro
terminates file "f" including
control information and
physical disposition of tape •
Description
M * ADV, P2,: advances next input item into
current status.
Output Macro set - Copy - Arithmetic Register
Communication
Input-Output
Subroutine using
-SER 3~~: . . .
I/O control systems for
tape files using UNISERVO
*III tape units.
PI: . • . . . . • . . . permanent tag naming line
to which control is to be
transferred when an endof-file sentinel is
encountered.
P2: . . . . . • • . . . a number, I through 15,
designating the communication index register for
this macro-instruction.
M:
marker for call statement.
f: .
external alphabetic file
designation.
Input Macro set - Type One - Index Register
Communication
Code
Output Macro set - Type One - Index Register
Communication,
MCRO M * START
f, P2,:
MCRO M * ADV
f, P2,:
MCRO
MCRO
MCRO
f, :
MCRO
MCRO
MCRO
MCRO
Description
M * STARTf,: writes label on first reel of
file "f".
M * COPY f,: copies current item onto
output file "f. "
M * COPYV
........... copies variable size items
onto file "f. "
M * ENDRf,: terminates current reel of
file "f" and writes label on
the next reel of file "f. "
M * ENDf,:
terminates file "f. "
M*HOLD,:
prevents item in current area
from being overlaid by
another item.
M * FREE,: . releases area previously
retained through execution
ofM * HOLD.
.
Description
MCRO M * START f,
PI, P2,: • . • . . . . reads and checks the label
on the first reel of file "f".
MCRO M * ADV f, PI,
P2,: • . . . . . . .•
advances next input item
into current status.
MCRO M * END f,
P2, :.
early termination of file.
Code
Code
Input macro instruction set - Type Two - Arithmetic
Register Comm unications
Code
Description
MCRO M * START
f, PI,:
MCRO . M * ADV f,
PI,: .
MCRO
M * END f, :
reads and checks the label
on the first reel of file "f. "
advances the next item into
current status.
early termination of file.
Description
Output macro instruction set - Type Two Arithmetic Register Communications
writes label on first reel of
file "f. "
Code
advances next delivered output area into current
status.
© 1963
Description
MCRO
M * START f,: writes label on first reel of
MCRO
M
Hf.
• advances neat area to
current status.
If.
* ADV f,:
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
774: 172.810
§
UNIVAC III
172.
. SI
. SI
Macro (Contd. )
Code
Description
Code
Description
MCRO
Macro (Contd.)
MCRO
M '" ENDR f,:
M '" ADV: . . . causes reserve storage area
to be made available for
editing data to be punched.
M '" PUNCH: . causes punching of data from
reserve storage area into
a card.
terminates current reel of
file "f" and writes label on
next reel of file "f. "
MCRO M '" END f,: . . terminates file "f. "
MCRO
Area source macro set - Type Two Arithmetic Register Communication
Subroutine Using
PUN 90 PZZ,:
Code
punches 90-column cards.
Description
Description
Code
MCRO
M '" ADV f,: . advances next area into
current status.
Subroutine Using
Servo 2ZZ:
Input Code
MCRO
MCRO
I/O control system for tape
files using UNISERVO "'II
tape units.
MCRO
M '" INIT,
sets up initial conditions for
90-column card punch.
M '" ADV, :
causes reserve storage area
to be made available for
editing data to be punched.
M '" PUNCH,:. causes punching of data from
reserve storage area into
a card.
Description
Subroutine Using
MCRO
M'"
M'"
M '"
M '"
INIT,: .
READ,:
RWI,: .
RWO,:.
Initialize, read first record.
Read a record.
Rewinds with interlock.
Rewinds without interlock.
RDPTTZZ,: . read paper tape.
Output Code
Code
MCRO
MCRO
MCRO
Initialize output.
M '" INIT,:
M '" BWRITE,: Write 720 character block.
M '" SWRITE,: Write six 120 character
blockettes.
M'" RWI,: .
Rewind with interlock.
M '" RWO,:.
Rewind without interlock.
Description
M"'INIT,: .
M '" RDPT,:
Subroutine Using
PUNPTTZZ, :. punch paper tape.
Description
Subroutine Using
CRD SO RZZ,: reads SO-column cards.
Code
M '" INIT,:
MCRO
M '" ADV,:
sets all initial conditions for
card reader.
causes reading of cards in
card reader.
CRD 90 RZZ:. reads 90-column cards.
Code
Description
MCRO
M '" INIT,:
MCRO
M '" ADV,:
sets all initial conditions of
card reader.
causes reading of cards in
card reader.
Subroutine Using
PUN SO PZZ:
MCRO
5/63
M '" INIT: . .
M '" PUNPT:
card punch SO-column cards.
Description
M '" INIT:. . . sets up initial conditions of
SO-column card punch.
sets all initial conditions.
initiates paper tape punch
instructions to punch data
from the reserve area onto
paper tape.
Subroutine Using
PRNTOlZZ:.
Code
Subroutine Using
Code
MCRO
MCRO
Description
MCRO
sets initial conditions.
causes reading of paper tape.
MCRO
printer subroutine.
Description
M '" INIT:. . • sets initial conditions of
printer routine.
MCRO M '" SELECT,
P2, :.
selects next 32-word printer
storage area and makes it
the current storage area.
MCRO M '" PRINT,: . prints contents of area
selected.
MCRO M '" PADN,n,: causes paper to be advanced
n lines.
n = number of lines paper is
to be advanced.
MCRO M '" PADTOL,
1,: .
advances paper to line L.
L =line number to which
paper will be advanced.
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE : SALT
§
774:172.8101
172.
.81
.81
Macro (Contd.)
Macro (Contd. )
Code
Arithmetic
MATH
* SIN
MATH
* COS
H: ••••
MATH
* TAN
H: .•••
MATH
* SQRT:
. • . .
MATH
* CBRT:
.•..
MATH
* LOGT:
• • . .
MATH
* LOGN:
.•..
MATH
* EXP:
MATH
* TENX:
•...
MATH
* XTOP:
•.•.
Code
MCRO
MCRO
Description
H:
Description
DPMOl,: . . • Double precision multiplica-·
tion produces a four-word
decimal product by multiplying a two-word decimal
multiplicand by a two-word
decimal multiplier.
DPDOl,: . • . double precision divide produces a two-word decimal
quotient and a two-word
decimal remainder from a
two-word dividend and
two-word divisor.
Math functions
Subroutine Using
MATH PAC:
Coding
used to call in following
math functions if
applicable.
Description
MATH
* FAD:
MATH
* FMP:
MATH
* FDV:
MATH
* DMP:
MATH
* DDV:
. . . •.
MATH
* NRM:
•....
MATH
* FIT:
MATH
* DTF:
MATH
* SIN:.
• • • • •
MATH * COS: • . . • .
MATH
* TAN:
MATH
*A
SIN: . . . .
MATH
*A
COS: • . • .
MATH
*A
TAN: •••.
.....
compute sum of two floating
pOint numbers.
compute product of two
floating point numbers.
compute quotient of two
floating point numbers.
compute product of two
double precision floating
point numbers.
compute quotient of two
double precision floating
point numbers.
normalize floating point
number into twelve digit
integer.
convert twelve digit integer
into floating point number.
convert on unnormalized
double precision with a
two digit scale factor into
a floating point number.
compute value of SINE (X),
where X is a floating point
number.
compute value of cosine (X),
where X is a floating point
number.
compute the value of
TANGENT (X) where X is
a floating point number.
compute the value of
Arcsine (X), where X is a
floating pOint number.
compute the value of
Arccosine (X) where X is
a floating point number.
compute the value of
Arctangent (X), where X
is a floating point number.
© 1963
.....
compute the value of
Hyperbolic sine (X), where
X is a floating point
number.
compute the value of
Hyperbolic cosine (X)
where X is a floating point
number.
compute the value of
Hyperbolic tangent (X),
where X is a floating point
number.
compute the value of the
square root of X, where X
is a floating point number.
the value of the Cube Root of
X, where X is a floating
point number.
compute the value of log (X)
(base 10) where X is a
floating point number.
compute the value of log (X)
(base e), where X is a
floating point number.
compute the value of ·e x ,
where X is a floating point
number.
compute the value of lOX,
where X is a floating point
number.
compute the value of XP
where both X and Pare
floating point numbers.
Other Macros
provides coding to transfer
a designated number of
words from one memory
location to another.
.82
Pseudos
Code
Description
defines a decimal number
not greater than 6 digits.
DDML:.
defines a decimal number
not greater than 12 digits.
BINY:.
defines a I to 24- bit binary
number.
DTOB:
defines a decimal number
which is to be translated
to binary.
OTOB: • . . . . • . . . defines an octal number
which is to be translated
to binary.
ALPH:
defines up to 4 alphameric
characters.
defines an Indirect Address
INAD:
Control word.
FSEL:
defines a Field Select
Control word.
XMOD: •
defines an Index Register
Modification Control word.
STOP: .
defines a Stop Control word.
(. ) period:
in SALT coding sheet form
section means form is the
same as previous form.
DCML: •
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
774: 172.820
§
UNIVAC III
. 82
172.
. 82
Pseudos (Contd.)
Code
Description
SGMT:
SGRT:
defines a segment line.
defines relationship of one
segment to another.
equates a segment line with
a particular index
register designation.
defines program relative
address of label referred
to in contents.
defines program relative
address of first line in
segment which contains
label line referred to by
this form.
when used in SGMT statement defines the predecessor segment to be
ZERO or no segment.
defines space to accommodate data.
assigns a label to an actual
or symbolic address.
assigns a label to a line
relative to a data storage
area.
designates the starting
address of a program.
designates unexpected
overflow condition routine.
designates invalid operation
routine.
defines an unbroken sequence of segments that
are to be in core storage
at the same time.
defines UNISERVO III
facility for a file.
defines UNISERVO III
facility for a file.
defines Card Reader 80
facility for a file.
defines Card Punch 80
facility for a file.
defines High-Speed Printer
facility for a file.
defines input-output control
word.
defines length, direction,
and location of typewriter
message.
defines termination program, or overlay request,
or memory dump request.
releases or assigns hardware facilities to a file.
MAPS:
LOCA: . . . . . . . . .
SGAD: • . • . . . . . .
ZERO: • . . . . . . . .
AREA:
EQUL:
EQDX:
STRT:
OVER:
INOP:.
LOAD:
SER3:
SER2:
RDER:
PNCH:
PRINT: .
XLST:
TCON:
XLOC: . . . . . . . . .
XFRE: . . . . . . . . .
5/63
Pseudos (Contd.)
Code
Description
LDID:
fabricates a five-word program identifier for the
Executive Routine.
calls a subroutine.
assigns index registers to
subroutines.
selects specific parts of
subroutines.
calls a macro.
SUBR:
INDX:
SLCT:
MCRO: .
defines subroutine
configurations.
defines first line of a
MCDF: .
macro.
defines last line of a macro.
MCND: .
defines Card Punch 90
PCH9:
facility for a file.
defines Card Reader 90
RDR9:
facility for a file.
defines paper tape unit
PAPT:
facility for a file.
fabricates a five-word tape
TAPE:
packet for Executive
Routine.
10FS: . • • . . • . . . . defines an input-output function specification control
word by which user may
request I/O.
XPAK: • . . . . . . . • input-output control word
defined in XLST which defines I/O function used,
addres s of required indicator coding and address
of next XP AK in three lines
connected by hyphens.
TPAK: . . . . . . . . . typewriter control word defines in XLST which defines
typewriter section.
defines control word used in
XFAD: .
requesting memory dumps.
defines memory boundaries
MAXM:.
in order to allow more
memory than program
needs.
assigns a part number to a
PART:
section of a subroutine.
defines a Scatter read/gather
SCAT:
write control word.
specifies an alphameric symDATE:
bol which will occupy one
computer .word. The value
specified by this form may
be replaced in the program
by another value after
assembly.
CONF: .
774: 172.8201
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: SALT
§
APPENDIX "A"
172.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
--
--
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
~?
~i
J~
Ii
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
I-
-
w
-
z
0
u
-
z
~
I-
<
oc
"0oc
-
~
-
u
cr
>
Z
-
::J
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
I-
'"o
-
-
-
-
-
-
w
-
-
-
-
-
-
LL
-
0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
'"
-
-
-
-
D:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
--
-
--
-
-
-
-
-
--
-
--
--
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
--
-
--
-
-
~
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
--
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
--
--
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
~
-
-
-
--
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
u
c.:>
z
a
o
u
"'"
I-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
0
z
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
'"
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
w
!:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
D:
W
'"'"'"
o
D:
0
z
.::.
D:
" '"u
c..
D:
-
-
© 1963
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
5/63
774: 191.100
.STAIIDARD
EDP
_
REPORTS
UNIVAC III
Operati ng Envi ranmen t
SALT Executive Routine
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: SALT EXECUTIVE ROUTINE
§
191.
.12-
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
SALT Executive System.
SALT Library Routines.
(formerly called CHIEF
Executive System and Duty
Service Library Routine,
respectively. )
Description
The SALT Executive System and the SALT Library
Routines provide a comprehensive operating system
for the UNIVAC III that is the key to effective use of
the multi-running capabilities of the UNIVAC III
hardware (1. e., the ability to process several independent programs concurrently). The object programs produced by the SALT Translator, and the
translator itself, are designed for operation under
control of the SALT Executive Routine. However, no
compatibility is maintained between SALT and the
U1MOST machine oriented language. The SALT
Library Routines provide the facilities to make additions, deletions, or corrections to the Master Program Library and prepare the Master Instruction
Tape in the format required for input. The Master
Instruction Tape is a linked series of object programs with a specified order of execution. SALT
Library Routines are run under control of the SALT
Executive Routines.
SALT Executive Routines are a related set of
subroutines designed to provide automatic control
over UNIVAC III system operation in the following
areas:
Loading and executing programs.
Allocation of core storage and external units.
Input-output operations.
Multi- and concurrent processing.
Automatic handling of most errors.
Communication between operator and system.
Logging of system operations.
The Master Instruction Tape is prepared by the SALT
Object Code Service routines from the following
input:
A Master Program Library, which contains the
object programs for the system.
Additional object programs for the system.
A control file containing: system parameter specifications, schedule of runs to be performed, and
corrections for object programs.
The Object Code Service routines create an updated
Master Program Library, a Master Program Library
© 1963
Description
listing, and the Master Instruction Tape. The
Master Instruction Tape contains the schedule of
computer runs, the system parameter definitions,
and the object programs, including the executive routine as the first program on the tape.
After the executive program has been loaded from the
Master Instruction Tape, operational control of the
computer is completely automatic. The predetermined schedule establishes the sequence of loading
object programs, but the operator can change this sequence via the input typewriter. Core storage and external units are assigned by continually Updating a
table of available facilities as outlined by the system
parameter specifications. If insufficient facilities are
available for the program, a message is typed out and
the operator can then type in the desired corrective
action. Assignment of facilities is optimized by allocation of the smallest segment of available core storage large enough to hold the program being loaded.
This mode of memory allocation can be altered by the
programmer to assign either the highest or the lowest
order memory area which is available at run time.
External facilities can be assigned on a demand or optional basis as specified in the object program, thus
providing a wide margin for flexibility and optimization of available equipment.
Requests for input-output operations are controlled
and scheduled by the executive routine. Requests are
serviced on a first-come, first-served basis for the
input-output channel involved. The automatic program
interrupt feature dictates when requests are serviced.
If more than one interrupt occurs simultaneously,
those from Uniservo III Synchronizers are first, followed by those from the General Purpose Channels in
an order determined by the speed of their connected
units.
Multi- and concurrent processing are scheduled and
controlled by the executive routine. As each program
is loaded into storage, a control address is added to
the end of a priority list. When control is released
to the executive routine either by an automatic program interrupt or by a voluntary release of control
by the program, the control address of the interrupted
program is placed at the end of the priority list and
the control addresses which follow it are advanced on
the list. After servicing the release of control or interrupt' control is returned to the program which is
currently at the head of the priority list. Control is
rotated to each of the concurrent programs in this
manner, permitting independently prepared programs
to share both the available input-output facilities and
the available computer time.
All automatic program interrupt conditions are serviced by the executive routine. If unique corrective
procedures are required, control is transferred to the
program involved for the specific corrective action.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
774: 191.120
§
UNIVAC III
191.
· 12
.32
Description (Contd. )
· 321 Initial assignment: •
If the condition cannot be corrected, the executive
routine determines whether to terminate only the
program involved or all currently running programs.
In either event, the operator can initiate restart procedures and/or diagnostic memory dumps by typing
in the appropriate option.
.13
Input-Output Units
Availability
either specified when program is written or can
allow assignment at object
time .
. 322 Alternation: . . . . . . specified in parameters defining allocation of hardware for each program •
. 323 Reassignment:. . . . . operator can at all times
choose which physical tape
units shall be used by typing in selection.
SALT Executive System: currently available.
SALT Library:.
currently available.
.14
Originator:.
UNIVAC Division.
· 15
Maintainer:
UNIVAC Division.
. 16
First Use:
June, 1962.
·2
PROGRAM LOADING
· 21
Source of Programs
.211 Programs from on-line
libraries:. . . . . . . Master Instruction Tape
contains pre-assembled
relocatable programs
which can be called either
from a predeterm ined
schedule or from operator
intervention.
· 212 Independent programs: preas sembled relocatable
programs called by operator intervention.
.213 Data: . • . . . . .
50 words of data used as a
parameter.
· 214 Master routines: •
incorporated in the Master
Instruction Tape.
• 22
.4
RUNNING SUPERVISION
.41
Simultaneous Working:
.42
Multi -programming:. . supervised by SALT Executive System in rotation.
Sequence activated by
return of control to SALT
Executive System. Number
of programs limited by
physical capacity of
equipment available.
.43
Multi-sequencing:... none.
· 44
Errors, Checks, and Action
Error
Library Subroutines: . incorporated in the Master
Instruction Tape iii
relocatable form and
called automatically.
.23
Loading Sequence: • . . pre-determined schedule
incorporated on the Master
Instruction Tape can be
varied by operator intervention at any time.
.3
HARDWARE ALLOCATION
.31
Storage
· 311 Sequencing of program
for movement between
levels: . . . . . • . . routines can be segmented
by the insertion before
assembly of segment and
overlay statements.
.312 Occupation of
working storage: .
relocation codes 'are
inserted in object program
at time of assembly.
routines can be loaded anywhere in core storage.
5/63
Check or
Interlock Action
Allocation impossible:
check
In-out error - single:
check
In-out error - persistent: check
typed message to operator.
repOSition and re-read tape.
operator option to tty again
or to jettison the run.
Loading Input error:
Storage overflow:
Invalid instructions:
Arithmetic overflow:
Invalid operation:
Improper format:
Invalid address:
same as 1 in-out error.
Reference to forbidden
area:
· 45
initiated by program and
supervised by SALT
Executive System .
check
none.
check
check
check
check
checked
only when
tracing
checked
only when
tracing
typed message to operator.
programmed routine.
programmed routine.
typed message to operator.
error indicator in trace
routine output.
error indicator in trace
routine output.
Restarts
• 451 Establishing restart
points: • • . . . .
.452 Restarting process:
when memory dump requests
occur in program.
type in request to SALT Executive System specifying
the number of the memory
dump required for restart.
The location of SALT Executive System will then automatically restart the process.
774: 191.500
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: SALT EXECUTIVE ROUTINE
§ 19~.
.5
PROGRAM DIAGNOSTICS
.51
Dynamic
. 511 Tracing: . . . . . . . . available from the library
by calling program.
Printed output showing
contents of all registers
and operation conditions .
. 512 Snapshots: . . . . . . . available from the library
by calling program. Output in memory print
format.
.52
Post Mortem: . . . . . available from the library
by operator exercising
option.
dumps can be used for
restart or for diagnostic
purposes.
.6
OPERATOR CONTROL
. 61
Signals to Operator
.611 Decision required by
operator: . • . . . .
.612 Action required by
operator: . . • . .
.613 Reporting progress of
run: . . . .
. ...
. 62
.63
accept, reject, or change
facility allocations and for
persistent input-output
errors; has option to try
again or jettison the run.
.72
Operator Decisions: • . console typewriter or log
tape .
.73
Run Progress: . . . . . console typewriter or log
tape .
.74
Errors:
console typewriter or log
tape.
.75
Running Times:
console typewriter.
.76
Multi -running Status:
console typewriter and
listing.
.8
PERFORMANCE
.81
System Requirements
.811 Minimum configuration: 6 Uniservo III tape units.
1 Uniservo III Synchronizer.
8,192 words of core storage.
1 High Speed Reader.
1 High Speed Printer .
. 812 Usable extra facilities: all .
. 813 Reserved equipment: . 1 magnetic tape for the
Master Instruction Tape .
approximately 2, 970 words
of core storage.
.82
.821 Loading time: . .
tape and card handling, and
initiation of new programs
as facilities become
available.
.822 Reloading frequency:
console typewriter types
log.
.83
Operator's Decisions: • typed in from console
typewriter.
.84
Operator's Signals
....
. 631 Inquiry:
.632 Change of normal
progress: . .
..
.7
LOGGING
.71
Operator Signals:
System Overhead
.85
Program Space
Avallable: . .
C-2, 900 words.
where C =words of core
storage available.
Program Loading Time: done in parallel while other
programs are running.
Program Performance:
typewriter inquiry •
typed in from console
typewriter.
console typewriter or log
tape.
© 1963
less than 10 seconds after
Master Instruction Tape
has been mounted.
. once a day or until such time
as it is desired to run the
system under control of
another routine.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
the major overhead is the
processing of input-output
requests and interrupts.
This amounts to approximately 2 milliseconds of
central processor time
per request. Other inputoutput requests continue
concurrently during this
processing time.
5/63
774:201.001
STANDARD
UNIVAC III
R£I'ORTS
System Performance
NOTES ON SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§ 201.
The UNIVAC III system has the ability to process several independently prepared
programs concurrently. The manufacturer recommends that the system be programmed
so as to obtain the maximum throughput capabilities of the system.
The practical approach to this end is to generate several small programs rather
than one large one (e. g., a card-to-tape, a tape-to-tape, and a tape-to-print program, as
opposed to one large program to achieve the desired results directly from card input to
print output). This approach releases the central processor and high speed peripherals for
other jobs rather than monopolize the entire system for the total time required by the
slowest peripheral unit.
The system performance problems are based on the assumption that the problem is
the only one the system has to process. This approach therefore uses the one-Iargeprogram method, and effectively monopolizes the entire system for the total time it takes
the slowest peripheral unit, which in the selected problem is in most cases, the printer.
The solid-line curve on the graphs indicates that total time to process the problem.
The CP curve indicates the time the central processor is monopolized. The amount of
central processor time available for multi-running can be read by taking the difference
between the two curves.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
774:201.011
UNIVAC III
System Performance
UNIVAC III
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
©
1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
n4:201.012
UNIVAC III
UNIVAC III SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 1
Configuration
Worksheet
VIII B
Item
III
VI
VII A
C.P.
1
Char/block
,Ref.rence
Blocked Unblocked
Details
Details
(File 1)
1,092
1,092
1,092
1,092
1,092
(File 1)
13
13
13
13
13
RecordB/block
K
m.sec/block
File 1 == File 2
14.2
14.2
14.2
14.2
14.2
File 3
85.7
85.7
85.7
15.8
8.6
File 4
126.5
126.5
126.5
20.4
8.9
Fite 1 = File 2
0
0
0
0
0
File 3
0
0
0
0
0
File 4
0
0
0
0
0
File 1= File 2
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
1.1
File 3
1.92
1.92
1.92
1.04
0.08
File 4
0.13
0.13
0.13
1.69
0.13
m.sec/block
al
0.192
0.192
0.192
0.192
m.Bec/record
a2
0.364
0.364
0.364
0.364
Central
m.sec/detail
Processor
Times
m.sec/work
b6
0.064
0.064
0.064
0.064
b5+ b9
1.474
1,474
i.474
1.474
m.aec/report
b7+b8
2.153
2.153
2.153
2.153
m .. sec
al
0.192
0.192
0.192
0.192
a2 K
4.732
4.732
4.732
4.732
a3 K
47.944
47.944
47.944
47.944
File 1 Master In
1.100
1.100
1.100
1.100
File 2 Master Out
1.100
1.100
1.100
1.100
File 3 Details
24.960
24.960
24.960
1.040
File 4 Reporta
1.690
1,644.5
1.690 1,644.5
1.690 1,644.5
1.690
20.4
114-.7
81.718
1,644.5
81.718 1,644.5
81.718 1,644.5
57.798
20.4
114.7
4,183t
4,990t
Input Output
Times
m.Bec/Bwitch
m.sec penalty
2
3
for C. P.
and
dominant
column.
Stondard
Problem A
F= 1.0
Unit of meaaure (word)
Std. routine a
Fized
Standard
Problem A
Space
4,990t
4,990t
4,990t
0
0
0
0
0
3 (Blocks 1 to 23)
162
162
162
162
162
6 (Blocks 24 to 48)
410
420
420
420
420
1;344
1,344
1,344
2,400
1,344
100
100
100
100
100
7,016
7,016
7,016
7,265
7,016
4:200.1151
Files
Working
Total
t Includes 3,000 words for the Ezecutive routines.
5/63
4:200.1132
4:200.114
Total
..
4:200.112
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
774:201.013
UNIVAC III SYSTEM PERFORMANCE «(.ontd.)
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 2
Confi guratlan
Worksheet
Item
Reference
III, VI, VII A
5
Fb:ed/Floating point
Fb:ed
input
Uniservo
Floating
m
Uniservo
m.
Unit name
output
input
Printer
Printer
80 characters
80 characters
128 charscters
128 characters
Size of record
output
input
Tl
8.6
8.6
output
T2
126.5
126.S
input
T3
0.08
0.08
output
T4
0.13
0.13
m.sec/record
TS
0.068
0.068
m.sec/S loops
T6
16.S24
24.001
m.sec/repori
T7
3.084
3.084
Standard
m.sec/block
Mathematical
Problem
A
4:200.413
m.sec penalty
©
1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
774:201.100
UNIVAC III
System Performance
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§201.
•1
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING
.11
Standard File Problem A
.111 Record sizes
Master file:
Detail file:
Report file:
• 112 Computation:
. 113 Timing basis: .
.114 Graph: . . . . . . . . see graph below.
.115 Storage space required
Configura tion III:.
• 7, 016 words .
Configuration VI: . . . 7,016 words.
Configuration VilA: . . 7,016 words.
Configuration VIII B
(unblocked details): . . 7,016 words.
Configuration VIII B
(blocked details): . . . 7,016 words.
108 characters.
1 card.
lUne.
standard .
. using estimating procedure outlined in Users'
Guide, 4:200.113.
2
~IA
10.0
7
~
.L'
/'
4
/
V
2
/
1.0
~
7. ~
~c~
, " ,,-
1,...-. --
0.1
~
~SEE
.~
-------- --
-- --- -_c?
Time in Minutes 7
to Process
10, 000 Master
4
File Records
2
-
'1\\1"6
CP~
VIIIB
NOTE
Ir-"""
6~
C
U
7
4
2
0.01
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
LEGEND
--- --- - - - - CP--- - -
Elapsed Time; Unblocked Files 3 & 4
Elapsed Time; Blocked Files 3 & 4
Central Processor Time
Note: This line also represents Central Processor Time for Configuration VIIIB.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
UNIVAC III
774:201.120
§
201.
.12
.122 Computation:.
.123 Timing basis:
standard.
using estimating procedure outlined in
Users' Guide,
4:200.12.
.124 Graph: . . . . . • . . . see graph below.
Standard File Problem B
.121 Record sizes
Master file: .
Detail file:
Report file: •
• 54 characters.
• 1 card.
• 1 line.
100,0
7
4
2
~'VIIA
-
10.0
7
~
.-
/'
4
/'
V
2
I,
1.0
Time in Minutes
to Process
10,.000 Master
File Records
.JIll'
7
~
~
~ ,-,-
4
CP-
4''''- -.",.,.""""
......... SEE NOTE
vmB
--
~".",.,.
2
0.1
-----------
CP~
/
~,..
7
4
2
0.01
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
LEGEND
- - - - - - - CP
-
-
-
Elapsed Time; Unblocked Files 3 & 4
Elapsed Time; Blocked Files 3 & 4
Central Processor Time
Note: This line also represents Central Processor Time for Configuration V1UB.
3/63
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
774:201.130
201.
.13
.132 Computation:.
. 133 Timing basis:
standard •
using estimating procedure outlined in
Users' Guide,
4:200.13.
.134 Graph: . . . . . . • • . see graph below •
Standard File Problem C
.131 Record sizes
Master file:
Detail file:
Report file:
216 characters.
1 card.
1 line.
100.0
7
4
2
~A
10.0
7
~
/'
Time in Minutes
to Process
2
10, 000 Master
File Records
V
I
1.0
~
I
I
"
,
- ~~'G~
.."
--
.- .-
I
7
2
.-
./
A
4
---
LC"-
--
.--
-
CP~
cP
--:~ SEE NOTE
-VIIlB
0.1
7
4
2
0.01
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
LEGEND
- - - - _____ CP- _ _
Elapsed Time; Unblocked Files 3 & 4
Elapsed Time; Blocked Files 3 & 4
Central Processor Time
Note: This line also represents Central Processor Time for Configuration V1IIB.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
774:201.140
§
UNIVAC 11/
201.
.14
.142 Computation:.
. 143 Timing basis:
trebled .
using estimating procedure outlined in
Users' Guide,
4:200.13.
• 144 Graph: • . • • • . . • . see graph below •
Standard File Problem D
.141 Record sizes
Master file:
Detail file:
Report file:
• 108 characters.
· 1 card.
• lUne.
100.0
7
4
2
~
10.0
7
.JI'
./
4
,/
Time in Minutes
to Process
10, 000 Master
2
File Records
V
/
1.0
C?fIII"
~~
4
.~
A
2
--
VIII~CP"::::
C?~
I
7
0.1
--
--
,
~."·SEE NOTE
~
e-
1/'
7
4
2
0.01
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
LEGEND
- - - - - - CP -
-
-
-
Elapsed Time; Unblocked Files 3 & 4
Elapsed Time; Blocked Files 3 & 4
Central Processor Time
Note: This line also represents Central Processor Time for Configuration VIIIB.
3/63
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
774:201.200
20l.
.212 Key size:. . •
. 213 Timing basis:
.2
SORTING
. 21
Standard Problem Estimates
8 characters .
using estimating procedure outlined in
Users' Guide,
4:200.213 .
. 214 Graph: . . • . . . . . . see graph below •
. 211 Record size: . . . . • . 80 -characters.
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
7
4
Time in Minutes
to Put Records
Into Required
2
Order
~I
...til
10.0
I
7
II
If'
/
1/
/
4
/
;.
~
');1.1
1.0
/
~'
~
~
~
2
J.
0~
~I
4"~
~
~~
-'
7
/
~
4
1/ V
V
/ /
2
/£
0.1
2
4
100
2
7
4
1,000
7
10,000
2
4
7
100,000
Number of Records
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
774:201.220
§
UNIVAC III
201.
• 22
.223 Timing basis:
. . . .
SODA SORT
.221 Record size:
. 222 Key size: .
80 characters.
8 characters.
. 224 Graph. . . . . . . .
UNIVAC Publication
UT 2504, using 5, 600
words of core storage for
internal sorting and 6
tape units .
see graph below.
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
7
4
Time in Minutes
to Put Records
Into Required
2
Order
10.0
7
~C:J I'
4
~'0l"
~'t(:,'::>
~~
2
o~
0
yV
~
1.0
7
I'
4
~
V
2
/
0.1
100
2
4
7
1,000
2
4
Number of Records
3/63
7
10,000
2
4
7
100,000
774:201.300
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
.312 Timing basIs:. . . . . using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.312 with floating
point subroutine times
from Support III .
201.
.3
MATRIX INVERSION
. 31
Standard Problem Estimates
general, non- symmetric
matrices, using floating
point to at least 8
decimal digits.
.311 Basic Parameters:
.313 Graph:. . . . . . . . see graph below.
100.0
7
I
I
I
4
I
V
2
10.0
7
~
§1
":;'
4
Time in Minutes
for Complete
Inversion
~I
<:I
~
~J
2
~/
~J
1.0
;/
7
I
4
I
/
2
I
0.1
/
7
/
I
I
4
I
I
2
J
0.01
2
4
7
2
4
7
2
100
10
4
7
1,000
Size of Matrix
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
774:201.400
UNIVAC III
§ 201.
. 412 Computation: .
.4
GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING
.41
Standard Mathematical Problem A Estimates
5 fifth-order polynomials .
5 divisions •
1 square root .
using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.413 .
see graph below.
. 413 Timing basis: .
.411 Record sizes: . . . . . 10 signed numbers, avg.
size 5 digits, max. size
8 digits.
.414 Graph: . . . .
CONFIGURATION III, VI, VilA; DOUBLE LENGTH (12 DIGIT PRECISION); FIXED POINT.
R = NUMBER OF OUTPUT RECORDS PER INPUT RECORD
10,000
7
4
2
Ii
1,000
-'
7
/
4
Time in Milliseconds per
Input Record
V
2
V
"
/
R = 1.0
100
,
7
4
2
V
- R = 0.1
10
7
~ ~{= 0.01
V
/
4
2
2
0.1
4
2
7
1.0
4
7
2
10.0
C, Number of Computations per Input Record
3/63
4
7
100.0
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
774:201.415
§ 201.
see graph below .
. 415 Graph:
COHFIGURATIOH III, VI, VilA DOUBLE LEHGTH (12 DIGIT PRECISIOH); FLOATlHG POIHT
R = HUMBER OF OUTPUT RECORDS PER IHPUT RECORD
10,000
7
4
2
II
I
1,000
7
"
1/
/
4
Time in Milliseconds per
Input Record
V
2
)1
R = 1.0
"
100
7
L
4
2
10
/
P
....... ~~
~::II
V
/
""
~~.Q'>
./
~<'
7
4
2
2
4
0.1
7
2
1.0
4
7
2
10.0
4
7
100.0
'c, Number of Computations per Input Record
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
-- I
774:211.101
IISTANCARD
_EDP
11"
REf'ORTS
UNIVAC III
Physical Characteristics
UNIVAC III
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
©
1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
714:211.102
UNIVAC III
UNIVAC III PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Unit Name
IDENTITY
Model Number
Height X Width X Depth, In.
Weight. Ibs.
PHYSICAL Madmum Cable Lengths to
Designsted Units, Feet
Arithmetic
and
Control
Console
Power
Control
4121
4121
4121
Power
. Supply
16,384-
8,192-
Word
Core
Storage*
Word
Core
Storage
Uniseryo
III
Synchronizer
Unlseryo
III and II
Synchronizer
4122
4122
4135
4144
4121
Uniseryo
IIIC
Synchronizer
70x44 x 33 30 x 69x 33 7(j:i<44 X 33 7lX4sX3 7QX22X 33 70x 22 X 33 70X44X3.li 70X44X3
1,400
t
500
61 (4121
Power
Control)
Temperature, ~ .
2,000
2,800
870
650
1,400
1,400
t
t
t
t
61 (To last
4126 Or
4072 Inline via
the Related Transition Cabinet)
61 (To last
4126 or
4072 inline via
the Related Transition Cabinet)
Normal
Storage
Ranges
l
AtmosPh.jriC
I
Humidity, 'Y.
Conditions
i
I
Normal Atmospheric
.1..
......
Conditions
I
I
ATMOSPHERE
Temperature, of.
60-jO
Humidity, 'Yo
40-70
Working
Ranges
......
I
......
INA-
Heat Dissipated, BTU!hr.
4,400
Air Flow, elm.
1,000
---
6,200
14,000
12,300
12,300
3,760
4,100
---
500
2,300
1,400
1,400
1,000
1,000
Internal Filters
Nominal
Voltage
Tolerance
Nominal
ELECTRICAL
Cycles
Tolerance
Phases and Lines
Load KVA
t Central processor mod-
NOTES
3/63
ule.. assembled side by
side; no cable required.
Power supplied by Power
Control, Model 4121.
*
......
Yes
*
*
*
*
*
1.6
*
*
*
*
*
---
208
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
5.2
4.5
4.5
1.4
1.5
t
60
±y.
3-phase,
4-wire
separate
ground
2.3
• For
32,768
word core
storage,
double
BTU!hr,
AirFlow,
KVA
INAInformation not
available.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
774:211.103
UNIVAC III PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS (Contd.)
Unit Name
IDENTITY
Uniservo
II
Tape
Unit
Uniservo
lilA
Tape
Unit
4072
4126
Model Number
Height x Width x Depth, in.
745
PHYSICAL Maximum Cable Lengths to 61 (From
Designated Units, Feet last unit
in line to
Synchronizer via
Related
Transition
Cabinet)
2,800
61 (From
last unit
in line to
Synchronizer via
Related
Transition
Cabinet)
---
.
f-'
I~
~
n
ITEM
UNIVAC 1050-T
UNIVAC 1050-M2
ALL OF C & T
SOFTWARE PLUS
UNIVAC 105D·R2
ALL DF C,· T. M
SOFTWARE PLUS
0
UNIVAC 1050-5
Cl
8K
8K
8K
8K
8K
8K
8K
8K
16K
12K REQUIRED
12K REQUIRED
8K
8K
8K
8K
8K
8K
OK
8K
c:
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
REQUIRED
REQUIRED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
:I>
200 OR 300 CPM PUNCH
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
600/750 OR 700/922 LPM PRINTER
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
REQUIRED
REQUIRED
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
REQUIRED
REQUIRED
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
az
4K'
PRINT BUFFER (NOTE 4)
4K'
1
PAPER TAPE READ/PUNCH UNIT
1
1
2
3+
3+
3+
1
4+
MASS MEMORY
PALJR""
PAL CARD"
-0
0./>..
PAL TAPE
PAL DRUM
PAL 1004'1'
»c:
PATCH ASSEMBLER
CD
a-a
READER
:r
PRINTER
PUNCH
n
b'l
.:co
CONTROL
ROUTINES
PAPER TAPE
0-
S.
DRUM-MASS MEMORY
:l
MEMORY DUMP
a
:l
":;-
,0'
. .. ...
..
.
"'.
'"
..'" .'" ..
:;-
OPERATING
!'
SYSTEM
TAPE CONTROL
DRUM CONTROL
COMMU.NICATIONS CONTROL
LIBRARIAN
REGENT -CARD
REPORT
GENERATORS
REGENT-TAPE
REGENT-DRUM
DRUM-SORT
SORTS
.... ..'"
.... .... .. '".. '".
'"
..
.. '" '" ....'" '" . .. . '"
. ..
"" '" .... ....
..
'"
..'"
. .... .
.. " "'. " " " " .. .. .
.. " " "" .. ....'" ....'" .."'" .'"
" '"
'"
"
.
'" '" '" '"
'" . . '" '" '"
'" '"..
'" '" '" '"
...
",'
'
",'
",'
'
'"
"
"
"
COMPILERS
'
Y'*
~
Y'':'~
Jo"'''*
","
Jo""**
",1
",**
Y'**
'"
'" '"
Y' ... *
'"
'"
-'3> CARD
TAPE -'3> PRINT
3+
.... ....
'"
..
FORTRAN
'3-6 TAPES REQUIREO
'"
'"
"DEPENDING ON CONFIGURATION OF C, T OR M SY:TEMS
",,,
","
","
....
Y''''.
. .." '""
'"
"
'" '" '"
.. ..
.'" '"'"
"
"
'"
"
'" " "
'" '"
..
'" '"
'"
'"
'"
'"
"
","
.
. '" .. . .
. .'" .. '"'" '"'"
38K REQUIRED WITH MODEL IV
..
....
I
"," I
"," I
"..**
",,,
"
'"
COBOL
",**
"
'"
'"
","
'"
.
'"
",,,
'" "
'" '"
40PTIONAL FOR 600/750 LPM PRINTER ONLY WITH 600 CPM READER ON 1050-C SYSTEMS
,;.
1
2
","
"
'"
'"
TAPE
UTILITIES
"
Y'~*
TAPE-MERGE
SATELLITE
2
.....
..
.
'"
'"
.... *.;:
COORDINATOR
LOADER
2
REQUIRED
1004 PERIPHERALS
MAGNETIC TAPE FILES
2
-i
1 TOB
COMMUNICATIONS
SOFTWARE PROVIDED
1
;:0
1
1
TAPE UNITS
ASSEMBLERS
4K'
1
1
1004 ON LINE
@
z
::!!
UNIVAC 1050-4
600 OR BOO/900 CPM READER
UNIVAC 1050 PROCESSOR
EQUIPMENT
UNIVAC 1050-C
'"
....
'"
'"
'"
",0;.'"
...
'"
'"
'"
'"
..
'"
I
'I
'I
'I
;:,
~
o
o
Reproduced from UNIVAC publication U4438.
w
777:031.1 00
UNIVAC 1050
System Configuration
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§
031.
.1
TYPICAL CARD SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION I (UNIVAC 1050-C)
Deviations from Standard
Configuration I: . . . . . . . . . .
card reader is 10% to 20% slower.
printer is up to 30% slower.
all peripherals can run simultaneously.
7 index registers instead of 1.
Equipment
Rental
Core Storage:
additional 4,096
character positions
$
Model III Central Processor and Integrated
Console (with 4, 096
characters of Core
Storage and 3 inputoutput channels)
325
1,230
Card Reader: 800/900
cards/min
380
Card punch: 200 cards/
min
400
Printer: 700/922 lines/
min (includes Print
Buffer)
985
Optional Features Included: . . . . . . . . . . Multiply-Divide
150
TOTAL RENTAL: $3,470
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
9/64
UNIVAC 1050
777:031.200
§
031.
.2
4-TAPE BUSINESS SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION II (UNIVAC 1050-T)
Deviations from Standard
Configuration II: . . . . . . . . . . . . .
card reader is 20% faster.
card punch is 100% faster.
printer is at least 20% faster.
magnetic tape is up to 130% faster.
7 index registers.
ability to read and write magnetic
tape simultaneously is standard.
Eguipment
Rental
Core Storage:
additional 4,096 character positions
$
Model III Central Processor and Integrated
Console (with 4, 096
characters of Gore
Storage and 3 inputoutput channels)
325
1, 230
Card Reader:
600 cards/min
225
Card Punch:
200 cards/min
400
Printer: 600/750 lines/
min (includes Print
Buffer)
760
Uniservo VI C
Synchronizer
600
Uniservo VI C Control and
4 tape drives: up to
34,100 char/sec
1,400
Optional Features Included: . . . . . . . . . . Input-Output Channels (2)
TOTAL RENTAL:
9/64
90
$5,030
777:031.300
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§
031.
.3
6-TAPE BUSINESS SYSTEM: CONFIGURATION III (MODEL III CENTRAL
PROCESSOR: UNIVAC 1050-T)
Deviations from Standard
Configuration III:
card reader is 20% faster.
card punch is 100% faster.
printer is at least 20% faster.
7 index registers instead of 3.
console typewriter is not included.
ability to read and write magnetic
tape simultaneously is standard.
Eguipment
Rental
Core Storage:
additional 12,288
character positions
$
975
Model III Central Processor and Free-Standing
Console (with 4, 096
characters of Core Storage and 3 input-output
channels)
1, 260
Optional Features Included: .
Card Reader:
600 cards/min
225
Card Punch:
200 cards/min
400
Printer: 600/750 lines/
min (includes Print
Buffer)
760
Uniservo VI C
Synchronizer
600
2 Uniservo VI C Controls
and 6 tape drives: up to
34,100 char/sec
2,200
Input-Output Channels (2)
Multiply-Divide
90
150
TOTAL RENTAL: $6,660
© 1964 Auerbach Carparation and Info, Inc.
9/64
777:031.400
§
UNIVAC 1050
031.
.4
6-TAPE BUSINESS SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION III-A (MODEL IV CENTRAL
PROCESSOR; UNIVAC 1050-T)
Deviations from Standard
Configuration Ill:
card reader is 20% faster.
card punch is 100% faster.
printer is at least 20% faster.
7 index registers instead of 3.
console typewriter is not included.
ability to read and write magnetic
tape simultaneously is standard.
Equipment
Rental
Core Storage:
additional 8,192 character positions
$
/
685
Model IV Central Processor and Free-Standing
Console (with 8, 192
characters of Core
Storage)
2,460
Card Reader:
600 cards/min
225
Card Punch:
200 cards/min
400
Printer: 600/750 lines/
min (includes Print
Buffer)
760
Uniservo VI C
Synchronizer
600
2 Uniservo VI C Controls
and 6 tape drives: up to
34,100 char/ sec
Optional Features Included: .
2,200
Input-Output Channels
(5)
Multiply-Divide
425
275
TOTAL RENTAL: $8,030
/
9/64
--
777:031.500
SYSTEM· CONFIGURATION
§ 031.
.5
12-TAPE BUSINESS SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION IV (UNIVAC 1050-T)
Deviations from Standard
Configuration IV: .
card reader is 20% slower.
printer is up to 30% slower.
magnetic tape is up to 120% faster.
3 fewer index registers.
console typewriter is not included.
only 1 magnetic tape data transfer
at a time is possible.
Equipment
Rental
Core Storage:
additional 24,576
character positions
$ 2,055
Model IV Central Processor, Free-Standing
Console, and "B" Power
Supply (with 8,192 characters of Core Storage)
Card Reader:
800/900 cards/min
380
Card Punch:
200 cards/min
400
Printer: 700/922 lines/
min (includes Print
Buffer)
985
Uniservo III A
Synchronizer (2)
Uniservo III A Power
Supply (2)
Uniservo III A Tape
Drives (12):
100,000 rows/ sec
Optional Features Included: .
2, 610
1,990
430
9,000
Input-Output Channels
(7)
Multiply-Divide
TOTAL RENTAL:
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
595
275
$18,720
9/64
777:031.600
UNIVAC 1050
§ 031.
.6
6-TAPE AUXILIARY STORAGE SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION V (UNIVAC 1050-M)
Deviations from Standard
Configuration V:
auxiliary storage is 230% larger.
card reader is 20% faster.
card punch is 100% faster.
printer is at least 20% faster.
console typewriter is not included.
7 index registers instead of 3.
ability to read and write magnetic
tape simultaneously is standard.
Equipment
Rental
Fastrand I Storage
Unit and Synchronizer:
66,050,288 characters
$ 4, 295
Core Storage: additional
8,192 character positions
685
Model IV Central Processor, Free-Standing
Console, and "B"
Power Supply (includes
8,192 characters of
Core Storage)
Optional Features Included: .
2,610
Card Reader:
600 cards/min
225
Card Punch:
200 cards/min
400
Printer: 600/750 lines/
min (includes Print
Buffer)
760
Uniservo VI C Synchronizer
600
2 Uniservo VI C Controls
and 6 tape drives: up to
34,100 char/sec
2,200
Input-Output Channels (6)
Multiply-Divide
510
275
TOTAL RENTAL:
$12,500
/
9/64
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
777:031.700
§ 031.
.7
TYPICAL REAL-TIME SYSTEM (UNIVAC 1050-R)
Eguipment
CLT51L (2): up to 300 bits/
sec input; 5 level
CL T50L (2): up to 300 bits/
sec output; 5 level
CLT81M (2): up to 1600 bits/
sec input; 5, 6, 7, or 8 level
CLT80M (2): up to 1600 bits/
sec output; 5, 6, 7, or 8
level
C/M-8 Communications
Multiplexer:
8 positions
Fastrand I Storage Unit and
Synchronizer: 66,050,288
characters
Optional Features Included:
Rental
$
40
50
50
70
725
4,295
Core Storage: additional 12,288
character positions
975
Console Typewriter: 10 char/sec
165
Model III Central Processor,
Free-Standing Console and
"B" Power Supply (includes
4,096 characters of Core
Storage and 3 input-output
channels)
1,410
Card Reader: 600 cards/min
225
Card Punch: 200 cards/min
400
Printer: 700 lines/min (includes Print Buffer)
985
Uniservo VI C Synchronizer
600
Uniservo VI C Control and 4
tape drives: up to 34,100
char/sec
1,400
Input-Output Channels (4)
Multiply-Divide
TOTAL RENTAL:
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
180
150
$11,720
9/64
777:031.800
UNIVAC 1050
§ 031.
.8
TYPICAL ON-LINE CARD PROCESSING SYSTEM (UNN AC 1050-4)
Eguipment
Rental
UNN AC 1050 Model III
and Integrated Console
(with 4, 096 character
positions of Core
Storage and 3 inputoutput channels)
$1, 230
UNIV AC 1004 Adapter
UNN AC 1004 Model I,
including 961 positions
of Core Storage, 400
cards/min Reader, and
400 lines/min Printer
1,150
Card Punch: 200 cards/
min
300
TOTAL RENTAL:
9/64
200
$2,880
777:041.100
UNIVAC 1050
Internal Storage
Care Storage
Model III
INTERNAL STORAGE: CORE STORAGE - MODEL III
§ 041.
.16
Reserved Storage
Purpose
Index registers:
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
Basic Use: . . . . . . working storage.
.13
Description
Core storage is used for all input-output areas, index registers, arithmetic registers, input-output
control storage, and interrupt control storage. Any
locations in core storage can be used as input-output areas, with the restriction that the address of
every card read or card punch area must be a multiple of 64.
A total of from 161 to 289 character positions of the
basic 4K block of storage are reserved for special
purposes, depending upon the optional features installed. Although all reserved areas may be used
as working storage, a programmer would be welladvised to refrain from using the first 340 positions
of core storage for any purpose other than those
described above (except tetrads 22 through 31, which
have no special assignments).
7 registers of 3 characters each
none.
Arithmetic reg2 registers of 16 charnone.
isters:
acters each
1-0 control
16 characters per channel none.
registers:
Interrupt control
16 characters, plus 8
none.
registers:
characters per I/O
channel
Multiplier-Quotient
(if multiplydivide feature is
none.
incorporated): 8 characters
Core Storage.
Main Memory of the 1050
Model ill Central Processor.
Additional Memory Module of
4,096 characters.
The basic 1050 Model ill Central Processor contains
4,096 character positions of core storage. Additional storage is obtained by adding from one to seven
modules of 4, 096 positions each, providing a maximum capacity of 32,768 character positions. Cycle
time is 4.5 microseconds for each access of one
alphanumeric character.
Each character position
consists of 7 bits: 6 data bits and 1 parity bit.
Number of locations
Control counter
storage:
Special instructions:
4 characters
none.
16 characters
none.
. 21
PHYSICA L FORM
Storage Medium:
. 23
Storage Phenomenon:. direction of magnetization .
.24
Recording Permanence
.2
magnetic cores .
.241 Data erasable by
instructions:.
yes.
.242 Data regenerated
constantly: . .
. 243 Data volatile:. . .
. 244 Data permanent: .
. 245 Storage changeable:
.28
Access Techniques
. 281 Recording method: .
. 283 Type of access: ..
. 29
no.
no .
no .
no .
coincident current .
uniform .
Potential Transfer Rater.
.292 Peak data rates. 14
Availability: . . . . . 9 months.
. 15
First Delivery: . . . 1963.
.31
.3
Cycling rates: ..
Unit of data:
Conversion factor:
Data rate: . . . .
DATA CAPACITY
222,222 cps.
character .
6 data bits/character.
222,222 char/sec.
Module and System Sizes
Identity:
Words:
Characters:
Instructions:
Decimal
digits:
Modules:
Minimum
Storage
2nd to 8th
Increment
Maximum
Storage
in basic processor
variable
additional 4K module
variable
variable.
4,096
819
4,096
819
32,768.
6,553.
4,096
1
4,096
1
32,768.
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
8.
9/64
777:041.320
UNIVAC 1050
§ 041.
.32
.4
.7
PERFORMANCE
Rules for Combining
Modules: . . . . . . from 1 to 8 modules per
system may be used.
.72
Transfer Load Size
CONTROLLER. . . . control unit is part of
Model ill Central
Processor.
.73
.5
ACCESS TIMING
. 52
Simultaneous
Operations: . . . . . none .
. 53
Access Time Parameters and Variations
.. 531 For uniform access Access time: .
Cycle time: . .
For data unit of:
.8
With self: . . . . .
1 to 1, 024 characters.
Effective Transfer Rate
With self: . . . . ..
90 + 9C j.l.sec, where C is
the number of characters
transferred, using block
transfer instruction .
2.25 J,lsec.
4.50 J,lsec.
1 character .
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Check or Interlock
9/64
Invalid address:
check
Invalid code:
Receipt of data:
none.
parity check
Recording of data:
Recovery of data:
record parity bit.
parity check
Dispatch of data:
Timing conflicts:
send parity bit.
check
generates interrupt signal and
sets testable
indicator.
generates interrupt signal and
sets testable
indicator.
generates interrupt signal and
sets testable
indicator.
generates interrupt signal.
777:042.100
UNIVAC 1050
Internal Storage
Core Storage
Model IV
INTERNAL STORAGE: CORE STORAGE - MODEL IV
§
042.
.1
.15
.16
GENERAL
First Delivery: . . . . . December 1965.
Reserved Storage
Purpose
. 11
Index registers: 7 registers of 3 characters
each
Arithmetic
registers:
2 registers of 16 characters
each
1-0 control
registers:
16 characters per channel
Interrupt control registers: 16 characters, plus 8 characters per 1-0 channel
MultiplierQuotient (if
multiplydivide
feature is
incorporated): 8 characters
Control counter
storage:
4 characters
For special
instructions: 16 characters
Identity: . . . • . . . . . . Core Storage .
Main Memory of the 1050
Model IV Central Processor.
Additional Memory Module
of 8,192 characters.
. 12
Basic Use: . . . . . • . . Working storage .
.13
Description
The basic 1050 Model IV Central Processor contains 8,192 character positions of core storage.
Additional storage is obtained by adding from one
to seven modules of 8,192 positions each, providing
a maximum capacity of 65,536 character positions.
Each position consists of 7 bits: 6 data bits and 1
parity bit.
Memory is accessed two characters at a time, with
a cycle time of 2 microseconds per access.
Internal circuitry handles the selection of the relevant characters when accessing an operand with an
odd number of characters or an instruction. Effective cycle time is 1. 2 microseconds per character
or less when accessing operands 5 or more characters in length.
Locks
none.
none.
none.
none.
none.
none.
none.
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
· 21
Storage Medium: .
· 23
Storage Phenomenon: . direction of magnetization.
· magnetic cores.
· 24 Recording Permanence
.241 Data erasable by instructions: . . . . . . .
· 242 Data regenerated
constantly: . . .
.
· 243 Data volatile: .••. .
· 244 Data permanent: . . . . .
· 245 Storage changeable: . .
Core storage is used for all input-output areas, index registers, arithmetic registers, input-output
control storage, and interrupt control storage. Any
locations in core storage can be used as input-output
areas, with the restriction that the address of every .28
card read or card punch area must be a multiple of
.281
64.
.283
A total of from 161 to 289 character positions of the
· 29
basic 8K block of storage are reserved for special
purposes, depending upon the optional features in.292
stalled. Although all reserved areas may be used
as working storage, a programmer would be welladvised to refrain from using the first 340 positions
of core storage for any purpose other than those described above (except tetrads 22 through 31, which
have no special assignments) .
.3
. 31
Number of locations
yes.
no.
no.
no.
no.
Access Techniques
Recording method: •• coincident current.
Type of access: . . . . . uniform.
Potential Transfer Rates
Peak data rates
Cycling rates: ...
Unit of data: .•..
Conversion factor:
Data rate: .••...
· 500,000 cps.
· 2 characters.
· 6 data bits/character.
.1,000,000 char/sec.
DATA CAPACITY
Module and System Sizes
Identity:
Words:
Characters:
Instructions
Decimal digits:
Modules:
Minimum
Storage
in basic processor
variable
8,192
1,638
8,192
2nd to 8th Increment
additional 8K module
variable
8,192
1,638
8,192
1
1
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
Maximum
Storage
variable.
65,536.
13,107.
65,536.
8.
9/64
UNIVAC 1050
777:042.320
§
042.
.32
Rules for Combining
Modules: . . . . . . . . . from 1 to 8 modules per
system may be used.
.4
CONTROLLER .
.5
ACCESS TIMING
.52
Simultaneous Operations: . . . • . • . . . . . none.
.53
Access Time Parameters and Variations
.7
PERFORMANCE
. 72
Transfer Load Size
Wi th self: . • . • . . . . . 1 to 1, 024 character s .
. . control unit is part of Model
IV Central Processor.
.73
Effective Transfer Rate
With self: . • . . . . • • . 34 + 2C p,sec, where C is
the number of characters
transferred, using block
transfer instruction .
. 531 For uniform access Access time: . . . . . . 1p,sec.
Cycle time: . • . . . . . 2 p,sec.
For data unit of: . . . . . 2 characters per cycle.
.8
9/64
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Check or Interlock
Action
Invalid address:
check
generates interrupt
signal and sets
testable indicator.
Invalid code:
Receipt of data:
none.
parity check
Recording of data:
Recovery of data:
record parity bit.
parity check
Dispatch of data:
Timing conflicts:
send parity bit.
check
generates interrupt
signal and sets
testable indicator.
generates interrupt
signal and sets
testable indicator.
generates interrupt
signal.
777:043.100
UNIVAC 1050
Internal Storage
Fastrond I and"
INTERNAL STORAGE: FASTRAND I AND"
§
043.
.13
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: . . . . . . . . . . Fastrand I and II Mass
Storage SUbsystems.
.12
Basic.Use: . . . . . . . . auxiliary storage.
.13
Description
The UNIVAC 1050 Fastrand Mass Storage Subsystem is basically the same as Fastrand for
the UNIVAC 490, with certain changes to permit
operation with the 1050's character-type data
structure and testable indicator-type control
system. The subsystem provides fairly rapid
random access to large quantities of data stored
on magnetic drums.
Two versions of the Fastrand Storage Unit are
available. Fastrand II has twice the number of
tracks per drum as Fastrand I. There is no
difference in physical size or other characteristics.
Each Fastrand I Storage Unit has a capacity of
over 66 million characters; each Fastrand II
Storage Unit, over 132 million characters. From
one to eight storage units can be connected to a
Fastrand Control and Synchronizer Unit to comprise a Fastrand Subsystem. One subsystem can
be connected to each unassigned input-output
channel (up to 3 for the 1050 Model ill and 8 for
the Model IV). Maximum storage capacity, therefore, ranges from 1. 585 billion characters for
systems incorporating the Model III Central Processor and Fastrand I, to 8.454 billion characters
for those using the Model IV Central Processor
and Fastrand II.
Average random access time to any record is 93
milliseconds. Peak transfer rate, when the data
to be transferred is contained in several sectors of
the same track, is 154,000 characters per second.
Peak transfer rate within a sector is 185,000
characters per second.
An option called Fastbands can be added to either
type of Fastrand Storage Unit. It adds 24 tracks
(258,048 characters) with 1 fixed head per track.
. The access time to records contained on these
tracks depends only on rotational delay and averages
35 milliseconds per random access of a recIDrd.
Each Fastrand Storage Unit contains two magnetic
drums, which are treated as a single logical unit
by the controller. There are 64 aerodynamicallysupported read/write heads per storage unit (32
per drum). All 64 heads are connected to a common
positioning mechanism and move in unison to one
of 96 discrete positions in Fastrand I or to one of
192 positions in Fastrand II.
Description (Contd.)
The tracks available at each position are numbered sequentially, enabling up to 688, 128
characters of data to be read or recorded without repositioning the heads. (This is analogous
to the "cylinder" concept in IBM 1301 and 1311
Disk Storage.) From one character to the limit
of core storage can be transferred with a single
instruction.
Head positioning time varies from 30 to 86 milliseconds and averages 58 milliseconds. Drum
speed is 870 revolutions per minute, so the
r0tational delay varies from 0 to 69 milliseconds
and averages 35 milliseconds. Activation of
addressing circuits requires 5 milliseconds, but
this is usually overlapped with the other access
time factors.
Each of the two drums in a Fastrand I Storage
Unit has 3, 072 data tracks, while each Fastrand II
drum has 6, 144 data tracks. Each track is divided
into 64 sectors, and each sector holds 168
characters.
The Search feature allows an operand to be compared with the first 8, 16, or 32 characters (key)
of each sector within the 64 tracks at a particular
position of the heads. The key is compared bit by
bit with the whole operand, or only with the particular bit positions indicated by a mask. The
operand to be compared is stored in core storage,
and no demand on the central processor is made
except during the actual comparisons. When a
"find" is made, an interrupt signal is generated
(optional) and a testable indicator is set. Searching
may be for an equality condition or for an equal
to or greater than condition.
Parity check bits and phase-monitoring circuits are
used for error detection and correction, providing
for the recovery of up to 11 bits of missed data.
(The technique used for error recovery is considered proprietary information.) other checks
are made for invalid addresses, illegal function
codes, timing conflicts, and sector length errors.
Detection of any error causes the controller to
generate an interrupt signal and set a particular
testable indicator, depending upon the type of error.
Average times available for processing during a
Fastrand operation are shown in the table on the
following page.
In UNIVAC 1050 systems using the Model ill
Central Processor, the Fastrand unit can operate
Simultaneously with the Communications Subsystem,
Punched Paper Tape Subsystem, Buffered Printer,
and the UNIVAC 1004 Subsystem on-line. In systems using the Model IV Central Processor, the
Fastrand unit can operate simultaneously with all
peripheral subsystems except the Uniservo III A,
the Uniservo IV C, or another Fastrand Subsystem.
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
9/64
UNIVAC 1050
777:043.130
§
043.
.13
Description (contd. )
TABLE I: AVERAGE PROCESSING TIME AVAILABLE DURING
A ONE-SECTOR FASTRAND READ OR WRITE OPERATION
Model ill
Processor
Model IV
Processor
Average time to access
and read or write a
sector
93 msec
93 msec
Memory interlock
Software execution*
Available for processing
0.97%
2.69%
96.32%
0.54%
0.65%
98.81%
/
*Includes execution of instruction and all necessary
control functions, such as handling the interrupt
generated upon successful completion of an operation .
. 14
Availability: . . . . . . . immediate •
. 15
First Delivery: ....• 2nd quarter, 1964.
.16
Reserved Storage: .•. none.
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Storage Medium: ..•. drums.
. 22
Physical Dimensions
.222 Drum Diameter: • . . • . . . .
Length: • . . • . . . . • .
Number on shaft: ...
Number per
Storage Unit: . . . .
Recording Permanence
. 241 Data erasable by
instructions: . . . . . . yes.
. 242 Data regenerated
constantly: . . . . . • . no .
. 243 Data volatile: ••••.. no.
. 244 Data permanent:. . . . . no .
. 245 Storage changeable: .. no.
Data Volume per Band of 1 Track
10,752.
10,752.
2,150.
64 (168 characters each).
1 (48 bits).
Bands per Physical Unit
Fastrand I: . . . . . . . . 3,072 per drum.
6, 144 per Storage Unit.
Fastrand II: . . . . . . . . 6, 144 per drum.
12,288 per Storage Unit.
9/64
Access Techniques
.281 Recording method: ... 64 moving heads per
Storage Unit, connected
to a common positioning
mechanism .
Description of stage
Possible starting stage
Move heads to specified position: . . . . . . when a different position
is selected •
2.
.24
.26
.28
.283 Type of access -
Storage Phenomenon: . magnetization.
Characters: . • . . . . .
Digits: •.•..•...•
Instructions: .••.•.•
Sectors: .•.•.•...•
Address tags: . . . . . .
Interleaving Levels: .. no interleaving .
23.8 inches.
61.2 inches, effective.
1.
. 23
.25
. 27
Wait for specified
sector: • . . • . . . . . when previously selected
position is used •
Read or write: . . . • . . when rotational delay is
used.
.29
Potential Transfer Rates
. 291 Peak bit rates Cycling rates: . . . . .
Track/head speed: ..
Bits/inch/track: ...
Bit rate per track: ..
870 rpm.
1,086 inches/sec.
1,000.
1,086,000 bits/sec/track.
.292 Peak data rates Unit of data: . . . • . . character.
Conversion factor: .. 6 data bits plus parity
bit per character.
Gain factor: . . . . . . 1 track per band.
Data rateWithin a sector: ... 185,000 char/sec.
Within a track: .•.. 153,846 char/sec.
INTERNAL STORAGE: FASTRAND I AND II
§
777:043.300
043.
• 32
.3
DATA CAPACITY
.31
Module and System Sizes
FAST RAND I
Minimum
Storage
Maximum per
Subsystem
Maximum Storage
(Model IV)
(Model ill)
Subsystems:
Storage Units:
Drums:
Characters:
Instructions:
Sectors:
1
1
2
66,050,288
13,210,057
393,216
1
8
16
528 x 106
105 x 106
3,145,728
3
24
48
1,585 x 106
317 x 106
9,437,184
FASTRAND II
Minimum
Storage
Maximum per
Subs:ystem
Maximum Storage
{Model ill)
{Model IV)
Subsystems:
Storage Units:
Drums:
Characters:
Instructions:
Sectors:
1
1
2
132,100,576
26,420,114
786,432
1
8
16
1,056 x 106
210 x 106
6,291,456
3
24
48
3,170 x 106
634 x 106
18,874,368
Rules for Combining
Modules: ••.•••.• 1 to 8 Storage Units
per Fastrand Subsystem;
1 to 3 subsystems per
UNIVAC 1050 Model III
system; 1 to 8 subsystems
per UNIVAC 1050 Model
IV system.
.4
CONTROLLER
• 41
Identity:.......... Fastrand Control and
Synchronizer, Type
5002-02.
• 42
Connection to System
.421 On-line: • • . . . . . • . . 1 to 3 controllers per
Model III system; 1 to 8
controllers per Model IV
system; 1 per Fastrand
Subsystem.
• 422 Off-line: . . . . . • . • • • none.
.43
Connection to Device
.431 Devices per
controller: ••• . • • . 1 to 8 Fastrand Storage
Units.
• 432 Restrictions: •••.••. none.
.44
Data Transfer Control
. . . . 1 to N characters, beginning with the first
charader of a drum
sector, where N is
limited only by core
storage capacity .
• 442 Input-output area: •.. core storage.
.443 Input-output area
access: ••.••..•.• each character.
• 444 Input-output area
lockout: . . • . . • • . . none.
8
64
128
4,227 x 106
845 x 10 6
25,165,784
8
64
128
8,454x 106
1,690x 106
50,331,568
· 445 Synchronization: ••.. automatic .
.447 Table control: .•.•.• none.
.5
ACCESS TIMING
.51
Arrangement of Heads
• 511 Number of stacks Stacks per Fastrand
Subsystem: . . . . • .
Stacks per storage
unit: ••••.•...•
Stacks per drum: ...
Stacks per yoke: ..•
Yokes per storage
unit: . . . . . . . . . .
.512 Stack movement: •••.
.513 Stacks that can
access any
particular
location: .•••....
.514 Accessible locations
By single stack With no movement: .
With all movement:.
By all stacks With no movement: .
• 441 Size of load: '"
· 52
64 to 512.
64.
32.
64.
1.
all 64 stacks in a Storage
Unit move in unison, to
1 of 96 or 192 discrete
positions, depending on
the type .
1.
64 sectors.
6, 144 or 12,288 sectors .
4,096 sectors per storage
unit .
up to 32,768 sectors per
subsystem.
Simultaneous
Operations: . • . . • . . maximum of 1 data
transfer or search
operation per Fastrand
Subsystem, and 1 headpositioning operation
per Fastrand Storage
Unit.
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
9/64
777:043.530
UNIVAC 1050
§ 043.
.53
Access Time Parameters and Variations
.532 Variation in access time
~
Variation, j.!sec
Activate addressing
circuits: . . . • • . . . . . . • 5,000*
Position heads: ••••••••. 0 or 30,000 to 86,000
Wait for specified sector:... 0 to 69,000
Read or write: •..••.•••. see Para. .292
Total: •.••.••.•••.••.. 5,000 to 155,000
Average, j.!sec
*
58,000.
35,000.
93,000.
*Usually overlapped with other timing factors •
.6
CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: ••••••• none.
.8
ERRORS! CHECKS,AND ACTION
Error
.7
PERFORMANCE
• 72
Transfer Load Size
With core storage: . • • 1 to N characters, beginning with the first
character of a drum
sector, where N is
limited only by core
storage capacity.
• 73
Effective Transfer Rate
With core storage Within a sector: . . . . 185,00 char/sec.
Within a track: •... 153,846 char/sec.
Invalid address:
Invalid function
code:
Recording of data:
Recovery of data:
Timing conflicts:
Physical record
missing:
Reference to
locked area:
Sector length
error:
End of position
reached:
Check or
Interlock
check
Action
check
record parity
bit.
parity bit and
phase
monitoring
check
interrupt .
interrupt.
check
interrupt.
check
interrupt •
check
interrupt.
check
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
Note: The type of error is indicated by the
settings of particular testable indicators.
9/64
777:051.100
UNIVAC 1050
Centra I Processor
Model III
CENTRAL PROCESSOR - MODEL III
§
051.
. 12
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: .
.12
Description:
UNIV AC 1050 Model III
Processor.
The Model III Central Processo-r is primarily
character oriented, with some capabilities for
processing pure binary operands. Core storage
(from 4,096 to 32,767 character positions, in
modules of 4, 096 positions) is completely character addressable, with addressing in pure binary
form rather than decimal. It features fixed-point
decimal arithmetic (multiply-divide feature optional),
automatic translation of 6-bit codes, good editing
facilities, and three levels of interrupts.
The first 256 positions of core storage are divided
into 64 fields of 4 characters each, called "tetrads",
all of which are addressable either by tetrad or by
character. Contained in this area are the two addressable arithmetic registers (16 characters each)
and the seven addressable index registers (the 15
low-order bits of tetrads 9-15). Address indexing
is specified in a three-bit field within the instruction. There is no provision for indirect addressing.
A 30-bit (5-character), single-address instruction
format is used. The operation code and detail
field of the instruction specify the location of the
second field if any is required by the instruction.
In the binary mode, operand lengths are specified
in the instruction. In the decimal mode, the length
of one operand is specified in the instruction, and
the other by a sentinel in the arithmetic register.
This sentinel (the character "&") is automatically
inserted immediately to the left of the operand when
an arithmetic register is loaded in the decimal
mode. This sentinel is the only "word-mark"
device used in the 1050, and it is not transmitted
when storing the contents of one of the arithmetic
registers. If a full 16-character operand is used
in the arithmetic register, the sentinel is implied;
conversely, if the sentinel does not appear, a full
16-character operand is implied in decimal
operations.
Facilities for the use of literals (operands contained
in the instruction rather than in storage) include
the binary addition of one character to any location,
storage of one character, comparison of one character, testing of selected bits of a character
(logical compare), storing of a 15-bit field in the
low-order positions of a tetrad (which can be an
index register), and the very useful ability to increment or decrement an index register or any
other tetrad by a 15-bit literal field. In addition,
one-character Boolean operations (inclusive OR
and logical AND) are provided, in which one operand
must be a literal.
Description (Contd.)
The incorporation of two additional instructions to
the operations permits limited handling of data on
the bit level. These are the two "bit shift"
instructions:
(1)
Bit Shift- shift left 1 to 7 bit positions and
fill with zeros on the right; and
(2)
Bit Circulate - shift left 1 to 7 bit positions,
bringing the high-order bits shifted out
around to the low-order positions.
The Bit Circulate instruction effectively provides the
ability to shift right. Both instructions deal with
an integral number of· characters (1 to 4).
Two modes of comparison are provided: decimal and
binary. The decimal mode compares two fields
algebraically, ignoring zone bits except for the
sign bit in the least significant character. A bit-bybit comparison of two equal-length operands is made
in the binary mode. The results of both are stored
in four program-testable indicators (high, low,
equal, unequal).
A sophisticated system of testable indicators is
provided, permitting, for one thing, the use of
comparison results (high, low, equal, unequal)
and arithmetic results (zero result, negative decimal result, decimal overflow, binary overflow)
for program control. Utilization of the interrupt
system for program control and input-output control is also facilitated by the system of indicators.
Program interrupts are signals to the Central
Processor generated upon the recognition of a
condition that requires immediate attention. They
result from two general types of occurrences:
•
Error, fault, or emergency condition in either
the Central Processor or in an I/O device;
•
Successful completion of an I/O function or,
in some cases, readiness of an I/o device
to accept an I/o command.
The interrupt signals are divided into a hierarchy of
three classes, listed in descending priority:
•
Class I - internal parity error;
•
Class II - decimal overflow operator request,
or memory overload anticipated;
•
Class III -
I/o condition.
When servicing an interrupt, additional interrupt
signals of the same or a lower class are not accepted, but are stored in testable indicators for
future action. In addition to this automatic inhibit,
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Infa, Inc.
9/64
777:051:120
§
051.
.12
UNIVAC 1050
.12
The optional Multiply-Divide Feature provides
fixed-point decimal multiply and divide hardware.
Subroutines will be provided for installations not
electing this option. No floating-point hardware
is available for the UNIVAC 1050, but routines
will be provided to accomplish floating-point
operations with the FORTRAN compiler.
Descriptiop. (Contd.)
Class II and Class III interrupts may be inhibited
or enabled at will by the program, and the Class
II interrupt may be manually inhibited by means
of a console switch.
Associated with Class I interrupts, Class II interrupts, and each I/O channel is a group of 8 consecutive character positions (an Interrupt Control
Register) through which communication with the
interrupt routines is maintained. When an interrupt occurs and is not inhibited, the contents of the
control counter are stored in one part of the appropriate Interrupt Control Register, and the
starting address, located in another part of the
Interrupt Control Register, is read into the control counter. At the end of the service routine,
control can be returned to the interrupted program
by utilizing the previously stored control counter
information.
A wide range of editing facilities is provided as
standard equipment. For character insertion, the
field to be edited is loaded into Arithmetic
Register 1, and the characters are inserted according to the contents of a mask which has been
previously loaded into Arithmetic Register 2. Any
characters may be inserted, subject to one restriction: the final edited field must contain no
more than 16 characters. Zero suppression,
asterisk fill, or floating dollar sign operations may
be carried out on a field anywhere in core storage
under the same restriction that the field operated
on must contain 16 or fewer characters.
The Translate instruction enables the Processor to
translate any 6-bit code to any other 6-bit code.
This is necessary on 90-column card systems
since 90-column cards are read and punched without automatic translation between the Processor
XS-3 code and the card code. Automatic translation
is available, at the option of the programmer, for
80-column cards. Fields of up to 64 characters
can be translated with a single instruction, at a cost
of 13.5 microseconds per character plus an overhead of 36 microseconds per instruction. Up to 63
programmer-constructed translating codes of 64
characters each can be stored at one time.
Addition and subtraction are provided in both the
decimal and binary modes. In the decimal mode,
there are the following considerations:
Q
One operand is in the arithmetic register;
one is in core storage; the result may be
programmed to appear in either location.
•
The length of the operand in core storage
is specified in the instruction.
•
The length of the operand in the arithmetic
register is specified by the sentinel.
•
•
•
There are eight input-output data channels available;
three are standard and five are optional. Five of the
channels have fixed assignments:
Except for the sign bit in the least significant
character, the zone bits are ignored and do
not appear in the result.
Channel 0 - Printer
Channel 1 - Card Reader
A decimal overflow condition (carry beyond
the most significant digit of the result field)
terminates the instruction, sets a testable
indicator, and initiates a Class II interrupt.
Channel 2 - Card Punch
Channel 4 - Tape Read
Channel 5 - Tape Write.
The four characters (blank, +, @ , F) having
the internal form XXOOOO will be converted
to decimal zeros (000011) before the operation.
Any other peripheral unit can be connected to any
of the remaining'three channels, with the provision
that two data channels are required for one tape
synchronizer. Detailed consideration is given to
the handling of data channels and input-output
operations in the section on Simultaneous Operations
(777:111).
Binary arithmetic operations facilitate address
modification. Use of these facilities for general
processing of binary operands is limited by the
following considerations:
9/64
•
No algebraic signs are associated with either
operand.
•
Binary overflow terminates the instruction and
sets a testable indicator but does not initiate
any interrupt.
Description (Contd.)
A limited capability for multi running is provided,
using the interrupt system discussed previously.
The Coordinator executive routine (discussed in
Operating Environment, Section 777:191) handles
all the details involved when running two programs
concurrently.
.14
First Delivery: . . . . . 1963.
CENTRAL PROCESSOR - MODEL III
§
777:051.200
051.
.2
PROCESSING FACILITIES
.. 21
Operations and Operands
Operation and
Variation
· 211 Fixed point Add-subtract:
Multiply Short:
Long:
Divide No remainder:
Remainder:
Provision
Radix
Size
automatic
decimal or
binary
16 characters.
none.
subroutine
decimal
automatic (with decimal
MultiplyDivide feature)
none.
subroutine
decimal
automatic (with decimal
MultiplyDivide feature)
Subroutine only decimal
16 character product.
16 character product.
?
8 character quotient.
?
· 212 Floating point:
· 213 BooleanAND:
automatic
binary
1 character.
Inclusive OR:
automatic
1 character.
binary
Exclusive OR:
none.
.214 Comparison:
sets testable indicators for high, low, equal, unequal.
Numbers:
automatic
1 to 16 characters.
Absolute:
none.
Letters:
automatic
1 to 16 characters.
Mixed:
automatic
1 to 16 characters.
Collating sequence: 0-9, A-Z, with special characters interspersed;
see Data Code Table, Section 777:141.
.215 Code translation:
.216 Radix conversion:
· 217 Edit format
Alter size:
Suppress zero:
Round off:
Insert point:
Insert spaces:
Insert any character:
Float $:
Protection:
· 218 Table look-up:.
· 219 OthersBranch on Manual
Sense Switches:
Branch on Internal
Sense Switches:
Bit Shift:
Provision
From
To
Size
automatic (using
code table constructed by programmer)
none.
any code
any code
1 to 64 characters.
Provision
Comment
automatic
expand but
not contract
automatic
none
automatic
automatic
Size
the edited field may
not exceed 16 characters after insertions.
automatic
automatic
automatic
none; however, the F astrand unit provides search
capabilities; see Section
777 :042.
automatic
8 possible settings.
automatic
program set; 8 possible
settings.
1 to 4 characters are
shifted 1 to 7 bit
positions, to left only.
automatic
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
9/64
UNIVAC 1050
777:051.220
§
051.
· 22
.233 Instruction parts (Contd.)
Special Cases of Operands
· 221 Negative numbers: ... absolute value, with a B
zone bit in the least
significant character.
.222 Zero: . . . . . . . . . . . . positive and negative decimal
zeros and blanks give the
same results in decimal
arithmetic operations,
but are unequal in comparisons.
· 223 Operand size
for most instructions there
determination: ..
is a counter in the instruction. Some instructions
imply one character;
others, four characters.
· 23 Instruction Formats
• 231 Instruction structure: . five characters (30 bits).
. 232 Instruction layout
(see tables below)
. 233 Instruction parts Name
Purpose
OP:.
operation code.
IR: . . . . . . . .
specifies which index
register is to be used;
if no indexing is desired,
this field should be binary
zeros.
M: • • . . . . . . . . . . . . specifies address of operand
or field.
Detail: . . . . . . . . . . . may specify operand length,
tetrad' number, a comparison indicator, or
number of bits, depending
upon the particular
instruction.
I/O: . . . .
always octal 40.
Channel:.
channel assignment for I/O
device referenced in the
Function part of the
instruction.
Unit: . . . . . . . . . . . . specifies which of several
of the same type I/O
devices is to be used.
Function: . . . . . . . . . specifies which I/O operation is to be performed,
whether or not the central
processor is to be locked
out during the operation,
whether or not to inhibit
normal interrupts; or can
cause certain indicators
to be tested or reset.
Name
Purpose
D: . . .
specifies which indicator
or set of indicators is to
be tested or reset when
the corresponding Function is given; or controls
certain actions such as
automatic translate on
80-column system card
devices, stacker selection
(card punch) , half-line
print (printer), advance
base address, etc.
.234 Basic address
1 + o.
structure: . . . . .
.235 Literals Arithmetic: . . . . . . . 1 character (binary addition
only) .
1 character.
Comparison: ..
Store: . . . . . .
1 character.
Store binary: ..
15 bits (low-order bits
in one of the tetrads).
Boolean operations: . 1 character.
Incrementing or decrementing index
registers: . . . . .
15 bits.
.236 Directly addressed
operands .2361 Internal storage
type: . . . . . . . .
core.
Minimum size: ..
1 character.
Maximum size: . . . . 16 characters.
Volume accessible: . total capacity.
.237 Address indexing · 2371 Number of methods:. 1.
.2372 Name: . . . . . . . . . indexing.
.2373 Indexing rule: . . . . . addition; formation of an
address beyond the size
of store causes a Class I
interrupt to be generated.
. 2374 Index specification: .. bits 25 to 23 in the instruction .
• 2375 Number of potential
indexers: . . . . . . . 7.
.2376 Addresses which can
be indexed: . . . . . . all.
· 2377 Cumulative indexing:. none.
.2378 Combined index and
step: . . . . . . . . . . none.
.238 Indirect addressing: .. none.
.239 Stepping.2391 Specification of
increment: ... .
in stepping instruction.
. 2392 Increment sign: ... . always negative.
. 2393 Size of increment: .. always 1.
. 2394 Endvalue: . • . . . . . . zero.
.2395 Combined step and
test: . . . . . . . . . . . yes .
. 232 Instruction layout General instruction:
Part:
OP
IR
M
Detail
Size (bits):
5
3
16
6
External Function (input-output) instruction:
Part:
Size (bits):
9/64
I/O
Channel
5
3
Unit Function
4
6
D
12
777:051.240
CENTRAL PROCESSOR - MODEL III
§ 05l.
. 24 Special Processor Storage
. 241 Category of storage: ..
Number of locations:..
Size in bits: .. .
Program usage: . . . . .
. 333 Operator control:.
control counter .
1.
16.
holds address of next
instruction.
.3
SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES
.31
Instruction Sequencing
.311 Number of sequence
control facilities: . . . 1.
.312 Arrangement: . . . . . . in processor.
. 314 Special sub-sequence
counters: . . . . . • . . the jump loop instruction
will cause a loop to be
repeated 1 to 62 times
based on the value of a
literal in the instruction.
The literal is automatically
decremented by 1 for each
repeat, stopping when the
value becomes zero.
. 315 Sequence control step
size: . . . . . . . . . . . 1 instruction (5 characters).
. 32 Look-Ahead: . . . . . . . none.
. 33
Interruption
. 331 Possible causes Class (in decreasing
priority)
Possible
causes
internal parity errors,
except those occurring
while I/o devices are
accessing main store.
II: . . . . . . . . . . . . . decimal overflow, operator
request (manual), or
memory overload anticipated.
III: . . . . . . . . . . . . interrupts generated by the
synchronizers associated
with the I/o devices upon
the occurrence of successful completion, detection of an error or
fault condition, issuance
of an I/O instruction to a
"busy" device, or by a
"demand" device (one which
generates an interrupt at
fixed time intervals
whether or not an instruction has been issued to it).
.332 Control by routineIndividual control: . each I/O device "successful
completion" interrupt
individually, all Class III
interrupts as a group,
decimal overflow interrupts, and operator request interrupts can be
inhibited or enabled at
will by the program.
Class I, Class II, or
Class III automatic inhibits
can be program enabled.
set an indicator bit.
Method: ...
Restriction:
none.
I: . . . . . . . . . . . .
.334 Interruption conditions: . . . . . . .
manual interrupt request is
possible .
(1) current instruction completed (except Class I).
(2) not in the process of
transferring control to
a routine because of a
prior interrupt request .
(3) no higher-priority interrupt requests outstanding. (If a Class I interrupt occurs while processing a prior Class I
interrupt, the central
processor stalls) .
.335 Interruption process Disabling
interruption: . . . . . automatically inhibits samepriority and lower-priority
interrupt requests.
control counter is stored
Registers saved:
automatically.
automatic branch to address
Destination: ...
contained in the location
appropriate to the interrupt
cause .
.336 Control methods COORDINATOR or own
Determine cause:.
coding, utilizing testable
indicators .
Enable interruption: . own coding; reset interrupt
indicator.
limited capability, using
.34 Mul tirunning:
automatic priority interrupt feature described
above.
.35 Multi-seguencing: ... none.
.4
PROCESSOR SPEEDS
D = operand length in decimal digits.
C = operand length in characters.
.41
Instruction Times in Microseconds
.411 Fixed point
Add-subtract Decimal add to or
subtract from
accumulator: . . . .
Decimal add to or
subtract from
memory: . . . . .
Binary add to or
subtract from
accumulator: .
Multiply
(subroutine): .
49.5 + 27D
49.5 + 13. 5D
27+13.5C
approximately 3500 (3-digit
by 4-digit).
Multiply (optional
hardware): . . . . 33.75D 2 + 63,5D + 99
Multiply cumulatively
(optional
hardware): . . .
33. 75D2 + 63. 5D + 27
Divide (optional
hardware):
74.25D 2 + 141.75 + 49.5
.412 Floating point: . . . . . . subroutine timings not
available to date.
.413 Additional allowance for Indexing: . . . . . .. 13.5
Re-complementing:
18D (included in above
times) .
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
9/64
777:051.414
§
UNIVAC 1050
051.
.414 Control
Compare Decimal: ; . . . . . . 36 + 13.5D (36 if signs are
opposite).
Binary: . . . . . . . . 27 + 13. 5C
Branch: . . . . . . . . . 31. 5
.415 Counter controlStep and test: . . . . . 40.5
.416 Edit: . . . . . . . . . . . . 36+ 13.5C + 9E, where
E = number of characters
inserted .
. 417 Translate: . . . . . . . . 36 + 13.5C
.418 Shift left: . . . . . . . . . 40.5 + B(9 + 18C), where
B = number of bit positions
shifted .
. 42
Processor Performance in Microseconds
.421 For random addresses -
c = a + b:
b = a + b:
Sum N items:
c = ab (optional
hardware):
c = alb (optional
hardware):
.422 For arrays of data -
Binary
Decimal
108 + 40. 5C
54+22.5C
(54 + 22. 5C)N
112.5 + 45D
85.5 + 36D
(49.5 + 27D)N
33.75D2 + 99. 5D + 225
74. 25D2 + 168. 75D + 212.5
Binary
ci = ai + b j :
bj = ai + bj:
Sum N items:
c = c + aibj
(optional
hardware):
.423 Branch based on comparison Numeric data: . . . . 319.5 + 13. 5D
Alphabetic data: . . . . 310.5 + 13 ..5C
.424 SwitchingUnchecked: . . . . . . . 373.5
Checked: . . . . . . . . 535.5
List search: . . . . . . 135 + 189N
.425 Format control, per character
Unpack 90-column (translation): . . . . . . . . 14.
80-column: . . . . . . O.
Compose: . . . . . . . . 27.
. 426 Table look-up, per comparison For a match: . . . . . . 166.5+ 13. 5C
For least or greatest: 247.5 + 40. 5C
For interpolation
point: . . . . . . . . . 166.5+ 13. 5C
Decimal
324 + 40. 5C
315 + 45D
274.5 + 36D
243 + 22. 5C
(175.5 + 22.5C)N (157.5 + 27D)N
33. 75D 2 + 90.5D + 315
.427 Bit indicators Set bit in separate
location: . . . . . . .
Set bit in pattern: . . .
Test bit in separate
location: . . . . . . .
Test bit in pattern: ..
40.5
40.5
72.0
72. 0
.428 MovingLarge block, using
block transfer
instruction:. . . . . . 216 + 9C (up to 1024
characters) .
Small block, using
arithmetic register
as intermediate store: 54 + 18C (up to 16 characters) .
/
9/64
777:051.500
CENTRAL PROCESSOR - MODEL III
§ 051.
.5
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Error
Check or Interlock
Action
Overflow:*
check
Decimal overflow:*
check
set program-testable
indicator.
set program-testable
indicator and generate
a Class II interrupt
unless inhibited.
Zero divisor:
causes decimal
overflow.
none.
none.
none.
check
Invalid data:
Invalid operation:
Arithmetic error:
Invalid address:
Receipt of data from
parity check
I/O device:
Dispatch of data
to I/O device:
Accessing or transferring data within core storage:
Attempt to exceed
basic transfer
rate of memory:
cause a Class I interrupt
to be generated.
set program-testable
indicator and cause
a Class III interrupt
if not inhibited.
parity check
set program-testable
indicator and cause a
Class III interrupt if
not inhibited.
parity check
cause a Class I interrupt.
check
cause a Class II interrupt.
* Overflow can occur due to the binary add or subtract or the optional
multiply instruction. Decimal overflow can occur due to the decimal
add or subtract or the optional cumulative multiply or divide instruction.
©1 964 Auerbach Corporation and Infa,lnc.
9/64
777 :052.100
UNIVAC 1050
Central Processor
Model IV
CENTRAL PROCESSOR - MODEL IV
El 052.
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
. 12
Description
UNIVAC 1050 Model IV
Processor.
All the information in Section 777:051 on the Model
III Processor applies to the Model IV Processor
as well, except that:
•
The Model IV is appreciably faster (see
PROCESSOR SPEEDS, below).
•
All eight data channels are optional, with
no fixed assignments, although the standard
software may fix some assignments.
•
The basic size of core storage is 8,192
characters, expandable to 65,536 characters in modules of 8,192 characters.
All programs coded for the Model III can be run
on the Model IV. If the storage limits and fixed
assignment of data channels of a system using
the Model III Central Processor are taken into
consideration when programming, programs
written for the Model IV can also be run on the
Model III without problems.
. 413 Additional allowance
for indexing: ..
. 4.
.414 Control
Compare Decimal: ..
14 + 3D
Binary: .. .
10 + 3D
12
Branch: . . . .
.415 Counter control Step and test: ..
16
.416 Edit: . . . . . . . . .
14 + 6(C + E), where E =
number of characters
inserted.
. 417 Translate:
12 + 6C .
.418 Shift left: ..
16 + B(6 + 4C), where B =
number of bit positions
shifted.
.42 Processor Performance in Microseconds
.421 For random addresses Binary
c = a + b:
b = a + b:
Sum N items:
c = ab (optional
hardware):
c = alb (optional
hardware):
40 + 9C
20 + 5C
(20 + 5C)N
Decimal
44 + 10D
34 + 8D
(20 + 6D)N
15D2 + 26D + 58
15D2 + 60D + 78
.422 For arrays of data .14
First Delivery: . . . . . December 1965.
.2
PROCESSING FACILITIES
ci = a i + bj:
Same as for the 1050 Model III Processor (see
Paragraph 777: 051.2 in the preceding section).
.3
SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES
Same as for the 1050 Model III Processor (see
Paragraph 777:051. 3 in the preceding section).
.4
PROCESSOR SPEEDS
D = operand length in decimal digits.
C = operand length in characters.
.41
Instruction Times in Microseconds
.411 Fixed point
Add- subtract Decimal add to or
subtract from
accumulator: . . . . 20 + 6D
Decimal add to or
subtract from
memory: .. "
. 20 + 3D
Binary add to or
subtract from
accumulator:. .
10 + 3C
Multiply (optional
hardware): . . . . . 15D 2 + 18D + 26
Multiply cumulatively
(optional hardware)15D2 + 54D + 16
.412 Floating point: . . . . . . subroutine times are not
available to date.
b j = ai + br
SUm N items:
=c+aib '
(optional bardware):
Binary
Decimal
113 + 9C
85 + 5C
(63 + 5C)N
113 + 10D
99 + 8D
(59 + 6D)N
15D2 + 24D + 113
.423 Branch based on comparison Numeric data: . .
108 + 3D
Alphabetic data:. .
104 + 3C
.424 SwitchfugUnchecked: . . . . .
130
Checked: . . . . . .
188
List search: . . . . . . 45 + 65N
.425 Format control, per character
Unpack 90-column (translation):. . .
6
80-column:. . . .. 0
Compose:. . . . . .. 7
.426 Table look-up, per comparison For a match:. . . .. 61 + 3C
For least or greatest:. . . . . . . . .
87 + 5C
For interpolation
point:. . . . . . . .
61 + 3C
.427 Bit indicators Set bit in separate
location:. . . . . .. 16
Set bit in pattern:. . . 16
Test bit in separate
location:. . . . . .. 28
Test bit in pattern:. 28
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
9/64
777:052.428
§ 052.
.428 MovingLarge blocks (up to
1024 characters): .. 74 + 2C
Small blocks (up to
16 characters,
using arithmetic
register as intermediate store): . . . 20 + 4C
UNIVAC 1050
.5
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Same as the 1050 Model III Processor (see Paragraph 777:051. 5 in the preceding section).
,/
9/64
777:061.100
UNIVAC 1050
Console
CONSOLE
§
061.
.1
.11
.12
. 13
.13
Description (Contd.)
Included in the Console are switches and lights that
enable an operator to:
GENERAL
Identity:
Consoles: Integrated and
F ree- Standing.
Associated Units: ... a Console Typewriter is
currently available only
on UN IV AC 1050 RealTime Systems (1050-R).
•
Turn the power supply on or off.
•
Clear all indicators.
•
Load an initial block of information into
core storage from the card reader or a
magnetic tape unit.
o
Start the execution of a stored program
at any particular location.
•
Stop the execution of a program.
•
Display or alter the instruction counter
setting.
Description
o Display or alter the contents of the instruction
register.
The UNIVAC 1050 control panel may be mounted
either directly on the front of the Central Processor
cabinet - the Integrated Console - or on a separate L-shaped table - the Free-Standing Console.
Both units have the same switches and lights. A
drop shelf, 18 inches by 26 inches, is provided
with the Integrated Console, conveniently located
about 35 inches above the floor. The Free-Standing
Console table has sufficient room for the Console
Typewriter (currently used ih Real-Time systems
only), as shown in the photograph below.
•
Interrogate and load core storage locations.
•
Execute single instructions.
I)
Initiate an Operator Request interrupt.
GI
Trace the address of a particular operation
code or instruction.
•
Halt the central processor when the data in
a particular storage location is altered (of
great value when debugging a program).
l.
...
-.'.
UNIV AC 1050 FREE-STANDING CONSOLE
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
9/64
777:071.100
UNIVAC 1050
Input-Output
Card Readers
INPUT-OUTPUT: CARD READERS
§ 071.
.12
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: .
.12
Description
.Card Readers.
Type 0706-01 - 600 cpm,
80-column.
Type 0706-05 - 600 cpm,
90-column.
Type 0706-00 - 800/900
cpm, 80-column.
Type 0706-04 - 800/900
cpm, 90-column.
Each of the two basic card readers for the UNIVAC
1050 is available in either an 80-column or 90column version. Reading is performed column
by column, so no full-card buffer is required.
Types 0706-01 and 0706-05 will read at a maximum
rate of 600 cards per minute. Types 0706-00
and 0706-04 will read complete cards at a maximum
rate of 800 cards per minute or the first 72 columns
of each card at a maximum rate of 900 cards per
minute.
Some of the significant characteristics of these
readers are:
•
A 2, 500-card input hopper;
•
A 2, 500-card output stacker;
•
Optional stub-card feed;
•
Photodiode sensing with automatic checking of
the sensing elements before each card is read;
•
Infinite clutch;
•
Binary image reading;
•
Automatic translation from Hollerith to
internal code at the option of the programmer
(80-column models only);
Description (Contd.)
The column binary format for the 80-column card
reader is two characters per column, with the
more significant character at the top of the card.
This format is compatible with the column binary
card punch instructions. The 90-column binary
format is the standard Remington Rand card
format. Input areas of 80, 90, or 160 consecutive
characters, depending upon the format, may be
located anywhere in core storage, but the address
of the storage location for the character from the
first card column must be a multiple of 64. The
base address of the input area must be stored in
the appropriate I/O Channel Register prior to the
initiation of a read instruction and is automatically
incremented for each character transmitted. The
base address can be automatically reset or advanced to the next input area by the read instruction.
(Channel 1 is permanently assigned to the card
reader in the Model III Central Processor, but
there is no fixed channel assignment in the Model
IV Central Processor.) The effective rate of
reaGing will be governed by such considerations
as:
o
The number of input areas set up;
The amount of computation necessary before
a card is to be read;
The operation of other peripheral subsystems
(see Sections 777: 111 and 777: 112, Simultaneous
Operations: Model III and Model IV).
The ability to initiate a card read cycle at any time
(due to the infinite clutch) and the relatively small
demands made on the central processor by the
reader should permit reading speeds approaching
the maximum rate to be obtained most of the time.
•
Generation of an interrupt signal upon successful
completion of an operation (can be program inhibited), an error condition, or an off-normal
condition;
The Model III Central Processor can be connected
to a maximum of four card readers, while the
Model IV can handle up to eight. Separate synchronizers (RPQ for the Model III) are required
for each unit after the first, and all units must
have the exclusive use of an input-output channel.
•
Setting of testable indicators upon detection of
-registration check error, parity error, sensing
element error, unit busy, and unit not ready
(off-normal) conditions.
The amount of processing time available for each
card cycle is shown in Table 1. Simultaneity
is discussed in Sections 777 :111 and 777 :112,
Simul taneous Operations.
© 1 964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
9/64
7n:071.120
UNIVAC 1050
II 071.
TABLE I: CARD READER TIMING DATA
Reader speed
Processor model
Card cycle time
Memory interlock I/O
Software execution**
Time available for processing
*
**
9/64
900 cpm*
600 cpm
Model III
ModellY
Model III
Model IV
66 msec
9%
3%
88%
66 msec
0.24%
0.79%
98.97%
100 msec
6%
2%
92%
100 msec
0.16%
0.52%
99.32%
Based on reading 72 columns per card; speed is 800 cpm when reading full cards.
Includes execution of read instruction and all necessary control functions, such as
handling the interrupt generated upon successful completion of an operation.
777:072.100
UNIVAC 1050
Input-Output
Card Punches
INPUT -OUTPUT: CARD PUNCHES
.12
§ 072.
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: .
. 12
Card Punches.
Type 0600-00 SO-column.
Type 0600-01 90-column.
Type 0600-12 SO-column.
Type 0600-13 90-column.
300 cpm,
300 cpm,
200 cpm,
200 cpm,
Description
There are two basic card punches for the UNIVAC
1050. Each of these is available inather an SOcolumn or 90-column version. Types 0600-00
and 0600-vl operate at a maximum rate of 300
cards per minute, and Types 0600-12 and 0600-13
at a maximum rate of 200 cards per minute.
Some of the sigflificant characteristics of these
punches are:
o
A 1, OOO-card input hopper;
Description (Contd.)
Different synchronizers are used for the card
punch depending upon whether it is connected to the
Model III or Model IV Central Processor. The
Card Punch Synchronizer used with Model III is
built directly into the Processor and accesses information in a manner typical of a row-by-rowdevice:
a separate core storage access is made to each
character of the output field for each row to be
punched. The synchronizer used with the Model IV
is not internal to the processor and contains a fullcard buffer, reducing the number of core storage
accesses to one per card column.
Punch output areas of 80, 90, or 160 consecutive
characters, depending upon the format, may be located anywhere in core storage, but the address
of the character to be punched in the first column
of the card must be a multiple of 64. The base
address of the output area must be stored in the
appropriate I/o Channel Register prior to the
execution of a punch instruction and is automatically
incremented for each character transmitted. The
base address can be automatically reset or advanced
to the next output area by the punch instruction.
(Channel 2 is permanently assigned to a card punch
unit in the Model III Central Processor, but there
is no fixed channel assignment in the Model IV
Central Processor.) The effective rate of punching
will be governed by such considerations as:
o Two S50-card output stackers;
o The number of punch output areas set up;
o Four card stations (2 wait stations followed
by the punch station and the Post Punch
Check station);
o
One clutch point;
•
Binary image punching;
o The amount of computation necessary before a
card is to be punched;
o The operation of other peripheral subsystems
(see Sections 777:111 and 777:112, Simultaneous
Operations: Model III and Model IV).
o Automatic translation from internal to
Hollerith code (SO-column models only);
"
Hole-count check;
•
Generation of an interrupt signal upon successful completion of an operation, (can be
program inhibited), an error condition, or
an off-normal condition;
•
Setting of testable indicators upon detection
of parity error, hole-count error, unit busy,
and unit not ready (off-normal) conditions.
Column binary format for the SO-column punch is
two characters per column, with the more significant character at the top of the card. This format
is compatible with the column binary card read
instructions. The 90-column binary format is the
standard Remington Rand card format.
Accuracy controls include a parity check on each
character transmitted to the synchronizer and a
hole-count check after punching each card. Any
failure of these checks causes the card to be automatically directed into Stacker 1 and causes an
immediate interrupt. Programming can also cause
cards to be deposited in Stacker 1 instead of the
normally-selected Stacker 2.
The Model III Central Processor can be connected
to a maximum of four card punch units, while the
Model IV can handle up to eight. Separate synchronizers (RPQ for the Model III) are required
for each unit after the first, and all units must have
the exclusive use of an input-output channel.
The amount of processing time available during
each 80-column punch cycle is shown in Table I,
below. Simultaneity is discussed in Sections
777:111 and 777:112, Simultaneous Operations.
© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
9/64
777-:072.120
UNIVAC 1050
§ 072.
TABLE I: CARD PUNCH TIMING DATA
Punch speed
200 cpm
Processor model
Model III
Model IV
Model III
Card cycle time
Memory interlock
Software Execution*
Time available for processing
200 msec
2.6 %
1. 0%
96.4%
200 msec
0.08%
0.26%
99.66%
300 msec
1.70%
0.67%
97.63%
*
9/64
300 cpm
Model IV
300 msec
0.05%
0.17%
99.78%
Includes execution of punch instruction and all necessary control functions, such as handling
the interrupt generated upon successful completion of an operation.
777:073.100
UNIVAC 1050
Input-Output
Punched Tape Subsystem
INPUT-OUTPUT: PUNCHED TAPE SUBSYSTEM
§ 073.
.12
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: .
. 12
Punched Paper Tape Subsystem (1000 or 300 chari
sec reader and 110 chari
sec punch) .
Description
A UNIVAC 1050 Punched Paper Tape Subsystem
consists of a separate reader and punch unit housed
in the same cabinet as their synchronizer. The two
available models use the same punch unit, which
is a modification of the Teletype BRPE-ll punch
and has a peak speed of 110 characters per second.
One model employs a modified Digitronics Model
B 3000 paper tape reader, while the other uses the
slower Digitronics Model 2500 reader.
Both readers can operate in the normal mode, and
the faster model can also operate in a non-stop
mode. In the normal mode, a character count in the
appropriate 1/0 Channel Register determines the
number of characters to be read; while in the nonstop mode, the~.mit reads continuously until the
supply of tape is exhausted or until a stop character is recognized. Error conditions occurring
while reading in the non-stop mode result in a loss
of data between the point of error and the stopping
point.
The faster reader has peak speeds of "1,000 characters per second or greater" in the non-stop mode
and either 500 or 250 characters per second in the
normal mode; spooling facilities are optional.
The slower reader has a peak speed of 300 characters per second and reads tape in strip form only;
no spooling facilities are offered.
From one to three Punched Paper Tape Subsystems
can be connected to the Model III Central Processor,
and up to eight Subsystems can be connected to the
Model IV. The synchronizer is connected to one
unassigned channel, permitting one input or output
operation to be executed at a time. Input and
output operations can be intermixed, and malfunctioning of either the reader or punch unit does not
affect the operation of the other.
The readers in both subsystems are quite similar
except for speeds. Some of their important
characteristics are:
•
Q
GI
Tension arm reservoirs for both feed and
take-up spools;
o
Reads standard 5-, 6-, 7 -, or 8- track tape
of 11/16-, 7/8-, or I-inch width;
o
Reads chad-type (fully punched) tape;
III
Reads either plastic (Mylar) or paper tapes
with less than 40% transmissivity;
•
Single-frame backspace;
•
Code translation must be programmed.
Some of the important characteristics of the punch
unit are:
III
110 chari sec peak punching speed;
o
Tape is advanced by sprocket drive;
o Feed spool is standard, permitting use of
8-inch or 10 1/2-inch NAB spools;
o Take-up spool is optional;
o Punches 5-, 6-, 7-, or 8-level codes in tapes
of 11/16-, 7/8-, or I-inch widths;
o No read-after-write check on punching accuracy.
Ill'
Produces chad-type (fully punched) tapes;
o All code translations must be programmed.
Block length is variable from 1 to 256 characters,
controlled by a character count in the appropriate
1/0 Channel Register.
Extensive switching capabilities (in the form of a
detachable plugboard) can provide the following
functions -
For the reader:
e
Define the number of tracks to be read.
Photo-electric reading;
o Tape is advanced by pinch rollers;
III
Description (Contd.)
() Permit the rearrangement of bits from their
tape-track positions to relatively different positions in the UNIVAC 1050 character codes.
Strip reading is standard;
Spooling option is available on the higherspeed model only, permitting use of 8inch or 10 1/2-inch NAB (National
Association of Broadcasters) spools;
o
Define the wired stop code for the reader.
o
For five-track tape, specify the interpretation
of space codes as they individually affect the
reader shift status.
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
9/64
UNIVAC 1050
777:073.120
§ 073.
.12
.12
positions on the tape), or two-character
mode for tape codes of more than six bits
(in which one tape code occupies two contiguous character positions in 1050 core
storage).
Description (Contd.)
•
Select whether odd parity, even parity,
or no parity checking will be employed.
•
Cause parity bits to be generated.
•
Enter the shift status into storage as a
character tl desired.
Description (Contd.)
Malfunctions and parity errors, either in data
sent to the synchronizer for punching or from the
tape when reading ( if the plugboard is appropriately wired), cause an interrupt and transfer of control to the location spectlied in the corresponding
I/O Channel Register. An interrupt signal can also
be generated, at the option of the programmer,
upon successful completion of an operation. Testable indicators are set for the various conditions,
enabling a recovery routine to determine the
cause of interruption and proceed accordingly.
For the punch:
•
Permit rearrangement of bits from their
positions in the UNIVAC 1050 character
to relatively different positions in tape
tracks.
•
Define the wired stop codes for the punch.
•
Cause odd or even parity bits to be generated
for punching (but not checked at the punch) .
Some typical times available for processing during
a punched tape read or write operation are shown
in Table 1.
•
Permit double-frame punching for fivetrack tape (in which one UNIVAC 1050
character occupies two contiguous row
Either Punched Paper Tape Subsystem can operate
simultaneously with any other peripheral subsystem.
TABLE 1: PUNCHED TAPE TIMING DATA
'"
Speed
Processor model
Block time*
Memory interlock
Software exe"cution**
Time available for
processing
*
**
9/64
Read: 1000 char/sec
Read: 500 chal"/sec
Punch: 110 char/sec
Model III
100 msec
0.45%
2.0%
Model IV
100 msec
0.2%
0.52%
Model III
200 msec
0.22%
1.0%
Model IV
200 msec
0.1%
0.26%
Model III
910 msec
0.05%
0.2%
Model IV
910 msec
0.02%
0.06%
97.55%
99.28%
98.78%
99.64%
99.75%
99.92%
Fo.r 100-character blocks.
Includes execution of paper tape instruction and all necessary control functions, such as handling
of the interrupt generated upon sucessful completion of an operation.
777:081.100
UNIVAC 1050
Input-Output
High Speed Printers
INPUT-OUTPUT: HIGH SPEED PRINTERS
§
081.
.12
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity:
.12
•
High Speed Printers .
Type 0755-02: 600/750
lines per minute.
Type 0755-01: 700/922lines
per minute.
The Type 0755-01 and Type 0755-02 printers are
identical except for speed. The maximum rates of
printing for the Type 0755- 01 printer are 750
single-spaced lines per minute when printing with
a restricted 42-character set (A through Z, 0
through 9, and 6 special characters) and 600
single-spaced lines per minute when using the full
63-character set. Under the same conditions the
m,;.ximum rates of printing for the Type 0755-02
printer are 922 and 700 lines per minute, respectively. The maximum rates attainable at larger
inter-line spacings are shown on the accompanying
graphs.
The Print Buffer is required with the Type 0755-01
700/922 lpm Printer and is optional with Type
0755- 02 Printer. The buffer is also required in
all 1050 systems except a system using the Model
III Central Processor and having only the lowspeed card reader, low-speed printer, and either
card punch as peripherals.
Printer output areas can be located anywhere in
core storage. The base address must be stored
in the appropriate I/O Channel Register and can be
automatically incremented by the print instruction.
(Channel 0 is permanently assigned to a printer
unit in the Model III Central Processor, but there
is no fixed channel assignment in the Model IV
Central Processor.) The effective rate of printing
will be governed by such considerations as:
Some of the pertinent features of both printers are:
Printing by an on-the-fly hammer stroke
which presses the ribbon and paper against
an engraved drum;
63 printable characters (see Table II below
for a listing);
13
128 print positions per line (132 print positions
optional);
o
Full-line or half-line printing (64 characters)
at the option of the programmer (half-line
printing reduces the memory interloclr time);
e
Vertical spacing of either 6 or 8 lines per inch
at the option of the operator;
•
Horizo~tal
•
Ability to handle'~aper st06k from 4 to/22 inches "
wide, up to card$tock thicjmess;:'
:
•
Ability to produc~ at least five, pa.:rhqJ;\
with 10+ to 12-poantpaper; e,"
(iop~es .
.,L",,'
'"
Parity Jhecking
L._~._ .~ .._.. ~
The amount of computation necessary before
a line is printed;
o
Whether or not the print buffer is incorporated;
G
The inter-line spacing;
•
Use of the full or a restricted character set.
I
:
•
o
The Model III Central Processor can be connected
to a maximum of four printers, while the Model
IV,can handle up to eight. Sepa:rate synchronizers
are, required for each printer after the first, and all
prfuters m~st have the ~xclusive use of an I/O
ch~nnel.
:
•
;
spacin,g of 10 characters per"' inch;
:
Generation of an interrupt signal upon successful completion of an operation (can be program
inhibited), an error condition, or an off-normal
condition.
Skipping is under program control, with the number
of lines to be skipped set by the program in the
appropriate I/O Channel Register. From 0 to 63
lines can be skipped with one instruction. Form
control must be accomplished by programming
since there is no vertical spacing control tape.
Skipping speed after the first line is 20 inches per
second (equivalent to 120 lines per second at 6
lines per inch).
Description
o
Description (Contd.)
The amount of processing,~i~e available during
print cycle is shQw"l,w,Wab~e I, below.
Simultaneity is discussed in Section 777:111,
Simultaneous Operations.
'
,~"
ea~h
.:: ',,'.I,'
of the data: received foi'pfinting; ,
.. _. ,•..... _.0. ____ '
i •..• _ . ,
'; .,\
",
~,
© 1964 Auerbac~:C~r~~~ation and Info, Inc.
UNIVAC 1050
777:081.120
§
OS1.
TABLE I; PRINTER TIMING DATA
Printer Speed
600/750 lpm
700/922 lpm
Processor Model
Model III,
No buffer
Model III
With buffer
Model IV
With buffer
Model III
With buffer
Model IV
With buffer
Print cycle*
Memory interlock
Software execution**
Time available for processing
SO msec.
33.5%
2.5%
64.0%
SO msec.
0.75%
2.5%
96.75%
SO msec.
0.33%
0.65%
99.02%
65 msec.
0.92%
3.08%
96.0%
65 msec.
0.4%
0.8%
9S.8%
*
**
Includes printing and spacing one 12S-character line, using the restricted 42-character set.
Includes execution of the print instruction and all necessary control functions, such as handling
the interrupt generated upon successful completion of an operation.
TABLE II: STANDARD CHARACTER SET
Type 0755-01 and 0755-02 High Speed Printers
Character
Close Bracket
¥inus or Hyphen
Zero
One
Two
Three
Four
Five
Six
Seven
Eight
Nine
Left Oblique
Semicolon
Open Bracket
Plus
Colon
Period
Question Mark
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Equal
Less
Number
9/64
Printed Symbol
1
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
\
;
[
+
:
?
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
=
<
#
Character
Printed Symbol
At the Rate of
Asterisk
Dollar Sign
Exclamation Mark
@
J
K
L
M
N
0
P
*
$
!
J
K
L
M
N
0
P
Q
Q
R
Percent
Apostrophe
Delta
Not Equal
Open Parenthesis
Comma
Ampersand
Slash
S
T
R
%
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
Close Parenthesis
Greater
Lozenge
,
6.
\
(
,
&
/
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
)
>
)::l
777:081.121
INPUT-OUTPUT: HIGH SPEED PRINTERS
!l 081.
EFFECTIVE SPEED:
TYPE 0755-01 HIGH SPEED PRINTER (700/922 LPM)
1,000
900
800
700
600
" "- "-
500
Printed
Lines
per
Minute
,
\.
\
r'\
'\.
400
300
......
V
~
~"""
Characte:~
" "-
46-Character Set (A-Z, 0-9,
plus 6 special characters)
-
Full
200
~-
"
~
100
o
1/2
1
2
3
4
5
Inter-Line Spacing in Inches
EFFECTIVE SPEED:
TYPE 0755-02 HIGH SPEED PRINTER (600/750 LPM)
1,000
900
800
700
"
600
'"
500
Printed Lines
per Minute
i'...
I'
400
" '\
.
<,
"" sir
I'----r\.
~
'"
........
--..........
300
...............
Full Character
200
100
o
112
1
46-Character Set (A-Z, 0-9,_
plus special characters)
2
~
3
~
~
4
5
Inter-Line Spacing in Inches
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
9/64
777:091.100
UNIVAC 1050
Input-Output
Uniservo III A
INPUT-OUTPUT: UNISERVO III A
. 12
II 091.
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
Description
Uniservo III A Magnetic
Tape Handler.
Type 0850-00.
The' Uniservo III A provides high speed magnetic
tape input-output for the UNN AC 1050 and compatibility between the 1050 and UNN AC III, 490, or
1107 computer systems using Universo III A Tape
Handlers. It is the same tape handler offered for
the UNN AC III, but with a slightly different control unit. From one to six Uniservo III A Tape
Handlers can be connected to a Uniservo III A Control and Synchronizer Unit and a Uniservo Power
Supply, forming a Magnetic Tape Subsystem. Each
subsystem fully occupies two input-output channels,
and only one tape handler per subsystem can read
or write at a time. One or two synchronizers can
be connected to the Model III Central Processor,
while up to four synchronizers can be connected
to the Model N. The logical address of each tape
handler is assigned by plugboard wiring.
Data is recorded by the "pulse phase" method,
which is fully described in the UNN AC 490 report
(see Paragraph 775:092.12). Tape speed is 100
inches per second. Recording density is 1,000
rows per inch, with 9 tracks recorded across the
tape. The number of rows per block must be a
multiple of three.
Three formats are available for writing or reading
a record and can be selected under program control.
We shall call them Formats 1, 2, and 3. Format
1 is the basic mode of reading tape records in
UNN AC 1050 systems using Uniservo III A tape
handlers. One character (6 data bits plus 1 parity
bit) is contained in each tape row. The two unused
tracks are ignored when reading and set to zero
when writing in this mode. Format 1 also enables
the UNN AC 1050 to read tapes produced by or
write tapes for UNIVAC 490 or UNIVAC 1107 systems, provided these systems' Univervo III A
Tape Handlers are operating in the format of 5 rows
per word (30 bits) or 6 rows per word (36 bits),
respectively.
\
Formats 2 and 3 provide compatibility with UNN AC
III systems. Three rows (27 bit positions) are
used to record one 24-bit UNIVAC III word plus
1 bit for the sign and 2 bits for a modulo-3 check.
Format 2 is used when the sign bit is of no importance. The 24 bits of four consecutive characters
of UNIVAC 1050 core storage represent one
UNN AC III word. The sign bit is set to zero
(positive) when writing and is not transmitted when
reading on the UNN AC 1050. A fifth character
(least significant) is added in Format3. The sign
Description (Contd)
bit is interpreted as the most significant bit of this
character. The other five bits of the character are
set to zero when reading in this mode and are not
transferred when writing.
In Format 3, the UNN AC 1050 Control and Synchronizer Unit performs a modulo-3 check on
incoming data, using the 2 check bits on the tape.
During write operations in this mode, the control
unit generates modulo-3 check bits and transcribes
them onto the tape. When reading into UNIVAC
1050 core storage, parity bits are generated to
prevent parity errors when the data is subsequently
used.
Under program control, a UNN AC 1050 can unpack
data recorded by a UNIVAC III in the form of six
4-bit digits per word in Format 2 or 3. A peak data
transfer rate of 200, 000 decimal digits per second
is attained in this mode.
As each block of data is recorded, the control unit
automatically "surrounds" it by writing a 27-row
pattern (containing "1"s in all tracks) and a 3-row
sentinel both before and after the data itself. The
pattern and sentinel alert the reading circuits to
the beginning and end of data, whether the block is
read forward or backward. In addition, each
normally-written block is followed by a 223-row
pattern consisting of "O"s in the odd tracks only.
Each bJock containing an error detected at recording
time (e. g., incorrect parity) contains 725 additional
rows of special patterns which indicate that the contents of the block shall be ignored when read. This
is identical to the operation of the Uniservo III A
in UNN AC III, 490, and 1107 systems.
Peak data transfer rates are as follows:
Condition
Peak Transfer Rate
Format 1:
Formats 2 and 3
(alphanumeric):
Formats 2 and 3
(decimal):
100,000 chari sec.
133,000 char/sec.
200,000 digits/ sec.
Effective speeds are shown in the graph on page
777:091. 801.
A read-after-write row parity or modulo-3 check
(depending upon the format) permits detection of
most recording errors at the time of occurrence.
A "frame count" error is detected whenever the
number of data rows in a block is not an integer
multiple of three. Four special 9-bit registers
in the control unit permit automatic compensation
for skew of up to four rows (0.004 inch) in the
tape being read. Excessive skew causes an error
indication. Every tape recording and reading
error, as well as a successful completion of an
© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
9/64
UNIVAC 1050
777:091.120
!l 091.
. 12
Description (Contd.)
operation (optional), initiates an interrupt and
causes a particular testable indicator to be set,
depending upon the condition. In addition, recording
errors cause the previously mentioned special
patterns to be added to each incorrectly-written
block.
The UNIVAC 1050' s capabilities for simultaneous
operations are discussed in Section 777:111.
. 13
Availability: . . . .
immediate.
. 14
First Delivery: ..
1963.
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Drive Mechanism
.211 Drive past the head:.
· 212 ReservoirsNumber:.
Form: . . . .
Capacity: ..
. 213 Feed drive: ..
. 214 Take-up drive: ...
.22
.325 Row use, per block Data: . . . . . . . . . . . 3 to 3N •
Redundancy check: .. o.
Timing: . . . . . .
o.
Control signals:.
283.
Interblock gap:
0.750 inch (includes control signals).
.33
Coding: • . . . • . . . . . binary image of data in
core storage.
.34
Format Compatibility:. only with Uniservo III A
units in UNIVAC III, 490,
1107, or other 1050
systems.
.35
Physical Dimensions
.351 Overall width: . . . • . 0.50 inch .
. 352 Length: . . . . . . . . . . 3, 500 feet, 1,800 feet, or
600 feet per reel.
vacuum capstan.
2
vacuum column.
approximately 5 feet .
electric motor .
electric motor.
.4
CONTROLLER
.41
Identity:
.42
Connection to System
Uniservo III A Control and
Synchronizer.
Type 0551-01.
Sensing and Recording Systems
.221 Recording system: .
erase head followed by
magnetic write head.
· 222 Sensing system:. .
magnetic read head.
· 223 Common system: .
yes; common read/write
head.
.23 Multiple Copies: . . . . none.
· 24
Arrangement of Heads
Use of station:
Stacks: . . . . . . . .
Heads/ stack: . . . . .
Method of use:.
erase.
1.
9.
1 row at a time.
Use of station:.
Stacks: . . . . . .
Heads/ stack: ..
Method of use:.
read/write.
1.
9.
1 row at a time.
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
. 31
Form of Storage
.311 Medium: . . . .
.32
.43
.44
Positional Arrangement
. 321 Serial by: ..
row, at 1,000 rows per
inch.
9 tracks.
.322 Parallel by:
.324 Bit use-
Data:
Redundancy
check:
Timing:
Control
signals:
Sign:
Unused:
Total:
9/64
Format 1
(per row)
6
Connection to Device
.431 Devices per controller: 1 to 6 tape handlers.
.432 Restrictions: . . . . . . . none.
plastic tape with magnetizable coating.
magnetization.
.312 Phenomenon:.
.421 On-line: . . . . . . . . . . Model III Central Processor:
1 or 2 Control and Synchronizer units.
Model IV Central Processor:
1 to 4 Control and Synchronizer units.
Each unit fully occupies 2
input-output channels.
.422 Off-line: . . . . . . . . . none.
Format 2 Format 3
(per 3 rows) (per 3 rows)
24
24.
1
0
2
0
2.
0
0
2
9
0
0
1
27
O.
o.
1.
o.
27.
Data Transfer Control
.441 Size of load Model III: . . . . . . . .
Model IV: . . . . . . . .
.442 Input-output areas: . . .
. 443 Input-output area
access: . . . . . . . . .
.444 Input-output area
lockou t: . . . . . . . . .
.445 Table control: . . . . . .
.446 Synchronization: . . . .
1 to 4,096 characters.
1 to 8,192 characters .
core storage .
each character.
none .
none.
automatic.
.5
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
.51
Blocks
.511 Size of block Model III: ...
1 to 4, 096 UNIVAC 1050
characters.
Model IV: . . . . . . . . 1 to 8,192 UNIVAC 1050
characters.
.512 Block demarcation Input: . . . . . . . . . . . inter-block gap or character
count in I/O Channel
Register.
Output: . . . . . . . . . • character count in I/o
Channel Register.
777:091.520
INPUT-OUTPUT: UNISERVO III A
§
091.
.52
.62
Speeds
.621 Nominal or peak
speed: . . . . . .
Input-Output Operation's
.521 Input: . . . . . . . . . . . read one block forward or
backward into core storage locations specified by
appropriate I/O Channel
Register.
. 522 Output: . . . . . . . . . . . write one block forward
from core storage locations specified by appropriate I/O Channel
Register.
. 523 Stepping: . . . . . . . . . none.
. 524 Skipping: . . . . . . . . . none.
. 525 Marking: ... .
interblock gap .
.526 Searching: . . . . . . . . none.
100,000 rows/sec for all
conditions.
Condition I: . . . . . . . 100,000 chari sec.
Conditions II and III:. 133, 000 char/sec.
Conditions N: . . . . . 200,000 digits/sec.
.622 Important parameters Recording density: .. 1,000 rows/inch .
Tape speed: . . . . . . 100 inches/ sec.
Rewind time: . . . . . . 125 seconds per 3, 500-ft.
reel.
Interblock gap: . . . . 0.75 inch (includes necessary
control characters) .
Start- stop time: . . . . 13.2 msec.
13. 2 msec/block .
. 623 Overhead: . . . . . .
. 624 Effective speeds
Effective speed
Condition
.53
Code Translation: . . . none; binary images of data
in core storage are recorded on tape (see Paragraph. 324).
.54
Format Control: . . . . there are three formats
available by program
control, permitting compatibility with UNN AC
490, III, and 1107 systems.
See Paragraph '.12 for
further information.
.55
Control Operations
100, OOOC/ (C + 1320) chari
sec.
II and III: . . . .
133, OOOC/(C + 1760) chari
sec.
N: . . . . . . . . . . . . 200, OOOD/ (D + 2640) digits/
sec.
where C = number of 6bit characters per block,
and D = number of 4-bit
decimal digits per block;
see also graph 777 :091. 801.
I: . . . . . . . . .
• 63
Demands on System
Component
Disable: . . . . . . . . • . yes, following rewind with
interlock.
Request interrupt: . . . yes.
Select format: . . . . . . yes.
Select code: . . . . . . . no.
Rewind:
. . . . . . . . yes.
Unload: . . . . . . . . • . no.
.56
Model III Central
Processor Core
Storage:
I
II
m
IV
Testable Conditions
Disabled: . . . . . . . . .
Busy device: • • . . . . .
Output lock: . • . . . . .
Nearly exhausted: . . .
Busy controller: . . . .
End-of-medium marks:
Modulo 3 error
(Formats 2 and 3): •.
Parity check error
(Format 1): . . . . . . .
Condition
Model IV Central
Processor Core
Storage:
yes.
no.
yes.
no.
yes.
yes.
I
II
III
IV
*
Msec per Percentage
character
0.0045
0.0045
0.0056
0.0030 *
45.
60.
75.
60.
0.0020
0.0020
0.0025
0.0013 *
20.
27.
33.
27.
msec per digit.
yes.
Note: each rewind instruction interlocks core
storage for 182 to 357 msec.
yes .
.6
PERFORMANCE
.7
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
.61
Conditions
.71
Adjustments:...... none.
I: . . . . . . . . . . .
.72
Other Controls
Format 1; one 6-bit character per row.
II: . . • . . • . . . . .
Format 2; four 6-bit characters per three rows (no
sign bit).
III: . • . . . . • . . . . . . Format 3; four 6-bit characters per three rows
(plus sign bit).
N: . . . • . . . . . . . . . Format 2; six 4-bit decimal
digits per three rows.
Function
Form
Comment
Forward:
button
Backward:
button
sets tape for forward
operation.
sets tape for backward
operation.
rewinds tape.
moves tape to load point.
Rewind:
button
Change Tape: button
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
9/64
777:091.730
~ 091.
.73
UNIVAC 1050
.8
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Loading and Unloading
.731 Volumes handled Storage:
. . . . . . reel.
Capacity: • . . . . . . . 3,500 feet of tape. For
blocks of 1, 000 characters
this represents the following capacities:
Format 1: . 23.7 million
6-bit characters.
Formats 2
and 3: ... 28. 0 million
6-bit characters.
Formats 2
and 3: .. 34.2 million
4-bit decimal digits .
. 732 Replenishment time: •. 0.5 to 1. 0 minute; tape
unit needs to be stopped.
.734 Optimum reloading
period: . . . . • . . . . 7 minutes.
Recording:
read-after-write
modulo-3 check
or row parity
check, depending on Format.
modulo-3 check
or row parity
check, depending on Format
all codes are
valid
set indicator
and interrupt.
Exhausted
medium:
check
set indicator
and interrupt.
Imperfect
medium:
"bad spot" check
set indicator
and interrupt.
set indicator
and interrupt.
set indicator
and interrupt.
Reading:
Invalid code:
Timing conflicts: check
Excessive skew: check
set indicator
and interrupt.
Note: The type of error is determined by testing
the individual indicators.
9/64
777:091.801
INPUT-OUTPUT: UNISERVO III A
§
091.
EFFECTIVE SPEED:
UNISERVO III A MAGNETIC TAPE HANDLER
1,000,000
7
4
2
100,000
7
~
..;"'"
i-'
4
~
2
Data Rows
per Second
/
10,000
~
V
7
I;
4
1/
/
2
/
1,000
V
7
4
2
100
2
10
4
7
2
100
4
7
2
1,000
4
7
10,000
Data Rows per Block
Note: A "data row" may contain more than one character; see Description,
Paragraph 777:091.12.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
9/64
777:092.100
UNIVAC 1050
Input-Output
Uniservo IV C
INPUT-OUTPUT: UNISERVO IV C
.12
§ 092.
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
The Uniservo IV C tape handler can read only in
the forward direction and, unlike the Uniservo III
C as used with the UNIVAC 490 system, cannot perform any search or skip operations.
Uniservo IV C Magnetic
Tape Handler.
Type 0851-04.
As in IBM tape units, two-gap magnetic heads are
used, permitting a read-after-write parity check on
recording. A longitudinal parity check character
is written after the last data row in each block.
Both longitudinal and lateral (row) parity are checked
during each read or write operation. Abnormal
conditions (such as parity errors, control busy,
or end-of-tape marks) and successful completion of
an operation (optional) cause interrupts and set testable indicators. B¥ testing the status of the indicators, the program can determine the cause of
interruption and jump to a subroutine to handle the
condition.
Description
The Uniservo IV C Tape Handler is a modification
of the Uniservo III C Tape Handlers previously
offered by UNIVAC. The IV C can read or write
at a dens;ty of 800 rows per inch (optional) in addition to the densities of 200 rows per inch and
556 rows per inch offered in the III C. The Uniservo IV C processes tapes in a format compatible
with all tape units currently produced by IBM except the Model 7340 Hypertape Drive and the new
2400 Series units.
A Uniservo IV C Control and Synchronizer Unit,
a Power Supply, and from one to six Uniservo IV C
tape handlers comprise a Compatible Tape Subsystem. Each Subsystem fully occupies two inputoutput channels. Systems with the 1050 Model III
Central Processor can have one or two subsystems
connected, while the Model IV can have up to four.
Only one Uniservo IV C tape handler can be
reading or writing at anyone time. The
logical address assigned to each tape handler
can only be changed by means of a plugboard on the Tape Adapter Cabinet
Tape speed is 112.5 inches per second. Recording
density may be 200, 556, or 800 (optional) rows per
inch, providing peak data transfer rates of 22,500,
62,500, or 90,000 characters per second, respectively. Each tape row consists of six data
bits and one parity bit. Reading and writing can
be performed in the binary mode (with odd parity)
or the BCD mode (with even parity). Binary images
are transferred in the binary mode. Internal circuitry automatically performs code conversions between the UNIVAC 1050 internal code and the IBM
6-bit BCD code in the BCD mode.
Block length is variable from one character to the
capacity of one core storage module (4, 096 characters for the Model III Central Processor and
8,192 characters for the Model IV). The base
address of the input-output area, as well as a
block character count, is contained in the appropriate I/O Channel Register. The External Function instruction specifies a read or write operation,
the unit involved, the recording mode (binary or
BCD), the density, and whether or not an external
interrupt shall occur upon successful completion of
the operation. This instruction is also used to test
or reset indicators that show which condition
caused an interrupt.
Description (Contd.)
Simultaneity is discussed in Sections 777: III
777: 112, Simultaneous Operations.
.14
First Delivery: . . . . . January 1964.
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
· 21
Drive Mechanism
; 211 Drive past the head:
.212 ReservoirsNumber:.
Form: ...
Capacity: .
· 213 Feed drive:.
.214 Take-up drive:
· 22
vacuum capstan and tape
tension.
2.
vacuum columns.
approx. 6 feet of tape.
electric motor.
electric motor.
SenSing and Recording Systems
. 221 Recording system: .
. 222 Sensing system: ..
.223 Common system: .
magnetic head .
magnetic head .
2-gap head provides readafter-write parity checking.
.23
Multiple Copies: .
none.
· 24
Arrangement of Heads
Use of station:.
Stacks: . . . . . .
Heads/ stack: .
Method of use:.
erase.
Use of station:.
Stacks: . . . . . .
Heads/ stack: ..
Method of use:.
write.
Use of station:.
Distance: .. .
Stacks: . . . . . .
Heads/ stack:. .
Method of use:.
read.
0.25 inch after write head.
© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and info, inc.
1.
7.
1 row at a time.
1.
7.
1 row at a time.
1.
7.
1 row at a time.
9/64
777:092.300
UNIVAC 1050
.422 Off-line: . . . . . . . . . . none.
§ 092 .
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
.31
Form of Storage
.311 Medium: ...
. 312 Phenomenon:.
.32
.43
plastic tape with magnetizable surface.
magnetiz ation .
.321 Serial by: ..
row, at 200, 556, or 800
(optional) rows per inch.
7 tracks .
. 322 Parallel by:
. 324 Track use 6.
Data: . . . . .
Redundancy check: . . 1 (parity).
Timing: . . . . . . . . . O.
Unused: . . . . . . . . . O.
Total: . . . . . . . . . . 7.
. 325 Row use, per N-character block Data: . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to N.
Redundancy check: . . 1 (parity).
Timing: . . . . . .
O.
Control signal s: .
O.
Unused: . . . . .
O.
Interblock gap:
0.75 inch.
· 33
· 34
.35
Coding: . . . . . .
in the binary mode, row
images are transferred.
In the BCD mode, the
image is automatically
translated from IBM 6bit BCD code to UNIVAC
1050 internal code (or
the reverse).
Format Compatibility: with all IBM 700, 1400, and
7000 series systems via
IBM 727, 729, and 7330
Magnetic Tape Units;
with UNIVAC III, 490, 110'i:
or other 1050 systems
using Uniservo III C, IV C,
or VI C Tape Handlers;
and with other "IBM
compatible" tape units.
Physical Dimensions
· 351 Overall width: .
· 352 Length: . . . . .
.4
CONTROLLER
.41
Identity: . . . . .
.42
Connection to System
.421 On-line: . . . . . . . . .
0.50 inch.
2,400 feet per reel.
Uniservo IV C Control and
Synchronizer, Type
0556-00.
Uniservo IV C Power
Supply, Type 1353-01.
1 or 2 Magnetic Tape Sub-
systems can be connected
to the Model III Central
Processor; up to 4 can be
connected to the Model IV;
each requires 1 Control
and Synchronizer unit and
1 Power Supply, and each
fully occupies 2 inputoutput channels.
9/64
.431 Devices per controller: 1 to 6.
.432 Restrictions: . . . . . . . none.
.44
Positional Arrangement
Connection to Device
Data Transfer Control
.441 Size of load Model III: ...
Model IV: ...
. 442 Input-output area:
.443 Input-output area
access: ......
.444 Input-output area
lockout: . . . . . .
. 445 Table control: ..
.446 Synchronization: ...
1 to 4, 096 characters.
1 to 8,192 characters .
core storage .
each character.
none.
none .
automatic.
.5
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
.51
Blocks
.511 Size of block Model III: .. .
Model IV: . . . . . . .
.512 Block demarcation Input: . . . . . . . . . .
1 to 4, 096 characters.
1 to 8,192 characters.
interblock gap on tape, or
character count in I/O
Channel Register.
Output: . . . . . . . . . . character count in I/O Channel Register.
· 52
Input-Output Operations
· 521 Input:. . . . . . . . . . . . read 1 block of data forward
only at 200, 556, or 800
rows per inch and in
either binary mode (odd
parity) or BCD mode
(even parity); external
interrupt upon completion
is optional.
· 522 Output:. . . . . . . . . .. write 1 block of data forward
at 200, 556, or 800 rows
per inch and in either
binary mode (odd parity)
or BCD mode (even parity);
external interrupt upon
completion is optional.
· 523 Stepping: . . . . . . ... 1 block backward (backspace);
approximately 5 inches forward (to skip and erase defective tape areas) .
. 524 Skipping:
none.
end-of-file mark; interblock
· 525 Marking:
gap.
none.
· 526 Searching:
· 53
Code Translation: ... automatic in the BCD mode;
none in the binary mode,
since binary images of
data are transferred.
777:092.540
INPUT-OUTPUT: UNISERVO IV C
§ 092.
.63
. 54
Format Control:
.55
Control Operations
Request interrupt:
Select format: .
Rewind: . . . . . . .
Unload: . . . . . . .
Terminate current
operation:. . . ...
.56
ComEonent Condition
. . by program .
Disable: . . . . . . .
Model III
Core
Storage:
yes, following rewind with
interlock.
yes.
yes, binary or BCD.
yes.
no .
I and IV
II and V
III and VI
Model IV
Core
Storage:
I and IV
II and V
III and VI
yes.
Msec Eer Percentage of
char. or data transfer
time
0.0045
0.0045
0.0045
10.1
28.1
40.5
0.0020
0.0020
0.0020
4.5
12.5
18.0
.7
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
.71
Adjustments: . . . . . . . none.
.72
Other Controls
Testable Conditions
Disabled: . . . .
Busy device: ..
Output lock: . .
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller:
End of medium marks:
End of file: .
Rewinding: .
.6
PERFORMANCE
· 61
Conditions
yes.
no.
yes .
no.
yes.
yes, 14 feet from physical
end.
yes.
yes.
I: .
II: .
III:
IV:
V:.
VI:
reading at 200 rows/inch.
reading at 556 rows/inch.
reading at 800 rows/inch.
writing at 200 rows/inch.
writing at 556 rows/inch.
writing at 800 rows/inch.
SEeeds
.621 Nominal or peak speed 22,500 char/sec.
I and I V : . .
II and V: . . . . . . . . . 62,500 char/sec.
m and VI: . . . . . . . . 90,000 char/sec.
· 622 Important parameters Recording density:. 200 or 556 rows/inch.
Tape speed: . . . .. 112.5 inches/sec.
Full rewind time:.. 87 seconds.
Interblock gap: .
0.75 inch.
End-of-filegap:..
3.7 inches.
Start time Read:. . . .
6.3 msec.
Write: . . .
4.1 msec.
Stop timeRead:. . . .
9.0 msec.
Write: . . .
9.0 msec.
· 623 Overhead (start plus stop time)
Reading:. . . . . . . . . 15.3 msec.
Writing:. . . . . . . . . 13. 1 msec.
.624 Effective speeds (char/sec.)
I: . . .
22, 500N/(N + 347).
II: . . .
62, 500N/ (N + 965).
90, OOON/ (N + 1389).
III:
22,500N/(N + 295).
IV:
62, 500N/ (N + 820).
V: .
VI:
90, OOON/(N + 1179).
where N = number of
characters per block
(see graph).
Function
Form
Comment
Rewind:
SWitch/light
rewinds and positions
tape.
moves tape forward.
moves tape backward.
moves tape to load
point.
Forward:
switch/light
Backward:
SWitch/light
Change tape: SWitch/light
.73
.62
Demands on System
Loading and Unloading
.731 Volumes handled: ... 2,400 feet per reel; for
1, OOO-character blocks,
5, 000, 000 characters
at 200 char/inch, 11,300,000
characters at 556 char/inch,
or 14,400,000 characters
at 800 char/inch.
.732 Replenishment time:. 0.5 to 1. 0 minute; tape
handler needs to be
stopped .
. 734 Optimum reloading
period:. . . . . . . .. 4 minutes.
.8
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Error
Check of Interlock
Recording:
read-after-write
set indicator
parity check
and interrupt.
lateral and longitudi- set indicator
nal parity check
and interrupt.
Reading:
Input area
overflow:
Output block
size:
Invalid
code:
Exhausted
medium:
Imperfect
medium:
Timing conflicts:
Action
none.
none.
all codes are valid.
check
set indicator
and interrupt.
see Recording.
check
set indicator
and interrupt.
Note: The type of error is determined by testing
individual indicators.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
9/64
777:092.801
§
UNIVAC 1050
092.
EFFECTIVE SPEED:
UNISERVO IV C MAGNETIC TAPE HANDLER
1,000,000
7
4
2
100,000
I\\\C\\
7
()()c\\'iJ.):~
'O~~
4
~
j".
~ ~r..
2
Effective Speed,
char/sec.
t-
~
~
10,000
7
..d
IdlI
4
2
.J
1,000
~
~
I~~
"
~ ".
".
(J(Jo
~()()
I,.oo~
'iJ.):/i\\C~
Cr
cbar / iuct
-'
~
7
4
2
100
2
10
4
7
2
100
4
7
2
1,000
4
7
10,000
Characters per Block
Note: Effective speeds are based on the average of reading and writing speeds.
9/64
777:093.100
Input-Output
UNIVAC 1050
Uniservo VI C
INPUT-OUTPUT: UNISERVO VI C
lSI 093.
.12
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: ..
. 12
Description
read or write operation. Abnormal conditions
(such as parity errors, control busy, or end of
tape marks) and successful completion of an
operation (optional) cause interrupts and set
testable indicators. By testing the status of the
indicators, the program can determine the cause
of interruption and jump to a subroutine to handle
the condition .
Uniservo VI C Magnetic
Tape Handler.
Type 0858-00 (Tape Handler
plus Control).
Type 0858-01 (additional
Tape Handler).
The Uniservo VI C Tape Handler is a completely
new unit, functionally similar to the Uniservo III C
and IV C, but having a substantially reduced tape
speed of 42.7 inches per second and a significantly
lower cost. The format of the Uniservo VI C is
compatible with all currently-produced IBM magnetic tape drives except the Model 7340 Hypertape
Drive and the new 2400 Series units. Code conversion between UNIVAC 1050 internal code and
IBM 6-bit BCD code is not automatic, as in the
Uniservo IV C, but must be done by subroutines if
needed. The conversion is facilitated by the automatic translarte instruction.
A Uniservo VI C Magnetic Tape Subsystem consists
of a Synchronizer Unit, from 1 to 4 Control Units,
and from 1 to 16 Uniservo VI C Magnetic Tape
Handlers (1 to 4 tape handlers can be connected to
each Control Unit). Each subsystem fully occupies
two input-output channels. The controllers are
two-way units, making possible simultaneous read
and write operations involving any two tape handlers
in the subsystem. The Uniservo VI C tape handler
can read only in the forward direction and cannot
perform any skip or search operations.
Recording density can be either 200, 556, or 800
rows per inch, providing peak data transfer rates
of 8,500, 23,700, or 34,100 characters per second,
respectively. Each tape row consists of six data
bits and one parity bit. Block length is variable
from one character to the capacity of one core
storage module (4,096 characters for the Model III
Central Processor and 8,192 characters for the
Model IV). The base address of the input-output
area, as well as a block character count, is contained in the appropriate I/O Channel Register.
The External Function instruction specifies a read
or write operation, the unit involved, the recording
density, and whether or not an external interrupt
shall occur upon successful completion of the
operation. This instruction is also used to test or
reset indicators that show which condition caused an
interrupt.
Two-gap magnetic heads are used, permitting a
read-after-write parity check on recording. A
longitudinal parity check character is written after
the last data row in each block. Both longitudinal
and lateral (row) parity are checked during each
Description (Contd.)
Simultaneity is discussed in Sections 777: 111 and
777:112, Simultaneous Operations.
..
.14
First Delivery:
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Drive Mechanism
. 211 Drive past the head:
.212 Reservoirs Number:
Form:
Capacity:
..
. 213 Feed drive: .
. 214 Take-up drive:
.22
January 1965 .
vacuum capstan .
2.
vacuum columns.
approximately 2 feet of
tape.
electric motor .
electric motor .
Sensing and Recording Systems
. 221 Recording system: ..
. 222 Sensing system: .
. 223 Common system: ...
...
.23
Multiple Copies:
.24
Arrangement of Heads
magnetic head .
magnetic head.
2-gap head provides readafter-write parity checking.
none .
Use of station: .
Stacks: . . . . . .
Heads/stack: ..
Method of use: .
erase.
Use of station: .
Stacks: . . . . . .
Heads/stack: ..
Method of use: .
write.
1.
7.
1 row at a time.
Use of station: .
Distance: .. .
Stacks: . . . . . .
Heads/stack: ..
Method of use: .
read.
0.25 inch after write head.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and info, inc.
1.
7.
1 row at a time.
1.
7.
1 row at a time.
9/64
777:093.300
UNIVAC 1050
.43
§ 093.
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
· 31
Form of Storage
. 311 Medium:. . . . . . .
.312 Phenomenon:.. . . ..
· 32
.431 Devices per
controller:
plastic tape with
magnetizable surface.
magnetization.
.432 Restrictions: . . . . . .
.44
row, at 200, 556, or 800
(optional) rows per inch.
7 tracks:
. 322 Parallel by: . . . . . .
. 324 Track use Data: . . . . . . . • .. 6.
Redundancy check:. 1 (parity).
Timing: . . . . . . .. O.
Unused: . . . . . . .. O.
Total: . . . . . . . . . 7.
. 325 Row use, per N-character block Data: . . . . . . . . .. 1 to N.
Redundancy check:. 1.
Timing: . . . . . . .. O.
Control signals: . .. O.
Unused: . . . . . . .. O.
Interblock gap:... 0.75 inch.
.442 Input-output areas:
.443 Input-output area
access: . . . . . . .
.444 Input-output area
lockout: . . . . . . ..
.445 Table control: . . . .
.446 Synchronization: ...
Blocks
.511 Size of block:
. 512 Block demarcation Input: . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Dimensions
.522 Output: . . . . . . . . . .
.41
Identity: . • . . .
binary image, using 1 tape
row per UNIVAC 1050
character.
Output: . . . . . . . . .
• 52
.521 Input: . . . . . . . . . . .
0.5 inch.
2,400 feet per reel.
· 523 Stepping: . . . . . . .
Uniservo VI C Control Unit,
Type 0858-01.
Uniservo VI C Synchronizer
Unit, Type 5307-00.
· 524 Skipping: . . . . .
.525 Marking: . . . . .
read 1 block of data forward
only at 200, 556, or 800
rows per inch.
write 1 block of data
forward only at 200, 556,
or 800 rows per inch;
external interrupt upon
completion is optional.
1 block backward (backspace); approximately
5 inches forward (to skip
and erase defective tape
areas).
none.
end-of-file mark; interblock
gap.
none .
Connection to System
.421 On-line: . . . . . . . ..
. 422 Off-line:. . . . . . . ..
9/64
interblock gap on tape or
character count in I/O
Channel Register.
character count in I/O
Channel Register.
Input-Output Operations
· 526 Searching: . . . . . .
. 42
1 character to the capacity
of one core s1Drage module
(4,096 characters for the
Model III Central Processor; 8, 192 characters
for the Model IV) .
Format Compatibility: with all IBM 700, 1400, and
7000 series systems via
IBM 727, 729, and 7330
Magnetic Tape Units; with
UNIVAC III, 490, 1107, or
other 1050 systems using
Uniservo III C, IV C, or
VI C Tape Handlers; and
with other "IBM compatible" tape units.
CONTROLLER
none.
none .
automatic.
.51
· 34
.4
each character.
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
Coding:..........
.351 Overall width: . . . . .
.352 Length: . . . . . . . . .
1 character to the capacity
of one core storage module
(4,096 characters for the
Model III Central Processor, 8,192 characters
for the Model IV) .
core storage.
.5
· 33
· 35
1 to 4 tape handlers per
Control Unit; 1 to 16 per
Synchronizer Unit .
none.
Data Transfer Control
.441 Size of load: . . . . . .
Positional Arrangement
· 321 Serial by: . . . . . . . .
Connection to Device
a Uniservo VI C Subsystem
consists of a Synchronizer
Unit and from 1 to 4 Control Units. Each subsystem fully occupies
2 input-output channels.
Two subsystems may be
connected to Model III
systems; four to Model IV
systems.
none.
.53
Code Translation: .
none; binary images are
transferred.
.54
Format Control: ...
by program.
.55
Control Operations
Disable: . . . . . . . . .
Request interrupt: ..
Rewind: . . . . . . . . .
Unload: . . . . . . . . .
yes, following rewind with
interlock.
yes.
yes .
no.
777:093.560
INPUT-OUTPUT: UNISERVO VI C
§
093.
.56
Testable Conditions
Disabled: . . . . . . .
Busy device: . . . . . .
Output lock: . . . . . .
Nearly exhausted: ..
Busy controller: ...
End of medium marks:
End of file:
Rewinding: . . . .
.6
PERFORMANCE
. 61
Conditions
I: . . . . . . .
yes.
yes.
yes.
no.
yes.
yes.
yes.
yes.
reading or
200 rows
reading or
556 rows
reading or
800 rows
II: . . . . . . .
III: . . . .
.7
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
.71
Adjustments: ..
.72
Other Controls
none.
Function
writing at
per inch.
writing at
per inch.
writing at
per inch.
.73
Comment
Rewind:
switch/light
Forward:
Backward:
Change tape:
SWitch/light
switch/light
SWitch/light
Loading and Unloading
.731 Volumes handled: . ..
.62
.621 Nominal or peak speed I: . . . . . . . . . . . . 8,500 char/sec.
.732
II: . . . . . . . . . . .. 23,700 char/sec.
III: . . . . . . . . . . . 34,100 char/sec.
.734
.622 Important parameters Recording density:. 200, 556, or 800 (optional)
rows/inch.
Tape speed: . . . . . 42.7 inches/sec.
Full rewind time: .. 180 seconds.
.8
Inter-block gap: ... 0.75 inch.
Start plus stop time: 24 msec.
.623 Overhead: . . . . .
17. 6 msec per block
(continuous tape motion).
.624 Effective speeds
I: . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 500N/(N + 150) char/sec.
II: . . . . . . . .
23, 700N/(N + 417) char/sec.
III: . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 100N/(N + 600) char/sec.
where N is the number of
characters (i. e., tape
rows) per block (see graph).
.63 Demands on System
Com20nent
Model III
Core
Storage:
Condition
I
II
III
Model IV
Core
Storage:
I
II
III
Msec
Percentage
per
or of Data
character
Transfer
Time
0.0045
0.0045
0.0045
4.0
11.1
16.0
0.0020
0.0020
0.0020
1.6
5.8
6.7
rewinds and positions
tape.
moves tape forward.
moves tape backward .
moves tape to load
point .
Replenishment time:.
Optimum reloading
period: . . . . . . . ..
2,400 feet per reel; for
1, OOO-character blocks,
5,000,000 characters at
200 char/inch, 11,300,000
character s at 556 char /
inch, or 14,400,000 characters at 800 char/inch.
0.5 to 1. 0 minute; tape unit
needs to be stopped.
11 minutes.
ERRORS. CHECKS. AND ACTION
Check or
Interlock
Recording:
read-after-write
parity check
Reading:
lateral and longitudinal parity
check
Input area
overflow:
Output block
size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted
medium:
set indicator
and interrupt.
set indicator
and interrupt.
none.
none.
all codes are valid.
check
Imperfect
medium:
see Recording.
Timing conflicts: check
set indicator
and interrupt.
set indicator
and interrupt.
Note: The type of error is determined by testing
individual indicators.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
9/64
777:093.801
UNIVAC 1050
§ 093.
EFFECTIVE SPEED:
UNISERVO VI C MAGNETIC TAPE HANDLER
10,000,000
7
4
2
1,000,000
7
4
2
100,000
7
Effective Speed,
char/sec.
4
800 char/inch
n
~
~ ~ 556 char/inch
2
~
V I.; "",i-'
10,000
7
...,.
/AI'
1//
1,000
7
4
~
200 char linch
~./
4
2
"",i-'
V
~~
~~
,
II
~
.MY
.I!T
2
100
2
10
4
7
2
100
4
7
2
4
7
1,000
Characters per Block
Note: Effective speeds are based upon continuous operation, with
no stops between blocks.
9/64
10,000
777: lOLl 00
UNIVAC 1050
Input-Output
Standard Communications
Subsystem
INPUT-OUTPUT: STANDARD COMMUNICATIONS SUBSYSTEM
§
101.
.1
.11
. 12
. 12
Description (Contd.)
GENERAL
C/M-32: 16 input and 16 output CLT's
Identity:
C/M-64: 32 input and 32 output CLT's
Standard Communications
Subsystem, consisting of 1
to 64 Communication Line
Terminals connected to a
Communication Multiplexer .
When several CLT's simultaneously request access
to Core Memory, the Communication Multiplexer
assigns priorities and lets the Central Processor
know which CLT has been granted access.
Description
The Standard Communications Subsystem enables
the UNIVAC 1050 to receive and transmit data via
any common carrier, in any standard code of up to
8 levels, at any standard rate of transmission up
to 4,800 bits per second. It can receive or transmit data via high-speed, medium-speed, or lowspeed lines in any combination.
The two principal components of the Standard
Communications Subsystem are the Communication
Line Terminals (CLT's), which are connected
directly to the communication facilities, and the
Communication Multiplexer, which links up to 64
CLT's to the Central Processor. One or two
Communication Multiplexers can be connected to
the Model III Central Processor, and up to 8 to the
Model IV.
Communication Line Terminals
A CL T is required for each input line and each output line to be connected to a UNIVAC 1050 system.
There are three basic types of input and output
CLT's: low-speed (up to 300 bits per second)
medium-speed (up to 1,600 bits per second), ~d
high-speed (2,000 to 4,800 bits per second). The
characteristics of the available CLT models are
summarized in Table I.
A ~pecial type of output CLT is the CLT-Dialing,
whlCh enables the Central Processor to establish
communication with a particular remote point via
the common carrier's switching network. Each
CLT-Dialing requires one output position on the
Communication Multiplexer and is always used in
conjunction with another output CLT, an input
CLT, or (for two-way communication) both.
Communication Multiplexer
The Communication Multiplexer is available in five
diffe.rent models, capable of connecting the following
maXlmum numbers of Communication Line Terminals to a single UNIVAC 1050 input-output
channel:
C/M-4: 2 input and 2 output CLT's
C/M-8: 4 input and 4 output CLT's
C/M-16: 8 input and 8 output CLT's
All CL T' s require a timing source to establish the
proper sequencing of data bits or characters as
they are transferred to and from the communication facilities. Medium-speed parallel input CLT's
dialing CLT's, and high-speed synchronous input '
an~ output CLT's use the modem or dialing unit to
wh~ch they are connected as their timing source,
whlle all other CL T' s use electronic clocks which
are components of the Standard Communications
Subsystem as their timing source.
F.ach asynchronous input CL T has its own clock
however, all asynchronous or parallel output CLT 's
which operate at the same speed share a common
clock. Up to six output clocks are provided with
the Standard Communications Subsystem.
Registers
Communication facilities usually operate in a bitserial, character-serial mode in contrast to
UNIV AC 1050 systems, which handle data characters in a bit-parallel, character-serial mode.
To accomplish compatibility, input CLT's are
equipped with an assembly register in which the
bits comprising each character, as they are received, are assembled into a complete data character for parallel transfer to the 1050. Output
CLT's are similarly equipped with a disassembly
register.
When low-speed CLT's are used, data must be
transferred between the CLT and the Central
Processor during the time interval between the
arrival of the last data bit of one character and
the st.art bit of the next character. Medium- speed
and hlgh-speed CLT's, however, contain a singlec~aract~r bu.ffer or queuing register, which permlts a time mterval corresponding to the length of
a complete data character to elapse between data
transfers to or from the Central Processor.
Buffer
Buffer ar.eas are program set in core storage and
may ?e el~her 64 or 128 characters in length. When
data IS bemg sent or received, an interrupt signal
is automatically generated every 32 or 64 characters, depending upon the length of the buffer.
This enables the 1050 Central Processor to load
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
9/64
777:101.120
UNIVAC 1050
§ 101.
. 12
.12
transmitted or received while any other peripheral
subsystem is operating or while the Central Processor is computing.
Description (Contd. )
or unload one half of a buffer while the other half
is being filled or emptied by a communications device. An interrupt is also generated at the end of
a message to enable unloading of a partially full
buffer.
Types of Communication Service
Through the use of the appropriate Communication
Line Terminals and associated common carrier
equipment, any or all of the following types of
communication service can be tied into a UNIVAC
1050 system:
Special Features
•
Automatic parity checking and generation,
under program control, for each line.
•
Automatic insertion of a sixth bit - 0 for
figures and 1 for letters - when receiving a
message in the 5-level Baudot code. This
permits programmed translation using the
Translate instruction.
•
Automatic generation of an interrupt upon
recognition of any program-set special
6-, 7-, or 8-bit character.
Description (Contd.)
•
Private Line Teletypewriter: up to 100 words
per minute; simplex, half duplex, or full
duplex.
•
Teletypewriter Exchange Service (TWX):
100 words per minute; half duplex.
It
Direct Distance Dialing (DDD) or Wide Area
Telephone Service (WATS): 110 to 2,000 bits
per second; half duplex.
•
Private Line Telephone: 1,200 bits per second
and up; full or half duplex.
Simultaneity
All Communication Line Terminals may be active
simultaneously. In addition, messages may be
TABLE I: COMMUNICATION LINE TERMINAL CHARACTERISTICS
Type No.
(Input only)
Type No.
(Output only)
Code Level
(Bits/ char)
Mode
Timing
Speed
CLT-51L
CLT-50L
5
Bit serial
Asynchronous
Up to 300
bits/sec
CLT-81L
CLT-80L
6, 7, or 8
Bit serial
Asynchronous
Up to 300
bits/sec
CLT-81M
CLT-80M
5,6,7,or8 Bit serial
Asynchronous
Up to 1,600
bits/sec
CLT-81P
CLT-80P
up to 8
CLT-81H
CLT-80H
5, 6,7, or8 Bit serial
CLT-Dialing
4
Note:
9/64
Bit parallel Timing Signal
Synchronous
Bit parallel Timing Signals
Up to 75
char/sec
2, 000 to 4,800
bits/ sec.
Determined by
common
carrier
"Asynchronous" means that start and stop bits are used with each character to
establish timing; "Synchronous" means that timing characters are used at predetermined intervals between data characters.
777: 102.100
UNIVAC 1050
Input-Output
UNIVAC 1004
INPUT-OUTPUT: UNIVAC 1004
§
102.
. 12
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
0
UNIV AC 1004 Card Processor; Models I, II, and
III.
UNIV AC 1004 Adapter.
. 12
Description (Contd.)
63 character printing set.
o Optional card punch - 200 cards/minute.
o Punched paper tape units available - 400
chari sec reading and 110 chari sec punching.
DeSCription
Gl
The UNIVAC 1004 is a small plugboard-programmed
computer with 961 positions of core storage. It
can be connected to the UNIVAC 1050 by means of
the 1004 Adapter, enabling transmission of data, in
one direction at a time, between 1050 core storage
and 1004 core storage. While the 1004 Subsystem
does provide a means of attaching several lowspeed peripherals to a single 1050 input-output
channel, as well as data editing, code translation,
and similar data manipulation facilities outside
the 1050 program, the primary aim of this configuration seems to be as an "expansion package"
for UNIVAC 1004 installations. All operations
must be initiatedhy the 1050 program, or by the
plugboard wiring under control of the 1050 program;
i. e., the UNIVAC 1004 cannot act as an inquiry
station for the 1050. When it is not in use as an online peripheral, the UNIVAC 1004 can be used as
an off-line data processor, under sole control of
its plugboard wiring.
For more detailed information on the capabilities
and performance of the UNIVAC 1004, see Computer System Report 770.
Some of the important characteristics of the 1004
are:
o
Plugboard programming.
o
961 positions of core storage.
Gl
31, 47, or 62 program steps (instructions).
o 8 p,sec cycle time for the 1004 Model I;
6.5 p,sec cycle time for Models II and III.
o Editing and decimal arithmetic facilities.
o
Maximum card reading rate of 400 or 615
cards/minute, depending upon the model.
•
Maximum printing rate of 400 or 600
lines/minute, depending upon the model.
•
132 alphanumeric printing positions.
Magnetic tape units available .
A UNIVAC 1004 operation is initiated in the same
way as other peripherals: by the External
Function instruction. Six basic functions are
provided, such as read a card, print a line, punch
a card, etc. In addition, upon initiation of a
UNIV AC 1004 operation by the 1050 (using the
operation code 00), the 1004 Adapter accesses
the first character of the input or output field in
the 1050 (whose location must be set in the
appropriate I/O Channel Register), interprets this
character according to plugboard wiring, and
causes certain hubs of the 1004 plugboard panel
to emit pulses which control the operation of the
1004. Data is transmitted character-by-character
to and from the 1050, interlocking core storage
for only one cycle per transmitted character.
Except for data transmission, the 1004 operates
independently of the 1050.
The 1004 Subsystem requires the exclusive use of
one UNIVAC 1050 input-output channel and can
run simultaneously with all other peripherals.
Two 1004 Subsystems can be connected to the
UNIV AC 1050 Model III Central Processor, and
up to eight 1004 Subsystems to the Model IV
Processor.
There are no parity or other checking devices in
the 1004, although characters read by the card
reader can be checked for Validity by programming.
Parity bits are generated by the 1004 Adapter
prior to transmission to the 1050. The parity bit
for each character sent from the 1050 is also
transmitted and is checked in the adapter. Parity
errors, malfunctions, or other errors cause an
interrupt signal to be sent to the 1050 Central
Processor, as in other peripheral devices, and
can cause a branch to a recovery routine.
© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
9/64
777: 111.100
UNIVAC 1050
Simultaneous Operations
Model III Processor
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS: MODEL III PROCESSOR
!lll1.
Each peripheral subsystem in a UNIVAC 1050 Model III system is permanently connected to a
separate input-output channel (two channels are required for each tape subsystem), and there
are a maximum of eight channels available. Unlike many currently-available computer systems,
the UNIVAC 1050's control circuitry does not conduct a priority scan of all the input-output
channels during each core storage cycle to determine whether that particular cycle shall be
allocated to one of the channels or to the central processor. Consequently, simultaneity of
operations is not as extensive nor as clearly defined as one might expect in a system having this
number of data channels. However, in certain cases up to six operations can be overlapped
(see Figure 1).
The synchronizers for the card reader, card punch, and printer are built directly into the
Model III Processor and are connected to channels 1, 2, and 0, respectively. Internal circuitry
permits the simultaneous operation of these three peripherals (even when the printer is unbuffered). Simultaneity with other subsystems is described later in this section.
Channels 4 and 5 are reserved for a magnetic tape subsystem, and channel 6 is usually assigned
to a Fastrand subsystem. The design of the Uniservo III A, Uniservo IV C, and Fastrand synchronizers preclude the simultaneous operation of these units with like subsystems or with the
card reader or punch. The Uniservo VI C can operate simultaneously with the card reader but
not with the card punch.
All simultaneous operations are, of course, limited by the maximum gross data transfer rate of
the central processor, which is 222,000 characters per second.
The usual peripheral assignment of input-output channels is indicated below. Deviations from
these assignments could require RPQ's and modifications of the standard software, and could
also limit program compatibility with other 1050 systems.
Input-Output Channel
o
1
2
3
4 and 5
6
7
Usual Peripheral Subsystem Assigrunent
Printer (Synchronizer internal to processor).
Card Reader (Synchronizer internal to processor).
Card Punch (Synchronizer internal to processor).
Commnnications.
Magnetic Tape (III A, IV C, or VI C).
Fastrand.
Punched Paper Tape, UNIVAC 1004 On-Line
Card Processor, or second printer.
Each input-output operation is initiated by an External Function (XF) instruction which specifies
the input-output channel, unit, operation to be performed (read a card, print aline, etc.), and
such details as whether the processor shall be interlocked for the duration of the operation and
whether the automatic interrupt upon successful completion of an operation shall be inhibited.
Indicators are set for various errors or malfunctions and may be tested or reset by means of the
XF instruction. The base address of each input-output area is set by the program in the
appropriate I/O Channel Register, and control of the peripheral subsystems is accomplished
through the system of interrupts and testable indicators discussed in Paragraph 777:051.12.
In general, the Processor is free to resume internal processing after execution of an External
Function instruction, except for the core storage accesses required for transmission of data
between the Processor and the peripherals, and the control functions necessary for proper
handling of the input-output devices.
Some important considerations regarding simultaneous operations for the UNIVAC 1050 system
using the Model ill Central Processor are:
Any subsystem can operate simultaneously with internal processing.
G
•
The card punch, card reader, and printer can operate simultaneously.
Subsystems connected to channels 3 and 7 (see normal channel assignments above)
can operate simultaneously with any other SUbsystems.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
9/64
777: 111.1 01
UNIVAC 1050
§ 111.
•
The buffered printer can operate simultaneously with any other peripheral,
including additional printers.
•
In general, only one-way data transfers are possible; e. g., the Fastrand unit
can either read or write, but cannot do both simultaneously. The two exceptions
to this generality are the Standard Communications Subsystem, which can receive
and transmit messages simultaneously, and the Uniservo VI C Magnetic Tape
Subsystem, which can perform one read and one write operation simultaneously.
•
Magnetic Tape Subsystems using Uniservo ill A's or IV C's or the Fastrand
Mass Storage Subsystem can operate simultaneously only with peripherals
attached to channels 3 and 7 (see above) and the buffered printer. The card
reader and card punch must be brought to a halt before issuing input-output
instructions to these magnetic tape or drum peripherals.
•
The card punch cannot operate simultaneously with any Magnetic Tape Subsystem
or with a Fastrand Subsystem.
Violation of the above considerations will not result in a non-recoverable loss of data. If nonallowable simultaneous data transfers are requested, or if the maximum data rate of the
processor is in danger of being exceeded, a "memory-overload-anticipated" interrupt is
generated that inhibits the issuance of the second command until the first is completed.
A schematic summary of the 1050 Model Ill's capabilities for simultaneous operations is presented in Figure 1. There is no significance to the order of listing since no priority scan is made.
FIGURE 1: SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
Usual Channel
ASSignment
UNIVAC 1050 MODEL m
Peripheral
Subsystem
7
UNIVAC 1004
3
Standard
Communication
7
Punched Paper Tape
0
Buffered Printer
1
Card Reader
Simultaneous
Data Paths
0
m A(l)
4 and 5
Uniservo
4 and 5
Uniservo IV C(l)
6
Fastrand(l)
2
Card Punch
4 and 5
Uniservo VI C(l)
Central Processor
Notes:
9/64
C>---O
A (3)
:h
oJB(41
UNIVAC 1050
Core
Storage
~~See -Note (2)
(1)
A Fastrand unit can execute a positioning operation
(no data transfer) simultaneously with the operation
of any magnetic tape unit.
(2)
Any two Uniservo VI C's can read and write simultaneously.
(3)
"Switch" A indicates that the card reader, card punch, and
Uniservo VI C cannot operate simultaneously with the
Uniservo III A, Uniservo IV C, or Fastrand.
(4)
"Switch" B indicates that the card punch cannot operate
simultaneously with a Uniservo VI C.
777: 112.100
UNIVAC 1050
Simultaneous Operations
Model IV Processor
SIMUL TANEOUS OPERATIONS: MODEL IV PROCESSOR
13 112.
The 1050 Model IV Processor, like the Model ill Processor, can have up to eight inputoutput channels, each permanently connected to a peripheral subsystem (magnetic tape subsystems require two channels); but the simultaneity of operations possible with Model IV is more
extensive than with Model III.
This increased simultaneity is primarily due to different synchronizers for the card reader
and card punch. These synchronizers, as well as the printer synchronizer, are not built
directly into the Model IV Processor as they are in the Model m. The new synchronizers permit
the card punch and card reader to operate simultaneously with any other peripheral device.
Each input-output operation is initiated by an External Function (XF) instruction which
specifies the input-output channel, unit, operation to be performed (e. g., read a card, print a
line, etc.), and such details as whether the processor shall be interlocked for the duration of
the operation and whether the automatic interrupt upon successful completion of an operation shall
be inhibited. Indicators are set for various errors or malfunctions and may be tested or reset
by using the XF instruction. The base address of each input-output area is set by the program in
the appropriate I/O Channel Register, and control of the peripheral subsystems is accomplished
through the system of interrupts and testable indicators discussed in Paragraph 777:051. 12. In
general, the Processor is free to resume internal processing after execution of an External
Function instruction, except for the core storage accesses required for transmission of data
between the'Processor and the peripherals, and the control functions necessary for proper handling of the input-output devices.
Each character transmitted to and from an I/O synchronizer requires one core storage
cycle, limiting the maximum gross data transfer rate of the Model IV Processor to 500,000 characters per second between core storage and peripheral subsystems.
Some important considerations regarding simultaneous operations for the UNIVAC 1050
system using the Model IV Central Processor are:
o
Total data transfer rate cannot exceed 500,000 char/sec.
Any subsystem can operate simultaneously with internal processing.
o
In general, only one-way data transfers are possible; e. g., the
Uniservo m A Magnetic Tape Subsystem can either read or write,
but cannot do both simultaneously. The two exceptions to this generality are the Standard Communications Subsystem, which can
receive and transmit messages simultaneously, and the Uniservo VI C
Magnetic Tape Subsystem, which can perform one read and one write
operation simultaneously.
Data transfers involving the Uniservo m A Magnetic Tape Subsystem, the Uniservo IV C Magnetic Tape Subsystem, and the
Fastrand Mass Storage Subsystem are mutually exclusive; i. e., only
one of the three can operate at a time. However, any one of these
three subsystems can operate simultaneously with any group of subsystems not including one of these three.
Some typical time demands on the central processor by the various peripherals are shown in
Table I. Additional timing information is presented in the sections on particular peripheral devices (Sections 777:043 through 777:102).
© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
9/64
777: 112.101
UNIVAC 1050
§
112.
TABLE 1: MODEL IV CENTRAL PROCESSOR USAGE BY PERIPHERAL SUBSYSTEMS
Peripheral
Subsystem
Cycle Time,
msec
Central Processor
Usaget
Conditions
Card Reader,
800 cards/min
75
0.91%
reading full 80-column cards.
Card Punch,
300 cards/min
200
0.34%
punching 80-column cards.
Printer,
700 lines/min
86
1. 20%
printing full lines with a full
character set and spacing
one line.
Uniservo m A,
133,000 char/sec
16.8
25.6%
1200-character blocks.
Uniservo IV C,
90,000 char/sec
29.4
14.6%
1200-character blocks.
Uniservo VI C,
34,100 char/sec
58.8
7.3%
58.8
14.6%
Fastrand
93*
reading or writing 1200character blocks.
reading and writing 1200character blocks simultaneously.
1.18%*
*
Punched Paper Tape,
1000 char/sec
100
0.72%
100-character blocks.
UNIVAC 1004
Model I
150
0.63%
reading cards at 400 cards/
min.
150
0.69%
printing at 400 lines/min.
300
0.31%
punching cards at 200 cards/
min.
t
Includes execution of standard I/O routines.
* The figures shown are for an average random access time of 92 msec and a block length of
one sector. Central Processor usage could vary from 0.71% for maximum access time to
almost 100% for large blocks and minimum access time.
9/64
777:121.100
UNIVAC 1050
Instruction List
INSTRUCTION LIST
§ 121.
1\
V
=
L.OGICAL AND
= LOGICAL
OR
a. = SENTINEL
t
00 IS INTERPRETED BY THE CIRCUITRY AS 04.
§
000 IS INTERPRETED BY THE CIRCUITRY AS 010.
**
0000 15 INTERPRETED BY THE CIRCUITRY AS 020.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
IF
a =
N. B.
I, 81 T !S
=
0: I F
a = 2,
81 T 5
=
I.
SUBSCRIPT 1 INDICATE!'> IMMEDIATE DATA
9/64
UNIVAC 1050
777: 121.101
Iii 121.
CARO
PUNCH
PRINTER
UNISERVO
III C
TAPE UNIT
UN15ERVO
'V C
TAPE UNIT
UNISERVQ
V, t
TAPE UNIT
UNISERVO
111 A
TAPE UNIT
INDI.
CARD
PUNCH
CATORS
PRINTER
UNI5ERVO
III C
TAPE UNIT
UNISERVO
'V C
TAPE UNIT
UNISERVO
V, C
TAPE UNIT
UNISERVa
iliA
TAPE UNIT
FAST RAND
•• =52 ON ROW READER
d= 51 ON ROW READER
43
44
S3
S4
Unconditional Jump to M Address
Conditional Jump
DEC OCT
~~ ~~
;r~h:tii~nd~c~':o~:nl!it~~~i:.!~dPb;r:t.~2jc4~·n~2j:~~:t:c;f~n5T~:e:~~t;: 48
60
r~ 1~ ~:r~::rt~:i~~~~~E:;rl~~I'b:~~:jtJ:~~ i~m~tto Mx
~~
~~
~~~Pt::~~ w;t~rlr~~lj~"..,:.'!CI't
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
-25
26
22·
23
24
25
26
27
30
31
32
Set Sense fndicotor I to 1 and
Sel Sennlndlcotor2 to land
310 I and
I !CIO and
2 to 0 and
3100 ond
27
33
But!CIn is depressed
jump
lump
iump
iump
jump
lump
I~~b~t:nl;~~~~ ~~dMI:lCI~:IM3X
J~ Res.ts Pro·
r""pt Inhibit and jump (Class
.~~ ~~ t~~:~:;li~a~~~~~~I:f+"":lti~t:'lt~t lon~jbi~m~n,~ it;p (Clols 2)
• 30
31
36
Release Proensor Parity or Abnonnol Interrupl Inhibit and
37
W:l:a(;laD:cl~ol Overflow lnle.ruptlnhlblt and
(R ..... Programmed Inhibil Only)
lump (Class 21.
53
6S
58
72
I"dicator and T'aee
Stall 10 0 and lump
Jump to Mil' HOperator Interrupt i.lnhibited
shown.
DEC OCT
~1
H ~~~:~a·1 \l tC:hCD,Oc~~rj~~:
37
32
33
HOOP
41
High
45
Result of lall arithmetic operation was zero
Th.",
four
49
61
SO
62
63
64
51
52
.40
incii,olors are (lff"ellte!
instructions:
ee,
~~ ~~ ~::~:~i'!~;1~i;:lr~~e~:~r~~~IO~~~~~~~~jDO~e:I~~"'II:: d7J:'!:~;
40
SO
Decimal Oye.Flow occurn.d since lost t,,"I. "th"l"dicaIOr is
41
51
42
52
SID •• Indieola •• 33·40 in Mx memory position and p'Qc... d,o
nex,lnstruction
Se' Indicato •• 33·40 from Mx memory position ond proceed to
n~xl instruction
Input-Outputstalus tut foundindicalor(s) set to 1
Test and resetop.rator Interrupt ... quest
~:~I',;,~ltO~~!f7~~~t~~:u~~hi~~~ehdi~~~ds(C~~ss 2)
Stop/Go to cenlrol counter ",hen conlole Itart is d.p..... d.
IgnoreMu5ed fo,display.
ProcusorPority and Abnormallntlfrupt Is inhibited(Class 1)
(Manual Switch Only)
Sense Switch Ion console II ON
S."se Switch 2 on co".ol. II ON
Sense Switch 3 on console I. ON
Sense Indicator 1 is set(tolJ
~~ ~~ ~::: i~~:~:::; 3:: ::: !:: II
~~ ~~ f;!fr~:: r!d;r::~:~t set!CI I .... set T.",,",
sello I, rese! it 10 0 ond jump•
-RESETS the inhibitou!CImatically g ... erat.d whlnthelnterrupt accurr.d.
Reproduced from UNIVAC 1050 Code Card, UP-3930.
9/64
777:141.100
UNIVAC 1050
Data Code Table
DATA CODE TABLE
§ 141.
CARD CODES
COMPAT.
TAPE
CODE
MACHINE
CODE
STANDARD
PRINTER
CHAR.
OCT.
NO.
0
80 COLUMN
90 COLUMN
NO PIjNCH
NO PUNCH
NOT U5EoCi
000000
SPACE
INON-PRINT)
00
11-5-8
1-3-5-7
101101
000001
:J
01
1
11
0-3-5-7
0
1
1-9
3
3-9
5
5-9
7
7-9
9
10 0000
000010
-IMINUS OR
HYPHEN)
001010
000011
000001
000100
000101
000110
000111
02
03
04
2
3
4
5
6
7
S
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
13.1
132
33
34
135
36
37
3B
39
40
41
42
43
a
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0-6-S
11-6-8
12-5-8
12
5-8
12-3-8
12-0
12-'
12-2
12-3
12-4
12-5
12-6
12-7
12-8
12-9
3-8
12-6-8
12-7-8
7-8
11-4-8
.
-"
11-0
11-1
11-2
11-3
11-4
1 -5
11-6
11-7
11-8
11-9
0-5-8
4-8
11-7-8
O~I-3·7-9
1-3-5-7-9
0'5-7-9
0-Hl·5-7
'-3-7-9
1-3-5-9
0-1-3
1-5-9
1-5
0-7
0-3-5
0-3
1-7-9
5-7
3-7
3-5
0-1-5-7
0-1-5-9
0-1-3-5-7-9
0-1-5-7-9
0-1
0-1-3-5-9
0-3-7-9
1:3-5
3·5-9
0-9
0-5
0.5-9
1-3
1-3-7
3-5-7
1-7
0-1-9
00 0010
000011
00 0100
000101
000110
00 0111
00 1000
001000
aD 1001
001100
11 1101
01 OOOO
76
):I)
77
1.57
58
159
16C
61
162
63
THE SECOND STANDARD CHARACTER SHOWN IS OPTIONAL
NOTE:
-'
'""
PROGRAM·ID
PAGE
U
75
UNIVAC
I
PROGRAM ________________________________________________________- - - - - - -
I
PROGRAMMER ________________ DATE
>-'
80
!
,
I
,
m
I
PAGE ____ OF___ PAGES
~
OPERANDS
OPERATION
13
I
COMMENTS
PROGRAM.ID
~
I
1819
040
30
45 146
70
60
50
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
72
75
80
m
90
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
. I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
0-
..,.
I
I
»
c:
I
I
C-
I
I
I
I
::r
I
~
1
I
I
I
b'
I
I
1
I
I
I
I,
I
-0
I
;
I
CD
O
n
-uo
I
I
e.
0'
I
I
o
I
I
:;-
I
I
I
::J
::J
Q.
.0'
:;!'
---
1___ -.1_ ~
UP.2591 Rev.l
---.l
J
J
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
J
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
~
1
I
I
I
-'
J
I
I
0')
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'
I
I
I
~
I
I
I
I
:
1:1
r
l>
z
C)
I
@
.;.
m
--I
~
1
'"
a;;:0
z
For BEGIN onl
SEQUENCE
LABEL
(AGE3 .i'N~ 6 7
11
3:
l>
n
:z::
z
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
r
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C
l>
C)
m
'"tl
l>
r
'-I
'-I
~
~
:::l
l~~ L_~L_I
(80·90 COLUMN FORM)
~
o
o
777: 181.100
UNIVAC 1050
Progrom Tronslator
PAL TAPE
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: PAL TAPE
§
181.
.3
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
. 12
Description
This table is required if the PATCH Assembler
is to be used.
PAL TAPE Assembly
System.
.4
Pass 2 - performs a tag edit to a scratch tape.
Pass 3 - builds the tag table.
Pass 4 - assembles instructions and produces the
object code, code-edit listings, and
punched symbol table (optional).
The program diagnostics that can be included are
the DUMP and PCALL routines, described in
Paragraph 777:171. 67.
Additions, dele.tions, or alterations to the Library
Tape can be made by using a library maintenance
program in a separate run (see Paragraph
777: 151. 16). Corrections to the object program can
be made by reassembly or with the PATCH Assembler (see Paragraph .4 below).
Originator: .
UNIV AC Division, Sperry
Rand Corporation.
. 14
Maintainer: .
as above .
. 15
Availability:
currently in use .
.2
INPUT
The PAL TAPE Library contains the translator and
input-output routines for all peripherals. Userdefined routines can be added, using OPUS.
PATCH Assembler
Additions, deletions, or alterations of the object
program can be made in a separate run, using the
PATCH Assembler without a full reassembly.
Input to PATCH are the symbol table (optional output from the PAL Assembler) and the Insertion,
Change, and Deletion cards written in PAL Language.
Output consists of an updated symbol table, patch
cards, and a listing of the changes in object and
source code.
The PAL TAPE Assembler accepts source programs written in PAL Assembly Language on
punched cards or, if three tape units are available,
on magnetic tape. Source statements must be sequenced according to coding sheet page, line, arid
insertion numbers. There is no practical limit
to the number of source statements or tags that
can be assembled. Other limitations are as
follows: maximum number of NAME lines within
a procedure definition is 10; maximum number of
nested DO's is 10.
The PATCH Assembler has facilities for the addition
or deletion of coding and the replacement of sections
of coding. The replacement section of coding can
be the same size as, larger than, or smaller than
the original section. The same precautions must
be observed when using PATCH as when patching
by hand; e. g., jumps into areas modified by
PATCH can cause errors. There will probably be
few advantages to using PATCH on small programs,
but it could be' quite useful on large programs where
the assembly time is appreciable.
OUTPUT
The output object program is in UNIVAC 1050
machine language on punched cards or on magnetic
tape. Documentation consists of a printed listing
showing source code, object code and location, and
coding errors. Some of the errors that will be
detected are out-of-sequence condition, duplicated
or undefined labels, invalid operation codes,
directive errors, and missing procedures. In
addition, a symbol table can be punched if desired.
The action in
Pass 1- collects all PROC's (subroutines from
input and library tape).
Its operation requires at least two magnetic tape
units, a card reader, a card punch (optional if
card output is not desired), and at least 8, 192
positions of core storage. With two tape units,
input is on cards and output can be either on cards
or tape. If a third tape unit is available, input may
be on tape. The translator and a library of
input-output routines and user-defined procedures
are provided on the PAL Library Tape, which also
contains REGENT (the 1050 report generator) and
the Tape Sort Routine, described in Section
777:151.
.13
TRANSLATING PROCEDURE
PAL TAPE is a four-pass assembler.
each of the passes is as follows:
This translator permits utilization of all the facilities of the PAL language as described in section
777:171.
.3
OUTPUT (Contd.)
,5
TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE
The assembler generates one machine instruction
for each line of coding except for macro calls and
directives. Except for the input-output and file
control routines, the space requirements and
running time of an assembled object program should
be the same as for good hand-coding. The generalized input-output and file control routines provide
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc,
9/64
UNIVAC 1050
777: 181.500
§
181.
.5
.6
Minimum configuration required for PAL TAPE
assemblies is two magnetic tape units, card reader,
card punch, printer, and at least 8, 192 positions
of core storage. If three tape units are available,
input and/or output can be on magnetic tape. Programs can be assembled to run on any UNIVAC
1050 system.
TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE (Contd.)
the required coding for a specific program but are,
in general, less efficient than a hand-coded routine
for a specific application. However, use of the
standard routines should significantly decrease the
amount of programming time required. Typical
storage requirements and execution times of the
input-output routines are shown in Table I.
COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS
.7
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
The following types of errors are detected and
indicated by symbols on the printed listing:
Duplicate or undefined label.
Expression too long .
Operation code error.
Card sequence error.
T APE block count error.
More than 10 nested DO's.
Incorrect expression in a DO statement.
Incorrect statement form.
Missing procedure.
More than 30 parameters in a PROC statement.
Assembly speed is approximately 300 source
.language statements per minute; it varies with the
number of macros called and the different input and
output media.
COORDINATOR (Section 777:191) is required during
the execution of the PAL TAPE object program to
furnish the connection between the I/O control
routines and the object program.
TABLE I: STORAGE REQUIREMENTS AND EXECUTION TIMES FOR I/O ROUTINES
Name
Storage Required,
characters
Execution Time,
msec
4200
-
two-program version
CARD READER
637
2*
includes three input areas
CARD PUNCH
928
2*
includes three output areas
PRINTER
908
2*
includes two output areas
MAGNETIC TAPE
FILE CONTROL
900
0.6
to place the absolute address
of the next input or output
item in the arithmetic
register.
to obtain the next item from
an input file and transfer it
to a working area or output
file.
to 0 btain the next item from
an input file or working area
and transfer it to an output
file.
COORDINATOR
3200
COORDINATOR
1. 3*
1. 2*
*
9/64
Comment
single-program version
Does not include data transfer time between peripheral device and core storage.
777: 182.100
UNIVAC 1050
Program Translator
PAL JR
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: PAL JR
§ 182.
. 12
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
Description (Contd.)
I)
.12
PAL JR Assembly
System.
III
Description
•
The PAL JR translator permits the use of a highly
restricted version of the PAL Language described
in Section 777:171 on minimum-configuration systems consisting of a card punch, card reader,
printer, and 4, 096 positions of core storage. The
main restrictions upon PAL JR, with respect to
PAL TAPE (as described in Section 777:181), are
as follows:
iii
No I/O control routines other than those for
printer, card reader, and card punch are
provided.
There is no library.
PROC declarations (user-defined macros)
cannot be processed.
There is no PATCH assembler.
The I/o routines are in the form of card decks
which are added to the user's own coding prior
to assembly. PAL JR is a two-pass assembler.
The first pass develops the tag table, and the
second assembles the instructions and produces
an object deck and code listing. The listing is
identical to that for PAL TAPE.
.13
Originator:
UNIV AC Division, Sperry
Rand Corporation.
•
I/O areas have fixed labels and cannot exceed
two per peripheral device.
.14
Maintainer·
as above.
o
Maximum label size is three characters, and
the maximum number of labels is 100.
.15
Availability:
November, 1964 (date
available to users).
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
9/64
777:183.100
UNIVAC 1050
Program T ronslator
PAL CARD
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: PAL CARD
. 12
§ 183.
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
Description
PAL CARD is a two-pass assembler that assembles
one instruction for each line of coding, except for
certain directives. The first pass develops the
tag table; the second assembles the instructions
and produces the object code deck, the code-edit
listing (identical to that for PAL TAPE), and a
symbol table deck (optional). A maximum of 280
labels can be processed on systems having 8, 192
positions of core storage; an additional 400 labels
are permitted for each additional 4, 096 core positions.
PAL CARD Assembly
System.
PAL CARD permits the full use of the PAL language
as described in Section 777:171, with the exception
of magnetic tape input-output and file control macros and the processing of PROC's (user-defined
macros). PAL CARD is intended for card-oriented
systems with a card reader, card punch, printer,
punched paper tape subsystem (optional), one magnetic tape unit (optional), and at least 8,192
positions of core storage. Standard input-output
routines are of the generator type and are processed with the source coding in a preassemblypass.
The output of this pass is a set of input-output
routines in source code that have been tailored to
the specific object program. These and the source
code deck form the input to the assembler.
Description (Contd.)
The PATCH assembler can be used to modify the
object program without the need for full reassembly
(as described in Paragraph 777:171.4).
. 13
Originator: .
UNIV AC Division, Sperry
Rand Corporation.
.14
Maintainer:
as above.
.15
Availability:
currently in use.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
9/64
777:191.100
UNIVAC 1050
Operating Environment
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: COORDINATOR
§ 191.
. 12
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: ..
.12
Description
o
o
o
o
Transfer of control from one program to
the other, when two programs are
running together, is made when the central processor would be delayed in fulfilling an I/O request by the program
having control; i. e., when the program
becomes I/O-limited.
o
No log of operations is produced as yet.
o
Errors presently detected by COORDINATOR include: program exceeds
available memory, program is not on
master tape, attempted simultaneous
loading of two programs, an absolutecode program would overlay COORDINATOR. These errors cause the processor to halt with a specific error display.
o
Storage requirements are 3200 characters
for the single-program version and 4200
positions for the dual-program version.
. . . . . . COORDINATOR.
While complete details on COORDINATOR, the
executive routine for the UNIVAC 1050, are not
available to date, the following general specifications are known:
o
Description (Contd.)
Assembled programs incorporating
routines from the PAL Library Tape
must run under control of COORDINATOR. COORDINATOR provides the
linkage between a "worker program"
and the routines (including I/O control
routines) incorporated from the Library
Tape.
The coordination of all I/O requests,
including requests from communications
equipment, can be handled by COORDINATOR.
One version of COORDINATOR provides
for the loading and execution of one
program by itself or of two programs
in parallel, on a time-shared basis.
Programs can be called from a master
tape either by control cards or by use
of the console. Provision is made
for aborting a program presently being
executed in order to call a program of
higher priority. (The establishment of
rerun points has not been defined as yet.)
.13
Availability: . . . . . . initial version is currently
in use.
.14
Originator:
.15
Maintainer:...
. 16
Reference: . . . . . . . none published to date.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
. . . . UNIVAC Division, Sperry
Rand Corporation.
. . as above.
9/64
777:201.001
UNIVAC 1050
System Performance
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
201.
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING (777:201.100)
These problems involve updating a master file from transaction data in a detail file and
producing a printed record of the results of each transaction. This type of run is one of the most
common commercial data processing jobs (e. g., in payroll, billing and inventory control applications). The Standard File Problems are fully described in Section 4:200.1 of the Users' Guide.
As noted in Section 777: 111, Simultaneous Operations, the overall capability of the
UNIV AC 1050 for simultaneous input-output operations is less than one would expect when the
high speed tape units (Uniservo III A and IV C) or the Fastrand units are used. These units have
no read-write overlap and, with the Model III Processor, the card equipment is interlocked during their operation. However, in typical equipment configurations such as Configurations I, II,
and III, the overlap of I/O functions is very high.
In Configuration I (the Typical Card System), the master and detail input files are on
the card reader. For problems A, B, C, and D, the 200-cpm card punch is always the controlling factor on overall processing time. A faster (300-cpm) card punch is available, which would
increase the Configuration I throughput by 50% for an increase of only about 8% in the system
cost. The faster punch was not used in Configuration I because the guidelines for Standard Configuration I only called for a 200-cpm capability. *
The master files are on magnetic tape in Configurations II, III, and IV. * The detail
file is assigned to the card reader and the report file to the printer. To permit the Generalized
File Processing Problem to be performed within the 8, 192-character core storage of Configuration II, the block length of master file records is held to 648 characters (6 records) for this
configuration only. Master files for Configurations III and IV contain 1,080 characters (10 records)
per block.
Because of the relatively high speeds of both the Model III and Model IV Central Processors, the I/o units are the controlling factors with only one exception, mentioned later in this
section. In general the printer is the controlling factor at moderate and high activity ratios
and the magnetic tapes at low ratios. Consequently, the upper (printer-limited) portions of the
curves for a particular configuration are identical for all problems. The differences in the
upper portions of the curves for the various configurations are a result of the different printing
rates of the printers in the respective configurations (see pages 777 :031. 200 through 777 :031. 500).
The only situation in which the central processor is limiting is Configurations II and
Note that Configuration IlIA (which uses
the faster Model IV Central Processor but is the same as Configuration III otherwise) does not
become central processor limited in this situation.
III, Problem B, for activity ratios of less than 0.04.
The point at which the magnetic tape units, rather than the printer, become the controlling factor depends on the master-file blocking factor (number of records per block). In
general, the higher the blocking factor, the lower the activity ratio at which the magnetic
tapes become limiting. This effect can be seen by comparing the curves for Configuration II
with the curves for Configuration III. Both configurations have the same type printer, magnetic tape units, and central processor; but Configuration III has a larger core store, allowing
a higher blocking factor.
Configurations III and IlIA have identical performance (except for the case mentioned
previously) although Configuration IlIA uses the significantly faster Model IV Central Processor.
Again, this is because the I/O devices, not the central processor, are the controlling factor.
*
See Users' Guide Section 4: 030 for definition of Standard Configurations and Section 777: 031,
this report, for a description of the Standard Configurations as applied to the UNIVAC 1050.
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
9/64
777:201.002
UNIVAC 1050
§
201.
Since two programs can be run concurrently under control of the executive routine,
COORDINATOR, the timings for the central processors are shown for each file problem for
Configurations III, IlIA, and IV. (The special input-output routines required to fit the Standard
File Problems into the SK available storage capacity in Configuration II probably would not work
with COORDINATOR). As can be seen from the curves, a large share of the central processor's
time is unused during file processing. This time could be used to process another program
simultaneously, under control of COORDINATOR, provided sufficient peripheral devices were
provided to handle the second program's files and sufficient core storage were available to hold
the second program and its data areas.
SORTING
(777:201.200)
The standard estimate for sorting SO-character records by straightforward merging
on magnetic tape was developed from the time for Standard File Problem A by the method explained in Paragraph 4:200. 213 of the Users' Guide. A two-way merge was used in System Configuration II (which has only four magnetic tape units), and a three-way merge was used in Configurations III and IV. The results are shown in Graph 777:201. 200. Configurations II, III, and
IlIA use UniservoVI C Tape Units which provide read-write-compute simultaneity, giving excellent performance from tape units which can transfer data at only 34, 000 characters per second.
On the other hand, Configuration IV employs the Uniservo III A tape units, which have a peak
transfer rate of 133,000 characters per second but avery limited read-write overlap. The performance of the UNIVAC 1050 Configuration IV is not significantly better than the other configurations, due to this limited capability for read-write overlap.
Times for the standard UNIVAC 1050 sort routines (magnetic tape and magnetic drum)
are not available to date.
9/64
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
777:201.011
§ 201.
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 1 (STANDARD FILE PROBLEM A)
CONFIGURATION
ITEM
1
(File 1)
Char/block
K
Records/block
msce/block
lnputOutput
msce/switch
Times
I
II
III
lIlA
80
648
1.080
1.080
6
10
10
(File 1)
0.5
36.5
1 - = - - - , -1 - - - - - -I- --1-00 - - ~3_ _. _ 1- _ _7 _5 - _ . 1----128
142
File 4
File I/File 2
File l/F!le 2
f-----~3
_____
75/300
1.080
10
49.2
--1-00---
49.2
142
142
0
- - -0 _ . - f - - - -0- - . - 1 - -0- - - f - - - -0- - - - 1 - - - -_ _ 0_ _. _ 1--
_ _0 _ _
O_ _ 1-f--- _ _
_ _0 _ _
,..--~-
0.6
File 4
msce/block
0.4
r- ___1. _0_ _ _ f - - - 1.1
- - - I--~- f - - - - - r- ___3._3_ _ _ f - - _ _3_ . 3_ _ _ __ -.-:l.2... _ f - - _ _0_ . 9_ _ _
m sec/record
---'.':L _ _. _
Processor
msce/detail
~---.-
1- _ _ _
0._
5 _ _ - f--- _ _0_.5 _ _ _
msce/work
~b_9_ _ _
1- _ _1_0_.1_ _ _. -
b7 + b8
msce/report
3
msce/block
System
for C. P.
Performance
F
~--.-
and
at
dominant
= 1. 0
column.
a3 K
File 1 Master In
0.4_
r1.6
- - - --_.- I----w.;;- r - - - - - -_.- f-m.;;- 1 - - - ~- I-'7.~
~
8.7_
Hl.0
6.8
2.9
File 4 Reports
44.4
4.9
I---- - ~.S- I-~
25.3
Total
Unit of measur
1-0 -.3- -
300
0.2
---0-.3_
__
0.4_
- - - 0.9
-_ _ _ _ _ ___
0_.2 _
4:200.1132
276.1
852
- 6.0
- - f--1.420
250.6
1.1
1.1
1.1
1 - - - I-~ - - 5.1 - i--soo- I-~
r-rue 2 MasteroUt - - f~3Details- 1- 3-.4- - I--- - laG. a-1 - - - -60.0
f--=,-.--. -
4
3.5
1.1
1.0
2.2
1-----
--~____
3_.1_
3.1
f---~--- --~- f - - - - - - - - 3.5
3.5
al
f--:c:---- a2 K
1-- _ _0_.2
4:200.112
0
1 - - - -0 -
0.3
0.6
0.6
~---.-
Central
Times
15.9
1 - - - - -7-5 -
1 - - - - - If--~- 1 - - - - - - -t----uB-
0
0
0
0
File 4
2.2
2.9
4.9
msce penalty/ ~1/FiIe2 _ f--~~1------ f------- 1-----block
~3_ _ _ _ _ 1- _ _
f-- _ _
0. 2_ _
6. O
__
6 . 8_ _. - f-- _ _
2
REFERENCE
IV
1.420
1---
----I - - 0.4
1 - - - 2:2.._1 - - 44.4
I- 2_.2_ _
2.2
2.2_
I - - - I-- 2-.2-- - - -
- - - I-- 1.6
1.6_
1---- - 2.6
1.420
2.6
f-J..28D
1---
62.1
1.420
62.1
4:200.114
1.280
characters
~o~_ f--~O_ _ _ I--
1,400*
___
5 000**
--"'--
-
5 000**
-~.---
5 000**
-'---
_ _ _26_5_ _ _
_ _2~_ _ _ _2~_7_ _ _
~---- I--~--~Space
~ckslto.~
~pks
24 !<>..1§.
~--Warkina'
Total
~O _ _ _ _
f--~--- 1---6~_ -~--- I---~_ _3_,0_00_ _ _
I-~---- 1---2~ _ _ _
-~--- ---2;~_
f--
1-~4_ _ _ _ 1--3~
___
___
~83_2
-~---
50
50
50
50
6,443
7,986
13,714
13,714
4:200.1151
-2z~_
200
12,832
simplified I/O control (own coding).
includes COORDINATOR.
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
9/64
777:201.100
UNIVAC 1050
System Performance
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
· 113 Timing basis: . .
using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.113.
· 114 Graph:. . . . . . . . . . . see graph below.
· 115 Storage space required
Configuration I: . . . . 6,400 characters.
Configuration II: ... 8,000 characters.
Configuration III: ... 13,700 characters.
Configuration IlIA: .. 13,700 characters.
Configuration IV: ... 12,800 characters.
201.
.1
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING
.11
Standard File Problem A
.111 Record sizes
Master file: . . . . . . 108 characters.
1 card.
Detail file: .
Report file:.
1 line.
. 112 Computation: ..
standard.
1,00 0.0
7
4
2
10 0.0
7
4
2
Time in Minutes to
Process 10, 000
Master File Records
1 0.0
7
..,.
/
.
/./
//
4
III,IIIA
2
1.0
7
//
j~
J
~
~IV
..0#
2
--
.-.-'
-~=-
..... ."...,.
4
V
"...""""
__ '"C.
-='"
tion Ill)
~ (Configura
-
=_
. ration Ill}\., IV)
C. 1'. tConilgu
""
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations)
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
9/64
UNIVAC 1050
777:201.120
.122 Computation: . . . . . . . standard.
.123 Timing basis: . .
. using estimating procedure
Ii 201.
. 12
Standard File Problem B
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.12 .
. 121 Record sizes
.124 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . . see graph below.
Master file: . . . . . . 54 characters.
Detail file: . . . . . . . 1 card.
Report file: . . . . . . . 1 line.
1,000. 0
7
4
2
100. 0
7
4
--
2
\\\j>,.
~
Time in Minutes to
10. 0
Process 10, 000
Master File Records
7
.- ..-.-
/./"
//
4
//
J'/
2
nl!
1. 0
",,--
",,""
--
____
7 __
III
IlIA
-
~U
IV
2
\'J
~~
~/
--- i"'"
....-
___ --Po ---.
C.
- ni· guratlon
.
Ill) -
{CO
1
-
-. ration III A, IV)
~
C. p. {Coni1gu
",
~
o. 1
0.0
0.1
0.33
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
9/64
1.0
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
777 :201.130
!l 201.
. 13
.132 Computation: . . . . . . . standard.
. 133 Timing basis: . . . . . . using estimating procedure
Standard File Problem C
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.13.
.131 Record sizes
. 134 Graph:. . . . . . . . . . . see graph below.
Master file: . . . . . . 216 characters.
Detail file: . . . . . . 1 card.
Report file:. . . . . . . 1 line.
1,000.0
7
4
/.~
2
\:
100.0
7
4
--
2
l-uJ>.
1111\.,
1'1
~
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
10.0
Master File Records
--" ' ..,...,
7
AI"/
//
4
//
~
2
III, I1IA-l>
1.0
~
7
4
~
V
~_--
~ .........
-
~-
--
---
c.
----:-111)
nfguratl on
p. lCo
...-=
1
- = ===-=
IV)
.=
. -nf'guration lIlA,
C. P."(Co 1
2
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
9/64
777:201.140
§
UNIVAC 1050
201.
.14
.142 Computation: . . . . . . . trebled .
. 143 Timing basis: . . . . . . using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.14 .
. 144 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . . see graph below .
Standard File Problem D
. 141 Record sizes
Master file: . . . . . . 108 characters.
Detail file: . . . . . . . 1 card.
Report file: . . . . . . . 1 line .
1,000 . 0
7
4
2
r.
100 .0
7
4
==
.
2
..,-'
""~
//
4
//
)~
2
dJ
1 .0
III, IlIA -7 -:..
-~-
__, _
C. 1'.
-
/'
-==
_ nrgu-ca
fon
111)
1
~co
1-
,;""'"
• .-=
- -ation
- lIlA, IV)
_ -.
____ ...- -c.1'·
(Conhgu-C
~'
IV.
.. r
I-"
4
/'
2
1'J
ll, ll\,
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
10 .0
Master File Records
7
.. '
"
V
o.1
0.0
O. 1
0.33
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
9/64
1.0
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
777:201.200
§ 201.
.213 Timing basis: . . .
.2
SORTING
. 21
Standard Problem Estimates
. using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.213 .
. 214 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . . see graph below .
.211 Record size: . . . . . . . 80 characters .
. 212 Key size: . . . . . . . . . 8 characters.
1,000
7
4
2
.Y
100
7
.I'
4
2
Time in Minutes to
Put Records Into
Required Order
/
1/
¥
.I
VV
~'?'#
-<.;;
,
10
'I ' ' '
/ !/r7
'/
i
L
-$>"
7
" "
;
1/
/
4
II
.I
1/
2
/
1
7
f
4
/
/
~
!I' 11
1/ \I
V ~lI'
/
"".I' "
/
2
0.1
100
2
4
7
1,000
2
4
7 10,000 2
4
7
100,000
Number of Records
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations)
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
9/64
777 :211.1 01
UNIVAC 1050
Physical Characteristics
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
§
211.
Width,
inches
Depth,
inches
Height,
inches
26
75
55
2,500
?
26
?
24
?
55
?
?
?
*
*
*
*
*26
*
*
*
*
*
*
55
1,415
*
*2.5
6,825
Uniservo Synchronizer (all models)
Uniservo Power Supply (all models)
Uniservo IlIA or IVC Tape Handler
Uniservo VIC Tape Handler (Control
is included in first tape unit)
Transition Cabinet (Required for
first IlIA or IVC tape handler)
36
22
31
26
26
30
55
55
63
650
815
810
1.1
3.0
3.0
3,500
8,200
8,850
24
26
64
500
1.2
3,500
18
30
63
150
-
High Speed Printer (all models)
Card Reader (all models)
Card Punch (all models)
43
40
38
33
22
26
55
45
47
1,250
600
800
Console - Integrated (mounts atop
the processor)
Console - Freestanding
Inquiry Typewriter
8
60
25
28
31
26
11
41
39
60
200
151
-
40
35
66
500
2.5
6,850
122
36
48
32
26
26
5,150
63
55
650
2,000
96
(80 optional)
12.5
1.0
5.9
19,500
2,800
6,000
Unit
Model III Central Processor
(includes 4,096 characters)
Model IV Central Processor
(includes 8, 192 characters)
Central Processor Power Supply
Additional Memory Module Model III (4,096 characters)
Additional Memory Module Model IV (8,192 characters)
"B" Power Supply
Punched Paper Tape Subsystem
(includes reader, punch, and
synchronizer in one cabinet)
Fastrand Mass Storage Unit
(all models)
Fastrand Control Unit (all models)
Communications Subsystem Cabinet
(Each Communication Multiplexer
and associated equipment requires
2 cabinets.)
*
24
Weight,
pounds
*
Power,
KVA
5.0
1.7
1.0
1.5
BTU
per hr.
13,640
*
4,930
2,500
4,600
-
included in Central Processor specifications.
General Requirements
Temperature: • • . . • . . . • . . . • . . . . . . . • • • • • . between 60 0 F and 80 0 F.
Relative Humidity: • . . . • . . . • . . . . • . . • . . . • . . between 40% and 70%.
Power: . • • . . . . . • • . . . • • . . . . • . . . . . • . • • • . 230-volt, I-phase, 60-cycle, 3-wire;
or 208-volt, 3-phase, 60-cycle, 4-wire.
©1964 Auerbach Carporation and Info,lnc.
9/64
777~221.1 01
PRICE DATA
§ 221.
IDE NTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
Monthly
Rental
$
Monthly
Maintenance
$
Model III Central Processor
(includes 4, 096 characters of
core storage and 3 I/O
channels)
1,185
115
47,500
Model IV Central Processor (ineludes 8,192 characters of core
storage)
2,385
230
95,500
150
275
5
10
6,000
11,500
45
85
3
7
1,800
4,600
Inquiry Typewriter
Console - Freestanding
Console - Integrated
165
75
45
15
5
3
6,600
3,000
1,800
"B" Power Supply (Required when
any peripherals except card
reader, card punch, printer,
and one additional subsystem
are used)
150
15
6,000
Model III Memory Module - 4,096
characters (7 max)
325
15
13,000
Model IV Memory Module - 8, 192
characters (7 max)
685
2;'
27,400
Name
No.
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
PRICES
Purchase
$
Optional Features
Multiply-Divide Model III
Model IV
Input/Output Channels (per
channel) Model III
Model IV
0670-00
Core Storage
INTERNAL
STORAGE
Random Access Drum Storage
0900-00
5002-02
*
**
Fastrand I Storage Unit - 66
million characters (8 per controller max)
3,300
*
160,000
Fastrand II Storage Unit - 132
million characters (8 per controller max)
3,800
**
184,000
995
100
39,800
Fastrand I Control Unit
$250 for first unit, $120 for each additional unit.
$265 for first unit, $125 for each additional unit.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
9/64
UNIVAC 1050
.777:221.102
Ii 221.
PRICE DATA (Contd.)
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
Monthly
Maintenance
Purchase
$
$
$
Fastrand II Control Unit
995
85
39,800
Fastbands option (24 bands)
200
22
9,000
Card Reader - 800/900 cpm; 80
columns
Card Reader - 800/900 cpm; 90
columns
Card Reader - 600 cpm; 80
columns
Card Reader - 600 cpm; 90
colunins
380
100
15,200
380
100
15,200
225
55
9,000
225
55
9,000
Card
Card
Card
Card
665
665
400
400
200
200
115
115
26,600
26,600
18,200
18,200
800
575
185
550
240
195
15
25
38,400
24,300
7,400
22,000
385
?
85
165
5
135
?
30
58
15,400
?
3,400
6,600
200
5005-00
Paper Tape Reader - 1,000 cps
Paper Tape Reader - 300 cps
Paper Tape Reader Spooled Option
Paper Tape Punch -110 cps
Paper Tape Punch Take-up Reel
Option
Paper Tape Control Unit
235
83
9,400
0635-00
1050/1004 Adapter Unit
200
20
8,000
No.
INTERNAL
STORAGE
(Contd)
INPUTOUTPUT
PRICES
Monthly
Rental
0706-00
0706-05
0706-01
0706-04
0600-00
0600-01
0600-12
0600-13
Name
Punch
Punch
Punch
Punch
-
300
300
200
200
cpm;
cpm;
cpm;
cpm;
80
90
80
90
columns
columns
columns
columns
0755-01' Printer - 700/922 lpm
0755-02 Printer - 600/750 lpm
9150-18 Printer Buffer
5003-00 Second Printer Synchronizer and
Buffer
0903-00
0903-01
0636-00
0606-01
0637-00
-
Magnetic TaEe Units
0850-00
0551-01
1353-00
Uniservo InA - 133,000 char/sec
Uniservo InA Synchronizer
Uniservo IlIA Power Supply
750
995
215
155
50
35
36,500
39,800
8,600
0851-04
0556-01
1353-01
Uniservo
Uniservo
Uniservo
Uniservo
750
800
995
215
62
95
85
35
36,500
38,400
39,800
8,600
500
300
125
75
20,000
12,000
600
30
24,000
0858-00
0858-01
5307-00
IVC
lVC
IVC
IVC
- 62,500 char/sec
- 90,000 char/sec
Synchronizer
Power Supply
Uniservo VIC - Control and one
tape unit
Uniservo VIC tape unit - 34,000
char/sec
Uniservo VIC Synchronizer
/
9/64
777:221.1 03
PRICE DATA
PRICE DATA (Contd.)
§ 221.
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
INPUTOUTPUT
(Contd)
No.
Name
PRICES
Monthly
Rental
Monthly
Maintenance
Purchase
$
$
$
675
725
800
1,000
1,300
186
200
220
275
358
30,375
32,625
36,000
45,000
58,500
25
20
5
6
1,125
900
30
8
1,350
25
7
1,125
35
10
1,575
25
7
1,125
45
12
2,025
45
12
2,025
50
14
2,250
35
10
1,575
35
10
1,575
20
6
900
Communications MultiElexer
0900-04
0900-03
0900-02
0900-01
0900-00
4 Simplex positions
8 Simplex positions
16 Simplex positions
32 Simplex positions
64 Simplex positions
Communications Line Terminals
CLT-50I Low Speed Output - 5 Level
Asynchronous
CLT-51I Low Speed Input - 5 Level
Asynchronous
CLT-80L Low Speed Output· 6, 7, and 8
Level Asynchronous
CLT-81L Low Speed Input - 6, 7, and 8
Level Asynchronous
CLT-80lV Medium Speed Output - 5, 6, 7,
and 8 Level Asynchronous
CLT-81lV Medium Speed Input - 5, 6, 7, and
8 Level Asynchronous
CLT-80H High Speed Output - 5, 6, 7, and
8 Level Synchronous
CLT-81H High Speed Input - 5, 6, 7, and 8
Level Synchronous
CLT12IH
High Speed Input - 5 thru 12
Level Synchronous
CLTParallel Parallel Output
CLTParallel Parallel Input
CLTDialing Automatic Dialing
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
9/64
UNIVAC 1107
Univac
(A Division of Sperry Rand Corporation)
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
UNIVAC 1107
Univac
(A Division of Sperry Rand Corporation)
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
784:001.001
UNIVAC 1107
Contents
CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Introduction
Data Structure • • •
System Configuration
VI
6-Tape Business/Scientific System
VII A
10- Tape General System (Integrated)
vm B
20- Tape General System (Paired)
.
Internal Storage
Core Memory •••..
Film Memory • • •
FH-880 Magnetic Drum
Fastrand Storage Unit •
Central Processor. • • •
Console • • • • • • • •
Input- Output; Punched Tape and Card
Card Reader (600 cards/minute) •
Card Punch (150 cards/minute)
Card Punch (300 'cards/minute)
Paper Tape Reader
Paper Tape Punch • • • • • •
Input-Output; Printers
High-Speed Printer (600 lines/minute)
High-Speed Printer (700 lines/minute)
Input- Output; Magnetic Tape
Uniservo II A Magnetic Tape Handler • •
Uniservo III A Magnetic Tape Handler.
Uniservo III C Magnetic Tape Handler. •
Simultaneous Operations • • • • • •
Instruction List •
Coding Specimens
SLEUTH I . .
SLEUTH II • • • • • • •
Data Codes
Fieldata Code
Card Code ••
Collating Sequence • • • •
Problem Oriented Facilities
SORT/MERGE
• • • • •
SORT IT ••
LION • • •
LmRARIAN
CLAMP • • •
MIDAS
COORDINATOR
Process Oriented Languages
COBOL ••
FORTRAN • • • • • • •
•
•
•
·
•
•
..
784:011
784:021
784:031.001
784:031.1
784:031.2
784:031.3
• •
•
•
• •••
•
•
784:041
784:042
784:043
INA
784:051
784:061
• •
•
• •
•
• •
784:071
784:072
INA
784:075
784:076
• 784:081
• INA
• •
•
•
•
•
784:091
784:092
784:093
784:111
784:121
.• 784:131
• 784:132
• 784:141
• 784:142
• • • 784:143
• • 784: 151.13
• • 784: 151.13
• 784: 151.15
• • • 784:151.16
• 784:151.17
• 784:151.17
• • 784: 151.17
• • 784:161
• • 784:162
INA = Information not available
RIP = Report in process
© 1963
Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
8/63
784:001.002
§
UNIVAC 1107
001.
17.
19.
20.
21.
22.
CONTENTS (Contd.)
Machine Oriented Languages
SLEUTH I • • • • • •
SLEU'IH n .....
Operating Environment
EXEC I • • • • • •
EXEC n . . . . .
System Performanc~
General Comments
Worksheet Data •••
Generalized File Processing • •
Sorting . . . . . . . . . . .
Matrix Inversion • • • • • • •
Generalized Mathematical Processing
Physical Characteristics
Price Data • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
RIP = Report in process
8/63
• • 784:171
• 784:172
.
. .
• • • 784:191
• 784: 192
••
• • • •
•
• •
• ••
•
• •
• • • •
A
AUERBACH
®
784:201.001
784:201.011
784:201.1
784!201.2
784:201.3
784:201.4
784:211
784:221
(RIP)
784:011.100
UNIVAC 1107
Introduction
I NTRODUCTI ON
§011.
The UNIVAC 1107 Thin-Film Memory Computer is a large scale data processing
system suitable for both scientific and commercial applications. The 1107 is the solid-state
successor to the vacuum-tube UNIVAC 1105 and 1103 scientific systems and provides
greatly increased speed and flexibility of both internal processing and input-output operations. There is, however, no program compatibility between the 1107 and its predecessors.
Monthly rentals for most 1107 systems will fall within the $40,000 to $70,000 range. The
first customer delivery of a UNIVAC 1107 was made in September, 1962.
Although the UNIVAC 1050 (described in Computer System Report 777:) appears to be
well suited for use as an off-line input-output processor for tape-oriented 1107 systems,
the two 1107 operating systems are designed to provide efficient on-line input-output via the
card reader, punch, and printer through multi-program running techniques. The System
Configuration section includes examples of a fully integrated system (page 784:031.200) and
of a tape-oriented system with an off-line UNIVAC 1050 (page 784:031.300).
Hardware
The main feature that distinguishes the UNIVAC 1107 from other currently available
large scale computer systems is its 128 word locations of Thin - Film Memory. These locations consist of permalloy spots deposited on a thin plate by a vacuum process. Each
spot represents one bit-pOSition of storage, and its direction of magnetization determines
whether it is storing a binary zero or one. The Film Memory has a read access time of
0.333 microsecond and a cycle time of 0.667 microsecond, so it can theoretically be referenced up to 1,500,000 times per second. Specific functions are assigned to 63 of the 128
Film Memory locations. Fifteen locations serve as index registers and 16 as arithmetic
registers or "accumulators." This abundance of arithmetic and index registers contributes
heavily to the power and flexibility of UNIVAC 1107 programming. The remaining 65 Film
Memory locations are available as general-purpose working storage, but there are certain
programming restrictions on their use. Furthermore, instruction execution times are no
faster when the operands are in Film Memory than when they are properly located in Core
Memory.
Core Memory can consist of 16,384, 32,768, 49, 152, or 65,536 word locations.
Each 36-bit word location can hold 1 instruction, 1 floating point data item, from 1 to 6 fixed
point data fields, or 6 alphameric characters. There is no parity bit, and no parity checking is performed on internal operations. The 16, 384-word store can consist of either 1 or
2 banks; the larger models are all divided into 2 independently accessed, asynchronous banks.
Read access time is 1.8 microseconds and cycle time is 4.0 microseconds for each 36- bit
word. By storing instructions in one bank and data in the other, it is possible to overlap the
operation of the two banks to reduce the effective cycle time by a factor of two. This
"alternate bank" storage allocation technique decreases the execution time for most instructions by 4.0 microseconds; e.g., each add, subtract, load, or store instruction takes 8.0
microseconds when the instruction and its operand are in the same bank and only 4.0 microseconds when they are in alternate banks.
The UNIVAC 1107 Central Computer can perform fixed and floating point arithmetic
on one-word binary operands. The 16 arithmetic registers, 15 index registers, a versatile
repertoire of 7-part instructions, recursive indirect addressing, and a partial-word transfer facility permit efficient processing of most scientific problems. Commercial processing
will be somewhat less efficient because the 1107 lacks automatic facilities for editing, decimal arithmetic, and radix conversions.
Although the 1107 uses a I-address· instruction format, a limited 2-address capability is provided by the fact that most instructions can specify the use of anyone of the 16
arithmetic registers. The partial-word load and store instructions can transfer any half,
© 1963
by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incorporoted
5/63
784:011..:..,;.';.:.0..:.-'_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _U_N_I_VA_C_ll_07
INTRODUCTION (Contd.)
§
OIl.
third, or sixth of a word to or from the least significant bit positions of any arithmetic
register. A wide variety of logical, shift, search, and block transfer operations can be
performed. All instructions can be indexed, and each index register can be automatically
incremented or decremented each time it is referenced. Indirect addresses can be
"chained, " and indexing can be performed upon each address in the chain. Straightforward
programming of the UNIVAC 1107 is not unusually complex, but only skilled, highly-trained
programmers will be able to take full advantage of the powerful optional elements offered
in most instructions.
A program interrupt facility causes a transfer of control to one of 74 fixed core
locations upon completion of an input-output operation, upon detection of a processor or
input-output error, or upon count-down to zero of the real-time clock (whose contents are
decremented by 1 every millisecond). The interrupt facility permits full utilization of the
Central Computer and all peripheral devices, usually under the control of an integrated
operating system that handles multi-program running.
The 1107 has 16 input-output channels, and each channel is capable of transmitting
data in one direction at a time. One channel is normally occupied by the Control Console,
which provides keyboard input and typed output at 10 characters per second. Each of the
remaining 15 channels can accommodate 1 peripheral subsystem, and each subsystem can
consist of any of the following groups of devices and their associated control units .
•
1 to 8 Flying Head 880 Magnetic Drums. Each drum stores 786,432 words,
with an average access time of 17 milliseconds. Peak data transfer rate is
60,000 words per second. This rapid-access auxiliary storage plays an important role in the operation of several of the software system s.
•
1 to 8 Fastrand Mass Storage Units. Each unit has 2 drums served by 64
movable heads, and stores 12,976,128 words with an average access time of
92 milliseconds. Peak data transfer rate is 25,000 words per second.
•
2 to 16 Uniservo IlIA Magnetic Tape Handlers. Read forward or backward at
a peak transfer rate of 100, 000 rows per second. Nine tracks are recorded on
!-inch-wide tape at a density of 1,000 rows per inch, with read-after-write row
pari ty checking.
•
2 to 12 Uniservo lIA Magnetic Tape Handlers. Read forward or backward at a
peak transfer rate of 12,500 or 25,000 rows per second. Eight tracks are recorded on !-inch-wide tape at a density of 125 or 250 rows per inch; there is no
read - after -write checking.
•
2 to 12 Uniservo mc MagnetiC Tape Handlers. Read forward only at a peak
transfer rate of 22,500 or 62,500 rows per second. Seven tracks are recorded
on !-inch-wide tape at a density of 200 or 556 rows per inch, with read-afterwrite checking of longitudinal and row parity. The tape format is fully compatible with the IBM 727, 729, and 7330 Magnetic Tape Units.
I)
5/63
1 Card Reader and 1 Card Punch. These units read standard 80-column cards at
600 cards per minute and punch them at 150 or 300 cards per minute. Reading
and punching can be performed in alphameric, row binary, or column binary mode.
•
1 High- Speed Printer. Two models are available: one uses a 51-character set
and prints up to 600 alphameric lines per minute; the other uses a 63-character
set and prints up to 700 alphameric lines per minute (or up to 922 lines per
minute when a restricted set of 40 characters is used).
•
1 Paper Tape Reader and 1 Paper Tape Punch. These units (housed in a single
cabinet) can read standard 5 -, 6-, 7-, or 8- track punched tape at up to 400
characters per second and punch it at 110 characters per second.
./
784:011.102
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION (Contd.)
§
011.
As the above summary indicates, three different types of magnetic tape handlers are
available for the 1107, and there is no format compatibility between any two of them. This
situation resulted from the manufacturer's deciSions to provide a tape handler compatible
with earlier UNIVAC systems (the Uniservo IlA), a tape handler compatible with mM systems
(the Uniservo mC), and a high-performance tape handler for use where compatibility is not
a primary concern (the Uniservo IlIA).
Software
Two different basic software packages are being developed for the UNIVAC 1107,
and there is little or no compatibility between them. The manufacturer states that the two
basic packages will be maintained in parallel. The "SLEUTH I Package, " also called the
"A Package, "was developed by UNIVAC's Scientific Computer Department in St. Paul,
and includes the following routines:
o SLEUTH I - a symbolic assembly system with macro instruction facilities that
translates symbolic source programs into either relocatable or absolute machine language object programs.
o EXEC I - an operating system designed to facilitate effective use of 1107 systems
by providing the means for automatically processing a scheduled set of jobs with
a minimum of operator intervention. Jobs can be processed serially or concurrently (Le., multi-running is optional).
o CLAMP - a Relative Load Routine that loads either absolute or relocatable object
programs independently or under control of EXEC I.
o Librarian - a library maintenance routine that creates a library tape and adds,
deletes, corrects, resequences, lists, and catalogs programs on existing
library tapes.
o
LION (Library of Input-Output Numerical Subroutines) - a set of subroutines,
called by SLEUTH macro instructions, that perform the following functions in
connection with EXEC I:
Opening and closing of files and reels;
Input and output on tape, drum, cards, or printer;
Conversions between decimal and binary radix;
Data transcriptions (cards to tape or drum, tape or
drum to cards, and tape or drum to printer).
o MIDAS (Macro Instructions for Dumping Areas of Store) - a set of subroutines
deSigned-to aid debugging by providing printed listings of the contents of specified
areas of storage. A valuable option permits listing only those locations whose
contents have been altered during execution of the program being tested.
o Sort/Merge - a generalized, relocatable subroutine for sorting or merging files
into ascending or descending order. Control parameters are supplied on cards.
From 4 to 12 magnetic tape units can be used, and FH- 880 Magnetic Drums
provide increased sorting speed when available.
The "Sleuth II Package, " also called the "B Package, "was developed by Computer
Sciences Corporation and includes the following routines:
" SLEUTH II - a symbolic assembly system with macro instruction facilities that
translates symbolic source programs into relocatable machine language object_
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
784:011.103
UNIVAC 1107
INTRODUCTION (Contd.)
§
011.
programs. A magnetic drum is required, but magnetic tape is not. (There is
no compatibility between SLEUTH I and SLEUTH II; even the mnemonic codes
for machine instructions are totally different.)
•
EXEC II - an operating system designed to monitor the compilation and execution
of programs, maximize utilization of the available hardware, and minimize
operator intervention. The system utilizes an FH-880 Magnetic Drum as a high
ca'pacity buffer store to keep the card readers, punches, and printers fully occupied and as a fast access auxiliary store for program segments. An integrated
set of diagnostic aids and library maintenance facilities is included.
•
COBOL - a compiler for COBOL-61 source programs that operates under control
of EXEC II. Language facilities include nearly all of Required COBOL- 61 (there
are a few minor deficiencies); several COBOL-61 electives (but not the extremely
useful COMPUTE verb); a MONITOR verb (which provides dynamic printouts of
the values of specified items); and a SORT facility (but not the one defined as part
of Extended COBOL-61). A magnetic drum is required for COBOL compilations,
but magnetic tape is not.
•
FORTRAN - a compiler for FORTRAN IV source programs that operates under
control of EXEC II. Language facilities are largely compatible with those of
FORTRAN IV as defined for the IDM 7090/7094. FORTRAN II source programs
can be converted to FORTRAN IV by means of the SIFT Translator, which has
been compiled and successfully run on the 1107. The FORTRAN compiler
achieves rapid compilation speeds through use of an FH - 880 Magnetic Drum.
• SORT II - a generalized sort/merge routine that will operate under control of
EXEC II.
The SLEUTH II Package will probably be the more widely used of the two software
packages because it includes the COBOL and FORTRAN compilers. UNIVAC 1107 users
may join USE, the UNIVAC Scientific Exchange, which distributes user-developed programs.
Furthermore, the FORTRAN compiler and the SIFT Translator will enable 1107 users to
utilize the extensive libraries of FORTRAN-coded routines that are now available.
5/63
784:021.100
UNIVAC 1107
Data Structure
DATA STRUCTURE
§ 021.
.1
.2
STORAGE LOCATIONS
Name of Location
Size
Purpose or Use
Word:
36 bits
Field:
6, 12, or
18 bits
basic addressable storage
untt in core, film, and
drum storage.
an integral portion of a
word, addressable by
field definition in certain
1107 instructions.
magnetic tape; holds 1
character or 1/6 of an
1107 word.
magnetic tape; holds 1/5
or 1/6 of an 1107 word,
magnetic tape; holds 1
character in IBMcompatibile format.
punched cards; usually
holds 1 character.
High-Speed Printer reports.
magnetic or punched tape.
Row (Uniservo IIA):
Row (Uniservo ITIA):
Row (Uniservo ruG):
8 bits (6 data,
1 parity, 1
clock)
9 bits (8 data,
1 parity)
7 bits (6 data,
1 parity)
Column:
12 positions
Line:
Block:
128 characters
1 to N words
DATA FORMATS
Type of Information
Representation
Instruction: • . . .
Fixed point number: •
1 word.
1 word; 35 data bits and sign
bit.
1 word; 27 data bits and
sign for fractional part, 8
bits for exponent.
6 bits (internal), 1 row
(tape), or 1 column
(cards).
Floating point number:
Alphameric character:
Card image (row
binary): . . . . .
Card image (column
binary): . . . • • • .
Record:
File: ••
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3 words (2.with 36 bits and
1 with 8 bits) per card
row; 36 consecutive words
per card.
3 card columns per word; 27
consecutive words per
card.
1 to N words of logically
related information.
1 to N records.
5/63
784:031.001
UNIVAC 1107
System Configuration
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§
031.
Every UNIVAC 1107 system includes a Central Computer Group consisting of the
following units:
o Central Computer
o Power Control
o 25 KV A Motor- Alternator
o Control Console
o Core Memory - anyone of the following:
16,384 words - one bank
16,384 words - two banks
32,768 words - two banks
49,152 words - two banks
65,536 words - two banks
Up to 15 peripheral subsystems can be connected, in any combination of the following subsystems:
o FH - 880 Magnetic Drum Subsystem
1 to 8 FH-880 Drums
1 FH-880 Drum Control and Synchronizer Unit
o
Fastrand Mass Storage Subsystem
1 to 8 Fastrand Storage Units
1 Fastrand Synchronizer
o Uniservo IIIA Magnetic Tape Subsystem
2 to 16 Uniservo IlIA Tape Units
1 Uniservo IlIA Control and Synchronizer Unit
(single or dual channel t )
1 Uniservo Power Supply t•
Uniservo lIA Magnetic Tape Subsystem
It
2 to 12 Uniservo IIA Tape Units
1 Uniservo IIA Control and Synchronizer Unit
1 Uniservo Power Supply t
Uniservo IIIC Magnetic Tape Subsystem
2
1
1
1
to 12 Uniservo IIIe Tape Units
Uniservo IIlC Control and Synchronizer Unit
Tape Adapter Cabinet
Uniservo Power Supply :t
t
Each dual channel Synchronizer occupies 2 of the
15 input-output channels.
t
Uniservo Power Supply capacity is 14 lIA, 16 IlIA,
or 16 IIlC tape units; one Power Supply can
serve two or more subsystems, within certain
limits.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
784:031.002
UNIVAC 1107
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (CONTO ..)
§
031.
•
Punched Card Subsystem (80- column)
1 Card Reader - 600 CPM
1 Card Punch - 150 or 300 CPM
1 Card Control and Synchronizer Unit
•
High-Speed Printer Subsystem
1 Printer - 600 or 700 LPM
1 Printer Control and Synchronizer Unit
•
Paper Tape Subsystem
(Reader, Punch, and Control in single cabinet)
5/63
784:031.100
•
_
STANDARD
EDP
Univac 1107
System Configuration
REmRTS
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§ 03l.
•1
6-TAPE BUSINESS/SCIENTIFIC SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION VI
Deviations from Standard COnfiguration: .
FH- 880 Drum is required for use of most
software systems.
Console typewriter provides input as well
as output.
Twelve more index registers.
More simultaneity.
Core Memory is larger by 3,050 words.
Magnetic tape is slower by 5,000 char/sec.
Equipment
Rental
FH- 880 Drum & Synchronizer:
786,432 words
$3,440
Core Memory:
16,384 words ( 2 banks)
7,000
Central Computer
19,750
Console
Card Control & Synchronizer
850
Card Reader: 600 cards/min.
350
Card Punch: 150 cards/min.
500
Printer & Synchronizer: 600 lines/min.
2,050
Uniservo IIA Synchronizer
1,550
Uniservo IIA Tape Units (6):
25,000 char/sec.
2,700
Uniservo Power Supply (not shown)
TOTAL RENTAL:
© 1963
j;,
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
550
$39,740
5/63
784:031.200
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§
031.
.2
lO-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (INTEGRATED); CONFIGURATION VII A
Deviations from Standard Configuration:.
FH-880 Drum is required for use of most
software systems.
Core Memory is smaller by 3,616 words.
Magnetic tape is faster by 60,000
characters per second.
Nine more index registers.
Equipment
Rental
FH- 880 Drum & Synchronizer:
786,432 words
$3,440
Core Memory:
16,384 words (2 banks)
Central Computer
7,000
_I
19,750
Console
Card Control & Synchronizer
Read only
Card Reader: 600 cards/min.
350
Card Punch: 150 cards/min.
500
Printer & Synchronizer: 600 lines/min.
2,050
Uniservo IlIA Synchronizer:
dual channel model
5,000
Uniservo IlIA Tape Units (10):
120,000 char/sec.
7,500
Uniservo Power Supply (not shown)
TOTAL RENTAL:
© 1963
1,850
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
550
$47,990
5/63
784:031.300
§
UNIVAC 1107
031.
.3
20-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (PAIRED); CONFIGURATION VTIIB
Deviations from Standard Configuration
On-line equipment:. • . . . . . . . .
FH- 880 Drum is required for use of most
software systems.
Core Memory is larger by 6, 100 words.
Five more index registers.
No on-line card reader is used.
Off-line equipment:
Core storage is larger by 3, 192 positions.
Magnetic tape is faster by 60,000 char/sec.
Card punch is faster by 100 cards/minute.
Four more index registers.
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
On- Line Equipment
Equipment
Rental
FH-880 Drum & Synchronizer:
786,432 words
$3,440
Core Memory:
32,768 words (2 banks)
9,000
Central Computer
19,750
Console
Uniservo lIlA Synchronizer:
dual channel model
Uniservo Power Supply
Read only
5/63
5,000
550
Uniservo IlIA Tape Units(8):
120,000 char/sec.
,
Uniservo Power Supply (not shown)
6,000
Uniservo IlIA Synchronizer:
dual channel model
5,000
Uniservo lIlA Tape Units (8):
120,000 char/sec.
6,000
550
TOTAL RENTAL:
$54,740
Total including off-line equipment:
$61,890
784:031.301
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§
031.
.3
20-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (PAIRED); CONFIGURATION VIlIS - (Contd.)
Off-Line Equipment (Univac 1050):
Equipment
Core Storage: B, 192 positions
Rental
J1
$l,B50
Central Processor
Card Reader and Synchronizer:
1000 cards/min.
400
Card Punch and Synchronizer:
300 cards/min.
700
Printer and Synchronizer:
922 lines/min.
Print Buffer
350
Uniservo lIlA Synchronizer
Power Supply
Uniservo lIlA Magnetic Tape Units (2):
120,000 char/sec.
'FOTAL RENTAL:
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation ond BNA Incorporated
BOO
1,200
350
1,500
$7,150
5/63
784:041.100
.SlANDARD
_EDP
.,-,
UNIVAC 1107
REPORTS
Internal Storage
Core Memory
INTERNAL STORAGE: CORE MEMORY
§
041.
.13
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: .
.12
Basic Use: . . . . . . . working storage.
.13
Description
The 128 lowest-order locations of Core Memory are
called "hidden" memory. Their addresses (0008
through 1778) are the same as those of Film Memory,
and they can be accessed only by indirect addreSSing,
by jump instructions, or by input-output operations.
All other instructions refer to the correspondingly
numbered locations in Film Memory. The "hidden"
core locations are therefore protected from internal
write operations but not from input-output operations;
the converse applies to all of Film Memory. To
minimize confusion between the contents of Film and
"hidden" memory, the safest policy is to avoid program references to the core locations below address
1778·
Core Memory .
Types 7230, 7231, 7232,
7233, 7234.
Core Memory forms the principal working storage
medium for the UNIVAC 1107 and can consist of from
16,384 to 65,536 word locations in one or two banks.
The following configurations are offered:
Type Number
Banks
Word Locations
7230
7231
7232
7233
7234
1
2
2
2
2
16,384
16,384
32, 768
49,152
65,536
Description (Contd. )
The 75 core locations with addresses 2008 through
3128 are assigned for the specific purposes shown
below:
Octal addresses
200-217
220-237
240-257
Read access time is 1. 8 microseconds and cycle
time is 4.0 microseconds for each 36-bit word. In
the two-bank models, each bank has independent access facilities and can operate asynchronously. By
storing instructions in one bank and data in the other,
the effective storage cycle time can be reduced to a
minimum of 2.0 microseconds. This "alternate
bank" storage allocation decreases the overall execution time for most instructions by 4.0 microseconds.
Each 36-bit word location can hold one instruction,
one floating point data item, from one to six fixed
point data items, or six alphameric characters.
Block transfer operations from one area of Core
Memory to another can transfer full words or either
half (18 bits), any third (12 bits), or any sixth (6
bits) of successive word locations at a peak rate of
125,000 words per second. The source addresses
can be N words apart and the destination addresses
M words apart, with N not necessarily equal to M.
No parity checking is provided.
To prevent accidental writing into Core Memory
areas where no alteration of the stored data is permissible, a Memory Lockout Register is provided.
This register, set by an instruction, defines the
upper and lower address limits of the area in each
bank in which writing is permitted. The address
limit codes are modulo 2,048; thus storage can be
locked out only in 2, 048-word increments. A write
instruction referencing an address outside the limits
specified in the Memory Lockout Register causes an
error interrupt and an automatic jump to a fixed
storage location.
© 1963
260-277
300-307
310
311
312
Greater than 312
Assignment
External request interrupts.
Input data termination
interrupts.
Output data termination
interrupts.
Function termination
interrupts.
Error interrupts.
Real-time clock interrupt.
External status word.
External synchronization
interrupt.
Unassigned.
.14
Availability: . .
9 to 12 months.
.15
First Delivery:
September, 1962.
.16
Reserved Storage
Purpose
Number of
Locations
Index registers:
Arithmetic registers:
Logic registers:
0t
0t
0
Interrupt control:
75
"Hidden memory":
128
t
Locks
only via programming.
protected from
internal write
operations.
In Film Memory; see Section 784:042.
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
. 21
Storage Medium:. . . . magnetic core •
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
UNIVAC 1107
784:041.230
.52
§ 041.
.23
Storage Phenomenon:
· 24
Recording Permanence
· 28
.53
no.
no.
no.
no.
all models except Type 7230
are divided into two banks
with independent access
facilities.
Interleaving Levels: .
Access Techniques
coincident current.
coincident current.
read -out followed by
rewrite.
.6
.7
PERFORMANCE
• 71
Data Transfer
. . , none.
With self: . . . . . .
With Film Memory:
With FH-880 Drum:
up to 250,000 cps per bank.
one 36-bit word.
2 banks (optional).
250,000 words/sec per
bank.
Compound data rate: . 500,000 words/sec in all
models except Type 7230.
.72
DATA CAPACITY
.31
Module and System Sizes
1 to N full or partial words;
N limited by storage
capacity.
1 to 128 full or partial
words.
1 tb N full words.
With self: . . . . .
With Film Memory:
.8
Maximum
Storage
Minimum
Storage
7231
2
16,384
98,304
16,384
.4
CONTROLLER:.
.5
ACCESS TIMING
.51
Arrangement of Heads:
7232
2
32,768
196,608
32,768
7233
2
49,152
294,912
49,152
7234
2
65,536
393,216
65,536
. no separate controller.
1 access facility per bank,
yes .
yes.
yes .
Transfer Load Size
With FH-880 Drum:
.3
5/63
CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: •.
Pairs of storage unit possibilities
• 292 Peak data rates
Cycling rates:
Unit of data:
Gain factor:
Data rate: .
7230
1
16,384
98,304
16,384
1. 8 p.sec .
4.0 p.sec.
1 word .
Note: When instructions are stored in one bank and
operands in the other, effective cycle time approaches a minimum of 2.0 p.sec. Cycle time
for Type 7230 is a constant 4.0 p.sec.
Potential Transfer Rates
Type Number:
Banks:
Words:
Characters:
Instructions:
Access Time Parameters and Variations
.531 For uniform access
Access time: . .
Cycle time: • . . •
For data unit of: . .
yes.
.281 Recording method:.
.282 Reading method: .
· 283 Type of access: . •
• 29
access to each bank is
asynchronous and independent of the other bank.
direction of magnetization.
· 241 Data erasable by
instructions: . •
. 242 Data regenerated
constantly: ••.
• 243 Data volatile: ..
· 244 Data permanent: .
· 245 Storage changeable:
· 27
Simultaneous
Operations: .
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Check or
Interlock
Invalid address:
Invalid code:
Receipt of data:
Recording of data:
Recovery of da ta:
Dispatch of data:
Timing conflicts:
none.
all codes valid.
none.
none.
none.
none •
check
Reference to locked
area:
check
Action
resolved automatically
by prioriry control
network.
interrupt.
784:042.100
•
STANDARD
EDP
•
UNIVAC 1107
REPORTS
Internal Storage
Film Memory
INTERNAL STORAGE: FILM MEMORY
§
042•
.1
. . 11
.16
Reserved Storage
GENERAL
Identity: .
• 12
Basic Use: .
· 13
Description
Film Memory •
(In Type 7200 Central
Computer cabinet.)
Index registers:
Arithmetic
registers:
Input accesscontrol:
Output accesscontrol:
Real-time clock
count:
Repeat count:
Mask word:
Temporary
storage for P:
Unassigned:
control and working storage •
Film Memory (also called Control Memory) provides
128 word locations of fast-access internal storage
and gives the UNIVAC 1107 Thin-Film Memory Computer its name. Access time is O. 333 microsecond
and cycle time is 0.667 microsecond; theoretically,
up to 1,500,000 references per second can be made
to Film Memory.
Specific functions are assigned to 63 of the 128 Film
Memory locations. There are 15 index registers, 16
arithmetic registers, 32 input-output access-control
words, and four registers whose specific functions
are listed in Paragraph 16 below. Four locations can
be used as either index or arithmetic registers,
making possible some unconventional address modification operations. The remaining 65 Film Memory
locations are available as fast-access working storage, but there are certain programming restrictions:
Film Memory cannot be referenced by jump instructions, indirect addressing, or input-output operations, and partial-word load and store operations are
restricted. The arithmetic and index registers have
"two-address accessibility" in most instructions:
they can be referenced either by the base operand
address or by the a- or b-designator in the instruction word.
The thin-film storage medium consists of permalloy
spots deposited on a thin plate by a vacuum process.
Each spot represents one bit position of storage, and
the direction of magnetization of the spot determines
whether it is storing a 0 or a 1. Drive and sense
lines are etched on Mylar sheets, attached to epoxy
boards, and mounted above and below each plane of
film spots. The read/restore cycle consists of reading one word of data from the selected film spots into
the 36-bit Z Register, transferring it to the central
processor, and then re-writing it into the same film
spots from which it was read. The clear/write cycle
consists of reading and discarding the data from the
selected film spots, transferring new data into the
Z-register, and writing it into the selected film
spots. No parity checks are made.
t
Availability: •.
9 to 12 months.
• 15
First Delivery:
September, 1962.
© 1963
Octal
Addresses
15
00l-017t
16
014-033 t
16
040-057
16
060-077
1
1
1
100
101
102
1
65
Locks
none.
103
000,
034-037,
105-177
Locations 014 through 017 can be used as either
Index or Arithmetic registers.
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
• 21
Storage Medium:, .
.22
Physical Dimensions
thin film (spots of permalloy
deposited on a thin plate).
Diameter of spots: •
Thickness of spots:
50 mils.
1,000 angstroms.
.23
Storage Phenomenon:
direction of magnetization.
.24
Recording Permanence
.241 Data erasable by
instructions: . .
.242 Data regenerated
constantly: . . .
.243 Data volatile:
.244 Data permanent: .
.245 Storage changeable:
no.
yes .
no.
no.
. 27
Interleaving Levels: .
none.
.28
Access Techniques
..
. 281 Recording method: .
. 282 Reading method: . .
. 283 Type of access: . .
. 29
.14
Number of
Locations
Purpose
yes.
coincident current .
linear select .
read-out followed by rewrite.
Potential Transfer Rates
. 292 Peak data rates
Cycling rates:
Unit of data:
Data rate: ••
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
up to 1,500,000 cps.
one 36- bit word.
1,500,000 words/sec.
5/63
784:042.300
§
UNIVAC 1107
042.
.3
DATA CAPACITY
. 31
Module and System Sizes
Identity: .
Modules: .
Words: .•
Characters:
Instructions: .
.7
PERFORMANCE
. 71
Data Transfer
Pairs of storage unit possibilities
standard.
1.
128.
768.
not used for instruction
storage.
With self: . . . . . .
With Core Memory:
With FH - 880 Drum:
.72
Transfer Load Size
With self: . . . . .
.4
CONTROLLER: . . • . no separate controller.
With Core Memory:
. 73
.5
ACCESS TIMING
• 51
Arrangement of Heads:
.52
Simultaneous
Operations:. . . . . . none.
.53
Access Time Parameters and Variations
.531 For uniform access
Access time: . .
Cycle time: . . .
For data unit of: .
•6
5/63
O. 333 ILsec.
0.667 ILsec.
1 word.
CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: . . . . . . none.
.8
1 to N full words; N limited
by storage capacity.
1 to 128 full or partial
words .
Effective Transfer Rate
With self: • . . . .
With Core Memory:
1 access facility.
yes.
yes.
no.
125,000 words/sec.
125,000 words/sec •
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Check or
Interlock
Invalid address:
none
Invalid code:
Receipt of data:
Recording of data:
Dispatch of data:
Recovery of data:
Timing conflicts:
all codes valid.
none.
none.
none •
none.
check
Action
addresses above 1778
refer to Core Memory.
resolved automatically.
784:043.100
UNIVAC 1107
Internal Storage
FH-880 Drum
INTERNAL STORAGE: FH-880 DRUM
§
043.
.13
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
Flying Head 880 Magnetic
Drum.
Type 7432.
. 12
Basic Use: .
auxiliary storage.
.13
Description
on the appropriate input-output channel. The Access
Words specify the initial core storage address, the
number of words to be transferred, and the address
of the Function Word. The Function Word specifies
the operation to be performed and the 23-bit initial
drum address. Coding of a drum write operation is
similar but requires a third instruction. A drum
search operation causes successive drum locations
to be scanned until a bit-by-bit match is found to an
Identifier Word in the stored program. At this pOint
a read operation can be automatically initiated if
desired.
The Flying Head 880 Magnetic Drum is an auxiliary
storage device that provides rapid random access to
large quantities of data or programs in UNIVAC 1107
systems. Each drum has 880 read-write heads,
each serving one track. The term "Flying Head" refers to the fact that the heads are aerodynamically
supported on a boundary layer of air generated by the
surface friction of the rotating drum. The flying
head princ~ple permits the use of larger drums with
less critical tolerances, and the close head-to-drum
spacing (0.0005 inch) permits high-density recording.
A Magnetic Drum Subsystem consists of from one to
eight Flying Head 880 Magnetic Drums connected to
a Drum Control and Synchronizer Unit. Each subsystem fully occupies one input-output channel.
Since one of the 1107's 16 channels is required for
the Control Console, a maximum of 15 Magnetic
Drum Subsystems could be connected if no other
peripheral equipment were required. Each drum has
a storage capacity of 786,432 words of 36 bits each.
Maximum potential storage capacity is therefore
6,291,456 words per subsystem and 94,371,840
words per fully expanded 1107 system.
Of the 880 tracks on each drum, 768 are grouped into
128 data bands of six tracks each. The other 112
tracks are used for parity checking, timing, reference, and as spares. Each 1107 word is converted
by the Synchronizer into six 6-bit characters. The
six tracks in each data band are read and recorded in
parallel, and each word is stored in a six-by-six
matrix of bit positions. An odd parity bit is generated for each word and recorded in a corresponding
location in one of 32 parity tracks.
Each data band consists of 6,144 word locations arranged in the form of three interleaved "angular sections" of 2, 048 words each. This means that any location can be accessed within one drum revolution,
but only 2, 048 words can be read or recorded per
revolution. Drum speed is 1,800 revolutions per
minute, so the average access time is 17 milliseconds. Peak data transfer rate is 60, 000 words or
360,000 characters per second. From 1 to 65,535
words can be transferred in a single operation.
Each drum read operation requires two instructions,
two Access Words, and a Function Word. The instructions initiate the input mode and function mode
© 1963
Description (Contd. )
Checking includes a parity check to insure that each
word read from the drum has odd parity, a character count to insure that each word transferred to or
from the drum consists of exactly six characters,
and checks for invalid drum addresses and function
codes. Detection of any drum error causes the Drum
Control and Synchronizer Unit to initiate an external
interrupt and send the Central Computer a Status
Word indicating the type of error and the drum location at which it occurred.
.14
Availability: ..
9 to 12 months.
. 15
First Delivery:
September, 1962.
.16
Reserved Storage: .
none.
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Storage Medium:.
.22
Physical Dimensions
. drum.
.222 Drum
Diameter:
Length: ••
Number on shaft:.
24 inches.
30 inches.
. 23
Storage Phenomenon:
magnetization .
. 24
Recording Permanence
.241 Data erasable by
instructions: . .
.242 Data regenerated
constantly: . . .
• 243 Data volatile: ..
.244 Data permanent: •
. 245 Storage changeable:
.25
1.
yes.
no.
no .
no.
no .
Data volume per band of 6 tracks
Words: • . . .
Characters: .
Instructions: .
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
6,144.
36,864.
6,144.
5/63
UNIVAC 1107
784:043.260
§
043.
.42
• 26
Bands per Physical Unit: 128.
• 27
Interleaving Levels: .
.28
Access Techniques
.421 On-line:
.422 Off-line:
3.
.43
.281 Recording method: .
1 aerodynamically supported head per track.
.283 Type of access
Description of stage Possible starting stage
Switch bands: . . •
when different band is
selected (or at end of a
band).
Wait for specified
sector:
when previously selected
band is used.
Read or write 1 to
65,535 words: . .
no.
....
.29
1 to 15 controllers; 1 per
Magnetic Drum Subsystem •
none.
Connection to Device
.431 Devices per controller: 1 to 8 FH-880 Drum Units.
.432 Restrictions:. . . . . . none.
.44
Data Transfer Control
. 441 Size of load: . . •
.442 Input-output area:
.443 Input-output area
access: • . . . •
.444 Input-output area
lockout: • . . . .
. 445 Synchronization: .
. 447 Table control: . .
1 to 65,535 words.
Core Memory.
each word.
none.
automatic.
none.
Potential Transfer Rates
.291 Peak bit rates
Cycling rates:
Track/head speed:
Bits/inch/track: .
Bit rate per track:
.292 Peak data rates
Unit of data: . • .
Conversion factor:
Gain factor:
Loss factor:
Data rate: •
.
.
1,800 rpm.
2, 265 inches/sec.
518.
1,173,270 bits/sec/track.
word.
36 bits per' word.
6 tracks per band.
3 interleaving levels.
60,000 words/sec, or
360,000 char/sec.
Compound data rate: . 240,000 words/sec, or
1,440,000 char/sec. t
t
.
.
With four FH-880 Drum units on four different
input-output channels transferring data simultaneously. Total communication rate for the 1107
system cannot exceed 250,000 words/sec.
.3
DATA CAPACITY
.31
Module and System Sizes
.5
ACCESS TIMING
.51
Arrangement of Heads
,.511 Number of data stacks
Stacks per drum: ••.
Stacks per subsystem:
.512 Stack movement: . . . .
.513 Stacks that can access
any particular
location: . . . . . •
.514 Accessible locations
By si~gle stack:
By all stacks:. . . .
Drum Subsystems:
Drums:
Words:
Characters:
Instructions:
1
1
786,432
4,718,592
786,432
Rules for Combining
Modules: • • . • . •
.4
CONTROLLER
.41
Identity:....
5/63
1
8
6,291,456
37,748,736
6,291,456
6,144.
786,432 per drum.
maximum of 6,291,456 per
subsystem.
Simultaneous
Operlj,tions:. . . . . . maximum of 1 data transfer
operation per Magnetic
Drum Subsystem. Total
number of simultaneous
drum data transfer operations may in no case exceed 4 because total systern communication rate is
limited to 250,000
words/sec.
.53
Access Time Parameters and Variations
.532 Variation in access time
Stage
Variation, fLsec
Switch bands:
0 or 134
Wait for specified
sector:
0 to 33,300
Read or write:
16.3 to 1,070,000 t
16.3 to 1,103,434 !
t
FH - 880 Drum Control and
Synchronizer Unit.
Type 7427.
1.
.52
15.
120.
94,371,840.
566,231,040.
94,371,840.
1 to 8 Drinn Units per Magnetic Drum Subsystem;
1 to 15 Magnetic Drum
Subsystems per 1107 system. Each subsystem
fully occupies 1 inputoutput channel.,
128.
128 to 1,024.
none.
.515 Relationship between
stacks and locations:. bits 11-17 of Function Word
designate band number
0-127 •
Minimum Maximum per Maximum
Storage
Subsystem
Storage
• 32
Connection to Slstem
.6
Example, /Lsec
O.
16,700.
33.300 t
50,000
16. 3/Lsec per word transferred; example is based
on a 2, 048-word transfer.
CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: • . . • . • none.
784:043.700
INTERNAL STORAGE: FH - 880 DRUM
§
043.
.7
• 71
.8
PERFORMANCE
Error
Check or
Interlock
no.
yes.
no.
Invalid address:
Invalid function code:
Receipt of data:
Recording of data:
Recovery of data:
Dispatch of data:
Reference to locked area:
check
check
character count
record pariry bit.
parity check
character count
not possible•
1 to 65,535 words.
Note: The type of error is indicated by bits 30-35 of the Status Word,
sent to the Central Computer when the interrupt occurs_ Bits
0-22 specify the drum address of the error word •
Data Transfer
Pairs of storage units possibilities
With self:. . . . . .
With Core Memory:
With Film Memory:
• 72
Transfer Load Size
With Core Memory:
. 73
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Action
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
Effective Transfer Rate
With Core Memory: . . 60,000 words/sec.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
784:051.100
•
STANDARD
_EDP
."
UNIVAC 1107
Central Processor
R£PORTS
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§
051.
.12
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
UNIVAC 1107 Central
Computer.
Type 7200.
Description
The UNIVAC 1107 Central Computer is a single cabinet that houses the system's solid-state arithmetic
and control circuitry and 128 word locations of Film
Memory. Sixteen arithmetic registers (or "accumulators"), fifteen index registers, a seven-part instruction format, and a partial-word transfer facility
provide for programming flexibility and efficient
computation. While the 1107 can be programmed in
a straightforward way without undue difficulty, only
skilled, highly-trained programmers will be able to
take full advantage of all its powerful processing
facilities.
The versatile instruction repertoire includes fixed
and floating point arithmetic on 36-bit binary operands (floating point representation is 27 bits plus sign
for the fraction and 8 bits for the exponent). Fixed
point multiplication and division can produce either
integral or fractional results, depending upon the instructions used. Addition or subtraction by halfwords or third-words develops dual 18-bit or triple
12-bit result fields in a single operation. Load and
store operations can cause the transfer of a full word
or of any half, third, or sixth of a word to or from
the least significant bit positions of the specified
arithmetic register. A full set of Boolean, test, and
conditional jump instructions is provided. Singleand double-length shifts of up to 72 bit positions can
be performed in a single 4-microsecond cycle. The
block transfer instruction moves blocks of full or
partial words from one area of internal storage to
another. Twelve different search instructions facilitate table look-up operations. Facilities not directly
provided in the 1107 instruction repertoire include
editing, double precision arithmetic, decimal arithmetic, and radix conversion; generalized subroutines
or complex sequences of instructions are required to
accomplish these operations.
Each instruction is one word (36 bits) in length and
consists of seven parts, called "designators, " as
shown below.
o The 6-bit f-designator specifies the operation to be
performed.
CD
The 4-bit j-designator specifies partial-word operands or serves as an extension of the operation
code.
© 1963
Description (Contd.)
• The 4-bit a-designator references one of the 16
arithmetic registers in Film Memory or specifies
an input-output channel.
If
The 4-bit b-designator, references one (or none)
of the 15 index registers, whose contents are added
to the specified operand address or literal operand.
o The I-bit h-designator indicates whether or not the
18-bit modifier portion of the specified index register shall be incremented by the increment portion
of the same index register (also 18 bits) each time
the instruction is executed; this capability for automatic inc rem entation (or decramentation) facilitates.
the coding of loops.
o The I-bit i-designator indicates whether direct or
indirect addressing applies (1. e., whether the
u-designator specifies the direct address of the required operand or the address of a location containing another address in a chain of indirect addresses
that may be of any length).
o The 16-bit u-designator contains the base operand
address, an indirect address, a shift count, or a
literal operand. In the case of literal operands,
the low-order 16 bits of the instruction word are
interpreted a,s the operand itself rather than as the
address of a storage location containing the operand.
The fact that the a -designator can specify the use of
any of the 16 arithmetic registers in arithmetic,
logical, test, load, and store operations provides a
limited two-address capability. This capability can
reduce program lengths and execution times by minimizing the need for temporary storage of operands
in Core Memory. All instructions can be indexed,
including those that specify literal operands. Furthermore, indexing and index register incrementation can
be performed upon any or all addresses in a cascaded
indirect address chain. Each stage of indirect addressing adds 4 microseconds to the instruction execution time.
A key factor in the COmputing power of the 1107 is
the Film Memory (also called Control Memory),
which provides 128 36-bit storage locations with an
access time of O. 333 microsecond and a cycle time
of O. 667 microsecond. Specific functions are assigned
to certain Film Memory locations. There are 15
index registers, 16 arithmetic registers (or "accumulators"), 32 input-output Access-Control Words, a
real-time clock register, a repeat count register,
and a mask word register. Four locations can be
designated as either index or arithmetic registers,
or both, permitting some unusual and powerful address modification operations. The remaining unassigned Film Memory locations are available as
fast-access storage for general use, but are subject
to certain programming restrictions: Film Memory
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
UNIVAC 1107
784:051.120
§
051.
.12
Description (Contd.)
cannot be referenced by jump instructions, indirect
addressing, or input-output operations, and partialword load and store operations are restricted.
Furthermore, instruction execution times for operands in Film Memory are no lower than for operands
in Core Memory when the "alternate bank" storage
allocation technique (described below) is used.
The 128 lowest-order locations of Core Memory are
calleCi "hidden" memory. Their addresses (octal 000
through 177) are the same as those of Film Memory,
and they can be accessed only by indirect addressing,
by jump instructions, or by input-output operations.
All other instructions will refer to the cor-res pondingly numbered Film Memory locations. The
''hidden'' core locations are therefore protected from
overwrhing by internal data transfer operations, but
not from input-output operations; the converse
applies to all of Film Memory. To minimize confusion between the contents of Film and "hidden" memory, the safest policy is to avoid program references
to the core locations below octal address 177.
In programming the 1107, it is important to store instructions in one Core Memory bank and data in the
other to take advantage of the overlapping cycles of
the two core storage banks. This "alternate bank"
storage allo<:ation technique halves the effective core
storage cycle time and decreases the overall execution time for most instructions by 4 microseconds.
Every add, subtract, load, and store instruction
takes 4 microseconds when instructions and operands
are in alternate banks and 8 microseconds - or twice
as long - when they are in the same bank. Processor
speeds .in Paragraph 785:051.4 are listed for both the
"alternate bank" and "same bank" conditions. When
the addressed operand is in Film Memory, the lower,
"alternate bank" time always applies.
Program interrupts occur upon normal completion of
an input-output operation (when requested); upon detection of an input-output, storage reference, or
processor error; and whenever the contents of the
real-time clock have been decremented to zero. Depending upon the cause of interruption, control is
transferred to one of 74 fixed Core Memory locations. Only the contents of the instruction sequence
counter can be automatically saved when an interrupt
occurs, so the routine that services the interrupt
condition must preserve and restore the previous
contents of all the registers it uses. The interrupt
facility makes multi-running possible under control
of EXEC I, the 1107 Executive System, described in
Section 784:191.
A 16-bit Memory Lockout Register, loaded by a special instruction, specifies the upper and lower address limits - 2, 048-word increments - of the
area of each Core Memory bank that is currently available for recording ·of data. Any write
instruction with an effective address outside these
permissible limits will initiate an error interrupt.
.13
Availability: . .
9 to 12 months.
. 14
First Delivery:
September, 1962.
5/63
.2
PROCESSING FACILITIES
.21
Operations and Operands
Operation and
Variation
• 211 Fixed point
Add-subtract:
Multiply
Shon:
Long:
Divide
No remainder:
Remainder:
Provision
Radix
Size
automatic
binary
35 bits + sign.
automatic; integer
only
automatic; integer
or fractional
binary
automatic:
fractional only
automatic; integer
or fractional
binary
t
35 bits + sign. t
35 bits + sign t
(72-bit product).
t
binary
35 bits + sign.
binary
35 bits + sign (72bit dividend).
t
· 212 Floating point
Add -subtract:
Multiply:
Divide:
automatic
automatic
automatic
binary } fraction: 27 bits
+ sign.
binary
binary
exponent: S bits.
.213 Boolean
AND
Inclusive OR:
Exclusive OR:
automatic
automatic
automatic
}
binary
36 Iiits.
· 214 Comparison
Numbers:
Absolute:
Letters:
Mixed:
Collating sequence:
t
automatic
36 bits.
none.
automatic
36 bits (6 chars).
automatic
36 bits.
see Data Code Table No.3, Section 784: 143.
t
Provision
.215 Code
translation:
.216 Radix
conversion
t
Between And
t
Size
none.
BCD
1 to 36 bits;
chars 3 to 13 chars.
standard
subroutine
binary
field
Provision
Comment
standard
subroutine
in LION
Input/Output
Library; handles
numeric data
only.
Size
· 217 Edit format
Alter size:
}
Suppress zero:
Insen point:
Insen spaces:
Insert sign:
Float character:
Protection:
Round off:
1 to 36 bits
before
editing.
none.
none.
none.
· 218 Table look-up
Equality:
Less than or equal:
Grea ter than:
Within limits:
Outside limits:
Greatest:
Least:
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
none.
none.
look-up can be
based on any bit
} pattern using
Masked Search
instructions.
36 bits.
t
.219 Others
Add/subtract
halves:
automatic
two IS-bit
fields/word.
Add/subtract
thirds:
automatic
Shifts:
automatic
t/lree 12-bit
fields/word.
lor 2 words.
Block transfer:
automatic
t
circular. logical.
or arithmetic
shifts
1 to N words.
j -designator can specify use of the full addressed operand or any
half-word (18 bits). third-word (12 bits), or sixth-word (6 bits)
portion of it.
t
784:051.220
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§
051.
· 22
Special Cases of Operands
• 221 Negative numbers: .
.222 Zero: . . . . .
· 223 Operand size
determ ination:
· 23
one's complement .
1 form: zero in all bit
positions.
j-designator in instruction
specifies full word (36
bits), half word (18 bits),
third word (12 bits), or
sixth word (6 bits) operand
length in 51 instructions,
including load, store,
fixed point arithmetic,
logical, and test
instructions.
Instruction Formats
· 231 Instruction structure:.
.232 Instruction layout:
· 233 Instruction parts
Name
f-designator:
j -des ignator:
a-designator:
b-designator:
h-designator:
i-designator:
u-designator:
· 234 Basic address
structure: .
I word.
Purpose
specifies major operation
code.
(1) specifies partial-word
operands; or
(2) provides expanded
operation code; or
(3) indicates that u is a
literal rather than an
address.
. . . . (1) references an Arithmetic Register; or
(2) specifies an input-output
channel.
(3) serves one of several
other specialized functions.
. . . . references an Index Register, whose contents are
added to u.
• . . . indicates whether the specified Index Register shall
be incremented or decremented.
.
indicates whether u is a
direct or indirect address.
.
(1) specifies base operand
address; or
(2) specifies shift count; or
(3) holds a literal operand.
1 + O. (The a-designator
references one of the 16
Arithmetic Registers in
thin-film memory, providing a limited twoaddress capability in many
load, store, arithmetic,
logical, and test
ins tructions . )
© 1963
· 235 Literals
Arithmetic: .
Comparisons and
tests: . • . .
Incrementing
modifiers: .
18 bits.
18 bits.
18 bits.
• 236 Directly addressed operands
Internal
Minimum Maximum Volume
size
accessible
storage
size
type
Film
Memory:
6 bits
1 word
128 words.
Core
Memory:
6 bits
1 word
total capacity
(up to 65,536
words) •
. 237 Address indexing
1.
• 2371 Number of methods:
indexing.
• 2372 Names: . . •.
add contents of modifier
• 2373 Indexing rule:. • . .
portion (lower half) of
specified index register to
instruction address,
modulo 65,536 .
by b-designator in the
. 2374 Index specification: .
instruction to be modified.
· 2375 Number of potential
indexers: . . • . .
15 •
. 2376 Addresses which can
be indexed: . . . . . operand address portion
(u-designator) of all instructions, including
literals.
• 2377 Cumulative indexing:. none; but see Paragraph
.2384.
· 2378 Combined index and
yes; if h-designator (bit 17)
step: . . . . . • . .
is 1, add contents of increment portion of specified
index register to its modifier portion after the effective operand address
has been formed.
· 238 Indirect addressing
.2381 Recursive: .
yes .
. 2382 Designation:
1 in i-designator (bit 16) of
each indirect address.
o in i-designator of the
· 2383 Control:. • .
direct address.
· 2384 Indexing with indirect
addressing: . . . . . yes; indexing occurs before
determination of the indirect address. Both indexing and incrementation of
the index register can be
specified at each stage of
indirect addressing.
· 239 Stepping
.2391 Specification of
increment: . .
in most significant half of
the index register.
.2392 Increment sign: .
+or -.
· 2393 Size of increment:
18 bits.
zero, or any value specified
• 2394 End value: . . . .
in test instruction or
storage location.
· '2395 Combined step and
test: . . . . . . .
yes.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA incorporated
5/63
UNIVAC 1107
784:051.240
§
05l.
. 24
.32
Look-Ahead (Contd.):
.33
Interruption
Special Processor Storage
• 241 Category of
storage
Control register:
Number of
locations
--1--
Control register:
2
36
Control register:
3
18
Control register:
1
18
Control register:
1
16
Thin-film
Thin-film
Thin-film
Thin-film
Thin-film
15 ~
16
16
16
Size in
bits
~
memory:
memory:
memory:
memory:
memory:
1
36
36
36
36
36
Thin-film memory:
Thin-film memory:
Thin-film memory:
1
1
1
36
36
36
Thin-film memory:
65
36
t
Program usage
P-Register: holds address of next
instruction.
Program Control Reg.,
isters: decode instructions (both are
used in alternatebank operation).
W-Registers: inP!1t
registers for the Index
Adder.
R-Register: outp~t
register for the Index
Adder.
Storage Class Control:
decodes operand
addresses.
Index Registers.
Arithmetic Registers.
Input Access-Control.
Output Access-Control.
Real-Time Clock
Count.
Repeat Count.
Mask Word.
Temporary Storage for
P-Register.
Unrestricted fast
access storage.
· 331 Possible causes
In-out units:
In-out channels:
· 332
~ -Four locations may be used as either Index or Arithmetic
Registers.
.242 Category of
storage
Control Registers:
Film Memory:
Total number Physical
of locations ~
8
128
flip-flop
ferromagnetic spots
·3
SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES
• 31
Instruction Sequencing
· 311 Number of sequence
control facilities:
· 314 Special sub-sequence
counters: . . . . . .
· 315 Sequence control step
size: • . . . .
.. 316 Accessibility to
routines: •.
. 317 Permanent or optional
modifier: . .
· 32
Look-Ahead: •
Access
time
"sec
Cycle
.333
· 334
time,
"sec
-?-.--
""Q.'i67.
0.333
0.667.
1 (P Register).
.335
· 336
none (during repeated instructions' address of next
instruction is stored in
Film Memory and P Register holds the Repeat Count
Word).
.34
.341 Method of control: .
P Register contents can be
stored in core storage or
in an Index Register.
.342 Maximum number of
programs: • . .
no.
· 343 Precedence rules:
· 344 Program protection
Storage: • • • . .
,----..,-
5/63
see next entry.
completion of input, outputor external function operation; or input-output
error.
Storage access: •.• reference to locked-out core
storage area; completion
of magnetic drum operation;
magnetic drum error.
Processor errors: .. invalid operation, exponent
underflow, exponent overflow, divide overflow.
Other: ..
. . • . . real-time clock; external
synchronization (supplementary real-time clock
or master clock for a
multi -processor complex).
Control by routine
enable or disable external
Individual control:
interrupts on all channels
or any specific channel.
special instructions.
Method: . . .
Restriction:
central processor and core
storage error interrupts
cannot be locked out; no
restriction on external
interrupts.
Operator control: . • . none.
Interruption conditions: (1) interrupt enabled; and
(2) not currently processing
an interrupt condition.
Interruption process
Disabling interruption: automatic.
Registers saved: . . . contents of P-Register (sequence counter) are saved
by "return jump" instruction in destination register;
other registers by program.
one of 74 fixed locations,
Destination: . .
depending upon cause.
Contl;ol methods
Determine cause:
automatic; destination depends upon cause.
Enable interruption:
by special instruction before
returningto main routine.
Multi-running
1 word.
when instructions and data
are stored in separate
banks, the next instruction
can be accessed and partially decoded during execution of the current
instruction, reducing execution time by 4 JJ. sec for
each load, store, arithmetic, logical, and test
instruction .
by EXEX I (see Section
784:191), using the
interrupt facilities
described above.
limited only by hardware
availability .
see 784:191.12
Memory Lockout Register,
set by a special instruction,
specifies address limits
(in 2, 048-word increments)
of the Core Memory areas
available for writing.
In-out units: • . . . • none.
~
I AUERBACH I ~
784:051.350
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§
051.
.35
Multi-sequencing:
•4
PROCESSOR SPEEDS
practical only in multiprocessor complexes.
Conditions
instructions and operands
'in alternate core storage
banks.
instructions and operands
in same bank.
I: •
II: .
• 41
Instruction Times in /-Lsec
Il
Condition
• 411 Fixed point
Add-subtract:
Multiply: •
Divide:
.412 Floating point
Add - subtract:
Multiply:
Divide:
.413 Additional allowance for
Indexing:
Indirect addressing,
per stage:.
Re - com plementing:
.414 Control
Comparet: •
Branch: •
Compare and brancht:
.......
t, Times
4.0
12.0
31. 3
35.3.
14.0
13.3
26.7
lB. O.
17.3.
30.7.
0
O.
4
0
4.
O.
4 to 10
4
B to 14
B to 14.
4•
12 to lB.
B. O.
16. O.
vary according to condition tested and
result.
.415 Counter control
Step:
Step and test: •
• 41B Shift: .
B
O.
B.
4
4.
0
(Note: Execution time is independent of length of
shift, which can be from 1 to 72 bit
positions. )
.42
16
16
2B.
2B •
Condition:
Il
.422 For arrays of data (Contd-:)
Fixed point (Contd.)
Sum N items, per
12.
B
item:
32.
24
c = c +aibj:'
Floating point
3B •
26
ci = ai +br •
26
3B.
bj =ai +b j :.
Sum N items, per
IB
22.
item:
43.3 •
35.3
c = c +aibf.
.423 Branch based on comparison
60.
Numeric data: •
40
40
60.
Alphabetic data:
.424 Switching
12
16.
Unchecked: •
2B. 7
44.7.
Checked:
24 + 2ON.
16 + 16N
List search:
.425 Format control per character
Unpack: .
?
Compose: . . . • . •. ?
.426 Table look-up comparison
4.
4
For a match: • '.
5.2.
For least or greatest: 4.B
For interpolation
4.
4
point:
.427 Bit indicators
Set bit in separate
16.
location:
B
12
24.
Set bit in pattern:
Test bit in separate
16.
location:
.' 12
16
24.
Test bit in pattern: •
36 •
Test AND for B bits: • 20
36.
Test OR for B bits:.
20
.42B Moving (full words or 6, 12, or 18 bit fields)
1 word: •
B
16.
12 +BN
12 + BN •
N words:
..
Processor Performance in /-Lsec
Condition
Il
I
.421 For random addresses
Fixed point
c = a +b:
b =a +b:
Sum N items, per
item:
c =ab:
c =a/b: .
Floating point
c =a +b:
b =a +b:
Sum N items, per
item:
c = ab:
C = ajb: •
.
,
.422 For arrays of data
Fixed point
ci = ai +br •
b j = ai + bj : •
12
12
24.
24.
4
20
39.3
32.
51. 3.
22
22
34.
34.
14
21. 3
34. 7
33.3.
46.7.
B.
lB.
© 1963
.5
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Check or
InterlOCK
Error
Add/subtract overflow:
Divide overflow:
Exponent overflow:
Exponent underflow:
Zero divisor:
Invalid data:
Invalid operation:
Arithmetic
~rror:
Invalid address:
Receipt of data:
Dispatch of data:
Reference to locked -out
storage area:
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Action
check
check
check
check
check
none.
check
none.
none.
none.
none.
set indicator.
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt •
interrupt.
check
interrupt.
interrupt.
5/63
784: 061.1 00
•
STANDARD
EDP
•
UNIVAC 1107
REPORiS
Console
CONSOLE
§
061.
.13
.1
GENERAL
· 11
Identity:.
Control Console.
· 12
Associated Units:
Keyboard and Printer.
· 13
Description
The Control Console is the operating center of the
~IVAC 1107. It consists of a desk with a 54 by 36
Inch top and ultramodern styling, featuring two pillars that reach from floor to ceiling and support a
display panel at eye-level height for a seated operator. Built into the desk top are a standard typewriter
keyboard and a Teletype Model 28 Page Printer. The
keyboard and page printer permit direct communication between the operator and the stored programs.
The console controls and displays enable the operator to:
co Start and stop execution of the stored program.
co Clear all Central Computer registers.
o Set any of 15 Selective Jump switches, which can
be tested by conditional jump instructions.
• Set any of 4 Selective Stop switches, which can
cause the stored program to halt.
e Select any input-output channel for initial loading
of a "bootstrap" program.
o Read, set, and/or clear the contents of the P
register (the instruction sequence counter).
© 1963
Description (Contd.)
• Initiate a manual interrupt of the computer
program to permit keyboard input at any time.
o
Re~d the setting of the Memory Lockout Register,
WhICh shows the areas of Core Memory in which
writing is permitted.
• Note the occurrence of excessive temperature, low
voltage, initial loading errors, peripheral equipment faults (e .g., illegal operation codes) by
means of console indicators.
The contents of the arithmetic registers and index
registers cannot be displayed on the console panel,
and no direct means is provided for entering data into
these registers or into specific Core Memory
locations.
The Keyboard is a standard 4-bank typewriter keyboard that can generate the 64 basic Fieldata character codes. The console printer is the Teletype
Model 28 Page Printer, which prints 1 character at
a time at a peak speed of 10 characters per second.
It can print the 26 alphabetic, 10 numeric, and 20
special characters of the Fie1data code and responds
to the remaining 8 control codes (e. g., space and
carriage return). Output is on a continuous paper
roll, 8-1/2 inches wide and up to 5 inches in diameter. All data transfers between the Central
Computer and the console input-output units must be
programmed on a character-at-a-time basis.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
784:071.100
•
STANDARD
EDP
_
UNIVAC 1107
Input-Output
Card Reader
REPORTS
INPUT-OUTPUT: CARD READER
§
071.
.12
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
. 12
can be performed if the translated portion of the
Card Control Unit buffer storage is manually altered
via the maintenance panel.
Card Reader.
Type 7223.
Full card images can be transferred to Core Memory
without translation in either the column binary or row
binary mode. In the column binary mode, the bit
pattern of each group of three consecutive card columns fills one computer word. In the row binary
mode, the bit pattern of each card row fills two computer words and the eight high-order bit positions of
a third word. (This differs from the row binary
mode used in the IBM 700 and 7000 s~ries scientific
systems, in which only 72 card columns are read and
the bit pattern of each card row is stored in only two
computer words.)
Description
The Type 7223 Card Reader reads standard 80-column cards at a peak speed of 600 cards per minute,
using a conventional picker knife feed, pinch roller
drive, and brush sensing system. A similar reader
for 90-column cards has been announced, but it is
not part of the standard product line at present and
detailed specifications are not available.
One Card Reader and one Card Punch can be connected to a Card Control and Synchronizer Unit,
forming a Punched Card Subsystem. Each Punched
Card Subsystem fully occupies one 1107 input-output
channel. The reader and punch in any subsystem can
operate concurrently by time-sharing their access
demands on Core Memory.
Sixteen different function codes are provided to
initiate Card Reader operations. Cards can be fed
without reading and read with or without feeding.
Other function codes provide for stacker selection
and mode selection (translated, column binary, or
row binary mode). Initiation of an external interrupt
upon completion of a reader operation is optional.
Comprehensive checks are made on reader operations. When any error is detected, the Card Control
Unit initiates an external interrupt and transmits a
Status Word indicating the type of error to the Central Computer. A bit-by-bit read verification is
performed, and an illegal character check (in the
translated mode only) accepts only 64 of the 4,096
possible card column codes. Other causes of error
interrupts are: full stacker, empty hopper, card
jam, misfeed, late stacker selection, and illegal or
inappropriate function code. An inappropriate function code is one that cannot be performed because of
the particular sequence of Card Reader functions that
preceded it.
Upon receipt of,the appropriate input Function Words,
cards are fed from the input hopper, read and verified at two separate sensing stations, and sent to one
of three stackers. Data read from a card is stored
in card image form within the Card Control Unit. If
the translated mode has been selected, each card
column code is translated into a 6-bit internal code.
The Channel Synchronizer assembles the 6-bit codes
into 36-bit computer words, so the contents of each
80-column card occupy 13 full words and the 12 highorder bit positions of a 14th word. Standard
Hollerith card coding and Fieldata internal coding
will usually be used when reading in the translated
mode, but any desired 12-bit to 6-bit code translation
© 1963
Description (Contd. )
. 13
Availability: . .
9 to 12 months.
.14
First Delivery:
September, 1962 (with 1107).
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Drive Mechanism
. 211 Drive past the head: .
.212 Reservoirs:
.....
.22
Sensing and Recording Systems
. 221 Recording system: .
.222 Sensing system: . .
.24
pinch roller friction.
none .
none.
brush.
Arrangement of Heads
Use of station: •
Stacks: .
Heads/stack: . .
Method of use: •
reading.
1.
80.
reads I row at a time.
Use of station: •
Distance: .••
Stacks: • . . .
Heads/stack: . .
Method of use: .
read verification.
1 card.
1.
80.
reads 1 row at a time and
verifies previously read
data on a bit-by-bit basis.
....
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
.31
Form of Storage
.311 Medium: . . .
.312 Phenomenon: .
.32
Positional Arrangement
.321
.322
.324
.325
Serial by:
Parallel by:
Track use: •
Row use: . .
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
standard 80-column cards.
rectangular holes.
12 rows.
80 columns.
all for data.
all for data.
5/63
784:071.330
§
UNIVAC 1107
071.
• 33
Coding
Translated mode:
Hollerith code as in Data
Code Table No.2, or any
other column code.
Column binary mode: • full card image.
Row binary mode: . . . full card image.
· 34
Format Compatibility:. with all devices using
standard 80-column card.
.35
Physical Dimensions:
.4
CONTROLLER
· 41
Identity:....
.42
Connection to System
• 421 On-line: . . . . • . .
.422 Off-line: • . . . • . .
.43
.522
• 523
. 524
.525
• 526
Output: . .
Stepping: •
Skipping: .
Marking: .
Searching:
.53
one of the following 3 modes
selected by a Function Word.
Translated mode:
translate each card column
code into a 6-bit internal
code. Any desired codes
can be manually inserted
via the Card Control Unit
maintenance panel.
Column binary mode: . store card image, 3 card
columns per 36- bit computer word; zero-fill the
12 least significant bit positions of the 27th word.
Row binary mode: . . • store card image, with each
card row filling 2 computer
words and 8 bit positions of
a third word; zero-fill the
remaining 24 bit position
of every third word .
. 54
Format Control: • . . . mode selection only; see
preceding entry (no plugboard).
.55
Control Operations
standard 80-column card.
Card Control and
Synchronizer Unit.
Type 7240 or 7277.
up to 15 Card Controls, 1
per Punched Card Subsystem. Each subsystem fully
occupies 1 input-output
channel.
none.
Connection to Device
......
..
..
.56
Data Transfer Control
Code Translation:
Disable:
Request interrupt: .
Offset card:
Select stacker:.
Select format:
Select code:
. 431 Devices per controller: 1 Card Reader.
Type 7240 also controls 1
150 card/min punch.
Type 7277 also controls 1
300 card/min punch.
. 432 Restrictions:. . . . . . none.
· 44
none.
feed 1 card but do not read .
none .
none •
none.
no .
yes.
no .
yes; 1 of 3 stackers.
no.
yes .
Testable Conditions
Disabled: • . . . •
Busy device: . . .
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller:
Hopper empty: .
Stacker full: ..
yes.
no.
no.
yes.
yes.
yes.
.441 Size of load: • . . . . . 1 card of 14 computer words
in translated mode, 27
words in column binary
mode, or 36 words in row
binary mode.
. 442 Input-output area:
Core Memory .
.443 Input-output area
access: . . . . . .
each word or field-defined
portion of a word .
• 444 Input-output area
lockout: . . • . .
none .
. 445 Table control: .
none.
. 446 Synchronization: .
automatic .
·6
PERFORMANCE
• 61
Conditions: .
.5
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
.62
Speeds
.51
Blocks
· 621 Nominal or peak speed: 600 cards/minute.
· 622 Important parameters
Name
Value
Sensing and storing
of data: .
82. 4 msec/card.
Dead time: . . . . . 17.6 msec/card at peak
speed.
Stacker select delay: maximum of 100 msec after
input instructions.
· 623 Overhead: • . . .
15 clutch points per
100 msec cycle.
· 624 Effective speeds:
600 cards/minute when
reading continuously.
.511 Size of block:
. 512 Block demarcation:
. 52
1 card.
fixed .
Input-Output Operations
.521 Input:. . . . . • . . . . read 1 card, with or without
feeding, in translated,
column binary, or row
binary mode. External interrupt upon completion is
0I>tional.
5/63
. . . see Paragraph . 63.
INPUT-OUTPUT: CARD READER
§
784:071. 630
071.
.63
.73
Demands on System
Component
Core
Memory:
Condition
Percentage
.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Hopper: .
Stacker: .
.732 Replenishment time:.
trans]a.ted mode
column binary
row binary
.7
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
.71
Adjustments:...... none.
. 72
Msec per
card
Loading and Unloading
0.056
0.108
0.144
O. 056.
0.108.
0.144.
. 734 Optimum reloading
period: . . • . . .
.8
Form
Error
Check or
Interlock
Action
Reading:
re-read and compare
interrupt; route
card to error
Comment
button
reads 3 cards and
stores their contents
in Card Reader
memory.
clears control circuits,
I/O Clear: button (on
Control Console) indicators, and Card
Reader memory.
Resume:
button
restarts reader after
a halt.
Run:
1. 67 minutes.
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Other Controls
Function
Capacity
1, 000 cards.
3 stackers; 1, 000 cards
each.
0.25 minute; reader does not
need to be stopped.
© 1963
stacker.
Input area overflow:
Invalid code:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Hopper empty:
Stacker full:
Card jam:
none.
check (in translated
mode only)
none.
check
check
check
check
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
Not~: The type of error is indicated by bits 30 to 35 of the Status
Word, sent to the Central Computer when an interrupt occurs,
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA incorporated
5/63
784:072.100
_STANDARD
EDP
•
UNIVAC 1107
Input-Output
Card Punch
REPORTS
INPUT-.OUTPUT: CARD PUNCH
§
072.
· 12
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
Description
The contents of 13 full computer words and the 12
high-order bit positions of a 14th word are then
punched into one 80-column card. Standard Fieldata
internal coding and Hollerith card coding is usually
used when punching the translated mode, but any desired 6-bit to 12-bit code translation can be performed if the translate portion of the Card Control
Unit buffer is manually altered via the maintenance
panel.
Card Punch.
Type 7224 (150 cards/min).
The Type 7224 Card Punch punches and verifies
standard 80-column cards at a peak speed of 150
cards per minute. One Card Punch and one Card
Reader can be connected to a Card Control and Synchronizer Unit, forming a Punched Card Subsystem.
Each subsystem fully occupies one 1107 input-output
channel. The reader and punch in any subsystem can
operate concurrently by time-sharing their access
demands on Core Memory.
Ten different function codes are provided to initiate
Card Punch operations. The function codes determine which of two stackers will be selected, which
of three translation modes will be used, and whether
or not an external interrupt will be initiated upon
completion of the punch operation. Cards fed from
the input hopper pass the following stations at onecard intervals: two read stations (which are not used
in an 1107 system), the punch station, a "wait" station, and the read verification station. Cards are
block-punched; i. e., all 12 rows are punched at the
same time, whereas most card punches punch one
row at a time. A maximum of 240 holes can be
punched into any I card. This characteristic represents a serious limitation on the punching of fullcard binary images, because any or all of the 960
positions on the card may need to be punched to represent binary "I" bits. When the binary punching
capability is required, use of the 300-card-perminute punch is recommended.
Full card images can be transferred from Core
Memory to cards without translation in either the
column binary or row binary mode. However, the
limitation of 240 holes per card previously noted
makes it necessary to zero-fill most of the Core
Memory locations whose contents are to be punched
in either binary mode.
. 13
Availability: ..
9 to 12 months.
.14
First Delivery:
September, 1962 (with 1107).
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Drive Mechanism
• 211 Drive past the head: .
.212 Reservoirs:
.....
· 22
© 1963
pinch roller friction.
none .
Sensing and Recording Systems
· 221 Recording system: .
· 222 SenSing system: •
· 223 Common system:
die punch.
brush.
no.
• 23
Multiple Copies: •
none.
· 24
Arrangement of Heads
Comprehensive checks are made on Card Punch operations. When any error is detected, the Card
Control Unit initiates an external interrupt and
transmits a Status Word indicating the type of error
to the Central Computer. All punched data is read
back and verified on a bit-by-bit basis. A character
validity check (in the translated mode only) can detect any of up to 12 code combinations designated as
illegal codes by the user. Other causes of error interrupts are: full stacker, empty hopper, card jam,
misfeed, an attempt to punch more than 240 holes
into one card, and an illegal or inappropriate function code. An innappropriate function code is one
that cannot be performed because of the particular
sequence of Card Reader functions that preceded it.
Upon receipt of the appropriate output Function
Words, the Channel Synchronizer disassembles 36bit computer words into 6-bit character codes and
transmits them to buffer storage in the Card Control
Unit. If the translated mode has been selected, each
6-bit code is translated into one card column code.
Description (Contd.)
Use of station: .
Stacks: . . • • .
Heads/stack: . .
Method of use: •
punching.
1.
960.
punches 1 full card at a
time.
Use of station: •
reading (for verification of
punching).
2 cards after punch station.
1.
80.
reads 1 row at a time.
Distance: • . .
Stacks: . • . .
Heads/stack: •
Method of use: .
Note: Two more read stations precede the punch
station; they are not used in 1107 programming.,
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
.31
Form of Storage
.311 Medium: . . • • . . . • standard 80-column cards.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
784:072.312
§
UNIVAC 1107
072.
.52
· 312 Phenomenon: •
.32
.322 Parallel by:
. 324 Track use: .
. 325 Row use: •
1 card for punching.
12 rows for checking.
960 punch positions for
punching.
80 columns for checking.
all for data .
all for data •
Coding
· 523
.524
.525
.526
Stepping: .
Skipping: .
Marking: .
Searching:
• 53
Code Translation:
.54
Format Control: • . . . mode selection only; see
preceding entry (no
plugboard).
• 55
Control Operations
Translated mode:
Hollerith code as in Data
Code Table No.2, or any
other column code.
Column binary mode:
full card image.
Row binary mode: . . . full card image.
.34
Format Compatibility:. with all devices using
standard 80-column cards.
.35
Physical Dimensions:
.4
CONTROLLER
· 41
Identity:
.42
Connection to System
.421 On-line: . . . . • • .
. 43
standard 80-column cards.
Card Control and
Synchronizer Unit.
Type 7240.
up to 15 Card Controls, 1
per Punched Card Subsystem. Each subsystem
fully occupies 1 inputoutput channel.
.5
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
. 51
Blocks
. 511 Size of block:
. 512 Block demarcation:
5/63
• 56
Data Transfer Control
.441 Size of load: . . . . . . 1 card of 14 computer
words in translated mode,
27 words in column binary
mode, or 36 words in row
binary mode.
. 442 Input-output area:
Core Memory .
.443 Input-output area
access: . . . • .
each word or field-defined
portion of a word.
· 444 Input-output area
lockout: . • . . .
none .
. 445 Table control: . .
none .
. 446 Synchronization:.
automatic.
1 card.
fixed.
one of the following 3 modes,
selected by a Function
Word.
Translated mode: . • . translate each 6-bit internal
code into 1 card column
code. Any desired codes
can be manually inserted
via the Card Control Unit
maintenance panel.
Column binary mode:
punch full card image, 3
card columns per 36-bit
computer word.
Row binary mode: . • . punch full card image, 1
card row for every 3 computer words (2 full words
and the high-order 8 bits
of the third word).
Disable: . . . . • .
Request interrupt: •
Offset card:
Select stacker:
Select format:
Select code: • .
Connection to Device
. 431 Devices per controller: 1 Card Punch and 1 Card
Reader .
• 432 Restrictions:. . . . . . none.
• 44
none.
punch 1 card in translated,
column binary, or row
binary mode; advance all
cards 1 station; and feed
1 card. External interrupt
upon completion is optional.
none.
none.
none.
none .
.521 Input:. .
.522 Output: .
Positional Arrangement
• 321 Serial by:
.33
rectangular holes.
Input-Output Operations
no.
yes.
no.
yes, 1 of 2 stackers •
no .
yes.
Testable Conditions
Disabled: . . . . .
Busy device: . . .
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller:
Hopper empty: . .
Stacker full: . . .
.6
PERFORMANCE
. 61
Conditions: •
.62
Speeds
yes .•
no.
no.
yes.
yes.
yes.
. . . see Paragraph . 63 .
• 621 Nominal or peak speed: 150 cards/minute .
· 622 Important parameters
Value
Name
Translate and
transfer data: .
256.9 msec/card.
134. 1 msec/card.
Punch: •
.623 Overhead: • . . .
18 clutch points per 400
msec cycle .
150 cards/minute when
· 624 Effective speeds:
reading continuously •
INPUT - OUTPUT: CARD PUNCH
§
784:072.630
072.
. 63
.732 Replenishment time:. . 0.25 minute; punch does not
need to be stopped •
Demands on System
Component Condition
Core
Memory:
Msec per
card
Percentage
0.056
0.108
0.144
0.014.
0.027.
0.036.
translated mode
column binary
row binary
.7
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
.71
Adjustments:...... none.
.72
Other Controls
. 73
.8
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Function
Form
Comment
Run:
Resume:
button
button
initiates punch operation.
restarts punch after a halt.
Loading and Unloading
.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Hopper: •
Stackers:
.734 Optimum reloading
period: . . .. . . . • . 4.67 minutes.
Capacity
700 cards.
. 2 stackers; 850 cards each.
© 1963
Check or
Interlock
Action
interrupt; route
card to error
stacker.
Recording:
read back and
compare
Output block size:
Invalid code:
fixed; no check.
check (in translated
mode only)
none.
check
check
check
check
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt •
interrupt.
check
interrupt.
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Hopper empty:
Stacker full:
Card jam:
More than 240 holes
per card:
interrupt.
Note: The type of error is indicated by bits 30 to 35 of the Status
Word, sent to the Central Computer when an interrupt occurs.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incarporated
5/63
•
784:075.100
STANDARD
EDP
•
REPORTS
UNIVAC 1107
Input - Output
Paper Tape Reader
INPUT-OUTPUT: PAPER TAPE READER
§
075.
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: ..
· 12
Description
The reader is mounted vertically, and the tape is fed
down into it from a supply reel with a tension arm
reservoir. No take-up facilities are provided.
Reading is performed photoelectrically by silicon
photo-diodes. Tape can be read backward as well;
as forward, but backward movement may not exceed
12 inches (120 characters). The reader can handle
tape with 5, 6, 7, or 8 data tracks and 11/16, 7/8,
or 1 inch in width. Because all code translation must
be programmed, any tape code can be used.
The Paper Tape Subsystem does not include a Channel
Synchronizer for the assembly of characters into
1107 words. Therefore, the reader must communicate directly with the computer on a character-bycharacter basis. Character codes read from the tape
are transferred without translation into the eight loworder bit positions of consecutive word locations in
Core Memory. No automatic parity checking is provided. When a parity check is reqUired, it must be
accomplished through a program subroutine. (The
1107 has special instructions that facilitate programmed parity checking.) The standard program
sequence used to read a block of data from punched
tape consists of six Instruction Words, three AccessControl Words, and two Function Words.
.13
Availability: •.
9 to 12 months.
• 14
First Delivery:
September, 1963.
·2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Drive Mechanism
• 22
· 24
Arrangement of Heads
Use of station: .
Stacks: • . . . .
Heads/stack: ..
Method of use: .
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
· 31
Form of Storage
• 311 Medium: . . .
.312 Phenomenon: • . .
· 32
.321 Serial by: •
• 322 Parallel by:
• 324 Track use
Data: • . . . . • . .
Redundancy check: .
Timing: • . . • .
Control signals:
Unused: •
Total: •.
.325 Row use: .
© 1963
paper or plastic tape.
punched holes.
row, at 10 rOWS/inch •
5, 6, 7, or 8 data tracks at
standard spacing.
5, 6, 7, or 8.
o (parity check can be
programmed).
1 (sprocket track).
O.
O.
5, 6, 7, or 8 (plus sprocket
track).
all for data.
any 5-, 6-, 7-, or 8-track
tape code; code translation
is programmed.
· 33
Coding: •
.34
Format Compatibility:. with all devices using
standard punched tape.
· 35
Physical Dimensions
.351 Overall width:
.352 Length: • . . .
.4
CONTROLLER
.41
Identity:
• 42
Connection to System
.422 Off-line: • . . . . . .
.43
none.
photo-electric (silicon
photo-diodes).
reading.
1.
8 (plus sprocket head).
reads 1 row at a time.
Positional Arrangement
.421 On-line: • . . . . . .
pinch rollers.
tension arm, serving supply
reel only.
Sensing and Recording Systems
.221 Recording system:.
• 222 Sensing system: • •
Multiple Copies: • . . . none.
Paper Tape Reader.
(part of Paper Tape
Subsystem, Type 7423).
The Paper Tape Reader is a modified Digitronics
Model B3500 reader with a peak speed of 400 characters per second. It is an integral part of the
UNIVAC 1107 Paper Tape Subsystem, a single cabinet which also houses a 110 character per second
punch (described in Section 784:076) and a control
unit.
.211 Drive past the head: •
.212 Reservoir:. . . . . .
.23
0.687, 0.875, or 1. 0 inch.
up to 600 feet per reel.
Paper Tape Control Unit.
(part of Paper Tape
Subsystem, Type 7423).
up to 15; each subsystem
fully occupies one 11 07
input-output channel.
none.
Connection to Device
.431 Devices per controller: 1 Paper Tape Reader and
1 Paper Tape Punch.
· ~32 Restrictions:. . . . . . none.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
UNIVAC 1107
784:075.440
§
· 622 Important parameter!>
Tape speed:
Start time:
Stop time: •
075.
• 44
Data Transfer Control
• 441 Size of load: . . .
.442 Input-output area:
1 character •
low-order 8-bit positions of
consecutive Core Memory
locations •
. 443 Input-output area
access: . . . . •
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
.51
Blocks
• 511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation:
limited only by tape length •
character count in AccessControl Word.
Input-Output Operations
.521 Input:. • . • • . . . •. feed tape forward or backward 1 row and read 1
character into the loworder 8-bit positions of a
Core Memory location.
(Backward tape movement
may not exceed 12 inches.)
.522 Output: ••
none.
.523 Stepping:.
none .
• 524 Skipping:.
none.
none .
.525 Marking:.
. 526 Searching:
none.
• 53
Code Translation:
by program •
· 54
Format Control: •
by program.
• 55
Control Operations
Enable: . . . . . . .
Disable: . . . . • .
Request interrupt: .
Select format:
Select code:
Rewind:
Unload: . . •
. 56
· 63
yes; "reader on".
yes; "reader off".
no.
no.
no.
no.
no •
Central Computer.
0.004.
0.16.
Note: When standard input instruction sequence is
use1, Central Computer is occupied throughout
the data transfer operation .
.7
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
• 71
Adjustments
tape width.
3-position detent action of
tape guides.
Adjustment:
Method: .•
• 72
Other Controls
Function
Form
Comment
Master Clear: button/
light
Tape Fault:
Tape Load:
.73
button/
light
button/
light
clears all error conditions
and reinitiates normal
communication.
clears "out-of-tape" error
conditions.
engages tape drive rollers
and brakes.
Loading and Unloading
.731 Volumes handled: . .
.732 Replenishment time:.
.734 Optimum reloading
period: • . . . . .
up to 600 feet per reel.
1 to 2 minutes;
reader needs to be stopped.
3 minutes.
Testable Conditions
.8
Disabled: • • . . .
Busy device: • . .
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller: •
Exhausted medium:
.6
PERFORMANCE
. 61
Conditions: •
• 62
Speeds
yes.
no.
no.
yes.
yes.
. . . none.
• 621 Nominal or peak speed: 400 char/sec.
5/63
Demands on System
Component: . .
Msec per char:
or
Percentage: . .
none.
none.
accomplished by standard
input instruction sequence.
•5
.52
.624 Effective speed: • . . . 400 char/sec.
each word, or field-defined
portion of a word .
• 444 Input-output area
lockout: . • . . .
• 445 Table control: ••
.446 Synchronization:.
40 inches/sec.
2.5 msec.
2.5 msec.
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Check or
Interlock
Reading:
Input area overflow:
Invalid codes:
Exha usted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Broken· tape:
nonet.
none.
all codes valid.
check
none.
none.
check
Action
interrupt.
interrupt.
t Parity checking can be performed by the stored program,
not incorporated into the hardware.
but is
784:076.100
•
STANDARD
EDP
•
UNIVAC 1107
REPOrn
Input - Output
Paper Tape Punch
INPUT-OUTPUT: PAPER TAPE PUNCH
§
076.
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
· 12
Description
.23
Multiple Copies: • . . . none.
· 24
Arrangement of Heads
Paper Tape Punch.
(part of Paper Tape
Subsystem, Type 7423).
The Paper Tape Punch is a modified Teletype BRPE11 punch with a peak speed of 110 characters per
second. This unit is an integral part of the UNIVAC
1107 Paper Tape Subsystem, a single cabinet which
also houses a 400 character per second reader (described in Section 784:075) and a control unit.
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
• 31
Form of Storage
The Paper Tape Subsystem does not include a Channel
Synchronizer to handle the disassembly of 1107 words
into individual characters. Therefore, the computer
must communicate directly with the punch on a character-by-character basis. Character codes to be
punched on tape are transferred without translation
froin the eight low-order bit positions of consecutive
Core Memory locations. If a parity check is required when the tape is read, the proper parity bit
for each character code must be generated by the
stored program. The standard program sequence
used to punch a block of data consists of seven Instruction Words, three Access-Control Words, and
two Function Words.
As each punch is activated, it closes a switch which
verifies that punching actually took place in that position. The pattern of holes (or "I" bits) actually
punched in each tape row is then compared with the
desired pattern. An invalid comparison halts the
punching operation, initiates an external interrupt,
and places a signal on the level-l data line to indicate the reason for the interrupt.
.13
Availability: •.
9 to 12 months.
· 14
First Delivery:
September, 1962.
·2
PHYSICAL FORM
· 21
Drive Mechanism
sprocket drive.
tension arm, serving supply
reel only.
Sensing and Recording Systems
• 221 Recording system: .
• 222 Sensing system: . .
Positional Arrangement
row, at 10 rows/inch .
5, 6, 7, or 8 tracks at
standard spacing.
. 321 Serial by:
.322 Parallel by:
· 324 Track use
Data:
•••••
Redundancy check: •
Timing: • • . . .
Control signals:
Unused: •
Total: . .
die punches.
none.
© 1963
5, 6, 7, or 8.
o (parity check can be
programmed).
1 (sprocket track).
O.
O.
5, 6, 7, or 8 (Plus sprocket
track).
all for data.
.325 Row use: .
.33
Coding:
any 5-, 6-,7-, or8-track
tape code; code translation
is programmed.
.34
Format Compatibility:. with all devices using
standard punched tape.
.35
Physical Dimensions
0.687, 0.875, or 1. 0 inch .
up to 600 feet per reel.
. 351 Overall width:
.352 Length:. . . .
.4
CONTROLLER
.41
Identity:
• 42
Connection to System
. " ..
",
.421 On-line: . . . • . . .
. 211 Drive past the head: •
.212 Reservoir: • . . . . .
.22
paper or plastic tape .
punched ·holes.
. 311 Medium: . • .
· 312 Phenomenon: . . .
• 32
Tape is fed to the punch from a supply reel with a
tension arm reservoir, but no take-up facilities are
provided. The punch can handle tape with five, six,
seven, or eight data tracks and of 11/16, 7/8, or 1
inch width. Because all code translation must be
programmed, any tape code can be used.
punching.
1.
8 (Plus sprocket punch).
punches 1 row at a time.
Use of station: .
Stacks: . . . . .
Heads/stack: . .
Method of use: .
.422 Off-line: • . . . . . .
. 43
Paper Tape Control Unit .
(part of Paper Tape
Subsystem, Type 7423).
up to 15; each subsystem
fully occupies one 1107
input-output channel.
none.
Connection to Device
.431 Devices per controller: 1 Paper Tape Reader and
1 Paper Tape Punch.
.432 Restrictions:. . . . . . none.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorparated
5/63
784:076.440
UNIVAC 1107
076.
§
.44
. 62
Data Transfer Control
. 441 Size of load: . . .
.442 Input-output area:
. 443 Input-output area
access: . • . . .
.444 Input-output area
lockout: . . . . .
. 445 Table control: • .
. 446 Synchronization: .
1 character.
low order 8 bit positions of
consecutive Core Memory
locations.
•5
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
.51
Blocks
. 511 Size of block:
. 512 Block demarcation:
· 52
...
.63
limited only by tape length.
character count in
Access-Control Word.
..
Stepping:.
Skipping:.
Marking: •
Searching:
. 53
Code Translation:
by program.
.54
Format Control: •
by program.
· 55
Control Operations
0.044.
.7
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
• 71
Adjustments
.72
tape width.
3-position detent action of
tape guides •
Other Controls
Form
Comment
Master Clear: button/light
Tape Fault:
Miscompare:
Tape Feed:
.73
clears all error conditions and reinitiates
normal communication.
button/light clears "out-of-tape"
error conditions.
button/light clears punching error
condition.
button/light feeds tape, causing
sprocket holes to
be punched •
Loaning and Unloading
.731 Volumes handled: . •
.732 Replenishment time:.
up to 1, 000 feet per reel.
I to 2 minutes; reader needs
to be stopped •
. 734 Optimum reloading
period: • . . . • .
yes; "punch on" .
yes; "punch off".
no.
no.
no.
no.
no.
yes.
no.
no.
yes.
yes.
•6
PERFORMANCE
.61
Conditions:....... none.
5 minutes.
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
.8
Testable Conditions
Error
Check or
Interlock
Reading:
Input area overflow:
Invalid codes:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Broken tape:
none.
none.
all codes valid.
check
none.
none.
check
Action
t
interrupt.
interrupt •
t Parity checking can be performed by the stored program. but is
not incorporated into the hardware •
•
A-U-ER-BA-CH-,"-"!iD
rl
5/63
Central Computer •
0.004.
..
Function
.523
· 524
.525
.526
Disabled: . . . . .
Busy device: • . .
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller: •
Exhausted medium:
S~stem
Adjustment:
Method: . .
none.
punch 1 character from the
8 low-order bit positions
of a core memory location
and advance tape 1 row.
none.
none.
none.
none.
Enable: . • • . . . • .
Disable: . . . . . .
Request interrupt: .
Select format:
Select code:
Rewind:
Unload: . . .
Demands on
Component:
Msec per char:
or
Percentage :
Input-Output Operations
.521 Input:. .
.522 Output: .
.56
.621 Nominal or peak speed: 110 char/sec •
. 622 Important parameters
Tape speed:
11 inches/sec •
.• 624 Effective speed:
110 char/sec.
each word, or field-defined
portion of a word.
none .
none .
accomplished by standard
input instruction sequence •
Speeds
784:081.100
•
11
STANDARD
EDP
UNIVAC 1107
Input - Output
Printer
R[FORIS
INPUT-OUTPUT: PRINTER (600 'lines/Min.)
§
.22
081.
•1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity: .
· 12
Description
High-Speed Printer.
Model 46.
Type 7418.
Sensing and Recording Systems
.221 Recording system: . . . on-the-fly hammer strokes
press paper against ribbon
and engraved typewheels.
none.
· 222 Sensing system:
· 23
Multiple Copies
· 231 Maximum number: .
The UNIVAC Model 46 High-Speed Printer has a peak
speed of 600 single-spaced lines per minute. At an
average line spacing of one inch, its effective speed
is 424 lines per minute. One printer can be connected to a High-Speed Printer Control and Synchronizer Unit, forming a High-Speed Printer Subsystem.
Each subsystem fully occupies one 1107 input-output
channel.
The printer has a 51-character set and 128 print
positions, spaced ten per inch. Vertical spacing is
six lines per inch. There is no paper tape carriage
control loop, so the computer program must count
its way over pre-printed forms. The forms can be
advanced from 0 to 63 lines prior to printing each
line, at a maximum speed of 20 inches per second.
A printer Function Word, sent by the Central Computer to the control unit, initiates each print operation. The Function Word specifies the number of
lines to be stepped and indicates whether or not there
shall be an external interrupt upon completion of the
print operation. The 128 characters to be printed,
in the six-bit Fieldata code, occupy 21 full words and
the 12 high-order bit positions of a 22nd word in
Core Memory. If a "stop" code (binary 111111) is
encountered in the data before all 128 characters
have been transferred to the printe;r buffer, the data
transfer is terminated and the remaining print
positions are space-filled.
No checks for accuracy are made upon the transfer
of data to the printer or the print operation itself.
Although there are only 51 printable characters, all
of the 64 Fieldata code combinations are valid: there
are 12 different codes for "space, .. plus the special
stop code. External interrupts are initiated upon detection of exhausted forms, exhausted ribbon, excessive temperature, improper printer selection, or
an illegal Function Word.
• 13
Availability: . .
.14
First Delivery:
•2
PHYSICAL FORM
• 21
Drive Mechanism
.211 Drive past the head: •
. 212 Reservoirs: . . . . .
· 233 Types of master
Multilith: .
Spirit: • . . . .
· 24
Numerals:
Letters:
Special:
10
26
15
Alternatives: .
FORTRAN set: .
Basic COBOL set:
upon special request.
yes.
yes, substituting , for
COBOL" .
51 and blank.
Total:
.....
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
.31
Form of Storage
Oto9.
A to Z.
=> < -
+*&
$• ; ( )/ ,
continuous, fanfold,
sprocket-punched
stationery •
.312 Phenomenon: • . . . . . printing.
.311 Medium: . . . . .
· 32
Positional Arrangement
· 321 Serial by:
• 322 Parallel by:
• 324 Track use: .
September, 1962 (with 1107). .325 Row use: .
© 1963
printing.
1.
128.
prints 1 line at a time.
Range of Symbols
9 to 12 months.
sprockets .
none.
yes.
yes.
Arrangement of Heads
Use of station: .
Stacks: . . . . .
Heads/stack: . .
Method of use: .
.25
original and four clear
copies, using 12-pound
stock with interleaved
carbons.
6 lines per inch.
128 print positions at 10 per
inch .
all for data.
all for data.
engraved character font;
Fieldata internal code as
in Data Code Table No. I,
Section 784:141.
· 33
Coding: •
.34
Format Compatibility:. none.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
784:081.350
§
UNIVAC 1107
081.
• 35
none.
none •
.53
Code Translation:
automatic.
. 54
Format Control: .
by program (no plugboard).
· 55
Control Operations
Physical Dimensions
· 351 Overall width:
.352 Length: • • . . .
4 to 27 inches by vernier.
maximum of 22 inches
fold-to-fold.
.4
CONTROLLER
.41
Identity: • . . .
· 42
Connection to System:. up to 15 controllers, 1 per
Printer Subsystem. Each
subsystem fully occupies
1 input-output channel.
• 43
· 525 Marking: .
· 526 Searching:
High-Speed Printer Control
and Synchronizer Unit.
Type 7239.
· 56
Connection to Device
Data Transfer Control
.441 Size of load: • . .
.442 Input-output area:
• 443 Input-output area
access: . . . • •
• 444 Input-output area
lockout: . • • . .
• 445 Table control: • .
• 446 Synchronization:.
1 line of up to 128 characters (22 computer words).
Core Memory .
each word or field-defined
portion of a word.
none.
none .
automatic.
.5
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
.51
Blocks
Testable Conditions
·6
PERFORMANCE
.. 61
Conditions: .
.62
Speeds
. . . none.
. 621 Nominal or peak speed: 600 lines/minute .
.622 Important parameters
Skipping speed: •
20 inches/sec.
.624 Effective speeds: . . . 7, 200/(N + 11) lines/minute,
where N is average number
of lines advanced.
• 63
Demands on System
Component
msec per line
Core Memory:
•511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation:
•7
EXTERNAL FACILITIES .
.71
Adjustments
.72
.52
or
0.088
1 line •
fixed; 128 characters per
line. (Data transfer from
Core Memory is halted if
a stop code consisting of
six "1" bits is detected
before 128 characters
have been transferred; in
this case, the remaining
print positions are
space-filled. )
yes.
yes .
no.
yes •
yes .
Disabled: • . . • .
Busy device: • . .
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller: •
Exhausted medium:
. 431 Devices per controller: 1 printer.
. 432 Restrictions:. . . . . . none.
• 44
no.
yes.
no.
no.
Disable: . . • . . .
Request interrupt: .
Select format:
Select code: • . . .
Percentage
0.088.
Adjustment
Method
Vertical alignment:
Form width: . • .
Form thickness: •
calibrated dial.
sliding forms tractor.
calibrated dial.
Other Controls
Input-Output Operations
Function
none.
transfer up to 128 characters from Core Memory to
printer buffer; advance
paper 0 to 63 line spaces,
and print 1 line with optional external interrupt
upon completion.
.523 Stepping: . • • . . . . . o to 63 line spaces forward,
combined with print operation only; stepping precedes printing.
.524 Skipping: . . . . . . . . see preceding entry; no
carriage control tape.
.521 Input: .•
.522 Output: •
5/63
Form
Carriage In/Out: 2 buttons
Change Ribbon:
button
Space Ribbon:
button
Clear:
button
Computation
Run:
Computation
Stop:
button.
button.
Comment
move ribbon and typewheel carriage in or
out.
winds ribbon completely
onto take-up shaft.
advances from 1 line
space.
resets controls, indicators, and flip-flops.
INPUT .OUTPUT: PRIN'fER (600 Lines! Min.)
784:081. 730
.8
§ 081.
.73
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Loading and Unloading
Error
.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Feed hopper: .
Stacker: • . . .
. 732 Replenish time: •
Capacity
12- inch stack.
12-inch stack.
1 to 2 minutes; printer
needs to be stopped.
2 to 3 minutes •
• 733 Adjustment time:
.734 Optimum reloading
period: • . . . • .
41 minutes.
Basis: 12-inch stack of 2-part sets, 17 inches long,
at I-inch line spacing.
© 1963
Check or
Interlock
Recording:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
all codes valid
Exhausted medium:
Exhausted ribbon:
Illegal function:
Excessive temperature:
check
check
check
check
Action
none.
none
cut off at 128 chars.
12 different codes
produce "space".
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
Note: The type of error is indicated by bits 30-35 of the Status Word,
sent to the Central Computer when an interrupt occurs.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
784:081. 800
UNIVAC 1107
EFFECTIVE SPEED
HIGH· SPEED PRINTER, TYPE 7418
6,000
5,000
4,000
3,000
2,000
1,000
900
800
700
600
Printed
Lines per
Minute
500
'" r--
~
......
400
~
"""
'"'~
300
...............
~
200
~
--------
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
o
1/2
1
3
2
Inter- Line Spacing in Inches
,
5/63
I'A-u-m-BA-CH-_-:-/~
4
5
784:091.100
UNIVAC 1107
Input-Output
Uniservo IIA
INPUT-OUTPUT: UNISERVO IIA
§
091.
. 12
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity:
.12
Description
whenever a tape error (e. g., incorrect parity)
occurs, and also upon normal completion of a tape
operation when an external interrupt has been specified. Bit positions 32 through 35 of the Status Word
contain a status code that can be tested to determine
the reason for the interrupt and the nature of the tape
error, if any has occurred. The other 32 bits of the
Status Word are unused.
. . • . . . • Uniservo IIA Magnetic Tape
Handler.
Type 7242.
The Uniservo IIA provides magnetic tape input-output
for the UNIVAC 1107 at substantially lower speed and
cost than the Uniservo lllA and mc tape handlers described in the following report sections. A magnetic
tape subsystem consists of 2 to 12 Uniservo llA tape
handlers connected to a Uniservo llA Control and
Synchronizer Unit and a Power Supply. Each subsystem occupies one 1107 input-output channel, and only
one tape handler per subsystem can read or write at
a time. A panel of dial switches is used to change
the logical addresses assigned to the individual tape
handlers.
Data can be recorded on either plastic-base ormetallic tape, at a packing density of 125 or 250 rows
per inch. (Data recorded by the Unityper keyboardto-magnetic-tape transcriber at 50 rows per inch can
be read, but the Uniservo IIA cannot record at this
density.) Tape velocity is 100 inches per second,
providing a peak data transfer rate of 12,500 or
25, 000 characters per second, depending upon the
recording density selected. Each tape row contains
six data bits, one clock bit, and one parity bit, and
can represent one alphameric character. Six tape
rows are used to represent each 36-bit 1107 word.
Block length is variable from 1 to 65,535 words.
Tape width and densities are compatible with those of
the Uniservo tape handlers us~d in the UNIVAC II,
III, and Solid-State 80/90 systems, but these three
systems require tape blocks to be of fixed length.
There is no tape compatibility with the Uniservo IlIA
or IIIC tape handlers.
Description (Contd.)
A row parity check is made upon tape reading, but
there is no check upon recording accuracy. Anyone
of three amplifier gain levels can be specified when
reading. A metal ring inserted into the supply reel
prevents the execution of write commands; the function of this file protection device is the opposite of
the "write enable" rings used in most other tape
handlers, including the Uniservo IlIA and mc.
All tapes should be pre-tested off-line to detect and
mark any flaws. Bad spots on metallic tape are
marked by perforating the tape in the bad area with
a special hand punch. Bad spots on plastic tape are
marked by manually scraping off the oxide coating.
The areas so marked are automatically skipped over
during read and write operations.
.13
Availabilitl: • .
9 to 12 months.
.14
First Delivery:
September, 1962 (with
1107).
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Drive Mechanism
.211 Drive past the head: .
single clutched capstan.
· 212 Reservoirs
Number: .
2.
Form: •.
vacuum column.
Capacity: .
6 feet of tape.
electric motor.
A Uniservo IIA operation can be initiated by any of 36 · 213 Feed drive:
.214 Take-up drive:.
electric motor.
different function codes. The function code can
specify whether recording shall be at 125 or 250
· 22 Sensing and Recording Systems
rows per inch, whether reading shall be in the forward or reverse direction, and whether or not an ex· 221 Recording system: .
erase head followed by
ternal interrupt shall occur upon normal completion
magnetic write head.
of a tape operation. Tape searching, an unusual and
magnetic head.
valuable feature, is possible in either the forward or · 222 Sensing system: .
yes; common read/write
reverse direction. The first word of each tape block · 223 Common system:
head.
is read and compared to an Identifier Word. When a
match occurs, the entire block is read into Core
· 23 Multiple Copies: . • • • none.
Memory and the operation is terminated.
Each tape read operation requires two instruction
words, two Access-Control Words and one Function
Word in the stored program. Tape writing requires
three instructions, two Access-Control Words, and
one Function Word. A Status Word is transmitted
from the tape control unit to the Central Computer
© 1963
• 24
Arrangement of Heads
Use of station: .
Stacks: . . . • .
Heads/stack:. .
Method of use: •
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
erase.
1.
8.
1 row at a time.
5/63
784:091.240
§
UNIVAC 1107
091.
· 24
.43
Arrangement of Heads (Contd.)
Use of station: •
Stacks: • . . . .
Heads/stack: . .
Method of use: •
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
• 31
Form of Storage
• 311 Medium: . • .
• 312 Phenomenon: •
• 32
read/write.
1.
8.
1 row at a time.
metal or plastic tape with
magnetizable surface.
magnetization.
Positional Arrangement
• 321 Serial by: •••• • • • row, at 125 or 250 rows
per inch. (Tape produced
by a Unityper at 50 rows
per inch can be read but
not written) .
• 322 Parallel by: • . . • .
8 tracks .
• 324 Track use
Data: • • . . . . ••
6.
Redundancy check: •
1 (odd parity).
Timing:. • . . •
1 (clock).
Control signals: •.
O.
Unused:. . . . . . .
O.
Total: • . . • . . . . • 8 •
• 325 Row use, per N-wotd block
Data: . • • . • • . .
6 to 6N.
Redundancy check: •
O.
Timing:. . • . •
O.
Control signals:
O.
Inter-block gap:
1. 05 inches.
.33
Coding: • . . • . •
.34
Format Compatibility: • with Uniservo II and lIA
units in other UNIVAC
systems, and (at 50
rows/inch) with Unityper
keyboard-to-magnetic tape
unit.
.35
Physical Dimensions
.351 Overall width: . • .
. 352 Length
Plastic-base tape:
Metal tape: . . • •
.4
CONTROLLER
• 41
Identity:
· 42
binary image; 6 tape rows
per 1107 word.
0.50 inch•
Connection to Device
.431 Devices per controller: 2 to 12•
• 432 Restrictions:. . . • • . none.
• 44
Data Transfer Control
.441 Size of load: •.•
.442 Input-output area:
• 443 Input-output area
access: . . . . •
• 444 Input-output area
lockout: . . . . .
• 445 Table control: • •
. 446 Synchronization: •
5/63
none.
none .
automatic.
.5
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
.51
Blocks
.511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Input: . • . . . • .
1 to 65,535 words.
interblock gap on tape, or
word count in AccessControl Word.
Output: • . . . • . • . word count in AccessControl Word.
.52
Input-Output Operations
.521 Input:. . . • . . . . . • read 1 block of data forward
or backward at low, normal, or high gain, with or
without external interrupt
upon completion.
· 522 Output:. . • . . • • • . write 1 block of data forward
at 125 or 250 rows/inch,
with or without external
interrupt upon completion.
none •
.523 Stepping: •
• 524 Skipping: •
automatic, across tape flaws
marked in a previous edit
operation.
file separator, interblock
.525 Marking: •
gap .
read first word (forward) or
• 526 Searching:
last recorded word (backward) of each block and
compare it with an
Identifier Word. When a
match occurs, read the
block.
.53
Uniservo lIA Control and
Synchronizer.
Type 7214.
Code Translation: • . . none; binary images of data
in internal storage are recorded on tape in an interlaced (i. e., "scrambled ")
pattern with clock and
parity bits added .
.54
Format Control:. .
.55
Control Operations
Disable: • . . • . .
• 422 Off-line:
each word or field -defined
portion of a word .
2,400 feet per reel.
1,500 feet per reel.
Connection to System
.421 On-line: . . . . • • .
1 to 65,535 words.
Core Memory •
up to 15 Control and
Synchronizer units; each
fully occupies 1 inputoutput channel.
none.
Request interrupt: •
Select format:
Select code:
Rewind:
by program.
yes, following rewind with
interlock.
yes.
no.
no •
yes.
INPUT - OUTPUT: UNISERVO IIA
§
784:091.550
091.
.55
. 63
Control Operations (Contd.)
Component Condition msec per
word
Unload:. . . . . • . . . no; not required, because
tape leader remains on
handler.
Terminate current
yes.
operation: • . . .
Select density: . . .
yes; 125 or 250 rows/inch.
yes; 3 levels.
Select amplifier gain:
.56
Demands on System
Core
Memory: I & n
III & IV
yes.
no.
no.
no.
yes.
yes.
yes.
no.
.6
PERFORMANCE
. 61
Conditions
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
.71
Adjustments
1. 67.
0.83.
.72
Other Controls
III:
IV:
Note: Stop/start mode is used unless next tape
function is initiated within 4 msec after
last character of each block is read or written.
.621 Nominal or peak speed
I: .
II: .
III:
IV:
.622 Important parameters
Recording density: •
Tape speed:
Rewind time: ..
Inter-block gap:
End of file gap: .
Start time: • . .
Stop time:
.623 Overhead, per block
I: •
..
...
II: .
III:
IV:
.624 Effective speeds
I: .
II: .
IV:
Comment
Loading and Unloading
.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Plastic-base tape:
Capacity, per reel
2,400 feet, or 5,600,000
characters in I, 000character blocks at 2S0
rows/inch.
Metal tape: . • . . . I, SOO feet, or 3,400,000
characters in I, 000character blocks at 2S0
rows/inch.
.732 Replenishment time:.. 0.5 to 1. 0 minute; tape unit
power needs to be turned
off.
Speeds
III:
Form
Manually Run: switch starts or stops unit.
Rewind:
button manual rewind.
Change Tape: button returns unit to system control.
250 rows/inch, in
stop/start mode.
250 rows/inch, in
continuous mode.
125 rows/inch, in
stop/start mode.
125 rows/inch, in
continuous mode.
II:
metal to plastic tape.
switch.
Adjustment:
Method: •.
,.73
I: .
"
0.004
0.004
.7
Function
\
Percentage of
data transfer
time
Testable Conditions
Disabled: . .
Busy device:
Output lock:
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller: .
End of medium marks:
End of file:.
Rewinding: . . . . • . .
.62
or
25,000 char/sec.
25,000 char/sec.
12,500 char/sec.
12,500 char/sec.
125 or 250 rows/inch.
100 inchesisec.
4.8 minutes per reel.
1. 05 inches.
4.50 inches.
5 msec.
S msec.
27.S msec.
1O.S msec.
27.S msec.
10.S msec.
2S, OOON/(N + 688) char/sec.
2S, OOON/(N + 262) char/sec.
12, SOON/(N + 344) char/sec.
12, 500N/(N + 131) char/sec.
where N is number of
characters (i. e ., tape
rows) per block.
© 1963
.734 Optimwn reloading period
Plastic-base tape:
4.8 minutes.
Metal tape: • • . . . . 3.0 minutes.
.8
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Check or
Interlock
Recording:
Reading:
Input area overflow:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
none.
row parity check
none.
none.
all codes valid.
check
check
Character count:
Illegal function code:
Illegal unit address:
modulo 6 check on input
check
check
--r-
Action
interrupt.
interrupt.
skip premarked
bad spots.
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
Note: The type of error is indicated by bits 32 through 35 of the
Status Word. sent to the Central Computer when an interrupt
occurs.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
784:092.100
UNIVAC 1107
Input-Output
Uniservo iliA
INPUT-OUTPUT: UNISERVO lilA
§
092.
.12
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
Description
indicates a "1." Polarity changes representing bits
are recorded on the tape at 10 microsecond intervals.
When two "a" bits or two "1" bits occur in adjacent
rows, a "non-significant" polarity change in the reverse direction must be inserted midway between
them. These non-significant polarity changes are
detected but ignored by the read circuitry. Unlike
most tape recording systems, the pulse phase method
permits "blank" tape (i.e., tape codes representing
neither "a" nor "I" bits) to be written 'and read.
Uniservo IlIA Magnetic
Tape Handler.
Type 7289.
The Uniservo IIIA provides high speed magnetic tape
input-output for the UNIVAC 1107 system. From 2
to 16 Uniservo IlIA tape handlers can be connected to
a Uniservo IlIA Control and Synchronizer Unit and a
Uniservo Power Supply, forming a Magnetic Tape
Subsystem. Each subsystem ordinarily occupies one
input-output channel, and only one tape handler per
subsystem can read or write at a time. Alternatively, a dual-control synchronizer that occupies two
input-output channels can be used to control each
Magnetic Tape Subsystem. -In this case, simultaneous read/write or read/read (but not write/write)
operations involving any two tape handlers in a subsystem can occur. Other alternative models of the
Control and Synchronizer permit either of two 1107
Central Computers to communicate with the tape
units in a single subsystem.
The main advantage of the pulse phase method ia that
it permits self-clocking of each track on the tape.
The self-clocking, in turn, makes high density recording practical by permitting automatic compensation for "skew" (1. e., the arrival of the bits comprising a tape row at their respective read heads at
different times because the tape rows are not precisely parallel to the stack of read heads).
As each block of data is recorded, the control unit
automatically "surrounds" it by writing a 27-row
pattern (containing "I "s in all tracks) and a 3-row
sentinel both before and after the data itself. The
pattern and sentinel alert the reading circuits to the
beginning and end of data, whether the block is read
forward or backward. In addition, each normallywritten block is followed by a 223-row pattern consisting of "O"s in the odd tracks only. Each block
containing an error detected at recording time (e. g.;
incorrect parity) contains 725 additional rows of special patterns which indicate that the contents of the
block shall be ignored when read. The additional
overhead imposed on the reading and writing of each
block by these lengthy special patterns makes the use
of relatively long data blocks especially desirable in
Uniservo lIlA operations.
Data is recorded by the "pulse phase" method at a
density of 1, 000 rows per inch. Nine tracks are
recorded across the tape, one of which is always
used as a parity track. In the standard recording
format, five tap~ rows are used to represent each
36 -bit 1107 word; the first three rows contain eight
data bits each, and the last two rows of each fiverow group contain only six data bits each. An
optional format, selected through plugboard switching, uses six tape rows per word, With only six
data bits (i. e., one alphameric character) per row.
Tape velocity is 100 inches per second, providing
the following peak data transfer rates:
A read-after-write row parity check permits detection of most recording errors at the time of occurrence. A "frame count" error is detected whenever
the number of data rows in a block is not an integer
multiple of five (or six when the optional format of
six rows per word is used). Four special 9-bit registers in the control unit permit automatic compensation for skew of up to four rows (0.004 inch) in the
tape being read. Excessive skew causes an error indication. Every tape recording and reading error
initiates an external interrupt and causes a Status
Word indicating the specific type of error to be transmitted to the Central Computer. In addition, recording errors cause the previously mentioned special
patterns to be added to each incorrectly-written block.
Standard Format Optional Format
(5 rows per word) (6 rows per word)
Rows per second:
1107 words per
second:
6-bit characters
per second:
100,000
100,000
20,000
16,667
120,000
100,000
An unusual and valuable feature of the Uniservo IlIA
is its ability to search for a specific tape record in
either the forward or reverse direction. The first
data word in each block is read and compared with
all or any specified portion of an Identifier Word.
When a match occurs, the entire block is read into
Core Memory and the search is terminated.
The pulse phase r_ecording method represents "0"
and "1" bits by the direction of change in magnetic
polarity. A change from negative to positive indicates a "0", while a change from positive to negative
© 1963
Description (Contd.)
. 13
Availability:..
9 to 12 months.
• 14
First Delivery:
March, 1963.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
784:092.200
§
UNIVAC 1107
092.
·2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Drive Mechanism
• 211 Drive past the head: •
.212 Reservoirs
Number: .
Form: . .
Capacity: .
.213 Feed drive:
. 214 Take-up drive: .
.22
.33
Coding:......... binary image; 5 or 6 tape
rows per 1107 word.
• 34
Format Compatibility: • only with Uniservo IlIA units
in UNIVAC Ill, 490, 1050,
or other 1107 systems.
UNIVAC III systems must
be equipped with the
Compatible Mode option.
.35
Physical Dimensions
vacuum capstan.
2.
vacuum columns.
approximately 5 feet.
electric motor.
electric motor.
• 351 Overall width:
.352 Length: • . • .
Sensing and Recording Systems
• 221 Recording system: •
• 222 Sensing system: •
· 223 Common system:
erase head followed by
magnetic write head.
magnetic read head .
yes; common read/write
head.
· 23
Multiple Copies: . . . . none.
.24
Arran~ment
of Heads
.4
CONTROLLER
.41
Identity:
.42
Connection to S}!:stem
erase.
1.
9.
1 row at a time.
Use of station: .
Stacks: •.
Heads/stack: ••
Method of use: •
read/write.
1.
9.
1 row at a time.
...
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
.31
Form of Storage
• 311 Medium: •••
.312 Phenomenon: •
.32
.322 Parallel by:
• 324 Track use
Data: • . • . • . . •
Redundancy check: .
Timing: . • . . .
Control signals:
Unused: • • . . •
Total: • • • . • .
t
plastic tape with magnetizable coating.
magnetization.
.43
Connection to Device
.431 Devices per controller: 2 to 16.
. 432 Restrictions:. • • • . . none.
row, at 1,000 rows per
inch.
9 tracks.
Optional
Standard
Format
Format
8t
1
a
o
o
9
. 44
Data Transfer Control
6.
• 441 Size of load: • • .
.442 Input-output area: •
• 423 Input-output area
access: • . . . •
1.
O.
O.
2.
9.
.444 Input-output area
lockout: . • . . .
• 445 Table control: • .
. 446 Synchronization:.
Two of the five rows used to represent each
36-bit computer word in the standard tape
format contain only 6 data bits.
.325 Row use, per N -word block
Standard
Format
5 to 5N
Data: . . . . • • • .
a
Redundancy check: .
Timing: . . . . •
a
Control signals:
283
0.467 inch
Inter-block gap:
5/63
.......
Note: Alternatively, the Type 8003-11 Control and
Synchronizer can be used. This uriit occupies
2 input-output channels and permits 2 read or
1 read and 1 write operations (but not 2 write
operations) to occur simultaneously. Another
alternative is the use of Control and Synchronizer models that permit either of two 1107
computers to communicate with the same group
of tape units •
Positional Arrangement
.321 Serial by:
Uniservo lIlA Control and
Syncq,ronizer.
Types 8003-08 and 8003-11.
up to 15 Type 8003-08 Control and Synchronizer
units; each fully occupies
1 input-output channel.
.422 Off-line: •••••••• none.
.421 On-line:
Use of station: .
Stacks: • . . . .
Heads/stack: ••
Method of use: •
0.50 inch •
3, 600" feet per reel, of
which 3,500 feet are
usable.
.5
PROGRAM FACILITIES
.51
Blocks
.511 Size of block:
Optional
Format
6 to 6N.
O.
O.
283.
0.467 inch.
.512 Block demarcation
Input: •
Output:
1 to 65,535 words .
Core Memory •
each word or field-defined
portion of a word.
none .
none •
automatic.
1 to 65,535 data words, plus
283 rows of control
information.
inter-block gap or word count
in Access-Control Word.
word count in AccessControl Word.
784:092.520
INPUT - OUTPUT: UNISERVO lilA
§
092.
.52
.62
Input-Output Operations
100,000 rows/sec. for both
conditions.
Condition I: • • . • . . 20, 000 words/sec. or
120, 000 alphameric
characters/sec.
Condition II: • . . • . 16,667 words/sec. or
100, 000 alphameric
characters/sec.
.622 Important parameters
Recording density: •
I, 000 rows/inch.
Tape speed: •
100 inches/sec.
Rewind time: • .
maximum of 120 seconds for
3, 600-foot reel.
Inter-block gap:
0.467 inch.
3 msec each (to within 7%
Start and stop time:
of steady speed) •
7. 5 msec per block.
• 623 Overhead: . . • •
.624 Effective speeds:
lOa, OOON/(N + 750)
rows/sec, where N is
number of rows per block.
(See Graph.)
.621 Nominal or peak speed:
• 521 Input:. . • • . • • . • . read 1 block of data forward
or backward; or skip the
block at the read head and
read the next block
forward. External interrupt upon completion is
optional.
. 522 Output: .
write 1 block of data
forward.
.523 Stepping: •
none.
none.
.524 Skipping: .
.525 Marking: .
file separator, inter- block
gap.
. 526 Searching:
read first word (forward) or
last recorded word (backward) of each block and
compare it with all or an
indicated portion of an
Identifier Word. When a
match occurs, read the
block.
63
.53
.54
Format Control: • . . • by program •
. 55
Control Operations
.
Request interrupt: .
Select format:
Select code:
Rewind:
Unload: .
Terminate current
operation:
• 56
yes, following rewind with
interlock.
yes.
no.
no.
yes.
no; not required, because
leader remains on
handler.
.6
PERFORMANCE
.61
Conditions
I: •
II:
Condition
msec per
word
I
II
0.004
0.004
Core
Memory:
.7
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
• 71
Adjustments:...... none.
.72
Other Controls
yes.
Testable Conditions
Disabled: . .
Busy device:
Output lock:
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller: .
End of medium marks:
Rewinding: •
End of file:. • • • . . •
Demands on System
Component
Code Translation: . . • none; binary images of data
in internal storage are recorded on tape (see Paragraph.324).
Disable:
Speeds
.73
© 1963
a
6.7
Form
Comment
Forward:
Backward:
button
button
sets tape for forward operation.
sets tape for backward
operation •
rewinds tape.
moves tape to load point.
Loading and Unloading
.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Reel: • . . . .
standard format; 5 tape
rows per word.
optional format; 6 tape rows
per word.
8.
Function
Rewind:
button
Change tape: button
yes.
no.
no.
no.
yes.
yes.
yes.
yes.
Percentage of data
transfer time
.732 Replenishment time: .
. 734 Optirn um reloading
period: . . . • •
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Capacity
3,500 usable feet, or
26,400, 000 6-bit alphameric characters at I, 000
characters per block.
O. 5 to 1. a minute; tape unit
needs to be stopped.
7 minutes.
5/63
784:092.800
§
UNIVAC 1107
092 .
•8
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Recording:
Reading:
Input area overflow:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Illegal function code:
Excessive skew:
Check or
Interlock
read-after-write row parity
check
row parity check
none.
none.
all codes valid.
check
"bad spot" check
synchronism check
check
check
Action
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
Note: The type of error is indicated by bits 32 through 35 of the
Status Word, sent to the Central Computer when an interrupt
occurs.
5/63
784:092.801
INPUT - OUTPUT: UNISERVO lilA
§
092.
EFFECTIVE SPEED
UNISERVO IliA
H),OOO,OOO
-. . .
- ..
7
4
2
1,000,000
-
-
7
4
2
100,000
--
7
Effective Speed,
rows/sec.
.,.
4
:/
2
/
10,000
V
7
/
7
4
2
./
/
./
[7
1,000
7
4
2
100
2
4
10
7
2
4
100
7
2
1,000
4
7
10,000
Characters per Block
Note:
©
5 or 6 tape rows per 6-character 1107 word,
depending upon recording format used.
1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
784:093.100
STANDARD
•
EDP
•
REPORTS
UNIVAC 1107
Input-Output
Uniservo IIIC
INPUT-OUTPUT: UNISERVO IIIC
§
093.
.12
.1
GENERAL
.. 11
Identity:
.12
Description
recording. A longitudinal parity check character is
written after the last data row in each block. Both
longitudinal and lateral (row) parity are checked during each read and write operation. Abnormal conditions (such as parity errors, illegal function codes,
and end-of-tape marks) cause external interrupts. A
Status Word, sent to the Central Computer when an
interrupt occurs, specifies the reason for the
interrupt.
Uniservo nrc Magnetic Tape
Handler.
Type 7236.
The Uniservo nrc provides UNIVAC 1107 systems
with magnetic tape input-output in a format compatible with all tape units currently produced by IBM except the Model 7340 Hypertape Drive. From 2 to 12
Uniservo IIIC tape handlers can be connected to a
Tape Adapter Cabinet, which is in turn connected to
a Uniservo IIIC Control and Synchronizer Unit and a
Power Supply to comprise a Compatible Tape Subsystem. Each subsystem occupies one 1107 inputoutput channel (there are 15 general purpose inputoutput channels available), and only one tape handler
per subsystem can be reading or writing at any time.
The logical address assigned to each tape handler
can only be changed by means of a plugboard on the
Tape Adapter Cabinet.
Tape speed is 112.5 inches per second. Recording
density may be either 200 or 556 rows per inch, providing a peak data transfer rate of 22,500 or 62,500
characters per second. Each tape row consists of
six data bits and one parity bit, and can represent
one alphameric character or one-sixth of an 1107
word. As in IBM 700 and 7000 series scientific systems, reading and writing can be performed in either
the binary mode (with odd parity) or the BCD mode
(with even parity). Block length is variable from one
word to the-capacity of Core Memory. Tapes recorded at a density of 800 rows per inch by the new
IBM 729V and 729VI Magnetic Tape Units cannot be
read by a Uniservo IIIC tape unit.
.13
Availability:
9 to 12 months.
.14
First Delivery:
March, 1963.
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Drive Mechanism
• 211 Drive past the head: •
.212 Reservoirs
Number:
Form:
Capacity: •
. 213 Feed drive:
. 214 Take-up drive: •
.22
As in IBM tape units, two-gap magnetic heads are
used to permit a read-after-write check on
© 1963
vacuum capstan and tape
tension.
2.
vacuum columns.
approx. 6 feet of tape.
electric motor •
electric motor.
Sensing and Recording Systems
• 221 Recording system: .
.222 Sensing system:
.223 Common system:
• 23
Multiple Copies: •
.24
Arrangement of Heads
A Uniservo nrc operation can be initiated by any of
50 different function codes. Read and write function
codes specify the recording mode (binary or BCD),
the density (200 or 556 rows per inch), and whether
or not an external interrupt shall occur upon normal
completion of the tape operation. If a new read or
write function code is received within 1.0 millisecond after the longitudinal check character of a block
is read, tape movement will be continuous; otherwise, tape movement will stop after each block.
Unlike other Uniservo tape handlers, the IIlC can
read and search only in the forward direction. The
tape can, however, be backspaced one block or one
file. In tape searching, the first word of each tape
block is read and compared to an Identifier Word;
when a match occurs, the entire block is read into
Core Memory and the operation is terminated.
Description (Contd. )
magnetic head.
magnetic head.
2-gap head provides readafter-write checking.
none.
Use of station: •
Stacks: •
Heads/stack: .
Method of use: •
erase.
1.
7.
1 row at a time.
Use of station: •
Stacks: .
Heads/stack: •
Method of use: •
write.
1.
7.
1 row at a time.
Use of station: .
Distance: . .
Stacks: •
Heads/stack: •
Method of use: .
read.
O. 25 inch after write head.
1.
7.
1 row at a time.
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
. 31
Form of Storage
.311 Medium: . . •
. 312 Phenomenon: .
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
plastic tape with
magnetizable surface.
magnetization .
5/63
784:093.320
§
UNIVAC 1107
.444 Input-output area
lockout: . . . . .
• 445 Table control: • .
. 446 Synchronization: .
093.
· 32
Positional Arrangement
row, at 200 or 556 per inch.
. 321 Serial by: .
7 tracks.
.322 Parallel by:
.324 Track use
Data: . . .
6.
Redundancy check: .
1 (parity).
Timing:
O.
Unused:. . . . . . .
O.
Total:. • . . . . . .
7.
.325 Row use, per N-word block
Data: • . . . . . . ,
6 to 6N.
Redundancy check: .
1 (parity).
Timing:. . . . .
O.
Control signals:
O.
Unused:. . . . .
O.
Inter-block gap:
0.75 inch.
· 33
Coding:......
binary image, using 6 tape
rows per 1107 word and
odd parity; or BCD mode,
using IBM 6-bit character
codes and even parity.
.34
Format Compatibility:. with all IBM 700, 1400, and
7000 series systems via
IBM 727, 729, and 7330
Magnetic Tape Units.
Code translation will generally not be required.
· 35
Physical Dimensions
.351 Overall width:
· 352 Length:. . . .
.4
CONTROLLER
• 41
Identity:....
0.50 inch.
2,400 feet per reel.
Uniservo mc Control and
Synchronizer.
Type 7273.
Uniservo mc Tape Adapter
Cabinet.
Type 7424.
.42
Connection to System
.421 On-line: • . . . . . .
• 422 Off-line: • . . . . . .
· 43
Connection to· Device
.5
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
.51
Blocks
• 511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Input: • . . . . . .
.52
Input-Output Operations
.521 Input: . . . . . . . . . . read 1 block of data forward
only at either 200 or 556
rows per inch and in either
binary mode (odd parity)
or BCD mode (even parity);
external interrupt upon
completion is optional.
.522 Output: . . . . . • . . . write 1 block of data forward
at either 200 or 556 rows
per inch and in either
binary mode (odd parity)
or BCD mode (even parity);
external interrupt upon
completion is optional.
.523 Stepping: . . . . . . . . 1 block backward
(backspace ).
approximately 4 inches forward (to skip and erase
defective tape areas).
.524 Skipping: • . . . • . . • backspace to an end-of-file
mark or to load point on
tape.
.525 Marking:.
end-of-file mark, interblock gap.
.526 Searching:
read first word of each
block and compare it with
an Identifier Word. When
a match occurs, read the
block as in Paragraph. 521.
· 55
Code Translation: . . . none; binary images of data
in internal storage are recorded on tape in either
odd parity (binary mode)
or even parity (BCD mode) •
Format Control: . .
Data Transfer Control
. 441 Size of load: . . .
. 442 Input-output area:
. 443 Input-output area
access: • • . . .
5/63
1 to 65,535 words .
Core Memory .
each word or field-defined
portion of a word.
by program.
Control Operations
Disable: . . . . . .
. 44
1 to 65,535 data words.
inter-block gap on tape, or
word count in AccessControl Word.
Output: . . . . . . . . word count in AccessControl Word.
up to 15 Magnetic Tape
Subsystems; each requires
1 Control and Synchronizer .53
unit and 1 Tape Adapter
Cabinet, and each fully
occupies 1 input-output
channel.
none.
· 54
.431 Devices per controller: 2 to 12.
• 432 Restrictions:. . . . . . none.
none.
none.
automatic •
Request interrupt: .
Select format:
Rewind: . . . • • .
Unload: . . . . . • .
Terminate current
operation: . . • •
yes, following rewind with
interlock.
yes.
yes; binary or BCD.
yes.
no .
yes.
784:093.560
INPUT - OUTPUT: UNISERVO lIIe
§
093.
.56
• 63
Testable Conditions
Disabled: .•
Busy device:
Output lock:
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller: .
End of medium marks:
End of file:
Rewinding: .
.6
PERFORMANCE
.61
Conditions
I: •
II:
III:
IV:
.62
Component
yes.
no.
yes.
no.
yes.
yes; 14 feet from physical
end.
yes.
yes.
III:
IV:
Core
Memory:
Condition
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
.71
Adjustments:...... none.
• 72
Other Controls
6.3 msec.
4.1 msec.
.731 Volumes handled: • . • 2,400 feet per reel; for
I, OOO-character blocks,
5, ODD, 000 characters at
200 char/inch or
11,300,000 characters at
556 char/inch.
.732 Replenishment time:. . 0.5 to 1. 0 minute; tape
handler needs to be
stopped.
• 734 Optimum reloadi.ng
period: . • • • . •
4 minutes.
.8
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
22, 500N/(N + 173) char/sec.
62, 500N/(N + 481) char/sec.
22, 500N/(N + 173) char/sec.
62, 500N/(N + 481) char/sec.
where N is number of
characters (i. e., tape
rows) per block.
t These figures are based upon continuous tape
motion, since tape is not stopped between blocks in
normal operation.
© 1963
Comment
Loading and Unloading
9.0 msec.
9.0 msec .
7.7 msec per block.
7.7 msec per block.
Form
1. 50
4.17
Rewind and Unload: switch/light rewinds and positions tape.
Forward:
switch/light sets tape to handle
forward movement.
Backward:
switch/light Sets tape to handle
.backward
movement.
• 73
°200 or 556 rows/inch.
112.5 inches/sec.
87 seconds.
0.75 inch.
3.7 inches.
0.004
0.004
.7
reading at 200 rows/inch.
reading at 556 rows/inch.
writing at 200 rows/inch.
writing at 556 rows/inch.
22,500 char/sec.
62,500 char/sec.
msec per or Percentage of
word
data transfer
time
I and I1I
II and IV
Function
Speeds
• 621 Nominal or peak speed
I and III: . . . . . ..
II and IV: . • . • . ~ .
.622 Important parameters
Recording density: .
Tape speed: . . •
Full rewind time:
Inter-block gap:
End-of-file gap:
Start time
Read: •.
Write: •.
Stop time
Read: •.
Write: ••
• 623 Overhead t
Reading: •
Writing: • • • . •
. 624 Effective speeds t
I: .
II: .
Demands on System
Recording:
Reading:
Input area overflow:
Out block size:
Ip.valid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Character count:
lllegal function code:
lllegal unit address:
Check or
Interlock
read-after-write parity check
lateral and longitudinal
parity check
none.
none.
all codes valid.
check
see Recording.
modulo 6 check
check
check
Action
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
Note: The type of error is indicated by bits 32 through 35 of the
Status Word, sent to the Central Computer when an interrupt
occurs.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
784: 111.100
•
STANDARD
EDJP
•.
REPORTS
UNIVAC 1107
Simultaneous Operations
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
§
111.
. 12
.1
SPECIAL UNITS
.11
Identity: . . . . .
.12
Control and Synchronizer
Units (one per peripheral
subsystem; described in
reports on the' individual
input-output units, Sections 784:071 through
784:093).
Description
Sixteen input-output channels are provided for communication between the UNIVAC 1107 Central Computer and its peripheral devices. Each channel consists of an input cable and an output cable, but data
flow is limited to only one direction at a time. Channel number 15 is normally reserved for the Control
Console, leaving 15 input-output channels (numbered
o through 14) available for general purpose use. Any
one of the following peripheral subsystems can be
connected to anyone of the 15 general purpose channels via the appropriate Control and Synchronizer
Unit:
o FH-880 Magnetic Drum Subsystem: 1 to 8 drums
(see Section 784:043).
o Fastrand Mass Storage Subsystem: 1 to 8 storage
units.
o Uniservo IlIA Magnetic Tape Subsystem: 2 to 16
tape units (see Section 784:092).
o Uniservo IIA Magnetic Tape Subsystem: 2 to 12
tape units (see Section 784:091).
o Uniservo IIIC Magnetic Tape Subsystem: 2 to 12
tape units (see Section 784:093).
o High-Speed Printer Subsystem: 1 printer (see
Section 784:081).
o Punched Card Subsystem: 1 reader and 1 punch
(see Sections 784:071 and 784:072).
o Paper Tape Subsystem: 1 reader and 1 punch (see
Sections 784:075 and 784:076).
The Control and Synchronizer Units provide the
proper interfaces between the Central Computer and
the peripheral units on each channel. During output
operations, the Synchronizer accepts 36-bit words
from the computer and divides them into 6-bit character elements. During input operations, the Synchronizer assembles 6- bit characters from the input
© 1963
Description (Contd.)
device into 36-bit 1107 words. The peripheral Control Unit, which is usually in the same cabinet as the
Synchronizer, directs the selected input or output
device while it performs the desired function.
In general, one data transfer operation at a time
can occur on each input-output channel that has a
peripheral subsystem connected to it. The exceptions to this general statement are:
o The card reader and punch in a single Punched
Card Subsystem can operate simultaneously by
time-sharing their demands on the channel that
serves them.
o An optional Dual Channel Synchronizer can be used
with a Uniservo IIIA Magnetic Tape Subsystem. In
this case, the subsystem occupies two input-output
channels and can simultaneously control either 1
read and 1 write or 2 read operations (but not 2
write operations).
o A magnetic tape Control and Synchronizer Unit (and
therefore the channel to which it is connected) is
occupied throughout a tape search operation, even
though no data is transferred to the Central Computer until the search has been successfully completed.
Input-output requests for access to Core Memory are
automatically sequenced and controlled by a priority
control network in the Central Computer. When two
or more channels simultaneously attempt to communicate with Core Memory, requests to store input data
are granted priority over requests to access data to
produce output. Within each class, top priority is
granted to the lowest-numbered channel. Therefore,
the peripheral units with the higher data transfer rates
are usually connected to the lower-numbered channels.
Core Memory cycle time is 4 microseconds, so the
maximum potential gross data transfer rate for a
UNIVAC 1107 system is 250,000 words (or 1,500,000
characters) per second. Because core storage accesses are also required for execution of the stored
program and for input-output control functions, the
actual gross data transfer rate will not, as a general
rule, exceed 125,000 words per second. Based upon
this overall restriction, the maximum number of
peripheral devices that can transfer data simultaneously in any combination can be readily calculated
from the following table of peak word transfer rates
to and from Core Memory. (The card reader, card
punch, and printer are buffered, so the tabulated
word transfer rates apply to loading and unloading
of their buffers and are higher than the overall
transfer rates of the devices themselves. )
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
784:111. 120
§
UNIVAC 1107
111.
.12
.4
Description (Contd.)
Device
FH-BBO Magnetic Drum
Fastrand Mass Storage Unit
Uniservo IlIA Tape Unit
Uniservo mc Tape Unit
Uniservo lIA Tape Unit
High-Speed Printer
Card Reader
Card Printer
Paper Tape Reader
Paper Tape Punch
Peak Transfer Rate,
words/second
RULES (Contd.)
Dual Channel Synchronizer occupies 2 of the 15 inputoutput channels).
One input or output operation per Magnetic Drum
Subsystem; and
One input, output, or search operation per Magnetic
Tape Subsystem with Single Channel Synchronizer;
and
60,000
25,000
20,000
10,417
4,167
4,167
1,400
1,400
67
One input and one output (or two input) operations per
Uniservo IlIA Magnetic Tape Subsystem with Dual
Channel Synchronizer; and
Any number of magnetic tape rewind operations; and
19
The table shows, for example, that 1 FH-BBO drum,
2 Uniservo IlIA tape units, 2 printers, 2 card readers, and 2 card punches could all transfer data to or
from the Central Computer simultaneously; gross
transfer rate in this case would be 113,934 words per
second, or 91 per cent of the practical limiting rate
of 125,000 words per second.
One input and one output operation per Punched Card
Subsystem; and
One input or output operation per Paper Tape Subsystem; and
One output operation per Printer Subsystem; and
One Control Console input or output operation •
•4
RULES
Maximum of 15 peripheral subsystems, in any combination (except each Uniservo IlIA Subsystem with
5/63
Gross data transfer rate between Core Memory and
all simultaneously operating peripheral devices should
not exceed 125, 000 words per second.
I AUERBACH / .$J
784: 121.101
STANDARD
REPORTS
UNIVAC 1107
Instruction List
INSTRUCTION LIST
§ 121.
Note: The following Instruction List was reproduced from the UNIVAC 1107 General Description, pages 32-35.
f
NAME
j
01
02
03
04
05
06
EXECUTION
TIME
IN" SEC.
DESCRIPTION
MNEMONIC
Alternate
Core
Banks
Same
Core
Sank
CODE
Store Positive
Store Negative
Store Magnitude
Store R,
Store Zero
Store 8.
(Al'" U
-(A) ... U
I(AlI'" U
(R.)'" U
0 ... U (Clear U)
(B.) -> U
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
STP
STN
STM
STR
STZ
STB
12
13
14
15
16
17
20
21
22t
Load Positive
Load Negative
Load Positive Magnitude
Load Negative Magnitude
Add
Subtract
Add Magnitude
Subtract Magnitude
Add and Load
Subtract and Load
Block Transfer
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
lDP
lDN
LDM
LNM
ADD
SUB
ADM
SBM
ADl
SBl
BTR
23
24
25
26
27
30
31
32
Load R.
Add to B.
Subtract from B.
Load B, Modifier Only
Load B.
Multiply Integer
Multiply Single (Integer)
Multiply Fractional
(U) ... A
-(U) ... A
IfUll -> A
-I(U)I ... A
(A) + (U) -> A
(A) - (U)-. A
(A) + I(U)I-> A
(A)-I(U)h A
(Al + (U) ... A + 1
(A) - (U) -> A + 1
(V,), -> (V2), repeated k times.
Initial V, address is u + (B.) 17..0, and subse·
quent addresses are formed by incrementa·
tion by (B.h5--'8. Similarly, V2 addresses are
u + (B.)17 __ 0 incremented by (B.h5"'8'
(Ul -> R.
(B.) + (U) -> B.
(Ba) - (U) ... B.
(U) -> B.17__0
(U) -> B.
(A) • (U) -> A, A + 1
(A) • (U) -> A
(A) • (U) ->A, A + 1
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
12.0
12.0
13.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
16.0
16.0
16.0
LDR
ADB
SBB
LBM
LOB
MPI
MPS
MPF
34
Divide Integer
31.3
35.3
DVI
35
Divide Single and load (Fractional)
36
Divide Fractional
40
Selective Set
41
Selective Complement
42
Selective Clear
43
Selective Substitute
44
Selective Even Parity Test
0·17
10
11
45
(A, A + 1) -;- (U); Quotient ... A
Remainder-> A + 1
(A) -;- (U); Quotient -> A + 1
No Remainder
(A, A + 1) -;- (U); Quotient ... A
Remainder -> A + 1
31.3
35.3
DVL
31.3
35.3
DVF
4.0
(A) ... A + 1. Then set (A + l)n for (U)n= 1
i.e., (A) ill (U) ... A+ 1
(A) ... A + 1. Then complement (A + l)n
4.0
for (U)n
1
i.e., (A) ~ (U) ... A + 1
(A) ... A + 1. Then clear (A + l)n for
4.0
(U)n= 1
i.e., (A) 0 (U) -> A + 1
(A) ... A + 1. Then (U)n -> (A + 1)n for
4.7
(M)n=1
i.e., (A) <:) (M)' + (U) <:) (M) -> A + 1
If [(A) <:) (U)] is even parity, Skip NI
No Skip
6.0
Skip
10.0
If [(A) <:) (U)] is odd parity, Skip NI
No Skip
6.0
Skip
10.0
8.0
=
Selective Odd Parity Test
<
Test Zero
51
Test Not Zero
Skip NI if (U) # 0
52
Test Equal
Skip NI if (U) = (A)
53
Test Not Equal
Skip NI if (U) # (A)
54
Test Less Than or Equal
Skip NI if (U) ::;;: (A)
55
Test Greater Than
Skip NI if (U)
56
Test Within Limits
57
Test Outside limits
Skip NI if (A)
(U) ~ (A + 1)
(Note: (A)
(A + 1»
Skip NI if (U) ~ (A) or (U)
(A + 1)
(Note: (A)
(A + 1»
50
Test Modifier
:> (A)
<
<
>
B.O
SCP
B.O
SCl
B.7
SSU
SEP
10.0
14.0
SOP
10.0
14.0
> (U),
If (B.)17..0
(U), take NI; If (B.)'7:.o
Skip. In either case,
(B,),7..0 + (B,h5.. '8 -> 8.,7..0
Skip NI if (U) = 0
47
SSE
TMO
No Skip
Skip
No Skip
Skip
No Skip
Skip
No Skip
Skip
No Skip
Skip
No Skip
Skip
No Skip
Skip
No Skip
Skip
No Skip
Skip
4.7
8.7
4.0
8.0
4.0
8.0
4.0
8.0
4.0
8.0
4.0
8.0
4.0
8.0
4.7
8.7
4.7
8.7
B.7
12.7
8.0
12.0
B.O
12.0
8.0
12.0
8.0
12.0
8.0
12.0
8.0
12.0
8.7
12.7
8.7
12.7
TZR
TNZ
TEQ
TNE
TlE
TGR
TWL
TOl
t Repeat operations 62-67, 71 take 16 p. sec combined setup and termination time. The block transfer (22)
takes 12 p. sec combined setup and termination time.
© 1963
by Auerboch Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
784: 121.102
§
UNIVAC 1107
121.
INSTRUCTION LIST (CONTO.)
f
j
NAME
EXECUTION
TIME
IN I' SEC.
DESCRIPTION
Alternate
Cor.
a.nks
60
0·17
Test Positive
61
Test Negative
62t
Search Equal
63t
Search Not Equal
64t
Search Less Than or Equal
65t
Search Greater Than
66t
Search Within Limits
67t
Search Outside Limits
70
Index Jump
7lt
Skip NI if (U) ~ 0
4.0
8.0
4.0
8.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.7
4.7
4.7
4.7
8.0
4.0
8.0
12.0
8.0
12.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.7
4.7
4.7
4.7
8.0
4.0
Skip NI if (U); 0 (M) = (A) 0 (M)
Repeated k times
Skip NI if (U)i 0 (M) oF (A) 0 (M)
Repeated k times
Skip NI if (U)i 0 (M) S (A) 0 (M)
Repeated k times
Skip NI if (U)I 0 (M) > (A) 0 (M)
Repeated k times
Skip NI if (A) 0 (M)
(U)I 0 (M)
(A + 1) 0 (M)
- (Note: (A) 0 (M)
(A + 1) 0 (M»
Repeated k times
Skip NI if (U)I 0 (M)
- (A) or (U)i
(Ul,> (A + 1)
(Note: (A) 0 (M)
(A + 1) 0 (M»
Repeated k times
No Skip
Skip
No Skip
Skip
No Skip
Skip
No Skip
Skip
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
No SKip
Skip
4.7
4.7
4.7
4.7
No Skip
Skip
4.7
4.7
4.7
4.7
The computer program sequence stops
(i.e .• P is not advanced). The wait condi·
tion is removed by an interrupt.
(P) .... U17..0 and Jump to U + 1
NoJump
If (Alls = O. Jump to U
Shift (A) left one in either case
Jump
If (Ahs = 1, Jump to U
No Jump
Shift (A) left one in either case
Jump
(A)17..0 + (U)17..0 .... A17..0
(Alls-IB + (UllS..IB .... A3S..IB
(A)17..0 - (Uh7..() .... A17-G
(Alls.·IB - (UhS ..IB .... A3s..IB
(Ahs..24 + (UhS ..24 .... A3s-24
(AhH2 + (UhH2 .... A23.. 12
(A)n ..o + (U)n ..o .... An ..o
(Ahs..24 - (UhS..24 .... A3S..24
(Ah3 ..12 - (Ub..12 .... A23..12
(A) 11 ..0 - (Ul11 ..0 .... An ..o
Execute the Instruction at U
4.0
<
<
<
<
»
<
CODE
O.nk
No Skip
Skip
No Skip
Skip
Skip NI if (U)I = (A)
No Skip
Repeated k times
Skip
Skip NI if (U)I oF (A)
No Skip
Repeated k times
Skip
Skip NI if (U)I
(A)
No Skip
Repeated k tirii'i!s
Skip
Skip NI if (U)I > (A)
No Skip
Skip
No Skip
Skip NI if (A)
(U)I ~ (A + 1)
(Note: (A)
(A +
Skip
Skip NUf (U)i'::;;' (A) or (U)i > (A+l) No Skip
(Note: (A)
(A + 1»
Skip
If (CM)" > O. Jump to U
No Jump
Jump
O. Take NI
(CM)I'
Then (CM}J. - 1 .... CM,.
NOTE: j in this instruction serves with the
a·designator to specify anyone of the 128
words of Control Memory.
<0
Skip NI if (U)
Masked Search Equal
01
Masked Search Not Equal
02
03
Masked Search Less Than
or Equal
Masked Search Greater Than
04
Masked Search Within Limits
Masked Search Outside Limits
<
<
<
<
<
73
Care
MNEMONIC
TPO
TNG
$EQ
$R(
see:
GGI'I
SW~
SOL
IXJP
0
00
05
72
S.me
0 (M)
MSEQ
MSNE
MSLE
MSGR
MSWL
MSOL
q
00
Wait for Interrupt
01
02
Return Jump
Positive Bit Control Jump
03
Negative Bit Control Jump
04
Add Halves
05
Subtract Halves
06
Add Thirds
07
Subtract Thirds
10
Execute Remote Instruction
11
Load Memory Lockout Register
•
00
01
02
Single Right Circular Shift::
Double Right Circular Shift
Single Right Logical Shift
US-o .... MLR
For Uo= 1
UI=1
U2= 1
U3= 1
U.=1
Us= 1
+
RTJP
PBJP
8.0
4.0
8.0
4.0
8.0
4.0
8.0
4.0
8.0
4.0
8.0
8.0
ADDH
4.0
8.0
SUBH
4.0
.8.0
ADDT
4.0
8.0
SUBT
4.0
4.0
lockout 0-4095
lockout 4096-8191
lockout 8192-16383
lockout 16384-32767
lockout applies to 1st BANK
lockout applies to 2nd BANK
Shift (A) right U places circularly
Shift (A. A 1) right U places circularly
Shift (A) right U places. end off; fill with
zeros (Max. Shift ~ 36)
WAIT
4.0
4.0
4.0
NBJP
+ E••-cution Time
EXRI
-
LMLR
SCSH
DCSH
SLSH
• J serves as part of the Function Code
t Repeat operations 62-67, 71 take 16 I' sec combined setup and termination time. The block transfer (22)
takes 12 I' sec combined setup and termination time.
:::Instruction execution time is independent of the number of shifts performed (e.g. a shift of 72 takes 4 microseconds). There
are no memory references in the first six shift instructions. 73 00 - 73 05; consequently, the distinction between alternate core
banks and the same core bank is irrelevant.
5/63
INSTRUCTION LIST
§
784: 121.103
INSTRUCTION LIST (CONTO.)
121.
f
NAME
j
DESCRIPTION
EXECUTION
TIME
IN ~ SEC.
Alternate
Care
aanks
74
03
Double Right Logical Shift
04
05
Single Right Arithmetic Shift
Double Right Arithmetic Shift
06
Scale Factor Shift
76
=
MNEMONIC
CODE
aank
4.0
DLSH
4.0
4.0
SASH
DASH
6.0
10.0
SFSH
ZRJP
0
00
75
Shift (A, A + 1) right U places, end off;
fill with zeros. (Max. Shift
72)
Shift (A) right U places, end off; fill with sign bits.
Shift (A, A + 1) right U places, end off;
fill with sign bits. (Max. Shift = 72)
(U) ~ A, shift A left circularly until Als ..,;. Al4
or until A has been shifted 36 times. Store
the scaled quantity in A and the number of
shifts that occurred in A + 1.
Same
CDre
Zero Jump
01
Non·zero Jump
02
Positive Jump
=0
No Jump
Jump
Jump to U if (A) r 0
No Jump
Jump
Jump to U if (A) 2: 0
No Jump
Jump
Jump to U if (A)
0
No Jump
Jump
Jump to U if A = key setting on console (1 of 15)
Stop if A = stop key setting on console (1 of 4),
always jump to U '
Do Nothing; continue with NI
4.0
8.0
4.0
8.0
4.0
8.0
4.0
8.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
8.0
4.0
8.0
4.0
8.0
4.0
8.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
NOOP
4.0
EUP
ODJP
Jump to U if CA)
<
03
Negative Jump
04
05
Console Selective Jump
Selective Stop Jump
06
No Operation
07
Jump to U and permit interrupts to occur
4.0
10
Enable All External Interrupts
and Jump
Even Jump
Jump to U if (A)o = 0
11
Odd Jump
Jump to U if (A)o = 1
12
Modifier Jump
4.0
8.0
4.0
8.0
4.0
8.0
4.0
8.0
4.0
8.0
4.0
8.0
13
14
15
16
17
Load Modifier and Jump
Overflow Jump
No·Overflow Jump
Carry Jump
No·Carry Jump
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
No Jump
Jump
No Jump
Jump
If (8.)17..0> 0, Jump to U
No Jump
Jump
If (8.)17.. 0
0, Take NI
In eIther case (8,)17.. 0 + (8.lls-18'" 8.17_0
(P) ... (8.)17 .. 0 and Jump to U
Jump to U if overflow condo is set
Jump to U if overflow condo is not set
Jump to U if, carry condo is set
Jump to U if carry condo is not set
<
NZJP
POJP
NGJP
CSJP
SSJP
EVJP
MOJP
LMJP
OVJP
NOJP
CYJP
NCJP
0
00
Initiate Input Mode
01
Initiate Monitored Input Mode
02
03
04
Input Mode Jump
Terminate Input Mode
Initiate Output Mode
05
Initiate Monitored Output Mode
06
07
10
Output Mode Jump
Terminate Output Mode
Initiate Function Mode
11
Initiate Monitored Function Mode
12
13
Function Mode Jump
Force External Transfer
14
15
Enable All External Interrupts
Disable All External Interrup.ts
16
Enable Single External Interrupt,
17
Disable Single External Interrupt
*
00
01
02
03
Floating Add
Floating Subtract
Floating Multiply
Floating Divide
(U) ... input control word a, and initiate
input mode on channel a.
(U) ... input control word a, and initiate
input mode on channel a with monitor.
Jump to U if channel a is in the input mode.,
Terminate input mode on channel a.
(U) ... output control word a, and initiate
output mode on channel a.
(U) ... output control word a, and initiate
output mode on thannel a with monitor.
Jump to U if channel a is in the output mode.
Terminate output mode on channel a.
(U) ... output control word a, and initiate
function mode on channel a.
(U) ... output control word a, and initiate
function mode on channel a with monitor.
Jump to U if channel a is in the function mode.
Request external function or output word
on channel a.
All external interrupts are permitted to occur,
All external interrupts are prevented
from occurring.
An external interrupt on channel a
is permitted to occur.
An external interrupt on channel a
is prevented from occurring.
Floating Point Unpack
05
Floating Point Normalize Pack
06
Floating Characteristic
Difference Magnitude
07
Floating Characteristic
Difference
8.0
IIPM
8.0
IMIM
4.0
4.0
4.Q
4.0
4.0
8.0
IMJP
TIPM
IOPM
4.0
8.0
IMOM
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
8.0
OMJP
TOPM
IFNM
4.0
8.0
IMFM
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
FMJP
FEXT
4.0
4,0
4.0
4.0
EAEI
DAEI
4.0
4.0
ESEI
4.0
4.0
DSEI
(Al + (U) ... A, A + 1
(Al - (U) ~ A, A + 1
(A)
(U) ... A, A+ 1
(Al.;- (U); Quotient ... A
Remainder ... A + 1
Unpack (U), store mantissa in A + 1 and store
the bills.ed characteristic in A
Normalize CA) pack with biased characteristic
from (Ul and store at A + 1
14.0
14.0
13.3
26.7
18.0
18.0
17.3
30.7
FLAD
FLS8
FLMP
FLDV
4.0
8.0
FLUP
7.3
11.3
FLNP
Absolute value of I(A);u..27i-1 (Uh..m/ ~ A + 1
4,0
8.0
FLCM
1(A)3'"2~-~U);U''2~'''
4.0
8.0
FLCD
.
04
4.0
4.0
A+ 1
.j serves as part of the Function Code
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
784:121.104
§
UNIVAC 1107
INSTRUCTION LIST (CONTO.)
121.
( )e ( ) The
logical difference, controlled complement, add-without-carry, Exclusive OR: .
GLOSSARY OF SYMBOLS AND TERMS
a
The a-designator (bits 25-22 of
the instruction word). In
arithmetic instructions, a designates one of the A-registers,
in input-output instructions, a
designates an input or output
channel; in certain other instructions, a designates a
B-register or an R-register.
R
Refers to a group of special
registers.
M
Mask register (an R-register).
( )'
The prime on a quantity represents the one's complement of
that quantity.
NI
Next Instruction.
P
Program address count in the
P-register.
~
Transfer the word (or words)
shown at the left of the arrow
to the address (or addresses)
shown at the right of the
arrow.
( )0 (
l
o
0 1
1 1 0
( )
Indicates "the contents of" the
address given within the parentheses.
u
The address, or base address,
in the right-hand I6.bits of the
instruction word.
U
The effective address of the
operand to be used in the operation. It also serves as the
shift count in shift instructions. U = u + (B) Q if no indirect addressing is indicated.
If indirect addressing is indicated, u + (B) Q is the address
at which U may be obtained.
An, (U) n
The subscript n indicates the
bit number under discussion.
(
The SUbscript numbers represent the range of bit positions
considered in the word whose
address is given within the
parentheses, For example:
,I
The logical product, or logical
AND, is defined by the table:
ilit
o
( ) e ( ) The logical sum, also called the
Inclusive OR':
mt
1
0 1
1 1 1
o
) 17.00
(
) right half
(
) left hall
= ( )17.00
= ( ) 35.18
The bits are always numbered
from right to left.
l
0 0
1 0 1
5/63
Iitt
BQ
Modifier portion of index register, B 17• 00 •
B D.
Increment portion of index
register, B 35-18' used to increment the modifier Ba.
b
b designator (bits 21-18) of
the instruct}on word.
784:131.100
_STANDARD EDP
•
UNIVAC 1107
REPQRTS
Coding Specimen
SLEUTH I
CODING SPECIMEN: SLEUTH I
§
131.
.1
CODING SHEET
Q
~
I
:z:1i:
0
...;::u
u:
;::
ili
9
~
W
I-
""
C
:g
-
-
-
- - - -
-
-
- - - -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- -
- - - - -
- -
-
- -
-
-
- -
-
-
-
- - -
-
-
-
- -
- -
-
- - - -
- -
-
w
I-
.
ffi
I
~;
:J
w
oJ'"
rIJ~
...
2~
-i
>~'"
oJ"
m~
~
.
w
'"'"
0
u
,~
Ii!
-
~
i
~
I
"!
"3
l~
-
rIJ
rIJ
If(
:;:
-
-
-
- -
w
0
u!
.
u:
,
~
:ll
-
- -
-
-
-
-
.
:!!
...
~I
)1
-i
2·
::JI
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
7/63
UNIVAC 1107
784:131.200
§
131 •
•2
SAMPLE PROBLEM
The sample prbblem ~iven here will evaluate the expression
2
f(x) = x 3 + ax2 + b (xx~~) - c
The values of x range from 0 to 999 in stens of 1.
200 sets of random values for a, b, and c are assumed
to be stored in a drum table, each set consisting of
three words containing the values for a, b, and c,
making the total length of the drum table equal to
600. The arrangement of the drum table is:
a
stored in ABC
1
b
stored in ABC + 1
1
C
" " ABC + 2
1
a
" " ABC + 3
2
b
" " ABC + 4
2
C
" " ABC + 5
2
a
" II ABC + 6
3
etc.
x2+b
The expression within parentheses (x=5-) will be handled
as a macro instruction.
1
7 8 9 FUNCT'ON 14 15
TAG
SUB F'ELDS
El,F,E,X, 1
PRO
EXE
I IXIR IEIGI
IEIQ UI
SPA C E
$B2
1
, , , I JL
JD,RJU LMJ 1i
(ALB C
I
LMJD C I H
MDT
,0IU, T,P ,Uj T
L MI
,T,A, P,E"',1 j
ISIPIAICIE
I
TAB C I
T OUT
I I
DTABLE
DTABLE
I
I I
, IMIA,CIA I
SPIAICE
I I
MIAICIRIO
LOP
SI U B
I I I I I
I I I I I
I
I
I I I
I I , I , I
I
,,,,,,
, I
S,TIAIRITI
7/63
6
1
:
7
:
8
:
1
DATA TABLE DEFINITIONS
:
,LABC=3
,LOUT=1f1f111'
:
1
:
:
$All,(1)
:
$A11,5,,$UOP
:
:
:
I ,DIV,II
$A12,$All
:
9
10
11
:
EIN I D MAC
:
IE,JIEICIT
I B AN K
:
:
12
$ B 5 199 $U OP
$Qf1,REQ1
:
:
14
$B1,$XI0
$B4,.999,,$UOP
:
14
JLID~Bi
15
I ILIDIBI
XREG.INDXWD
:
:
I IS IT BI
SPA C E
X REG, XL 0 C" $ H 2
I ILl 01 BI
IL 0 P
Il'llJ
I I I
:
$A12,(2)
,L MI J PI
I I I I I I
4
5
L _,A l 0; DJL
I
I I I
:
$A12,(1)
$A12,(1)
, I , I I I
, I
NOTES
2
3
NS
, L G T H =61111'
COMMENTS
: POLYNOMIAL EVALUATION
:
:
I IL DIP
IM,P,S
I I I I
j
°
TL CJHJL
, ,M, T,A]
, I
I I ,
I/O 0 E FIN I TI
37
T
:
:
13
16
CODING SPECIMEN: SLEUTH I
§
784:131.201
131.
.2
SAMPLE PROBLEM (Contd. )
1
TAG
L D P __
__L-L-L_L..l
I I I , I ,
_L ,M,P,S , __
..
..
,,,,,,
,,,,,,
I
,
I
I
,
,
,
,
I ,
,
I
,
I
I
I , I ,
I
I
,
,
I I
,,,
,, ,,
, , I I ,
I
,
I
,
J
$B4,EVAL-2
:
:
:
:
:
20
.
21
14
:
14
,S,T,P,
,I ,X, J ,P
,L,M, J,P,
$Bl,$EHD
,
,D ,B, A,H,K
w, ,
,
I
,
, ,XIL, 0. C,
I ,p ,K,T,I,
I , , , ,
,,
,
I , , , , ,
,
,
,
,
I
I
I ,R, E, Q, I,
II,N,D,X,W,D
R EI Q, 2,
1
,,,,,
,,,,,,
I
I
, ,,
, , ,
,
,
I
,,
,,
, ,
,
I
1
g
g
:
ABC
LABC,TABC
g
---L __Ll_!_LL
~~.l!~
......LLl_LL
, , , , ,
, , , , ,
,
,
I
,
,
I
I
,
I
,
,
I
I
I
I
,
,
,
i-LLL1_L
, , ,
I
2S
:
:
1, II'
g,PKT2
SUB F' ELDS
26
27
37
:
:
:
"--------
- - - - - - _ .. _-----_.- ----"----
g
:
29
---
:
r--------1---------
NOTES
28
:
-
ST ART
1---'-----------
COMMENTS
:
:
-'-'-~----
:
- - - - - - - _ .. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - :
1-..L.....L.....l----.L......L
,
2A
:
:
TAPEI
-----"._----"_.--------- -_._---------_...
LOUT,TOUT
_LJ__.t.!'.LL_
23
:
:
:
g,PKTl
,
22
:
_LL-L~L __ l._
I
,
:
.....lW 1 T I 2 1 5, __
,
,
,
,
21
":
g
,
,
H
, , ,H
,,
I
,
, , ,H,
, ,
, , , ,
,
,
,
19
:
.
7 8 9 FUNCTION 14 IS
TAG
P KT 2
,
W,
,R D
I
W·
18
:
:
$A7,PKT1+l
$Qg,REQ2
$Bl $XIO
$ B S,S TAR T + 1
,S ,p ACE
I
:
$A7,PKT1+l
$A7,3,,$UOP
I , I , , ,
,
I
:
$AS,$AI2
$A5,ABC+2
$AS,TOUT, XREG*
,L,M,"JL~
I I I I , ,
--
-
, ,A,D,D,
~~1-
,
:
-
:
:
,A,D,D
,
._--_.
$A6,XLOC
$A6,$A6
$A 12, ABC +_~___
$AS,$A6
---L
W R,I,T, E,
._------_._-
~AS,XLO~
17
:
:
:
-----
$A5,$A5
NOTES
COMMENTS
, ,M,P,S,
, ,A D,D
,
,,,,
-
37
I I I I
,M,A,C,A,
I X J P
,L D,P
1
$A5,XLOC
$A6,ABC
(XLOC) (ABC+1)
, ,S lUI B,
I ,S ,T,P,
I I I
I
,
---L I I I
f--1 ,L D, P
I IMIPI S ,
, , I , , ,
I
SUB FIELDS
7 8 9 FUNCTION 14 15
E V,A,L,
,
----
:
--
!
-
Reprinted from SLEUTH I Programmer's Reference, pages 63-69.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporalion and BNA Incorporated
7/63
784: 132.100
•
STANDARD
EDP
•
UNIVAC 1107
'[I'O'TS
Coding Specimen
SLEUTH II
CODING SPECIMEN: SLEUTH II
§
132 •
•1
CODING SHEET
:;:
co
m
-
-
-
- -
-
-
-
- -
-
-
-
-
-
- -
-
- -
- -
- - - - -
- - - - - - -
-
- -
-
- -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- - - - - -
-
- -
-
-
- -
-
- -
-
-
-
- - -
-
-
-
-
-
-
- - -
-
-
-
W
t-
"'"
-
- - - - - - -
-
-
-
-
-
- - -
- -
-
- - - - - - -
-
-
-
z~
-i
::E
>~
...I"
m:;:
PROC 0
0
T~~
Me I. l' ,He 1+2.1) ,MC 1+2.2)
000006
DO
1'1(0'0)-0 •
000007
DO
MCO,O)_1 • TG
oooooe
LA
Me 1, I) .Iit 1+2.1) .HC 1+2.2)
He 1.1 J .1'10+2'1» ,MC 1+2.21
000009
tHO
000010
LA
He 1. U ,'H2o' 1 J .... '2.2)
000011
DO
H-' • HI
END
000012
oooou
UOOOl5
L
OOOIWOOO10000
00001'
001000
10 vO 0'4 (il o 010000
001001
Sit \In 0" 01
onl001&
In ",0 0" 00 0 001012
OOIOOS
10
001006
51i 101('1 0"'" Cl o Oloc02
0" 01
a&t
o
\,/10000
001007
10 ...,0
001010
55 .,/0 0'+ co 0 UOIOIZ
001011
10 ",0
o.ct
I.
L.I L.+2'1
1121
"'lIN
I"
L...l L.+2 • .I.
1121
01 0 U1OOO2.
00 0 aOIOIZ
OOOoJDOOOOCJOu
001012
010001.1
MAX
010002
I"
5" ",0 0'" 00 0 001012
",,('I
EOU
010002
001003
",I"
0"'" 01
o
o
001002
00001.
7/63
OlUOO-'
PRoe
Q(,!o""COOOOC,l16
ENO
784: 132.201
CODING SPECIMEN: SLEUTH II
§
132 •
.2
SAMPLE PROBLEM (Contd. )
Line 1 sets the controlling location counter to octal 1000.
Lines 2 through 12, the body of the procedures, are temporarily stored by the assembler for later reference.
Line 13 equates L to an octal value of 10,000.
Line 14 is a reference line to PROe M, introduced above.
It contains four lists.
List 1 has one parameter; lists 2 and 3 each have two parameters; list 4
has one parameter, the literal 12. eoding produced by the reference to
the procedure is shown to the left of the reference (addresses 001000-001004).
Line 2, the first line of
M PROe, is referred to through MAX NAME 0, line 3.
Line 10, the first line of M PRoe to produce coding, causes the creation of the first
instruction, at address 001000. The operand entries of this instruction are
determined by parameters supplied by the reference on line 14.
Line 11
references the nested procedure M1; the number of references to M1 PROe
is determined by the expression M-3.
Line 5, the first line of M1 PROe, has a zero in the operand field indicating that no
list is to be submitted to M1 when it is referenced.
Line 6 produces a TLE instruction (54) at address 001001, since MAX was the entry
to PROe M. The counter I of the DO line (Line 11) within M PROe is used
to advance the list number and thus access the appropriate parameter for
use in the compare instructions.
Line 7 is skipped on this iteration, since the condition
M(O, 0)
=
1 was not met.
Line 8 produces a LA (10) instruction at address 001002, in the same manner as line 10.
Line 9 terminates this iteration of M1 PRoe.
Line 11 now references M1 PROe for the second iteration.
be executed as above.
Lines 5 through 9 will
Line 12 terminates M PROe. Assembly continues at. ....
Line 15 is another reference to M PROe. The execution is identical except that
line 6 is skipped and line 7 is executed.
Line 16 terminates the assembly, or program.
Reprinted from SLEUTH II Programmer's Guide, section III, pages 9-11.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
7/63
784: 141.1 00
_STANDARD
_EDP
.,-,
R!FORTS
UNIVAC 1107
Data Code Table
Fieldata Code
DATA CODE TABLE NO.1
§
141.
.1
. 23
USE OF CODE: .
.2
STRUCTURE OF CODE
.21
Character Size:
.22
Character Structure
.221 More significant
pattern:
. 222 Less significant
pattern:
Fieldata Code; used for
internal representation of
alphameric data, HighSpeed Printer, and Console
Keyboard and Page Printer.
Character Codes
LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN
0
Master
space t
Upper
case t
Lower
case t
Line
feed t
Car .
returnt
16
32
48
K
)
0
L
-
1
M
+
2
N
<
3
0
=
4
5
Space
P
>
5
6
A
Q
&
6
7
B
R
$
7
8
C
S
*
8
9
D
T
(
9
10
E
U
" t
11
F
V
:
;t
12
G
W
? t
/
13
H
X
14
I
y
,
15
J
z
spec.t
0
1
6 bits.
2
2 zone bits; 32, 16.
4 numeric bits; 8, 4, 2, 1.
MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
3
4
,
,
t
spec.t
stop ~
t Produces "space" on High-Speed Printer.
f Causes cut-off when filling High-Speed Printer buffer.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
784: 142 .. 100
•
II
STANDARD
EDP
UNIVAC 1107
Data Code Table
Card Code
REroRTS
DATA CODE TABLE NO.2
§
.23
142.
.1
USE OF CODE
.2
STRUCTURE OF CODE
.21
Character Size:
Character Codes
punched cards (alphameric
mode).
OVERPUNCH
UNDERPUNCH
1 column of an 80-column
card.
None
None
12
11
Space
&
-
0
12
11
0
0
line
feed t
car.
return t
1
1
A
J
/
2
2
B
K
S
3
3
C
L
T
4
4
D
M
U
5
5
E
N
V
6
6
F
0
W
7
7
G
P
X
8
8
H
Q
y
9
9
I
R
Z
8-2
>
+
:
8-3
=
8-4
<
$
)
*
8-5
8-6
(
• t
idle t
8-7
8-9
·
·
;
t
Upper
case t
Lower
case t
Lower
case t
? t
@
t
Ot
Master
spacet
t Non-standard card codes.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
784:143.100
•
STANDARD
EDP
•
UNIVAC 1107
Data Code Table
Collating Sequence
REPORTS
DATA CODE TABLE NO.3
§
143.
.1
USE OF CODE:
.2
STRUCTURE OF CODE
internal collating sequence,
using Fieldata code .
In ascending sequence:
master space
upper case
lower case
line feed
carriage return
space
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
+
<
>
&
$
*
(
"
?
spec.
D
1
2
Q
3
4
5
6
R
S
T
8
9
o
p
7
U
V
I
W
/
X
y
Z
spec.
stop or
t
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and !INA Incorporated
5/63
784: 151.100
•
STANDARD
_
EDP
UNIVAC 1107
REI'ORTS
Problem Oriented Facilities
PROBLEM ORIENTED FACILITIES
§
. 13
151.
.1
UTILITY ROUfINES
. 11
Simulators of Other
Computers:. . . .
Data Sorting and Merging (Contd. )
Description (Contd)
merged to form the final output. Tape dumps are
automatically produced at the end of each cycle to
establish restart points.
UNIVAC 1103A, 1103AS,
and 1105 (no details
available to date).
SORT II
.12
• 13
Simulation by Other
Computers: . . . . . . none.
This is a generalized routine that will operate under
control of EXEC II and provide sort/merge capabilities for the SLEUfH II software package, which, is
being developed by Computer Sciences Corporation.
No specifications for SORT II have been made available to date.
Data Sorting and Merging
SORT/MERGE
UNIVAC Technical Bulletin
UT-2576, published May,
1962.
Record size: . . . . . . limited only by available
storage; variable length
records can be sorted.
Block size: . . . . . . . variable by full words, and
limited by available
storage.
maximum of 27 words plus
Key size:.
27 bits per key; limit of 7
such keys.
1 reel per sort cycle; no
File size: . . . • . .
overall limit.
4 to 12 (up to 8 PH-880
Number of tape units:
Magnetic Drums can be
used for intermediate
storage when available).
December, 1962.
Date available: .
Description:
Reference: . . .
.14
Report Writing:
.15
Data Transcription
LION
of !.nput-Qutput ~umerical Subroutines)
Reference: . . . . . . . UNIVAC Technical Bulletin
UP-2581, published June,
1962.
November, 1962.
Date available:
Description:
LION is a set of subroutines, called by SLEUfH I
macro instructions, that perform the following
functions under the control of EXEC I:
• Data transcriptions (cards to tape or drum, tape
or drum to cards, and tape or drum to printer).
• Control of input-output operations on magnetic
tape, drum, cards, or printer.
SORT /MERGE is a generalized program for sorting
or merging tape files into ascending or descending
order. It is stored on a library tape in relocatable
form and executed under control of EXEC 1. Control parameters are supplied on up to nine punched
cards. Twenty-five parameters are required, and
others are optional. "Own coding" consisting of
user-coded subroutines can be inserted to control
editing prior to sorting (on the dispersion pass) or
the final merge pass.
Prom 4 to 12 magnetic tape units can be utilized.
When only four tape units are available, the unit
containing the program tape must 'be used for inter-·
mediate storage; therefore, for efficient sorting, at
least five tape units should be assigned. Up to eight
PH-880 Magnetic Drums can be utilized, if available, to form long initial strings which minimize
the required number of merge passes.
~ibrary
• Opening and closing of files and reels, including
creation and checking of labels.
• Editing and format control of input-output data
(including radix and mode conversions).
Note: EXEC II contains subroutines that perform
most of the above functions when the SLEUTH
II software package is used; see Section
784:192.
.16
Pile Maintenance
LIBRARIAN
Reference: .
The Cascade Method is used to merge the strings
produced by the internal sort phase into a single
sequenced output file. When the input file consists
of more than one tape reel, a separate "cycle, "
consisting of an internal sort phase followed by a
cascade merge phase, must be performed upon each
reel. Then the individually sorted reels are
© 1963
. . none.
Date available:.
Description:
UNIVAC Technical Bulletin
UP-2579, published May,
1962.
November, 1962.
LIBRARIAN is a program library maintenance routine that operates under control of EXEC 1. Using
by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incorporated
7/63
UNIVAC 1107
784:151.160
§
151.
. 16
.17
File Maintenance (Contd. )
MIDAS (Contd.)
Description (Contd. )
Description:
input parameters on punched cards, it can create
library tapes or add, delete, correct, resequence,
and catalog programs on existing library tapes.
The retrieval section of LIDRARIAN can be called
in by the SLEUTH I Assembly System for incorporation of subroutines at assembly time.
Note: EXEC II contains built-in facilities that perform the above maintenance functions upon
the library (called the "Program Complex
File") when·the SLEUTH II software package
is used; see Section 784:192.
.17
Other (Contd. )
Other
CLAMP (Controlled Loading And Modification of
!rograms) -Reference: . • . . . . . UNIVAC Technical Bulletin
UP-2575, published May,
1962.
Date available:.
October J 1962.
Description:
CLAMP is a loader designed to load either absolute
or relocatable object programs produced by the
SLEUTH I Assembly System. CLAMP can operate
either under the control of EXEC I or as an independent loading routine controlled by parameters
inserted through punched cards.
MIDAS (Macro Instructions for Dumping Areas of
- - - £tore) -Reference: . . . . . . . UNIVAC General Manual
UP-3846, published
February, 1963.
Date available:. . . . . May, 1963.
7/63
MIDAS is a set of subroutines, called by SLEUTH I
macro instructions, that provide tape dumps or
printed listings of specified areas' of Core or Film
Memory. The MIDAS subroutines can either be
incorporated into the object program at assembly
time or loaded spearately at execution time under
the control of EXEC I. A valuable option makes it
possible to list only the initial and final contents of
those locations whose contents have been altered
during execution of the program being tested,
thereby focusing the programmer's attention upon
the potential trouble spots. Anyone of five formats
can be selected for the printed listing: octal, fixed
or floating point decimal, alphameric (6-bit
Fieldata codes), or instruction format with
mnemonic operation codes.
COORDINATOR
Reference: . . .
Date available:.
Description:
none published to date.
3rd quarter 1963.
COORDINATOR is a service routine that will partially resolve the incompatibilities between the
SLEUTH I and SLEUTH II software packages· by
permitting object programs produced by the
SLEUTH II,· COBOL, and FORTRAN translators to
be executed under the control of EXEC 1. The three
translators themselVes will still operate only under
the control of EXEC II. The manufacturer states
that EXEC I will be expanded at a later date to control COBOL and FORTRAN compilations as well as
execution of their object program.
784: 161.100
•
STANDARD
EDP
•
UNIVAC 1107
Process Oriented Language
COBOL-61
REPORTS
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: COBOL-61
§
. 14
161.
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
UNIVAC 1107 COBOL.
.12
Origin:.
Computer Sciences
Corporation.
.13
Reference: .
UNIVAC 1107 COBOL
Programmer's Guide,
Publication U-2582.
.14
Description
UNIVAC 1107 COBOL is a version of COBOL-61, the
most widely implemented pseudo-English common
language for business applications. It represents a
nearly complete implementation of Required COBOL61 (though there are a few omissions), along with 14
COBOL electives and several useful extensions. The
deficiencies of 1107 COBOL with respect to Required
COBOL-61, the extensions, and the facilities of
Elective COBOL-61 that have and have not been implemented are tabulated at the end of this description.
Useful extensions to the COBOL-61 language include
a SORT facility, a MONITOR verb that facilitates
program testing, the ability to sequence files in
either ascending or descending order, and a facility
that permits flexible control of the vertical format
of printed output. See Paragraph. 143 for more details on these extensions.
The most significant omission from the list of electives implemented for the 1107 is the COMPUTE
verb. COMPUTE permits arithmetic operations to
be expressed in a concise formula notation similar
to that of FORTRAN, e. g. :
COMPUTE X = (A-B)jC
Without the COMPUTE verb, only one arithmetic operation can be performed in each COBOL statement,
so the above formula must be expressed as:
SUBTRACT B FROM A GIVING T
DIVIDE C INTO T GIVING X. .
The decision not to implement this highly useful verb
is especially hard to understand in the case of a system with the speed and power of the 1107 instruction
repertoire.
File and Record Descriptions and Procedure Division
entries can be copied into the user's programs from
the 1107 COBOL Library, but Environment Division
entries cannot. Furthermore, the non-standard
COpy verb of 1107 COBOL allows only single-paragraph procedures to be inserted without alteration,
whereas the more flexible INC LUDE verb of Elective
COBOL-61 (not implemented for the 1107) allows
© 1963
Description
library procedures consisting of sections, independent
paragraphs, or paragraphs within sections to be inserted, with replacement of any number of names in
the procedure by other names specified by the programmer.
The elective verb ENTER, as implemented for the
1107, makes it possible to enter either an independently compiled COBOL-coded subprogram or a closed
subroutine in relocatable machine language form.
Object programs can be segmented; but whereas
Elective COBOL-61 specifies four different ways of
handling segments according to their priorities, 1107
COBOL provides only two ways: .
o Sections with assigned priorities of 1 through 49
will be present in Core Memory at all times.
• Sections with assigned priorities of 50 through 99
will be grouped into segments by priority number.
One segment at a time will be loaded (in the order
referenced) into a single Core Memory area whose
size is equal to that of the largest segment.
Data items upon which arithmetic is to be performed
can be represented internally in either decimal (6 bits
per digit) or binary form by specifying USAGE IS
COMPUTATIONAL or COMPUTATIONAL-l, Respectively. Operands can be up to 18 decimal digits or 66
binary bits in length, but SIZE must be specified in
equivalent 6-bit CHARACTERS in either case. When
operands are longer than 36 bits, multiple precision
arithmetic must be performed. Arithmetic can be
performed upon mixed COMPUTATIONAL and COMPUTATIONAL-I items; radix conversion and point
alignment will be automatically performed when necessary. None of the COBOL electives that provide
for variable length items and records (e. g., the
BLOCK, SIZE, and PICTURE clause options) have
been implemented.
The 1107 COBOL Compiler will operate under control
of the EXEC II operating system. Minimum configuration requirements are 16,384 words of core storage
and 1 Flying Head 880 Magnetic Drum; magnetic tape
is not required for the compilation process. Compilation is divided into six logical phases. Documentation will consist of a source program listing, diagnostic messages, and an object program listing containing symbolic instructions, octal locations, and
octal machine words, with interspersed references to
the source program listing. Four different types of
error diagnostics are included within the translator,
and they are interpreted as follows:
o Precautionary diagnostic - print warning message
and continue compilation.
• Correctible error - make a reasonable attempt at
correction, print explanatory message, and continue.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA incorporated
5/63
UNIVAC 1107
784:161.140
§
.142. Deficiencies with respect to Required COBOL-61
(Contd.)
161.
. 14
Description (Contd. )
• Uncorrectible error - when a reasonable guess of
the programmer's intent c:annot be made, print
message, reject the statement or clause, and
continue.
• Destructive errors - when errors have multiplied
to the point where it is probable that no more
useful ~Uagnostic information can be produced,
terminate the compilation.
The main limitation on source program size is the
number of cards in the source deck: a maximum of
2, 000 cards in 16K systems and 4, 000 cards in 32K
systems. There are no specific limitations on the
number of data names, procedure names, or other
source program entities. When the COBOL segmentation facility is used, there are no practical limits
on object program size. No information on compilation speed is yet available, but utilization of the
magnetic drum instead of tape should provide relatively rapid compilation.
. 141 Availability
Language:
Translator: •
October, 1962,
no release date has been
designated.
.142 Deficiencies with respect to Required COBOL-61
Environment Division
• SOURCE-COMPUTER, OBJECT-COMPUTER,
and SPEClAL-NAMES paragraphs cannot be
copied from the Library.
Data Division
• The [integer-4 TO] option of the RECORD .
CONTAINS clause is not permitted; there IS no
provision for efficient handling of variable
length records; i. e., the compiler will consider
all records to be the size of the largest record.
5/63
Data Division (Contd.)
• The VALUE clause of the File Description entry
can apply only to "IDENTIFICATION" or "ID,"
a specific item that appears in the standard label record.
Procedure Division
• The option of the PERFORM verb that permits
loop control based upon a varying subscriptname has not been implemented.
.143 Extensions to COBOL-61
• A SORT facility is provided. It consists of subroutines that arrange related records in either
ascending or descending sequence. Input and
output procedures must be supplied by the COBOL
programmer. While the functions of the 1107
SORT facility are similar to those of the SORT
verb as defined in COBOL-61 Extended, the format of the required source coding is entirely
different.
• A MONITOR verb provides dynamic printouts of
the values of specific items as an aid to program
testing and debugging.
• The operational symbol H can be used in a
PICTURE clause to specify that the field is to be
represented in one's complement binary form;
the effect is the same as that of the clause
USAGE IS COMPUTATIONAL-I •
.143 Extensions to COBOL-61 (Contd.)
• The optional clauses LINES-PER-PAGE, LINESAT-TOP, LINES-AT-BOTTOM, and LINESPACING in the File Description entry provide
vertical format control of printed output.
• Files can be sequenced in either ASCENDING
or DESqENDING order.
784: 161.144
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: COBOL-61
§
161.
.144 COBOL-61 Electives Implemented (see 4:161. 3)
Key No.
1
2
3
4
Comment
Elective
Characters and Words
Formula characters
Relationship characters
Semicolon
Long literals
11
File Description
SEQUENCED ON
24
Verbs
ENTER
30
33
Operand size
41
46
=, >, <.
; , always ignored.
up to 132 characters.
allows a list of keys to be specified, for
ASCENDING or DESCENDING sequencing.
permits entry to independently compiled
COBOL subprograms.
Verb Options
LOCK
ADVANCING
27
+, - , * , / , ** , =
locks rewound tapes.
permits paper advance of the specified number
of lines.
up to 18 digits.
Environment Division
OBJECT-COMPUTER
I/O CONTROL
47
Identification Division
DATE-COMPILED
48
Special Features
Library
49
Segmentation
© 1963
includes all clauses except SEGMENT- LIMIT
and ASSIGN OBJECT-PROGRAM.
only the APPLY and RERUN clauses may be written.
current date will be inserted automatically.
procedures in source language can be called from
the Library (but implemention is non-standard).
object programs can be segmented (but implementat ion is non-standard).
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
UNIVAC 1107
784:161.145
§
161.
.145 COBOL-61 Electives NOT Implemented (see 4:161. 3)
Key No.
Comment
Characters and Words
Figurative constants
Figurative constants
Computer-name
HIGH-BOUND(S); LOW-BOUND(S).
HIGH-VALUE (S); LOW-VALUE(S).
no alternative computer-names.
8
9
10
12
File Description
BLOCK CONTAINS
FILE CONTAINS
Label formats
HASHED
no range can be specified.
approximate file size cannot be shown.
labels must be standard or omitted.
hash totals cannot be created.
13
14
15
16
17
Record Description
Table-length
Item -length
BITS option
RANGE IS
RENAMES
5
6
7
18
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
28
29
32
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
42
5/63
Elective
SIGN IS
SIZE clause option
Conditional range
Label handling
Verbs
COMPUfE
DEFINE
INCLUDE
USE
Verb Options
MOVE CORRESPONDING
OPEN REVERSED
Formulas
Relationship
Tests
Conditionals
Compound conditionals
Complex conditionals
Conditional statements
Environment Division
SOURCE-COMPUfER
SPECIAL-NAMES
43
44
FILE-CONTROL
PRIORITY IS
45
I/O CONTROL
lengths of tables and arrays may not vary.
variable item lengths cannot be specified.
items cannot be specified in binary.
value range of items cannot be shown.
alternative groupings of elementary items cannot
be specified.
no separate signs allowed.
variable item lengths cannot be specified.
a conditional value cannot be specified as a range.
only standard labels (or none) may be used.
algebraic formulas may not be used.
new verbs cannot be defined.
library subroutines cannot be called in the
standard COBOL manner.
no non-standard I/O error or label handling
routines.
each item in a record must be individually moved.
tapes cannot be read backward.
algebraic formulas may not be used.
IS UNEQUAL TO, EQUALS, and EXCEEDS are not
provided.
IF I I IS NOT ZERO form is not provided.
no implied objects with implied subjects.
ANDs and ORs cannot be intermixed.
not permitted.
only ON SIZE ERROR or AT, END conditions may
follow an imperative statement.
only computer-name can be specified.
ACCEPT, WRITE, and DISPLAY verbs
use standard hardware.
cannot be taken from library.
no file priorities can be assigned for
multiprogramming.
cannot be taken from library.
784:162.100
STANDARD
•
EDP
•
UNIVAC 1107
Process Oriented Language
FORTRAN IV
REI'QRTS
f:lROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: FORTRAN IV
§
162.
.1
. 14
GENERAL
. 11
Identity:
UNIVAC 1107 FORTRAN.
. 12
Origin:
Computer Sciences
Corporation.
. 13
Reference: .
UNIVAC Publications
U-3540 and U-3569.
.14
Description
No formal standard for the FORTRAN IV language
exists. This report uses as a basis for comparison
the language specifications for IBM 7090/7094
FORTRAN IV as contained in IBM Publication
C28-6274.
The UNIVAC 1107 FORTRAN language is largely
compatible With, and somewhat more powerful than,
the FORTRAN IV language as implemented for the
IBM 7090/7094. The restrictions and extensions of
1107 FORTRAN relative to the 7090/7094 version are
listed at the end of this description. It can be seen
that the restrictions will cause few problems,
whereas the extensions significantly increase the
power and flexibility of the FORTRAN IV language,
particularly in the areas of subscripting and mixedmode arithmetic.
A variable in 1107 FORTRAN may have up to seven
subscripts, meaning that seven-dimensional arrays
can be handled; 7090/7094 FORTRAN IV is limited to
three dimensions. Furthermore, subscript expressions may have more complex forms in the 1107
version, though they are still limited to integer constants and variables.
The possibilities for mixed-mode arithmetic, both
among the operands of an arithmetic expression and
between the left and right sides of an arithmetic
statement, are much broader in 1107 FORTRAN.
Among the four possible types of arithmetic operands
-- integer, real, double precision, and complex -only double precision and complex values may ~ be
freely combined.
The FORTRAN IV statements that are available in
1107 FORTRAN are listed in Paragraph. 144 below.
The 1107 FORTRAN Compiler maintains a reasonable degree of compatibility with the FORTRAN II
language by accepting and correctly interpreting the
FORTRAN II statements listed in Paragrapli .145.
An even more effective means for running existing
FORTRAN II programs on the 1107 is provided by the
SIFT translator. SIFT was developed by the SHARE
organization to translate FORTRAN II source programs into FORTRAN IV. Written in FORTRAN II,
SIFT was used to translate itself into FORTRAN IV
© 1963
Description (Contd. )
on an IBM 7090. Then the reSUlting FORTRAN IV
version of SIFT was successfully compiled and run on
the UNIVAC 1107. Because of the availability of the
SIFT translator, no FORTRAN IT compiler is planned
for the 1107 .
The 1107 FORTRAN Compiler will operate under control of the EXEC II operating system. Minimum configuration requirements are 32,768 words of core
storage and 1 Flying Head 880 Magnetic Drum. Magnetic tape is not required, and is of no advantage in
compilation. Documentation produced by the compiler includes a storage allocation map and a listing
of the object program instructions in both symbolic
and octal form, with corresponding source statements and diagnostic messages interspersed.
Compilation speed is unusually high, primarily because of the fast-access, high-capacity storage for
the translator and interim language provided by the
magnetic drum. Tests performed to date indicate
that, on the average, between 5,000 and 6,000 object
program instructions per minute will be generated.
In typical programs, an average of 3 to 3.5 machine
instructions will be produced for each source program
statement.
Input data for a FORTRAN IV object program arrives
via the card-to-drum "symbiont" and final output is
via the drum-to-tape "symbiont" (see EXEC II, Section 784:192). During the actual execution of the object program, input data is assumed to be on the
drum and output data is filed on the drum. This is
automatic unless the user specifies use of the magnetic tape input and output symbionts instead.
The manufacturer expects object program efficiencies
to be, in general, "better than the average programmer can write in an assembly language, " because of
the optimizing features of the compiler.
The number of Core Memory locations required at
execution time to hold the standard FORTRAN subroutines and tables are tabulated below.
Routine
Bank 1
Locations
383
Input subroutines:
Output subroutines:
482
FORMAT Scan subroutine: 486
i/o Table:
12
Data List Scan:
26
Bank 2
Locations
9
39
32
• 141 Availability
Language: .
Translator:
Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
August, 1962.
currently in field test
status.
8/63
UNIVAC 1107
784: 162.142
§ 162.
• 143 Extensions (Contd.)
. 142 Restrictions
(6) The optional ABNORMAL statement permits in-
creased optimization of objeCt programs. Where
common subexpressions occur within a statement,
it is obviously desirable to evaluate each subexpression only once. Where the common subexpressions contain function references, however,
there is a possibility that the function will produce different results upon successive references
with the same arguments (e. g., where the function contains input statements or local variables
whose values are not initialized each time the
function is referenced). UNIVAC 1107 FORTRAN
permits all functions that can produce different
results from identical sets of arguments to be
designated ABNORMAL. All common subexpressions except those that reference ABNORMAL
functions are evaluated only once. When the
ABNORMAL statement does not appear at all in a
program, all function references are considered
ABNORMAL and re-evaluated at each occurrence,
as in most other FORTRAN systems.
(1) The two arithmetic expressionS that are com-
bined by a relational operator (such as • GT. , for
"greater than") to form a logical expression
should be of the same type; otherwise. a diagnostic note will indicate that the comparison may
not be meaningful. FORTRAN IV for the 7090/
7094 permits REAL and DOUBLE PRECISION expressions to be combined.
(2) Octal digit values cannot be assigned to object
program variables at loading time by means of
the DATA statement.
.143 Extensions
(1) A variable may have up to seven subscripts, versus a maximum of three subscripts in IBM
7090/7094 FORTRAN IV.
(2) Subscripts must have the general form
(7) The following standard library functions are included in 1107 FORTRAN but not in 7090/7094
FORTRAN IV:
where eachM may be an integer constant, an
integer variable, or an expression of the form
n '!' Kl
* K2 * . . .
Tangent (REAL, DOUBLE PRECISION, and
COMPLEX)
Arcsine (REAL and DOUBLE PRECISION)
Arccosine (REAL and DOUBLE PRECISION)
Hyperbolic Sine (REAL, DOUBLE PRECISION,
and COMPLEX)
Hyperbolic Cosine (REAL, DOUBLE
PRECISION, and COMPLEX)
Cube Root (REAL, DOUBLE PRECISION, and
COMPLEX)
Kj'
in which n is an integer constant and each K is an
integer variable. Subscripts in IBM 7090/7094
FORTRAN IV are limited to the form n *k + n;,
where n arid n' are unsigned integer constants and
k is an integer variable. Therefore, the expression I + 2*J*K - 4 is a valid subscript in 1107
FORTRAN but not in 7090/7094 FORTRAN.
.144 UNIVAC 1107 FORTRAN Statements
(3) The PARAMETER statement assigns specified
integer values to specified variables at compile
time; e. g •• PARAMETER I = 2 causes the integer
2 to replace I wherever it occurs in the source
program. This facilitates the assignment of different values to frequently-referenced parameters in different compilations of the same program.
ABNORMAL
ASSIGN n to 1
BACKSPACE Unit
CALL s (aI' a2' ••• , an) or CALL s
COMMON/Block name/Variable names/Block name/
Variable names . • .
CONTINUE
DIMENSION array 1 (parameters), array 2
(parameters) •
DO n i = j, k, m
END
END FILE Unit
EQillVALENCE (Variable names), (Variable
names, ••• ), •••
EXTERNAL
FORMAT (Format Specification)
FUNCTION f (aI' a2'
. . an)
GO TOm
GO TOn
GO TO 1 (nl' n2' • . . , ~)
GO TO (transfer list), i
IF (arithmetic statement) j, k, m
IF (logical expression) FORTRAN statement
INTEGER
INTEGER FUNCTION
LOGICAL
LOGICAL FuNCTION
PARAMETER
PAUSE n (n may be omitted)
(+, -, *, /) can be performed more freely upon operands of different
types. Specifically, the following types of arithmetic operand pairs are permitted in 1107
FORTRAN but not in 7090/7094 FORTRAN IV:
(4) Arithmetic operations
REAL- INTEGER
COMPLEX - INTEGER
DOUBLE PRECISION-INTEGER
(5) In arithmetic statements, the following combinations of expressions (on the right side of the equal
sign) and variables (on the left side) can b~
equated in 1107 FORTRAN, but not in 7090/7094
FORTRAN IV:
Variable on left
INTEGER
REAL
COMPLEX
COMPLEX
8/63
=Expression on right
COMPLEX
COMPLEX
INTEGER
REAL
A
AUERBACH
®
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: FORTRAN IV
§
784: 162.144
. 145 Acceptable FORTRAN II Statements
162 •
. 144 UNIVAC 1107 FORTRAN Statements (Contd.)
READ (Unit) List
READ (Unit, Format) List
REAL
REAL FUNCTION
RETURN
REWIND Unit
STOP
SUBROUTINE Name (aI' a2'
, an)
Variable = arithmetic expression
WRITE (Unit) List
WRITE (Unit, Format) List
© 1963
IF ACCUMULATOR OVERFLOW nl' n2
IF QUOTIENT OVERFLOW nl' n2
IF DIVIDE CHECK nl' n2
IF (SENSE LIGHT i) nl' n2
IF (SENSE SWITCH i) nl' n2
PRINT Format, List
PUNCH Format, List
Read n, List
READ INPUT TAPE i, N, List
READ TAPE i, List
SENSE LIGHT i
WRITE OUTPUT TAPE t, Format, List
WRITE TAPE t, List
Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
8/63
784: 171.1 00
_STANDARD
EDP
•
UNIVAC 1107
Machine Oriented Language
SLEUTH I
REPORTS
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: SLEUTH I
§
171.
. 14
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
SLEUTH I Assembly System.
.12
Origin:.
UNIVAC Division, Sperry
Rand Corp.
. 13
Reference:....... UNIVAC Technical Bulletin
UT-2S74.
. 14
Description
program. If an address label is defined in more than
one section, however, each definition will apply only
to the particular section in which it appears. This
means that no address label should be referenced in
a section other than the one in which it is defined unless the coder is certain that the label is defined only
once in the entire program .
Corrections to a source program are handled by preparing a separate correction deck with pseudo operation codes designating where deletions and/or additions are to be made. All source program instructions preceded by an asterisk can be deleted by a
single pseudo operation in the correction deck; this
facility makes it easy to remove links to trace routines and other extraneous instructions after a routine has. been checked out.
SLEUTH I is a symbolic assembly system and a primary component of the "SLEUTH I Package" or "A
Package, " one of two basic software packages for the
UNl-VAC 1107. The SLEUTH I Package was developed
by UNIVAC's Systems Programming Department in
St. Paul; its other components (EXEC I, CLAMP,
Librarian, LION, MIDAS, and Sort/Merge) are described in Sections 784: 151 and 784: 191. There is
no compatibility between the SLEUTH I and SLEUTH
II assembly languages or between the components of
their respective software packages.
The object program can be produced in any of three
formats:
• AOC (Absolute Object Code) - absolute, nonrelocatable binary form, ready for immediate
loading and execution, with no executive system
control.
SLEUTH I permits utilization of all the hardware
facilities of the 1107, provides facilities for the definition and use of macro instructions, and produces
object programs that can be multi-run under the control of the EXEC I operating system.
• DIRECT ROC (Relative Object Code - Direct I/O)
- relocatable form, ready for loading by the
CLAMP Relative Load Routine. Input-Output references can be reassigned at load time, but there
is no provision for executive system control.
The SL.EUI'H I coding sheet provides columns for
Tags (labels), Functions (operation codes), and Sub
Fields. SLEUTH I (unlike SLEUTH II) uses the
mnemonic operation codes shown in the Instruction
List, Section 784:121. Depending upon the operation
to be performed, the free-form Sub Fields column
can contain a w ide variety of entries, including designation of partial word operands, literal operands,
direct or indirect operand addresses, arithmetic and
index registers, constants, and macro instruction
parameters. The facilities for generating constants
in integer, fixed point, floating point, and alphameric modes make programming much easier.
Macro-instructions make possible the generation of
a series of instructions or data words from a single
source program line. The definitive instructions or
"skeleton" for the macro can be contained in the
source program or on the program library tape. All
variables in the macro skeletons are coded with
parameter identifiers consisting of decimal integers
enclosed in parentheses. When the name of a partiCular macro is used as a function code in the source
program, the associated parameters are substituted
for the numbered parameter identifiers and the
macro is assembled and inserted into the object program in straight-line fashion.
To guard against accidental duplication of symbols,
source program s can be divided into sections by the
SEC pseudo operation. If an address label is defined
only once, it is considered universal to the entire
© J 963
Description (Contd. )
• EXEC ROC (Relative Object Code - Executive
System I/O) - relocatable form, ready for loading
by EXEC I. All input-output references are symbolic, and operation must be under control of the
EXEC I operating system. All input-output operations are initiated via requests to EXEC I and
controlled by its standard subroutines.
SLEUTH I is a two pass assembly system. The first
pass develops a dictionary of symbolic aSSignments
and decodes a major portion of each symbolic
instruction. The second pass completes the decoding, using the dictionary and the output of the first
pass to produce the desired form of object program
output and the assembly listing. Documentation produced by the SLEUI'H I translator consists of a sideby-side listing of the source program and assembled
object program instructions. Coding errors detected
by the translator are identified by error codes.
.15
Publication Date:. . . . April, 1962.
.16
Translator Availability: released November, 1962.
.2
LANGUAGE FORMAT
. 21
Diagram:........ refer to SLEUTH I Coding
Specimen, Section 784:131.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
7/63
784: 171.220
§
171.
• 22
Legend
a label; the symbolic address of a line of coding.
the operation to be perFunction: .
formed: machine, pseudo,
or macro.
Sub Fields:. . . . . . . describe the objective of the
Function code: arithmetic
register, operand address, literal operand,
shift count, indirect addressing, index register,
partial word designator,
constant to be generated,
macro parameters, etc.,
as required by the particular operation. Sub fields
are separated by commas.
UNIVAC 1107
.244 Special coded
addresses: •
Tag: ••
• 23
Corrections:...... corrections are listed on a
separate input medium and
merged with original
source program during
first translator pass.
· 231 Insertions:. • . . . . . insert any number of lines
of coding after a FOLLOW
pseudo, which designates
the instruction preceding
the insertions.
• 232 Deletions: . . . . . . . delete single instruction,
block of instructions, or
all instructions preceded
by an asterisk, using
DELETE pseudo.
· 233 Alterations: . . . . . . replace deleted
instruction(s) with any
number of new lines of
coding following the
DELETE pseudo.
· 24
.3
LABELS
.31
General
.3ll Maximum number of
labels: . . • • . . . .
.312 Common label formation
rule: • . . . . .
.313 Reserved labels
For Arithmetic
Registers: . .
For Index Registers:.
For Special Registers:
For Q Registers (the
4 overlapping Arithmetic and Index
Registers): . . .
yes; see Paragraph. 321.
$AO to $A15.
$BO to $BI5.
$RO to $RI5.
$QO to $Q3.
none.
initial dollar sign designates
assembler-defined
(reserved) labels.
.316 Synonyms permitted: • yes; EQU pseudo.
.32
Universal Labels
• 321 Labels for procedures
Existence: • . .
Formation rule
First character:
Others: . • .
Number of
characters:
• 241 Compound address:
. 7/63
4,096.
· 314 Other restrictions:
· 315 Designators:. • . .
Special Conventions
BASE ± ADJUSTMENT,
where BASE is any label
and ADJUSTMENT is the
algebraic sum of a combination of integers and
"absolute tags"; i.e.,
symbols representing
numeric constants.
. 242 Multi-addresses: . . . most machine instructions
can specify a special register in Film Memory as
well as the operand address in core storage.
· 243 Literals:. . . . . . . . $UOP or $XUOP in j-field
indicates that u-field contains a literal in octal or
decimal integer form; alternatively, a "literal
expression" in the u-field,
enclosed in parentheses,
can generate a floating
point, fixed point, or
integer constant.
$L refers to current
instruction address.
* designates an indirect
address.
• 322 Labels for
routines:
· 323 Labels for
• 324 Labels for
.325 Labels for
· 326 Labels for
· 33
library
•..•.
constants:
files: • • .
records: •
variables:
Local Labels: • . . .
mandatory if referenced by
other instructions.
letter or numeral (dollar
sign for reserved labels).
letters or numerals.
1 to 6; at least 1 must be
alphabetic .
same as
same as
same as
same as
same as
procedures.
procedures.
procedures.
procedures.
procedures •
a program can be divided
into sections by use of the
SEC pseudo. The lines of
coding between two SEC
pseudos constitute a section. All address labels
defined only once are universal to the entire program. If an address label
is defined in more than one
section, however, each
definition will apply only to
the particular section in
which it appears .
784: 171.400
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: SLEUTH I
§
171.
.52
.4
DATA
• 41
Constants
. 411 Maximum size constants
Machine form
Coding sheet form
Integer
Decimal: •
none.
Binary (function
code W): . . "
11 decimal digits; or 12
octal digits with prefix $.
Binary half-words
(code H):. • . . . 6 decimal or octal digits
per half-word.
Binary third-words
(code T):. . . . . 3 decimal or octal digits
per third-word.
Binary sixth-words
(code S): •.
2 decimal or octal digits
per sixth-word.
Fixed numeric
Decimal: . .
none.
Binary (code WX):. decimal value, decimal exponent, and binary scale
factor (exponent and scale
factor can be omitted when
they are 0).
Floating numeric
Decimal: . . . • . none.
Binary (code WF): . rational decimal value and
decimal exponent (exponent can be omitted
when 0).
Alphameric
(code SC): . . . . 60 characters.
.412 Maximum size literals
Machine form
Coding sheet form
Integer
Decimal:
none.
Binary: .
6 decimal digits; or 6 octal
digits with prefix $. See
also Paragraph. 411
(code W).
Fixed numeric
Decimal: ..
none.
Binary: . . .
see.411 (code WX).
Floating numeric
none.
Decimal: .
Binary: . .
see.411 (code WF).
Alphameric:
none.
.5
PROCEDURES
.51
Direct Operation Codes
.511 Mnemonic
Existence:
Number: .
Examples:
Comments: .
. 512 Absolute
Existence:
mandatory.
115.
ADM =add magnitude.
IMIM =initiate monitored
input mode.
different from SLEUTH II
mnemonic codes.
decimal or octal integer.
© 1963
Macro-Codes
.521 Number available
Input-output: . .
Arithmetic: . . .
Math functions: •
Error control:
Restarts: . . . .
18 (LION macros).
O•
O.
O•
O.
Note: Other user-defined macros can be added to
the library.
· 522 Examples
Simple: . . .
Elaborate: .
.523 New macros: .
.53
Interludes:.....
· 54
Translator Control
.541 Method of control
Allocation counter: .
Label adjustment:
Annotation: • . . .
.542 Allocation counter
Set to absolute: .
Set to label: . •
Step forward:. .
Step backward: .
Reserve area: .
• 543 Label adjustment
Set labels equal:
Set absolute value: .
Clear label table:
• 544 Annotation
Comment phrase:
Title phrase: . . .
SQRT (X).
NFUNCT (AI) (A2) (A3) (P).
can be included in program
or inserted into the library
in a separate run.
none.
pseudo operations.
pseudo operations.
see Paragraph. 544.
IBANK, DBANK pseudos.
IBANK, DBANK pseudos.
!BANK, DBANK pseudos.
IBANK, DBANK pseudos.
RESV pseudo.
EQUpseudo.
EQU pseudo.
none.
in any line of coding,
following colon.
PRO pseudo.
·6
SPECIAL ROUTINES AVAILABLE
.61
Special Arithmetic:
no routines announced to
date.
. 62
Special Functions: .
no routines announced to
date.
.63
Overlay Control: .
no routines; handled by own
coding.
. 64
Data Editing: •
handled by LION (Library of
Input-Output Numerical
Subroutines); see
784:151.15 and 784:171.81.
.641 Radix conversion: . . . between decimal and binary
radices, by IMGIN and
IMGOUT macros.
Code translation: . . . automatic, by hardware.
.642 Format control (by IMGOUT macro)
Zero suppression:.
yes.
Size control: . . ..
yes.
Sign control: . . ..
yes.
Special characters:
insert sign and point only .
• 643 Method of call:. . ..
macros cause insertion of
open subroutines.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
7/63
784: 171.650
§
UNIVAC 1107
171.
.65
Input-Output Control:
.651
• 652
• 653
• 654
.655
File labels:
Reel labels:
Blocking: . .
Error control: .
Method of cal.l: .
.66
Sorting:
.67
Diagnostics
...
.. .. .. . ..
handled by LION (Library of
Input-Output Nwnerical
Subroutines ).
.8
MACRO AND PSEUDO TABLES
.81
Macros
--LION macros for Internal Format (binary) Subroutines
yes .
yes .
yes.
yes.
macros cause insertion of
open subroutines.
LIBRARY FACILITIES
.71
Identi~:
.72
Kinds of Libraries
generates file control table
for an output file .
generates file control table
for an input file.
opens an output file.
opens an input file.
moves an item to an output
buffer area.
makes an input item
available for processing.
closes reel on an output file •
closes reel on an input file.
closes an output file.
closes an input file.
OPNOUT:.
OPNIN: ••
ITMOUT:.
none (but see SORT/MERGE,
784:151.13).
..........
no.
yes.
yes •
• 73
Storage Form: .
magnetic tape.
. 74
Varieties of Contents: . programs, subroutines.
.75
Mechanism
..
LION macros for External Format (FIELDATA)
Subroutines
Code
Insertion in Program
yes.
yes.
yes.
yes.
Description
generates file control table
for an output file.
generates file control table
EICON: .
for an input file.
opens an output file.
EOPOUT: .
opens an input file.
EOPIN: ••
converts binary fields to
IMGOUT: .
FIELDATA characters,
forms an image suitable
for output on printer or
card punch, and moves it
to an output buffer area.
IMGIN: . . . . . . . . converts 80-character
printer images to binary
fields and makes them
available for processing•
closes an output file.
EXOEND:., .
closes an input file .
EXIEND:
EOCON:.
.82
Pseudos
Code
• 751 Insertion of new item: . special library run •
.752 Language of new item: • SLEUTH I or relocatab1e
machine code.
.753 Method of call:. . . . . LOCATE or INSERT pseudo
for inclusion at assembly
time.
XREF pseudo for inclusion
at load time.
.761 Open routines exist: •
.762 Closed routines .exist: .
• 763 Open-closed is
optional: .. .. .. ,. ......
.764 Closed routines appear
once: • . . . . . . . .
OENREL:
IENREL: .
OENFIL: •
IENFIL:
created and maintained by
LIDRARIAN routine.
.721 Fixed master: . . .
.722 Expandable master:
. 723 Private: .. " ....
7/63
IOCON:.
ITMIN: ••
.7
.76
Description
IICON: •
• 671 Ownps: • . . ............ MIDAS, a set of subroutines
called by SLEUTH macros,
provides listings on tape
or printer of the contents
of specified areas of storage in octal, decimal,
floating point, alphameric,
or instruction format. An
option permits listing only
those locations whose contents have been altered
during execution of the
program being tested.
none.
. 672 Tracers: •
MIDAS; see Paragraph .671 •
• 673 Snapshots:
of
Code
PRO: •
Description
names program and defines
format of object program.
ENDPRO: .
signifies end of source program and defines starting
address.
EQU (or =):
assigns a value to a label or
relates two labels.
IDANK: . . .
controls placement of words
in the instruction area of
core storage.
DBANK: ,. ............. controls placement of words
in the data area of core
storage .
BANK: .. ................ causes following coding to
be placed in next available
locations in opposite bank.
784: 171.820
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: SLEUTH I
§
171.
.82
. 82
MACRO:
Code
Description
DTABLE:.
defines a data table whose
size can be modified at
load time.
generates a 36-bit integer
constant.
generates a floating point
constant.
generates a fixed point
scaled constant.
WF:
XF:.
H:
T:
S: •
G:
SC:
Description
Code
Pseudos (Contd.)
W: •
Pseudos (Contd.)
generates two 18-bit values
in a single word.
generates three 12-bit
values in a single word.
generates six 6-bit values
in a single word.
generates a number of
fields of specified lengths
in a single word.
. . . . . . . . . . . generates an alphameric
constant of up to 60
FIELDATA characters,
stored six per word.
XS3: . . . . . • . . . . generates an alphameric
constant of up to 60 XS-3
characters, stored six per
word.
RESV: . . . . . . . . • reserves a block of words
and fills them with zeros.
© 1963
ENDMAC:
SWITCH: .
SPACE:.
EJECT: .
COR: ..
DELETE:
FOLLOW:
ENDCOR:
XREF: . .
INSERT: .
LOCATE:
signals start of a macro
definition; 1. e., the
instructions which constitute the "skeleton."
signals end of a macro
definition.
names a console Selective
Jump switch.
causes n blank lines in
listing.
causes skip to top of next
page in listing.
heads correction deck and
names the program to be
corrected.
. . . . . . . causes deletion of a single
instruction, a block of
instructions, or all
instructions preceded by *.
. . . . . . • designates the source instruction after which insertions are to be made.
signals end of a
correction deck.
names and specifies entry
points for a library subroutine to be added at
load time.
permanently inserts
library subroutine(s).
calls in library
subroutine(s) for a
single assembly.
by Auerbach Corporation and SNA Incorporated
..
7/63
784: 191.100
UNIVAC 1107
Operating Environment
EXEC I
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: EXEC I
§
.12
191.
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
Description
Description (Contd. )
• Input-Output - The acceptance, scheduling, and
processing of all requests for input-output functions from the ope:r:ating programs. Three request
lists are maintained for each of the 15 input-output
channels. Each request is assigned to the high,
medium, or low priority list for a particular
channel, as specified by the programmer. The
1107's interrupt facilities and the request lists are
used to keep each channel as fully occupied as possible. Automatic recovery from input-output
errors is provided where feasible.
EXEC 1.
UNIVAC 1107 Executive
System.
EXEC I is an integrated operating system for the
UNIVAC 1107. It provides the means for automatically processing a scheduled set of jobs, either serially or concurrently, with a minimum of operator
intervention. EXEC I is a major component of the
SLEUTH I software package; it is not directly compatible with the SLEUTH II assembly system or its
associated operating system, EXEC II (Section
784:192). Object programs produced by the 1107
COBOL and FORTRAN Compilers and the SLEUTH
II assembly system can be executed under the control of EXEC I through the use of COORDINATOR,
described in Section 784:151. 17, which provides the
necessary interface. A planned extension of EXEC I
will enable it to control COBOL and FORTRAN compilations as well.
• Switching - The provision for transfers of control
between two or more programs being run at the
same time. Programs are assigned to one of two
Switch Lists, depending upon whether they have
been classified as "I/O-limited" or "computelimited" by the programmer. Whenever an 1/0limited program must wait for completion of an
input or output operation, control is transferred
to the next I/O-limited program on the list. Whenever none of the I/O-limited programs can continue, control is transferred to a compute-limited
program until an external interrupt notifies EXEC
I that an input-output operation has been completed
and control can be returned to one of the 1/0limited programs.
EXEC I consists of a related set of subroutines that
can be modified to suit the needs of specific installations. It performs the following functions:
• Communication - The provision for all communication between the operator and the system by
means of the console keyboard and printer.
• Schedule Maintenance - The acceptance of Job Requests from any input device and use of these requests to construct a job schedule.
G
o Selection - The use of information in the job schedule to select the next job to be initiated. Selection
is based upon the specified priority and sequence
relationships and the availability of the necessary
facilities.
• Facility Assignment - The assignment of storage
and peripheral devices to meet the symbolically
defined requirements of each program. EXEC I
maintains an up-to-date list of the status of all facilities and attempts to assign Core Memory (in
2, 048-word blocks) and input-output channels for
maximum overall efficiency.
• Loading - The transfer of a program from a storage medium to the operational facilities assigned
to it. Loading is handled by CLAMP, the 1107
Relative Load Routine (see 784:151. 17).
.. Interrupts - The use of the 1107's interrupt facilities to cause entrance to subroutines that deal
with processor errors. Unless error recovery
routines are furnished by the user, each error interrupt will cause termination of the offending program with a storage dump.
© 1963
~y
Logging - The recording of the approximate internal processing time used by each program and the
unused central processor time. This facilitates
determination of the programs that should be multirun together for maximum overall efficiency.
• Termination - The normal or abnormal termination of a program and the return of the facilities
assigned to it to "available" status. Termination
can be initiated by the program itself, by EXEC I,
or by the operator.
.13
Availability:
December, 1962.
.14
Originator: .
UNIVAC Division,
Sperry Rand Corporation.
.15
Maintainer:
as above.
.16
Reference: .
UNIVAC Technical Bulletin
UP-2S77, May, 1962.
.2
PROGRAM LOADING
.21
Source of Programs:.
Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
specified by control cards or
console type-ins.
7/63
784: 191.211
§
UNIVAC 1107
191.
.211 Programs from on-line
libraries:. . • . . . . from magnetic tape or drum
libraries created and
maintained by LIBRARIAN
(see 784:151.16) .
. 212 Independent programs: from any specified input
device.
· 213 Data: . . . . . • . . . . from any available input
device, as specified in
program.
.214 Master routines:. . . . EXEC I is stored on a sys. tem tape in absolute form.
.22
.23
Library Subroutines:
subroutines required by a
main program but not incorporated into it are
loaded from a subroutine
library tape by CLAMP
(see 784:151.17).
.4
RUNNING SUPERVISION
.41
Simultaneous Working:
EXEC I controls all inputoutput operations and attempts to maximize utilization of the available
peripheral devices.
.42
Multi-running:.
number of simultaneously
running programs is limited only by equipment
availability. Switching
techniques are described
in Paragraph • 12.
.43
Multi-sequencin/.i: •
no provisions.
.44
Errors, Checks and Action
Error
!,Qading input error:
Allocation impossible:
In-out error - single:
In-out error - pelSistent:
Loading Sequence: • . . Job Request cards are used
to construct a job sched~
ule. Then, based upon the
specified priority and sequence relationship and
equipment availability,
jobs are selected. loaded,
and initiated. Jobs can be
added to or deleted from
the schedule at any time.
When a magnetic drum is
available, from 50 to 130
Job Requests can be stored
in a 2, OOO-word area reserved for the schedule.
•3
HARDWARE ALLOCATION
.31
Storage
Program conflicts:
Arithmetic overflow:
Underflow:
Invalid operation:
Invalid address:
Reference to fOibidden
area:
· 32
Input-Output Units
.321 Initial assignment: .
• 322 Alternation: . .
• 323 Reassignment:.
7/63
all program references to
input-output devices must
I?e symbolic; the required
facilities are defined by
control cards, and actual
assignments are made
automatically by EXEC I
at loading time .
as incorporated in user's
program.
same as initial assignment;
can release assigned
facilities for use by
another program.
Action
check
reload program.
EXEC I checks select another program.
interrupt
try again.
interrupt
type message and
return to program
with error indic ation.
?
interrupt
programmer- specified. +
interrupt
programmer-specified. +
interrupt
programmer-specified. If
check
type message and
dump program.
interrupt
terminate program
with storage dump.
:+ If no error recovery subroutinE: is furnished by the programmer,
the program will be terminated with a storage dump•
.45
• 311 Sequencing of program
for movement between
levels: . . . . . . . . must be incorporated in
user's program.
· 312 Occupation of working
storage: . . . . . . • as programmed; i:e., no
automatic facilities for
transfer of program segments between core and
drum or core and tape.
Check or
Interlock
Restarts
• 451 Establishing restart
points: . . . . . . .
as incorporated in user's
program, according to
specified tape dump format.
Restart table is produced
by EXEC I at user's
program request.
.452 Restarting process: • . as incorporated in user's
program; or initiated under
EXEC I control (using the
restart table) and completed by user's program.
.5
PROGRAM DIAGNOSTICS
.51
Dynamic
.511 Tracing:
.512 Snapshots:
.52
hardware trace mode is
available through EXEC I.
as incorporated in user's
programs (see MIDAS,
Section 784:151. 17).
Post Mortem: . . . . . a dump of Film Memory, all
Core Memory locations assigned to the program, and
other diagnostic information
is produced automatically
upon termination of a job
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: EXEC I
§
19l.
. 52
Post Mortem (Contd.): .
.6
OPERATOR CONTROL
. 61
Signals to Operator
. 611 Decision required by
operator: • . . . . .
.612 Action required by
operator: . . . . .
. 613 Reporting progress of
run: . . . . . . . . •
.62
Operator's Decisions:
.63
Operator's Signals:
.631 Inquiry: ........
. 632 Change of normal
progress: •
"
"
784:191.520
due to a non-recoverable
error interrupt or upon
program or operator request. The dump is
written on tape for later
transcription on the HighSpeed Printer.
console printer messages,
under control of EXEC I
or user's program.
.8
PERFORMANCE
.81
System Requirements
.811 Minimum
configurations: .
.812 Usable extra facilities:
.813 Reserved equIpment:
same as .61l.
same as . 611.
keyboard entries or console
swi tch setting~.
keyboard entries.
.82
keyboard entries.
.821 Loading time:
.822 Reloading frequency:
.7
LOGGING
.71
Operator Signals:
console printer.
.72
Operator Decisions: .
console printer.
. 73
Run Progress:
console printer.
. 74
Errors:
...
console printer .
• 75
Running Times:
console printer.
. 76
Multi - running Status:
console printer lists programs comprising the current "mix" before each
program is initiated, for
approval or rejection by
the operator.
© 1963
alL
8,192 Core Memory
locations.
12 Film Memory locations.
50, 000 magnetic drum
locations.
Control Console.
Real-Time Clock.
System Overhead
..
.83
1107 Central Computer with
16, 384 Core Memory
locations.
1 magnetic tape handler.
1 card reader (paper tape
or drum can be used
instead) .
1 printer .
Program Space
AvaiIiible:
..
?
resident portions of EXEC I
remain in Core Memory;
other portions are called
in automatically as required.
all of available core and
drum storage except
reserved areas listed in
Paragraph.813 •
.84
Program Loading Time: dependent upon program
input device .
.85
Program Performance:
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
EXEC I overhead is
estimated by manufacturer
to be about 1 to 2% of total
processing time in typical
multi-running applications.
7/63
784: 192. 100
II
•
STANDARD
EDP
REI'ORTS
UNIVAC 1107
Operating Environment
EXEC II
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: EXEC II
§
192.
.12
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: .
.12
Description (Contd.)
output errors can be handled according to standard
techniques or user-coded routines •
EXEC II.
UNIVAC 1107 Monitor
System.
Description
EXEC II is being developed by Computer Sciences
Corporation as an integrated operating system to
control t:he translation and execution of programs
coded in SLEUTH II, COBOL, and FORTRAN. The
system is designed to achieve high utilization of the
available equipment by using one or more FH-880
Magnetic Drums as high capacity back-Up stores to
keep the card readers, punches, and printers fully
occupied without delaying execution of the main program. No facilities for true multi-running (1. e. ,
processing several independent main programs
simultaneously) are provided.
The EXEC II information storage and retrieval system is designed to facilitate the construction of p'rograms from their component elements, the creation
and maintenance of program libraries, and the
manipulation and loading of object programs. The
SLEUTH II assembler and the FORTRAN and COBOL
compilers are integrated into the system, and the
system organization is "open-ended" so that other
translators can be incorporated.
The EXEC II library of independent programs and
subroutines is called the Program Complex File, or
PCF. The PCF resides on the magnetic drum while
in use, and the entire PCF or any of its elements can
be transcribed to or from either magnetic tape or
punched cards. The PCF can contain the following
types of elements:
EXEC II consists of three distinct parts: a set of
input-output routines, an information storage and
retrieval scheme, and a set of diagnostic routines.
o Symbolic programs in SLEUTH II, COBOL,
The input-output sl:lbroutines handle all communication between the 1107 Central Computer and its
peripheral devices, under the control of a routine
always found in Core Memory called the Dispatcher.
All peripheral operations can be performed on -line,
eliminating the need for off-line data transcription
equipment. To prevent main programs from being
limited by the speeds of card readers, punches, or
printers, "symbiont" routines are provided which
permit on-line card-to-drum, drum-to-card, and/or
drum-to-printer data transcriptions to be performed
concurrently with the execution of a main program.
The user can design his programs to accept all input
data from the drum in the form of card images in
Fieldata code and transmit all output data to the
drum in the form of card images or printer line
images at the core-to-drum transfer rate of 60,000
words per second. The appropriate data transcription operations are automatically performed by the
symbiont routines, which interrupt the user's main
program as required to keep the peripheral devic"es
operating at full speed. Magnetic tape can be used
in place of the drum to provide back-up storage for
the peripheral devices if desired.
o Relocatable programs produced by the SLEUTH II,
Magnetic tape, drum, paper tape, and console inputoutput operations are handled more directly in that
no back-up storage or symbiont routines are involved. A separate subroutine is provided for each
type of peripheral device. The programmer must
write a subroutine link accompanied by the appropriate parameters to initiate each input or output operation. Four different levels of input-output programming are available at the user's option. Input-
© 1963
FORTRAN, or any other source language for which
a translator has been incorporated.
COBOL, or FORTRAN translators.
II
Absolute programs in non-relocatable, machine
language form.
a Maps, produced by EXEC n's "Memory Allocation
Processor, "which define storage allocation, segmentation, and loading techniques for specific programs.
o COBOL Library entries, which can be called by the
COpy verb of COBOL-61.
II
Procedure definitions, which can be called by the
DO directive of SLEUTH II.
By means of varied control card entries, a variety
of system operations can be initiated, including compilations, assemblies, loading and execution of object programs, storage dumps after execution, insertions into the Program Complex File, and combinations of any or all of these operations. The sequence of program operations and the aSSignment of
peripheral devices are controlled by the entries on
the control cards.
Flexible control of object program segmentation is
provided. The SEG operation card defines each segment and specifies, in a pseudo-algebraic language,
which other segments and subsegments must occupy
working storage simultaneously and which may be
overlaid. A segment can be loaded into Core Mem0ry from the drum either "manually, " by means of
Auerbach Corporafion and Info, Inc.
8/63
UNIVAC 1107
784:192.120
§
192.
. 12
.211 Programs from on-line
libraries (contd.)
Description (Contd. )
an explicit program request, or "automatically, " by
means of a jump instruction to an entry point within
a segment that is not currently loaded.
A program too large to fit into Core Memory can alternatively be handled by executing it as a series of
smaller, relatively independent programs called
"links, " which can share a common data area in
Core Memory. This technique is similar to the
CHAIN function of IBM 709/7090 FORTRAN II, described in Section 408:191.
The EXEC II diagnostic routines will be designed to
facilitate program testing by permitting the programmer to be highly selective· in specifying the data to be
dumped. Both dynamic (snapshot) dumps and postmortem dump procedures will be provided. Dump
listings can be produced with the symbolic instructions intercollated with the actual Core Memory contents.
Operation of EXEC II requires an 1107 with at least
16,384 words of Core Memory, 1 FH-880 Magnetic
Drum, 1 card reader, 1 card punch, and 1 printer.
All available equipment can be utilized. The resident routines of EXEC II itself occupy an average of
3,000 to 3,500 Core Memory locations and a maximUm of about 8,000 locations. A minimum of 80,000
words of drum storage are required for the monitor
routines, the translators, and the library. Drum
storage is also used to hold the absolute program to
be run, the diagnostic information collected during
and after execution, and input-output data for the
symbiont routines.
.13
Availability: . • . .
. 14
Originator:. . . . . . . Computer Sciences
Corporation.
.15
Maintainer:
UNIVAC.
.16
Reference: •
Programmer's Reference
Manual: UNIVAC 1107
MoiittOr System, January,
1963. (This is a CSC manual; final documentation
will be published soon by
UNIVAC. )
over 90% operational and
undergoing field testing as
of July, 1963.
punched cards. Loading
"and allocation is directed
by control cards.
• 212 Independent programs: punched cards or magnetic
tape.
.. 213 Data: • . . . . . . . . • any available type of input
device, as specified in
program.
• 214 Master routines:. . . . EXEC II is stored on an FH880 Magnetic Drum. Resident routines are held in
Core Memory at all times
and other segments are
loaded as required.
.' 22
Library Subroutines: • subroutines referenced in a
main program but not incorporated into it are automatically loaded from the
Program Complex File or
the Systems Library.
.23
Loading Sequence: . • . programs are loaded and
executed in the sequence
in which their control cards
are read; therefore, all
sequencing is manually
controlled.
.3
HARDWARE ALLOCATION
.31
Storage
• 311 Sequencing of program
for movement between
levels: . . . • . . . . program segments are defined by the SEG control
card which specifies, in a
pseudo algebraic language,
how each segment is related to other segments and
subsegments •
· 312 Occupation of working
storage: . . . . . . • a segment can be loaded into
Core Memory from the
drum either "manually, "
by an explicit program request, or "automatically, "
by a jump instruction to an
entry point within the
segment.
• 32
Input-Output Units
• 321 Initial assignment: .
.2
PROGRAM LOADING
• 21
Source of Programs
.211 Programs from on-line
libraries:. . . . . . . Program Complex File
(PCF) contains programs
and subroutines in absolute, relocatable, or
source language (SLEUTH
II, COBOL, or FORTRAN)
form. The PCF normally
resides on the drum, but
can be transcribed to or
from magnetic tape or
8/63
tape units are referenced by
symbolic logical unit designations in programs •
ASSignment of specific
physical units can be made
by control cards, Keyboard
entries, or subroutines .
. 322 Alternation: . • . . . • any number of tape units can
be assigned to a specific
file and switched cyclically
by reference to the
T$SWAP subroutine.
.323 Reassignment: . . • . . possible during a run, using
the T$AGN subroutine;
otherwise, same as initial
assignment.
A
AUERBACH
®
784: 192.400
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: EXEC II
§
"-
.63
192.
RUNNING SUPERVISION
• 41
Simultaneous Working:
. 42
Multi-running: . . . . . no facilities for multi-running of independent main
programs, but data transcription operations can
be performed concurrently
with the processing of one
main program.
Dispatcher routine controls
all input-output operations
and attempts to maximize
utilization of the available
peripheral devices.
. 43
Multi-sequencing: . • . no provisions .
.44
Errors, Checks and Action
Check or
Action
Interlock
Error
.45
.5
check
print message and offer options.
check
print message and offer options.
checks
try
checks
jump to user-coded error routine.
Arithmetic
overflow:
check
Underflow:
check
Invalid operation:
Invalid address:
Reference to
.forbidden area:
check
check
save address of the offending
instruction.
save address of the offending
instruction.
print message and terminate run.
print message and terminate run.
check
print message and terminate run.
Restarts: ..
PROGRAM
DIAGNOSTICS: .
•6
OPERATOR CONTROL
. 61
Signals to Operator
.611 Decis ion required by
operator: . . .
.612 Action required by
operator: •.
. 613 Reporting progress
of run:
..
...
.....
. 62
again.
none.
error:
,
.....
.4
Loading input error:
Allocation
impossible:
In-out error single:
In-out error pelSistent:
Internal transfer
Operator's Signals
no specifications published
to date, but facilitles will
be included.
. 631 Inquiry:
. 632 Change of normal
progress: . . .
LOGGING: . . . . . . . console printer messages
produced by EXEC II.
.8
PERFORMANCE
.81
System Requirements
.811 Minimum configuration: 16, 384 Core Memory
locations.
I FH-880 Magnetic Drum.
1 Card Reader.
1 Card Punch.
I High-Speed Printer.
.812 Usable extra facilities: larger Core Memory and all
available peripheral devices.
.813 Reserved equipment:
3,000 to 8,000 words of Core
Memory for resident
sections of EXEC II.
at least 80, 000 words of
drum storage for EXEC II,
processors, and library.
Film Memory locations 0,
32 through 64, and 80
through 87.
1 card channel and 1 printer
channel.
Control Console.
23 machine instructions
(mostly I/O instructions),
which may not be used in
programs to be run under
EXEC II control.
.82
System Overhead
..
.822 Reloading frequency:
.83
Program Space
Available:
..
console printer messages.
console printer messages.
for drum-to-core transfers:
17 msec average access
time plus O. 0163 msec per
word transferred.
EXEC II remains on drum;
segments are loaded into
Core Memory automatically
as required •
all of available core and
drum storage except reserved areas listed in
Paragraph. 813.
.84
Program Loading Time: dependent upon program input
device; less than 1 second
when magnetic drum is used.
.85
Program Performance:
console printer messages.
Operator's Decisions: . console keyboard entries.
control cards, or console
switch settings.
© 1963
control cards must be manually resequenced or
altered. Control card MSG
may request decision.
•7
.821 Loading time:
an integrated system of
snapshot and post-mortem
dump routines will be provided, but their specifications have not been
released to date.
console keyboard entries •
Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
EXEC II overhead is estimated to be less than 1 per
cent of total processing time
in typical applications.
8/63
784:201.001
•
STANDARD
EDP
•
UNIVAC 1107
R£lIIRTS
System Performance
SYSTEM PE'RFORMANCE
§
201.
Generalized File Processing (784:201. 1)
These problems involve updating a master file from information in a detail file and
producing a printed record of the results of each transaction. This application is one of the
most typical of commercial data processing jobs and is fully described in Section 4:200.1 of
the Users Guide.
I
Because the UNIVAC 1107 can process several independent programs at the same
time through multi:'running, the amount of central processor time required by each progrp.m
is highly significant. The difference betWeen the total elapsed time for a particular run and
the amount of central processor time required for that run represents processor time that
is potentially available to other programs. Whether or not this processor time can be efficiently utilized depends upon the system configuration, the over-all problem mix, and the effectiveness of the scheduling and operating system.
In the graphs for Standard File Problems A, B. C, and D, the total time required for
each standard configuration to process 10,000 master file records is shown by solid lines.
For Configuration VIIIB, where all four input-output files are on magnetic tape, total times
for cases using both unblocked and blocked records in the detail and report files are shown
by means of solid and dashed lines, respectively. Central processor time is essentially the
same for all configurations, and is shown by the broken line marked "CP" on each graph. No
addition has been made to the processor time to cover the overhead requirements of the operating system. As indicated in Paragraph 784:191. 85, the manufacturer expects the EXEC I
system to require, on the average, only 1 to 2 per cent of the total processor time.
Worksheet Data Table 1 (page 784:201. 011) shows that the printer is the controlling
factor on total time required over most of the detail activity range for integrated Configurations VI and VIlA. In these configurations the detail file is read by the on -line card reader
and the report file is produced by the on-line printer. The central processor is occupied for
only a small fraction of the total processing time. When scientific programs with limited input and output can be run simultaneously in order. to utilize the remaining processor time, it
may be satisfactory to operate the UNIVAC 1107 as just described. In other cases, it will
be more efficient to divide the file processing problem into three separate runs: a card-totape transcription of the detail file, the processing run with all files on magnetic tape, and
a tape-to-card transcription of the report file. The curves for paired Configuration VUIB
show the time required for the all-tape main processing run in this case. The card-to-tape
and tape-to-printer transcriptions will run at card reader and printer-limited speeds, and
their demands on the processor will be small.
The master file record format is a mixture of alphameric and binary numeric items,
designed to minimize the number of time-consuming radix conversion operations required.
(Even so, most of the central processor time is devoted to editing and radix conversion operations, using the manufacturer's standard sUbroutines.) A moderate degree of packing led
to a record length of 18 words (or 108 6-bit characters).
SORTING (784:201. 2)
The standard estimate for sorting 80-character records by straightforward merging
on magnetic tape was developed from the time for Standard File Problem A according to the
method explained in the Users' Guide, Paragraph 4:200.213, using a three-way merge.
© 1963
Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
8/63
UNIVAC 1107
784:201.002
§
201.
MATRIX INVERSION (784:201. 3)
In matrix inversion, the object is to measure central processor speed on the straightforward inversion of a non-symmetric, non-singular matrix. No input-output operations are
involved. The standard estimate is based on the time to perform cumulative multiplication
(c = c + aibj) in single precision floating point (see Paragraph 784:051. 422). Inversion times
are shown for two cases: instructions and data in the same core storage bank, and instructions and data in alternate banks. The processor time required for a matrix inversion can
be spread over a much longer total elapsed time when the inversion is multi-run with other
programs that utilize the available input-output equipment. Multi-running of other programs
necessarily decreases the amount of internal storage that can be allocated to the matrix inversion.
GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING (784:201. 4)
This problem measures over-all system performance on a simple mathematical application that involves widely varying ratios of input-to-computation-to-output volume, as
described in Section 4:200.4 of the Users' Guide. As in the File Processing problem, the
total elapsed time is shown by the solid lines in Graphs 784:201. 414 and. 415, while the central processor time is shown by the broken line marked "CP". (There is no separate "CP"
line for Configuration VIIIB because the central processor time is the limiting factor in all
cases, largely because of the time requirements for radix conversion of the input and output
data. )
All computations are performed in single precision floating point. In Configurations
VI and VIlA, input is via the on -line card reader and output is via the on -line printer. If
card-to-tape and tape-to-printer transcriptions are carried out in separate runs, the time
required for the all-tape main processing run can be read from the curves for paired
Configuration VIIIB.
8/63
fA
AUERBACH
®
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
784:201.011
UNIVAC 1107 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 1
Con fi guroti on
Worksheet
]
VIII B
Item
VI
VilA
Files 3 & 4
Blocked
Files 3 & 4
Unblocked
(File 1)
1,080
1,080
1,080
1,080
(File 1)
10
10
10
10
70.7
16.5
16.5
16.5
File 3
100.0
100.0
14.St
8.2
File 4
142.0
142.0
18.St
8.6
Char/block
Records/block
K
File 1 = File 2
msec/block
InputOutputTimes
File 1 = File 2
msec/switch
Reference
4:200.112
File 3
File 4
File 1 = File 2
0.72
0.72
0.72
0.72
File 3
0.056
0.056
0.56
0.056
File 4
0.088
0.088
0.88
0.088
msec/block
al
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
msec/record
a2
0.12
0.12
0.12
0.i2
maec/detail
b6
0.36
0.36
0.36
0.36
msec/work
bS +b9
0.36
0.36
0.36
0.36
msec/report
b7 +b8
3.48
3.48
3.48
3.48
msec/block
for C.p.
and
dominant
column.
al
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.08
a2 K
1.20
1.20
1.20
1.20
a3 K
42.00
42.00
42.00
42.00
File 1 Master In
0.72
0.72
0.72
0.72
File 2 Master Out
0.72
0.72
0.72
0.72
F·ile 3 Details
0.5·6
0.56
0.56
0.56
File 4 Reports
0.88
1420.0
0.88
1420.0
0.88
18.5
0.88
86.0
46.16
1420.0
46.16
1420.0
46.16
18.5
46.16
86.0
msec penalty
2
Central
Processor
Times
3
Standard
Problem A
F
4:200.114
= 1.0
Total
4
Unit of measure
(36-bit words)
Std. routines
:I:
8,192
8,192
8,192
8,192
---
---
---
189
189
189
189
1,080
1,080
1,140
1,080
792
792
1,440
792
40
40
40
40
10,293
10,293
11,001
10,293
---
Fixed
Standard
Problem A
Space
4:200.1132
3 (Blocks 1 to 23)
6 (Blocks 24 to 48)
Files
Working
Total
4:200.1151
t Ten recorda per block in Files 3 a. 4.
words are generally reserved for EXEC I.
:I: 8,192
©
1963 Auerbach Carporation ond Info, Inc.
8/63
184:201.012
UNIVAC 1101
UNIVAC 1101 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE (Contd.)
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 2
Confi guroti on
Worksheet
5
Item
Reference
VI & VilA
VIIIB
Floating
Floating
input
card reader
Uniservo IlIA
output
Printer
Uniservo IlIA
input
80 char.
(1 card)
80 char.
128 char.
(1 line)
128 char.
Fixed/Floating point
Unit name
Size of record
output
Standard
Mathematical
Problem A
input
T1
100.0
8.2
output
T2
100.0
8.6
input
T3
0.056
0.056
output
T4
0.088
0.088
msec/record
T5
6.69
6.69
msec/5 loops
T6
1.12
1.12
msec/report
T7
7.52
7.52
msec/block
4:200.413
msec penalty
7
Unit name
Size of block
Standard
Stati sti cal
Problem A
Records/block
B
msec/block
T1
msec penalty
T3
4:200.512
C.P.
8/63
msec/block
T5
msec/record
T6
msec/table
T7
A
AUERBACH
®
784:201.100
•
II
STANDARD
EDP
UNIVAC 1107
REroRTS
System Performance
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
201.
.1
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING
.11
Standard File Problem A
.lll Record sizes
Master file:
Detail file:·
Report file:
. 112 Computation:
. 113 Timing basis:
.114 Graph: • . . . • . • .
.115 Storage space required
Configuration VI:
Configuration VII A:
Configuration VIII B
(unblocked
Files 3 & 4): . •.
Configuration VIII B
(blocked
Files 3 & 4): • . . •
108 characters.
1 card.
1 line .
. standard .
. using estimating procedure outlined in Users'
Guide, 4:200.113.
*
see graph below.
10,300 words.
10.300 words.
*
*
10,300 words.
*
11,000 words.
*
includes 8,192 words reserved for
EXEC I system.
100.0
7
4
2
~
10.0
7
./
Time in Minutes
to Process 10,000 4
Master File
Records
2
./
II'
VI
--
.-
/
0/
,
,§
1.0
-
'J'11l13
,
7
-
",
.-
./
/~ t>~--
4
--,
C~
.J>
2
.
---
(.1' - -
---
_CP~
,/
./
0.1
0.0
~'
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
LEGEND
----- - CP- -
Elapsed time; unblocked Files 3 & 4
Elapsed time; blocked Files 3 & 4
Central Processor time (all configurations)
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations)
© 1963
Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
8/63
784:201.120
§
UNIVAC 1107
• standard •
• using estimating procedure outlined in
Users' Guide,
4:200.12.
.124 Graph: . . . . . . . . see graph below •
201.
.12
.122 Computation:
• 123 Timing basis:
Standard File Problem B
.121 Record sizes
Master file:
Detail file:
Report file:
. 54 characters.
1 card .
. 1 line.
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
7
4
Time in Minutes
to Process 10,000 2
Master File
Records
~
10.0
JI'
7
/'
4
J
2
1.0
7
4
-
V
/
./
"
ld
I
t~
".
./
./
h\\\'P/
2
PG~p
'"-
--
~
-
\T\\\B
..---
_Cl'~
Cl' -
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
LEGEND
Elapsed time; unblocked Files 3 & 4
-. -- - - Elapsed time; blocked Files 3 & 4
- . - C P - - Central Processor time (all configurations)
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations)
8/63
A
AUERBACH
®
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
784:201.130
201.
.13
.132 Computation:
.133 Timing basis:
. standard.
. using estimating procedure outlined in
Users' Guide,
4:200.13 .
.134 Graph: . • . . . • • . see graph below.
Standard File Problem C
. 131 Record sizes
Master file:
Detail file:
Report file:
• 216 characters.
1 card.
. 1 line.
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
7
4
Time in Minutes
to Process 10,000
Master File
2
Records
~
10.0
-
AI"'"
7
~
~VI
./
4
V
2
/'
-'
-
0/
s:
1.0
H
7
R
.-
VmB
./
VIIIB
_CP
- _ ..... ClIBDsP ......
4
~
C? - - -
/'
2
G~
/
0.1
•
~
0.1
0.0
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
LEGEND
-
-
-
=====-00 -
- CP- -
Elapsed t·ime; unblocked Files 3 & 4
Elapsed time; blocked Files 3 & 4
Central Processor time (all configurations
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations)
© 1963
Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
8/63
784:201.140
§
UNIVAC 1107
201.
14.
. 142 Computation: .
.143 Timing basis: .
. trebled .
• using estimating procedure outlined in
Users' Guide,
4:200.14 •
. 144 Graph: . . . . . . . . see graph below'.
Standard File Problem D
. 141 Record sizes
Master file:
Detail file:
Report file:
108 characters.
1 card.
1 line.
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
7
4
Time in Minutes
to Process 10,000 2
Master File
Records
~
10.0
7
./
4
L
1.0
.- .:J
./
1/
V.I
2
~s:
\ll\lB
•
I•
7
~
~
-:.7
/..
4
.A~\~~eV
2
~
0.1
0.0
/
--"""
--
-
-
cP -
eV"
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
LEGEND
-- - --CP- -
Elapsed time; unblocked Files 3 & 4
Elapsed time; blocked Files 3 & 4
Central Processor time (all configurations)
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations)
8/63
-
A
AUERBACH
®
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
784:201.200
201.
. 212 Key size: • •
.213 Timing basis:
.2
SORTING
.21
Standard Problem Estimates
. 211 Record size:
· 8 characters .
· using estimating procedure outlined in
Users' Guide,
4:200.213.
.214 Graph: • . . • . . . · see graph below, based
upon 3-way merge.
. . . . . 80 characters.
1,000
7
4
2
II~
100
7
I
If'
/
4
0/
Time in Minutes 2
to Put Records
Into Required
Order
10
"
V
II
~/
.L
7
II
/
~
~~
V
4
4.~
~~Z
/
2
V
/
/
~
I
7
/
4
V
2
/
/
"
0.1
2
100
4
7
2
1,000
4
7
2
10,000
4
7
100,000
Number of Records
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations)
© 1963
Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
8/63
UNIVAC 1107
784: 20 1.300
§
201.
.3
MATRIX INVERSION
• 31
Standard Problem Estimates
.311 Basic parameters: . . . general, non-symmetric
matrices, using floating
point to 8 decimal
digits precision:
.312 Timing basis: • . . . . using estimating procedure outlined in
Users' Guide,
4:200.312 .
.313 Graph: . . . . . . . . see graph below, showing times for instructions and data in the
same core storage
bank and in alternate
banks.
100.0
7
4
2
,
10.0
II
7
"
Jj
4
/I
H
Time in Minutes
for Complete
2
Inversion
SAME BAN~ALTERNATE BANKS
1.0
7
4
J.
/,1
2
~~
0.10
I,
7
III
J
4
"
/J
J"
2
0.01
2
4
7
2
4
10
2
100
Size of Matrix
8/63
7
A
AUERBACH
&
$
*
(
%
:
?
!
, (comma)
\
I
(apostrophe)
,
/
0
=1= (or stop)
(
I
I
\
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/66
785:151. 100
A
SUMDARD
EDP
AUERBACH
UNIVAC 1108
PROBLEM ORIENTED
FACILITIES
REPORTS
PROBLEM ORIENTED FACILITIES
.1
UTILITY ROUTINES
.11
Simulators of Other
Computers: . . . . . . . none.
.12
Simulation by Other
Computers: . . . . . . . none.
.13
Data Sorting and Merging
.14
.15
The UNIVAC 1108 SORT/MERGE is a generalized
subroutine which is used in conjunction with a
series of parameter lists and input-output routines to produce a sort program or a sort routine
within a larger program,' A sort routine can be
incorporated into any 1108 source-language program. The sort program is generated at load
time from specifications contained in control
statements in the control stream or within a
program. Specifications include the number of
magnetic tapes to be used (if any), the amount of
core storage to be used, and the amount of magnetic drum storage to be used (if any). In general,
the disordered input file and the ordered output
file can be on any combination of 1108 peripheral
devices. If sufficient drum storage is available,
the entire sort can take place between core
storage and magneti c drum storage.
Files can be sorted into either ascending or
descending order. The internal collation sequence
can be used, or a different one can be specified
by means of a table. Key fields can be specified
to be in anyone of five forms, with translation
occurring prior to key comparison and retranslation into the original form prior to output. The
possible forms include unsigned binary, UNIVAC
signed binary (1108 internal fixed-point or
floating-point format), IBM signed binary (IBM
7090/7094 fixed-point format), alphanumeric,
and signed decimal. If desired, a programmer
can code his own comparison algorithm.
Data Transcription: ... routines for performing data transcription
are included in the
Executive System; see
Section 785:191.
.16
File Maintenance: . . . . . routines for performing
file maintenance are
included in the Executive System; see
Section 785:191.
.17
BEEF (Business and Engineering Enriched
FORTRAN)
1108 SORT/MERGE
Reference: . . . . . . . . UNIVAC preliminary
information.
Record size: . . . . . . . limited only by available
storage; variable-length
records can be sorted.
Block size: . . . . . . . . variable by full words up
to 1,000 words maximum.
Key size:
. . . . . . . . no limit on key size;
maximum of 40 keys
per record.
File size: . . . . . . . . . no limit.
Number of tape
units: . . . . . . . . . . zero to all (all tape units
used in the same sort
must be of the same
type; e.g., Uniservo
VIC).
Date available: . . . . . . third quarter, 1966.
Description:
Report Writing: ; . . . . . none
BEEF consists of two groups of subroutines developE.ld by the Westinghouse Electric Corporation's Baltimore Defense and Space Center to
overcome FORTRAN's limitations as a data processing language and to enhance its capabilities as
a scientific processing language. These routines
are available to programmers using any n08
source language.
BEEF Data Processing Routines
This group consists of 60 subroutines primarily
concerned with data manipulation. Facilities are
provided for:
o Moving whole data words -
6 subroutines.
o Moving characters and fields o Formatting -
5 subroutines.
7 subroutines.
• Decision-making - 7 subroutines.
o Data conversion o Report control 0-
6 subroutines.
2 subroutines.
Input-output control -
o Sorting -
6 subroutines.
1 subroutine.
o Miscellaneous, including word-field and
character-field sequence comparisons 20 subroutines.
BEEF Math-Pack
This group consists of 64 subroutines primarily
concerned with numerical calculations. Facilities
are provided for:
0'
Interpolation -
II
Solution of polynomial equations
routines.
6 subroutines.
Ci)
Differentiation -
4)
Matrix manipulation -
6 sub ..
3 subroutines.
• Numerical integration -
24 subroutines.
5 subroutines.
• Solution of ordinary differential equations
5 subroutines.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/6~
UNIVAC 1108
785:151. 170
.17
.18
BEEF (Business and Engineering Enriched
FORTRAN) (Contd.)
•
Solution of systems of linear and non-linear
equations - 4 subroutines.
•
Miscellaneous, including Fourier series,
random number generation, polynomial
evaluation, and evaluation of Bessel functions - 11 subroutines.
levels can be specified and coefficients can be
modified. Long runs can be split with restart
procedures. Post-optimal parametric programming or a complete tableau can be obtained.
The final output includes the objective function
value, optimal basis, and vector levels. The '
Linear Programming System is incorporated as
part of the 1108 Executive System and is initiated
by control statements in the control stream.
.192 APT III (Automatic Programmed Tools)
Stat-Pack Routines
APT III is a problem-oriented language directed
toward computer-assisted programming of
numerically-controlled machine tools, flame
cutters, drafting equipment, and similar equipment. The present APT III language was written
by the Aerospace Industries Association and
further developed by the minois Institute of
Technology Research Institute. APT III as
implemented for the 1108 conforms to these
specifications. The output from the APT III
translator is in a generalized form which is not
directly applicable to any particular machine.
UNIVAC states that a post-processor can be
furnished, subject to negotiation, to interface
with any particular machine.
The Stat-Pack Routines consist of a group of 90
subroutines oriented toward statistical calculations. Facilities are provided for:
. 19
•
Descriptive statistics -
30 subroutines.
•
Tests on statistical parameters routines.
•
Analysis of variance -
•
Regression and correlation analysis
3 subroutines.
•
Analysis -
•
Time series analysis
11 subroutines.
•
Multivariate analysis
5 subroutines.
•
Distribution functions -
10 subroutines.
•
Plotting -
16 sub-
13 subroutines.
1 subroutine.
.193 PERT
The UNIVAC 1108 PERT/COST system is a generalized applications program that adheres to
the framework provided by the "DOD/NASA
Guide to PERT/COST System Design." PERT,
in general, ie; a technique for handling the scheduling of jobs or procedures with a large number
of interrelated tasks and for identifying the
"critical path" or limitiv.g factors. As conditions
change, new PERT evaluations can be made to
determine the effect on the overall job. PERT/
COST adds the capability for performing cost
estimates and the effect on costs due to deviations
from the schedule.
1 subroutine.
Application Packages
.191 Linear Programming System
This package, coded in FORTRAN V and Assembly
Language, provides 1108 users with a comprehensive system for evaluating many manufacturing
cost and product distribution problems. Up to
2, 047 rows can be accommodated, and extensive
use is made of magnetic drums for intermediate
storage. Computations can be made in either
single- or double-precision arithmetic. Vector
/
/
2/66
A
AUERBACH
OJ
785:161.100
~
AUERBACH
STANDARD
UNIVAC 1108
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE
1108 COBOL
EDP
REPORTS
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: 1108 COBOL
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity:
UNIVAC 1108 COBOL .
.12
Origin:
UNIVAC; based on the 1107
COBOL Compiler originally developed by Computer Sciences Corporatio
.13
Reference:
. 14
Description
UNIVAC 1108 COBOL
Programmer's Reference
Manual, Publication
UP-4048.
COBOL-61 is the most widely implemented pseudoEnglish common language for business applications.
The 1108 COBOL language represents a nearly
complete implementation of Required COBOL-61
(though there are a few omissions), along with
many of the electives and several useful extensions.
The deficiencies of 1108 COBOL with respect to
Required COBOL-61, the extensions, and the
facilities of Elective COBOL-61 that have and have
not been implemented are tabulated at the end of
this description.
Useful extensions to the COBOL-61 language include
the SORT facility, a MONITOR verb that facilitates
program testing, random-accessing facilities, and
a facility that permits flexible control of the vertical
format of printed output. A non-standard version
of the Report Writer facility is also included. See
Paragraph .143 for more details on these extensions.
No COBOL language facilities are provided for
control of data communications.
The 1108 COBOL language is an extension of the
UNIVAC 1107 COBOL language, which is described
in Section 784: 161. The electives implemented in
1108 COBOL but not in 1107 COBOL are indicated
by asterisks in the table in Paragraph .144. These
electives include the COMPUTE and INCLUDE
verbs, many of the verb options, and the complete
range of conditionals. In addition, 1108 COBOL includes the standard implementation of the SORT
verb and Library facilities. File and Record
Descriptions and Procedure Division entries can be
copied into the user's programs from the 1108
COBOL Library, but Environment Division entries
cannot. The 1108 COBOL language does not include
the SEQUENCED ON option in the File Description
statement, which is implemented in 1107 COBOL.
Random (non-sequential) acceSSing of records stored
on magnetic drums can be performed by using the
standard COBOL calling sequence or, alternatively,
by entering the Assembly language and working
directly with the Executive System functions. Programmers who elect to use the Assembly language
are responsible for the arrangement and construction
of the drum files.
The elective verb ENTER, as implemented for the
1108, makes it possible to enter an independentlycompiled Assembly-language, FORTRAN, COBOL,
or other subprogram. Object programs can be
segmented; but whereas Elective COBOL-61 speCifies four different ways of handling segments according to their priorities, 1108 COBOL provides only
two ways:
•
Sections with assigned priorities of 1 through 49
will be present in core memory at all times.
•
Sections with assigned priorities of 50 through 99
will be grouped into segments by priority number.
One segment at a time will be loaded (in the order
referenced) into a Single core memory area whose
size is equal to that of the largest segment •
Data items upon which arithmetic is to be performed
can be represented internally in either decimal (6
bits per digit) or binary form by specifying USAGE
IS COMPUTATIONAL or COMPUTATIONAL-I,
respectively. Operands can be up to 18 decimal
digits or 66 binary bits in length, but SIZE must be
specified in equivalent 6-bit CHARACTERS in either
case. When operands are longer than 36 bits,
multiple-precision arithmetic must be performed.
Arithmetic can be performed upon mixed COMPUTATIONAL and COMPUTATIONAL-l items; radix
conversion and point alignment will be performed
automatically when necessary. None of the COBOL
electives that provide for variable-length items and
records (e.g., the BLOCK, SIZE, and PICTURE
clause options) have been implemented.
The 1108 COBOL Compiler operates under control
of the Executive System. COBOL programs can be
compiled on any valid 1108 configuration. See
Section 785:031, System Configuration, for the
minimum 1108 configuration. Magnetic tape is not
required for the compilation process. Compilation
is divided into six logical phases. Documentation
will consist of a source program listing, diagnostic
messages, and an object program listing containing
symbolic instructions, octal locations, and octal
machine words, with interspersed referimces to the
source program listing. Four different types of
error diagnostics are included within the translator;
they are interpreted as follows:
•
Precautionary diagnostic - print warning message
and continue compilation.
•
Correctible error - make a reasonable attempt at
correction, print explanatory message, and continue.
•
Uncorrectible error - when a reasonable guess of
the programmer's intent cannot be made, print
message, reject the statement or clause, and
continue.
•
Destructive errors - when errors have multiplied
to the point where it is probable. that no more
useful diagnostic information can be produced,
terminate the compilation.
UNIVAC states that current tests indicate that an
average compilation speed of about 4,000 to 5,000
statements per minute can be obtained. Source
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/66
785: 161. 140
•. 14
UNIVAC 1108
a specific item that appears in the standard label
record.
Description (Contd.)
program loading and object program output will be
governed by the speed of the peripheral devices
used. UNIVAC also states that there is no practical
limit on the sizes of programs that can be compiled;
additional core storage can be requested if needed
during compilation ..
.143 Extensions to COBOL-61
.141 Availability
Language: .
Translator:
November, 1965.
third quarter, 1966.
•
The extended implementation of the SORT verb
is included. This permits multiple sorts within
a single program.
•
A MONITOR verb provides dynamic printouts of
the values of specific items as an aid to program
testing and debugging.
•
The operational symbol H can be used in a
PICTURE clause to specify that the field is to be
represented in one's complement binary form;
the effect is the same as that of the clause USAGE
IS COMPUTATIONAL-I.
•
The optional clauses LINES-PER-PAGE, LINESAT-TOP, LINES-AT-BOTTOM, and LINESPACING in the File Description entry provide
vertical format control of printed output.
•
A Report Writer facility is included, but its
implementation is non-standard.
•
Random (non-sequential) acceSSing of records
located in magnetic drum storage is implemented
with the standard COBOL calling sequence.
.142 Deficiencies with Respect to Required COBOL-61
Environment Division • SOURCE-COMPUTER, OBJECT-COMPUTER,
and SPECIAL-NAMES paragraphs cannot be
copied from the Library.
Data Division • The [integer-4 TO] option of the RECORD
CONTAINS clause is not permitted; there is no
provision for efficient handling of variable-length
records; i ~ e., the compiler will consider all
records to be the size of the largest record.
•
The VALUE clause ofthe File Description entry
can apply only to "IDENTIFICATION" or "ID,"
(Contd.)
2/66
A
AUERBACH
'"
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE:
785:161. 144
1108 COBOL
.144 COBOL-61 Electives Implemented (see 4:161.3)
No.
Elective
Comments
Characters and Words
1
2
3
4
Formula characters
Relationship characters
Semicolon
Long literals
Formulas are ·allowed.
The symbols < , > , = are allowed.
A semicolon is in the character set.
The maximum size is 132 characters.
File Description
*9
FILE CONTAINS
The approximate size of the file can be shown.
Record Description
*20
Conditional ranges
VALUES can be ascribed to conditionals.
Verbs
*22
24
*25
COMPUTE
ENTER
INCLUDE
Algebraic formulas may be used.
Non-COBOL languages can be used in a program.
Library routines are available automatically.
Verb Options
*29
30
*31
*32
33
*34
LOCK
MOVE CORRESPONDING
OPEN REVERSED
ADVANCING
STOP provisions
Formulas
Operand size
Relationship
*35
*36
*37
*38
*39
Tests
Conditionals
Complex conditionals
Complex conditionals
Conditional statements
27
*28
A rewound tape can be optionally locked.
Commonly named items in a group can be handled
together.
Tapes can be read backwards.
Specific paper advance instructions can be given.
Special numeric coded alphabetic displays.
Algebraic formulas may be used.
Operands.can be up to 18 digits.
IS EQUAL TO, EQUALS, EXCEEDS relationships
are allowed.
IF x IS NOT ZERO test is allowed.
Implied subjects with implied objects are allowed.
ANDs and ORs may be intermixed.
Nested conditionals are permitted.
IF, SIZE ERROR, AT END, ELSE (OTHERWISE)
may follow an imperative statement.
Environment Division
41
46
OBJECT-COMPUTER
I-O-CONTROL
Computer description can be given.
A rerun facility is available, but the full range is
not implemented.
Identification Division
47
DATE-COMPILED
The current date is inserted automatically.
Special Features
48
Library
49
Segmentation
Library facilities for the procedure division are
available.
Segmentation of programs is allowed (but
implementation is non -standard) .
*These electives are implemented in UNIVAC 1108 COBOL, but not in UNIVAC 1107
COBOL.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/66
UNIVAC 1108
785: 161. 145
.145 COBOL-61 Electives Not Implemented (see 4:161. 3)
No.
Elective
Comments
Characters and Words
5
6
7
Figurative constants
Figurative constants
Computer-name
HIGH or LOW BOUND(S) are not available.
HIGH or LOW VALUE(S) are not available.
No alternative object computers.
File Description
8
10
BLOCK CONTAINS
Label formats
11
12
SEQUEN CED ON
RASHED
No range of block sizes can be given.
Labels must be standard, omitted, or completely
programmed.
No key fields can be given for sequencing.
Hash totals cannot be created.
,/-----
Record Description
13
14
15
16
17
Table-length
Item-length
BITS option
RANGE IS
RENAMES
18
19
21
SIGN IS
SIZE clause
Label handling
Lengths of tables and arrays must not vary.
Variable-length items cannot be specified.
Items cannot be specified in binary.
Value range of items cannot be shown.
Alternative groupings of elementary items cannot be specified.
No separate signs allowed.
Variable-length items cannot be specified.
Only standard labels (or none) may be used.
Verbs
23
26
DEFINE
USE
The user cannot define new verbs.
No non-standard auxiliary I/o error-handling or
label-handling routines can be inserted.
Environment Division
40
42
SOURCE-COMPUTER
SPECIAL-NAMES
43
FILE-CONTROL
44
45
PRIORITY IS
I-O-CONTROL
46
I-O-CONTROL
No computer description can be given.
The status conditions of hardware devices cannot
be given special names by the program.
File naming and description of desired control
method cannot be taken from the library.
Priorities cannot pe given.
Input-output control cannot be taken from the
library .
A rerun facility is available, but the full range
is not implemented.
/
2/66
fA
AUERBACH
'"
785:162.100
A
STAHDARD
EDP
AUERBACH
UNIVAC 1108
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE
FORTRAN V
REPORTS
~
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: FORTRAN V
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: . • • . • . . . . . UNIVAC 1108 FaRTRAN V.
.12
.origin: .•.•.•.•..• Computer Sciences
--Corporation.
. 13
Reference: .••.•... UNIVAC 1108 FORTRAN V
Programmer's Reference
Manual, Publication
UP-4060.
Description
• 14
The UNIVAC 1108 FaRTRAN V language is an extension of the 1107 FaRTRAN IV language developed
by Computer Sciences Corporation. The 1108
FaRTRAN V language contains all the facilities of
1107 FaRTRAN IV (see Section 784:162) and of
ffiM 7090/7094 FaRTRAN IV (see Section 408:162);
this means that any legitimate source program
written in UNIVAC 1107 or IBM 7090/7094
FaRTRAN IV can be compiled by the 1108 FaRTRAN
V compiler. UNIVAC's FaRTRAN V also contains
all provisions of the FaR TRAN language as proposed by the X. 3. 4. 3 FaRTRAN Group of the
American standards Association and as published
in the Communications of the ACM, .october 1964.
The extensions of 1108 FaRTRAN V relative to
ffiM 7090/7094 FaRTRAN IV are listed in Paragraph .143; a full description of the IBM 7090/7094
FaRTRAN IV language can be found in Section
408:162. These extensions significantly increase
the power and flexibility of the FaRTRAN language,
particularly in the areas of subscripting, mixedmode arithmetic, and debugging.
As in 1107 FaRTRAN, a variable may have up to
seven subscripts, meaning that seven-dimensional
arrays can be handled; 7090/7094 FaRTRAN IV
is limited to three dimensions. Furthermore,
subscript expressions may have more complex
forms in the 1108 version, though they are still
limited to integer constants and variables. Use
of the DEFINE statement permits subscripted
subscripts to any level; this capability is not
usually found in FaRTRAN.
The possibilities for mixed-mode arithmetic, both
among the operands of an arithmetic expression and
between the left and right sides of an arithmetic
statement, are much broader in 1108 FaRTRAN.
Among the four possible types of arithmetic operands - integer, real, double-precision, and complex - only double-precision and complex values
may not be freely combined.
Input and output of data for testing purposes are
facilitated by the NAME LIST statement, which assigns a name to a list of variables. The name of
this list can be used in an input or output statement
in place of a FORTRAN specification; standard
formats are used for output. The input data need
not be in a fixed format or order; the variables'
names and their values are both included in the input. The input-output statements inserted only for
testing purposes can be preceded by a parameterized
DELETE statement. The changing of a single
statement, the PARAMETER statement, and
recompiling will then eliminate these input-output
statements from the compiled program, while
enabling them to be kept in the source program
for possible future testing .
The LIFT translator can be used to translate
existing FaR TRAN II programs into equivalent
1107 FaRTRAN IV source coding, which can then
be compiled by the 1108 FaRTRAN V compiler .
An extensive array of FaRTRAN subroutines
under the name of BEEF has been developed by
Westinghouse Electric Corporation to expand the
business data-handling capabilities of previous
UNIV AC FaRTRAN languages. These subroutines
are available to the 1108 FaRTRAN V programmer.
A summary of the facilities offered by the BEEF
subroutines can be found in the Problem .oriented
Facilities Section, Paragraph 785:151. 17.
Compilers
Two compilers are being developed for 1108
FaRTRAN V . .one, the "batch" compiler, is
similar to the 1107 FaRTRAN compiler; UNIVAC
states that it will feature multiphase compilation
at high compiling speeds and will produce highly
efficient coding. The second, the "convel'sational"
compiler, is intended for use by remote users
submitting programs from remote data communications terminals; it will feature statement-bystatement execution, if desired, and extensive
diagnostic s.
The "batch" compiler operates under control of
the Executive System and can be used on any valid
1108 configuration; see Section 785:031, System
Configuration. Magnetic tape units are not required and are of no advantage in compilation.
Documentation produced by the batch compiler
includes a storage allocation map and a listing of
the object program instructions in both symbolic
and octal form, with corresponding source statements and diagnostic messages interspersed.
UNIVAC expects the average compilation speed
to be significantly faster than that of the highlyrespected 1107 FaRTRAN compiler; an average
speed of 4,000 to 6,000 source statements per
minute has been demonstrated by UNIVAC in tests.
UNIVAC expects object program efficiencies to
be, in general, "better than the average programmer can write in an assembly language,"
because of the optimizing features of the compiler.
As in the 1107, the batch compiler expects input
and output data to be stored on the drum during
execution of a program. The card-to-drum and
drum-to-printer "symbionts" (see Executive,
Section 785: 191) handle the required data transcriptions. ather input and output devices can be
utilized if the programmer desires. Source program input to the batch compiler can be from any
1108 peripheral device, including remote data
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/66
UNIVAC 1108
785: 162. 140
. 14
Description (Contd.)
(1)
communications terminals. Object code output
and listings can also be to any 1108 peripheral
device.
(2)
:::M1±M2±M3' . . ±Mi,
where each M may be an integer constant, an
integer variable, or an expression of the form
The batch compiler is not re-entrant, so a separate "copy" of the compiler program must be
loaded into core storage for each FORTRAN compilation in the current mix.
n * K1 * K2 * . • . ~,
in which n is an integer constant and each K
is an integer variable. Subscripts in IBM
7090/7094 FORTRAN IV are limited to the
form n*k + n', where nand n' are unsigned
integer constants and k is an integer variable.
Therefore, the expression I + 2*J*K - 4 is a
valid subscript in 1108 FORTRAN but not in
7090/7094 FORTRAN.
The "conversational" compiler will accept input
source statements from a local or remote data
communications terminal and produce generated
object code, results of object-program execution,
diagnostic comments, or combinations of these,
at the option of the remote operator. Operations
with the conversational compiler are performed
in the demand mode of processing (see Paragraph
785:191.12). The remote programmer/operator
can call for functions or subroutines from the
batch compiler. The conversational compiler is
written in re-entrant coding; i. e., the compiler
program is never modified during execution, so
all remote conversational FORTRAN activity can
utilize the same physical copy of the compiler
program. Separate source code, object code,
and data areas are maintained for each program.
(3)
The PARAMETER statement assigns specified
integer values or integer variables to specified variables at compile time; e. g., P ARAMETER I = 2 causes the integer 2 to replace
I wherever it occurs in the source program.
This facilitates the assignment of different
values to frequently-referenced parameters
in different compilations of the same program.
The conversational compiler will contain extensive
diagnostic facilities including traces and snapshots.
Typical applications of the conversational compiler
will be to use the 1108 as a fast, powerful remote
"calculator" or to prepare and debug programs
later to be submitted to the batch compiler.
Because of the interpretive, statement-bystatement operational mode of the conversational
compiler, its object code efficiency will be
significantly lower than that of the batch compiler.
(4)
Arithmetic operations (+, -, *, /) can be performed more freely upon operands of different
types. Specifically, the following types of
arithmetic operand pairs are permitted in
1108 FORTRAN but not in 7090/7094
FORTRAN IV:
The FORTRAN language initially acceptable by
the conversational compiler will be a proper subset of the 1108 FORTRAN V language as described
in this section. The primary limitations will be:
no complex or logical arithmetic, no magnetic
tape input-output, no provision for binary (oddparity) files, and input-output via remote terminals
only. UNIVAC states that the conversational
FOR TRAN language will eventually be expanded
to include all of 1108 FORTRAN V.
(5)
REAL-INTEGER
COMPLEX-INTEGER
DOUBLE PRECISION-INTEGER
.141 Availability
(6)
Language: •.••...•. March 1966.
Compilers "Batch" compiler: •• second quarter, 1966.
"Conversational"
compiler: .•.•••. third quarter, 1966.
.142 Restrictions Relative to IBM 7090/7094
FORTRAN IV (See Section 408:162)
Any valid program capable of being compiled on
a 7090/7094 can be compiled on an 1108 with
few, if any, changes or restrictions.
• 143 Extensions Relative to IBM 7090/7094 FORTRAN
IV (See Section 408:162)
Note that items (1) through (7) apply to UNIVAC
1107 FORTRAN as well; items (8) through (15)
are currently unique to 1108 FORTRAN V.
UNIVAC states that these features will eventually
be incorporated into 1107 FORTRAN, with the
exception of automatic type assignment (item 15).
2/66
A variable may have up to seven subscripts,
versus a maximum of three subscripts in
IBM 7090/7094 FORTRAN IV.
Subscripts must have the general form
fA
AUERBACH
'"
In arithmetic statements, the following combinations of expressions (on the right side
of the equal sign) and variables (on the left
side) can be equated in 1108 FORTRAN, but
not in 7090/7094 FORTRAN IV:
Variable on left
Expression on right
INTEGER
REAL
COMPLEX
COMPLEX
COMPLEX
COMPLEX
INTEGER
REAL
The optional ABNORMAL statement permits
increased optimization of object programs.
Where common subexpressions occur within
a statement, it is obviously desirable to
evaluate each subexpression only once.
Where the common subexpressions contain
function references, however, there is a
possibility that the function will produce
different results upon successive references
with the same arguments (e. g., where the
function contains input statements or local
variables whose values are not initialized
each time the function is referenced) .
UNIVAC 1108 FORTRAN permits all functions
that can produce different results from identical sets of arguments to be deSignated
ABNORMAL. All common subexpressions
except those that reference. ABNORMAL
functions are evaluated only once. When the
ABNORMAL statement does not appear at all
in a program, all function references are
(Contd.)
785:162.143
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: FORTRAN V
. 143 Extensions Relative to IBM 7090/7094 FORTRAN
IV (Contd.)
considered ABNORMAL and re-evaluated at
each occurrence, as in most other FORTRAN
systems.
(7)
The following standard library functions are
included in 1108 FORTRAN but not in 7090/
7094 FORTRAN IV:
Tangent (REAL, DOUBLE PRECISION,
and COMPLEX)
Arcsine (REAL and DOUBLE PRECISION)
Arccosine (REAL and DOUBLE
PRECISION)
Hyperbolic Sine (REAL, DOUBLE PRECISION, and COMPLEX)
Hyperbolic Cosine (REAL, DOUBLE
PRECISION, and COMPLEX)
Hyperbolic Tangent (DOUBLE PRECISION
and COMPLEX; not in 1107 FORTRAN)
Cube Root (REAL, DOUBLE PRECISION,
and COMPLEX)
(8)
(9)
The NAME LIST statement assigns a name
to a list of variables. The NAMELIST name
can then be used in place of a FORMAT
specification in a READ or WRITE statement.
A standard format is used for all information
output in this fashion. The input data need
not be in any fixed format or order; the variables' names and thElir values are both included in the input.
The ENTRY statement allows the programmer
to assign additional entry points to a function
or subroutine. The order, type, or number
of arguments for an entry point defined in
this manner need not be the same as for the
function or subroutine definition or other
entry points.
(10) Normally, variables having names beginning
with the letters I through N are automatically
assigned the type INTEGER. other variables
not appearing in an explicit Type statement,
such as DOUBLE PRECISION or COMP LEX,
are assigned the type REAL. The IMPLICIT
statement allows the programmer to specify
types implicitly by the first letter of a variable
name. For example, if the statement
IMPLICIT DOUBLE PRECISION (A, B)
COMPLEX (E)
were included in a program, all subsequent
variables having names beginning with the
letter A or B would automatically be typed
as DOUBLE PRECISION. Similarly, all subsequent variables having names beginning with
the letter E would be typed COMPLEX. An
IMPLICIT statement can be used to redefine
the letter designation at any point in a pro-gram. The IMPLICIT statement overrides
the beginning letter conventions of INTEGER
and REAL. The type statements, such as
REAL, COMPLEX or LOGICAL, however,
override any assignment by an IMPLICIT
statement.
(11) The INCLUDE statement causes a predefined
list of statements to be included in the program. A typical use of this statement would
be to repeat a long list of DIMENSION,
COMMON, EQUIVALENCE, and TYPE statements in a subroutine by the use of a single
INCLUDE statement.
(12) The DELETE statement directs the compiler
to ignore all subsequent statements through a
specified statement number. A second version
of the DELETE statement makes the statement
conditional upon an INTEGER variable or a
PARAMETER variable (see item 2) of the
value "0" or "1." Thus, DELETE statements
in conjunction with a PARAMETER statement
can be conveniently used to suppress object
code generation for diagnostic statements
without removing the diagnostic statements
from the source program.
(13) The EDIT statement allows the programmer
to halt source code or object code listings
during compilations. Such listings are resumed when an EDIT START statement is
encountered.
(14) Any peripheral device can be designated as
an input or output unit in a READ or WRITE
statement. In the input-output statement,
the unit is identified by number. Actual
peripheral assignments are made at program
load time from a standard table or by control
card specifications.
(15) In IBM 7090/7094 FORTRAN, different function names are required depending on the
type of the argument. In 1108 FORTRAN V,
a generic name can be used for the function,
and the correct coding will automatically be
generated for the argument presented. For
example, the statement
VAR + COS (ABC)
would cause the coding for DCOS (ABC) to
be generated if the argument were of type
DOUBLE PRECISION, or for CCOS (ABC)
if the argument were of type COMPLEX,
etc.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/66
- 1.
785: 163. 100
"'NDIID
/AEDP
UNIVAC 1108
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE
ALGOL
-
AUERBAC~
~
RUGRIS
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: ALGOL
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: . . . . . . . . . . UNIVAC 1108 ALGOL.
. 12
Origin: . . . . . . . . . . . Evergreen Corporation.
.13
Reference: . . . . . . . . UNIVAC 1108 System
Description, Publication
UP-4046.
.14
Description
ALGOL is a computation-oriented programming
language designed primarily for scientific and
engineering applications. UNIVAC 1108 ALGOL
conforms to the specifications arrived at jointly by
the ACM Committee on Programming Languages
and the GAMM Committee on Programming, as
published in the Communications of the ACM, May
and July, 1960. UNIVAC 1108 ALGOL extends the
basic ALGOL 60 language to make use of the 1108's
powerful input-output capabilities and incorporates
the capability for name strings. Certain machinedependent extensions have been made to efficiently
employ the hardware capabilities of the 1108 .
Details of these language extensions, and of the
ALGOL compiler for the 1108, have not been released to date. UNIVAC states that 1108 ALGOL
will be essentially the same as 1107 ALGOL.
A full description of the ALGOL 60 language, as
implemented for the Burroughs B 5500, can be
found in Report Section 203:161.
.141 Availability
Because of the limited interest in ALGOL in the
United States, UNIVAC has not expedited the
preparation of documentation on ALGOL for the
1108. UNIVAC states, however, that both the
language definition and the ALGOL compiler itself
will be made available to interested users.
/
2/66
fA
AUERBACH
<
..••••••••.
••.•.•••••.
••••••.•.•.
•..••.••••.
· . . •. ••
arithmetic sum.
arithmetic difference.
arithmetic product.
arithmetic quotient.
covered quotient: allb
means (a + b - 1)/b.
• .••••• positive exponent: a*+b
means a* lOb.
• •••.•• negative exponent: a*-b
means a*10- b •
•..•.•••••• shift exponent: a* Ib means
a*2 b (specifies a binary
shift).
-•••.••••..• logical sum (OR).
.•.•...•••. logical difference (exclusive OR).
• . . • . . • . . . • logical product (AND).
• • • • . . . • . • • a = b is 1 if true, 0 if false.
•••••.••... a > b is 1 if true, 0 if false.
•••••.•.••• a < b is 1 if true, 0 if false.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/66
/
785: 191. 100
A
~TAMDUD
EDP
AUERBACH
UNIVAC 1108
OPERA TING ENVIRONMENT
EXECUTIVE SYSTEM
REPORTS
~
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: EXECUTIVE SYSTEM
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: . . • • . • . . . . UNIVAC 1108 Executive
System.
. 12
Description
. 122 Job Scheduling and Multiprogramming
.121 Major Functions
The 1108 Executive System is a comprehensive
group of routines designed to control all activities
of an 1108 computer system, including job scheduling, hardware allocation, I/O control, and run
supervision in both a multiprogramming and a
multiprocessing environment. The Executive System is designed to recognize three types. or levels
of processing:
• Real-time processing,
•
Demand processing, and
• Batch processing.
Real-time processing is characterized by the need
for a computer response to an external event
quickly enough to achieve a desired goal. Realtime processing is normally, but not exclusively,
associated with data communications or process
control applications where delay in obtaining
computer time could result in lost data or process
malfunctions. Demand processing is typified by
the need for "conversation" between the computer
and the user; i. e. , the user will specify the execution of certain tasks dependent on the results of
previously-initiated tasks. Batch processing is
the normal execution of independent tasks (programs) or groups of tasks that are not highly timedependent.
The principal orientation of the Executive System
is toward maximizing the throughput of batch operations while providing facilities for handling useful
amounts of real-time and demand processing. Input and output for the batch operations can take
place either at the computer site or remotely, via
data communications links. The type of processing to be performed is specified in the control
statements initiating a run, or perhaps within a
task of a run (i. e. , the type of processing can vary
for each task within a run, and can vary between
real-time and batch processing within the same
task).
I.
~.
I
\"
more, depending on the number of different types
of peripheral devices included in the configuration
and the inclusion of routines to control real-time
and demand processing .
The design of the Executive System is highly modular and allows many parameters to be specified
by the installation. Sections of the Executive can
be replaced by user-coded routines if desired.
The Executive System can be utilized on any 1108
configuration incorporating at least 786,000 words
of FH-432 Magnetic Drum storage. The Executive
System contains provisions for handling any 1108
configuration that includes up to three Central
Processors and two I/O Controllers. The minimum resident core storage requirement is 10,000
words. For certain installations the residency
requirements may be as high as 16 ;000 words or
In a multiprogramming environment, there are
two types of scheduling: (1) allocation or reservation of facilities such as core storage, mass storage, and I/O equipment; and (2) allocation of processing time to each program in the current mix.
Three modules of the Executive System are concerned with scheduling: the Coarse Scheduler, the
DynamiC Allocator, and the Dispatcher.
The Coarse Scheduler interprets information from
control statements taken from the "control stream",
which may be entered from a card reader or other
system component. The control information is used
to queue jobs according to priorities. Job queues
are normally held on the magnetic drum storage
reserved for the Executive System. Jobs are
queued on the basis of the following priority sequence:
• Real-time jobs - Multiple real-time jobs are
queued within the real-time group on the basis
of job priorities assigned by the programmer
or operator.
• Demand jobs - Multiple demand jobs are queued
within the demand group in the order of arrival
to the computer.
•
Batch'· jobs - Multiple batch jobs are queued
within the batch group on the basis of job priorities· assigned by the programmer or operator.
Typically, a job or run consists of a group of tasks
(such as a FORTRAN compilation, execution of a
previously-compiled program, etc.) that are performed serially. The Coarse Scheduler also maintains a second queue of runs in which a task has
terminated and additional control card interpretation is required prior to the execution of the next
task or the termination of a run (perhaps including
a memory dump). The second queue is also maintained in the order of program priority.
The Dynamic Allocator accepts the highest-priority
tasks from the queues maintained by the Coarse
Scheduler and allocates the core storage, mass
storage, and peripheral devices required to execute
each task.
The Dispatcher controls switching among the programs resident in core storage on the basis of
switch lists prepared by the Dynamic Allocator.
The basic order of execution is listed below, in
descending order:
., Interrupt queuing,
• Programs with real-time status,
• Programs with demand status,
• Programs with batch status, and
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc,
2/66
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
785: 191. 122
of Processor time that will be devoted to batch
processing whenever there are more requests for
batch and demand processing than the computer
can satisfy. Programs having demand status can
utilize only the remainder of the Processor time,
even if infrequently-referenced demand programs
must be moved to mass storage areas between
calls for them. Demand programs can utilize
more than the specified amount of time if there
are insufficient batch activities to fully use the
time allocated to batch processing. This arrangement is designed to prevent demand programs
from monopolizing the computer at the expense of
batch programs; it allows the installation management to govern the processing ratio between batch
and demand activities.
• 122 Job Scheduling and Multiprogramming (Contd.)
• Other Executive functions, such as advance
scheduling, program termination, logging,
and accounting.
The order of execution of multiple real-time programs is based on the relative priorities of the
programs. Each real-time program maintains
control until it can do no further processing or
until it is interrupted by a higher-priority re.altime program. Typically, control is relinquished
when the real-time program either completes its
current task or has to wait for the completion of
an input or output operation. Once in core storage, a real-time program is not moved until
terminated.
Processing time is allocated to demand programs
sequentially, based on the demand switch list prepared by the DYnamic Allocator. A demand program maintains control for a predetermined length
of time; then cantrol is given either to a higherpriority activity (which may be another demand
program) or to the next demand program in the
list. Initially, all demand programs are given
the same amount of execution time and are executed with the same frequency. The Dynamic
Allocator monitors the progress of each demand
program and alters the demand switch list on the
basis of the frequency of interaction between the
computer system and the remote user. If no user
action occurs after one burst of execution, the
amount of time ("time-slice") per execution phase
is increased for that program and its position in
the switch list is depressed; the likelihood is that
its frequency will be decreased. Thus, the Executive System attempts to optimize the usage of the
computer by remote users in the demand mode.
Batch programs are executed in the order of the
batch list prepared by the Dynamic Allocator.
When a batch program is first brought into the
mix, it is placed at the bottom of the list. Information about the estimated Central Processor
time required and the deadline for completion of
the· program is contained in the control statements
which initiate a run. Standard installation-set
parameters are used if no other values are specified by the programmer. The time-required and
deadline parameters are used by the Dynamic
Allocator, along with the amount of Processor
time already used, to reorder the batch list periodically. Thus, as the deadline for completion of
a particular program approaches, its priority, or
place in the list, is elevated, and more Processor
time is allocated to it for execution. Once a batch
program gains control, it remains in control until
it can progress no further (typically because it is
waiting for the completion of an input or output
operation) or until an acitivity of higher priority
can proceed.
Two additional control routines are used to maintain control of storage and peripheral facilities.
The Facilities Inventory routine maintains a complete listing of all systems facilities, including
input-output channels, peripheral devices, mass
storage and core storage, along with an indication
of those facilities in use and those available for
assignment. The Storage Contents Control routine
maintains a map of the contents of core storage in
terms of the programs or routines that are currently residing in core storage, the location of
each, and the areas of core storage that are available for allocation to new programs. This routine
also initiates "roll-outs" of lower-priority programs or routines onto magnetic drum storage
when space is required for a higher-priority
routine ~ The Storage Contents Control routine
also initiates the compacting of core storage (i. e. ,
relocation of programs in core storage to maximize the amount of contiguous core storage space
available).. Compacting of storage is performed'
only when necessary to allow the scheduling of a
job.
Protection of programs from interference by other
programs is accomplished in several ways. Certain storage areas and functions are reserved for
Executive System use. Hardware features prevent
the accessing of reserved areas by a user program,
and user programs are not permitted to execute
certain instructions. such as control register modification or initiation of input-output operations.
Core storage areas occupied by user programs are
protected from unauthorized reading or writing by
other user programs by the 1108's addressing
technique. See Paragraph 785:051. 12 of the Central Processor section for a more detailed description of the hardware memory protection features.
A user program is protected from the input or output operations ofa second user program by address
limit checks carried out by the Executive System.
User files are protected from unauthorized access
by a security key associated with each file.
• 123 Multiprocessing
Programs of the real-time class are allocated
processing time and facilities up to the full capacity of the computer. This is necessary to ensure that no data will be lost and no malfunction
caused because of a delayed response by the computer.
In a multiprocessor (1108-1l) configuration operating under control of the Executive System, all
Processors are equivalent; i. e. , each Processor
can execute any required activity, including control or supervisory routines. In certain cases,
such as initiating input or output operations on a
Processor channel (as opposed to an I/o Controller
channel), the operation can be performed only by a
particular Processor. The same basic scheduling
techniques are used as outlined in Paragraph. 122.
Time and facility division between demand programs and batch programs are governed by, a parameter specified by the installation. This parameter essentially specifies the minimum proportion
2/66
A
(Contd.)
AUERBACH
'"
UNIVAC 1108: EXECUTIVE SYSTEM
• 123 Multiprocessing (Contd.)
with each Processor being assigned the highestpriority task that can proceed when that Processor
completes the previously-assigned tasks. All
interrupts are queued, and the Processor currently executing the lowest-priority task is assigned
to process each interrupt condition.
The programmer can specify individual tasks
within a program that can be performed in parallel. If more than one Processor is available at
execution time, these activities may be executed
in parallel on different Processors.
The Executive System contains provisions for
controlling a multiprocessor configuration containing a maximum of three Processors and two I/o
COlltrollers.
.124 I/O Control and File Control
Input-output operations are controlled either by a
central routine that contains individualized routines called "Device Handlers" or by speCialized
routines called "Symbionts." Device Handlers are
provided for controlling operations involving the
following peripherals:
• Uniservo lIA, lIlA, lIID, IVC, VIC, and VIlIC
Magnetic Tape Handlers;
o Magnetic tape handlers associated with an online UNIVAC 1004-Il;
• FH-432 and FH-1782 Magnetic Drum Units;
f)
I
',,-
Fastrand Storage Units; and
o Communications subsystems utilizing Communications Terminal Module Controllers.
The Device Handlers control all operations of the
respective peripheral devices, including search
operations and dual-channel operations of mag.netic tape or drum units. An "Arbitrary Device
Handler" is included to allow control of a nonstandard peripheral device.
The Symbionts are a group of control routines desighed to serve as the interfaces between magnetic
drum storage (any type), where the system expects to find programs and input data and to write
output data, and the primary unit record equipment such as card readers and printers. This is
similar to the technique used in the EXEC II operating system for the UNIVAC 1107; its purpose is
to permit main programs to proceed at drum speed
rather-than at the much lower speeds of the online card readers, card punches, printers, or
other low-speed input-output devices. Symbiontcontrolled data transcriptions are performed concurrently with the execution of a main program.
Symbionts are provided to allow transcriptions
between the drums and the following input-output
devices: on-site card readers, card punches, and
UNIVAC 1004's; and remote devices communicating with the 1108 computer system via a Communications Terminal Module Controller.
In some 1108 configurations {particularly ones
utilizing I/o controllers), redundant data paths to
the peripheral subsystems are implemented via
Multiple Processor Adapters, so a given peripheral subsystem can be addressed either through a
Processor channel or through an I/O Controller
channel. This provides backup in case of component malfunction and permits uninterrupted
785: 191. 123
operation during maintenance. Preferred paths
are assigned by the installation; the Executive
System provides the capability to switch to the
redundant paths when notified by the operator that
the preferred path is unavailable. Channel assignments for dual-channel subsystems are made by
the Executive at execution time, based on availability .
The UNIVAC 1108 Executive System's File Control
system is comprehensive and provides a great deal
of flexibility. In general, users need not be concerned with the physical location of a file; most
files are made insensitive to input-output media
characteristics, with the File Control system adjusting the interface between the device and the
file as necessary. The File Control system provides for files and records within files to be of
virtually unlimited length. It also provides security measures to ensure that files will not be destroyed or modified by unauthorized use. The File
Control system provides buffering on a block and
item basis, and either sequential access or random
access to information within a file. The capability
for random access to a file is available at all programming levels .
Provisions are included for renaming, copying,
deleting, and compacting files. After prolonged
use, with many additions and deletions to a file, a
large amount of space within the area allocated to
the file may in fact be unused. The compacting
feature allows a file to be rewritten, eliminating
the unused space and returning the excess space to
the system.
. 125 Operator Communications
Facilities are provided for operator communications
with the Executive System via a console typewriter
and a cathode-ray-tube visual display device. see
Section 785:061, Console, for a more detailed discussion of the console facilities provided.
. 126 Other Facilities
The 1108 Executive System also contains provisions
for overlay control, supervision of language translators, diagnostics, and checkpoints and restarts.
The segmentation facility, which provides overlay
control, allows a user to specify the layout of his
program in storage. Segments can be called either
by specific loading directions within the program or
automatically when referenced by another segment.
Program elements in any source language can be
named and treated as segments.
All software is oriented toward making all activities of an 1108 computer system operate under
control of the Executive System, including language
translators such as the COBOL, FORTRAN, and
ALGOL compilers and the 1108 Assembler. When
using the standard batch-mode compilers, users
at remote terminals will typically submit complete tasks, with computer/user communication
occurring at the completion of each task. Typical
tasks would be to compile, to modify, or to execute a program. In addition, a "conversational
mode" FORTRAN compiler will be available to
permit remote users to compile and execute programs in statement-by-statement fashion. (See
Paragraph 785: 162. 14 for additional informamon.)
A standard interface is maintained for all language
processors (translators), allowing additional
.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc_
2/66
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
785:191. 126
• 126 other Facilities (Contd.)
language processors to be added to the system at
a future date.
The various 1108 language translators, such as
the FORTRAN and COBOL compilers, maintain
three sequence counters when generating object
coding. Separate areas are thus designated for
data, for object coding, and for a common area.
When allocating core storage for the execution of
a program, the Executive System attempts to assign each area to a different core memory module.
The actual disposition of core storage at allocation time may not permit this, and the three program areas can be located in three, two, or even
one memory module. In addition, rearrangement
or compacting of core storage can alter the relative locations of the individual program areas.
Extensive diagnostic facilities are available to
users for debugging programs, including conditional snapshots of core storage, a memory dump,
and snapshots of specified files. other diagnostic
routines check the functioning of major system
components such as core storage, Central Processors, and control registers. These diagnostic
routines can be initiated either by the operator or
automatically~ by the Executive System itself,
when there is a lull in processing activity.
Checkpoints can be initiated by the program, by the
operator, or by the Executive System. When a
checkpoint is initiated, the following information
is written on the designated output unit: file position information, contents of all registers and
other control information, contents of the user's
core storage area or the part he designates, and
contents of mass storage files if desired. Checkpoints can be written onto a magnetic drum or a
magnetic tape unit. Restarts must be initiated by
the operator.
• 13
Availability: . . • . . . . third quarter, 1966
(Executive Control
Functions) •
. 14
• 15
.2
.21
PROGRAM LOADING
Source of Programs: .. all programs to be executed are normally maintained in random-access
storage prior to allocation and loading into core
storage.
.22
Library Subroutines: . held in random-access
storage except for the
most common I/O control
routines and certain
supervisory routines,
which reside in core
storage.
.23
Loading Sequence: ... programs are loaded sequentially into a job stack
from an external device.
.3
HARDWARE ALLOCATION
.31
Storage
.311 Sequencing of program
for movement between levels: ••••.. segmentation of a program
can be specified at load
time by control cards or
(in COBOL only) when
programming.
.312 Occupation of working storage: .••.• segments can be loaded by
a programmed call or
automatically when referenced by the program.
· 32
Input-Output Units
· 321 Initial assignment: •.• under control of the Executive System.
· 322 Alternation: ••.•... as specified by individual
programs.
.323 Reassignment: . . . . . . system can be reconfigured
by operator through control cards .
.4
RUNNING SUPERVISION
Originator: . . . . . . . . UNIVAC.
.41
.42
Simultaneous Working: see Paragraph. 124.
Multiprogramming: .. see Paragraph. 122 .
Maintainer: .••..••• UNIVAC.
.43
Multi-sequencing: .•• see Paragraph. 123 •
(Contd. )
2/66
A
AUERBACH
'"
UNIVAC 1108: EXECUTIVE SYSTEM
.44
Errors, Checks, and Action
Error
Check or Jnterlock
Action
Allocation
impossible:
I/O error, single:
Executive check
interrupt
delay processing of this program.
reread or rewrite if possible (tape or
drum); otherwise, type message and
terminate task.
type message and terminate task if
number of errors exceeds a threshold value.
I/o error,
persistent: interrupt
Loading input error:
Control Register
parity error:
,
'.
785: 191. 440
same as I/O error.
interrupt
further interrupts are inhibited and
an attempt is made to locate the
faulty register and to distinguish
between a recurring error and a
transient error. If the error is
transient, and the system is in a
non-critical state, the error is
ignored, the program is sent to a
restart routine, or an entrance is
made to an I/O error routine, depending on the register involved.
A recurring error, or a transient
error while the system is in a
critical state, causes the system to
halt, and manual instruction is necessary for restart.
Core storage parity
error:
interrupt
Power failure:
interrupt
illegal operation:
interrupt
an attempt is made to locate the faulty
location and to distinguish between
a transient and a recurring error.
If the faulty location cannot be found,
operation resumes. A transient
error in a non-critical task results
in the task being aborted and operation resumed. Any error in a critical task causes the system to halt.
A permanent fault causes the task
to be aborted and the 512-word block
to be removed from available core
storage.
control registers and instruction
counter are stored; active I/O channels are flagged.
type message, dump registers,
terminate task.
Floating-point overflow or underflow,
or divide overflow:
Out-of-bounds
address:
interrupt
set results to zero and continue.
interrupt
type message, dump registers, and
terminate task.
interrupt
type message, dump registers, and
terminate task.
Reference to forbidden area:
* The
actions described are the standard ones implemented in the Executive System.
Any or all of these can be replaced by user-coded routines; for example, the action
in every case might be a simple halt, which would decrease the space required to
hold the error routine.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/66
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
785: 191. 450
.45
Restarts
.73
. 451 Establishing restart
points: .••.•....• checkpoints can be initiated
by the program, by Executive, or by the operator.
Checkpoints can be written on mass storage or
magnetic tape. If on tape,
checkpoints can include
mass storage files. Superseded che ckpoints are
automatically deleted if
written on mass storage"
.452 Restarting process: •• keyboard entry by operator
initiates automatic restart.
•5
PROGRAM DIAGNOSTICS
.51
Dynamic
.511 Tracing: .•••••..•• no direct provisions within
the Executive System.
.512 Snapshots: ••••.•.• specified by control cards
at program load time or
by control statements
within the program. Conditionals can be used to
specify when a snapshot
is to be taken. Specified
areas of core storage,
control registers, magnetic tape files, and/or
mass storage areas can
be written onto a diagnostic file for printing after
the program has terminated.
· 52
Post-Mortem: .••••• specified by operator via a
control card after program
termination. Dumps can
be from core storage
areas only.
.6
OPERATOR CONTROL
.61
Signals to Operator
.62
Operator's Decisions: • keyboard entries.
.63
Operator's Signals
.74
Errors: .••.•••••• typed messages.
.75
Running Times: ....• typed messages.
.76
Multiprogramming
Status: ..••••.•.• typed messages in response
--to keyboard inquiries. A
summary of the backlog
and a list of the programs
being restrained from allocation can be requested.
.8
PERFORMANCE
.81
System Requirements
.811 Minimum configuration: .••••••.••• any permitted 1108 configuration; see Section
785:031 •
• 812 Usable extra
facilities: .••••••• all; control cards or keyboard entries are used to
inform the Executive
whenever there is a change
in the number or type of
I/O devices available.
.813 Reserved equipment: •. approximately 12,000 words
of core storage and
786,000 words of magnetic
drum storage. Drum storage includes space for job
files and I/o buffering
areas.
.82
. 83
. 84
.611 Decision required
by operator: ..•..• typed message on console
typewriter.
.612 Action required by
operator: •••..... typed message.
.613 Reporting progress
of run: ••••.••••• typed message.
.85
.631 Inquiry: •.•••••••• keyboard entries.
· 632 Change of normal
progress: ..•••.•. a program priority change,
a delay in the scheduling
of a program, or removal
or addition of I/O equipment can be made via
keyboard entries.
.7
LOGGING
.71
Operator Signals: •... typed record of keyboard
entries.
.72
Operator Decisions: •• typed record of keyboard
entries.
2/66
Run Progress: . • . . . . typed messages •
fA.
AUERBACH
'"
System Overhead: •.•• operating portion remains
in core storage; other
portions are called in as
needed; loading time depends on drum-to-core
data transfer rate.
Program Space
Available: • • . . . . . . all, except as noted in
Paragraph. 813, above .
Program Loading
Time: •.••••.... depends on drum-to-core
-data transfer rate. (Time
to load program initially
onto drum varies with
input device. )
Program Performance: varies widely with hardware availability and with
number and types of pro'grams being run at the
same time. UNIVAC
estimates that about 50
to 100 microseconds, on
the average, will be required to switch from one
program to another.
UNIVAC also estimates
that the overall demand on
the Processors due to
Executive functions will
typically be about 5 percent, exclusive of the time
involved when swapping
demand programs between
magnetic drum and core
storage.
785: 20 1.001
A
STANDARD
EDP
AUERBACH
UNIVAC 1108
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
REPBRTS
~
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING (785:201.100)
These problems involve updating a master file from information in a detail file and producing a
printed record of each transaction. This application, one of the most common commercial data
processing jobs, is. fully described in Section 4:200.1 of the Users' Guide. Standard File Problems A, B, and C show the effects of varying recorii sizes in the master file. Standard File
Problem D increases the amount of computation performed upon each transaction. Each problem
is estimated for activity factors (ratios of number of detail records to number of master records)
of zero to unity. In all cases a uniform distribution of activity is assumed.
To realistically portray the performance of the UNIVAC 1108 computer in a multiprogramming
mode of operation, the transaction file and the report file are assumed to be on magnetic tape. The
data transcription runs necessary for card-to-tape and tape-to-printer media conversions are performed by separate programs and can be run concurrently with the main File Processing run or
with other program runs. The elapsed time and Central Processor time for the data transcription
runs are shown on a separate graph (785:201.150). These times are the same for blocked or unblocked tape files.
In computing the Central Processor times, instructions and operands were assumed to be placed in
different core storage banks where possible, to take maximum advantage of the 1108's capability
for overlapping accesses to main memory.
The master-file record format is a mixture of alphameric and binary numeric items, designed to
minimize the number of time-consuming radix conversion operations required. (Even so, much of
the Central Processor time is devoted to editing and radix conversion operations.) A moderate degree of packing led to a record length of 18 words (or 108 6-bit characters).
In the graphs presenting the performance of the UNIVAC 1108 for Standard File Problems A, B, C,
and D, the total time for the main processing run is shown for both blocked and unblocked detail
and report files. The limiting factor for Configuration VIlA is a combination of one master-file
tape and the report-file tape. Additional tape channels reduce the overall elapsed times for Configuration VIllA, while the Central Processor times remain the same as for Configuration VIIA. In
general, the controlling factor is the report-file tape at high activities and one master-file tape at
low activities.
The curve representing the Central Processor times is also shown on each graph. The difference
between the Central Processor time and the elapsed time for the main processing run indicates the
amount of Central Processor time available for concurrently performing other tasks such as data
transcriptions or other main programs. The performance of a UNIVAC 1108 system when running
multiple programs simultaneously depends upon the complement of peripheral equipment and upon
the input-output channel availability and usage, as well as upon the amount of Central Processor
time used by each program. This System Performance section contains enough information (particularly in Worksheet Data Table 1) to enable you to estimate the overall performance of a UNIVAC
1108 system for any desired mix of the standard benchmark problems.
SORTING (785:201.200)
The standard estimate for sorting 80-character records by straightforward merging on magnetic
tape was developed from the time for standard File Problem A by the method explained in Paragraph 4:200.213 of the Users' Guide. A three-way merge is used in all system configurations for
the UNIVAC 1108. The results are shown in Graph 785:201.200.
MATRIX INVERSION (785:201.3)
In matrix inversion, the object is to measure central processor speed on the straightforward
inversion of a non-symmetric, non-singular matrix. No input-output operations are involved. The
standard estimate is based on the time to perform cumulative multiplications (c = c + aibj) in
single-precision floating-point (see Paragraph 785:051. 422). Inversion times are shown 'for two
cases: instructions and data in the same core storage bank, and instructions and data in alternate
banks.
GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING (785:201.400)
The Standard Mathematical Problem A is an application in which there is one stream of input data,
a fixed computation to be performed, and one stream of output results. Two variables are introduced to demonstrate how the time for a job varies with different proportions of input, computation, and output. The factor C is used to vary the amount of computation per input record. The
factor R is used to vary the ratio of input records to output records. The procedure used for the
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/66
UNIVAC 1108
785:201.002
standard Mathematical Problem is fully described in Section 4:200.2 of the Users' Guide. Com,rutations are performed in single-precision floating-point arithmetic, which provides the minimum
B-digit precision prescribed in the Users' Guide.
Again, because multiprogramming is featured in the UNIVAC 110B, the curves show the Central
Processor time as well as total elapsed time. The performance for both Configurations VIlA and
VITIA is assessed for the multiprogramming mode of operation. Graph 7 B5: 20 1.400 shows the
time for the main processing run, in which the input and output are on magnetic tape and in which
all of the prescribed internal processing is performed (including editing and radix conversions).
The table beneath the chart shows the times for the corresponding card-to-tape (input) and tapeto-printer (output) data transcription runs. The performance curves for Configurations VIlA and
VIllA are identical for the 110B because the same magnetic tape units are employed and the additional tape channels in Configuration VIllA are of no benefit in this problem.
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 1
CONFIGURATION
ITEM
1
File lL
Char/b ock
Recordllilock
maee/block
K
~=File2
Times
msec/block
msee/record
msee/detail
msee/work
msee/report
File
F
=1.0
7.6
20.0*
7.6
20.0*
_ _ _ _ _0_____ _ - - - ' l . . . . - _
0
__O_ _ _ ,-- _ _ _ 0_ _ _ _ _ _0_ _ _ _ _ _ 0
e----
~File2
r--~-~- : - - _ _O_.l~
0
a1
~-a2
~---
0.017
for C.P.
and
dominant
column.
~--b + b
~--
a2 K
r-=::---a3 K
~~asterIn
O. GG4
T,pes
8.885
_
r---
Total
93.5
8.885
37.5
**
**
1 080
1 080
792
1440
40
40
2 101
2 749
---_1_89_ _ _
189
VIlA
Fixed/Floatilll! oint
leal
Size of record
Problem A
msec/block
".P.
8.885
-
..
76.0
8.885
'1'0",
4:200.114
20.0
..
1 - - - - - -1 - - - - - - - - -1 - - - - - - r----~ - I----WL r--~
4:200.1151
~~-
'--~
40
40
2.10
2.749
l!!m!L _ _ _
output
-
.!!!E!L.___
output
VillA
Floating Point
Floatipg Point
Uniservo Ville
Uniservo Ville
Uniseuo VIne
Uniservo VIne
80 char •
80 char.
132 char.
132 char.
~~
output
T2
7.4
7;4
7.6
7.6
~~
0.011
0.011
T
0.017
0.017
~ord
To
1.285
l,28,
msec/5 loops
TS
0.194
O,IJl4
msec/report
T7
1.454
1.454
msec penalty
output
* 10 records per block in Files 3 and 4.
** Does not include space required for resident portions of the
2/66
0.664
Tape
C P
CONFIGURATION
ITEM
Mathemat-
0.664
Tapes
C.P
4:200.1132
~-
~1lL-
Working
Unit name
0.17'
_O~
~ks 10023)
~24to48)
Standard
-----2.J~
- - r-0~ --- ~-- - ~ ..Q!Lr - ~O_ - - i--0~ 1 - - - - ~- - - ,--h2~ - 8.080
8.080
8.080
8.080
17.5 _ ~1~ r--1~
0.135
- - - - r---h-1~ - , - - ~- - - - ~3L1 - - ~
0.110
~O
-20.0-76.0- ....Q....!!lL
0.170
76.0
0.170
20.0
0.170
0.170
~---
5
_
~1.L-
~---
Problem A
----
36-bit words
~routines
Space
---~0.017
O.~
0.664
Total
File
0
_--Il.UL-
_ _0_,01l....-- - 0.071
- - - - - - - ~- _
_ _ _0_.07-'L___
o.oi~ ~
4:200.112
~lL
File 4: Reports
Standard
0.17*
0.071
I--
o
~asterOut
Unit of measure
0
_ _ _ ----2....ill _
r---~5- ~ _ _ _O~ ---~ -~,--~~ ----~
---.--!!...~
~- -
..,-=--,- . - - 7
0
C - - _ _ _O.~
~etails
4
10
C.P.
msee/block
Problem A
,non
10
REFERENCE
_ _ _ _ 17.1i
_--11....!i _
----~_ _ _ _ l.n.
r - - - ----L.L_ ----~- -~-
3
Standard
non
10
~---
File 4
Processor
Times
1.080
10
f..Ei!tl=~ I--~-
~---
Central
1 080
File 4
msee penalty
2
VIllA
(Blocked Files 3 & 4)
f - - --li.lL -
File 4
msee/switch
VillA
(File 1)
~--InputOutput
VIlA
(Blocked Files 3 & 4)
VIlA
REFERENCE
4:200.413
-
,/
standard operating system.
fA
AUERBACH
@
(Contd.)
785:201.100
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
•1
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING
• 11
standard File Problem A
• 111 Record sizes Master file: •••••••
Detail file: •••••••
Report file: ••••••.
• 112 Computation: •••••••
• 113 Timing basis: •••••.
.114 Graph: ••••••••••• see graph below.
• 115 Storage space
required* Configurations VIlA
& VITIA: •••••••• 2,101 words.
Configurations VIlA
& VIIlA (blocked
Files 3 & 4): ••••• 2,749 words.
108 characters.
1 card.
1 line.
standard •
using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.113.
*Does not include space required for resident
portions of the standard operating system.
100.0
7
4
2
10.0
7
4
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
2
1.0
-- --
7
~
4
....-'--
i"""
-<.J1\\]\.~
1/
""idt"'-I-- a::=- -- . . /
~
2
..... '" -
, ...-~
4
\
2
0.01
-
-
.-..- .--
~'-~
~
--
Cp-
0.1
7
1-
0.01
..-
",
4
2
-----
_............ -----
\TlI A_ - - - -
/---"
/
\11i1~ ",.£, ' / _ - - I""---*"
~1.0
~/
I/0
/
0.0
O. 1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
/'
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
LEGEND
- - - - - - - - - - E l a p s e d time; unblocked Files 3 & 4
- - - - - - - - E l a p s e d time; blocked Files 3 & 4
-cp- - Central Processor time (all configurations)
(Contd.)
2/66
fA
AUERBACH
'"
785: 20 1. 130
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
. 13
Standard File Problem C
.131 Record sizes Master file: ...
Detail file: . . . .
Report file: . . . .
. 132 Computation: . . . . . . . standard .
. 133 Timing basis: . • . . . . using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.13.
.134 Graph ••••••••••• see graph below.
· 216 characters.
· 1 card.
· 1 line.
100.0
7
4
2
10.0
7
4
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
2
VIlA
1.0
7
..",
4
- --
----
-
~
...
VlI1A
VIlA...=-::;;;;;;; <1111.0
a:::=t-=::aoc:=::::r:;g _ _ -=:a _ _ _ _ _ _
-
VlIlA-
2
_CP-
0.1
• .::>"
7
.4
4
2
...--
V
/
,
-'"
AC~
~
0.01
0.0
O. 1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals ·denote standard System Configurations.)
LEGEND
- - - -.........""""====-=Elapsed time; unblocked Files 3 & 4
...... - = 0 - - Elapsed time; blocked Files 3 & 4
-CP
.... - - Central Processor time (all configurations)
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/66
785: 20 I. 140
. 14
UNIVAC 1108
standard File Problem D
.142 Computation: .••.••. trebled •
. 143 Timing basis: •....• using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.13.
.144 Graph: . . . . . . • . . • . see graph below.
.141 Record sizes Master file: . • . . . . 108 characters.
Detail file: ..••••. 1 card.
Report file: . . • • • . . 1 line.
100.0
7
4
2
10.0
7
4
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
-
2
vn}\.
1.0
7
4
2
,
J'
.-
../:. _---7
-'
.J'
.-
--- ___
"-- -------.,.",..~
-~
JtII'"
~
1.0
'
VillA
_CP-
7
---
c)?-
~
4
0.01
VII}\.
~---
0.1
2
"\[\\~
/'
/
0.0
"
O. 1
./
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
LEGEND
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Elapsed time; unblocked Files 3 & 4
- - - - - - - E l a p s e d time; blocked Files 3 & 4
-CP-- Central Processor time (all configurations)
/
(Contd.)
2/66
A
AUERBACH
'"
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
.15
785: 20 1. 150
Data Transcription Runs for Standard File
Problems
On tape: . . . • . • . . one print-line image (unblocked) or ten print-line
images (blocked) .
. 153 Timing basis: . . . . . . data is transcribed directly
from cards to tape or tape
to printer; no editing is
performed other than
blocking on tape (in some
cases).
.154 Graph: . . • • . . . • . . . see graph below.
. 151 Block sizes:
Detail File On cards: . . • . . • . one card.
On tape: .•••••.. one card image (unblocked)
or ten card images
(blocked).
Report File On printer: •••... one print line.
100.0
,
7
~
4
V V
II
10.0
~
Ifill
V
Ne:"',
7
\,"'"'
~
",0
1\,.'1>'1
V
2
Time in Minutes to
Transcribe Records
II
1.0
7
/
",0,
~o
(j
V
~1.0
"
II'
4
""
IZ>
",,'1>~'
IZ>
4
0.1
"
V
L
2
2
,
~
V
/
V V
V
u"
I\,.~
",0
I
vL3
::f.
2
",0
~. ~
.01
I
100
2
4
7
1,000
2
4
7
10,000
2
4
7
100,000
Number of Records Transcribed
(Graph applies to Standard Configurations VIlA and VITIA;
lines marked "CP" denote Central Processor times.)
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/66
785: 20 1. 200
UNIVAC 1108
.2
SORTING
.21
standard Problem Estimates
.213 Timing baSis: •..••• using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.213 •
.214 Graph: .•.••••..•. see graph below •
• 211 Record size: ..•••.• 80 characters.
. 212 Key size: • • • • • • • .. 8 characters.
1,000
7
4
2
I;
I
10.0
7
j
,
4,<:;-"7
4
~~:l
7
2
Time in Minutes to
put Records into
Required Order 1. 0
~I;
41.0
II
7
~
4
7
2
1/
V
V
0.1
7
~
4
2
0.01
,
L
/
~
,/
V
100
2
4
7
1,000
2
4
7
10,000
2
4
7
100,000
Number of Records
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
(Contd.)
2/66
A
AUERBACH
'"
785:201. 300
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
•3
MATRIX INVERSION
.31
standard Problem Estimates
.312 Timing basis: •••••• using estimating procedure
outlined in Users I Guide,
4:200.312 •
• 313 Graph: ••••••••••• see graph below •
• 311 Basic parameters: ••• general, non-symmetric
matrices, using floating
point to at least 8 decimal digits.
100
7
4
2
10
7
4
iii'
ff: "I
Time in Minutes
for Complete
Inversion
f:r)
f:r)
2
J!1
\
<
@-
Controls are provided which allow the operator
to shift the paper horizontally by at least one
character in either direction and vertically by
at least one line in either direction. These adjustments can be made while the printer is
operating.
*
%
#
*
?
One printer can be connected to a Control and
Synchronizer Unit, forming a High-Speed Printer
Subsystem. Each subsystem requires 2 UNIVAC
418 input-output channels.
):(
space
Printing is on continuous, sprocket-punched stationery ranging from 4 to 22 inches in width and
up to 22 inches per sheet in length. An original
and up to 5 carbon copies of good quality can be
produced. Vertical spacing is 6 or 8 lines per
The Central Processor is delayed for 5 cycles
for each 2 words transferred. Thus, printing one
line requires 0.22 milliseconds of central processor time in the Model II Processor and 0.44
milliseconds in the Model I Processor.
TABLE I: EFFECTIVE SPEED OF 700/922 LPM PRINTER
Printed Lines per
Minute Using
64 Character Set
Printed Lines per
Minute Using
Numeric Set
1
2
3
4
5
700
638
586
542
504
922
818
735
667
611
inch)
inches)
inches)
inches)
inches)
472
338
264
217
183
563
383
291
234
196
Lines Advanced
per Line Printed
(6 lines per inch)
6
12
18
24
30
(1
(2
(3
(4
(5
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH info, inc.
2/65
790:091.100
UNIVAC 418
Input-Output
Uniservo IIA
INPUT-OUTPUT: UNISERVO IIA
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
eight subsystems could be used with a 418 if no
other peripheral equipment were required .
. Uniservo ITA Magnetic
Tape Handler.
For a more detailed description of the mechanical
characteristics of the Uniservo ITA, see Section
775:091 of the UNIVAC 490 Computer System
Report.
Description
The Uniservo ITA provides magnetic tape inputoutput for the UNIVAC 418 at substantially lower
speed and cost than the newer Uniservo ITIA, IITC,
and IVC tape handlers described in the following
report sections. (The IBM-compatible Uniservo
VIC Tape Handlers are slightly less expensive than
the ITA's.) A Magnetic Tape Subsystem consists of
2 to 12 Uniservo IIA Tape Handlers connected to a
Uniservo ITA Control and Synchronizer Unit and a
Power Supply. Each subsystem occupies two 418
input-output channels, and only one tape handler
per subsystem can read or write at a time. A
panel of dial switches is used to change the logical
addresses assigned to the individual tape handlers.
Data can be recorded on either plastic-base or
metallic tape at a packing density of 125 or 250
rows per inch. (Data recorded by the Unityper
keyboard-to-magnetic-tape transcriber at 50 rows
per inch can be read, but the Uniservo ITA cannot
record at this density.) Tape velocity is 100
inches per second, providing a peak data transfer
rate of 12,500 or 25,000 characters per second,
depending upon the recording density selected.
Each tape row contains six data bits, one clock
bit, and one parity bit, and can represent one
alphameric character. Three tape rows are used
to represent each 18-bit 418 word. Block length
is variable. Tape width and densities are compatible with those of the Uniservo II and IIA
tape handlers used in the UNIVAC IT, III, 1107,
490, and Solid-State 80/90 systems. There
is no tape compatibility with the Uniservo IlIA,
IlIC, IVC, or VIC tape handlers.
.6
PERFORMANCE
.62
Speeds
.621 Nominal or peak speed
At 250 rows/inch: . . . 25,000 char/sec.
At 125 rows/inch: . . . 12,500 char/sec.
.622 Important parameters Recording density: .. 120 or 250 rows/inch.
Tape speed: ••.... 100 inches/sec.
Rewind speed: . . . . . 100 inches/sec.
Interblock gap:.. . . 1. 05 inches.
End-of-file gap: . . . . 4.50 inches.
Start time: . . . . . • . 5 msec.
Stop time: . . . . . . . . 5 msec.
.623 Overhead, per block Start/stop mode: .. 25.5 msec.
Continuous mode: .. 10.5 msec.
.624 Effective speeds 250 Rows/Inch
Start/stop mode: .25, OOON/ (N + 638) char/sec.
Continuous mode: . 25, OOON/ (N + 262) char/sec.
125 Rows/Inch
Start/stop mode: . 12, 500N/ (N + 319)
char/sec.
Continuous mode: . 12, 500N/ (N + 131)
char/sec. where N
is the number of characters (i. e., tape rows)
per block. (See graph. )
Note: The start/stop mode is used unless the
next tape function is initiated within 4
msec after the last character of each
block is read or written.
The UNIVAC 418 can have a maximum of 16 inputoutput channels. Since each Uniservo ITA subsystem requires two input-output channels, up to
63
Demands on System
Component
Central
Processor,
Model I:
Central
Processor,
Model IT:
Densit
rows inch
Msec per
2 words
Percentage of data
transfer time
250
125
0.020
0.020
8.0
4.0
250
125
0.010
0.010
4.0
2.0
'-'-.-
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/65
790:091. 900
UNIVAC 418
EFFECTIVE SPEED: UNISERVO ITA
1,000,000
7
4
2
100,000
7
4
Effective Speed,
rows/second
2
~
IL
...,
7
4
A....
~
2
1,000
L
,
7
4
V
10,000
~
~
......--B
C
l.".;
,
D
i.ooo"
/
/'
//
~
p"C
i"'"
...
~ ~ 1''-
.---A ;;,......-
~~
V
~"
~D
B
I
1/
2
100
2
4
2
7
10
4
7
100
2
1,000
Rows Per Block
LEGEND
Curve
Curve
Curve
Curve
2/65
A
B
C
D
-
250
250
125
125
rows/inch,
rows/inch,
rows/inch,
rows/inch,
continuous mode
start/stop mode
continuous mode
start/stop mode
4
7
10,000
790:092.100
UNIVAC 418
Input-Output
Uniservo lilA
INPUT-OUTPUT: UNISERVO lilA
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: ..
.12
Description
.. Uniservo IlIA Magnetic
Tape Handler.
The Uniservo IlIA provides high-speed magnetic
tape input-output for the UNIVAC 41S system.
From 2 to 16 Uniservo IlIA tape handlers can be
connected to a Uniservo IlIA Control and Synchronizer Unit and a Uniservo Power Supply, forming a
Magnetic Tape Subsystem. Each subsystem occupies two input-output channels, but only one tape
handler per subsystem can read or write at a time.
The UNIVAC 41S can have a maximum of 16 inputoutput channels. Since each Uniservo IlIA subsystem requires two input-output channels, up to eight
subsystems could be used with a 41S if no other
peripheral equipment were required.
Data is recorded by the "pulse phase" method at a
density of 1,000 rows per inch. Nine tracks are
recorded across the tape, one of which is always
used as a parity traclc In the standard recording
format, five tape rows are used to represent two
lS-bit 41S words; the first four rows contain eight
data bits each, and the last row of each five-row
group contains only four data bits. An optional
format, selected through plugboard switching, uses
three tape rows per word, with only six data bits
(i. e. one alphameric character) per row. Tape
velocity is 100 inches per second, providing the
follOWing peak data transfer rates:
Standard Format
(5 rows per
2 words)
Rows per second:
41S words per
second:
6- bit characters
per second:
Optional Format
(3 rows per
word)
100,000
100,000
40,000
33,333
120,000
100,000
For a more detailed description of the mechanical
characteristics of the Uniservo IlIA, see Section
775:092 of the UNIVAC 490 Computer System Report.
.6
PERFORMANCE
. 62
Speeds
.621 Nominal or peak speeds Standard format
(5 tape rows per
2 words): . . . . . . . 40,000 words/sec or 120,000
alphameric characters/
sec.
Optional format
(3 tape rows per
word): . . . . . . . . 33,333 words/sec or
100,000 alphameric
characters/ sec.
.622 Important parameters Recording density: .. 1,000 rows/inch.
Tape speed: . . . . . . . 100 inches/sec.
Rewind speed: .. .. 300 inches/sec.
Interblock gap:.
.0.75 inch.
Start time: . . . . . . . 3 msec.
Stop time: . . . . . . . . 3 msec.
.623 Overhead per block Start/stop mode:. . 14. S msec.
Continuous mode:. . S.2 msec.
.624 Effective speeds Start/stop mode:. . 100, OOON/(N + 14S0) rows/
sec.
Continuous mode: . . . 100, OOON/(N + S20) rows/
sec. where N is number
of rows per block. (See
graph.)
.63
Demands on System
Component
Central
Processor,
Model I:
Central
Processor,
Model II:
Format
Msec per
2 words
Percentage of
data transfer
time
standard
optional
0.020
0.020
40.0
33.3
standard
optional
0.010
0.010
20.0
16.7
(
"© '965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/65
790:092.900
UNIVAC 418
EFFECTIVE SPEED: UNISERVO IlIA
1,000,000
7
4
2
100,000
-""" -"""
7
~
~
4
V"
/
Effective Speed,
rows/second
~io""
,/
2
Continuous Mode
10,000
~~
~
Start/Stop Mode
f
7
II'"
/
4
2
1,000
7
)~
/
L
~
V/ V
"
V
,
4
2
100
10
2
4
7
100
2
4
7
2
1,000
Tape Rows per Block
Note: 3 tape rows per 3-character 418 word or 5 tape rows
per two 418 words, depending upon recording format.
2/65
4
7
10,000
790:093.100
UNIVAC 418
Input-Output
Uniservo IIIC ond IVC
INPUT-OUTPUT: UNISERVO IIIC AND IVC
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity:
. 12
Description
The Uniservo ITIC and IVC subsystems transfer
data in units of 18 bits, regardless of whether
the read/read-read/write overlap capability is
used. An optional feature permits the subsystem
to transfer data in units of 36 bits by using two
input-output channels. This results in a reduction
of central processor delay time. Another optional
feature for the Uniservo mc and IVC is automatic
code translation.
. . . . . . . . . Uniservo mc and IVC
Magnetic Tape Handlers.
The Uniservo mc and IVC provide UNIVAC 418
systems with magnetic tape input-output in a format compatible with all tape units currently produced by IBM except the Model 7340 Hypertape
Drive and the new 2400 Series units. From 2 to 12
Uniservo mc or IVC Tape Handlers can be connected to a Tape Adapter Cabinet, which is in
turn connected to a Uniservo IITC or IVC Control
and Synchronizer Unit and a Power Supply to comprise a Compatible Tape Subsystem.
Each subsystem ordinarily occupies one 418 inputoutput channel (there are up to 16 input-output
channels available), and only one tape handler per
subsystem can be reading or writing at any time.
Alternatively, a dual-control synchronizer that
requires two input-output channels can be used
to control each Magnetic Tape Subsystem. In this
case, simultaneous read/read or read/write (but
not write/write) operations involving any two tape
handlers in a subsystem can occur. The logical
address assigned to each tape handler can be
changed only by means of a plugboard on the Tape
Adapter Cabinet.
Tape speed is 112.5 inches per second. Recording
density maybe either 200 or 556 rows per inch,
providing a peak data transfer rate of 22,500
or 62,500 characters per second. A third recording density of 800 rows per inch is available
in the IVC Tape Handler only, providing a transfer rate of 90,000 characters per second. Each
tape row consists of six data bits and one parity
bit, and can represent one alphameric character
or one-third of a UNIVAC 418-word. As in IBM
700 and 7000 Series scientific systems, reading
and writing can be performed in either the binary
mode (with odd parity) or the BCD mode (with
even parity). Block length is variable from one
word to the capacity of core storage.
©
For a more detailed description of the mechanical
characteristics of the Uniservo mc and IVC Tape
Handlers, see Section 775:093 of the UNIVAC 490
Computer System Report.
.6
PERFORMANCE
.62
Speeds
.621 Nominal or peak speed
At 200 rows/inch: .. 22,500 char/sec.
At 556 rows/inch: .. 62,500 char/sec.
At 800 rows/inch: .. 90,000 char/sec.
. 622 Important parameters Recording density: . 200, 556, or 800 rows/inch.
Tape speed: . . . . . 112.5 inches/sec.
Rewind speed: . . . . 360 inches/sec.
Interblock gap: ... 0.75 inch.
End-of-file gap: ... 3.7 inches.
Start time Read: . . . . . . . . 6.3 msec.
Write: . . . . . . . . 4.1 msec.
Stop time Read: . . . . . . . . 9.0 msec.
Write: . . . . . . . . 9. 0 msec .
. 623 Overhead (continuous mode), per block
Reading: . . . . . . . 14.2 msec.
Writing: . . . . . . . 14.2 msec.
.624 Effective speeds
200 rows/inch: ... 22, 500N/ (N + 319) chari
sec.
556 rows/inch: ... 62, 500N/ (N + 887) chari
sec.
800 rows/inch: . . . . 90, OOON/ (N + 1,278) chari
sec. where N is number
of characters (i. e., tape
rows) per block. (See
graph. )
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/65
UNIVAC 418
790:093.630
.63
Demands on Sl':stem
Density,
rows/inch
Type of
interface
ComEonent
Central Processor,
Model I:
18 bits
36 bits
(optional)
Central Processor,
Model II:
18 bits
36 bits
(optional)
Percentage of data
transfer time
msec per
word
200
556
800
200
556
800
0.016
0.016
0.016
0.010
0.010
0.010
12.2
33.4
48.4
7.6
20.8
30.4
200
556
800
200
556
800
0.008
0.008
0.008
0.005
0.005
0.005
6.1
16.7
24.2
3.8
10.4
15.2
EFFECTIVE SPEED: UNISERVO
mc
& IVC
100,000
7
<:'\'1-
~~
~t;,(j ?
4
V"'"
~
A ~
2
~
~
,~
",.
...
-
200 lCPl
""'"
./
10,000
/
7
r/
Effective Speed,
rows/second
~
.wr
4
~,
2
1,000
7
,
~
V
I
4
2
100
10
2
4
7
100
2
4
7
1,000
2
Rows Per Block
Note: Effective speeds are based upon
continuous operation, with no stops
between blocks.
2/65
4
7
10,000
790:094.100
UNIVAC 418
Input-Output
Uniservo VIC
INPUT-OUTPUT: UNISERVO VIC
GENERAL
.11
Identity: . .
. 12
Description
.6
The Uniservo VIC Tape Handler is a new unit that
is functionally similar to the Uniservo IIIC and IVC
but has a substantially reduced tape speed (42.7
inches per second) and a significantly lower cost.
The format of the Uniservo VIC is compatible with
all currently-produced IBM magnetic tape drives
except the Model 7340 Hypertape Drive and the new
2400 Series units. Automatic code conversion between UNIVAC 418 internal code and IBM 6-bit BCD
code is optional, as in the Uniservo IIIC and IVC.
If this feature is not installed, code conversion,
when required, must be done by subroutines.
.62
Uniservo VIC Magnetic
Tape Handler.
A Uniservo VIC Magnetic Tape Subsystem consists
of a Synchronizer Unit, from 1 to 4 Control Units,
and from 1 to 16 Uniservo VIC Magnetic Tape
Handlers (1 to 4 tape handlers can be connected to
each Control Unit). Each subsystem can be connected to either one or two input-output' channels.
The controllers are two-way units; thus, when two
input-output channels are used, simultaneous
read/read or read/write operations are possible
involving any two tape handlers on two different controls. The Uniservo VIC Tape Handler can read
only in the forward direction and cannot perform
any skip or search operations.
(
For a detailed description of the mechanical characteristics of the Univervo VIC, see Section 777:
094 of the UNIVAC 1050 Computer System Report.
.1
Recording density can be either 200, 556, or 800
rows per inch, providing peak data transfer rates
of 8, 500, 23,700, or 34,100 characters per
second, respectively. Each tape row consists of
six data bits and one parity bit. Block length is
variable from one word to the capacity of core
storage. The External Function instruction specifies a read or write operation, the unit involved,
the recording density, and whether or not an external interrupt shall occur upon successful completion of the operation. The size of a tape block is
indicated by initial and final addresses in the Buffer Control Words. Error conditions are indicated
by interrupts. The type of error is determined by
a status code set in the Status Word.
PERFORMANCE
.621 Nominal or peak speed At 200 rows/inch:. . 8,500 char/sec.
At 556 rows/inch:. . 23,700 char/sec.
At 800 rows/inch:. . 34,100 char/sec.
.622 Important parameters Recording density:
200, 556, or 800 rows/inch.
Tape speed:
42.7 inches/sec.
Full rewind time: .
180 seconds.
Interblock gap:
0.75 inch.
Start plus stop
24 msec.
time: . . . .
.623 Overhead, per
17.6 msec (continuous tape
block: . . . . .
motion).
.624 Effective speeds 8, 500N/ (N + 150) char/sec.
200 rows/inch:
23,700N/ (N + 417) char/sec.
556 rows/inch:
34, 100N/ (N + 600) char/sec.
800 rows/inch:
where N is number of
characters (i. e., tape
rows) per block. (See
graph. )
.63
Demands on System
Component
Central
Processor,
Model I:
Central
Processor,
Model II:
Density,
msec per Percentage of
rows/inch word
data transfer
time
200
556
800
0.016
0.016
0.016
4.6
12.6
18.4
200
556
800
0.008
0.008
0.008
2.3
6.3
9.2
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/65
UNIVAC 418
790:094.900
EFFECTIVE SPEED: UNISERVO VIC
1,000,000
7
4
2
100,000
7
4
2
Effective Speed,
rows/ second
10,000
...
~
~ JI' ~ ... '"
~ ",
/ 1/
//
//
JI'
7
~
4
~
2
~
1,000
:f
200 Cpr
_I"""
./
V
,~
~
,,
7
4
~
~"
~
I
~
2
100
2
10
4
7
2
4
100
2
7
1,000
Rows per Block
Note: Effective speeds are based upon continuous operation,
with no stops between blocks.
2/65
4
7
10,000
790: 101.1 00
UNIVAC 418
Input-Output
Standard Communications
Subsystem
INPUT-OUTPUT: STANDARD COMMUNICATIONS SUBSYSTEM
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: . • . . . . .
.12
Description
Standard Communications
Subsystem, consisting of
1 to 64 Communication
Line Terminals connected
to a Communication Multiplexer.
The Standard Communications Subsystem enables
the UNIVAC 418 to receive and transmit data via
any common carrier, in any standard code of up to
8 levels, at any standard rate of transmission up
to 4,800 bits per second. It can receive or transmit data via high-speed, medium-speed, or lowspeed lines in any combination.
The two principal components of the Standard Communications Subsystem are the Communication
Line Terminals (CLT's), which are connected directly to the communication facilities, and the
Communication Multiplexer, which links up to 64
CLT's to the Central Processor. One or more
Communication Multiplexers can be connected to
a pair of the UNIVAC 418's input-output channels.
(If necessary, more than one Communication Multiplexer can be connected to the same pair of computer input-output channels via a Scanner/Selector.)
The Standard Communications Subsystem requires
two input-output channels. Data transfer is performed in the Request-Acknowledge mode. One
input-output channel is used to transfer data, one
word at a time. Each word holds only one data
character. The second input-output channel is used
to transmit the ESI (see below). The Central
Processor is delayed 4 core storage cycles for each
character transferred. This takes 8 microseconds
per character in the Model II Central Processor
and 16 microseconds in the Model I Processor.
A 15-bit code is transmitted along with each message character leaving or entering the Central
Processor. This code, called the address ESI,
identifies the Communication Line Terminal and
Multiplexer and is available on the even-numbered
channel of the dual channel pair. The ESI references a Buffer Control Word, which in turn indicates the location to or from which the character
is to be sent. When a buffer has been filled (or
emptied), an internal interrupt occurs, and the
Buffer Control Words are modified by the EXEC
operating system to reference the alternate buffer.
Thus, all Communication Line Terminals can be
active simultaneously, with a minimum of program attention, so long as the gross data rate of
all incoming and outgoing messages does not exceed 62,500 characters per second. This gross
data transfer rate is determined by the length of
time required for scanning and gating. In addition,
messages can be transmitted or received while any
other peripheral subsystem is operating and while
the Central Processor is computing.
Communication Line Terminals
One CLT is required for each input line and each
output line to be connected to a communication
multiplexer. There are three basic types of input
and output CLT's: low-speed (up to 300 bits per
second), medium-speed (up to 1,600 bits per second), and high-speed (2,000 to 4,800 bits per second). The characteristics of the available CLT
models are summarized in Table I.
A special type of output CLT is the CLT-Dialing,
which enables the Central Processor to establish
communication with a particular remote point via
the common carrier's switching network. Each
CLT-Dialing requires one output position on the
Communication Multiplexer and is always used in
conjunction with another output CLT, an inputCLT,
or (for two-way communication) both.
Simultaneity
Communication Multiplexer
A special communications feature is the Externally
Specified Index (ESI), which allows a number of
communications networks to operate concurrently
on a single pair of input-output channels by providing automatic sorting of incoming data and automatic collation of outgoing data. This ESI feature,
which is built into the input-output logic, permits
UNIVAC 490 communications peripherals to be
used with the 418.
When the Standard Communications Subsystem is
used, two core storage locations are reserved for
each of the 64 possible communication lines. These
locations contain the Buffer Control Words. In
addition, two alternating core storage buffer areas
are assigned to each line. The size and location of
these buffer areas can be varied by the program.
©
The Communication Multiplexer is available in
five different models, capable of connecting the
following maximum numbers of Communication
Line Terminals to a pair of UNIVAC 418 inputoutput channels.
C/M-4:
C/M-8:
C/M-16:
C/M-32:
C/M-64:
2 input and 2 output CLT's
4 input and 4 output CLT's
8 input and 8 output CLT's
16 input and 16 output CLT's
32 input and 32 output CLT's.
When several CLT's simultaneously request access
to core storage, the Communication Multiplexer assigns priorities and lets the Central Processor know
which CLT has been granted access.
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/65
790: 101.120
. 12
UNIVAC 418
Description (Contd. )
• Direct Distance Dialing (DDD) or Wide
Area Telephone Service (WA TS): 1,200
to 2,000 bits per second; half duplex •
Types of Communication Service
Through the use of the appropriate Communication
Line Terminals and associated common-carrier
equipment, any or all of the following types of
communication service can be tied into a UNIVAC
41S system:
•
Private Line Teletypewriter: up to 100
words per minute; simplex, half duplex,
or full duplex.
•
Te~etypewriter Exchange Service (TWX):
100 words per minute; half duplex.
•
Private Line Telephone: 2,000 bits per
second and up; full or half duplex.
Optional Features
External Interrupt: With this feature, an external
interrupt will occur either: (1) when an EOT code
is received from an S-level CLT, or (2) when a
"no change of state" condition exists for a period
varying from a minimum of one character transfer time to a maximum of 750 milliseconds, per
individual asynchronous, lower speed, 5- or Slevel CLT.
TABLE I: COMMUNICATION LINE TERMINAL CHARACTERISTICS
Type No.
(Input only)
Type No.
(Output only)
Code Level
(Bits/char)
CLT-51L
CLT-50L
5
Bit serial
Asynchronous
Up to 300
bits/sec.
CLT-S1L
CLT-SOL
6,7, or S
Bit serial
Asynchronous
Up to 300
bits/sec
CLT-S1M
CLT-SOM
5,6,7, or S
Bit serial
Asynchronous
Up to 1,600
bits/sec.
CLT-S1P
CLT-SOP
up to S
Bit parallel
Timing Signal
Up to 75
char/sec.
CLT-SlH
CLT-SOH
5,6,7, or S
Bit serial
Synchronous
2,000 to 4, SOO
bits/sec.
CLT-Dialing
4
Bit parallel
Tim ing Signals
Determined by
common
carrier.
Mode
Timing
Speed
Note: "Asynchronous" means that start and stop bits are used with each character to establish timing;
"Synchronous" means that timing. characters are used at pre-determined intervals between data
characters.
2/65
790: 102.1 00
UNIVAC 418
Input-Output
Inter-Computer Couplers
INPUT-OUTPUT: INTER-COMPUTER COUPLERS
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
. Inter- Computer Couplers.
418/UNIV AC III Channel
Adapter.
. 12
Description
The Inter- Computer Couplers permit the UNIVAC
418 to be used as a peripheral on-line subsystem
for a UNIVAC 490, UNIVAC 1107/1108, UNIVAC
III, or a remote UNIVAC 418. Two types of intercomputer synchronizers are available: singlechannel and dual-channel. The couplers for the
UNIVAC III or a remote UNIVAC 418 use a single
channel to provide an 18-bit interface with the
UNIV AC 418. A dual-channel, 36-bit interface
coupler is required for use with a UNIVAC 1107/
1108 or 490.
Maximum data transfer rates are determined by
the internal speed of the slower of the two connected computers. Each computer treats the
other as an input-output device. Automatic storage protection is not provided; protection is available only through software routines.
Data sent to a UNIVAC III from a 418 must be
edited before transmission. Only the lower 12
bits of each 18-bit word can contain data. The
upper 6 bits must be blank.
,/
I
"'-
\
"
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/65
790: 103.100
UNIVAC 418
Input-Output
Transfer Switching Unit
INPUT-OUTPUT: TRANSFER SWITCHING UNIT
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
Description
. . . . . . . Transfer Switching Unit.
The Transfer Switching Unit permits two peripheral
subsystems to share the same UNIVAC 418 inputoutput channel or channels. Since many 418 subsystems require twb input-output channels, the 16
2/65
possible channels may be insufficient to accommodate all of the desired peripheral equipment.
The Transfer Switching Unit can alleviate this
restriction. Two types of units are available:
single-channel and dual-channel. Switching between
two subsystems is done manually. The Transfer
Switching Unit also permits a peripheral subsystem
to be switched between two UNIVAC 418 Central
Processors, or between a 418 and a UNIVAC 490,
1107, or 1108.
790: 111.1 01
UNIVAC 418
Simultaneous Operations
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
.1
GENERAL
.11
Channel Requirements
The UNIVAC 418 Central Processor can contain
8, 12, or 16 input-output channels. Any peripheral
subsystem can be connected to any input-output
channel, with the exception of the Programmer's
Console, which includes a keyboard-printer. If
the Programmer's Console is used, it must be
connected to channel o. Two types of input-output
transfers are performed in the UNIVAC 418. One
type uses one input-output channel to transfer data
in units of 18 bits; the second uses two input-output
channels to transfer data in units of 36 bits.
An unusual case is the Standard Communications
Subsystem (SCS). This subsystem requires two
channels, but only one channel is used to transfer data. The second channel transmits Externally Specified Index (ESl) characters. Central
processor delay times for the SCS are the same
as for devices using the 18-bit data transfer
mode.
. 12
The Control and Synchronizer Unit for each subsystem provides the proper interface between the
central processor and the peripheral units on the
input-output channel or channels. During most
output operations, the synchronizer accepts one
or two 18-bit words at a time from the computer
and divides them into 6-bit character elements.
During most input operations, the Synchronizer
assembles 6-bit characters from the input device
into one or two 18-bit UNIVAC 418 words at a
time. The peripheral control unit, which is usually in the same cabinet as the synchronizer, directs the selected input or output device while it
performs the desired function.
The following subsystems require two input-output
channels and transfer data in units of 36 bits:
o FH-880 Magnetic Drum Subsystem: 1 to 8
drums (see Section 790:044).
•
Fastrand I and II Mass Storage Subsystems:
1 to 8 storage units (see Section 790:045).
o Uniservo IIA Magnetic Tape Subsystem: 2
to 12 tape units (see Section 790:091).
•
Uniservo lIlA Magnetic Tape Subsystem: 2
to 16 tape units (see Section 790:092).
o High-Speed Printer Subsystem: 1 printer
(see Section 790:081).
Control and Synchronizer Units
.13
The Input-Output Process
In general, one data transfer operation at a time
can occur in each peripheral subsystem. The
exceptions to this general statement are:
•
An optional Dual Channel Synchronizer can
be used with the Uniservo IIlC, IVC, or VIC
Magnetic Tape Subsystem. In this case, the
subsystem occupies two input-output channels and can simultaneously control either
one read and one write operation or two read
operations (but not two write operations).
•
A magnetic tape or drum Control and Synchronizer Unit (and therefore the channel
to which it is connected) is occupied throughout a search operation, even though no data
is transferred to the central processor until
the search has been successfully completed.
Cil
When the Standard Communications Subsystem is used, the channels to which it is connected can be effectively divided into several
channels of lower speed, each with its own
core buffer area and interrupt control. Each
Communication Line Terminal presents the
address of its own particular buffer area to
the central processor, permitting messages
to or from several different communication
lines to be transmitted concurrently under
control of the Communication Multiplexer.
The following subsystems require one input-output
channel and transfer data in units of 18 bits:
o FH-220 Magnetic Drum Subsystem: 1 drum
(see Section 790:042).
o FH-330 Magnetic Drum Subsystem: 1 to 5
drums (see Section 790:043).
o Uniservo mc and IVC Magnetic Tape Subsystem: 2 to 12 tape units (see Section
790:093). As an optional feature, two
channels can be used to transfer data in
units of 36 bits.
• Uniservo VIC Magnetic Tape Subsystem: 2
to 16 tape uNits (see Section 790:094).
\ ,--
• UNIVAC 1004 Central Processor (see Section 790 :071).
o Programmer's Console Keyboard-Printer
(see Section 790:061).
i
\
'--
" Paper Tape Subsystem: 1 reader and 1 punch
(see Section 790 :072). This subsystem uses
the same channel as the Programmer's
Console.
©
o Although only one data transfer operation
at a time can occur between the 418 and the
UNIVAC 1004 Processor, full use of the
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/65
UNIVAC 418
790: 111.130
. 13
next drum revolution, with no loss of data. The
magnetic tape subsystems will generate a recoverable error condition, necessitating that the input
or output operation be repeated. The probability
of exceeding the maximum data transfer rate can
be reduced by choosing one of the interlace options
available for the Fastrand, FH-330, an,rl FH-SSO
Magnetic Drums, which reduce their ¢tfective
transfer rates.
The Input-Output Process (Contd.)
simultaneity of the 1004 peripherals can be
achieved through plugboard programming of
the 1004 and use of its 961 characters of core
storage as buffer areas for the data being
read, printed, and/or punched.
Two Buffer Control Words, in fixed core storage
locations, are associated with each input and each
output channel. BE'fore an input or output operation is initiated, a "Load External Function" in,..
struction is uset: to inform the synchronizer of the
function to be performed and provide any other
necessary data. The "Data In" or "Data Out" instructions load the appropriate Buffer Control
Words with the core storage addresses of the first
and last words to be transferred and initiate the
transfer operation. After each data word (or pair
of data words in the case of the 36-bit interface)
has been transferred to or from core storage, the
initial address in one Buffer Control Word is automatically incremented by 1 (or 2) and compared
with the terminal address in the other Buffer Control Word. The updated initial address is replaced
in storage. If the comparison indicates that the
data transmission has been completed, the operation is terminated and (optionally) an interrupt is
initiated.
.2
SIMULTANEITY RULES
A UNIVAC 41S system can simultaneously perform:
• One input, output, or search operation per
Fastrand, FH-220, FH-330, or FH-SSO Magnetic
Drum Subsystem; and
• One positioning operation per Fastrand Storage Unit; and
•
One input, output, or search operation per
Magnetic Tape Subsystem with Single-Channel Synchronizer; and
• One input and one output (or two input) operations per Uniservo lIIC, IVC, or VIC
Magnetic Tape Subsystem with Dual-Channel
Synchronizer; and
DEMANDS ON THE PROCESSOR
Each data word transferred to or from core storage in the 1S-bit interface mode requires 4 cycles
of central processor time. This takes S microseconds in the Model II Processor and 16 microseconds in the Model I Processor. Each pair of
words transferred in the 36-bit interface mode requires 5 cycles of central processor time; this is
equivalent to 10 microseconds in the Model II
Processor and 20 microseconds in Model I. (In
the case of the Programmer's Console, the Paper
Tape Subsystem, and the Standard Communications
Subsystem, one full word is used to hold each data
character. )
The maximum gross data transfer rate (or "saturation rate") for the UNIVAC 41S-I system is
62,500 words (or lS7, 500 characters) per second
in the lS -bit interface mode and 100,000 words (or
300,000 characters) per second in the 36-bit interface mode. The maximum gross data rate for the
UNIVAC 41S-lI system is 125,000 words (or
375,000 characters) per second in the lS-bit interface mode and 200,000 words (or 600,000 characters) per second in the 36-bit interface mode. At
these rates, no central processor time would be
available for executing stored program instructions.
The consequences of attempting to exceed the maximum data transfer rate quoted above depend upon
the particular peripheral subsystems involved and
the priorities of the channels to which they are connected. (When there are simultaneous demands for
access to core storage, the highest-numbered channel is served first.) The magnetic drum subsystems will attempt another data transfer during the
2/65
.3
•
Any number of magnetic tape rewind operations; and
• One input or output transfer per UNIVAC
1004 Subsystem; and
• One input or output operation per Paper Tape
Subsystem or one Programmer's Console
input or output operation; and
•
One output operation per Printer Subsystem;
and
•
One input or output operation per Communication Line Terminal; and
• Internal processing in the Central Processor.
The, gross data transfer rate between core storage
and all simultaneously operating peripheral devices
cannot exceed the following values:
Words
per second
Characters
per second
Model I Processor 1S-bit interface:
36-bit interface:
62,500
100,000
1S7,500
300,000
125,000
200,000
375,000
600,000
Model II Processor 1S-bit interface:
36-bit interface:
790:121.101
UNIVAC 418
Instruction List
INSTRUCTION LIST
MrlEMONICS
ART
TRIM
CL
MSL
CLM
LU
LL
AL
ANL
AA
ANA
M
D
SUI
LB
J
LBK
CY
SB
SL
SU
CMAL
SLSU
CMSK
ENTAU
ENTAL
ADDAL
SUBAL
ADDA
SUBA
MULAL
DIVA
IRJP
ENTB
JP
ENTBK
CL
STRB
STRAL
STRAU
FUNCTION
CODE
OCTAL
02
04
06
10
12
14
16
20
22
24
26
30'
32
34*
36*
40
42
44
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
6
13.33-24.67
24
6
6
2
4
4
6
4
4
46
DESCRI PTiON
OPERATION
I'S
(AL): (Y)
(YN)'" ALN FOR AUN = 1
L(AU) (AL) : L(AU) (Y)
(Y)- AU
(Y)- AL
(AL) + (Y)- AL
(AL) - (Y)- AL
(AU, AL) + (Y - 1, Y)- A;Y ODD
(AU, AL) - (Y'- 1, Y) -- A;Y ODD
(AL) (Y)- A
(A) .;. (Y)- AL, REM - AU
P + 1- (Y); (Y) .,. 1- P
(Y)- B
Y- P
Y~ B
ZERO- Y
(B)-- Y
(AL)- Y
(AU)~ Y
COMPARE AL
SELECTIVE SUBSTITUTE
COMPARE AL WITH MASK
LOAD AU
LOAD AL
ADD AL
SUBTRACT FROM AL
ADD A
SUBTRACT FROM A
MULTIPLY AL
DIVIDE A
STORE LOCATION JUMP INDIRECT
LOAD B
JUMP
LOAD B WITH CONSTANT
CLEAR Y
STORE B
STORE AL
STORE AU
* ALL ABOVE INSTRUCTIONS EXCEPT THESE ARE SR SENSITIVE.
ALL ABOVE INSTRUCTIONS ARE B • MODIFIABLE (SUFFIX A "B" TO TRIM CODE
PREFIX AN * TO AN ART OPERAND, OR ADD A "1" TO OCTAL)
OR
AND
XOR
EJI
JI
TB
SLSET
SLCL
SLCP
IJPEI
UP
BSK
51
52
53
54
55
56
8
TZ
ISK
57
6
LLK
ALK
SIR
JBNZ
ENTALK
ADDALK
STRICR
BJP
70
71
73
2.33
2.33
3
6
SAD
SSR
SU
STRADR
STRSR
RJP
74
75
76
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
72
SET ALN=1 FOR (YN = 1)
SET ALN=O FOR (YN = 0)
COMPLEMENT ALN FOR (YN) = 1
(Y) - P; ENABLE INTERRUPTS
(y)---P
(B) " (Y), (P) + 2- P
(B) 1 (Y), (B) + 1- B, (P) + 1- P
(Y) "O;(P) + 2- P
(Y) 1 O;(Y) - 1-- Y, (P) + 1- P
Y- AL
(AL) + Y~ AL
(lCR)- (Y) 2-- P'
(B) 10, (B) - 1- B; Y-- P
(B) "P', (P) + 1-- P
Yll -- 0
(AL)l1 __ 0 (SR) -- (Y)4- OAND ZERO- SR 4
(P) + 1-- Y ; Y + 1 - P
SELECTIVE SET
SELECTIVE CLEAR
SELECTIVE COMPLEMENT
ENABLE INTERRUPTS AND JUMP INDIRECT
JUMP INDIRECT
TEST B
TEST ZERO
LOAD AL CONSTANT
ADD AL CONSTANT
STORE INDEX CONTROL REGISTER
JUMP B
STORE ADDRESS
STORE SEPCIAL REGISTER
STORE LOCATION, JUMP
JUMP INSTRUCTIONS - COMPARE DESIGNATOR NOT SET
JUZ
JLZ
JUNZ
JLNZ
JUP
JLP
JUN
JLN
JPAUZ
JPALZ
JPAUNZ
JPALNZ
JPAUP
JPALP
JPAUNG
JPALNG
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
JUMP
JUMP
JUMP
JUMP
JUMP
JUMP
JUMP
JUMP
IF
IF
IF
IF
IF
IF
IF
IF
(AU) = 0
(AL) "0
(AU) 10
(AL) 1 0
(AU) IS POSITIVE
(AL) IS POSITIVE
(AU) IS NEGATIVE
(AL) IS NEGATIVE
JUMP
JUMP
JUMP
JUMP
JUMP
JUMP
JUMP
JUMP
AU
AL
AU
AL
AU
AL
AU
AL
ZERO
ZERO
NOT ZERO
NOT ZERO
POSITIVE
POSITIVE
NEGATIVE
NEGATIVE
(Contd.)
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/65
UNIVAC 418
790:121.102
JUMP INSTRUCTIONS - COMPARE DESIGNATOR SET
MNEMONICS
ART
TRIM
JE
JNE
JNLS
JLS
L1C
LOC
LFC
STIC
SlOC
TIC
TOC
TFC
OV
AAI
JPEQ
JPNOT
JPMLEQ
JPMGR
IN
OUT
EXF
INSTP
OUTSTP
SKPIIN
SKPOIN
SKPFIN
OUTOV
RIL
AFI
RXL
PAl
SIL
PFI
SXL
SRU
SRL
SRA
SCA
SLU
SLL
SLA
TK
RSHAU
RSHAL
RSHA
SF
LSHAU
LSHAL
LSHA
SKP
FUNCTION
CODE
OCTAL
I'S
60 & 61
62 & 63
64 & 65
66 & 67
5011*
5012*
5013*
5015*
5016*
5021*
5022*
5023*
5026*
5030 &
5031
5032 &
5033
5034 &
5035
5036 &
5037
5041
5042
5043
5044
5045
5046
5047
5050
2
2
2
2
10
10
10
2
2
2.3
2.3
2.3
10·12
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.67 + K/3
2.67 + K/3
2.67 + K/3
'3.17 + K/3
2.67 + K/3
2.67 + K/3
2.67 + K/3
2.33· 3
OPERATION
DESCRI PTION
JUMP IF (AL) = (Y)
JUMP IF (AL) 1- (Y)
JUMP IF (AL) 1 (Y), OR (Y) 2 (AL)
JUMP IF (AL) < (Y), OR (Y) > (AL)
LOAD INPUT CHANNEL K
LOAD OUTPUT CHA~NEL K
LOAD FUNCTION CHANNEL K
STOP INPUT ON CHANNELK
STOP OUTPUT ON CHANNEL K
TEST INPUT CHANNEL K (IDLE, (P) + 2.... P)
TEST OUTPUT CHANNEL K (IDLE, (P) + 2- P)
TEST FUNCTION CHANNEL K (YES, (P) + 2- P)
OVERRIDE K, IF BCWT 'I BCWI
ALLOW ALL INTERRUPT
JUMP EQUAL
JUMP NOT EQUAL
JUMP AL GREATER
JUMP AL LESS OR EQUAL
INPUT TRANSFER
OUTPUT TRANSFER
EXTE RNAL FUNCTION
TERM INA TE INPUT
TERMINATE OUTPUT
SKIP IF INPUT CHANNE L INACTIVE
SKIP IF OUTPUT CHANNEL INACTIVE
SKIP IF FUNCTION MODE INACTIVE
OUTPUT OVERRIDE
REMOVE INTERRUPT LOCKOUT
ALLOW FUNCTION INTERRUPT
REMOVE EXTERNAL INTERRUPT
LOCKOUT
SET INTERRUPT LOCKOUT
PREVENT ALL INTERRUPT
PREVENT FUNCTION INTERRUPT
SHIFT RIGHT U}
SHIFT RIGHT L END OFF
SHIFT RIGHT A
SCALE A; SF-17
SHIFT LEFT U}
SHIFT LEFT L END AROUND
SHIFT LEFT A
TEST KEY
SET EXTERNAL INTERRUPT
LOCKOUT
SHI FT RIGHT AU
SHIFT RIGHT AL
SHIFT RIGHT A
SCAlE A
SHIFT LEFT AU
SHIFT LEFT AL
SHIFT LEFT A
SKIP ON KEY SETTINGS
* ABOVE INSTRUCTIONS ARE NOT FOLLOWED BY AN I/O SCAN.
TNB
TOF
TNO
TOP
SKPNBO
SKPOV
SKPNOV
SKPODD
5051
5052
5053
5054
2.3·3
2.3·3
2.3·3
2.3 ·3
TEP
SKPEVN
5055
2.3-3
SK
RND
CPL
CPU
CPA
LlR
LSR
STOP
RND
CPAL
CPAU
CPA
ENTICR
ENTSR
5056
5060
5061
5062
5063
5072
5073
2.3
2.7
2.7
2.7
2.7
2
2
(P)
(P)
(P)
(P)
+ 2- P IF NO BORROW NEEDED & RESET
+ 2- P IF OVERFLOW OCCURRED & RESET
+ 2- P IF NO OVERFLOW OCCURRED
+ 2- P IF ODD PARITY IN AL, MASKED
BY AU
(P) + 2- P IF EVEN PARITY IN AL,
MASKED BY AU
STOP IF KEY SET
(AL17) -;- 217 + (AU)-AL
~AL- AL
-AU-AU
-A-A
Y2-1J--ICR
Y4-IJ-SR
SKIP
SKIP
SKIP
SKIP
ON
ON
ON
ON
NO BORROW
OVERFLOW
NO OVERFLOW
ODD PARITY
SKIP ON EVEN PARITY
STOP ON KEY SETTINGS
ROUND AU
COMPLEMENT AL
COMPLEMENT AU
COMPLEMENT A
LOAD INDEX CONTROL REGISTER
LOAD SPECIAL REGISTER
Y = OPERAND AS CONSTANT
( ) = CONTENTS OF REGISTER OR ADDRESS
FF = FUNCTION CODE OR OP CODE
K = BITS 5 - 0 OF INSTRUCTION
- = OPPOSITE OF (EVE RY 0- 1, AND EVERY 1- 0)
ICR = INDEX CONTROL REGISTER
ADD 21'SEC TO TIME FOR INDEXING
Reprinted from UNIVAC Form U 4523, UNIVAC 418 Instruction Repertoire.
2/65
790: 141.1 01
UNIVAC 418
Data Code Table
DATA CODE TABLE
BO-Col. Printable
Card
Code Characters
A
12-1
12-2
12-3
12-4
12-5
12-6
12-7
12-8
12-9
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
11-1
11-2
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-6
11-7
11-8
11-9
0-2
0-3
0-4
J
K
L
M
0-5
0-6
0-7
0-8
0-9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
V
W
N
0
P
Q
R
S
T
U
X
Y
Z
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
XS-3
Code
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
0101
0110
0111
11 1000
11
11
11
11
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
1001
1010
1011
1100
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
BO-Col. Printable
Card Characters
Code
XS-3
Code
00
00
00
01
00
01
10
11
11
1010
1011
1100
0000
0010
0011
0011
0100
0011
It
3-8
@
4-8
5-8 : (colon)
6-8
>
7-8 • (apos_)
12-3-8 • (period)
12-4-8
t:l
12-5-8
[
12-6-8
<
=
12-7-8
11-3-8
$
11-4-8
*
01
10
01
11
10
01
11
00
01
01
10
10
1101
1110
0001
1110
0000
0010
1101
1111
1110
1111
0010
0001
]
11-5-8
11-6-8 i(semi-col)
11-7-8
11
0-2-8
-:F:
0-3-8 I (comma)
0-4-8
%
(
0-5-8
0-6-8
"0-7-8
)
00
00
10
11
11
11
10
DO
11
0001
1110
1111
0000
0010
0001
1101
1101
11.11
7
8
9
12
11
12-0
11-0
0-1
2-8
7
8
9
&
- (minus)
?
!{exclam.}
/
+
Blank SpaceN.P.
00 0000
Reproduced from UNIVAC 1004 Card Processor 80 Column, Publication UT 2543 REV. lA, page 4.
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/65
790: 151.100
UNIVAC 418
Problem Oriented Foci lities
PROBLEM ORIENTED FACILITIES
•
·1
UTILITY ROUTINES
· 11
Simulators of other
Computers: . . . . . . . none.
.12
Simulation by Other
Computers: . . . . . . . none.
· 13
General Tape-Drum Print - prints programs
or data from Uniservo lIIC Tape Handler
or FH-330 Drum without specihl format.
Data transcription routines for all peripheral
devices used by the UNIVAC 418 will, according
to the manufacturer, be made available upon
request by the user.
Data Sorting and Merging
. 16
Sort/Merge
Tape File Maintenance (Uniservo lIIC)
Record size:
... 1,200 characters
(maximum).
Block size:
.. 1,200 characters
(maximum).
Key size:
. 36 characters (up to 12
non-contiguous, nonsequential fields).
File size: . . . . . . . . . 1 output reel.
Number of tape units: . 3 to 12 (Fastrand can be
used for I/O and/or external sort).
Date available: . . . . . . January, 1965.
Description:
Date available: . . . . . . now in use.
Description:
This program provides for updating and correcting
of a master file, and is run under EXEC control.
Input control cards specify the options to be performed: correction of all or a portion of a file,
copying of a file or portions of it onto another tape
or a printer, comparison of segments of a master
file with another tape, or merely positioning of a
tape to a given segment. Depending on the option
desired, the requirements are 1 to 3 magnetic tape
units, 1004 Card Reader, console typewriter, 1004
Printer, and approximately 2,600 core storage
locations.
Sort/Merge is a character-oriented, object-time
generator that uses a replacement-selection tournament technique for sorting and a polyphase
merge. Parameters can be read on-line from the
1004 Card Reader. The user's own coding can be
inserted into the first and last passes. Sort/Merge
uses Uniservo IITC or lIA Tape Handlers. A Fastrand option is available which uses a Fastrand Mass
Storage Unit for external sorting, with input-output
for either Fastrand or magnetic tape.
Core and Drum Change Program
(FH-330 Magnetic Drum)
Date available: . . . . . . now in use.
Description:
Two versions of this program for inspecting and
altering the contents of core or drum storage
exist. One uses the 1004 card reader for input
data; the other uses the console keyboard. Both
programs operate under control of EXEC. Entries
can be made in five formats: octal, Baudot, XS-3,
Fieldata, or ASCII. The program automatically
translates these into the codes of the card reader
or console .
Sort/Merge requires a 12K UNIVAC 418 and runs
under EXEC control. Additional core storage can
be allotted when available. Six-way code translation and sequence definition are provided.
.14
Report Writing: . . . . . none.
· 15
Data Transcription
. 17
. now in use.
The following data transcription routines are
currently provided:
•
2/65
Other
Reloadable Core and Drum Dump
418 Utility Routines
Date available:. . ..
Description:
File Maintenance
Uniservo mc Magnetic Tape to 1004 Printer includes label check, variable-length record
handling, error conditions, code conversion, tape
convention checking, and paper spacing.
Date available: . . . . . January, 1965.
Description:
This routine allows the user to dump the contents
of any part of core storage or any number of
tracks of an FH -330 Drum Unit onto a Uniservo
lIIC tape, so that it can be retrieved by means of
a wired (non-destructible) bootstrap card program.
Trace
•
Uniservo mc Magnetic Tape to 1004 Card
Punch - includes same features as above.
Date available: . . . . . . January, 1965.
Description:
•
1004 Card Reader to Uniservo mc Magnetic
Tape - allows choice of density, block size,
and file length and provides for automatic
restart at a predetermined point.
This routine is a selective trace that prints a
record of a program's progress on the 1004
Printer. Trace is compatible with the EXEC
operating system. It is relocatable at load time
and occupies less than 700 word locations.
790:161.100
UNIVAC 418
Process Oriented Languages
FORTRAN IV
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGES: FORTRAN IV
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity:
· 14
Description
11 digits for 7090/7094 FORTRAN IV;
double-precision constants can be up to
11 digits in length, as compared to a
maximum of 17 digits for 7090/7094
FORTRAN IV. However, the size of
the exponent for double-precision items
in the 418 is 15 bits, as compared to 8 bits
for 7090/7094 FORTRAN IV.
. • . . . . . . . UNIVAC 418 FORTRAN
IV.
FORTRAN IV for the UNIVAC 418 is a subset of
IBM 7090/7094 FORTRAN IV. Compilation requires a 418 central processor with at least
12,288 words of core storage, an input-output
keyboard and console printer, a UNIVAC 1004
card processor with printer, a card reader, and
a card punch. Storage requirements for the
execution of object programs will depend upon
the particular program's size and data storage
requirements. Object program input can be from
cards, magnetic tape, and/or drum; output can be
to magnetic tape, console printer, high-speed
printer, cards, and/or drum. UNIVAC 418
FORTRAN IV utilizes the EXEC operating system for all input-output functions.
The UNIVAC 418 FORTRAN compiler permits the
use of most of the facilities available in IBM
7090/7094 FORTRAN IV. Integer, real, and a
form of double-precision constants and variables
can be used, but provisions for complex and logical constants and variables have not been made.
All the open and library functions offered in IBM
7090/7094 FORTRAN are included in the 418 version except those with double-precision or complex arguments. The logical operators . NOT. ,
• AND. , and .OR. are not permitted. The expressions allowed as subscripts in 418 FORTRAN IV
are different from those permitted in IBM 7090/
7094 FORTRAN IV. Unlike FORTRAN IV for the
UNIVAC m, 418 FORTRAN IV offers no compatibility with the FORTRAN II language.
(2)
Complex and logical constants are not
permitted.
(3)
The following statements are not provided:
BLOCK DATA
DATA
END FILE
EXTERNAL
PRINT
PUNCH
READn
(4)
The expressions allowed as subscripts
vary from those for 7090/7094 FORTRAN IV.
The following are not permitted:
V+C
V-C
(5)
The logical operation symbols. NOT. ,
. AND., and . OR. are not included.
(6)
In FORMAT statements, D-specification
is not permitted.
(7)
No double-precision or complex functions
are provided.
.143 Extensions Relative to IBM 7090/7094 FORTRAN IV
(1)
The following expression types are allowed
as subscripts:
v*c
.141 Availability
V*V'±C
Language
specifications:
Compiler:
•..• February, 1965
(preliminary) .
The symbol "+" can be used for carriage
control to suppress spacing before printing.
(3)
The library function ASIN (arcsin) is provided.
(4)
The exponent in double-precision numbers
Can be up to 15 bits in 418 FORTRAN IV
as compared to 8 bits in 7090/7094
FORTRAN IV.
........?
• 142 Restrictions Relative to IBM 7090/7094
FORTRAN IV
(1)
(2)
Integer constants can be 1 to 6 digits in
length, as compared to a maximum of
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/65
790: 171.100
UNIVAC 418
Machine Oriented Languages
ART
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGES: ART
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
Origin: . . . . . . . . ... UNIVAC Division, Sperry
Rand Corp.
. 14
Description
an address to be returned to after completion, an
error address, and the Buffer Control Words.
Contents of the packet can vary for the particular
device and function used. The first word of the
packet contains an illegal operation code. When
executed, this will result in a "fault" interrupt
and automatic transfer to location 00000. This
location contains a "store and jump" instruction
which saves the contents of the sequence counter
and transfers control to EXEC. The appropriate
EXEC Input-Output Handler routine is utilized
to initiate and control the input or output operation.
. ART (Assembler for Real
Time).
ART is a symbolic assembly system that permits
utilization of all the hardware facilities of the
UNIVAC 418, provides facilities for the definition
and use of macro-instructions, and produces object
programs that can be run in a multiprogrammed
mode under the control of the EXEC operating
system. The ART translator is described in detail in the folloWing report section (page
The basic ART Assembly program requires two
passes and 8,192 words of core storage. Aprinter
is required for the program listing, and a card
reader or magnetic tape for control input. The
program to be assembled can be on punched cards,
paper tape, magnetic tape or drum. Assembly
can be accomplished in one pass if magnetic tape
or a drum is available for intermediate storage.
If 4, 096 words of additional core storljlge are
present, assembly can proceed under control of
EXEC.
790:181. 100).
The ART coding sheet is free-form and provides
space for labels, operation codes, operands, and
comments. The operation codes can be in mnemonic form. The operand field consists of one or
more expressions, as required by the operation
code, and can be used to indicate whether indexing is to be performed. Expressions can contain .
a series of labels, the location counter address,
octal values, alphabetics, decimal values, parameter reference forms, and/or lines of coding,
connected by a large assortment of operators. Constants and literals are limited to 18 bits in size.
Programmer notes are permitted.
(
'.
A macro-instruction is a symbolic command which
accesses an entire groupof instructions. No
standard macro-instructions are supplied with
ART, but a powerful PROC (procedure) facility
enables the user to generate his own macros. A
PROC Assembler directive informs the assembler
that all succeeding symbolic lines, until a corresponding END directive is reached, are not to be
assembled, but retained by the assembler until
they are referenced by some other portion of the
symbolic program. When the PROC is referenced
(or "CALLed") by one of its names, the symbolic
coding associated with the PROC will then be
assembled, substituting the parameters in the
calling line to create object code that is customfitted to the current requirements. It is possible
to execute a PROC at assembly time, rather than
at object time. PROC's can be stored in the ART
Library System and copied during the first pass
of the assembler.
Input-output operation codes in the ART language
are usually "privileged" (reserved for use only
by the executive routine). When an input-output
function is desired, the program must reference
a "CALL" packet which contains the channel and
function desired, an immediate return address or
.2
LANGUAGE FORMAT
.21
Diagram: . . . . . . . . . see coding sheet, Figure 1.
.22
Legend
Label: .
. identifies either a symbolic
line of coding or an item
of data.
Operation: . . . . . . . . . contains a mnemonic machine operation code, an
assembler directive, a
label associated with a
PROC code, or a data
generating code.
Operand: .. . . . . . . . one or more expressions
defining the information
required by the operation
field.
Comments: .
. . if line is not to be continued, any comments for
the reader can be inserted
after a period.
. 23
Corrections
.231 Insertions: .
. a line of coding is written
with an operation code of
INS and operand of LINE
NO.
.232 Deletions:. . . . . .. . a line of coding is written
with an operation code of
COR and operand of
LINE NO.
.233 Alterations: . . . . . . . . same as deletions.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/65
790: 171.240
UNIVAC 418
UNIVAC· 4"1 a
I ASSEMBLY
IN ART
PROGRAM _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ PROGRAMMER _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ DATE _ _ _ _ _ PAGE _ _ OF_ _ PAGES
KEYPUNCH:
use
LA,8EL
UNIVAC III PUNCH COMBINATION FOR SPECIAL CHARACTERS UNLESS ALTERNATE NOTED HERE
OPERATION
OPERAND
0
COMMENTS
72
80
"
FIGURE 1: ART CODING SHEET
. 24
Special Conventions
. 241 Compound addresses: . a series of elementary
items connected by operators: (+, -, *, /,
Logical ++, --, **,
Covered Quotient / / ,
>, < ).
. 242 Multi-addresses:
· none.
.243 Literals: . . . . . .
· • octal value preceded by
zero.
• alphabetic characters
enclosed in quotes .
• paraform enclosed in
parentheses.
• line of coding enclosed
in parentheses.
. 244 Special coded
addresses: .
· $ refers to current value
of the location counter.
.3
LABELS
.31
General
.311 Maximum number of
labels: . . . . . . . . . . no practical limit (in 8K
version, upper limit is
approximately 900 labels).
.312 Common label formation rule: . . . . . . . . yes.
.313 Reserved labels: .... none .
. 314 Other restrictions: ... none.
.315 Designators: . . . . . . . none .
.316 Synonyms permitted: .. yes; EQU pseudo .
.32
Universal Labels
. 321 Labels for procedures Existence: . . . . . . . . mandatory if referenced
by another program
segment .
Formation rule First character: .. alphabetic.
Last character: . asterisk (*).
Others: . . . . . . . . alphabetic or numeric;
no special characters or
spaces.
Number of characters: . . . . .
1 to 6 plus asterisk.
. 322 Labels for library
routines: . . . . . . . · three types of labels
exist, depending on the
library subdivision.
Labels for books are the
same as for local labels.
Labels for chapters are
the same as for universal labels. Sentences are
referenced by line number.
. 323 Labels for constants: · same as procedures .
. 324 Labels for files: . . . . · same as procedures .
(Label for the ART library
tape is its entire label
block.)
(Contd.)
790: 171.325
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: ART
.325 Labels for records: .. same as procedures.
.326 Labels for variables: . same as procedures.
. 33
Local Labels
.331 Region: . . . . . . . . . . local to a program segment.
. 332 Labels for procedures Existence: . . . . . . . . mandatory if referenced by
another instruction.
Formation rule First character: ... alphabetic.
Others: . . . . . . . . . alphabetic or numeric; no
special characters or
blanks.
Number of
characters: . . . . • . 1 to 6 (no asterisk).
.333 Labels for library
routines: . . . . . . . . . see Paragraph. 322 .
. 334 Labels for constants: . same as procedures.
.335 Labels for files: . . . . . same as procedures .
. 336 Labels for records: .. same as procedures.
.337 Labels for variables: . same as procedures.
.4
DATA
.41
Constants
.411 Maximum size constants Integer
Decimal: . . . . . . . . equivalent of 18 bits.
Octal:. . . . . . . . . . 6 octal digits.
Fixed numeric: .... no provision.
Floating numeric: ... no provision.
Alphabetic: . . . . . . . 3 characters.
Alphameric: . . . . . . 3 characters.
.412 Maximum size literals: same as constants .
.5
PROCEDURES
.51
Direct Operation Codes
. 511 MnemonicExistence: . . . . . . . . optional.
Number:. . . .
. .78.
Example: . . ..
. . LL = Load Lower Accumulator.
Comment: . . ..
. . operand preceded by an
asterisk indicates indexing.
.52
Macro-Codes: . . . . . . PROC facility enables user
to construct a macro
system.
. 523 New Macros: . . . . . . . coded with program, using
PROC pseudo; can be
inserted in library during
same run.
. 53
Interludes: . . . . . . . . none.
. 54
Translator Control
.541 Method of control Allocation counter: .. pseudo-operation.
Label adjustment: ... pseudo-operation.
Annotation: . . . . ... comments portion of line of
coding .
. 542 Allocation counter Set to absolute: . . . . parameter in Executive
Preamble.
Set to label: . . . . . . . RES.
Step forward: . . . . . . RES, ODD, EVEN, SETADR.
Step backward:.. .. RES.
Reserve area: . . . . . RES.
.543 Label adjustment Set labels equal: . . . . EQU pseudo.
Set absolute value: .. EQU pseudo .
Clear label table: ... CLT, PLT, or PPLT
pseudo (clears all but
universal labels) .
· 544 AnnotationComment phrase: ... comments portion at end of
line of coding.
Title phrase: . . . . . ASM pseudo.
.545 otherSET ADR: . . . . . ... dumps and clears literal
table, and advances
sequence counter.
.6
SPECIAL ROUTINES AVAILABLE
.61
Special Arithmetic:.
. floating-point routines will
be provided with FORTRAN compiler. (Note:
fixed-point computations
in ART are performed
throughout in double
precision (36 bits) format,
with results truncated to
18 bits.)
.62
Special Functions:
. standard math functions
will be provided with
FORTRAN compiler.
.63
Overlay Control:
. provided by EXEC routines.
· 64
Data Editing
.641 Radix conversion: . . . . octal or decimal to binary.
· 642 Code translation: . . . . CHAR pseudo - operation
can provide translation
between any two codes .
.643 Format control: ...•. no provisions.
.65
Input-Output Control
· 651
.652
· 653
.654
. 655
File labels: . . . .
. .
Reel labels:. . .
. .
Blocking: . . . .
. .
Error control: . . . . . .
Method of call: . . . . . .
.66
Sorting:
· 67
Diagnostics
EXEC routines.
EXEC routines.
EXEC routines.
EXEC routines .
see Section 790:191.
.. see Sort/Merge,
Paragraph 790:151.13 .
.671 Dumps: . . . . . . . . . . . EXEC Snapdump or
utility routines .
.672 Tracers: . . . . . . . . . . Trace utility routine .
. 673 Snapshots: . . . . . . . . . EXEC Snapdump routine .
.7
LIBRARY FACILITIES
.71
Identity: . . . . . . . . . . ART Library System.
.72
Kinds of Libraries: .. expandable master.
.73
Storage Form:
.74
Varieties of Contents: . programs, macros
(PROC's), and subroutines.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
.. card, paper tape, magnetic
tape, or drum.
2/65
790:171.750
. 75
UNIVAC 418
Code
Mechanism
.751 Insertion of new item: . part of first pass of
assembler.
.752 Language of new item:. relocatable or symbolic
code.
.753 Method of call: . . . . . . external directives (commands preceded by an
asterisk), usually from
1004 Card Reader.
.76
Insertion in Program
. 761 Open routines exist: ..
.762 Closed routines exist: .
.763 Open-closed is optional: . . . . . . . . . .
.764 Closed routines
appear only once: ...
.8
.. 81
.82
yes.
yes.
no.
yes.
MACRO AND PSEUDO TABLES
Macros: . . . . . . . . . . no specific macros are
provided; user can
create his own system
using PROC pseudoinstruction and library
facilities.
Pseudos
Code
Definitive ASM: . . . . .
Description
. ... identifies an assembly and
provides data to generate
an Executive preamble.
EQU: . . . . .
. . . . equates a symbol with an
expression.
FORM: . . . .
.. defines arbitrary word
formats, labels these
formats, and thereafter
references each format
by using the associated
format label as an operation code in the operation
field.
END: . . . . . . .•... indicates end of a program
or procedure.
2/65
Description
CHAR: . . . . . . . . . . permits redefinition of the
octal equivalents of alphabetic data.
CLT: . . . . . . . . . . . performs segment END
functions and clears label
table of all but external
labels.
PLT: . . . . . . . . . . . same as CLT except that
external labels are
printed .
PPLT: . . . . . . . . . . same as PLT; in addition,
the external labels are
punched.
Incremental RES: . . . . . . . . . . . causes the value of the
expression in the operand
field to be added to the
location counter.
SETADR: . . . . . . . . causes all literals referred
to previously to be
dumped, removed from the
literal table, and the
location counter advanced
to the value of an expression.
ODD: . . . . . . . . . . . sets location counter so
that subsequent data will
be assigned to an odd
address.
EVEN: . . . . .
. same as ODD, but for
EVEN addresses.
Repetitive . conditionally generates a
DO: . . . . .
line of coding a variable
number of times.
Procedural PROC: . . . . • . . . . . precedes the coding of a
procedure with variable
parameters.
NAME: . . . . . . . . . . qualifies a PROC procedure;
designates entry points in
a PROC.
GO: . . . . . . . . . . . . transfers to a label specified in the operand field
(used only in a PROC) .
790: 181.1 00
UNIVAC 418
Program Translators
ART
PROGRAM TRANSLATORS: ART
.1
GENERAL
.23
.11
Identity: . . . . . . . . . . ART Assembly System.
. 12
Description
.231 Maximum number of
source statements: .. not limited .
. 232 Maximum size source
statements: . . . . . . . not limited.
.233 Maximum number of
labels: . . . . . . . . . . variable by configuration.
Operation of the ART translator requires at least
8, 192 core storage locations, a card reader or
magnetic tape unit for control input, a printer, an
input device, and a punch, magnetic tape, or
paper tape punch for loadable output. If an additional 4.. 096 words of core storage are available, the
assembly can be run under control of the EXEC
Executive System. ART is basically a two-pass
assembler, but assembly can be accomplished on
one pass if a drum or additional magnetic tape
units are available.
fuput may be from punched cards, magnetic tape,
paper tape, or drum, and output of the object program may be on any of these media. Two versions
of ART are available. One is designed to be run
on the UNIVAC 418, and the other - ART III - on
the UNIVAC III. Only the UNIVAC 418 version is
described here.
The EXEC Executive System (page 790:191.100)
effectively eliminates the need for detailed programming of standardized input and output functions.
The programmer must use a CALL sequence and
provide a packet of information for use by EXEC.
. 13
Originator: . . . . . . . . UNIVAC Division, Sperry
Rand Corp.
. 14
Maintainer: ..
.15
Availability
INPUT
.21
Language
.3
OUTPUT
.31
Object Program
. 311 Language name: .
. 312 Language style: .
.313 Output media: ..
. 32
..
.212 Exemptions:
.22
'.
Conventions
.321 Standard inclusions: .. none.
.322 Compatible with: . . . . EXEC (Executive System).
ART Library System.
.33
Documentation
Subject
Source program:
Object program:
Storage map: ...
Restart point list:
Language errors: .
Provision
·
·
·
·
·
.
.
.
.
.
listing.
listing (in octal).
no.
no.
listing.
.4
TRANSLATING PROCEDURE
.41
Phases and Passes
Pass 1: . . . . . . . . . . . mixing and printing (if
desired) of control and
library inpu ts, accor··
ding to external directives;
copying of PROC's to
core; copying of labels
and their values to core;
output of composite input
to intermediate storage.
Pass 2: . . . . . . . . . . Assembling from intermediate storage; evaluating of literals and
eliminating of duplicates;
referencing of label table
for definitions; generating
of PROC's; output of
object code and listing.
"-
.211 Name:
· . UNIVAC 418 machine
language.
· . machine .
. punched cards, paper tape,
magnetic tape, or drum.
· . as above .
Preliminary version: September, 1964 .
Full version: . . . . . . December, 1964.
.2
Size Limitations
· . ART assembly language
(page 790:171.100).
· . none.
Form
.221 Input media Control data: . . . . . . punched cards or magnetic
tape.
Program: . . . . . . . . cards, magnetic tape, paper
tape, or drum .
. 222 Obligatory ordering: .. ASM directive first, then
proper logical sequence of
instructions, followed by
END directive.
. 223 Obligatory grouping: ... no.
©
.42
Optional Modes
.421 Translate:. . . . .
.422 Translate and run:
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
. . yes .
.. yes.
2/65
UNIVAC 418
790: 181.423
.423 Check only: . . . . . . . . no.
.424 Patching: . . . . . . . . . yes.
.425 Updating: . . . . . . . . . no.
.43
.45
. 46
Translation Time: ... approximately 400 objectcode lines per minute
(using 418-1 with 12K
core, Uniservo IIIC
Tape Handlers, and
1004 II Printer for online listing) .
Special Features
.431 Alter to check only: .. no.
. 432 Fast unoptimized
translate: . . . . . . . . yes .
. 433 Short translate on
restricted program: . yes.
. 44
.52
Bulk Translating: . . . . yes, with magnetic tape
or drum.
Program Diagnostics: . incorporated in EXEC
operating system, plus
coding diagnostics on
listing.
'!ranslator Library
.461 Identity: . . . . . . . . . . ART Library System.
. 462 User restriction: . . . . none.
.463 FormStorage medium: ... card, paper tape, magnetic
tape, or drum.
Organization: . . . . . . topic, book, chapter, and
sentence.
Format: . . . . . . . . . symbolic or relocatable
(absolute code is used
for Bootstrap routine
only) .
. 464 ContentsRoutines: . . . • . . . . closed or open.
Functions: . . . . . . . yes.
Data descriptions: .. yes.
PROC's (macroinstructions):. . . . . yes.
.465 LibrarianshipInsertion: . . . . . . . . yes.
Amendment: . .
. . yes.
Call procedure: . . . . by external directive
cards; if library portion
is a subroutine, linking
must be done by the user.
.5
TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE
. 51
Object Program Space
.53
Optimizing Data: . . . . none.
.54
Object Program
Performance: . . . . . unaffected; i. e., same
as hand coding .
.6
COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS
.61
Translating Computer
.611 Minimum configuration: UNIVAC 418 Central
Processor with 8,192
core locations.
card reader or tape unit
for control input .
1004 Printer.
device for source program
input .
device for object program
output .
. 612 Larger configuration
advantages: . . . . . . . 4,096 additional core
locations permit operation
under EXEC control.
additional magnetic tape
unit or drum permits
one-pass assembly.
. 62
Target Computer
.621 Minimum configuration: any UNIVAC 418 system.
.622 Usable extra facilities: all.
.7
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Error
Check or
Interlock
Missing entries:
check
Unsequenced
entries:
Duplicate names:
no check .
check
hnproper
format:
check
.511 Fixed overhead Name
Space
Comment
EXEC:
1,491 words plus
208 words per I/O
Handler (average)
one I/O Handler
routine is required for each
type of peripheral device.
160 to 256 words
plus 768-word
overlay area.
depends upon
facilities used
(i. e., number
of channels
and number of
kinds of EXEC
services).
Fixed
locations:
.512 Space required for each
input-output file: ... controlled user.
.513 Approximate expansion
of procedures: . . . . . one-to-one.
2/65
Incomplete
entries:
Target computer
overflow:
.8
Action
warning is
printed.
warning is
printed .
warning is
printed.
no check.
check
diagnostic is
printed and
logged on
console.
Inconsistent
program:
check
warning is
printed.
Truncated constant
(over 18 bits):
check
warning is
printed.
ALTERNATIVE
TRANSLATORS: .
. . ART III, which
assembles UNIVAC
418 programs on the
UNIVAC III Computer
System.
790:191.100
UNIVAC 418
Operatin 9 Environment
EXEC
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: EXEC
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
. 12
. . UNIVAC 418 Executive
System.
EXEC.
ator or internal call, and initiates loaded
runs if desired; provides logging: calls in
error routines: provides debugging aids .
•
SNAPDUMP - Allows dumping of the
contents of specified areas of core storage .
•
Expanded Repertoire System - Calls for
EXEC functions by means of undefined
operation codes, which cause a "fault"
condition.
•
Place-to-Go Scheduling - Allows the
specification of an address to which control is to be transferred. Places-to-go
may be scheduled "as soon as possible"
by priority (four queues are kept), at a
particular time, or at the end of a specified time period.
Description
The UNIVAC 418 Executive System, EXEC, is
an on-line operating system that controls, sequences, and allocates facilities for user programs operating on the UNIVAC 418. The ART
Assembly System language (page 790:171.100)
provides facilities for linkage and communication
with EXEC. A number of utility routines are
designed to operate under EXEC control.
EXEC provides for the concurrent operation of
four priority levels of programs: critical, realtime, batch, and computational. All executive
tasks and the input-output handlers operate at the
critical level. Coding at this level is non-suspendible, but for the most part, interruptible. One
or more routines may exist at the real-time level.
Their main characteristic is a sensitivity to and a
dependence upon communications data as primary
input-output. Routines at the batch level are
standard, input-output oriented programs with
no direct communications connections. The
computation level is reserved for those programs
which are low in input-output dependency.
The following functions are performed by EXEC:
The EXEC control routines are designed to maintain an orderly flow of control and sequencing of
tasks. This is done through handling of interrupts,
scheduling of requests from users, and maintenance of an "outstanding task structure" which
allows concurrent work at each of four different
operational levels.
Three possible conditions can exist when an
interrupt is received. If the processor is in an
idle state, the interrupt is handled immediately.
If the processor is in a suspendible mode (i. e. ,
real-time, batch, or computational priority
level), the current program is suspended, its
environment is saved, and the interrupt is then
handled. If a critical mode exists, a flag is set,
the interrupt is counted, and control is returned
to the point of interrupt. The interrupt will be
handled as an outstanding task when the EXEC
functions have been completed.
•
Priority Control - Remembers the current
priority level and sets it to "critical" as required: suspends the current operation when
appropriate and saves the environment at
that level; returns control to the suspended
operation when all higher-priority requirements are satisfied.
•
Interrupt Answering - Logs interrupts if
unable to process them: transfers control
to the proper handler routine: returns control to the place where interrupt occurred
with the proper environment restored.
•
Clock Control - Maintains an internal
clock: provides the time and date when
queried; transfers control to specified
locations at specified times (or after a
lapse of time) in accordance with priority.
(1)
Communications input.
(2)
Communications external (optional).
(3)
Communications output.
I/O Interface - Fills requests for input
and output functions according to priority;
hal.dles interrupts: returns control with
notification of status.
(4)
Self-imposed interrupts (by EXEC).
(5)
Standard peripheral interrupts (in
accordance with channel priority).
•
•
Utility Services - Assigns and releases
facilities (core, tape units); loads programs or segments as requested by oper-
© 1965
After most EXEC routines, control is passed to
the EXEC Switcher routine which scans "outstanding work" indicators. The switcher first
determines whether any unanswered interrupts
exist. These are processed in the following
sequence:
If all outstanding interrupts have been processed,
the Switcher routine determines whether a suspended program exists. A maximum of three
AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/65
UNIVAC 418
790: 191.120
. 12
Description (Contd. )
suspended programs can exist at anyone time
(one each at the real-time, batch, and computationallevels). If one or more suspended programs are indicated, the proper environment is
restored and control is transferred to the highestpriority program. If no suspended program can
be found, a scan is made of the place-to-go queues.
For queues (one per priority level, in "first infirst out" sequence) are searched in order, and
control is transferred to the first address found.
If none of the above conditions exists, there is no
outstanding work, and the computer enters the
idle state.
.13
Availability:
• 14
Originator:
· 15
Maintainer:..
.2
PROGRAM LOADING
.21
Source of Programs
.42
Multiprogramming: . controlled by executive
routine - 4 levels of
programs are permitted.
.43
Multi-sequencing: .. no provisions.
.44
Errors, Checks, and Action
check
diagnostic on
console
printer.
check
before
loading
diagnostic on
console
printer.
In-out error single:
check
diagnostic on
console
printer.
In-out error perSistent:
check
Storage overflow:
check
diagnostic on
console
printer .
diagnostic on
console
printer.
diagnostic on
console
printer.
EXEC protects
itself •
Allocation
impossible:
. . . . September, 1964.
.. UNIVAC Division,
Sperry Rand Corporation.
. . . . as above.
.22
Library Subroutines: .. no automatic facilities.
.23
Loading Sequence: ... controlled by ARLO
routine (loader), using
internal calls or operator type-ins.
.3
HARDWARE ALLOCATION
.31
Storage
Invalid instructions: check
Program conflicts: partial
checks
Arithmetic overflow:
no check •
Invalid operation:
hardware
check
Improper format:
check (in
most cases)
Invalid address:
check (in
most cases)
Reference to
forbidden area:
check (in
most cases)
.45
.311 Segmenting of
routines: . . • . . . . . by ARLO executive
routine, controlled
by program parameters.
.312 Occupation of working
storage: •..••.••• controlled by FACSERV
executive routine.
Input-Output Units
• 321 Initial aSSignment: ••• controlled by FACSERV
executive routine.
• 322 Alternation: ••••••• as coded by user .
• 323 Reassignment: ••••• controlled by F ACSERV
executive routine.
.4
RUNNING SUPERVISION
.41
Simultaneous
Working:
2/65
Action
Loading input
error:
• 211 Programs from on-line
libraries: . . . • . . . ART Library System is
usually on a drum; it
can also be on magnetic
tape, paper tape, or
punched cards .
• 212 Independent programs:. punched cards, paper tape,
magnetic tape, or drum.
. 213 Data: •.•••....... punched cards, paper tape,
magnetic tape or drum.
. 214 Master routines: . . . . core storage and magnetic
tape or drum.
.32
Check or
Interlock
Error
... controlled by executive
I/O Handler routines.
interrupt.
console
diagnostic.
console
diagnostic.
console
diagnostic.
Restarts
.451 Establishing restart
points: . . . . . . . . . no automatic provision.
.452 Restarting process: . operator issues a
bootstrap command
which causes the EXEC
routine to be loaded.
EXEC initializes itself
and transfers to a START
routine (provided by programmer) .
.5
PROGRAM DIAGNOSTICS
.51
Dynamic
.511 Tracing: .... . . . . . MS routine logs on console
the time that an instruction
at a particular address
is executed; initiated by
program.
(Contd.)
790: 191.512
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: EXEC
. 512 Snapshots: . . . . . . . SNAPDUMP routine; can be
initiated by a program,
from console keyboard,
or from the maintenance
panel; output is on 1004
Printer or magnetic tape.
. 52
.6
.61
Post Mortem: . . . . • SNAPDUMP routine; see
preceding entry.
OPERATOR CONTROL
Signals to Operator
. 611 Dec.ision required
by operator: . . . . . console typewriter
messages.
.612 Action required
by operator: " ... console typewriter
messages .
. 613 Reporting progress
of run: . . . . . . . . . console typewriter
messages.
. 62
.63
Operator's
Decisions: . . . . . . console keyboard entries.
.812 Usable extra
facilities: .••••••• additional 924 to 1,024
words of core storage
and 1 tape unit or drum
for automatic handling
of concurrent real-time
and batch programs •
.813 Reserved equipment: •• usually all of bay 0 (4, 096
locations of core storage)
and at least an equal
amount of drum storage
(user option).
.82
System Overhead: ..• approximately 30% of
EXEC is always in
core storage •
.83
Program Space
Available: • • • • • ••
Operator's Signals
. 631 Inquiry: . . • . • • . . . . console keyboard entries.
.632 Change of normal
progress: . . . . . . . . console keyboard entries.
.7
Console keyboard-printer •
At least one of the following:
Card reader
Magnetic tape unit
Paper tape subsystem
Standard Communication
Subsystem with 6-8
level Teletype ASR unit .
LOGGING: . . • • . . . . console typewriter
messages, controlled
by CONSERV executive
routine.
all of available core
and drum storage
except reserved areas
listed in Paragraph .813 .
.84
Program Loading
Time: . . . • . . . . . • limited by speed of input
device.
. 85
Program Performance
.8
PERFORMANCE
Times required by EXEC to respond to an interrupt
and initiate an input-output operation in the UNIVAC
418-II Processor, according to the manufacturer,
are as follows:
.81
System Reguirements
•
When the processor is busy: 1. 19 msec
plus time required to schedule the I/o
operation.
•
When the processor is idle: 0.52 msec
plus time required to schedule the I/O
operation.
•
For communications I/O: 0.64 msec plus
time required to schedule the I/O operation.
.811 Minimum
configuration: . • . . . 418 Central Processor
with at least 1,491
words of core storage
for EXEC use, plus
approx. 208 words
for each I/O Handler
routine required.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporotion and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/65
790:201.001
UNIVAC 418
System Performance
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING (790:201.100)
These problems involve updating a master file from information in a detail file and
producing a printed record of each transaction. This application is one of the most common
commercial data processing jobs and is fully described in Section 4:200. 1 of the Users' Guide.
Standard File Problems A, B, and C show the effects of three different record sizes in the
master file. Standard Problem D shows the effect of increasing the amount of computation
performed upon each transaction. Each problem is estimated for activity factors (ratios of
number of detail records to number of master records) of zero to unity. In all cases a uniform
distribution of activity is assumed.
Because multiprogramming is a featured capability of the UNIVAC 418, the central
processor time requirements are shown on all of the graphs in addition to the usual curves of
elapsed time (i. e., total processing time). The difference between the curves of elapsed time
and central processor time represents the amount of central processor time that is potentially
available for concurrent processing of other programs. An analysis of the resulting graphs
shows that in Standard Configuration III, the central processor is available to process other
programs during approximately 80% of the total time required to handle the Standard File
Problems.
In order to show its true potential for business data processing in more than one
eqUipment configuration and operational mode, the UNIVAC 418's performance on the Standard
File Problems has been analyzed for two different cases, as described in the following paragraphs:
(1)
Conventional processing, with on-line card reading and
printing during the file processing run.
(2)
Multiprogrammed operation, with separate card-to-tape,
processing, and tape-to-printer runs performed on the
same main frame.
The ability of the UNIVAC 1004 to operate off-line with respect to the 418 permits
tape-to-tape processing with off-line card-to-tape and tape-to-printer transcriptions. The
graphs for the 418 in this mode of operation would be the same as those for the main Processing Run for Configuration VIlA.
CONVENTIONAL PROCESSING (CONFIGURATION III)
In Configuration m the master files
to the on-line 1004 card reader and the report
A, B, C, and D, the printer is the controlling
The two master file tapes control at activities
are on magnetic tape. The detail file is assigned
file to the on··line 1004 printer. For Problems
factor at high, moderate, and low activities.
near zero.
/
(
MULTIPROGRAMMED OPERATION (CONFIGURATION VIlA)
In Configuration VITA, it is assumed that file processing jobs will generally be
divided into three separate runs:
/"
"
(1)
Card-to-tape transcription of the detail file.
(2)
Main processing run, with all files on magnetic tape.
(3)
Tape-to-printer transcription of the report file.
Depending upon the size of the file to be processed and the installation's other work,
these three runs might be performed sequentially or concurrently. All of the prescribed processing for the Standard File Problems is performed during the main processing run; the other
two runs are straightforward data transcriptions. The detail and report files are unblocked.
The graphs for Configuration VIlA (pages 790:201.116 and 790:201.145) show the
time required for two distinct programs: (1) the main (tape-to-tape) Processing Run; and (2)
the card-to-tape and tape-to-printer Transcription Runs, which are assumed to run in parallel.
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/65
UNIVAC 418
790;201.002
For each program, both the total elapsed time (usually controlled by one or a combination of
input-output devices) and the central processor time are shown, so that estimates of the amount
of central processor time available to process other programs can easily be made.
Because of space limitations, performance in the multiprogrammed mode is shown
for Standard File Problems A and D only. Problem D shows the effect of tripling the amount
of computation performed in the main Processing Run; times for the Transcription Runs are
unaffected.
The curves for the Transcription Runs are similar to those for Configuration ill,
except that the printer is the controlling factor at all activities. The controlling factors for the
main Processing Run are the central processor at high and moderate activities, and the report
file tape and one master file tape at low activity.
SORTING (790;201. 200)
The standard estimate for sorting 80-character records by straightforward merging
on magnetic tape was developed from the time for Standard File Problem A by the method explained in Paragraph 4;200.213 of the Users' Guide. A three way merge was used in both Configurations ill and VITA. The results are shown in Graph 790;201. 200. Configuration III uses
the economical Uniservo VIC Tape Units without read-write overlap. The Uniservo IVC Tape
Units which are used in Configuration VIIA are faster and provide read-write-compute simultaneity
for significantly better performance.
Times for the standard UNIVAC 418 Sort/Merge routine are not available to date.
(STANDARD FILE PROBLEM A)
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 1
CONFIGURATION
ITEM
REFERENCE
VITA
(Main Processing Run)
III
1
wordslhloek
R.en,e.lh!nek
mseelblook
K
File 1
340
File 2
10
!'lli!...l=File.~
Eik...3._ _. _
InputOUtput
Times
ilo
msee/switch
mu.=File.2_
~---.-
10
_ _ _ _11~_
_ _ _9_3_ _ _ _ _ _ _0._9*_ _ _
_ _ E..:.L _
142
___
0_. _
1. 5'
_ _ _ _0_ _ _
:E:il.D~_
4:200.112
_ _ _0_ _ _ _ _ _ _ 0_ _ _
0
File 4
maee penalty
340
°
_ _ _ lL.1...- _ _ _ _
2~
l:i.I.e...a.. _ _ ---_O~- _~2_
File 4
2
Central
Processor
Times
mseelb!oek
maee/record
~---
msee/detail
~---.-
maee/work
~----
mseetreocrt
____
0._79_ _
19.15
Printer
4:200.1132
19.15
Tapes
C.P.
a;;-K - - - -
r--!'.L-. --- -Z.J!... _ 1 - - -
~MasterI~_
~.L-
~Details
_
Total
200.5
200.5
--- --.-b.L _ r - - ~.1-- - - -&.L ~-
r---!.L- f - - - - ---.b..L
3.5
1 420
3.5
220.2
1 420
220.2
File 4 Renorts
4:200.114
f--- 123.
144.2
°
: IJnit nf m ••• ",. 1B-bit words
~outines
Storage
Space
Required
--..lh1.9_
r--0:l~---.- - - ,........!l.:..- f - - - a2 K
~MasterouL
4
_
I--~-
b7 + b8
C.P.
mseelbloek
forC.P.
and
dominant
I/O column.
_~8_
r-- _ _ _
0.1li-_1 - - - l l 4 _
1-- ___
0 . 5_6_ _
3
System
Performance
at
F = 1.0
0.3fi
0.35
~---.- _ _ _ _o.~
_ _ _ _ 2.900 _ _
~---
_
3.900
_
_ _ _1_60_ _ _
--~___
. _B_31 _ _ _
!!.Qlli>eks 1 to 23)
--~
--~J!.JmQcks 24 to .1!!L _ ---1J!.86_ _ _ -~-_ --1.J!.02_ _ _._
~---~-Working
Total
* Plus
34
34
9 513
10.797
4:200.1151
./
start-stop time.
(Contd.)
2/65
790:201.100
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
·1
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING
· 11
Standard File Problem A
· 111 Record sizes Master file: . . . . . . . 108 characters, packed
into 34 UNIVAC 418
words.
Detail file: . . . . . . . 1 card.
Report file: . . . . . . . 1 line.
· 112 Computation: . . . . . . . standard.
· 113 Timing basis: . . . . . . using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.113; see also page
790:201. 00l.
· 114 Storage space required Configuration III: ... 9, 513 words.
Configuration VIlA
(multiprogrammed):. 10,797 words.
· 115 Graph showing performance in conventional processing
mode: . . . . . . . . . . see graph below.
CONVENTIONAL PROCESSING (CONFIGURATION III)
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
7
4
Time in Minutes to
Process 10, 000
Master File Records
2
-
~
10.0
7
/'
/'
4
2
,,'
C1> ...-----
.~
~
./"
1.0
7
4
---
/"
,
/
,"
/
2
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
LEGEND
---------------------- Elapsed time
-CP-- Central Processor time
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/65
790:201.116
. 11
UNIVAC 418
Standard File Problem A (Contd. )
. 116 Graph showing
performance in a
multiprogrammed
environment: . . . . . . see graph below.
MULTIPROGRAMMED OPERATION (CONFIGURATION VIlA)
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
7
4
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
2
~T-------
10.0
_T--
7
~ ...
4
)
2
/
1.0
7
4
,/
,.",,1'-
-
-------~
/
:..'
f-1?'"
".
-
--~,...
-
./
J
.,...----T-
2
./,,,
-- .. -
_T--
",.-
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
LEGEND
-----P
-----T
___ P _
_ T-
Elapsed time for main processing run.
Elapsed time for data Transcription runs.
Central Processor time for main Processing run.
Central Processor time for data Transcription runs.
(See also the explanation under "Multiprogrammed Operation" on page 790:201. 001.)
(Contd.)
2/65
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
. 12
790:201.120
Standard File Problem B
· 122 Computation: . . . . . . . standard .
. 121 Record sizes Master file: . . . . . . . 54 characters, packed
into 17 UNIVAC 418words.
Detail file: . . . . . . . 1 card.
Report file: ••..•.. 1 line.
· 123 Timing basis: . . . . . . using estimating procedure outlined in Users'
Guide, 4:200.12.
· 124 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . . see graph below.
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
7
4
Time in Minutes to
Process 10, 000
Master File Records
2
~
10 •. 0
7
L
-'
./
4
~
2
V
/'
I
1.0
/
7
~
""~
_C1?---- ----
~
,
4
2
/
V
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
LEGEND
-
©
Elapsed time
- - C P - Central Processor time
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/65
UNIVAC 418
790 :20 1. 130
. 13
Standard File Problem C
. 132 Computation: . . . . . . . standard .
.133 Timing basis:· . . • . . . using estimating procedure outlined in
Users' Guide,
4:200.13
.131 Record sizes Master file: . . . . . . . 216 characters, packed
into 68 UNIVAC 418
words.
Detail file: . . . . • . . 1 card.
Report file: . . . . . . . 1 line.
.134 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . . see graph below.
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
7
4
Time in Minutes to
Process 10, 000
Master File Records
2
~
10.0
-
7
/'
/'
./
4
____ C1?-
... , -
2
,/
1.0
7
4
--
,L
,
I'
2
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
LEGEND
_
_ -CP-
Elapsed time
Central Processor time
/
(Contd. )
2/65
790:201.140
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
. 14
Standard File Problem D
.141 Record sizes Master file: . . . . . . 108 characters, packed
into 34 UNIVAC 418
words.
Detail file: . . . . . . . 1 card.
Report file: ..•.•.. 1 line.
. 142 Computation: . . . . . . trebled.
. 143 Timing basis: • . . . . . using estimating procedure outlined in
Users' Guide,
4:200. 14; see also
page 790:201. 001.
. 144 Graph showing
performance
in conventional
processing mode: ... see graph below .
CONVENTIONAL PROCESSING (CONFIGURATION ill)
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
7
4
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
2
~
10.0
----
-'
7
/'
./
4
2
/
j
V'
~C)?-
----'
/
1.0
7
"
,
4
I
..------- -----
/
2
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
LEGEND
- - - - - - - - - - - Elapsed time.
- - C P - Central Processor time
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/65
UNIVAC 418
790:201.145
• 14
Standard File Problem D (Contd.)
. 145 Graph showing performance in a
multi programmed
environment: •..•.. see graph below.
MULTIPROGRAMMED OPERATION (CONFIGURATION VTIA)
1,000.0
7
4
/-
2
100.0
7
4
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
2
~T---------
10.0
7
~
/"
4
I
/
1.0
4
.L"
/'
2
7
..
_T--
V
/
~
------
,
tI':.'
,
I/~
i"
I(
~T---
2
~~,.
.------
_T--
V"
0.1
0.0
0.33
0.1
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
LEGEND
_____ P
_____ T
___P_
__ T-
Elapsed time for main Processing run.
Elapsed time for data Transcription runs.
Central Processor time for maIn Processing run.
Central Processor time for data Transcription runs.
(See also the explanation under "Multiprogrammed Operation" on page 790:201. 001.)
(Contd.)
2/65
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
790:201.200
.2
SORTING
.21
Standard Problem Estimates
. 213 Timing basis: . . . . . . using estimating
procedure outlined
in Users' Guide,
4:200.213 .
. 211 Record size: . . • . . . . 80 characters.
. 212 Key size: . . . . . . . . . 8 characters.
. 214 Graph: . . . . . . • . . . . see graph below .
1,000
7
4
2
100
7
~
/
4
/
~/
2
V~
Y
Time in Minutes to
put Records into
Required Order
10
7
~
4
/
/
,/
2
/
1
,
It
I
/
~
1I't
I
7
f
~
4
/
/
/
2
0.1
100
2
4
7
1,000
2
4
7
10,000
2
4
7
100,000
Number of Records
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/65
UNIVAC 418
Physical Characteristics
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Width,
inches
Unit
Depth,
inches
Height,
inches
Weight,
pounds
Power,
KVA
BTU
per hour
Central Processor
without Console
Central Processor
with Console
26
88
65
1,050
2.5
6,700
68
107
65
1,125
2.5
8,300
Standard Communication
Subsystem
96
26
80
2,000
4.1
l2,000
48
96
96.
144
144
26
26
26
26
26
64
64
64
64
64
980
1,745
2,060
2,825
3,140
7.1
8.6
10.1
11.6
13.1
3,819
5,590
6,372
8,143
8,925
71
3.0
1.5
8,500
3,500
FH-330
FH-330
FH-330
FH-330
FH 330
Drum
Drum
Drum
Drum
Drum
(1
(2
(3
(4
(5
drum)
drums)
drums)
drums)
drums)
1004 Processor
1004 Punch
42
63
25
55
49
2,021
870
Tape Adapter Cabinet
Uniservo mc
26
31
26
30
64
64
600
800
1.8
2.75
2,500
7,500
Uniservo IIA Synchronizer
Uniservo IIA
20
31
35
30
82
69
600
800
1.56
2.63
2,075
7,140
Uniservo !IIA Synchronizer
Uniservo IIIA
Uniservo Power Supply
20
31
24
35
30
26
32
64
64
600
800
1,200
0.96
2.75
3.0
2,075
7,500
8,200
20
l22
35
35
82
64
600
5,300
1.56
7.0
2,075
19,500
FH-880 Synchronizer
FH-880 Drum
20
54
35
35
82
80
600
1,300
1.56
2.2
1,640
5,125
Printer Control
High Speed Printer
20
46
35
32
82
55
600
1,250
1. 56
1.7
3,000
5,100
Paper Tape Subsystem
24
35
96
475
1.2
5,100
Fastrand Synchronizer
Fastrand Drum Unit
General Requirements
Temperature: ••••••••••••••••••••••••.•• 60 to 80°F.
Relative Humidity: •••.••••••••••••••••.••• 40 to 70%.
Power: ••..••••••••••••••••••••••••.•• 120/208V, 60-cycle, 3-phase, 5-wire.
Individual units may require power from
Motor/Alternator, voltage-regulated
power from Power Supplies, and/or·
unregulated power; consult UNIVAC
for details.
/
2/65
I
/
790:221 Sltl
UNIVAC 418
Price List
PRICE DATA
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
No.
Name
UNIVAC
418-1
Central Processor (4 Ilsec cycle);
includes 4,096 words of core
storage, 8 I/O channels, and
Operator's Panel.
$
$
70,200
250
40
9,000
200
15
7,200
250
25
60
15
3
5
9,000
900
2,400
2,050
250
73,800
350
40
12,600
200
15
7,200
250
25
60
15
3
5
9,000
900
2,400
1,000
30
36,000
Control and Synchronizer Unit
(includes 1 Drum Unit)
Additional Drum (max. 4)
Dual Drum Unit (max. 2)
2,000
155
72,000
1,200
2,400
80
160
40,000
80,000
Control and Synchronizer Unit
Drum Unit (max. 8)
2,000
1,420
165
165
71,000
92,000
Fastrand Mass Storage Sub s;ystems
Fastrand I Mass Storage Control
First Mass Storage Unit
Additional Units (max. 7)
1,000
3,300
3,300
35
250
120
136,000
160,000
160,000
Fastrand II Mass Storage Control
First Mass Storage Unit
Additional Units (max. 7)
1,000
3,800
3,800
35
265
125
36,000
184,000
184,000
Central Processor (2 Ilsec cycle);
includes 4,096 words of core
storage and 8 I/O channels.
Core Memory
See Central Processor, above
FH-220
FH-330
FH-880
I
II
'---
Purchase
$
25.0
Optional Features for 418-II:
Additional 4,096 words of
Core Memory (max. 15)
4 Additional I/O channels
(max. 16 channels total)
Console (keyboard-printer)
Console Alarm
Day Clock
INTERNAL
STORAGE
Monthly
Maintenance
1,950
Optional Features for 418-1:
Additional 4, 096 words of
Core Memory (max. 3)
4 Additional I/o channels
(max. 16 channels total)
Console (keyboard-printer)
Console Alarm
Day Clock
UNIVAC
418-II
PRICES
Monthly
Rental
Magnetic Drum Subs;ystems
Drum Unit and Synchronizer
(max. 1 drum)
-
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/65
"
\
\.:{90:221.l 02
UNIVAC 418
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
No.
INTERNAL
STORAGE
(Contd.)
Name
Optional. Features for Fastrand:
Fastbands Option (24 bands)
Write Lockout
Dual. Computer and Read-Read/
Read-Write
INPUTOUTPUT
PRICES
Monthly
Rental
Monthly
Maintenance
Purchase
$
$
$
200
25
300
22
3
20
9,000
1,125
13,500
Uniservo 1VIag!);etic Ta]2e
Subsystems
IIA
lIA Tape Handler
ITA Control & Synchronizer
lIA Power Supply (for 6 tapes)
450
1,550
350
95
130
35
20,000
77,500
17,500
IIIA
IIIA Tape Handler
mA Control and Synchronizer
mA Power Supply (for 6 tapes)
700
2,750
350
155
100
,40
36,500
99,000
17,500
IIIC&
IVC
mc Tape Handler - 200/556
CPI
IVC Tape Handler - 800 CPI
750
62
36,500
800
95
38,400
985
85
35,460
100
985
5
85
3,600
35,460
100
215
5
35
3,600
8,600
300
75
12,000
600
500
30
125
24,000
20,000
150
25
6,000
800
1,750
240
160
36,000
80,000
100
15
4,000
600
800
60
60
24,000
32,000
450'
40
14,300
60
120
50
4
8
2,700
5,400
2,250
Control Unit & Synchronizer 200/556CPI
800 CPI option
Read-Read/Read-Write
(second data path)
Translator
Power Supply (for 6 tapes)
VIC
VIC Tape Handler - 200/556/800
CPI
Synchronizer
Control and one tape handler
Pa]2er TaEe Subs~stem
(paper tape reader, punch,
and control unit)
High-S(2eed Printer Subs~stem
Printer (700-922 LPM)
Printer Control & Synchronizer
Punched Card Subs~stem
(See complete price list for
UNIVAC 1004, page
770:221.100)
418/1004 Channel Adapter
Intercom(2uter Cou(2lers
Single Channel (418/418)
Dual Channel (418/1107-1108
or 490)
418/UNIVAC m Channel
Adapter
Transfer Switching Units
Single I/O Pair
Dual. I/O Pair
Cabinet
-
For prices of Standard Communications Subswstem components, see UNIVAC 1050 Price
Data section, page 777: 221. 103.
2/65
~'i;'",::,..
;;,
'~'
,
',
,
,
i
\"
,
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
II·
Univac
(A Division of Sperry Rand Corporation)
(
"
(
"
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
/
/1
-'
I
\..~
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
Univac
(A Division of Sperry Rand Corporation)
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
/
/
I
/'
- &.
800:001. 00 I
SlANDARD
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
CONTENTS
~EDP
AUERBAC~
REPORTS
~
CONTENTS
Report 800: UNIVAC 490 Series -
General
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800:011
Data Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800:021
System Configuration (General) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . • . • . . . • • . . 800: 031
Internal Storage Main (Processor) Core Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flying Head 880 Magnetic Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flying Head 432 Magnetic Drum . . • . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . • . • . • . • • . . • . . . .
Flying Head 1782 Magnetic Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . .
Fastrand II Mass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
800:041
800:042
800:043
800:044
800:045
Central Processors (General) . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . . . • . . . . . . 800:051
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800:061
Input-Output; Punched Card and Tape Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800:071
Card Punch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . 800:072
Paper Tape Reader/Punch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . 800:073
Input-Output; Printers High-Speed Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . • . . . • . . • • • • . 800: 081
Input-Output; Magnetic Tape Handlers Uniservo VIC and VIIIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . 800:091
Uniservo ITA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . • . . . • . . . • . . 800:092
Uniservo ITIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • 800:093
Input-Output; others Data Communications Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . 800:101
UNIV AC 1004 . . . . . . . . . . . • . • . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800: 102
Simultaneous Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . 800: 111
Instruction List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . 800: 121
Data Codes . . • . • • . . • . . . . • . . . . . • • . • . • . . . . . . . . . . • . • • . . . . . . . . . . • . . 800:141
Problem Oriented Facilities Utility Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . • . • . . . . . . . . . . 800: 151
Process Oriented Language COBOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . • . . . . . . . • . . . . 800: 161
FORTRAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800: 162
Machine Oriented Language SPURT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800:171
Program Translator SPURT . • • . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . • . • . . . . . . . . . . 800: 181
I
\ '---
Operating Environment REX . • . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . 800: 191
System Performance (General) . . • • . • . • . • . • . . • . . . . . • . . . . . • • . . . . • • • . . . • 800:201
Physical Characteristics . . . . . . . . • . • . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . • . • . • . . • • . . . . . • . 800:211
Price Data . . . • . • . • . • • • • • . • . . . . • . . • . . • • . . . • • . . • . . • • . . . . . . . . . . . . 800:221
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
1/66
800:001.002
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
Report 80 1: UNIVAC 490
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . • . .
Central Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • • . . . . . . . . . . .
System Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • • • • . . • • . • . • • . • • • . . . . . . .
Price Data . . . • • • . . . • . • . • . • . . • . . . . . . . . . • . . . • • • . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
801:011
801:031
801:051
801:201
801:221
Report 802: UNIVAC 491/492
Introduction . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Central Processor . . . . . . . . . . . • . • . • • . . • . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Performance . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
802:011
802: 031
802:051
802:201
Report 804: UNIVAC 494
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . .
Central Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . .
Operating Environment: Omega . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1/66
A
AUERBACH
,@
804:011
804: 031
804: 051
804: 191
804:201
800:011. 100
J&
STANDARD
EDP
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
INTRODUCTION
REPORTS
AUERBACH
~
INTRODUCTION
.1
SUMMARY
The UNIVAC 490 Series consists of three recently-announced, medium-to-Iarge-scale
computer systems (the 491, 492, and 494) and one older system (the 490) which
was initially delivered in December of 1961. The three newer systems, announced in
June of 1965, are also known as the "UNIVAC Modular 490 Real-Time Systems."
The 490 Series is designed primarily for applications that require control based upon
continuously updated records. Examples of this type of real-time application, in which
it is essential or highly desirable to reduce the time lag between the occurrence of a
transaction and the corresponding updating of one or more master files, include airline
reservation systems, savings bank operations, production scheduling, inventory control, and order processing. Message switching is another important application. The
490 Series is also suitable for commercial applications of the more conventional batch
processing type, particularly when they are run as "background" programs to use the
processor time periods that would otherwise be idle between real-time transactions.
The principal characteristics that make the UNIVAC 490 Series suitable for real-time
applications are:
• A variety of fast, large-capacity random-access storage units for masterfile data and systems programs.
• Hardware and software facilities that permit concurrent processing (multiprogramming) of real-time and batch programs.
o Flexible data communications equipment that facilitates two-way communications between the computer and remote points.
The original UNIVAC 490 system evolved as a commercial outgrowth of UNIVAC's Defense
Systems computer development work. Originally conceived as a special-purpose system
for airline reservations, the 490 was later successfully applied to a wide range of other
commercial applications. A major factor in enhancing the saleability and effectiveness
of the 490 was the development of REX, an integrated, drum-oriented operating system
capable of controlling the concurrent operation of one real-time program and one or
more batch-type programs. REX is used by the majority of 490 installations, and will
serve as the standard operating system for the newer UNIVAC 491 and 492 as well.
The major change in the original UNIVAC 490 system during its four-year production
cycle was the introduction of an optional feature that improves its basic memory cycle
time from 6 to 4.8 microseconds, with proportional increases in internal processing
speeds. About 60 UNIVAC 490 systems have been delivered to date.
(
The three recently-announced members of the 490 Series follow the industry trend by
offering significantly more performance per dollar than their predecessor. Using a
typical 10-tape system (our Standard Configuration VIIA) as a basis for comparison, the
original UNIVAC 490 system, with a 6-microsecond cycle time, rents for $31,270 per
month. The newer UNIVAC 491, with a 4. 8-microsecond cycle time, rents for $23,715
per month - a 24% reduction in rental. The UNIVAC 492 is identical to the 491 except
that the 492 provides six more I/O channels at a rental increase of $1,750 per month.
The powerful new UNIVAC 494, with actual and effective cycle times of O. 75 and O. 375
microseconds, respectively, rents for $32,715 per month, or only 5% more than the
much slower 490. The 494 also provides an expanded instruction repertoire and improved
multiprogramming capabilities. It is clear that UNIVAC's marketing strategy in announcing
the three new systems is to attract new customers through the lower price tags on the 491
and 492, while retaining present customers by enabling them to trade up to the more
powerful but program-compatible 494 at very modest increases in cost.
The structure of this report parallels that of our other recent reports on computer
"families"; it is designed to present the facts about the 490 Series in a manner that will make
it easy for you to locate the material you need, while placing proper emphasis upon the
similarities and differences among the various models. This coverage consists of a
general Computer System Report (behind Tab 800) which analyzes the concepts, hardware, and software that are common to all or most of the 490 Series models, plus
individual Subreports (behind Tabs 801, 802, and 804) which report the characteristics
and performance of the individual 490 Series processors and of computer systems
based upon them.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
12/65
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
800: OIL 200
.2
CENTRAL PROCESSORS AND CORE STORAGE
In all four of the UNIVAC 490 Series processors, each 30-bit word location in core storage can hold one instruction, one 30-bit or two 15-bit binary data items, or up to five
alphameric characters. Core storage capacity can range from a minimum of 16,384
words (in all models) to a maximum of 32,768 words in the 490, 65,536 words in the
491 or 492, and 131,072 words in the 494. Parity checks upon internal operations are
performed only in the 494. Cycle times and other features of the 490 Series processors
and core storage units are summarized in Table 1.
TABLE I: CHARACTERISTICS OF THE UNIVAC 490 SERIES PROCESSORS
Processor Model
UNIVAC 490
UNIVAC 49i
UNIVAC 492
UNIVAC 494
Maximum No. of I/O Channels
14
(12 available)·
8
(6 available)
14
(12 available)
24
(23 available)
Core Storage Cycle Time, p,sec
6.0
(4.8 optional)
4.8
4.8
0.75
(0.375 effective)
Core Storage Capacity,
30-bit words
16,384 or
32,768
16,384 to
65,536
16,384 to
65,536
16,384 to
131,072
Core Storage Protection
No
Yes;
1,024-word
increments
Yes;
1,024-word
increments
Yes;
64-word
increments
Core Storage Overlap
No
No
No
Yes
Core Storage Parity Checking
No
No
No
Yes
Floating-Point Arithmetic
No
No
No
Yes
Double-Precision Arithmetic
No
No
No
Yes
Decimal Arithmetic
No
No
No
Yes
Maximum I/O Data Rate,
characters/second
417,000
521,000
521,000
2,747,000
Facilities common to all of the 490 Series processors include a full complement of fixedpoint binary arithmetic, Boolean, comparison, and shifting operations. Facilities for
editing and radix conversion, however, are conspicuously absent. Anyone instruction
can be automatically repeated up to 32,767 times, permitting efficient table lookup and
accumulate operations. There are seven index registers, with a typical set of related
instructions for loading, testing, and storing them. (The 494 has two sets of seven index
registers to facilitate operating system control.)
Sixty-two basic single-address instructions are common to all of the 490 Series processors.
Each of these basic instructions consists of five distinct parts: a 6-bit operation code; a
3-bit field that can specify a variety of conditions under which a skip or jump shall occur;
a 3-bit field that specifies whether the operand shall be a full word, a half word, or a
literal; a 3-bit index register deSignator; and a 15-bit field that can specify an operand
address, a literal operand, or a shift count. This flexible instruction format permits
numerous variations of each of the 62 basic instructions.
The UNIVAC 494 has an expanded instruction repertoire that provides a full range of
double-precision arithmetic, floating-point arithmetic, decimal arithmetic, and enhanced
character-handling facilities. The 47 additional instructions which are unique to the 494
exceed the capacity of the 490 Series' 6-bit operation code field, so UNIVAC uses the
next 6 bits of the instruction word to specify the operation code for these additional instructions. As a result, the 47 instructions which are unique to the 494 cannot specify the use
of partial-word operands or transfers of control based upon the results.
Average execution time per instruction in a basic UNIVAC 490 Processor is about 10
microseconds. The longest instruction - Divide - requires 86.4 microseconds, while
a few instructions require as little as 6 microseconds. All instruction times for a 491,
492, or a 490 with the optional 4. 8-microsecond memory are exactly 20 percent shorter
than the times for the basic 490.
Average instruction execution time for a UNIVAC 494 system with more than 16,384 words
of core storage can approach the actual cycle time of 0.75 microseconds when Odd/even
12/65
fA
AUERBACH
'"
(Contd. )
INTRODl:JCTION
.2
.3
800:011. 201
CENTRAL PROCESSORS AND CORE STORAGE (Contd.)
memory-bank overlapping is employed. This means that the next instruction can be read
from one memory bank while the processor is executing an instruction that references an
operand in the other memory bank. The overlap facility can also be used to minimize
access conflicts when two UNIVAC 494 processors share the same core storage.
A UNIVAC 494 system can include a maximum of three central processors, any two of
which can operate simulta.neously by interleaving their accesses to core memory. Total
core storage capacity is limited to a maximum of 131,072 words in two banks, as in a
single-processor 494 system. Thus, the UNIVAC 494's capabilities for multiprocessing
are significantly less powerful than those of the recently-announced UNIVAC n08-II
system; the multiprocessing capability for the 494 is provided primarily to ensure ample
growth possibilities without extensive reprogramming for users of the 490 Series.
The 490 Series processors have effective program interrupt facilities which cause a
transfer of control to one of 44 to 73 fixed core locations (depending upon the model)
upon completion of an I/O operation, upon detection of a processor or I/O error, or
upon overflow of either the real-time clock or the day clock. Interrupts from any or
all I/o channels can be enabled or disabled by means of special instructions.
Storage protection facilities, which prevent user programs from gaining unauthorized
access to specified areas of core storage, are an important factor to consider in evaluating computers with multiprogramming capabilities. The original UNIVAC 490 system
has no storage protection facility. The 491 and 492 contain hardware facilities that permit individual 1, o24-word blocks to be guarded against unauthorized access. The 494
provides effective protection through a combination of hardware facilities and the Omega
operating system. The "Guard Mode," in which user programs will normally operate,
prohibits the use of input-output instructions and other instructions reserved for operating system use. Individual 64-word blocks of core storage can be protected against
writing only, or against both reading and writing. Attempted violations of storage
protection cause program interrupts.
The maximum number of input-output channels available for each of the 490 Series
processors is indicated in Table 1. In every 490, 491, and 492 system, one channel is
reserved for the console and one for the real-time clock. In the 494, a single channel
serves both the console and the clock. Each of the remaining channels, in general, can
accommodate one peripheral subsystem and can handle one data transfer operation at a
time. The gross I/o data rates for all Simultaneously-operating peripheral devices are
limited to the figures shown in Table 1.
PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
Probably the most noteworthy aspect of the UNIVAC 490 Series peripheral equipment is
the numerous drum storage units and magnetic tape units that are available. Table II
summarizes the characteristics of the three head-per-track "Flying Head" drums and
the two Fastrand units. The Flying Head drums provide rapid access to moderate
amounts of data, while the Fastrand units use movable access mechanisms and store
larger amounts of data, but with slower access times and data transfer rates. A smaller,
less expensive "Modular Fastrand" subsystem was announced along with the newer 490
Series processors, but it was withdrawn from the line later in 1965. UNIVAC's line
of mass storage devices for the 490 Series still lacks a unit with interchangeablecartridge capabilities.
TABLE II: CHARACTERISTICS OF UNIVAC 490 SERIES DRUM STORAGE UNITS
(
\
/
\,,-
FH-432
Drum
FH-880
Drum
FH-1782
Drum
Fastrand
1.31 x 10 6
3.93x10 6
10.5 x 10 6
65.3 x 10 6
130.7 x 10 6
Storage capacity, 6-bit
n.8 x 10 6
characters per SUbsystem
31. 5 x 10 6
83.9 x 10 6
519 x 10 6
1,038 x 10 6
Average access time,
msec
4.25
17
17
92
92
Data transfer rate,
characters/second
240,000
60,000
240,000
25,150
25,150
Usable with 490
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Usable with 491/492
No
Yes
No
Yes*
Yes
U sable with 494
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes*
Yes
Device
Storage capacity, 6-bit
characters per unit
I
Fa strand
II
*Not actively marketed; available as a "compatibility option. "
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporotion and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
12/65
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
800: 011. 300
.3
PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT (Contd.)
Table ill summarizes the characteristics of the five magnetic tape units available for 490
Series systems. UNIVAC now encourages use of the Uniservo VIC or VIIlC tape units,
which use "industry-compatible" (i. e., IBM 729-compatible) 7-track tape. Optional dualchannel controllers permit read-write simultaneity within a single Uniservo VIC or VIlIC
subsystem. The other three tape units were available for the original UNIVAC 490 system,
and they are still offered as "compatibility options" to postpone or eliminate the need to
convert large existing tape inventories.
TABLE ill: CHARACTERISTICS OF UNIVAC 490 SERIES MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
Uniservo
, IIA
Uniservo
illA
Uniservo
illC
Uniservo
VIC
Uniservo
VillC
Tape Speed, inches/second
100
100
112.5
42.7
120
Recording Density, rows/inch
125/250
1,000
200/556
200/556/800
200/556/800
Peak Data Transfer Rate,
Kilo-characters/ second
12.5/25.0
125
22.5/62.5
8.5/23.7/34.1
24.0/66.7/
96.0
Tape Units per Controller
2 to 12
2 to 16
2 to 12
1 to 16
1 to 16
IBM 729-Compatible
No
No
Yes
Yes**
Yes**
Read Backward Capability
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Read-After-Write Checking
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Usable with 490
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Usable with 491/492/494
Yes*
Yes*
Yes*
Yes
Yes
Device
* Not actively marketed; available as a "compatibility option. "
**
Optional feature provides compatibility with the 9-track IBM 2400 Series Magnetic Tape Units
used with System/360.
Other peripheral equipment available for the 490 Series systems includes the following:
•
Punched Card Subsystem: Consists of one Card Control and Synchronizer,
one Card Reader, and/or one Card Punch. In UNIVAC 491, 492, and 494
systems, cards are read at the rate of 800 cards, per minute (or 900 cpm if
only the first 72 columns of each card are read) and punched at 300 cards
per minute. Reading and punching can be performed in Hollerith, row binary,
or column binary mode. (UNIVAC 490 systems use a 600-cpm card reader
and a 150-cpm punch.)
• Paper Tape Subsystem: Consists of a reader, punch, and control unit in a
single cabinet. Maximum speeds are 400 characters per second when reading
and 110 characters per second when punching. Paper tape with 5 to 8 channels
can be read and punched.
• High-Speed Printer Subsystem: Consists of a Control and Synchronizer Unit
and one Printer. Maximum speed is 700 alphanumeric or 922 numeric 132character lines per minute. There are 63 printable characters.
• UNIVAC 1004 Subsystem: The 1004 is a small, plugboard-programmed
computer that can be connected on-line to a 490 Series system and can perform editing and input-output functions. The 1004 can read cards at 400 or
615 cards per minute and can print at 400 or 600 lines per minute, depending
upon the model. Other peripheral equipment that can be connected to the
1004 includes a 200-cpm card punch and one or two magnetic tape units.
• Data Communication Subsystem (For UNIVAC 491, 492, and 494 systems):
Consists of 1 Communication Terminal Module Controller and 1 to 16 Communication Terminal Modules, each of which can control a maximum of 2
input lines and 2 output lines. Up to 64 communications lines can thus
be multiplexed into a single I/O channel. This multiplexing eqUipment
enables the computer to send and receive data via most common-carrier
facilities at transmission rates of up to 4,800 bits per second. The original
UNIVAC 490 system uses similar communications equipment, although its
nomenclature is different and its cost is higher.
(Contd.)
12/65
fA
AUERBACH
~
INTRODUCTION
.3
800:011. 301
PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT (Contd.)
• Data Communication Terminals: These single-line controllers can be used
for data communications applications where the multiplexing capabilities
of the preceding subsystem are not required. Models are available for interfacing with the public telephone network (at 2,000 bits per second), a
private voice-band line (at 2,400 bits per second), or a Telpak A link (at
40, SOO bits per second)
0
.4
SOFTWARE
The introduction of a series of new computer systems that are program-compatible with
an earlier system has obvious advantages for the manufacturer as well as for the user.
Software developed and perfected for the older system can be supplied with the newer
systems, thereby relieving many of the pressures usually associated with the software
development process.
UNIVAC 491 and 492 systems will be able to utilize all of the existing UNIVAC 490 software. When operating in the special 490-compatible mode, UNIVAC 494 systems will
also be able to use the existing software, but this mode will not permit full utilization
of the 494's expanded capabilities. For this reason, current software development
work is being concentrated upon new facilities for the 494. Eventually, UNIVAC plans
to make subset versions of the 494 software available for the 490, 491, and 492, as replacements for the software originally developed for the 490. This approach to software
development has two advantages for the UNIVAC 490 user who elects to retain his present equipment: he is assured of continued maintenance of the present software, and
later he will be able to use a set of completely new, improved software facilities .
• 41
UNIVAC 490 Software
Programs developed for the UNIVAC 490, all of which are currently available and usable
with UNIVAC 491, 492, and 494 systems as well, can be summarized as follows:
• REX - An operating system capable of controlling a single real-time program
and one or more batch programs, all operating concurrently. REX is designed
to provide for efficient utilization of the available system components and to
process a scheduled set of jobs with a minimum of operator intervention. REX
requires a magnetic drum, at least one magnetic tape unit, and an average
of about 4,000 core locations.
•
SPURT - An assembly system that translates symbolic source programs into
machine-language object programs in relocatable or absolute form. At least
four magnetic tape units are required. Facilities for user-defined macroinstructions are available only for systems that include a Fastrand or Flying
Head Drum.
•
COBOL - A compiler for COBOL-61 source programs that operates under
control of REX and produces a SPURT-coded symbolic program as output.
All of Required COBOL-61 and a number of useful electives and extensions
have been implemented. A magnetic drum and at least five magnetic tape
units are required for COBOL compilations.
•
Sort/Merge - A generalized routine that sorts data on magnetic tape according to programmer-specified parameters. The cascade method is used for
the merge passes. From 3 to 12 Uniservo tape units on a single channel can
be used, and an FH-SSO Drum can be used in the presort phase when available.
Sorting can be performed concurrently with a real-time program, under control of REX.
•
Utility Routines - A series of generalized routines to perform such functions
as:
Transcribing data from one peripheral medium to another;
Tracing and mOnitoring programs;
Maintaining program libraries on magnetic tape;
Transcribing programs from a library tape to a Master
Instruction Tape in a specified sequence.
•
Library Subroutines - Sixty subroutines designed to handle frequentlyencountered programming tasks such as:
I
(
"
Multi-precision arithmetic on binary or Fieldata-coded items;
Character insertion and extraction;
Radix conversions between Fieldata and binary formats;
Editing (zero suppression, floating dollar Sign, etc.);
File control;
Data movement, scaling, and rounding.
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
12/65
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
800:011.420
. 42
UNIVAC 494 Software
The software being developed especially for the UNIVAC 494 centers around a comprehensive operating system called Omega. which is scheduled for delivery in June 1966.
If the term "third-generation" can be applied to software, as well as to hardware, then
Omega is a true third-generation operatiilg system. The lessons learned in implementing
and applying REX, the UNIVAC 490 operating system, were used as foundations for the
development of Omega. The system is modular in design, a characteristic that will make
it easier for UNIVAC to "retrofit" Omega for use on 490, 491, and 492 systems in the
future.
Omega is designed to control the scheduling and execution of a mix of independent realtime and batch-type programs in a multiprogramming mode. Assigned priorities and
balanced utilization of the system's facilities are the governing factors. Conflicting user
programs are "rolled out" of core storage and restarted when the facilities required for
their continued operation again become available. Exclusive control and allocation of
all system facilities by Omega allows changes in configuration and/or operating procedures
without direct impact on user programs. Omega requires 4,000 to 8,000 words of core
storage for its resident routines, plus at least 786,432 words of drum storage.
The collection and loading of the routines required for a particular task is facilitated
by having all source-language processors produce a common form of relocatable output.
An integrated test system facilitates debugging operations and permits testing of new
programs concurrently with the real-time operation of other programs.
The processing of batch-type programs is facilitated by Omega's facilities for automatic
job-to-job transitions, communication within and between jobs, and services such as
logging and accounting. An unusual feature of the batch processing environment is
Omega's ability to provide multiprogramming within an individual activity. This "Fork
and Join" function allows, for example, the second pass of a sort to begin processing
the initial output of the first pass while the first pass is still transcribing data. The
ability for computer systems with random-access storage to perform this type of processing is not new, but including this ability as a general software option is quite novel.
The following source-language processors are being developed for use with Omega:
12/65
•
COBOL - The COBOL compiler for the UNIVAC 494 is based on the
language defined in the Department of Defense report, COBOL Preliminary Edition 1964. Source-language compatibility with the existing
COBOL-61 compiler for the UNIVAC 490 is stressed. The new 494
compiler, however, generates a basically "straight-line" form of
object coding, whereas the 490 I compiler uses generalized subroutines.
Compilation times, execution times, and object program memory requirements are said to be reduced by the straight-line method. Additional
time will be saved by having the new compiler's output in the generalized
relocatable-Ioader format, thereby eliminating the separate assembly
phase that the 490 COBOL compiler requires. The subset version of the
494 COBOL compiler, for use with UNIVAC 490, 491, and 492 systems,
will be available with the initial release in the third quarter of 1966. A
minimum of four magnetiC tape units and one drum are required for
compilation.
•
FORTRAN IV - This one-pass compiler accepts a source language
based upon the A. S. A. working specifications for FORTRAN as published
in the Communications of the ACM, October 1964. No complex or
logical operations are provided. Object-program execution speeds will
be much higher on UNIVAC 494 systems than on the other 490 Series
members because of the 494's inherent speed advantage and its built-in
facilities for floating-point arithmetic.
•
UNIVAC 494 Assembly System - The form of the new symbolic assembly
system for the UNIVAC 494 will resemble that of the SLEUTH II assembly
system for the UNIVAC 1107, which features extensive macro-instruction
facilities. The new system (un-named to date) will facilitate effective
utilization of the 494's expanded facilities. The SPURT assembly system
developed for the UNIVAC 490 will also be retained for use in 494 installations where program compatibility with the smaller 490 Series processors
is considered important.
A
AUERBACH
®
-&
800:021. 100
ST"""
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
DATA STRUCTURE
IABD]?
-
AUERBAC~
REPORTS
~
DATA STRUCTURE
.1
.2
STORAGE LOCATIONS
Name of Location
Size
Purpose or Use
Word:
30 bits
Half-word:
15 bits
basic addressable storage unit in
core and drum storage.
high- or low-order 15 bits of a core
storage location, addressable by
k-designator in most instructions.
Row:
(Uniservo VIC, VIllC)
7 bits (6 data,
1 parity)
magnetic tape; holds 1 character in
IBM-compatible format.
Row:
(Uniservo VIC, VIIIC
with optional feature)
9 bits (8 data,
1 parity)
magnetic tape; holds 1 byte or 1/4
of a program word.
Column:
12 positions
punched cards; usually holds 1
character.
Line:
132 characters
High-Speed Printer reports.
Block:
1 to N words
magnetic or punched tape.
DATA FORMATS
TYpe of Information
Representation
Instruction: • . . . . . . • . . . . . • • • . . . . . . • . • . . • . . • .
Fixed-point number: • . . . • . . • . . . . . . . . • . • • • . • . .
1 word.
1 word; 29 data bits and sign bit
(or 1 half-word).
Floating-point number 490, 491, 492: . . • . • . . • • • . • . • . . . • . • . • • • . • . .
494:
(
.•••••.•••.•.•........•.•..•..•...•
2 words; 28 data bits
for fractional part,
exponent.
2 words; 48 data bits
for fractional part,
exponent.
and sign
15 bits for
and sign
11 bits for
Alphameric character: . • . . . . . . . . • . • • • • . . • • . . • •
6 bits (internal), 1 row (tape),
or 1 column (cards).
Card image (row binary): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . • . . .
3 words (2 with 30 bits and 1
with 20 bits) per card row;
36 consecutive words per
card.
Card image (column binary): • . • . . . . • • . . . . . . . • . ..
2-1/2 card columns per word;
32 consecutive words per
card.
Record:
1 to N words of logically related information.
File: • • • . • . • • . • . • . . . • • • • • . . . . . • • • . • . . • • ..
1 to N records.
I
~
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
12/65
800:031. 100
A
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
AUERBACH
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Every UNIVAC 490 Series computer system includes a Central Processor Set consisting of the following units:
•
Central Processor (see Report Sections 801:051, 802:051, and 804:051 for
details).
•
Power Control Cabinet.
•
Motor-Alternator.
•
Control Console.
•
Core Memory (see Report Section 800:041 for details).
A UNIVAC 490 Series Central Processor can contain from 6 to 24 general-purpose
input-output channels, depending upon the model; and, with only a few exceptions, anyone of
the standard 490 Series peripheral subsystems can be connected to anyone of the generalpurpose channels. Please refer to Report Section 800: 111, Simultaneous Operations, for the
details and exceptions. The standard peripheral subsystems are described in Report Sections
800:042 thru 800:045 (mass storage) and 800:071 thru 800:102 (input-output).
For diagrams and prices of UNIVAC 490 Series systems arranged in standard configurations, as defined in Section 4:030 of the Users' GUide, see the System Configuration sections of the subreports on the individual models:
UNIVAC 490:
. . • . . . . • . . • • • . . . . Section 801:031
UNIVAC 491/492: •.•.••.•••.•.•• Section 802:031
UNIVAC 494:
12/65
STANDARD
EDP
.•.••.••••..•...• Section 804:031.
fA.
AUERBACH
~
~
REPORTS
&
IA\EDP
800:041. 100
STANDARD
.
AUERBACH
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
PROCESSOR STORAGE
REPURTS
INTERNAL STORAGE: PROCESSOR STORAGE
.1
GENERAL
.11
~dentity:
490/491/492
••.••.
0
•••
Processor Storage for
UNIVAC 490, 491, 492,
and 494.
.12
Basic Use: ..•••••• working storage.
. 13
Description
I/O control:
Interrupt control:
Clocks:
lli
48 words
21 words*
4 words
* 16
additional locations are reserved when operating in the UNIVAC 490 mode .
The main core storage characteristics of the 490
Series are summarized in Table 1.
·2
Main storage is physically integrated with the Processing Unit in UNIVAC 490, 491, and 492 systems,
and is housed in separate cabinets in UNIVAC 494
systems. A synchronization facility in the UNIVAC
494 allows core memory to be shared by two or
three processors.
.14
28 words
44 words
1 word
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Storage Medium: .••• magnetic core.
.23
Storage Phenomenon: • direction of magnetization.
· 24
Recording Permanence
· 241 Data erasable by
instructions: . . . . • .
. 242 Data regenerated
constantly: • . . . . . .
.243 Data volatile: . • . . . •
.244 Data permanent: . . . .
· 245 Storage changeable: •.
Availability: . . • . . . . 490: discontinued.
491: 9 months.
492: 9 months.
494: 9 months.
yes .
no.
no.
no.
no .
. 27
Interleaving Levels: .• no interleaving in 490, 491,
or 492; dual-bank interleaving in 494 systems
with 32,768 words or
more .
• 28
Access Techniques
· 281 Recording method: •.. coincident current.
· 282 Reading method: .•.• coincident current •
. 283 Type of access: . . . . . uniform; read-out followed
by rewrite.
TABLE I: CHARACTERISTICS OF 490 SERIES CORE STORAGE
UNIVAC 490 Series Models
Capacity.
30-bit
words
/
UNIVAC 490
UNIVAC 491
UNIVAC 492
UNIVAC 494
8187-99
8187-98
8187-97
8187-96
8187-95
8187-94
8187-93
8187-92
8187-91
8187-90
8187-89
8187-88
7005-99
7005-98
16,384
32,768
40,960
49,152
57,344
65,536
98,304
131,072
8188 thru 8193
8194 thru 8199
Parity Check
No
No
No
Yes
Cycle Time,
p.sec
6.0 (4.8 opt.)
4.8
4.8
0.750*
Read Access
Time, p.sec
1.9
1.5
1.5
0.375
Memory
Lockout
None
1024-word
increments
1024-word
increments
64-word
increments
-
-
-
-
7005-97
7005-96
7005-95
(
'--.
* The 494's effective cycle time equals its read access time (0.375 p.sec)
when the odd-even addressing scheme is used with the dual banks of
core storage in all models except the 7005-99.
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
12/65
800:041. 290
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
.29
Potential Transfer Rates
Cycling rate,
words/sec:
Data rate,
words/sec:
Compound data rate,
words/sec:
UNIVAC 490
UNIVAC 491/492
UNIVAC 494
166,667
208,333
1,333,333
166,667
208,333
1,333,333
166,667
208,333
2,666,667
.3
DATA CAPACITY
.31
Module and System
Sizes: •..••••..• see Table 1.
.32
Rules for Combining
Modules: . . • . . . . • see Table 1.
.4
CONTROLLER: •.••. no separate controller.
.5
ACCESS TIMING
• 51
Arrangement of
Heads: .•..•..•.• 1 access facility per processor (2 in dual-bank
494 models) .
.73
Effective Transfer Rate
.8
With self (via Central Processor) UNIVAC 490: .•••• 83,000 words/sec or
415,000 char/sec, using
repeated "Replace"
ins truction.
UNIVAC 491/492: •• 104,000 words/sec or
520,000 char/sec, using
repeated "Replace"
instruction .
UNIVAC 494: ••.••• 444,000 words/sec or
2,222,000 char/sec,
using repeated "Replace"
instruction.
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Error
Access Time Parameters and Variations
(See table below)
.53
.6
CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: . . • . . . . none.
.7
PERFORMANCE
.72
Transfer Load Size
Check or
Interlock
check*
check
parity check*
record parity
bit .
parity check*
send parity
bit.
check
Invalid address:
Invalid code:
Receipt of data:
Recording of data:
Recovery of data:
Dispatch of data:
With self (via Central
Processor): ....•• 1 full or half word (or 1
double word in UNIVAC
Timing conflicts:
494).
Action
interrupt*
interrupt
interrupt*
interrupt*
resolved automatically by
priority control network.
* In 494 only; not checked in 490/491/492 systems .
• 53
Access Time Parameters
and Variations
UNIVAC 490
Access time:
1. 9 Ilsec
Regeneration time:
1. 9 Ilsec
Free time used by
certain instructions: 2.2 Ilsec
Cycle time:
6 Ilsec
For data unit of:
1 word
UNIVAC 491/492
1. 5 Ilsec
1. 5 Ilsec
1. 8 Ilsec
4.8 Ilsec
1 word
UNIVAC 494
0.375 Ilsec
0.375 Ilsec
-0.375 Ilsec*
0.750 Ilsec**
1 word
* Memory overlap facility.
** Effective cycle time is 0.375 Ilsec in dual-bank models.
,/
12/65
A
AUERBACH
~
800:042. 100
~
STANDARD
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
INTERNAL STORAGE
FH-880 DRUM
ED]?
AUERBACH
REPORTS
~
INTERNAL STORAGE: FH·880 DRUM
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: ..•••.••.. Flying Head 880 Magnetic
Drum.
Type 7304.
.12
Basic Use: • . . . . .
0
•
1,770 revolutions per minute, so the average access
time is 17 milliseconds. Peak data transfer rate
is 60,000 words or 300,000 characters per second.
From 1 to 32,767 words can be transferred in a
single operation. Each drum read operation requires two instructions, a Buffer Control Word
and a Function Word. The instructions initiate
the input buffer and external function on the appropriate input-output channel. The Buffer Control
Word specifies the initial and final core storage
ad.dresses. The Function Word specifies the operatIOn to be performed and the 23-bit initial drum
address. Coding of a drum write operation is
similar. A drum search operation causes successive drum locations to be scanned until a bitby-bit match is found to an Identifier Word in the
stored program. At this point a read operation
can be automatically initiated if desired.
auxiliary storage.
.13. Description
The Flying Head 880 Magnetic Drum is an auxiliary
storage device that provides rapid random access
to moderate quantities of data or programs in
UNIVAC 490 Series systems. Each drum has 880
read-write heads, each serving one trac](. The
term "Flying Head" refers to the fact that the heads
are aerodynamically supported on a boundary layer
of air generated by the surface friction of the rotating drum. The flying head principle permits the
use of larger drums with less critical tolerances
and the close head-to-drum spacing (0.0005 inCh)'
permits high-density recording.
Checking includes a parity check to insure that
each word read from the drum has odd parity,
a character count to insure that each word transferred to or from the drum consists of exactly
five characters, and checks for invalid drum
addresses and function codes. Detection of any
drum error causes the Drum Control and Synchronizer Unit to initiate an external interrupt and
send the Central Computer a Status Word indicating the type of error and the drum location at
which it occurred.
A Magnetic Drum Subsystem consists of from one
to eight Flying Head 880 Magnetic Drums connected
to a Drum Control and Synchronizer Unit. Each
subsystem fully occupies one input-output channel.
Each drum has a storage capacity of 786,432 words
of 30 bits each. Maximum potential storage capacity is therefore 6,291,456 words per subsystem.
See Table I for the maximum storage per computer
system.
Of the 880 tracks on each drum, 768 are grouped
into 128 data bands of six tracks each. The other
112 tracks are used for parity checking, timing,
reference, and as spares. Each 490 word is converted by the Synchronizer into five 6-bit characters. The six tracks in each data band are read
and recorded in parallel, and each word is stored
in a six-by-five matrix of bit positions. An odd
parity bit is generated for each word and recorded
in a corresponding location in one of 32 parity
tracks.
Each data band consists of 6,144 word locations
arranged in the form of three interleaved "angular
sections" of 2,048 words each. This means that
any location can be accessed within one drum revolution, but a maximum of 2,048 words can be
read or recorded per revolution. Drum speed is
.222 DrumDiameter: . • . . . . . • 24 inches.
Length: . . . . . . . • . 30 inches.
Number on shaft: •.. 1.
. 14
Availability: •••...• 9 months .
.15
First Delivery: .•.•• December, 1961.
.16
Reserved Storage: •.• 112 of the 880 tracks are
reserved for spares,
parity, and timing
functions.
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
• 21
Storage Medium: •..• drum •
• 22· Physical Dimensions
TABLE I: FH-880 DRUM MODULE AND SYSTEM SIZES
Minimum
Storage
Maximum
Subsystem
490 and 492
Maximum
Storage
491
Maximum
Storage
494
Maximum
Storage
Drum Subsystems
1
1
12
6
24
Drums
1
8
96
48
192
150,994,944
Words
Characters
Instructions
786,432
6,291,456
75,497,472
37,748,736
3,932,160
31,457,280
377,487,360
188,743,680
654,974,720
786,432
6,291,456
75,497,472
37,748,736
150,994,944
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
12/65
800:042. 230
.23
· 24
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
Storage Phenomenon: . magnetization.
.42
Recording Permanence
.421 On-line: . . . . . . . . . 1 to 6, 12, or 24 controllers
(see Table 1); 1 controller
per Magnetic Drum
Subsystem.
.422 Off-line: . . . . . • . • . none.
· 241 Data erasable by
instructions: .•.•..
· 242 Data regenerated
constantly: . . . . . . •
. 243 Data volatile: ••••..
.244 Data permanent: ••••
.245 Storage changeable: ..
• 25
yes.
no .
no.
no.
no.
.43
.44
Words: . • • • . . • . . . . 6,144.
Characters: . • . • . . . 30,720.
Instructions: .••••. 6,144.
Interleaving Levels: .• 3.
Access Techniques
. 281 Recording method: •.. 1 aerodynamically supported head per track.
• 283 Type of access Description of stage Possible starting stage
when different band is
Switch bands: . • .
selected (or at end of a
band).
Wait for specified
sector: . • . . . . . . when previously selected
band is used.
Read or write 1 to
32,767 words: . . . . when rotational delay is
is zero.
· 29
Data rate:
Interlace option
1
2
4
8
16
word.
30 bits per word.
6 tracks per band.
3 interleav.ing levels (always)
times optional .interlace
factor of 1, 2, 4, 8, or 16.
Words/sec
60,000
30,000
15,000
7,500
3,750
Char/sec
300,000
150,000
75,000
37,500
18,750
DATA CAPACITY
.31
Module and System
Sizes: . . . . . . . . . . see Table I.
.32
Rules for Combining
Modules: . . . . . . . • 1 to 8 Drum Units per
Magnetic Drum Subsystem; each SUbsystem
fully occupies 1 inputoutput channel.
CONTROLLER
. 41
Identity: . . . . . .
12/65
ACCESS TIMING
.51
.52
Arrangement of Heads: one fixed head serves each
track.
Simultaneous
Operations: . . . . . • maximum of 1 data transfer operation per Magnetic Drum Subsystem.
. 53
Access Time Parameters and Variations
Example,
msec
Switch bands:
.0 or 0.134
Wait for specified sector: . . . . . . 0 to 33.3
Read or write: . . . . . 0.0163 to 1,070*
0.0163 to 1,103
*16.3 J.Lsec per word transferred; example
on a 2, 048-word transfer.
1,800 rpm.
2,265 inches/sec.
409.
925,200 bits/sec/track.
,3
.4
.5
.532 Variation in access time Variation,
msec
Potential Transfer Rates
· 291 Peak bit rates Cycling rates: . . . . .
Track/head speed: ..
Bits/inch/track: ...
Bit rate per track: ..
.292 Peak data rates Unit of data: . . . . . .
Conversion factor: ..
Gain factor: . . . . . .
Loss factor: . . . . . .
Data Transfer Control
.441 Size of load: •....•• 1 to 32,767 words;
1 to 4,096 words in
UNIVAC 494 systems.
.442 Input-output area: •.. Core Memory .
. 443 Input-output area
access: . . • . . • . . • each word.
.444 Input-output area
lockout: • • . . . . • . . none .
.445 Synchronization: . . . . automatic.
.447 Table control: . . . • . . none •
• 26· Bands per Physical
Unit: . • . . . • • . . . . 128.
• 28
Connection to Device
.431 Devices per controller: . • . . . • . • . 1 to 8 FH-880 Drum Units .
.432 Restrictions: . . • . . . none.
Data Volume per Band of 6 Tracks
.27
Connection to System
•6
O.
16.7
33.3*
50.0
is based
CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: . . . . . . . none.
.7
PERFORMANCE
.72
.73
Transfer Load Size
With core storage: ..• 1 to 32,767 words, beg.inning with the first word
of a drum sector; 1 to
4,096 words in UNIVAC
494 systems.
Effective Transfer Rate
.8
With core storage: ••• 3,750 to 60,000 words/sec,
depend.ing on the interlace
option used.
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Error
Invalid address:
Invalid function
code:
Receipt of data:
Recording of data:
Recovery of data:
Dispatch of data:
Reference to
locked area:
. . FH-880 Drum Control and
Synchronizer Unit.
Type 8122.
A
AUERBACH
~
Check or Interlock
Action
check
interrupt.
check
parity check
record parity bit .
parity check
send parity bit
interrupt.
interrupt.
not possible.
interrupt .
interrupt.
A
AU~» E~p!:
800:043. 100
SlANOm
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
INTERNAL STORAGE
FH-432 DRUM
....-_-.'!iL...----J
INTERNAL STORAGE: FH·432 DRUM
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: ...
. Flying Head 432 Magnetic
Drum.
. 12
Basic Use: . . . . . . . . auxiliary storage .
. 13
Description
One of the important considerations in multiprogramming is a system's ability to rapidly unload
and reload individual programming tasks from
auxiliary storage. The Flying Head 432 Magnetic
Drum is an auxiliary storage device that provides
the ability to load an entire 32,768-word UNIVAC 494
memory module in approximately 140 milliseconds,
including average access time.
An FH -432 Magnetic Drum Subsystem consists of
from three to nine Flying Head 432 Magnetic Drums
connected to a Drum Control and Synchronizer Unit.
Each subsystem fully occupies one input-output
channel. Each drum has a storage capacity of
262,144 3~-bit words. Maximum potential storage
capacity is therefore 2,359,296 words per subsystem. FH-432 Magnetic Drum Subsystems cannot
be connected to UNIVAC 490, 491, or 492 systems.
The drum speed of the FH -432 is 7, 100 revolutions
per minute, so the average access time is 4.25
milliseconds. Peak data transfer rate is 240,000
words per second. This rate is accomplished by
reading and writing in a basically bit-serial mode,
but with the data "staggered" among 3 tracks at a
transfer rate of 80,000 words per second per track.
The 550KC channel option is required to accommodate this data rate. An interlace factor of 2, 4,
8, or 16 is available, which reduces the data transfer rate to 120,000, 60, ODD, 30,000, or 15,000
words per second, respectively. There are 128
three-track bands per drum unit. The remaining
48 tracks are used for spares, parity, and timing
functions.
FH-432 units can be intermixed with FH-1782 units
in the same subsystem to satisfy requirements for
some very fast-access drum storage in combination
with the larger, slower-access FH-1782 units
described in Section 800:044. A new function of the
control logic of the FH -432 Subsystem enables the
program to interrogate individual drum units to
determine the storage location that is currently
under the read-write heads. The Input/Output
Handler routine can then select from the SUbsystem
queue the data request that can be serviced fastest.
l
. 14
Availability: . . . . . . . 9 months .
.15
First Delivery: . . . . . 3rd quarter 1966.
.16
Reserved Storage: ... 48 of the 432 tracks are
reserved for spares,
parity, and timing functions.
©
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
. 21
Storage Medium: ..•. drum .
.22
Physical Dimensions
.222 Drum Diameter: . . . . . . . . 10. 5 inches .
Length: . . . . . . . . . 9. 0 inches.
Number on shaft: ... 1.
.23
Storage Phenomenon: . magnetization.
. 24
Recording Permanence
.241 Data erasable by
instructions: . . . . . .
. 242 Data regenerated
constantly: . . . . . . .
. 243 Data volatile: . . . . . .
.244 Data permanent: . . . .
.245 Storage changeable: ..
.25
yes.
no .
no.
no.
no.
Data Volume per Band of 3 Tracks
Words: . . . . . . . . . . . 2,048.
Characters: . . . . . . . 10,240.
Instructions: . . . . . . . 2, 048.
.26
Bands per Physical
Unit: . . . . . . . . . . . 128.
. 27
Interleaving Levels: •• I, 2, 4, 8, or 16 .
.28
Access Techniques
.281 Recording method: ... 1 aerodynamically-supported
head per track.
.283 Type of access Description of stage Possible starting stage
Switch bands: . . . . . when different band is
selected (or at end of
band).
Wait for specified
sector: . . . . . . . . . when previously selected
band is used.
Read or write 1 to
32,767 words: . . . . when rotational delay is
zero.
.29
Potential Transfer Rates
.291 Peak bit rates Cycling rate: . . . . . .
Track/head speed: ..
Bits/inch/track: ...
Bit rate per track: ..
.292 Peak data rates Unit of data: . . . . . .
Conversion factor: ..
Gain factor: .••...
Loss factor: . • . . . .
Data rate:
Interlace option
1
2
4
8
16
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7, 100 rpm.
3,950 inches/sec.
687.
6,224,220.
word.
30 bits per word.
3 tracks per band.
interlace factors of 2, 4, 8,
or 16 are optional.
Words/sec
240,000
120,000
60,000
30,000
15,000
Char/sec
1,200,000
600,000
300,000
150,000
75,000
12/65
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
800:043. 300
.3
DATA CAPACITY
.5
ACCESS TIMING
.31
Module and System Sizes
.51
Arrangement of Heads: one fixed head serves each
track.
• 52
Simultaneous
Operations: . . . . . . . maximum of 1 data transfer
operation per Magnetic
Drum Subsystem.
Minimum
Storage
Maximum
per Subsystem
Maximum
per 494
System
Drum
Subsystems:
1
1
24
216
Drums:
3
9
786,432 2,359,296 18,874,368
Words:
Characters:
3,932,160 11,796,480 94,371,840
786,432 2,359,296 18,874,368
Instructions:
.32
Rules for Combining
Modules: . . . . . . . . 3 to 9 Drum Units per
Magnetic Drum Subsystem;
1 to 24 Magnetic Drum
Subsystems per UNIVAC
494 system. Each subsystem occupies 1 inputoutput channel.
.4
CONTROLLERS
.41
Identity:
.42
Variation,
Average,
msec
msec
Switch bands: . . . . . . 0 or 0.04
Wait for specified
sector: . . . . . . . . . . 0 to 8.5
4.25
Read or write: . . . . . • see Paragraph . 292
.6
CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: . . . • . . . none.
.7
PERFORMANCE
.73
.8
Connection to Device
Data Transfer Control
12/65
Effective Transfer Rate
With core storage: ... 15,000 to 240,000 words/
sec, depending on the
interlace option used .
Connection to System
.441 Size of load: . . . . . . .
. 442 Input-output area: .•.
.443 Input-output area
access: . . . . . . . . .
.444 Input-output area
lockout: . • . • . . . . .
.445 Synchronization: .•..
.447 Table control: . . . . . .
Transfer Load Size
With core storage: ... 1 to 4,096 words .
.431 Devices per
controller: . . . . . . . 3 to 9 FH -432 Drum Units.
.432 Restrictions: . . . . . . . none.
. 44
Access Time Parameters and Variations
Stage
.72
. FH-432/1782 Drum Control
and Synchronizer Unit.
Type 6013-02.
. 421 On -line: . . . . . . . • . . 1 to 24 controllers; 1 per
Magnetic Drum Subsystem.
.422 Off-line: . . . . . . . . . . none.
. 43
.53
1 to 4,096 words.
Core Memory.
each word.
none.
automatic.
none.
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Error
Check or
Interlock
Action
Invalid address:
Invalid function
code:
Receipt of data:
Recording of data:
Recovery of data:
Dispatch of data:
Reference to locked
area:
check
interrupt.
check
parity check
record parity bit.
parity check
send parity bit
interrupt .
interrupt.
interrupt .
interrupt.
not possible.
Note: The type of error is indicated by the Status
Word, sent to the central processor when
an interrupt occurs.
fA.
AUERBACH
~
&
fA
AUERBAC~
800:044. 100
STANDARD
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
INTERNAL STORAGE
FH-1782 DRUM
ED]?
REPORTS
~
INTERNAL STORAGE: FH·1782 DRUM
•1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: . . • . . . . • . . Flying Head 1782 Magnetic
Drum.
• 12
Basic Use: ••..•.•• auxiliary storage •
.13
Description
found to an Identifier Word in the stored program .
At this point a read operation can be automatically
initiated if desired.
A new function has been incorporated in the controllogic of the FH-432 and FH-1782 subsystems
to predict and reduce storage access times. This
function enables the program to interrogate a particular drum unit to determine which storage locations are currently under the read-write heads.
The Input-Output Handler routine can then select
from the subsystem queue the data request that
can be serviced fastest.
The Flying Head 1782 Magnetic Drum is similar
to the FH-880 drum (Section 800:042) but offers a
storage capacity that is greater by a factor of 2.67.
The FH-1782's greater capacity is achieved partly
by an increase in the number of tracks (to 1760)
and partly by an increase in the recording density
(to 547 bits per inch). The term 11 Flying Head"
refers to the fact that the heads are aerodynamically supported on a boundary layer of air generated by the surface friction of the drum rotating
at 1,800 revolutions per minute.
An FH-1782 Magnetic Drum Subsystem consists of
from one to eight Flying Head 1782 Magnetic
Drums connected to a Drum Control and Synchronizer Unit. Each subsystem fully occupies one
input-output channel. A maximum of 24 Magnetic
Drum Subsystems could be connected to a UNIVAC
494 if no other peripheral equipment were required. Each drum has a storage capacity of
2,097,152 words of 30 bits each. Maximum potential storage capacity is therefore 16,778,216
words per subsystem and 402,677, 184 words per
fully-expanded 494 system. FH-1782 Drums cannot be connected to UNIVAC 490, 491, or 492
systems.
;
I
Of the 1,760 tracks on each drum, 1,536 are
grouped into 256 data bands of six tracks each.
The other 224 tracks are used for parity checking,
timing, reference, and as spares. Each UNIVAC
494 word is converted by the Synchronizer into
five 6-bit characters. The six tracks in each data
band are read and recorded in parallel, and each
word is stored in a six-by-five matrix of bit positions. An odd parity bit is generated for each
word and recorded in a corresponding location in
one of 64 parity tracks.
Peak data transfer rate is 240,000 words or
1, 200, 000 character s per second. An interlace
factor of 2, 4, 8, or 16 is available to decrease
the transfer rate by the corresponding factor.
From 1 to 32,767 words can be transferred in a
single operation.
Each drum read operation requires two instructions, a Buffer Control Word, and a Function
Word. The instructions initiate the input buffer
and external function on the appropriate inputoutput channel. The Buffer Control Word specifies the initial and final core storage addresses.
The Function Word specifies the operation to be
performed and the 23-bit initial drum address.
A drum search operation causes successive drum
locations to be scanned until a bit-by-bit match is
Checking includes a parity check to ensure that
each word read from the drum has odd parity, a
character count to ensure that each word transferred to or from the drum consists of exactly five
characters, and checks for invalid drum addresses
and function codes. Detection of any drum error
causes the Drum Control and Synchronizer Unit to
initiate an external interrupt and send the Central
Processor a Status Word indicating the type of
error and the drum location at which it occurred.
. 14
Availability: ....••. 12 months .
. 15
First Delivery:
.16
.•.. 4th quarter 1966 .
.2
Reserved Storage: ... 224 of the 1,760 tracks are
reserved for spares,
parity, and timing functions.
PHYSICAL FORM
• 21
Storage Medium: ...• drum •
· 22
Physical Dimensions
.222 DrumDiameter: . . . . . . 24 inches.
Length: . • • . . . . . 36 inches.
Number on shaft: .. 1.
.23
Storage Phenomenon: • magnetization.
.24
Recording Permanence
· 241 Data erasable by
instructions: •..•.•
.242 Data regenerated
constantly: . • . . . . .
.243 Data volatile: •.••..
.244 Data permanent: ..•.
. 245 Storage changeable: ..
.25
yes.
no.
no.
no .
no.
Data Volume per Band of 6 Tracks
Words: .•••••.•••• 16,384.
Characters: ..•.••. 81,920.
Instructions: .•.•••• 16,384.
.26
Bands per Physical
Unit: . • • . • . . . . . . 256.
.27
Interleaving Levels: .. 1, 2, 4, 8, or 16.
· 28
Access Techniques
.281 Recording method: ... 1 aerodynamically supported
head per track.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
12/65
800:044. 283
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
· 283 Type of access -
• 44
Description of stage PO,ssible starting stage
.441 Size of load: ••.••••
• 442 Input-output area: .••
.443 Input-output area
access: •.•.••.••
· 444 Input-output area
lockout: •••••••••
• 445 Synchronization: ••••
.447 Table control: •••••.
Switch bands: •..• when different band is
selected (or at end of a
band).
Wait for specified
sector: •••.••.• when previously selected
band is used.
Read or write 1 to
32,767 words: ••. when rotational delay is
zero.
• 29
Data rate:
Interlace
option
-1-
2
4
8
16
Char/sec
240,000
120,000
60,000
30,000
15,000
1,200,000
600,000
300,000
150,000
75,000
DATA CAPACITY
.31
Module and System
Sizes: . . . . . . . .
ACCESS TIMING
.52
Simultaneous
Operations:
Access Time Parameters and Variations
Stage
Variation,
msec
Switch bands:
Wait for specified
sector:
Read or write:
OorO.04
.41
Identity: •••••••••• FH-432/1782 Drum Control
and Synchronizer Unit.
• 42
Connection to System
17.0
see Paragraph.292
5.0 to 39.0
17.0
CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: ••••••• none.
.7
PERFORMANCE
· 72
Transfer Load Size
With Core Memory: •• 1 to 4,096 words, beginning with the first word
of a drum sector.
.73
Effective Transfer Rate
With core storage: ••• 15,000 to 240,000 words/
second (exclusive of 17msec average initial
access time), depending
on the inter lace option
used; see Paragraph. 292 •
.8
.421 On-line: •••••••••• 1 to 24 controllers; 1 per
Magnetic Drum Subsystem.
• 422 Off-line: ••.•..•.• none.
Connections to Device
.431 Devices per controller: 1 to 8 FH-1782 Drum Units.
. 432 Restrictions: .••.••• none.
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Error
Check or Interlock Action
Invalid address:
Invalid function code:
Receipt of data:
Recording of data:
Recovery of data:
Dispatch of data:
Reference to locked
area:
check
check
parity check
record parity bits •
parity check
send parity bit
not possible •
Module and System Sizes
Maximum per Maximum per
494 System
Subsystem
--I24
1
192
8
I
402,677,184
2,097,152 16,778,216
10,485,760 83,891,080 2,013,385,920
2,097,152 16,778,216
402,677,184
Minimum
Storage
Drum Subsystems:
Drums:
Words:
Characters:
Instructions:
Average,
msec
o to 34.0
.6
. see table below.
CONTROLLER
12/65
. maximum of 1 data transfer
operation per Magnetic
Drum Subsystem.
Total:
Rules for Combining
Modules: •••.•...• 1 to 8 Drum Units per Magnetic Drum Subsystem; 1
to 24 Magnetic Drum Subsystems per UNIVAC 494
system. Each subsystem
fully occupies 1 inputoutput channel.
.31
none.
automatic.
none.
Arrangement of Heads: one fixed head serves each
track •
.53
.4
• 43
each word.
•5
word.
30 bits per word.
6 tracks per band.
interlace factors of 2, 4,
8, or 16 are optional.
Words/sec
.3
.32
1,800 rpm.
2,265 inches/sec.
547.
1,238,955 bits/sec/track.
1 to 4,096 words.
Core Memory.
.51
Potential Transfer Rates
• 291 Peak bit rates Cycling rate: ••.•.•
Track/head speed: ••
Bits/inch/track: •••
Bit rate per track: ••
.292 Peak data rates Unit of data: ••...•
Conversion factor: ••
Gain factor: ••.•••
Loss factor: •••.••
Data Transfer Control
A
AUERBACH
~
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
1.
IA
AUERBAC~
__
800:045. 100
SlIm"
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
INTERNAL STORAGE
FASTRAND II
lEDJP
REPORTS
-~----..J
INTERNAL STORAGE: FASTRAND II
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
Fastrand II Mass
Storage Subsystem.
Type 6010.
. 12
Basic Use: ..
auxiliary storage.
.13
Description
The Fastrand Mass Storage Subsystem provides
relatively fast random access to large quantities
of data stored on magnetic drums. Each Fastrand
Storage Unit has a capacity of about 26 million
UNIVAC 490 Series words or 130 million characters. A Fastrand Subsystem consists of from
one to eight Storage Units connected to a Fastrand
Control and Synchronizer Unit. Average random
access time to any record in Fastrand storage is
93 milliseconds.
The amount of on-line random access storage
provided by Fastrand II can range up to almost 25
billion characters in UNIVAC 494 systems.
Table I shows the maximum capacity for each 490
Series system for which Fastrand II storage is
available.
Average random access time to any record in
Fastrand II storage is 93 milliseconds. An option
is available to provide a 35-millisecond average
access to 50,688 additional words. This option,
called Fastband, provides 24 fixed read/write
heads. Another option provides lockout protection;
it consists of a key-controlled switch which, when
set, will prevent the writing of data in a specified
area of the drum unit on which it is installed.
Each Fastrand II Storage Unit contains two magnetic drums, which are treated as a single logical
unit by the controller. There are 64 aerodynamically-supported read/write heads per Storage Unit
(32 per drum). All 64 heads are connected to a
common positioning mechanism and move in unison.
Head positioning time varies from 30 to 86 milliseconds and averages 58 milliseconds. Drum
speed is 870 revolutions per minute, so the rotational delay varies from 0 to 69 milliseconds and
averages 35 milliseconds. Activation of addressing circuits requires 5 milliseconds, but this is
overlapped with the other access time factors.
Peak data transfer rate is 25, 150 words or
125,750 characters per second. Optional interlace factors of 3, 7, or 9 are available for
Fastrand units used with UNIVAC 490, 491, and
492 systems. The selected interlace factor applies to all Fastrand units within a subsystem and
must be specified prior to delivery.
Each of the two drums in a Fastrand II Storage
Unit has 6,142 data tracks; each track is divided
into 64 sectors; and each sector holds 33 30-bit
UNIVAC 490 Series words, recorded serially by
bit. The data storage area on each drum is divided
into 192 "positions", with 32 tracks per position.
The 32 tracks that constitute a position are sequentially addressed but are not physically adjacent
to one another; each of the 32 tracks is served by
a separate read/write head.
Every Fastrand read or write operation requires
two instructions, a Function Word, and a Buffer
Control Word. The Function Word specifies the
TABLE I: FASTRAND II MODULE AND SYSTEM SIZES
Minimum
Storage
"
I
'"
Maximum
per
Subsystem
491
Maximum
Storage
492
Maximum
Storage
494
Maximum
Storage.
Subsystems
1
1
6
12
24
Storage Units
1
8
48
96
192
Drums
2
16
96
25,952,256
207.6 x 10 6
1,246 x 10
Characters
129,761,280
1,038.0 x 10 6
6,228x10
Instructions
25,952,256
207.6 x 10 6
1,246 x 10
Words
Sectors
786,432
6,291,456
37,748,736
192
6
6
6
2,492 x 10
12,456 x 10
2,492 x 10
75,497,472
384
6
6
6
4,984 x 10
24,912 x 10
4,984 x 10
6
6
6
150,994,944
Note: Fastrand II was not offered for use in UNIVAC 490 Series systems; halve the 492 capacities
shown here for the corresponding capacities of the Fastrand IA mass storage which is used
in 490 systems.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
12/65
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
800:045.130
.13
.242 Data regenerated
constantly: . . . . ..
. 243 Data volatile: . . . . .
. 244 Data permanent: .. ,
. 245 Storage changeable:.
Description (Contd.)
operation to be performed and the initial drum address. The Buffer Control Word specifies the core
storage addresses of the first and last words to be
transferred. Reading and writing must begin with
the first word of the addressed sector and can continue over any number of sectors. The read or
write operation is halted and an external interrupt
signal is sent to the computer when: (1) the final
core address specified in the Buffer Control Word
is reached; (2) the end of the drum position is
reached; (3) an error is detected; or (4) a "terminate" instruction is issued. Repositioning of the
read/write heads to a different position is a separate operation, which can be carried out simultaneousiy in all the Fastrand Storage Units within a
subsystem.
.25
Fastrand search operations cause the contents of
a specified drum position to be searched until a bitby-bit match is found to an Identifier Word stored
in the controller. At this point a read operation is
initiated. Alternative function codes permit searching every word or only the first word of each drum
sector. The search operations make no demands
upon the central processor or core storage until
a "find" is made.
The Fastrand IA Mass Storage Subsystem originally
announced for the UNIVAC 490 system differs from
the present Fastrand II only in having 3, 072 bands
per drum instead of 6, 144; thus, the data capacity
of each Fastrand IA Storage Unit is half that of a
Fastrand II Storage Unit.
Availability: . . . . . . 9 months .
.15
First Delivery:
2nd quarter 1964.
.16
Reserved Storage:
none.
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Storage Medium:
.22
... ..
...
. 23
Storage Phenomenon:
.24
Recording Permanence
. 241 Data erasable
by instructions: .
12/65
Bands per Physical
Unit: . . . . . . . . . .
.28
Access Techniques
. 281 Recording method: ..
.29
.291 Peak bit rates Cycling rates: . . . .
Track/head speed: .
Bits/inch/track: ..
Bit rate per track: .
.292 Peak data rates Unit of data: . . . . .
Conversion factor: .
Gain factor:
Loss factor:
Date rate:
Interlace option
7
magnetization.
2,112.
10,560.
18,3742,112.
64 (33 words each).
1 (48 bits).
6, 144 per drum.
12,288 per storage Unit.
1, 3, 7, or 9 (optional;
must be selected before
delivery).
64 moving heads per
Storage Unit, connected to
a common positioning
mechanism ..
Potential Transfer Rates
1
3
2.
.
.
Interleaving Levels:.
drums.
23.8 inches .
61. 2 inches, effective .
1.
.
.27
Physical Dimensions
.222 DrumDiameter:
.
Length: . .
.
Number on shaft:
Number per
Storage Unit ..
.
. 283 Type of access Description of stage Possible starting stage
Move heads to
specified
when a different position
position: . . . .
is selected.
Wait for specified
sector: . . . . . . .
when previously selected
position is used.
Read or write 1
when rotational delay is
to 32,767 words:
zero.
Longitudinal check characters and phase-monitoring
circuits are used for error detection and correction, providing for the recovery of up to 11 bits
of missed data. Other checks are made for invalid
addresses, illegal function codes, timing conflicts,
and sector length errors. Detection of any error
causes the controller to initiate an external interrupt and send the central processor a Status Word
indicating the type of error and (in some cases)
the Fastrand location at which it occurred.
. 14
Data Volume per Band of 1 Track
Words: . . . . . . . . .
Characters: ... .
Digits: . . . . . . . . .
Instructions:
Sectors: . . . . . . . .
Address tags: . . . .
.26
no.
no .
no .
no .
9
.3
DATA CAPACITY
.31
Module and System
Sizes: . . . . . . . .
.32
yes.
fA.
AUERBACH
~
870 rpm.
1,086 inches/sec.
1,000.
1, 086, 000 bits/sec/track.
word.
30 bits per word.
1 track per band.
3, 7, or 9 interleaving
levels.
Words/sec
25,150
8,383
3,592
2,794
Characters/sec
125,750
41,915
18,060
13,970
see Table I.
Rules for Combining
Modules: . . . . . . 1 to 8 Storage Units per
Fastrand Subsystem.
Each subsystem fully
occupies 1 input-output
channel.
(Contd.)
800:045. 400
INTERNAL STORAGE: FASTRAND II
.4
CONTROLLER
. 41
Identity: . . . . .
.42
.422 Off-line:
.......
Variation,
msec
Avera~.
5.0*
*
o or 30.0
to 86.0
Wait for specified
sector:
Read or write:
msec
58.0
o to 69.0
35.0
See Paragraph
.292
5.0 to 155.0
93.0
1 to 8 Fastrand Storage Units.
Total:
.432 Restrictions:
none.
* Usually overlapped with other timing factors.
·6
Data Transfer Control
.....
.5
ACCESS TIMING
.51
Arrangement of Heads
.511 Number of stacks Stacks per Fastrand
Subsystem: . . . .
stacks per storage
unit: ........
Stacks per drum: .
Stacks per yoke:
Yokes per storage
unit: ........
.512 Stack movement: ...
.513 stacks that can access
any particular
location:
.514 Accessible locations By single stack With no movement:
With all movement:
By all stacks With no movement:
.......
1 to 32,767 words, beginning
with the first word of a
drum sector; 1 to 4,096
words in UNIVAC 494
systems.
Core Memory.
.52
Simultaneous
Operations: . .
CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: . . . . ..
.7
PERFORMANCE
.72
Transfer Load Size
With Core Memory:
none.
automatic .
none.
· 73
none.
1 to 32,767 words,
beginning with the first
word of a drum sector;
1 t04, 096 words in UNIVAC
494 systems.
each word.
Effective Transfer Rate
With Core Memory Interlace option
Words/sec
3
7
9
64 to 512.
64.
32.
64.
1.
all 64 stacks in a Storage
Unit move in unison, to 1
of 192 discrete positions.
64 sectors.
12,288 sectors.
4,096 sectors per storage
unit.
up to 32, 768 sectors per
subsystem.
maximum of 1 data
transfer or search operation per Fastrand Sub-
©
·8
10,060
4,300
3,360
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Check or
Error
Interlock
Invalid
address:
Invalid
function code:
Recording
of data:
Recovery
of data:
1.
.515 Relationship between
stacks and locations: bits 6-11 of Function Word
designate head address.
',-
Activate addressing
circuits:
Position heads:
1 to 24 controllers (see
Table I); 1 pel' Fastrand
Subsystem.
none .
.442 Input-output area:
.443 Input-output area
access: . . . . . . .
.444 Input-output area
lockout: . . . . . . .
. 445 Synchronization:
. 447 Table control: . . . .
\"
Stage
Connection to Device
.441 Size of load:
,
Access Time Parameters and Variations
.431 Devices per
controller: ..
.44
/"-
.53
Connection to System
. 421 On-Line: . . . . . . . .
.43
Fastrand Control and
Synchronizer.
Type 5009:"08: single channel.
Type 5009-09: dual channel.
system, and 1 headpositioning operation per
Fastrand Storage Unit.
Timing
conflicts:
Physical record
missing:
Reference to
locked area:
Sector length
error:
End of position
reached:
Characters/sec
50,300.
21,500.
16,800.
Action
check
interrupt.
check
interrupt.
record check
character
check
character
and phase
monitoring
interrupt.
check
interrupt.
check
interrupt.
check
interrupt.
check
interrupt.
check
interrupt.
Note: The type of error is indicated by bits 24-29
of the Status Word, sent to the central
processor when the interrupt occurs.
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
12/65
-.&
800:051. 100
STlNDI ..
~EDP
AUERBAC~
REPORTS
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
CENTRAL PROCESSORS
-
~
CENTRAL PROCESSORS
The UNIVAC 490 Series currently includes four Central Processor models: the 490,
491, 492, and 494. Although there is a great deal of similarity among the four models, there
are also some significant differences, including variations in:
•
Memory cycle times and instruction execution speeds.
•
Instruction repertoires.
•
Number of input-output channels.
•
Storage protection and multiprogramming facilities.
•
Checking of internal operations.
The characteristics of the 490 Series Central Processors are summarized and compared in Table I of the Introduction to this Computer System Report, Section 800:011.
Each of the UNIVAC 490 Series Central Processors is discussed in detail in the
appropriate Computer System Subreport, which also provides performance details. These
reports on the individual processor models can be found on the following pages:
UNIVAC
UNIVAC
UNIVAC
UNIVAC
490
491
492
494
Processor:
Processor:
Processor:
Processor:
••••...•••..•.•
••.•.•.•.•.....
••••••.•.•.•...
.••••..••.•.•..
Page
Page
Page
Page
801:051.100
802:051.100
802:051.100
804:051.100.
/
12/65
A
AUERBACH
~
-1.
800:061. 100
STlNDIRD
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
CONSOLE
/AElDP
AUERBAC~
-
•
REf lilTS
CONSOLE
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity: . . . . . . . . . . Control Console.
Maintenance Panel.
.12
Associated Units: ... Keyboard and Printer.
.13
Description
The Control Console is the operating center of the
UNIVAC 490 Series computer systems. It consists
of an alphanumeric keyboard, a character-at-atime printer, and a control panel in a console desk
54 inches wide by 35 inches deep. The keyboard
and printer permit direct two-way communication
between the operator and the stored computer program. The control panel contains displays that
show the status of the program in progress and
switches that provide manual control. The Control
Console is designed for normal system operations
only; the controls and register displays used primarily in maintenance operations are located on
the Central Processor Maintenance Panel (described at the end of this section). The Control Console is connected to one of the UNIVAC 490 system ''S
input-output channels.
Lamps are provided to indicate conditions such as
excessive temperature, illegal function code, Day
Clock or Delta Clock fault, and program stop. The
Day Clock display shows the time of day, in hours,
minutes, and seconds, by means of a six-decimaldigit display. Switch indicators permit the operator to set the three Jump Switches, halt program
execution, start program execution at location
0000, lock out the Console Keyboard, and disconnect the Console Printer .
The Keyboard is a standard 4-bank typewriter keyboard that can generate the 64 basic Fieldata character codes. The Console Printer is the Teletype
Model 28 Page Printer, which prints 1 character
at a time at a peak speed of 10 characters per
second. It can print the 26 letters, 10 numerals,
and 19 special symbols of the Fieldata character
code, and responds to the remaining 9 control
codes (space, line feed, etc.). Output is on paper
from a continuous roll, 8.50 inches wide and up
to 5 inches in diameter.
The Maintenance Panel on the Central Processor
contains other controls and displays which are
used in debugging and maintenance operations.
Binary displays of the contents of the following
Central Processor registers are provided: A, Bl
through B7, CO, Cl, P, Q, R, R' S, U, X, and Z.
Functions of the Maintenance Panel controls include:
o Execution of either one program step or
one clock phase (one-fourth of a cycle) each
time a switch is depressed.
o Disconnection of the Real-Time Clock, the
Incremental Clock, and the Automatic
Recovery feature.
o Normal execution of all instructions except
programmed "stop" instructions, which are
ignored.
(
'-.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporotion and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
12/65
800:071. 100
1&
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
INPUT-OUTPUT
CARD READER
AUERBACH
SUMono
EDP
REPORTS
INPUT·OUTPUT: CARD READER
.1
GENERAL
• Binary card-image reading .
.11
Identity: . . • • . . . . . . Type 0706-00 Card Reader ..
. 12
Description
• Automatic translation from Hollerith card code
to the 6-bit 490 Series internal code when reading in the translate mode. The Channel
Synchronizer assembles the 6-bit codes into
30-bit computer words.
The Type 0706 Card Reader reads standard 80column cards at the rate of 900 cards per minute,
provided that the information to be read is punched
in the first 72 card columns. If the entire 80
columns must be read, the reading rate drops to
800 cards per minute. The capability to read 90column cards is available in another version of the
Type 0706 Card Reader.
• Generation of an interrupt signal upon successful
completion of a read operation and upon detection
of an error condition or a unit not-ready con~
dition. The read-complete interrupt can be
inhibited by the program.
•
One card reader and/or one card punch can be
connected to a Card Control and Synchronizer Unit,
forming a Punched Card Subsystem. Each Punched
Card Subsystem fully occupies one 490 Series
input-output channel. The card reader and punch
units within any SUbsystem can operate concurrently
by sharing their access demands on Core Memory.
(The UNIVAC 1004, described in Section 800:102,
can serve as an alternative punched card input device for 490 Series systems.)
Card images can be transferred to Core Memory
without translation in either the column binary or
row binary mode. In the column binary mode, the
bit pattern of each group of five consecutive card
columns fills two computer words. In the row
binary mode, the bit pattern of each card row fills
two consecutive computer words and the 20 highorder bit positions of a third word.
Significant among the characteristics of the Type
0706 Card Reader are the following:
•
A 3, OOO-card input hopper.
•
A 2,500-card output stacker.
•
Photodiode punch-sensing with automatic checking
of the sensory elements before each card is read.
•
An "infinite clutch" to provide immediate initiation of card feeding on demand.
Setting of testable indicators upon detection of
registration check errors, parity errors, sensing
element errors, unit busy, and unit not ready
(off-normal) conditions.
The ability to initiate a card read operation at any
time (due to the infinite clutch) and the relatively
small demands made on the central processor
during card input operations (see Section 800: Ill,
Simultaneous Operations) should permit maximumrate reading speeds to be maintained in most
applications.
,/
12/65
A
AUERBACH
'"
- £.
800:072. 100
STANDm
1& IE:: lD>JF>
AUERBAC~.L
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
INPUT-OUTPUT
CARD PUNCH
REPORTS
L.---
INPUT·OUTPUT: CARD PUNCH
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: . • • . . . . . . . Type 0600 Card PWlCh.
. 12
Description
o Four separate card transport stations (2 wait
stations, followed by the punch station and the
Post Punch Check station) .
o A single-access-point clutch .
The Type 0600 Card Punch punches and verifies
standard SO-column cards at a peak speed of 300
cards per minute. One card punch and/or one card
reader can be connected to a Card Control and
Synchronizer unit, forming a Punched Card Subsystem. Each subsystem fully occupies one 490
Series input-output channel. The reader and punch
in each subsystem can operate concurrently by
sharing their access demands on Core Memory. A
unit capable of punching 90-column cards is also
available. (The UNIVAC 1004, described in Section
SOO: 102, can serve as an alternative punched card
output device for 490 Series systems.)
Among the significant characteristics of the Type
0600 card punch are the following:
o A 1, OOO-card input hopper.
o Two 1, ODD-card output stackers.
©
o Binary card image punching (a maximum of 240
holes can be punched per card).
o Automatic translation from the 6-bit 490 Series
internal code to Hollerith card code (only in the
SO-column card pUhch models). The Channel
Synchronizer disassembles each 30-bit computer word into five 6-bit characters and transmits them to buffer storage in the Card Control
Unit. Each 6-bit character is then translated
into one Hollerith-coded character.
o Post-punch hole-count checking.
o Generation of an interrupt signal upon successful
completion of the card punch operation, and upon
encountering an error condition or a unit notready condition. The read-complete signal can
be inhibited by the program.
o Setting of testable indicators upon detection of
parity errors, hole-count errors, and unit busy
and unit not-ready conditions.
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
12/65
-.&,.
800:073.100
SIlK""
/AEDP
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
INPUT-OUTPUT
PAPER TAPE SUBSYSTEM
AUERBAC~
. . . . --_.J
REPDRTS
~_..;.
INPUT·OUTPUT: PAPER TAPE SUBSYSTEM
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: • . . • . . . . . . Punched Paper Tape
Subsystem.
. 12
Description
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
12/65
Reader On
Compare Error Clear
Punch Off
Reader Off .
•
Unequal comparison between the punched information and the contents of the punch register.
•
Tape exhausted conditions in either reader
or punch.
•
Lateral motion of the paper in either reader
or punch.
Paper tape reading is performed photoelectrically
by silicon photo-diodes. The width of the tape can
be either 11/16, 7/8, or 1 inch. The tape sprocket
holes, used for timing purposes, are arranged inline, ten to an inch.
For each punched character, channels 0 through 6
can be used for either data or control purposes. If
the character is accompanied by an External Function Signal, the bits are assumed to provide control information. The eighth bit of each character
is used exclusively for control purposes. The control information that can be provided by the eight
bits of a character include the following:
0: . . . . . . . . . .
1: . . . . • . . . . .
2: . . . . . . . . . .
3: • . . . . . . . . .
4: . . . . . . . . . . .
...•...•..
.•••.•.•..
••••.•....
....•.....
The faults that can be sensed by the paper tape
controller include:
The UNIVAC 490 Paper Tape Subsystem consists of
a modified, bidirectional Digitronics B 3500 reader,
a Teletype BRPE-11 high-speed punch, and associated controllers. The unit can read and punch 5,
6, 7, or 8-channel paper tape, according to operator specification. The maximum tape reading
rate is 400 characters per second, and the maximum tape punching speed is 110 characters per
second. Code translation is performed under
program control.
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
5:
6:
7:
8:
The Paper Tape Subsystem does not include a
Channel Synchronizer for the assembly of characters into 490 Series words. Therefore, the
Paper Tape Subsystem and the central processor
must communicate directly, one character at a
time. The eight-bit character codes are transferred to and from the eight low-order bit positions of consecutive core storage word locations.
No automatic code translation or parity checking
is provided.
Read Forward
Read Reverse
Fault
Master Clear
Punch On
fA
AUERBACH
•
800:081. 100
~ ST"""
A\EDl?
AUERBACH
•
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
INPUT-OUTPUT
PRINTER
REPORTS
INPUT·OUTPUT: PRINTER
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity:
.12
Description
....
is often caused by characters being horizontally
aligned too closely on the drum.) The printed lines
can be spaced vertically at either 6 or 8 lines per
inch by a manual control. Horizontal spacing is 10
characters per inch.
High-Speed Printer.
Types 0751, 0755, 8121.
The High-Speed Printer Subsystem consists of a
Channel Synchronizer/Control Unit and a highspeed printer. One output channel is required for
each printer. The power supply of one subsystem
can be shared by a second High-Speed Printer
Subsystem. The maximum printing speed of each
printer is 700 alphanumeric or 922 numeric 132character lines per minute. Up to 63 different
characters can be printed; the character set consists of the 26 upper-case alphabetics, the 10
numerics, and 27 punctuation marks and other
special symbols (illustrated in Table I). The 64th
character code is the space or blank.
Paper can be advanced at 20 inches per second,
under program control. There is no format control
tape to facilitate the control of vertical spacing.
The forms used can range from 2.75 to 21. 5 inches
in width, although use of the 21. 5-inch width restricts the printable portion of the form to the
center 13.2 inches. Up to 5 carbons plus the
original copy, having a combined thickness of 15.5
mils, are acceptable. A maximum of 1. 5 million
lines can be printed between ribbon changes.
Controls provided allow an operator to adjust the
forms up to one full character position, either
horizontally or vertically, during printer operation. The indicators provide information on the
following conditions: power fault, power runaway,
ribbon exhausted, interlock(s) open, overheating,
paper exhausted, and print carriage out.
The 63 printable characters for each position are
arranged in a checkerboard pattern on the print
drum. This staggered arrangement is used to obtain "ghost-free" print quality. ("Ghosting", or
printing characters with the hint of a double image,
TABLE I. STANDARD CHARACTER SET
I
\
"--
Character
Printed Symbol
Character
Close Bracket
Minus or Hyphen
Zero
One
Two
Three
Four
Five
Six
Seven
Eight
Nine
Left Oblique
Semicolon
Open Bracket
Plus
Colon
Period
Question Mark
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Equal
Less
Number
©
]
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
\
;
[
+
:
?
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
=
<
#
Printed Symbol
At the Rate of
Asterisk
Dollar Sign
Exclamation Mark
J
K
L
M
N
0
P
Q
R
Percent
Apostrophe
Delta
Not Equal
Open Parenthesis
Comma
Ampersand
Slash
S
T
@
*
$
!
J
K
L
M
N
0
P
Q
R
%
I
11
~
(
,
&
/
V
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
W
X
Y
Z
Close Parenthesis
Greater
Lozenge
Z
U
1965 AUERBACH Corporotion ond AUERBACH info, inc.
)
>
):(
12/65
800:081.900
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
EFFECTIVE SPEED: UNIVAC HIGH-SPEED PRINTER
6,000
5, 000
4,000
3,000
2,000
1,000
900
800
700
" ,,,I'
600
500
"" ~
400
Printed Lines
per Minute
~
......
roo....
........
~ Numeric Mode
~" ~
Alphameric Mode
~ ~ 1'0..
......
300
200
~
~
-
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
a
1/2
1
3
2
Interline Spacing in Inches
12/65
IA
AUERBACH
~
4
5
/
&
800:091. 100
sTlMom
IA\EDP
AUERBACH
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
INPUT-OUTPUT
UNISERVO VIC AND VIIIC
TAPE UNITS
R[PORTS
1----_....
'iL...-.---..J
INPUT·OUTPUT: UNISERVO VIC AND VIIIC TAPE UNITS
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: . . . . • . . . • • Uniservo VIC Magnetic
Tape Handler.
Types 0858-00, -01, -08.
per inch. Each tape row consists of six data bits
and one parity bit. The nine-channel recording
option permits eight data bits and one parity bit
to be recorded in each row. Block length is variable from one word to the capacity of core storage.
Uniservo VIllC Magnetic
Tape Handler.
Types 0859-00, -02.
• 12
Description
The Uniservo VIC and VIllC Tape Handlers are
7-channel, "industry-compatible" units that
offer data transfer rates ranging from 8. 5 to 96
thousand characters per second. Their performance characteristics are summarized in Table I.
Both units can optionally be modified at the factory
to provide 9-channel recording capability for compatibility with the IBM 2400 Series tape units used
with the System/360. Tape reading can be performed in either the forward or backward direction.
The Uniservo VIC Magnetic Tape Subsystem consists of a single-channel or dual-channel Control
and Synchronizer, from 1 to 4 master units, and
from 1 to 12 slave units. Each master unit contains the power supply for itself and up to three
slave units. The Uniservo VIIlC Subsystem also
offers the choice of a single-channel or dualchannel control, but provides in addition a separate power supply for each of the one to sixteen
tape units that it can control. Each dual-channel
control requires the use of two input-output channels to allow simultaneous read/write operations.
The economy-priced Uniservo VIC tape units provide data transfer rates of 8. 5, 24, or 34KC; the
Uniservo VIlIC tape units can transfer data at 24,
66.7, or 96KC, depending upon the recording density in use. Both models provide a choice of
three recording densities: 200, 556, or 800 rows
The External Function instruction specifies a
read or write operation, the unit involved, the
recording density, and whether or not an external
interrupt shall occur upon successful completion
of the operation. The size of a tape block is indicated by the initial and final addresses in the
Buffer Control Words. Error conditions are
indicated by an interrupt. The central processor
can then determine the type of error by testing
the contents of the input-output Status word.
· 13
Availability: ••.•... 9 months.
· 14
First Delivery: .•..• January 1965.
·2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Drive Mechanism
.211 Drive past the head: •.
.212 ReservoirsNumber: ..••••••
Form: •••.•••.••
Capacity: ..•.•.••
vacuum capstan.
2.
vacuum columns.
approximately 2 feet of
tape in the Uniservo VIC
and 5 feet in the VIllC.
.213 Feed drive: .•.••.• electric motor.
.214 Take-up drive: ••... electric motor.
• 22
Sensing and Recording Systems
.221 Recording system: .•. magnetic head.
• 222 Sensing system: ..••• magnetic head.
.223 Common system: . . . . 2-gap head provides readafter-write checking.
TABLE I: CHARACTERISTICS OF THE UNISERVO VIC AND VIIIC MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
Model
No.
VIC
\
(
'".
Ville
Tape
Speed,
inches
per sec
Recording
DenSity,
bits per
inch
Peak
Speed,
chars per
sec
Interblock Gap Lengths
inches
msec (1)
chars (2)
Efficiency,
100-char
blocks
% (3)
1,000-char
blocks
Demand
on Core
Storage
Full
Rewind
Time,
minutes
42.7
200
556
800
8,500
23,700
34,100
0.75
0.75
0.75
17.5
17.5
17.5
150
417
600
40
19
14
87
70
62
(4)
(4)
(4)
3.0
3.0
3.0
120.0
200
556
800
24,000
66,720
96,000
0.75
0.75
0.75
6
6
6
150
417
600
40
19
14
87
70
62
(4)
(4)
(4)
1.3
1.3
1.3
(1) Time in milliseconds to traverse each inter block gap when reading or writing consecutive blocks.
(2) Number of character positions occupied by each interblock gap.
(3) Effective speed at the indicated block size, expressed as a percentage of peak speed.
(4) Two memory cycles per word are required; memory cycle time for the UNIVAC 491/492 is 4.8 microseconds,
while memory cycle time for the UNIVAC 494 is 0.75 microsecond.
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
12/65
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
800:091. 230
• 23
Multiple Copies: •••• none •
•.24
Arrangement of Heads
IVC, or VIC tape handlers; and with other
manufacturers' "IBM
compatible" tape units.
Use of station: .•••••
Stacks: ..•...••••
Heads/stack: ..•••.
Method of use: .••••
erase or write.
1.
7 (or optionally 9).
1 row at a time.
.35
Use of station: ••••.
Distance: •••••..••
Stacks: •.••.••..••
Heads/stack: •••.••
Method of use: •••••
read.
0.25 inch after write head.
1.
7 (or optionally 9).
1 row at a time.
.41
•3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
.31:
Form of Storage
Physical Dimensions
• 351 Overall width: •••••• 0.5 inch •
.352 Length: •••.•••••• 2400 feet per reel.
CONTROLLER
.4
Identity: •••.•.••.• Uniservo VIC Control and
Synchronizer
(Type 5008-04, singlechannel) •
Uniservo VIC Auxiliary
Control and Synchronizer
(Type 5008-05, dualchannel) •
.311 Medium:
••••••••. plastic tape with magnetizable surface.
• 312 Phenomenon:. • • • • • • magnetization.
.32
.321 Serial by: .•••••••• 5 to N rows, at 200, 556,
or 800 rows per inch; N
limited by available core
storage or UNIVAC 494
Buffer Control Word.
• 322 Parallel by: ••••••• 7 tracks, standard.
9 tracks, with optional
feature.
.324 Track use:
Standard mode Data: •.••••••••
Redundancy check: •
Timing: ••.•••••
Unused: ••••••••
Total: •••••••••
6.
1 (parity).
0 (self-clocking).
O.
7.
With optional Nine-Track
feature Data: ••••••••.• 8.
Redundancy check: • 1.
Timing: .••••••. 0 (self-clocking).
Unused: ••••••.. O.
Total: ••.•••••• 9.
.325 Row useData: ••.•••••••
Redundancy check: .•
Timing: •••.•••••••
Control signals: •••
Unused: •••••••••
Gap: ••••••.••••
.33
.34
Uniservo VillC Control
and Synchronizer
(Type 5008-16, singlechannel).
Positional Arrangement
5 to N.
1.
O.
O.
O.
O. 75 inch.
• . . • • • • • • • binary word image, using
5 tape rows per 490
Series word and odd
parity; or BCD mode,
using IBM 6-bit character codes and even parity.
Format Compatibility: .•••.••.•• with IBM 727, 729, and
-7330 Magnetic Tape
Units; with IBM 2400
Series tape units when
9-track option is used;
with UNIVAC systems
using Uniservo IIIC,
Uniservo VIIIC Auxiliary
Control and Synchronizer
(Type 5008-17, dualchannel).
• 42
Connection to System
.421 On-line: ••••••.••. maximum number of subsystems ranges from 3
(dual-channel, UNIVAC
491) to 24 (singlechannel, UNIVAC 494).
.422 Off-line: ••••.••••• none;
.43
Connection to Device
· 431 Devices per controller: 1 to 16 tape units.
• 432 Restrictions:.. . . • • • none.
• 44
.441
.442
• 443
Data Transfer Control
Size of load: •••.••.
Input-output areas: ••
Input-output area
access: ••••••.••
• 444 Input-output area
lockout: .•••..•••
1 to 4,096 30-bit words.
core storage •
each 30-bit word.
the 491 and 492 provide
memory protection in
1, 024-word blocks; the
494 provides memory
protection in 64-word
blocks.
• 445 Table control: •••••• none •
.446 Synchronization: •••• automatic.
•5
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
.51
Blocks
.511 Size of block: ••.••• 1 to 4,096 30-bit words,
limited by the 12-bit
size counter in the Buffer
Control Word.
• 512 Block demarcation Input: ••••••••••• inter-block gap on tape,
or word count in Buffer
Control Word.
Output: •••••••••• word count in Buffer Control Word.
(Contd.)
12/65
A
AUERBACH
~
800:091. 520
INPUT-OUTPUT: UNISERVO VIC AND VIIIC TAPE UNITS
· 52
Input-Output Operations
• 56
• 521 Input: ••...•..•••• read 1 block of data forward or reverse at 200,
556, or 800 rows per
incp in either binary mode
(odd parity) or BCD mode
(even parity); external
interrupt upon completion of operation is optional.
· 522 Output: ••.••.•.•. write 1 block of data forward at 200, 556, or 800
rows per inch in either
binary or BCD mode;
external interrupt upon
completion of operation
is optional.
· 523 Stepping: . • • . . . . . . 1 block backward (backspace); approximately 4
inches forward (to skip
and erase defective tape
areas).
.524 Skipping: .•••.•••• backspace to an end-offile mark or to load point
of tape.
• 525 Marking: .••..•..• end-of-file mark, interblock gap.
• 526 Searching: •..••..• read first word of each
block and compare it with
identifier word; when a
match- occurs, read the
block as in Paragraph
.52l.
· 53
Code Translation: '"
none; binary images of data
in internal storage are
recorded on tape in either
odd parity (binary mode)
or even parity (BCD
mode).
· 54
Format Control: ••.• by program.
· 55
Control Operations
Disable: •••••..... yes (follow rewind with
interlock).
Request interrupt: •.. yes.
Select format: •.•••• yes; binary or BCD.
Rewind: •••••••••. yes.
Unload: •..•..•••• no.
.8
\
-.
yes.
yes.
yes.
no.
yes.
yes.
yes.
yes.
.6
PERFORMANCE
.61
Conditions: . . . . . . . . standard operation of Uniservo VIC and VIIIC tape
units.
.62
Speeds
.621
.622
. 623
. 624
Nominal or peak speed:
Important parameters:
Overhead: . . . . . • . . .
Effective speeds: . . . .
.63
Demands on System: .. see Table I.
.7
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
.71
Adjustments:
.72
Other Controls
.73
see
see
see
see
Table
Table
Table
Table
I.
I.
I•
I and graphs .
.•. none.
Function
Form
Comment
Rewind:
SWitch/light
Forward:
Backward:
Change tape:
switch/light
switch/light
switch/light
rewinds and positions
tape.
moves tape forward.
moves tape backward.
moves tape to load
position
Loading and Unloading
.731 Volumes handled: .•.. 2,400 feet per reel. For
1, OOO-character blocks:
5.0 million characters at
200 char/inch; 11.3 million characters at 556
char linch; 14. 4 million
characters at 800 chari
inch.
.732 Replenishment time: .. 0.5 to 1.0 minutes.
.734 Optimum reloading period Uniservo VIC: ...•. 11.2 minutes.
Uniservo VIIIC: •••• 4 minutes.
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Error
Check or Interlock
Action
Recording:
read-after-write parity
check
lateral and longitudinal
parity check
all codes are valid.
check
read-after-write parity
check
check
set indicator and interrupt.
Reading:
"
Testable Conditions
Disabled: ...••••••
Busy device: •••••••
Output lock: •••••••
Nearly exhausted: •..
Busy controller: ••..
End of medium marks:
End of file: •••.••••
Rewinding: ••.••••.
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
©
set indicator and interrupt.
set indicator and interrupt.
set indicator and interrupt.
set indicator and interrupt.
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
12/65
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
800:091.900
Effective Speed:
Uniservo VIC Tape Units
100,000
4
~
Et
, / ., ~Io-
10,000
I<'
Effective Speed,
Characters per
Second
~
~Io-
4
~
1,000
~
~~
....,
-
200 bpi
~
"
4
100
4
10
4
4
100
1,000
10,000
Characters per Block
Effective Speed:
Uniservo VIDC Tape Units
100,000
.1
4
~y
JY'M
"'"
'O~"
~r-~
'f,CC ""
10,000
Effective Speed,
Characters per
Second
,
L
~
L.i
4
/
/
1,000
4
100
4
10
4
100
4
1,000
Characters per Block
12/65
fA.
AUERBACH
~
10,000
800:092. 100
&..
STANDARD
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
INPUT-OUTPUT
UNISERVO IIA TAPE UNITS
IA\EDl?
AUERBACH
..."L_ _ _REPORTS
_-I
~_
INPUT·OUTPUT: UNISERVO itA TAPE UNITS
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity: •••••••••• Uniservo IIA Magnetic
Tape Handler.
Type 8143.
.6
PERFORMANCE
• 12
Description
•. 62
Speeds
The Uniservo ITA Magnetic Tape Handlers that
were originally offered with the UNIVAC 490 are
also available for use with the newer members of
the 490 Series as "compatibility systems." The
costly burden of reprogramming tape operations
and converting a magnetic tape inventory can
thereby be eliminated for users of UNIVAC systems dating back to the UNIVAC I.
.621 Nominal or peak speed At 250 rows/inch: ••• 25,000 char/sec.
At 125 rows/inch: ..• 12,500 char/sec.
.622 Important parameters Recording density: .• 120 or 250 rows/inch.
Tape speed: •.•••• 100 inches/sec.
Rewind speed: ••..• 100 inches/sec.
Interblock gap: •••• 1. 05 inches.
End-of-file gap: •••• 4.50 inches.
Start time: •••••.• 5 msec.
Stop time: •.•.•.•• 5 msec.
.623 Overhead, per block Start/ stop mode: ••• 25.5 msec.
Continuous mode: .•• 10.5 msec.
• 624 Effective speeds -
The Uniservo ITA Subsystem consists of from 2 to
12 Uniservo IIA Tape Handlers connected to a
Uniservo IIA Control and Synchronizer Unit and a
Power Supply. Only one tape handler per subsystem can read or write at a time. A panel of dial
switches is used to change the logical unit designations assigned to the individual tape handlers.
Data can be recorded on either plastic-base or
metallic tape at a packing density of 125 or 250
rows per inch. (Data recorded by the Unityper
keyboard-to-magnetic-tape transcriber at 50 rows
per inch can be read, but the Uniservo ITA cannot
record at this density.) Tape velocity is 100
inches per second, providing a peak data transfer
rate of 12,500 or 25,000 characters per second,
depending upon the recording density selected.
Each tape row contains six data bits, one clock
bit, and one parity bit, and can represent one
alphameric character. Five tape rows are used
to represent each 30-bit 490 Series word. Block
length is variable. Tape width and densities are
compatible with those of the Uniservo II and lIA
Tape Handlers used in the UNIVAC II, III, .1107,
and Solid-State 80/90 systems. There is no tape
compatibility with the Uniservo rnA, VIC, or
VIIIC Tape Handlers.
250 ROWs/Inch
Start/ stop mode: .• 25, OOON/ (N + 638) char/sec.
Continuous mode: •• 25,000N/ (N+ 262) char/sec.
125 ROWs/Inch
Start/stop mode: •• 12,500 N/ (N+ 319)
char/sec.
Continuous mode: •• 12,500 N/ (N+ 131)
char/sec. where N is the
number of character s
(i. e. , tape rows) per
block. (See graph.)
Note: The start/stop mode is used unless the
next tape function is initiated within 4
msec after the last character of each
block is read or written.
(
\
'-.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
12/65
800:092. 900
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
EFFECTIVE SPEED: UNISERVO IIA
1,000,000
7
4
2
100,000
7
4
--A
2
Effective Speed,
rows/ second
...
i.--'" i--" ... ~
/" i..'
10,000
I......... -'7
7
A
4
~
~ ~I
2
1,000
C
1:
--""
7' . /
77
....
:.-
-
C
D
i..o'"
V
B~ ~D
/
7
4
;;;Or;;.
~
~
I
"
1/
2
100
10
2
4
7 100
2
4
7 1,000
Tape Rows Per Block
LEGEND
Curve
Curve
Curve
Curve
12/65
A
B
C
D
-
250
250
125
125
rows/inch.
rows/inch,
rows/inch,
rows/inch,
A
AUERBACH
~
continuous mode
start/stop mode
continuous mode
start/stop mode
2
4
7 10,000
800:093. 100
~ STA"'"
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
INPUT-OUTPUT
UNISERVO iliA TAPE UNITS
/AEDP
AUERBAC~
•
REPORTS
INPUT·OUTPUT: UNISERVO iliA TAPE UNITS
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity: ••••••••.• Uniservo IIIA Magnetic
--Tape Handler.
Type 8011.
.12
Description
The Uniservo IIIA Magnetic Tape Handlers that
were originally offered with the UNIVAC 490 are
also available for use with the newer members of
the 490 Series as "compatibility systems." The
Uniservo IIIA, first delivered in March 1963, is
currently the fastest tape unit available for use
with the UNIVAC 490 Series, but it is not compatible with the tape units used with competitive computer systems. The Uniservo IIIA provides format
compatibility only with other Uniservo IIIA units
used with other UNIVAC computer systems, such
as the 1107 and the 418.
From 2 to 16 Uniservo nIA Tape Handlers can be
connected to a Uniservo IIIA Control and Synchronizer Unit and a Uniservo Power Supply, forming
a Uniservo IIIA Magnetic Tape Subsystem. Each
subsystem fully occupies one input-output channel,
and only one tape handler per subsystem can read
or write at the same time.
Data is recorded by the "pulse phase" method at a
density of 1,000 rows per inch. Nine tracks are
recorded across the tape, and one is always used
as a parity track. In the standard recording format, four tape rows are used to represent one
30-bit 490 Series word; the first three rows contain eight data bits each, and the last row of each
four-row group contains only six data bits. An
optional format, selected through plugboard
SWitching, uses five tape rows per word, with
only six data bits (i. e., one alphameric character)
per row. Tape velocity is 100 inches per second,
providing the following peak data transfer rates:
©
Standard Format Optional Format
(4 rows per
(5 rows per
word)
word)
Rows per
second:
490 words per
second:
6-bit characters
per second:
.6
PERFORMANCE
.62
Speeds
100,000
100,000
25,000
20,000
125,000
100,000
.621 Nominal or peak speeds Standard format
(4 tape rows per
word): •••••••• 25,000 words/ sec or
125,000 alphameric
characters/ sec.
Optional format
(5 tape rows per
word): •••••••• 20,000 words/sec or
100,000 alphameric
characters/ sec.
.622 Important parameters Recording density: •• 1,000 rows/inch.
Tape speed: •••••• 100 inches/sec.
Rewind speed: ••••• 300 inches/sec.
Interblock gap: •••• 0.75 inch.
Start time: ••••••• 3 msec.
Stop time: • • • • • • • • 3 msec.
.623 Overhead per block: •• 7.5 msec per block.
.624 Effective speeds: •••• 100,000N/ (N+ 750) rows/
sec, where N is number
of rows per block. (See
graph.)
1965 AUERBACH Corporotion and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
12/65
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
800:093.900
EFFECTIVE SPEED: UNlSERVO IlIA
1, 000, 000
7
4
2
100, 000
.-
7
.."
4
Effective Speed,
rows/ second
"
~
~
,/
2
Continuous Mode
la, 000
7
4
~
,
.,-
~
-
Start/Stop Mode
V
4
2
1, 000
7
,
/
I'
/
/
V/ /
II
V
,
4
2
100
2
10
4
7
100
2
4
2
7
1, 000
Tape Rows per Block
Note: 4 or 5 tape rows per 5-character 490 word,
depending upon recording format.
12/65
A
AUERBACH
~
4
7
la, 000
800: 101. 100
STAHDARD
EDP
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
INPUT-OUTPUT
DATA COMMUNICATIONS
REPDRTS
INPUT-OUTPUT: DATA COMMUNICATIONS SUBSYSTEMS
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.. Communication Terminal
Module Controller(CTMC).
Channel Scanner/Selector.
Word Terminal Synchronous
(WTS).
Communication Terminal
Synchronous (CTS).
. 12
Description
• One Low-Speed CTM,
• One Medium-Speed CTM,
• One High-Speed CTM,
UNIVAC offers a standard line of data communications equipment for use with UNIVAC 418, 490
Series, or 1100 Series computer systems; different
interfaces are provided for connection to the various computers. Included in this line are a multiline controller capable of handling up to 32 fullduplex narrow-band or voice-band lines, and two
single-line controllers capable of handling one fu1lduplex voice-band or broad-band line.
. 121 Multiline Controller
UNIVAC has recently changed the pricing policy and
nomenclature for its Standard Communications Subsystem. The Communication Multiplexor is now
called the Communication Terminal Module Controller (CTMC). Four Communication Line Terminals (CLT's) are now grouped into one Communication Terminal Module (CTM). The CLT-Parallel
Input and Output and CLT Automatic Dialing terminals retain the same names. Savings of up to 50%
in communications equipment costs can be realized
in fully-expanded subsystems containing one CTMC
when compared to the previous Standard Communications Subsystem prices.
Transmission adapters are available for handling
a wide range of communications facilities; see
Table I. The CTMC contains 32 input and 32 output positions. The number of positions required
by each adapter is specified in Table I. The Communications Subsystem is physically contained in
(
• One to four CLT-Automatic Dialing Adapters, or
• One module containing up to two Parallel-Input
Adapters and up to two Parallel-Output Adapters.
One CLT-Dialing is required for each line on which
the automatic dialing function is desired.
An internal clock is required for some adapters;
other adapters use external timing signals from
the associated data set. A maximum of six output
clocks can be included within the second cabinet.
All output adapters operating at the same speed
can utilize the same clock, but each input adapter
has its own clock. Adapters within the same
module can operate at different speeds.
Although each Communications Subsystem fully
occupies the 490 Series input-output channel to
which it is connected, up to four CTMC's can be
connected to a single channel by means of a
Scanner/Selector Unit. Thus, a maximum of 256
simplex lines or 128 half-duplex or full-duplex
lines can be serviced by a single input/output
channel.
A special communications feature, the Externally
Specified Index (ESI), allows a number of communications lines to operate concurrently over a
single input-output channel by providing automatic
sorting of incoming data and automatic collation of
outgoing data.
TABLE I: TRANSMISSION ADAPTER CHARACTERISTICS
Positions Required
Unit
Input
c
two cabinets; one contains the power supply and
communication lines interfaces, and the other contains the multiplexor, the transmission adapters,
and timing clocks. The second cabinet contains
space for accommodating 16 modules. Each
module consists of one of the following:
Output
Code Level
(Bits/char)
Mode
Timing
Speed
Low-Speed CTM
2
2
5, 6, 7, or 8
Bit serial
Asynchronous j
internal
Up to 300
bits/sec.
Medium-Speed CTM
2
2
5, 6, 7, or 8
Bit serial
Asynchronous j
internal
Up to 1,600
bits/sec.
CLT-Parallel Input
1
0
Up to 8
Bit parallel
Timing signsl,
external
Up to 75
char/sec.
C LT - Parsllel Output
0
1
Up to 8
Bit parallel
Timing signsl,
internsl
High-Speed CTM
2
2
5, 6, 7, or 8
Bit serial
Synchronous i
externsl
Up to 75
char/sec.
2,000 to over
5,000 bits/sec.
CLT-Disling
0
1
4
Bit parallel
Timing signals;
externsl
Determined by
common carrier.
Note:
IIAsynchronous" means that start and stop bits are sent with each character to
establish timing; "Synchronous" means that timing characters are sent with each
message to establish timing.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
12/65
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
800:101.121
.121 Multiline Controller (Contd.)
When the Communications Subsystem is used, two
core storage locations are reserved for each communication line (one for input and one for output).
These locations contain the Buffer Control Words.
In addition, two alternating core storage buffer
areas are assigned to each line. The size and
locations of these buffer areas can be varied by
the program.
For other character codes, an approximate maximum character data rate can be obtained by multiplying the above figure by 8(N-l)/7N, where N is
the total number of bits (including start and stop
bits, if any) per character.
.122 Single-line Controllers
UNIVAC offers two single-line controllers, each of
which is capable of controlling communications between a UNIVAC 490 Series computer and a remote
terminal at 285 characters per second over the
public telephone network, at 340 characters per
second over a leased voice-band line, or at 5,800
characters per second over a leased broad-band
facility such as Telpak A. These two controllers,
the Word Terminal Synchronous (WTS) and the
Communication Terminal Synchronous (CTS), are
essentially two versions of the same unit. Both
transmit data serially by bit ina synchronous mode,
with a total of 7 bits per character. There are 6
data hits per character.
A 15-bit code is transmitted along with each message character leaving or entering the Central
Processor. This code, called the address ESI,
identifies the Communication Line Terminal and
Multiplexor. The ESI references a Buffer Control
Word, which in turn indicates the location to or
from which the character is to be sent. When a
buffer has been filled (or emptied), an internal
interrupt occurs, and the Buffer Control Words
are modified by the operating system to reference
the alternate buffer. Incoming data is stored in
the upper halves of the words in the buffer area
(o:ae character per word), and outgoing data is
stored in the lower halves (also one character per
word). Thus, input and output buffer areas can be
overlapped. other arrangements are available
on special request.
The WTS transfers data between the controller and
the computer one word (5 characters) at a time and
performs both character and message parity checking. The CTS transfers data to the computer one
character at a time and performs only character
parity checking. The WTS imposes a smaller demand upon the central processor than the CTS, but
is also more expensive.
All Communication Line Terminals can be active
simultaneously, subject to the maximum data rates
of the computer and the CTMC. Messages can be
transmitted or received while any other peripheral
subsystem is operating and while the Central Processor is computing.
Both the WTS and the CTS can be equipped for unattended answering and automatic dialing (when
connected to the public telephone network) ..
These controllers have been used to connect a
variety of UNIVAC computers with remote UNIVAC
1004 Card Processors. Each controller fully occupies one input-output channel. The maximum
demands on the central processor for communications at 340 characters per second are as follows:
The maximum data rate of the CTMC is determined
by the time required for scanning, the time required to transfer each character to the computer,
and certain characteristics of the adapters. The
resulting maximum allowable communications data
rate for the CTMC, based on 8 bits per character
(including start and stop bits, if any), for each of
the various members of the 490 family, is as
follows:
WTS
UNIVAC 490: . . . . . . . 0.07%
UNIVAC 491/492: . . . . o. 05%
UNIVAC 494: . • . . . . . O. 01%
UNIVAC 490: . . . . . 19,000 char/sec.
UNIVAC 491/492: .. 22,500 char/sec.
UNIVAC 494: . . . . . 51,000 char/sec.
12/65
CTS
0.41%
0.32%
0.06%
The processor demands at other data transmission
speeds are proportionate.
A
AUERBACH
•
800: 102. 100
1&
AUERBAC~
STANDARD
EDP
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
INPUT-OUTPUT
UNIVAC 1004
R£PDRTS
INPUT·OUTPUT: UNIVAC 1004
.1
GENERAL
•
• 11
Identity: • . . • • . . . . • UNIVAC 1004 Proce ssor;
Models I, II, and III.
UNIVAC 1004 Adapter.
8 {lsec cycle time for the 1004 Model I;
6. 5 {lsec cycle time for Models II and III .
•
Editing and decimal arithmetic facilities.
.12
Description
The UNIVAC 1004 is a small, plugboard-programmed computer with 961 or 1,922 character positions of core storage. It can be connected to a
UNIVAC 490 Series computer system by means of
the 1004 Adapter, enabling transmission of data,
in one direction at a time, between 490 core storage and 1004 core storage. The 1004 can provide
data editing, code translation, and similar data
manipulation facilities independently of the 490
program. All operations must be initiated by the
490 program; i.e., the UNIVAC 1004 cannot act
as an independent inquiry station for the 490 Series
system. When it is not in use as an on-line peripheral subsystem for the 490, the UNIVAC 1004
can be used as an off-line data processor, under
sole control of its plugboard wiring.
Some of the important characteristics of the 1004
are:
11\
Plugboard programming.
o 96101' 1,922 positions of core storage.
o 31, 47, or 62 program steps.
• Maximum card reading rate of 400 or 615
cards/minute, depending upon the model.
• Maximum printing rate of 400 or 600 lines/
minute, depending upon the model.
•
132 alphanumeric printing positions.
•
63-character printing set.
•
Optional card punch -
•
Punched paper tape units available - 400
char/sec reading and 110 char/sec punching.
200 cards/minute.
o One or two magnetic tape units can be connected: up to 33,664 characters per second
at densities of 200, 556, or 800 characters
per inch.
For more detailed information on the capabilities
and performance of the UNIVAC 1004, see Computer System Report 770.
Data is transmitted one word at a time to or from
the 490 systems. Except during interprocessor
data transmission, the 1004 operates independently.
The 1004 Subsystem requires one UNIVAC 490
Series input-output channel and can run simultaneously with all other peripheral devices.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
12/65
·SOO:111.100
&
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
SIMUL TANEOUS OPERATIONS
STANDA"
AEDP
AUERBAC~\
•
REPORTS
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
1
INPUT-OUTPUT CHANNELS
•
Punched Card Subsystem: 1 reader and 1 punch
(see Sections 800:071 and 800:072).
The UNIVAC 490 Series Central Processors can
contain 6, 12, 16, 20, or 24 general-purpose*
input-output channels; the possiblities for each
model are shown in Table I.
•
Paper Tape Subsystem: 1 reader and 1 punch
(see Section 800:075).
•
Communication Terminal Module Controller
(replaces the Standard Communication Subsystem for the UNIVAC 490; see Section 800:101).
•
UNIVAC 1004 Processor (see Section 800:102) .
TABLE I: I/O CHANNEL POSSIBILITIES
Number of Channels*
6
UNIVAC 490
.j
UNIVAC 491
.J
12
16
20
24
.2
UNIVAC 492
UNIVAC 494
.j
Each channel contains an input cable and an output
cable, but data flow over the channel is, in most
cases, limited to one direction at a time. Anyone
of the following peripheral subsystems can be connected to anyone of the general-purpose channels
via the appropriate Control and Synchronizer Unit
(with exceptions as noted):
•
•
•
FH-S80 Magnetic Drum Subsystem: 1 to 8 drums
(see Section 800:042).
•
Uniservo IIA Magnetic Tape Subsystem: 2 to
12 tape units (see Section 800: 092).
•
Uniservo IlIA Magnetic Tape Subsystem: 2 to
16 tape units (see Section 800: 093).
•
Uniservo VIC Magnetic Tape Subsystem: up to
4 master units, each controlling up to 3 slave
units; not available on UNIVAC 490 (see Section
SOO:091).
•
SIMULTANEITY
In general, one data transfer operation at a time
can occur on each input-output channel that has a
peripheral subsystem connected to it. The exceptions to this general statement are as follows:
FH-1782 Magnetic Drum Subsystem: 1 to 8
drums, on UNIVAC 494 only (see Section
800:044).
Fastrand Mass Storage Subsystem: 1 to 8
storage units; Fastrand I on UNIVAC 490,
Fastrand lIon remainder (see Section 800:045).
•
.3
FH-432 Magnetic Drum Subsystem: 3 to 9 drums,
on UNIVAC 494 only (see Section 800:043).
•
CONTROL AND SYNCHRONIZER UNITS
The Control and Synchronizer Units provide the
proper interfaces between the Central Computer
and the peripheral units on each channel. During
most output operations, the Synchronizer accepts
30-bie words from the computer and divides them
into 6-bit character elements. During most input
operations, the Synchronizer assembles 6-bit
characters from the input device into 30-bit
UNIVAC 490 words. The peripheral Control Unit,
which is usually in the same cabinet as the Synchronizer, directs the selected input or output
device while it performs the desired functions.
•
The card reader and punch in a single Punched
Card Subsystem can operate simultaneously by
time-sharing their demands on the channel that
services them.
•
An optional Dual Channel Synchronizer can be
used with all magnetic tape subsystems except
the Uniservo IIA. With this option, the subsystem occupies two input-output channels and
can simultaneously control either 1 read and 1
write or 2 read operations (but not 2 write
operations).
•
Uniservo VIllC Magnetic Tape Subsystem: up
to 16 tape units; not available on UNIVAC 490
(see Section 800:091).
•
A magnetic tape or drum Control and Synchronizer Unit (and therefore the channel to which
it is connected) is occupied throughout a search
operation, even though no data is transferred
to the Central Computer until the search has
been successfully completed.
•
When the Communications Subsystem is used,
the channel to which it is connected can effectively be divided into several channels of
(Contd.)
High-Speed Printer Subsystem: 1 printer (see
Section 800:081).
* In addition to these
general-purpose channels, each
490, 491, and 492 Processor includes two more
channels which are reserved for computer-tocomputer communications and for the console and
clock. In the 494, one of the indicated channels
serves both the console and the clock.
12/65
A
AUERBACH
•
An optional Dual Channel Synchronizer can be
used with Fastrand II. With this option, the
subsystem occupies two input-output channels
and can simultaneously control read and write
operations.
/
,/
800: 111.300
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
.3
SIMULTANEITY (Contd.)
.5
lower speed, each with its own core buffer area
and interrupt control. Each Communication
Line Terminal presents the address of its own
particular buffer area to the Central Processor,
permitting messages to or from several different communication lines to be transmitted
concurrently under control of the Communication
Controller.
.4
MAXIMUM I/O DATA RATES
Each data word transferred to or from Core
Memory requires two cycles of Central Processor
time and one additional cycle of input-output logic
time. When alternate input and output data transfers occur, the I/O logic cycles can be overlapped
so that each one-word transfer can be accomplished
within the 2-cycle time period. Table II shows the
maximum total input-output rates, or "saturation
rates, " for the 490 Series Processors.
The consequences of attempting to exceed the maximum data transfer rates quoted above depend upon
the particular peripheral subsystems involved and
the priorities of the channels to which they are
connected. (When there are simultaneous demands
for access to Core Memory, the highest-numbered
channel is served first.) The magnetic drum subsystems will attempt another data transfer during
the next drum revolution, with no loss of data.
The magnetic tape subsystems will generate a recoverable error condition, necessitating that the
input or output operation be repeated. The probability of exceeding the maximum data transfer
rate can be reduced by choosing one of the interlace
options available for the Fastrand and Flying-Head
magnetic drums, which reduce their effective transfer rates.
The combinations of simultaneous operations that
can take place in a UNIVAC 490 Series system are
limited by the number of input-output channels
available, the data transfer rates of the individual
devices compared with the gross input-output data
rate of the Central Processor, and the amount of
internal processing required. UNIVAC provides a
program that tests a proposed configuration to
determine all possible combinations of input-output
operations that may exceed the allowable gross data
transfer rates.
Figure 1 shows some of the combination possibilities
in the various 490 Series systems. Horizontallines
on the chart show the maximum gross data transfer
rates (input only) for the various UNIVAC 490
Series Processor Models. The vertical lines show
the maximum data transfer rates of various input
devices, with the effects of interlacing shown for
the random-access storage devices.
CONTROL OF I/O OPERATIONS
There is a Buffer Control Word in a fixed Core
Memory location associated with each input and
each output channel. Before an input or output
operation is initiated, an "Activate Buffer" instruction must be used to initialize the appropriate Buffer Control Word. The Buffer Control Word in
UNIVAC 490, 491, and 492 systems initially contains (in its low-order 15 bits and high-order 15
bits, respectively) the Core Memory addresses of
the first and last words to be transferred. After
each data word has been transferred to or from
Core Memory, the lower half of the Buffer Control
Word is automatically incremented by 1 and compared with the terminal address in the upper half.
The updated Buffer Control Word is replaced in
storage. If the comparison indicates that the data
transmission has been completed, the operation is
terminated and (optionally) an interrupt is initiated.
In the UNIVAC494, the Buffer Control Word takes
on a different form. Initially, the low-order 18
bits of the Buffer Control Word contained in the
Buffer Control Register define the starting address
of a buffer area. The 18 bits are required rather
than 15 because of the 494's 131, 072-word maximum storage capacity. The upper 12 bits are used
to specify the number of core memory locations
allocated to the buffer - a maximum of 4, 096
words. As each data transfer between buffer and
peripheral unit takes place, the 18-bit Current Address is increased by one and the 12-bit Address
Count is decreased by one. When the Address
Count reaches zero, the operation is terminated.
TABLE II: MAXIMUM I/O DATA RATES
(
(
"'---
PROCESSOR MODEL
UNIVAC 490*
UNIVAC
491/492
UNIVAC 494
Maximum total transfer rate,
input or output only Words/second:
Characters/second:
55,555
277,775
69,444
347,220
444,444
2,222,220
33,333
41,667
83,333
416,665
104,167
520,833
0
0
Maximum number of instructions
per second that can be executed
concurrently with above I/O rate:
Maximum total transfer rate,
input plus output Words/second:
Characters/second:
(
1,,-
Maximum number of instructions
per second that can be executed
concurrently with above I/O rate:
*
250,000
549,450
2,747,250
0
With standard 6-llsec core memory.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporotion and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
12/65
800: 111. 600
.6
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
THE INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROLLER
The Input/Output Controller contains its own highspeed Index Memory for buffer control. The basic
Index Memory provides 256 words, with an optional
256-word module providing expanded ESI (Externally-Specified Index) capabilities. Sixteen 5-bit
Associative Registers are used to associate each
I/O channel with a particular Index Memory location. In the Non-Chain mode of operation, a single
Index Memory location is used to define the Buffer
Control Word. In the alternative Chain mode, the
Associative Register is used to indicate the first
of a series of Buffer Control Words in Index
Memory. Termination of an operation in the Chain
mode is effected by recognition of an End-of-Chain
code in Index Memory.
The data rate capacities of UNIVAC 494 systems
can be increased through use of the Input/Output
Controller, an independent, wired-logic processor
that provides:
•
Independent data paths between peripheral subsystems and main core storage.
•
High-speed communications capability.
•
Enhanced system performance through chained
buffer operations (a scatter/gather facility).
•
The ability to expand the number of input-output
channels available to the UNIVAC 494 system by
from 4 to 16 additional channels.
1,000, 000
UNNAC 494 max. rate with I/O Co~troii;?
-
-
-
-
----.,.-
UNNAC 494 max. rate
1
2
100,000
=J_
=1
-8
-2
-
UNNAC 491/492 max. rate=
-
-
(5)
(6)
-
UNNAC 490 max:
1
Input
4
16
Data Transfer
Rate,
10, 000
words per
second
3
-
_8
7
16
100
(1,2)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
*
9
(3)
(4)
FH-1782 Drum*
FH-432 Drum.
FH-880 Drum*
Fastrand*
Uniservo IDA
(7)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(8)
(9)
I
(10)
Uniservo vme
UNNAC 1004
Unis ervo VIC
Uniservo ITA
Card Reader
Numbered points on line show data transfer rates at the
indicated interlace factors.
Figure 1: UNIVAC 490 Series Data Transfer Rates
12/65
A
AUERBACH
'"
r.:te='
~
800:121. 101
SUND'"
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
INSTRUCTION LIST
/AEDP
AUERBAC~
REPDRTS
c.--
INSTRUCTION LIST
Octal
Code
07
Illegal
Right Shift Q
Right Shift A
Right Shift A
Compare A· Q. AQ
Left Shift Q
Left Shift A
Left Shift AQ
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Enter Q
Enter A
Enter B
External Function
Store Q
Store A
Store B
Store C
20
Add A
Subtract A
Multiply
Divide
Replace A+Y
Replace A-Y
AddQ
Subtract Q
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
40
41
42
43
44
45
(
46
47
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
60
61
62
63
64
65
l
66
67
Description
Instruction
Enter Y + Q
Enter Y - Q
Store A + Q
Store A - Q
Replace Y +
Replace Y Replace Y +
Replace Y -
Shift Q right per Y
Shift A right per Y
Shift AQ right per Y
A:Y or Q:Y or AQ:Y
Shift Q left per Y
Shift A left per Y
Shift AQ left per Y
(Y) -Q
(Y) - A
(Y) -Bj
(Y) - C
(Q) - Y
(A) - Y
(B)j-Y
(C) - Y
(A) + (Y)-A
(A) -(Y)-A
(Q).(Y) _AQ
(AQ)/(y) -Q,R
(A) + (Y) - Y + A
(A) -(Y)-Y+A
(Q) + (Y) -+Q
(Q) - (Y)-A
(Y)+(Q) - A
Q
Q
1
1
(Y) - (Q)-A
(A) +(Q) Y
(A) - (Q) Y
(Y) + (Q) - Y
(Y) - (Q) - Y
(Y)+1
(Y)-1
+A
+A
+A
+A
_Y+A
_Y+A
Enter LP (Logical Product)
Add LP
Subtract LP
Compare Mask
Replace LP
Replace A + LP
Replace A - Lp·
Store LP
L(Y)· (Q)_A
L(Y)· (Q) + (A)-A
A - L(Y).(Q)-A
(A) - L(Y)· (Q), sense j
L(Y)· (Q)-Y + A
Y+A
L(Y) . (Q) + (A) (A) - L(Y) . (Q) Y+A
L(A)' (Q)-Y
Selective Set
Selective Complement
Selective Clear
Selective Substitute
Replace Selective Set
Replace Selective Complement
Replace Selective Clear
Replace Selective Substitute
Set (A)n for Yn = 1
Complement (A)n for Yn = 1
Clear (A)n for Yn = 1
(Y)n-(A)n for (Q)n = 1
Set (A)n for (Y)n = 1 _Y + A
CP (A)n for (Y)n = 1 - Y + A
CL (A)n for (Y)n = 1 - Y + A
(Y)n_An for (Q)n = l_Y
Jump - Arithmetic
Jump - Manual
Jump - C Active IN
Jump - C Active OUT
Return Jump - Arithmetic
Return Jump - Manual
Terminate C Input
Terminate C Output
(Y)-P
(Y)-P
If Cj active (Y) - + P
If Cj active (Y) P
(P+l) .....Y, (Y+1)-P
(P+1)-Y, (Y+1) P
Terminate Buffer
Terminate Buffer
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
12/65
800: 121. 102
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
Octal
Code
Instruction
Description
70
Repeat
Repeat NI (Y) times
71
B Skip
If (B)j=Y, skip NI and CL (B)j;
If (B)j;N, advance Bj and read NI
72
BJump
If (B)j=O, read NI; if (B) j~ 0, (B)j =
(B)j-1 and jump to Y
73
74
75
76
Input C
Output C
Input C with Monitor
Output C with Monitor
Activate
Activate
Activate
Activate
Buffer
Buffer
Buffer
Buffer
77-00*
Illegal
77-01*
Floating Point Add
(AQ) FP +(Y, Y +1) FP -
77-02*
Floating Point Subtract
(AQ) FP-(Y' Y+1)FP -AQFP
77-03*
Floating Point Multiply
(AQ)FP' (Y, Y+1)FP --AQFP
77-05*
Floating Point Divide
(AQ) FP:-(Y' Y+l)FP-AQFP
77-06*
Floating Point Pack
(Y)EX + (AQ)FXP -
AQFP
AQFP
77-07*
Floating Point Unpack
(AQ) FP-YEX
77-10*
Decimal Test AQ
Skip per Y
77-11*
Decimal Add
(AQ)D + (Y, Y+1)D -AQD
77-12*
Decimal Subtract
(AQ)D - (Y, Y+1)n -AQn
77-13*
Decimal Compare
If (AQ)n=(Y' Y+l)n' Skip NI
77-14*
Decimal Complement AQ
(AQ)D'-AQn
77-15*
Decimal Add with Carry
(AQ)n+(Y' Y+1+C)D -AQD
77-16*
Decimal Subtract with Carry
(AQ)n-(Y' Y+1+C)D -AQD
+
AQFXP
77-17*
Decimal Compare Less
If (AQ)D «Y, Y+1)n' skip NI
77-21*
Enter AQ Double Length
(Y,Y+1)-AQ
77-22*
Double Precision Add
(AQ) + (Y, Y+l) ----- AQ
77-23*
Compare AQ Equal
If (AQ)=(Y, Y+1) , skip NI
77-24*
Complement AQ
(AQ) , -
77-25*
Double Length Store AQ
(AQ)_Y,Y+1
77-26*
Double Precision Subtract
(AQ)-(Y, Y+1) _
77-27*
Compare AQ Less
If (AQ)«Y, Y+l), skip NI
77-30*
Scale Factor Shift
Scale A, Count_Q
77-31*
Character Park Lower
(Y, Y+1, Y+2, Y+3, Y+4)0_5-A
77-32*
Character Park Upper
(Y, Y+l, Y+2, Y+3, Y+4)15_20-A
77-34*
Executive Return
Interrupt
77-35*
Character Unpark Lower
(A) -Y, Y+1, Y+2, Y+3, Y+4 0 _5
77-36*
Character Unpark Upper
(A) -Y, Y+l, Y+2, Y+3, Y+4 15 - 20
77-37*
Execute Remote
(Y) -FlZ>, NI=P+1(Cond)
77-41*
Enter B1 and Jump
* All instructions that have a
AQ
AQ
77 operation code are available only with the UNIVAC 494
Central Processor.
(Contd.)
12/65
fA.
AUERBACH
~
800:121. 103
INSTRUCTION LIST
\\
Octal
Code
Instruction
Description
77-42*
Enter B2 and Jump
P -+-B2, Jump to Y
77-43*
Enter B3 and Jump
P-B3, Jump to Y
77-44*
Enter B4 and Jump
P-B4, Jump to Y
77-45*
Enter B5 and Jump
P -+-B5, Jump to Y
77-46*
Enter B6 and Jump
P -+-B6, Jump to Y
77-47*
Enter B7 and Jump
P --B7, Jump to Y
77-52*
Test and Set
INT if 214 ~ 1; NI if 214 ~ 0
77-53*
Masked Alphanumeric Compare
If A0Q
77-57*
Masked Alphanumeric Compare
If A0Q < Y0Q, Skip NI
77-61 *
Enter Internal Function Register
(Y)-IFR
77-62*
Enter Program Lock-In Register
(Y)-PLR
77-65*
Store Internal Function Register
(IFR) - Y
~
Y0Q, Skip NI
77-66*
Enter Relative Index Register
(Y)-RIR
77-70*
Initiate Synchronous Interrupt
Send Interrupt
77-71 *
Enter BW
(Y) -Bl, (Y+l) -B2, (Y+2) _B3,
(Y+3) -B4, (Y+4) _B5, (Y+5) -B6,
(Y+6) -B7
77-72*
Store Channel Number
(I/O chan NO) -- Y
77-73*
Enter Channel Select Register
(y)-CSR
77-75*
Store BW
(Bl) - Y, (B2) - Y+1, (B3) -Y+2,
(B4) -Y+3,(B5) -Y+4, (B6) -Y+5,
(B7)-Y+6
*All instructions that have a 77 operation code are available only with the UNIVAC 494
Central Processor.
INTERPRETATION OF SYMBOLS
A
(A)
Q
(Q)
AQ
(AQ)
Y
(Y)
B·
(
CJ
\
n
P
NI
R
Lor (;)
cl
FP
D
EX
FXP
INT
IFR
PLR
RIR
CSR
A register
A register contents
Q register
Q register contents
the combined A and Q register
the combined A and Q register contents
the address of an operand
the contents of an operand address
B register contents
I/O Channel
variable bit count
P register contents
next instruction
remainder
logical product
clear
Floating-point
Decimal
Exponent
Fixed-point part
interrupt
Internal Function Register
Program Lock-In Register
Relative Index Register
Channel Select Register
(
"--
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporotion and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
12/65
&.. ""',,,
800: 141. 100
/4..EDP
-
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
DATA CODE TABLE
AUERBACH
DATA CODE TABLE
CHARACTER CODE
FIELDATA
000000
000001
000010
000011
000100
000101
000110
000111
001000
001001
001010
001011
001100
001101
001110
001111
010000
010001
010010
010011
010100
010101
010110
010111
011000
011001
011010
011011
011100
011101
011110
011111
100000
100001
100010
100011
100100
100101
100110
100111
101000
101001
101010
101011
101100
101101
101110
101111
110000
110001
11 0010
110011
11 01 00
110101
110110
110111
111000
111001
111010
111011
111100
111101
111110
111111
BAUDOT
CONSOLE TIW
80 COL. CARD
(NO ACTION)
7-8
12-5-8
11-5-8
12-7-8
11-7-8
BLANK
12-1
12-2
12-3
12-4
12-5
12-6
12-7
12-8
12-9
11-1
11-2
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-6
11-7
11-8
11-9
0-2
0-3
0-4
0-5
0-6
0-7
0-8
0-9
12-4-8
11
12
12-6-8
3-8
6-8
2-8
11-3-8
11-4-8
0-4-8
0-5-8
5-8
12-0
11-0
0-3-8
0-6-8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
4-8
11-6-8
0-1
12-3-8
0-7-8
0-2-8
I.
%
LINE FEED
CAR RET
SPACE
A
B
C
0
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
0
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
)
-
+
<
::
>
-
$
*
(
"
:
?
!
COMMA
STOP
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
APOSTROPHE
,
/
0
!1\
00000
11011
11111
00010
01000
00100
LOOOll
L11001
L01110
L01001
LOOOOl
L01101
Lll0l0
Ll0l00
LOOll0
L01011
L01111
L10010
L11100
LOll00
L 11000
L10110
LI 0111
L010l0
L0010l
L10000
LOOlll
L 11110
Ll00ll
L11101
Ll0l0l
L10001
Ul00l0
UOOOll
Ull010
NO CODE
NO CODE
NO CODE
NO CODE
U0100l
NOCODE
UOll11
Ul000l
U01110
UllOOl
UOll01
UOll00
NO CODE
Ul0110
Ul0l11
Ul0011
UOOOOl
U010l0
U10000
U10101
U00111
U00110
Ul1000
U01011
Ul1110
Ull101
Ulll00
NO CODE
NO CODE
Reproduced from UNIVAC 490 Reference Card, UT 2451 Rev. 3.
12/65
A
AUERBACH
~
~
R[PDRTS
-1.
800:151.100
SlAM""
/AEDP
-
AUERBAC~
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
PROBLEM ORIENTED FACILITIES
REPORTS
~
PROBLEM ORIENTED FACILITIES
·1
UTILITY ROUTINES
Description:
· 11
Simulators of other
Computers: . . . . . . none.
· 12
Simulation by other
Computers: . . . . . . none.
· 13.
Dat~
This is a generalized program to read punched
cards and write the contents onto tape. CATUT
may operate in a multiprogramming environment, thereby eliminating the need for off-line
card-to-tape equipment. The executive system
is used for loading and for I/O requests. Provision is made for optional inclusion of own
coding.
Sorting and Merging
Sort/Merge
Reference: . . .
. .
Record size: . .. ..
Block size:
..
Key size:
...
UP 3809.
1 to 1,092 words; preset.
1 to 4, 096 words; preset.
any number of keys, each
of any specified length.
File size:
... no limit.
Number of tapes: . . . 3 to 12.
Date available: . . . . . November, 1963.
Description:
CATUT requires approximately 1,614 words of
core memory, one card reader, and one Uniservo
VIC, VIIIC, IIA, or IIIA tape unit.
GULP (General utility Library Program)
Reference: . . . . . . . . UNIVAC 490 Software Note,
September, 1963.
Date available: . . . . . September, 1963.
Description:
The Sort/Merge routine is a three-phase program
that utilizes the cascade method of merge sorting.
The routine is generalized to sort data in various
formats specified by the programmer in a parameter table. The priority of the sorting keys can
be specified in the parameter table.
This program is an expandable library consisting
of input-output routines used to transfer data from
one peripheral medium to another. All possible
combinations of media are permitted. Routines
to handle non-standard formats can be added by
the user. The program was designed to serve as
a debugging aid and to perform service tasks for
the executive system load program and SPURT.
Optional features are: own code on initial input
and/or last pass output from the final merge, tape
swapping on input and/or final output, and restart
points when program interruption is desired and
when errors occur in the transfer of data.
Sort/Merge uses the executive system for loading,
facility assignments, loading of the parameter
table, and loading of own-code routines. Three
to twelve Uniservo VIC, VIIIC, IIA, or IIIA tape
units (all of one kind) are utilized. One Flying
Head Magnetic Drum can be utilized, if available,
for a drum presort in place of the standard tape
presort.
(
\
I
~-
· 14
Report Writing: . . . . none.
· 15
Data Transcription
PRINTAPE (Magnetic Tape to High-Speed Printer)
Reference: . . .
. UP 3807.4, UP 3805.4.
Date available: . . . . July, 1962.
Description:
This routine reads print-edited magnetic tapes
and prints the records on the High-Speed Printer.
Basic print editing, such as line spacing, margins,
and page numbering, is permitted. The executive system is utilized for loading and for input/
output requests. PRINT APE uses approximately
1,238 words of memory and requires one HighSpeed Printer and one Uniservo VIC, VIIIC,
IIA, or IIIA tape unit.
CATUT (Card-to-Magnetic Tape Utility)
Reference: . . .
Date available:
. . UP 3807.3, UP 3805.3.
.. February, 1963.
©
GULP operates under the control of the executive
system, requires approximately 1, 178 words of
core memory, either a card reader or a paper
tape reader, one Uniservo VIC, VIllC, IlA, or
IlIA tape unit, and any other peripheral devices
required to perform the desired function.
.16
File Maintenance
RMOPL II
Reference:
Date available:.
Description:
. UP 3805. 1A.
. June, 1963.
This program produces and maintains program
library files of object programs. The executive
is used for program loading, input-output requests, and parameter entry.
RMOPL II requires approximately 1, 726 words of
core memory, one card reader or paper tape
reader, three Uniservo VIC, VIIIC, IrA, or IIIA
tape units, and (optional) a High-Speed Printer
and card punch.
RMASL
Reference:
. . . . UP 3805. 6A.
Date available: . . . . . June, 1963.
Description:
This routine produces and maintains program
library files in source-language form suitable
as SPURT input. See RMOPL II (above) for other
features.
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH info, inc.
12/65
800:151. 160
.16
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
File Maintenance (Contd.)
contents of the A, Q, and B registers. A printout
can occur after every instruction, after jump
instructions only, after instructions within a
specified area, or only after execution of any
instruction that modifies the contents of a specified "blood-hound address. "
CIMCO (Card Image Corrector)
Reference: . ..
. . UP 3805.7A.
Date available: . . . . March, 1963.
Description:
TRACE IV requires approximately 1, 254 words of
memory and one High-Speed Printer.
This routine corrects a source-language program
that is on magnetic tape in a SPURT 301 (card
image) format. Corrections are punched on cards
and may be replacements, additions, or deletions
to the program on tape. CIMCO operates in conjunction with the executive system.
MITAR II
Reference:
Date available:
Description:
Approximately 1, 332 words of memory are required, with one card reader and two Uniservo
VIC, VIIIC, IIA, or IIIA tape units.
. 17
. UP 3805. 2A.
. February, 1962.
This routine assembles the Master Instruction
Tape (MIT). REX, the operating system for the
490, 491, and 492 computer systems, is designed
to process two or more independent programs
concurrently. In order to do so with efficient
utilization of core memory and peripheral equipment, REX must be presented with scheduling
information, facility requirements, operational
parameters, and the actual object code for all
programs to be executed during a given processing session. The MIT contains this information.
Other Routines
TRACE IV (Debugging Routine)
Reference: . . .
. UP 3807.5, UP 3805.5.
Date available: . . . . October, 1962.
Description:
This program monitors the results of each instruction executed by a program operating under its
control and prints a selective output on the HighSpeed Printer.
Report Section 804.:191 describes how Omega,
the UNIVAC 494's operating system, performs
this same function.
The printout consists of the instruction address,
the executed instruction, the operand, and the
./
12/65
fA.
AUERBACH
~
800: 161. 100
1&•
AUERBACH
STANIIARD
EDP
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE
COBOL
REPDRTS
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: COBOL
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: .•••.••••• UNIVAC 490 Series COBOL.
.12
Origin: ••.••••.•• UNIVAC Division,
--Sperry Rand Corporation.
.13
Reference: ••..••.. UNIVAC 494 COBOL,
Preliminary Language
Specifications, August
1965.
. 14
Description
The COBOL compiler for the 490 Series is being
written for the UNIVAC 494, and a subset of this
compiler will be used for the other 490 Series
systems. The COBOL compiler written for the
original UNIVAC 490 system will be replaced by
this later version, which is based on the COBOL
language as defined in the Department of Defense
document, COBOL Preliminary Edition 1964. Any
hesitation on the part of UNIVAC 490 users to
change to the new compiler will no doubt be removed by compilation times estimated to be 270%
to 600% faster than those of the older version.
Further time savings will be realized by having
the output of the new compiler in object-code
form; the SPURT output of the older compiler
necessitated an additional assembly phase.
Compatibility at source level with the older
UNIVAC 490 compiler will be accomplished with
few omissions. The major addition is the inclusion of the COMPUTE verb. The SORT verb
is also new, but it will be available only in the
expanded compiler for the UNIVAC 494.
A significant difference in the object coding is
obtained through the use of a straight-line coding
form in the new 490 Series compiler, rather than
the generalized subroutines used in the older one.
In this straight-line form, the coding extracted
from the compiler for a specific option is shared
only if this option is used more than once. Use
of a different option of the same verb results in
more coding being extracted. In the older version,
a single generalized subroutine was used for each
verb, with option variations handled by switch
settings within the object coding. Unless a programmer uses a number of different options of
the same verb, this new method will result in
tighter and faster object coding.
The major exclusions from the UNIVAC 490 Series
compiler, when compared to the standard established for the industry by the Department of Defense, are report writing and the handling of variable-length fields and records. The exclusion of
variable-length data-handling facilities is understandable when the fixed word-length and noncharacter-oriented instruction complement of the
490 Series are conSidered; the use of these features by programmers unfamiliar with the characteristics of the UNIVAC 490 Series would tend
to result in inefficient object programs. However,
UNIVAC's decision to omit these features, rather
than including the features with appropriate
warnings to the programmer, is typical of the
actions by the computer manufacturers that have
prevented COBOL from achieving one of its major
goals: the ability to provide complete intermanufacturer program compatibility •
The UNIVAC 490 Series COBOL Compiler will
operate under control of the integrated operating
systems (REX for the 490, 491, and 492, and
Omega for the 494). Minimum configuration requirements for the COBOL compiler are four
Uniservo tape units, 16,384 words of core memory,
one random-access storage device, one input
device, and one output device. Compilation times
will range from 400 to 600 statements per minute,
depending upon length and complexity.
.141 Availability
Language: •.•...•.• 3rd quarter 1965 (preliminary manual) .
Translator: .•.•.•.. 3rd quarter 1966.
.142 Deficiencies with respect to Required COBOL-61
o The integer-4 option of the RECORD CONTAINS
clause is not permitted; there is no provision
for efficient handling of variable-length records;
i. e., the compiler will consider all records to
be the size of the largest record within a given
file.
o The VALUE clause of the File Description
entry can apply only to IDENTIFICATION, ID,
or DA TE-WRITTEN (Specific items that appear
in the standard label record).
.143 Extensions to COBOL-61
o Files assigned to the DRUM may be designated
as RANDOM or SEQUENTIAL files. Indices
are used in READ and WRITE statements to
reference records in RANDOM or SEQUENTIAL
files.
o
A complete sorting facility is available in the
extended COBOL compiler for the UNIVAC 494.
o
Debugging at source level is facilitated through
the use of MONITOR, a verb that allows tracing
of the program. An output line will be written
each time a data name is modified by any procedure statement, upon entering a procedure,
and upon altering a procedure.
o
The compiler provides for all functions necessary
for segment operation on a priority basis. The
segment priorities are based on frequency of
use.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
12/65
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
800:161.144
.144 COBOL-61 Electives Implemented (see 4:161. 3)
Comments
Key No.
Elective
1
Characters and Words
Formula characters
2
3
Relationship characters
Semicolon
4
6
7
Long literals
Figurative constants
Computer-name
11
File Description
SEQUENCED ON
15
Record Description
BITS option
18
20
SIGN IS
Conditional ranges
22
24
Verbs
COMPUTE
ENTER
27
28
VERB Options
LOCK
MOVE CORRESPONDING
30
ADVANCING
31
32
33
34
STOP provisions
Formulas
Operand size
Relationship
35
36
Tests
Conditionals
38
39
Complex conditionals
Conditional statements
40
Environment Division
SOURCE-COMPUTER
41
OBJECT-COMPUTER
46
I-O-CONTROL
UNIVAC 494 or 490 (491, 492) can be
specified.
UNIVAC 494 or 490 (491, 492) can be
specified.
A full range of rerun techniques is available.
47
Identification Division
DATE-COMPILED
The current date is inserted.
48
Special Features
Library
49
Segmentation
+ (Plus), - (minus), * (multiplication), / (division), and ** (exponentiation) are used.
The symbols < = > are used.
A semicolon is included in the character
set.
The maximum size is 128 characters.
illGH-VALUE(S) and LOW-VALUE(S).
An alternative is provided between the
UNIVAC 494 and the UNIVAC 490
(491, 492).
= (equals),
The Sort facility is available in the
UNIVAC 494 version of the compiler.
COMPUTATIONAL is used to specify
items in binary.
Separate signs are allowed.
Two ranges of VALUES for conditionals
are permitted.
Algebraic formulas can be used.
SPURT and FORTRAN can be used in a
COBOL program.
A rewound tape can be locked.
Commonly-named items in a group can be
handled together.
Specific paper-advance instructions can be
given.
Special numeric-coded alphabetic displays.
Algebraic formulas can be used.
Up to 18 digits.
IS EQUAL TO, EQUALS, EXCEEDS relationship.
IF ( ) IS NOT ZERO test is allowed.
Implied subjects with implied objects are
allowed.
Nested conditionals are permitted.
IF, SIZE ERROR, AT END, ELSE (OTHERWISE) may follow an imperative statement.
J
Subprograms (i. e., partial programs
written in COBOL, FORTRAN, or
SPURT and combined by the operating
system to produce a single object
program) can be included in the main
object program.
Segmentation of programs is allowed.
(Contd.)
12/65
fA.
AUERBACH
•
800:161.145
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: COBOL
.145 COBOL-61 Electives Not Implemented (see 4:161. 3)
Key No.
5
Elective
Characters and Words
Figurative constants
10
12
File Description
BLOCK CONTAINS
FILE CONTAINS
Label formats
HASHED
13
Record Description
Table-length
14
16
17
Item-length
RANGE IS
RENAMES
19
21
SIZE clause
Label handling
23
25
Verbs
DEFINE
USE
29
Verb Options
OP EN REVERSED
37
Complex conditionals
42
Environment Division
SPECIAL-NAMES
43
44
FILE-CONTROL
PRIORITY IS
45
I-O-CONTROL
8
9
' ..
©
Comments
HIGH-BOUNDS(S) and LOW-BOUND(S) are not
permitted.
No range can be specified.
Approximate file size cannot be shown.
Labels must be standard or omitted.
Hash totals cannot be created.
Lengths of tables and arrays may not
vary.
Variable item lengths cannot be specified.
Value range of items cannot be shown.
Alternative groupings of elementary
items cannot be specified.
Variable item lengths cannot be specified.
Only standard labels (or none) may be
used.
New verbs cannot be defined.
Standard I/O handling is required by
the executive routines, particularly
Omega.
The ability to read tape backward has
not been implemented.
ANDs and ORs cannot be intermixed.
ACCEPT, WRITE, and DISPLAY verbs
use standard hardware-names for
switches.
Cannot be taken from library.
No file priorities can be assigned for
multiprogramming.
Cannot be taken from library.
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
12/65
800: 162. 100
1&
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE
FORTRAN IV
STANDARD
EDP
AUERBACH
REPORTS
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: FORTRAN IV
restrictions on the source program, as indicated in
Table I.
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
· UNIVAC 490 Series
FORTRAN IV.
· 12
Origin:.
· UNIVAC Division, Sperry
Rand Corp.
• 13,
Reference: ...
· UNIVAC 490 FORTRAN,
August 1965.
· 14
Description
Object program running times will show wide variations between the UNIVAC 494 and the remainder
of the' 490 Series computers, as one would expect.
In addition to its much faster basic cycle time, the
494 has built-in facilities for floating-point arithmetic, whereas the 490, 491, and 492 all require
the use of subroutines.
Mathematical processing on the UNIVAC 490 Series
computers will be facilitated by the availability of
a compiler for FORTRAN IV, as specified by the
ASA working specifications for the FORTRAN
language published in the Communications of the
ACM, October 1964. For purposes of inter-report
comparison, the features of the language as implemented by UNIVAC are compared to those of IBM
7090/7094 FORTRAN IV, as described in Report
Section 408: 162.
.141 Availability
Language
specifications: .
Compiler: . . . . . . .
. 142 Restrictions of 490 Series FORTRAN IV Relative
to IBM 7090/7094 FORTRAN IV
The facilities most conspicuously absent from the
UNIVAC 490 Series FORTRAN IV language, when
compared to IBM 7090/7094 FORTRAN IV, are the
LOGICAL and COMPLEX operations. Other
restrictions include a maximum integer constant
size of nine digits rather than eleven, a maximum
integer magnitude of 229 rather than 2 35 , and a
maximum of three dimensions for 'arrays rather
than seven.
The most significant extension is the ability to use
an implied DO structure iil an extended DATA statement.
. August 1965.
. June 1966.
(1)
Integer (fixed-point) values are limited
to 9 decimal digits (maximum value 229).
whereas FORTRAN IV for the 7090/7094
permits a maximum of 11 decimal digits
(maximum value is 2 35).
(2)
COMPLEX variables and statements are not
permitted in UNIVAC 490 Series FORTRAN.
(3) The LOGICAL (true-false) capabilities of
IBM 7090/7094 FORTRAN IV are not provided
in UNIVAC 490 Series FORTRAN IV.
.143 Extensions of 490 Series FORTRAN IV Relative to
IBM 7090/7094 FORTRAN IV
UNIVAC 490 Series FORTRAN is a one-pass compiler. As such, it imposes certain ordering
(1) A DATA statement can be extended to include
an implied DO structure.
TABLE I: SOURCE PROGRAM ORDERING RESTRICTIONS
Order
No.
Comments
Order 1 statements are sections which are logically
separate from the main program.
1
1
1
FUNCTION
SUBROUTINE
BLOCK DATA
2
2
2
2
2
DIMENSION
EQUIVALENCE
COMMON
REAL
}
INTEGER
DOUBLE PREClSION
3
DATA
The DATA statement enables the internal production
of data at the time of object program loading.
4
Arithmetic Functions
For example, I = A + B. The mode to the left of the
equal sign need not be identical to that to the right.
Mixed-mode arithmetic (1. e. , having two modes to
the right of the equal sign) is not permitted.
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Control Statements
CALL
Arithmetic Assignment
I/O Statements
FORMAT
PAUSE
STOP
6
END
2
12/65
Statement Type
These three Order 2 (or Type) statements are used
to declare the type of variables, arrays, and functions as integer, real (single-precision floating-point),
or double-precision.
A blank card must follow an END statement.
A•
AUERBACH
-&
800:171. 100
STANDARD
A
AUERBAC~
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE
SPURT
EIDlI?
_-------J
REPORTS
~
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: SPURT
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: . . . . . . . . . . SPURT Assembly System .
. 12
Origin: . . . .
. 13
Reference: .
.14
Description
and/or magnetic tape. A variety of assembly
information and documentation may be requested.
Coding errors detected by the translator are
identified by console diagnostic and declarative
messages or by error flags on the printed listing.
. . . . . UNIVAC Division, Sperry
Rand Corp .
. . UNIVAC Technical Bulletin
UT-2522.
SPURT is a symbolic assembly system that permits
utilization of all the hardware facilities of the
UNIVAC 490, 491, and 492 computer systems.
SPURT can also be used with the UNIVAC 494,
although an Assembler specifically designed for the
494 will also be made available. SPURT provides
facilities for the definition and use of macro instructions, and produces object programs that can
be multi-run under the control of the operating
system.
The SPURT coding sheet has columns for Labels,
Operators, and Operands and Notes. The operators
(or, operation codes) may be in mnemonic form and,
when used with "allied operands," provide a large
variety of operations. The content of the Operand
column is free-form and varies according to the
instruction. It may contain tags, increments, constants, extended constants, j -designators, tag
modifiers, absolute addresses, designation of halfword operands, arithmetic and address modification
registers, complementation of values, and literals
for certain macro-instructions. Constants can be
indicated in decimal or octal mode. Programmer
notes are permitted.
A macro-instruction is a symbolic command which
accesses an entire group of instructions. Depending upon the macro, the instructions generated may
be incorporated directly into the program, or may
be linked to the program as a subroutine. Addresses,
parameters, or any other information needed to link
the macro to the program are provided by the
operands in the macro line of coding.
Corrections to a source program can be made in a
separate assembly run. Deletion, replacement,
and addition of operations are permitted.
Each input-output operator in a SPURT program
causes the assembler to generate a return jump
instruction followed by a packet of information. At
run time, control is transferred to the operating
system at that point, and the appropriate functional
subroutine is utilized to initiate and control the
input or output operation. If a real-time request
or another request is being processed, the submitted request will be put into a queue. Various
instruction codes are provided for operating system
control.
SPURT is a six-phase assembly system. Output
may be produced on paper tape, high -speed printer,
.15
Publication Date: . . . . March, 1962.
. 16
Translator
Availability: . • . . . . April, 1962.
.2
LANGUAGE FORMAT
.21
Diagram: . . . . . . . . . free-form coding sheet; delimiters are used as
follows:
-+- Right arrow separates
Label and Operator.
o Point separates Operator
and Operands; also used
between multiple
Operands .
..... Left arrow defines end
of line.
.22
Legend
'Label: . . . • . . . . . . . the symbolic address of a
line of coding.
Operator: . . . . . . . . . basic function to be
performed.
Operands: . . . . . . . . . define, modify, or complete
the function.
Notes: . • • . . • . . . . • descriptive comments,
printed in listings but
otherwise ignored.
.23
Corrections: . • . . . . . correction header followed
by insertions, deletions,
and/or alterations.
.24
Special Conventions
.241 Compound addresses: . BASE + ADJUSTMENT;
where BASE = any label
and ADJUSTMENT = a
binary or decimal number
and/ or contents of a B
register.
.242 Multi -addresses: . . . . none.
.243 Literals: . • . . . . . . . decimal or octal equivalent
of a binary number (D
must follow decimal); if
minus, sign must appear.
. 244 Special coded
addresses: . . . . . . . (1) X preceding a tag will
cause associated
address to be extended
when used.
(2) may indicate portion of
word to be used by enclosing tag or absolute
address in parentheses
and preceding it by L,
U, W, LX, or UX.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
12/65
800: 171. 244
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
• 244 Special coded
addresses: (Contd.) . (3) may indicate complementing of a word or
portion of a word by
enclosing the associated
tag in parentheses and
preceding it by CPW,
CPU, or CPL.
(4) $ means current location.
.3
LABELS
.31
General
· 311 Maximum number of labels
Procedures: . . . . . . 1,730.
.312' Common label formation rule: . . . . . . . . yes.
.313 Reserved labels For A-register: ••.. A.
For Q-register: .••. Q.
For B-registers: .•. BO through B7.
For channel numbers: CO through C15.
• 314 Other restrictions: .•. none of the symbolic operation codes may be used as
a label.
.315 Designators: . • . . . . . none .
. 316 Synonyms permitted: . yes.
.32
Universal Labels
.321 Labels for procedures
Existence: . . . . . . . mandatory if referenced by
other instructions (unless
$ is used).
Formation rule First character: .• letter other than X or O.
others: . . . . • . . • letters or numerals; no
special characters; spaces
are ignored.
Number of
characters: . . . . . maximum of 10.
· 322 Labels for library
routines: . • . . . . . . same as procedures.
. 323 Labels for constants: . same as procedures.
.324 Labels for files: . . . . same as procedures.
.325 Labels for records: .• same as procedures.
. 326 Labels for variables: . same as procedures.
. 33
Local Labels: . . . . . . none.
.4
DATA
.41
Constants
.411 Maximum size constants
Integer Decimal: . . . . . . . .:!:.536870911.
Octal: .•••....• .:!:. 3777777777.
Fixed numeric Decimal: . . . . . . . no provision.
Octal: . . . . . . . . . no provision.
Floating numeric: .. no provision.
Alphameric: . . . . . • no provision.
.412 Maximum size literals Integer: . . . . . . . . . same as constants.
Fixed numeric: •... no provision.
Floating numeric: .• no provision.
Alphameric: ..•..• 70 chars (used with TYPEC
or TYPET macros).
·5
PROCEDURES
.51
Direct Operation Codes
.511 Mnemonic Existence: •..•... alternative.
Number: •..•.•.•. 29 (many variations through
"allied operands").
Example: ..•...•• CL = Clear.
.512 Absolute Existence: .....•• alternative (j, k, and b
designators must be
absolute also).
Number: . • . . . . . . . 62 (can be modified to produce over 25,000).
Example: ••. . . • • . 01 = Shift Q Right.
· 52
Macro-Codes
.521 Number available
Input-output: . . . . . . 15 (REX).
Data manipulation: . • 6.
Subroutine linkage: •• 2.
.522 Examples: . • . . . . . • _MOVE·3·AREA2·
AREA4--.
-FORM-TEXT' NOTE2·
17D·THIS IS SAME AS
BEFORE- .
. 523 New macros: •.•.••. yes; through use of SPURT
User Defined Macro
Assembler, incorporated
into regular Assembler
(available only in systems
with drum storage).
.53
Interludes: . . • . . . . . none.
.54
Translator Control
· 541 Method of control Allocation counter: .. see Paragraph . 542.
Label adjustment: " pseudo operation.
Annotation: . • . . . . . see Paragraph. 544.
.542 Allocation CQunter Set to absolute: ..•. ALLOCATION header plus
direct allocation.
Set to label: ...••. EQUALS pseudo .
Step forward: ..••. DELETE value, RELALLOC header plus direct
allocation .
Step backward: ..•• DELETE value.
Reserve area: .•... RESERVE pseudo .
· 543 Label adjustment Set labels equal: .•. EQUALS pseudo •
Set absolute value: .. EQUALS pseudo.
Clear label table: ... no provision; in a segmented
program label table holds
labels within the segment
being processed plus the
control segment.
,544 Annotation Comment phrase: ... in any line of coding, following an arrow; COMMENT
pseudo.
Title phrase: •..... no provision.
.545 other Indirect allocation: .. U-TAG pseudo, INDRALLOC header, plus
direct allocation (allows
several different programs
to access the same
subroutine) .
(Contd.)
12/65
A
AUERBACH
~
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: SPURT
\
"
.6
SPECIAL ROUTINES AVAILABLE
· 61
Special Arithmetic
.611 Facilities: . . . . • . . . inspect signs; binary multiprecision addition, subtraction, multiplication,
and division; Fieldata
multi -precision addition
and subtraction; indexing;
rounding and scaling;
floating point arithmetic.
. 612 Method of call: ...•• CALL operator; Execute
operator calls and sets
up linkage to a closed
subroutine.
· 62
Special Functions
. 621 Facilities: .•••.•.. character manipulation
routines; examine, comparison, and relation
routines.
.622 Method of call: ...•. same as .612 above.
.63
Overlay Control: •... by own coding, using the
SEGMENT and LOAD
operators.
· 64
Data Editing
.641 Radix conversion: ...
. 642 Code translation: .••.
Format control Zero suppression: .
Size control: .•.•.
Sign control: .•...
Special characters:.
between Fieldata and binary.
none.
yes.
yes.
yes.
floating dollar sign, check
protection, CR or DB,
floating + or -.
• 643 Method of call: .••.. same as .612 above.
· 65
Input-Output Control: . handled by File Control and
operating system.
800: 171. 600
DRUM-IMAGE provides a
drum area which will
initially duplicate a
program area.
TEST-IMAGE compares a
program area against the
corresponding core or
drum image of that area.
.7
LIBRARY FACILITIES
.71
Identity: . . . . • . . . • . SPURT Library .
.72
Kinds of Libraries
.721 Fixed master: • . . . . . no.
.722 Expandable master: .• yes .
. 723 Private: . . • . . . . . • . yes.
.73
Storage Form: ..•.•. magnetic tape .
.74
Varieties o(Contents: . programs, directory, subroutines.
.75
Mechanism
.751 Insertion of new item: . special run:
LIBRARY header with
ADD-PROG.
.752 Language of new item:. format acceptable to SPURT
assembler.
.753 Method of call: .••.. CALL or EXECUTE
operator .
.76
Insertion in Program
.761 Open routines exist: •. yes.
.762 Closed routines exist: • yes.
.763 Open-closed is
optional: . • . . . . . . . yes.
.764 Closed routines
appear once: . • . . . . yes .
.8
.81
MACRO AND PSEUDO TABLES
Macros
Code
('
"
.651
.652
.653
· 654
.655
File labels: . . . • . . . .
Reel labels: .••.•..
Blocking: . . . . . . . . .
Error control: ••••••
Method of call: .••••
yes.
yes.
yes.
yes.
same as .612 above.
. 66
Sorting: .•.•••...• see Sort/Merge program
-(800:151.13).
.67
Diagnostics: ..••.•. inserted by DEBUG-AIDS
header; removed by
removing header and
reassembling.
.671 Dumps: ...••••... DUMP-REG causes a printout of registers A, Q,
and BI-B7.
DUMP-AREA causes a
listed printout of all nonzero words in the specified debugging area(s).
.672 Tracers: ••••.•... see 800:151.15.
.673 Snapshots: ••.••... see Paragraph. 671 above.
.674 others: . . • • . . . . . . . DEF-AREA defines area of
the program to which
debugging operations are
to apply.
CORE-IMAGE provides an
area in memory which
will initially duplicate
another area.
Description
CLEAR: ..•..•..•• clears (fills with zeros) a
number of words of an
area of core memory.
ENTRY: . . . . . . . . . . provides for entry into a
subroutine; a manual stop
may be added .
EXIT: . . . . . • • . . . . provides for a normal exit
from a subroutine.
FD: • • • . . . . . . . . . . enters a literal into a
program in Fieldata code.
FORM-TEXT: .••.•. stores alphanumeric text
(converted to Fieldata
code) in a buffer area for
eventual printout on the
on-line High-Speed
Printer.
MOVE: • • • . . . . . . . . moves blocks of data from
one area to another.
PUT: . . . . . • • • . . . . places a single word in a
designated storage address.
T-T AG: .•.•..•.•. provides a means by which
an absolute channel and
unit value can be placed
in a word position.
REX-Associated Macros
CKSTAT: ••.•••••• permits control of the sequence of operations
following the submission
of an I/O request.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
12/65
800:171. 810
.81
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
Description
. . . . . permits a mnemonic
channel name to be used in
conjunction with mnemonic
input-output instructions.
FACIL: .••..•...• defines channels, peripheral
units, and number of units
required for each program.
EQUALS: . . • . . . • . . states a relation between a
tag whose allocation value
is unknown and a known
value.
COMMENT: . . . . . . . indicates a notation to be
presented in a listing of
the program.
RESERVE: . . . • . . . . reserves a block of memory
locations in the running
(object) program.
U-TAG: . • . . • • . . . . provides for the expression
of the value in the upper
half and/or lower half of
a storage word by means
of a tag.
CALL: . . . . . . • . . . . calls programs from the
library and incorporates
them into a source program.
EXECUTE: . . . . . . . . calls a closed routine from
the library, places it at
the end of the high-level
coding, and sets up a
linkage.
IGNORE: .•.•..•.. inhibits program library
extraction.
SEGMENT: . . . . . . • . defines a secondary segment
of a program.
END-SEG: . . . • . . . . ends segmentation.
S-T AG: ....••..•• defines entry points in a
secondary segment.
DRUM-AREA: . . . . . . reserves a relative drum
area.
D-TAC: . . . . • . . • • . defines certain points within
a drum area.
OUTPUTS: . . . . . . • • specifies documentation and
output devices desired.
Macros (Contd.)
Code
Code
MEANS:
Description
MTAPE: . . •.
. . . . . request for Uniservo IIA or
IlIA tape function.
CTAPE: . • . . . • . . . • request for Uniservo VIC or
VIIIC function.
PTAPE: . . • . . . . . . • request for paper tape
function.
FAST:· . . • . . . . . . . . request for Fastrand
function.
DISC: . . . . . . . . . . . • request for disc function.
DRUM: .••....•..• request for Flying Head
drum function.
PRINT: . . . . . . . . . . request for a print operation.
PIN: . . • • . . . . . . . . specifies a margin format
for the High-Speed Printer.
CARD: . • • . . . . . . . • specifies card operations.
TYPEC: . . . • . . . . . . causes octal-coded content
of specified storage
registers to be typed by
the console typewriter.
TYFET:
. . . . . causes the console typewriter to type a given
message.
ACCEPT: • • . . . . . . . indicates that operator is to
respond to a printout by
entering information via
the console keyboard.
REX: . • . • . . . . . • . . request. for REX operating
system action: stop or
terminate run.
CONSOLE: . . . . . . • . holds or releases the printer
for exclusive use of the
requesting program.
LOAD: .•••....•.. calls secondary segments
into memory.
.82
Pseudos
Code
Description
ASSIGN: •••...•... groups several similar I/O
units which are physically
connected to the same
channel.
12/65
fA
AUERBACH
~
~
800:181.100
srmARD
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR
SPURT
/AlaDP
AUERBAC~
REPORTS
~
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: SPURT
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: ••.••..••. SPURT Assembly System.
• 12
Description
Maximum number of
DEF-AREA statements: ..........
Maximum number of
CORRECT-Ll
statements: .••.••
Maximum number of
INDR-ALLOC
statements: ••••••
Maximum number of
MEANS statements:
Maximum number of
ADD PROG statements: •••••..••
Maximum number of
DRUM-AREA
statements: •.••••
Maximum number of
S-TAG statements: •
Maximum number of
ASSIGN operands: .
Maximum number of
SEGMENT
operands: •••.•••
Maximum number of
programs in
library: ••••••••
Maximum number of
macros defined: •••
Maximum number of
updating actions
demanded: ••••••
Maximum number of
programs or keys
to be listed, retrieved, or updated:
Operation of the SPURT translator requires at
least 8,192 Core Memory locations, 4 Uniservo
magnetic tape units, and the REX or Omega executive routine. Three versions of the SPURT translator are provided for UNIVAC 490 Series systems
that use Uniservo IIA, mA, or mC/VIC/VIIIC
tape units. Additional core storage increases
efficiency by allowing the work tape buffers to be
expanded. If a drum is included in the configuration, user-defined macro instructions are permitted. Larger configurations enable concurrent
processing of both batch and real-time programs.
Input may be from punched cards, magnetic tape,
or paper tape, and output may be produced on the
high-speed printer, magnetic tape, and/or paper
tape. The translator will accommodate source
programs in either the SPURT, Assembly language
or UNIVAC 490 machine language, or a combination of the two.
The REX Executive routine (Section 800:191) effectively eliminates the need for detailed programming of standardized input and output functions.
SPURT generates only the linkage instructions to
REX and a packet of information for its use.
SPURT includes program diagnostic facilities. Instructions are provided to obtain core dumps and
to test core images.
· 13
• 14
• 15
•2
• 21
.211
• 212
. 22
• 221
.222
. 223
.23
.231
• 232
• 233
I"
\
· 234
Originator: •.••••.• UNIVAC Division, Sperry
Rand Corp.
Maintainer: •••••..• as above •
Availability: .•••••• April, 1962.
INPUT
Language
Name: ..•••••..•. SPURT and UNIVAC 490
Series machine language •
Exemptions: ••.•••. none.
Form
Input media: .•••••• magnetic tape, punched
cards, or paper tape.
Obligatory ordering: .. procedures must be in
proper logical sequence .
Obligatory grouping: .. no.
Size Limitations
Maximum number of
source statements: .• not limited.
Maximum size source
statements: •••...• 3 cards.
Maximum number of
data items: ••••••• 1,300.
Other limitations Maximum number of
ALLOCATION or
REL-ALLOC
items: ••.•••••• 1,700.
12.
150.
149.
26.
20.
16.
40.
38.
24.
292.
64.
192.
49.
Note: Sizes of the individual tables can be
adjusted for a particular installation•
.3
OUTPUT
.31
Object Program
.311 Language name: ••••• UNIVAC 490 Series machine
language •
.312 Language style: ••••. machine •
.313 Output media: ••••.• paper tape or magnetic tape;
High-Speed Printer for
listings.
• 32
Conventions
.321 Standard inclusions: •• REX or Omega operating
system.
.322 Compatible with: •••• SPURT Library •
• 33
Documentation
Subject
Source program: ••••
Object program: ••••
Storage map: •••••••
Restart point list: ••••
Language errors: ••••
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
Provision
listing.
listing.
listing.
none.
listing and console messages.
12/65
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
800:181.400
.4
TRANSLATING PROCEDURE
.41
Phases and Passes
Phase 1: •••.•••.•• Input - accepts source
language from magnetic
tape, paper tape, or cards.
Processes source code to
standard format on a work
tape and identifies library
references.
Phase 2: •••••••••. Re1rieval - adds any required programs from
library to formatted source
code.
Phase 3: •••••.•••• Declaration - processes
declarative statements to
build reference lists for
translation.
Phase 4: ••••.••••• Translation - 1ranslates
generative statements
from formatted source
code into machine coded
ins1ructions except for
labels and tags, using
reference lists produced
by Phase 3.
Phase 5: •••••••••• Allocation - first pass
creates core table of program labels; second pass
processes 1ranslation output to form object code in
internal format.
Phase 6: •••••••... Output - converts source
and/or object codes to the
output media requested.
.42
Optional Mode
• 421
• 422
• 423
. 424
. 425
Translate: ••...•..
Translate and run: ••.
Check only: .•••.•••
Patching: ••..••••.
Updating: •••••••••
.43
Special Features
• 431 Alter to check only: •• no •
.432 Fast unoptimized
1ranslate: ••••.•.• access to library tape can
be avoided on a correction
run.
.433 Short translate on
restricted program: • no.
Bulk Translating: •••• yes; Multi-Run option for
magnetic tape input.
.45
Program Diagnostics: • removed by deleting DE,..
BUG-AIDS header and
reassembling.
.451 Tracers: ••••••••• see 800: 151. 17.
• 452 Snapshots: •••••.•• dump operations with DEFAREA.
. 453 Dumps: •••••••••• DUMP-REG, DUMP-AREA,
and CORE-, DRUM-, and
TEST-IMAGE operations.
. 46
Translator Library
. 461 Identity: ••••••.•••
.462 User res1riction: ••••
• 463 FormStorage medium: •••
Organization: •••.•
12/65
SPURT Library.
none •
magnetic tape.
formatted source code.
open or closed.
no.
no.
during special library run:
ADD-PROG, INS-PROG
operations.
Call procedure: • • • • CALL pseudo calls an open
or closed routine. EXECUTIVE pseudo calls a
closed routine and sets up
a Return Jump to it.
Amendment: •••••• DEL-PROG, RPL-PROG
operations.
.5
TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE
• 51
Object Program Space
• 511 Fixed overhead: ••••• REX operating system for
the 490, 491, and 492
occupies an average of
4,000 Core Memory locations.
Omega operating system
for the 494 occupies between 4,000 and 8,000
Core Memory locations.
.512 Space required for
each input-output
file: • • • • • • • • • • • • controlled by user.
· 513 Approximate expansion
of procedures: ••••• one-to-one (except macrocodes).
.52
Translation Time
.521 Normal1ranslating: •• approximately 500 to 600
statements per minute
(Uniservo IIA) not including
printing and card reading
time.
yes •
no •
no .
yes .
no .
.44
.464 ContentsRoutines: ••••••••
Functions:. • ••••••
Data descriptions: ••
.465 LibrarianshipInsertion: ••.•••••
.53
Optimizing Data: •••• none.
• 54
Object Program
Performance: •.••• unaffected; i. e., same as
hand coding.
.6
COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS
.61
Translating Computer
• 611 Minimum
configuration: ••••• minimum of 8, 192 core locations, 4 Uniservo magnetic tape units (of same
type: IIA, IlIA, or IlIC,
VIC, or VIIIC).
.612 Larger configuration
advantages: ••••••• drum - may use programmer-defined macros .
additional tapes - reduce
tape change requirements •
additional core - increased
efficiency because work
tape buffers are expanded •
on-line printer - allows
on-line listings •
larger configurations permit concurrent processing
of both batch and real-time
programs.
fA
AUERBACH
~
(Contd.)
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: SPURT
.62
Target Computer
Error
Check or
Interlock
Action
.621 Minimum
configuration: ••••• any UNIVAC 490 Series
system.
• 622 Usable extra
facilities: •••••••• all.
Improper
format:
check
noted on listing or
console •
Incomplete
entries:
check
•7
noted on listing or
console •
Target computer overflow:
?
Inconsistent
program:
checks
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Error
Missing
entries:
Unsequenced
entries:
Duplicate
names:
I
800: 181. 620
Check or
Interlock
Action
Unallocated
tags:
none.
check (card
input only)
noted on listing.
check
noted on listing.
.8
check
noted on listing or
console.
noted on listing
and equated to
zero.
ALTERNATIVE
TRANSLATORS: ••• none.
/
~ '-.
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
12/65
-&
800: 191. 100
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
REX
SI"'ARD
/AEDP
AUERBAJt\
REPDRTS
~
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: REX
.1
.11
• 12
GENERAL
Identity: ..••••.... Real-Time Executive Rou--tine.
REX.
Description
• Contingency Control - Provides for situations
where the normal flow of a program is interrupted. A user-provided routine may be executed; or, if none is available, the program is
usually suspended .
The Real-Time Executive Routine (REX) is an online ·operating system that controls, sequences, and
allocates facilities for user programs operating on
a UNIVAC 490, 491, or 492 computer system. (The
executive routine for the system, Omega, is described in Section 804:191.) The SPURT As~embly
System language provides facilities for linkage and
communication to REX. A group of Utility Routines
is· designed to operate under REX control.
REX provides a priority structure that permits one
real-time program to be run concurrently with one
or more batch programs. When the real-time program is processing a request, batch programs are
interrupted.
.13
FH-880 version: .•.. released in 1962.
Fastrand version: ... December, 1963.
.14
o Input-Output Interrogation - A batch program
can determine the condition of a standard inputoutput request by entering this routine. When a
request is submitted, a program may wait for
the operation to be completed or continue processing.
12/65
Originator: . . . . . . . . UNIVAC Division,
Sperry Rand Corporation.
.15
Maintainer: . . . . . . . as above.
.16
Reference: . . . . • . . . UNIVAC Technical Bulletin
UP 2578, July, 1962.
.2
PROGRAM LOADING
. 21
Source of Programs
Programs from on-line object code libraries and
controlling data are stored on the Master Instruction Tape (MIT). Independent programs which will
be on the drum at object time may be scheduled by
entering controlling data on this tape. The MIT
is generated by using the MIT Assembly routine
(MITAR IT), described in Paragraph 800:151.17.
Parameters are stated by means of control cards,
program cards, and operational parameter cards.
The following functions are performed by REX:
o Selection and Loading - Programs to be run and
their parameters are written on a Master Instruction Tape (MIT) in the order in which they
are to be performed. Options are provided to
run programs on demand only and to inhibit runs.
I)
Listing - REX maintains a queue of requests
for program loading, input-output facilities,
and utility functions.
o Console Control - Provides for communication
between the operator and the running programs.
o Drum Control - Loads utility routines to be run
as batch programs under REX control.
o Initiation - Maintains priority supervision over
standard input-output requests. Priority is
given to real-time program requests, while requests from batch programs are processed in
the order submitted.
o Switching - Provides for sequencing the operation of programs constituting the current program mix. Top priority is always given to the
real-time program. Batch programs are assigned priority ranks according to a programmer
estimate of the percentage of time each program
must spend awaiting completion of input-output
operations. This results in programs with relatively little input-output being executed during
the input-output time of higher-ranking programs.
The switching routine also provides for the handling of interrupts which occurred while nonsuspendible routines were operating.
o Real-Time Interrupt Analysis - Provides for
entry to and exit from user-supplied subroutines.
Availability
Loading of a program is accompanied by a console
type-out describing the facilities required for the
run. After the peripherals have been set up, the
operator starts the program by a console type-in.
Use of the MIT is optional.
.22
Library Subroutines: . subroutines referenced in a
main program but not incorporated into it are automatically loaded from magnetic tape or drum.
.23
Loading Sequence: ... the order of programs on
the MIT is specified by
means of priority and
string items on control
cards. Certain programs
may be "locked," and run
only on demand.. Runs
may also be inhibited.
These two options are
controlled from the .console. Up to 64 programs
can be contained on one
MIT.
.3
HARDWARE ALLOCATION
.31
Storage
.311 Segmenting of
routines: ••••..•. as incorporated in user's
program.
.312 Occupation of working
storage: . . . . . . . . . controlled by REX.
(Contd.)
A
AUERBACH
~
800: 191. 320
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: REX
• 32
Input-Output Units
.321 Initial assignment: ••. ASSIGN operator in SPURT
assigns a unit to a channel
group. Specific assignment to a channel is made
by REX.
.322 Alternation: .•...•• can start new tape on another
device by "START SCHEDULE FORMAT" message.
· 323 Reassignment: •..•• operator substitution.
•4
RUNNING SUPERVISION
• 41
Simultaneous Working: REX controls all inputoutput operations and
attempts to maximize
utilization of the available
peripheral devices.
Multiprogramming: •• one real-time program can
be performed concurrently
with one or more batch
programs.
.43 Multi-sequencing: .•• no provisions.
.44 Errors, Checks, and Action
Check or
Action
Error
Interlock
Loading input
reported to
error:
check
operator.
Allocation
impossible:
check before
recovery routine.
loading
In-out error halt program and
cards:
interlock for
offer options to
card Jam,
etc.
operator.
In-out error try again.
tape:
check
In-out error persistent:
check
reported to responsible worker
program via the
status word.
Invalid
hardware
operation:
interrupt.
check
Program
conflicts:
partial checks REX protects
itself.
Arithmetic
overflow:
no check.
Inproper
reported to oriformat:
check
ginating program or operator.
Invalid address: check
reported to requesting
program.
Reference to
forbidden area: check.
.45 Restarts
.451 Establishing restart
points: .•••.••••• by program-initiated rerun
dump (see Paragraph • 52
below).
.452 Restarting process: •• after a program has been
abandoned and rerun dump
made, the operator can
restart the program by
using a "load" type-in.
.42
"-
©
.5
PROGRAM DIAGNOSTICS
.51
Dynamic
• 511 Tracing: .•••••••• utility program TRACE IV
(800:151.17) can be used
with REX.
.512 Snapshots: •••...•. INSPECT DRUM and INSPECT CORE operations,
initiated by operator, provide console output for a
small block of drum or
core designated by the
operator.
PRINT DRUM and PRINT
CORE operations, initiated
by operator or program,
print blocks of drum or
core on high-speed printer
or magnetic tape (in
octal or Fieldata).
.52 Post Mortem: •••••• rerun dump, program initiated; drum will contain:
o image of core memory
area assigned to the requesting program;
o bypass sentinel; REX
facility and control information;
o specified peripheral
areas;
o a second core image of
the program and bypass
sentinel.
OPERA TOR CONTROL
.6
.61 Signals to Operator
.611 Decision required by
operator: ...•.•.• console typewriter messages.
.612 Action required by
operator: •.•.••.. console typewriter messages.
.613 Reporting progress
of run: ••.••••.•. console typewriter messages.
• 62
Operator's Decisions: console keyboard entries .
.63
Operator's Signals
• 631 Inquiry: .••••....• console keyboard entries •
.632 Change of normal
progress: .••..•• console keyboard entries.
(program sequence is determined by MIT, but can
be altered by console suspension, termination, and
restart abilities. Highpriority unscheduled programs can be loaded from
tape or drum by "load"
type-in.)
LOGGING: •••••..• console typewriter mes.7
sages.
PERFORMANCE
.8
.81
System Requirements
.811 Minimum configuration: .•..•••.•.. 490, 491, or 492 Central
Computer and Console.
1 magnetic tape unit.
1 Flying Head or Fastrand
drum unit.
1 paper tape or card reader
for automatic multiprogram operation.
'965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
12/65
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
800:191.812
.812 Usable extra
facilities:. • • . . • . • larger Core Memory and all
available peripheral
devices.
.813 Reserved equipment: • approximately 4,000 Core
Memory locations.
approximately 33,000 drum
locations with 16K Core
Memory, or 46,000 drum
locations with 32K Core
Memory.
1 magnetic tape unit.
.82
.822 Reloading frequency: . always in Core Memory.
.83
Program Space
Available: .••.•.• all of available core and
drum storage except reserved areas listed in
Paragraph.813.
.84
Program Loading
Time: ••..••..•. limited by speed of input de-vice.
.85
Program
Performance: ••.•. an estimated 3 to 5% of the
total central processor
time is required for executive functions in typical
multi-program operation.
System Overhead
.821 Loading time: •..••• 3 seconds, including operator type-in of date.
12/65
A
AUERBACH
~
800:201.100
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
The overall performance of a UNIVAC 490 Series computer system naturally
depends upon the user's choice of central processor model and peripheral equipment. Therefore, the performance of the UNIVAC 490 Series systems on the AUERBACH Standard EDP
Reports benchmark measures of system performance has been analyzed separately for several
representative configurations using each of the processor models. For performance curves,
summary worksheets, and analyses of the results, please turn to the System Performance
sections of the Subreports on the models of interest:
UNIVAC
UNIVAC
UNIVAC
UNIVAC
490:
491:
492:
494:
..•.••.•...•.......
...••.....•..•.....
•.•.......•.••.....
•...•..............
Page
Page
Page
Page
801:201. 001
802:201. 001
802:201.001
804:201. 001.
(
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
12/65
\
t
I
800:211. 101
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Unit
Width,
inches
Depth,
inches
Height,
inches
Weight,
pounds
Power,
KVA
BTU
per hr.
UNIVAC 490, 491, 492
Power Control Cabinet
Central Processor
Computer Power Supply
Control Console
40
96
40
54
35
35
35
35
96/64'
96/64'
96/64'
32
1,000
1,500
850
400
0.7
Note 1
4.4
0.5
750
12,000
3,000
1,350
UNIVAC 494
Power Control Cabinet
Central Processor
Computer Power Supply
Control Console
Core storage
36
64
36
54
65
35
35
35
35
35
96/64'
96/64'
96/64'
32
96/64'
1,040
600
900
400
800
13.45
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
25,800
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
1,200
54
20
48
48
64
20
35
35
24
34
36
96/64'
96/64'
96/64'
96/64'
96/64'
96/64'
1,300
625
765
1,300
1,700
?
2.2
0.85
2.5
0.85
?
?
5,125
1,640
600
2,000
?
?
122
36
35
26
96/64'
55
5,150
650
Uniservo 11A
Uniservo 11A Control
Uniservo IDA
Uniservo IDA Control
Uniservo IDC
Uniservo'mC Control
Tape Adapter Cabinet
Uniservo Power Supply
Uniservo VIC (control is
included in first tape
unit)
Uniservo VIIIC
Uniservo VIDC Control
31
20
31
20
31
31
35
66
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
96/64'
96/64'
96/64'
96/64'
96/64'
96/64*
96/64*
96/64'
900/810
625
900/810
625
900/810
625
950
2,800
2.63
0.95
2.75
0.95
2.75
0.95
1.25
3.8
7,140
2,075
7,480
2,075
7,480
2,075
2,400
10,200
24
24
26
29
24
96/64'
96/64'
96/64*
500
700
600
1.9
2.75
0.95
3,500
5,100
2,170
Paper Tape Subsystem
(includes reader,
punch, and synchronizer
in one cabinet)
24
35
96/64'
800
1.0
3,000
Card Reader
Card Punch
Card Control
48.5
38
20
24
26
35
54
48
96/64'
700
775
625
1.0
1.5
3.73
2,500
4,600
2,600
High Speed Printer
Printer Control
43
20
33
35
55
96/64'
1,250
625
1.7
5.95
4,930
2,600
Communication
Terminal Module
Controller
48
26
96/64'
2,000
5.9
6,000
Input-Output Controller
Multi-Memory Adapter
Multi-Processor Adapter
64
?
?
24
?
?
64'
?
?
1,800
?
?
5.4
?
?
12,300
?
?
Peripherals
FH-880 Drum
FH-880 Drum Control
FH-432 Drum
FH-432 Drum Control
FH-1782 Drum
FH-1782 Drum Control
Fastrand Mass storage
Unit
Fastrand Control Unit
27
~4
12.5
1.0
19,500
2,800
• The 64-inch height is standard for the UNIVAC 491, 492 and 494 systems. The 96-inch
height was standard for the UNIVAC 490 and will be available on new equipment for those
users requiring it.
Note 1: Power and heat dissipation figures are included in Power Control Cabinet figure.
General Requirements
Temperature: ••••••••.•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 60 to 80'F.
Relative humidity: ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••.......••• 30 to 80%.
Power: •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 120/208-volt, 60-cycle or
220/380-volt, 50-cycle,
3-phase, 4-wire.
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
12/65
800:221. 101
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
PRICE DATA
PRICE DATA
/
\
'"
For price data on the original UNIVAC 490 computer system, which is no longer being actively
marketed, please turn to Page 801:221. 101.
PRICES
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
CENTRAL
PROCESSORS
Name
No.
491
8187-98
8187-97
8187-96
8187-95
8i87-94
492
Purchase
$
$
$
491 Central Processor Set with
16,384 words of Core Memory
491 Central Processor Set with
32,768 words of Core Memory
491 Central Processor Set with
40,960 words of Core Memory
491 Central Processor Set with
49,152 words of Core Memory
491 Central Processor Set with
57,344 words of Core Memory
491 Central Processor Set with
65,536 words of Core Memory
7,000
1,365
280,000
11,000
1,390
440,000
12,500
1,405
500,000
13,500
1,420
540,000
14,800
1,435
592,000
15,500
1,450
620,000
8,750
1,455
350,000
12,750
1,480
510,000
14,250
1,495
570,000
15,250
1,510
610,000
16,550
1,525
662,000
17,250
1,540
690,000
9,500
1,248
399,000
250
550
150
32
62
10,500
23,100
6,300
The following UNIVAC 492
Processor Sets include:
Processor Type 8187 -02 with
8 I/O Channels;
6 additional I/O channels,
Feature F0764-00;
Control Console, Type 7313-00;
Motor Alternator, Type 8070-01.
8187-93
8187-92
8187-91
8187-90
8187-89
8187-88
3012-99
l
""',
Monthly
Maintenance
The following UNIVAC 491
Processor Sets include:
Processor Type 8187 -02 with
8 I/O Channels;
Control Console, Type 7313-00;
Motor Alternator, Type 8070-01.
8187-99
(
Monthly
Rental
r0745-00
f0745-01
r0774-xx
©
492 Central Processor Set with
16,384 words of Core Memory
492 Central Processor Set with
32,768 words of Core Memory
492 Central Processor Set with
40,960 words of Core Memory
492 Central Processor Set with
49,152 words of Core Memory
492 Central Processor Set with
57,344 words of Core Memory
492 Central Processor Set with
65,536 words of Core Memory
UNIVAC 494 Central Processor
Set:
Processor, Type 3012-00;
Twelve 250KC Channels;
Control Console, Type 4004-02.
Optional Features for UNIVAC 494:
250KC Channels - Increment of 4
550KC Channels - Increment of 4
Auxiliary Console
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
-
12/65
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
800:221. 102
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
No.
INTERNAL
STORAGE
PRICES
Name
Monthly
Rental
Monthly
Maintenance
Purchase
$
$
$
4,500
370
189,000
6,500
500
273,000
11,000
700
462,000
15,500
975
651,000
20,000
1,250
840,000
?
?
?
UNIVAC 491/492 Core Memorl
See Central Processor listings.
7005-99
7005-98
7005-97
7005-96
7005-95
UNIVAC 494 Core Memor~
16,384 words of Core Memory Single Bank
32,768 words of Core Memory Dual Banks
65,536 words of Core Memory Dual Banks
98,304 words of Core Memory Dual Banks
131,072 words of Core Memory Dual Banks
FH -1732 Magnetic Drum Subsystem (1)
(prices to be announced)
iF'0696-00
6013-02
7304-01
8103-03
5009-12
5009-08
5009-13
5009-09
FH-432
system
FH-432
FH-432
Magnetic Drum Sub(1)
Drum Unit
Drum and Control
FH-880 Magnetic Drum Subsystem
FH-880 Drum
FH-880 Drum Control and
Synchronizer
Fastrand II Control and Synchronizer
Single Channel - Unbuffered
Single Channel - Buffered
Dual Channel - Unbuffered
Dual Channel - Buffered
F0710-00 Search All Words - buffered
control option
Fastrand II Subs~stem
6010-00 Fastrand II Storage Unit
F0686-01 Fastrand feature
F0688-01 Write Lockout feature
INPUTOUTPUT
0858-00
0858-08
0858-01
5008-04
5008-05
F0627-04
F0627-03
Uniservo VIC Magnetic TaEe
Subsystem
Uniservo VIC Master 7 -Channel
Non-Simultaneous Unit
Uniservo VIC Master 7 -Channel
Simultaneous Unit
Uniservo VIC Slave "'-Channel Unit
Uniservo VIC Control and
Synchronizer, Single-Channel
Uniservo VIC Auxiliary Control
and Synchronizer, Dual-Channel
Translate Options f0r 5008-04,
-05, -16, -17
1,000
3,000
85
310
40,000
120,000
2,000
1,420
165
165
92,000
71,000
1,200
1,250
2,400
2,500
100
100
200
200
57,600
60,000
115,200
120,000
50
10
2,000
3,800
200
25
265
22
3
184,000
9,000
1,125
500
125
20,000
550
125
22,000
300
700
75
30
12,000
28,000
700
30
28,000
100
5
3,600
(Contd.)
12/65
A
AUERBACH
~
PRICE DATA
800:221. 103
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
INPUTOUTPUT
(Contd.)
No.
Name
0859-00
0859-02
5008-16
5008-17
0751-00
8120-00
0706-00
0600-00
5010-01
Uniservo VIllC Magnetic Tal2e
Subsystem
Uniservo VIllC 7 -Channel
Non-Simultaneous Unit
Uniservo VIlIC 7 -Channel
Simultaneous Unit
Uniservo VIlIC Control and
Synchronizer, Singh,,-Channel
Uniservo VIlIC Control and
Synchronizer, Dual-Channel
High -Speed Printer Subsystem
High-Speed Printer - 700/922
LPM (3)
High-Speed Printer Control and
Synchronizer (3)
Punched Card Subs~stem
Ca,:d Reader - 800 900 CPM
Card Punch - 300 CPM
Card Control and Synchronizer
8136-00 Pal2er Tape Reader and Punch
!F0700-xx, Electronic Transfer Switch (2)
2502-xx Electronic Transfer Switch
Cabinet (2)
!F0597-02 1004 to 491 and 492 Adapter (2)
Communication Subsystem
!F0900-05 Communication Terminal Module
Controller
hc0901-04 Communication Terminal Modulelow-speed, asynchronous, 5-8
level, 2 in, 2 out
1F0902-02 Communication Terminal Modulemedium-speed, asynchronous,
5-8 level, 2 in, 2 out
!F0903-02 Communication Terminal Modulehigh-speed, synchronous,
5-8 level, 2 in, 2 out
1rc0905-00 CLT Automatic Dialing - 1 Output
1F0904-00 CLT Parallel Output
1F0904-01 C L T Parallel Input
8552-00
r0614-00
F0615-00
f0616-00
F0617-00
FOB18-00
8552-01
le0614-01
F0771-01
(
F0772-00
F0772-01
Data Communication Terminal
Data Communication Terminal
Basic Set
Power Supply for 8552-00,01
Communication Terminal
Synchronous (CTS) Module
Broad-Band Interface
Unattended Answering Service
Automatic Calling
Data Communication Terminal
Data Communication; Terminal
Basic Set
Power Supply (for Second WTS)
Word Terminal Synchronous (WTS)
Module
Voice-Band Adapter
Unattended Answering Service
PRICES
Monthly
Rental
Monthly
Maintenance
Purchase
$
$
$
800
95
36,000
850
95
38,250
1,450
105
60,900
1,450
105
60,900
800
240
36,000
750
160
34,275
380
665
750
100
295
230
15,200
26,600
33,750
645
150
325
110
8
32,250
6,000
13,000
200
20
8,000
650
60
118
11
25,000
2,400
75
13
3,300
90
12
3,600
20
35
35
6
7
7
900
1,575
1,575
250
100
250
?
?
?
10,000
4,000
10,000
100
5
50
?
?
?
4,000
200
2,000
250
100
395
?
?
?
10,000
4,000
15,800
5
5
?
?
200
200
"'--©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
12/65
UNIVAC 490
800:221. 104
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
INPUTOUTPUT
(Contd.)
No.
PRICES
Name
F0772-02 Automatic Calling
F0772-03 Broad-Band Adapter
MULTIPROCESSOR
EQUIPMENT
FOR 494
I
I
SER~S
Input-OutEut Controller
Basic controller with 4 I/o
channels; includes cabinet and
power supply
Optional features:
Additional I/O Channels, per
increment of 4
ESI Buffer Control, expansion
from 256 to 512 words
Multiple Module Adapter {MMA)
MMA with 5 access paths;
30 bit; includes cabinet and
power supply
Multi-Processor AdaEter {MPA)
Basic 30-bit MPA; 2-Processor
capability; includes cabinet
and power supply.
Monthly
Rental
Monthly
Maintenance
$
$
Purchase
$
50
5
?
?
2,000
200
4,000
100
168,000
"."' -
500
50
21,000
750
5
31,000
735
50
30,870
435
25
18,270
(1)
Available for 494 only.
(2)
Available for 491 and 492 only.
(3)
The same Printer and Printer Control are offered for the 494 computer
system at the same prices, but as model numbers 0755-00 and 8120-02,
respectively.
,/
/
12/65
A
AUERBACH
~
UNIVAC 490
Univac
(A DivisioR of Sperry Rand Corporation)
I
'",-
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
UNIVAC 490
Univac
(A Division of Sperry Rand Corporation)
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
,
,~
,
'I'!i
801:011. 100
/&
AUERBACH
STAIIDARD
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
490 COMPUTER SYSTEM
INTRODUCTION
EDP
REPORTS
~
INTRODUCTION
I
'-
The UNIVAC 490 Real-Time System was announced in December 1960, and the
first customer delivery was made in December 1961.
Among the characteristics of the original UNIVAC 490 system that distinguish it
from the newer members of the 490 Series are the following:
•
A basic core storage cycle time of 6 microseconds (or 4.8 microseconds
with the optional Accelerator Package).
•
Core storage capacities of 16,384 or 32,768 30-bit words.
•
An instruction repertoire consisting of 62 basic instructions.
•
The absence of direct facilities for floating-point, double-precision, and
decimal arithmetic. *
•
The absence of a parity check on core storage operations. *
•
A maximum of 14 input~output channels, 12 of which are available for
general-purpose use.
•
Inability to utilize some of the new, high-performance 490 Series peripheral
devices, such as Fastrand II, the FH-432 and FH-1782 Drums, and the
Uniservo VIC and VillC Magnetic Tape Handlers.
*
This subreport concentrates upon the characteristics and performance of the
UNIVAC 490 Central Processor and systems based upon it. All general characteristics of
the 490 Series hardware and software are described in Computer System Report 800:
UNIVAC 490 Series - General.
The System Configuration section that follows shows the UNIVAC 490 system arranged in a number of standardized configurations according to the rules in the Users'
GUide, page 4:030. 120. These standardized equipment configurations form the basis for a
detailed analysis of the overall System Performance of the UNIVAC 490 on our standard
benchmark problems, the results of which are presented in Section 801:201.
cessor,
tasks.
Section 801:051 contains a detailed description of the UNIVAC 490 Central Proits processing facilities, and its execution times for a series of standardized
The rentals, purchase, and maintenance prices that were in effect for the UNIVAC
490 system while it was being actively marketed are listed in Section 801:221.
* These characteristics are shared by the newer UNIVAC 491 and 492
systems described in
the following subreport.
,
I
I
\"
I
\,,--
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
1/66
801:031. 100
1.
m ..",
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
490 COMPUTER SYSTEM
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
/AEDP
AUERBAC~
.
IEPons
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
For overall configuration rules, refer to Page 800:031.100 .
•1
6-TAPE AUXILIARY STORAGE SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION V
Deviations from Standard Configuration: .••••..••...• auxiliary storage (Fastrand) is 224% larger.
core storage is 350% larger.
card punch is 50% faster.
printer is 40% faster.
2 more simultaneous non-tape data transfer
operations are possible
4 more index registers.
Equipment
Rental
Fastrand Storage Unit &
Synchronizer:
12,976,128 words
$ 6,050
Core Memory:
16,384 words
\
',,--
Central Processor
10,000
Console
Card Control & Synchronizer
1,600
Card Reader: 600 cards/min.
350
Card Punch: 150 cards/min.
500
Printer & Synchronizer:
700/922 lines/min.
2,550
Uniservo IIA Synchronizer
1,530
Uniservo lIA Tape Units (6):
25,000 char/sec.
2,700
I
',,--.
Uniservo Power Supply
(not shown)
(,,-,
TOTAL RENTAL:
550
$25,830
Note: Standard Configuration III is the same as Configuration V (shown here) less Fastrand
Storage Unit and Synchronizer; its rental is $19,780 per month.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
1/66
801:031.200
.2
UNIVAC 490
10-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (INTEGRATED);
CONFIGURATION VIlA
Deviations from Standard Configuration: • • . . • . . . • . • . . magnetic drum is required for use of most
software systems.
core storage is 24% smaller.
magnetic tape is 108% faster.
card punch is 50% faster.
printer is 40% faster.
floating-point hardware is not available.
Equipment
Rental
FH-880 Drum & Synchronizer:
786,432 words
$ 3,420
Core Memory:
16,384 words
Central Processor
10,000
Console
Card Control & Synchronizer
READ OR WRITE
-;;EADO'Nl:Y-
Card Reader: 600 cards/min.
350
Card Punch: 150 cards/min.
500
Printer & Synchronizer:
700/922 lines/min.
2,550
Uniservo IlIA Synchronizer:
dual channel model
4,800
Uniservo IlIA Tape Units (10):
125,000 char/sec.
7,500
Uniservo Power Supply
(not shown)
TOTAL RENTAL:
1/66
A ...
AUERBACH
1,600
550
$31,270
i
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
.3
801:031. 300
20-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (INTEGRATED); CONFIGURATION VIllA
Deviations from Standard Configuration: . . . . • . . . . . . . • magnetic drum is required for use of
most software systems.
core storage is 24% smaller.
magnetic tape is 108% faster.
card reader is 40% slower.
card punch is 25% slower.
printer is 20% slower.
floating-point hardware is not available.
Equipment
Rental
FH-880 Drum & Synchronizer:
786,432 words
$ 3,420
Core Memory:
32,768 words
Central Processor
14,000
Console
Card Control & Synchronizer
(
Card Reader: 600 cards/min.
350
Card Punch: 150 cards/min.
500
Printer & Synchronizer:
700/922 lines/min.
2,550
Uniservo IlIA Synchronizers (2):
dual-channel models
9,600
Uniservo IlIA Tape Units (20):
125,000 char/sec.
READ OR WRITE::
-READ
---ONLY
Uniservo Power Supply
(not shown)
TOTAL RENTAL:
I\
1,600
15,000
1,100
$48,120
\.~
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
1/66
801 :031. 400
.4
UNIVAC 490
TYPICAL COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
Equipment
Communication Line Terminals:
up to 32 input and 32 output
lines
Communication Multiplexer
Fastrand Storage Unit &
Synchronize r:
12,976,128 words
Rental
*
$ 1,300
6,050
Core Memory:
16,384 words
Central Processor
10,000
Console
Card Control & Synchronizer
Card Reader: 600 cards/min.
350
Card Punch: 150 cards/min.
500
Printer & Synchronizer:
700/922 lines/min.
2,550
Uniservo IlA Synchronizer
1,530
UniservoIIA Tape Units (6):
25,000 char/sec.
2,700
Uniservo Power Supply
(not shown)
TOTAL RENTAL:
*
1/66
Costs of the necessary Communication Line Terminals and interface units are not included.
A
AUERBACH
~
1,600
550
$27,130
&
801:051. 100
STANDlID
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
490 COMPUTER SYSTEM
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
/&EDP
AUERBACH
REPORTS
~
CENTRAL PROCESSOR: UNIVAC 490
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity: ••••••••.• UNIVAC 490 Central
--Processor.
Types 8188 through 8199.
• 12
Description
The Central Processor of the UNIVAC 490 computer system is a single cabinet that houses the
system's solid-state arithmetic and control circuits, 16 word locations of Wired Memory, and
16,384 or 32,768 word locations of Core Memory
with a cycle time of 6 microseconds. The faster,
more powerful Central Processors used with the
UNIVAC 491/492 and 494 systems are described in
Sections 802:051 and 804:051, respectively.
Each UNIVAC 490 instruction is one word (30 bits)
in length and consists of five parts called "designators," as shown below.
Designator:
f
j
k
b
Y
Size (bits):
6 3
3
3
15
• The 6-bit f-designator specifies the basic operation to be performed.
• The 3-bit j-designator usually specifies the conditions under which a skip or jump will be performed (e. g., when contents of an arithmetic register are positive, negative, zero, or nonzero). It can also specify the mode for a "Repeat" instruction, or the index register to be
used in a loop control instruction. (In inputoutput instructions, the j-designator is 4 bits
long and specifies the channel to be used.)
• The 3-bit k-designator shows how the operand is
to be derived from the y-designator part; e. g. ,
the operand of a load instruction can be y itself,
all or either half of the Core Memory location
specified by y, or the contents of the accumulator. (In input-output instructions, the k-designator is only 2 bits long, but its function is similar.)
• The 3-bit b-designator specifies one (or none) of
seven index registers, whose contents are to be
added to the y-designator part to form the operand or its address.
• The 15-bit y-designator specifies the base operand address, a literal operand, or a shift count.
There are 62 basic instructions, each with up to 64
distinct variations made possible by the j- and kdesignators. The j-designator in most instructions
can cause a conditional skip of the next instruction,
depending upon the sign of the A-register (accumulator) or Q-register after the specified operation
has been performed. The k-designator in most instructions can specify whether the operand shall
consist of all 30 bits or only the high-order or loworder 15 bits of the Core Memory location specified
by the y-designator. Where half-word operands
are specified, sign extension is optional •
The UNIVAC 490 instruction repertoire includes a
full complement of fixed-point arithmetic, Boolean,
comparison, and shift operations on 30-bit binary
operands. Thirteen different "Replace" instructions
provide many of the capabilities of two-address,
"add-to-storage" processors; e. g., by means of a
single instruction, the contents of the accumulator
can be added to (or subtracted from) the contents of
a specified Core Memory location and the result
placed in both the accumulator and the specified
Core Memory location. The "Repeat" instruction
causes the instruction immediately following it to
be executed from 0 to 32, 767 times, with or without index register modification prior to each execution. The Repeat capability permits efficient
table lookup operations. Special instructions are
provided to load, store, test, and increment (by
+ 1 or -1 only) the contents of the seven index
registers.
Facilities not directly provided in the instruction
repertoire include editing, double precision arithmetic, decimal arithmetic, floating point arithmetic, multi-word internal transfers, and radix conversions. Generalized subroutines or complex
sequences of instructions are therefore required
to accomplish these important operations.
Execution time is 12 microseconds for most
UNIVAC 490 instructions that reference an operand
in Core Memory. When the operand is contained in
the instruction itself (liS a 15-bit literal) or in the
accumulator or Q-register, the execution time is
generally lower. Address modification by indexing does not increase instruction execution
times. Average execution time is about 10 microseconds per instruction.
Program interrupts occur upon normal completion
of an input-output operation (optional), upon detection of an input-output or processor error, and
upon overflow of the program-settable delta clock.
Control is transferred to one of 44 fixed locations,
depending upon the cause of interruption. Only the
contents of the instruction sequence counter can be
automatically saved when an interrupt occurs, so
the routine that services the interrupt condition
(usually REX) must preserve and restore the previous contents of all the registers it uses. The interrupt facility makes it possible to run one or
more batch programs concurrently with a realtime program, under control of the Real-Time Executive Routine (REX), described in Section
800:19l.
The UNIVAC 490 has three electronic chronometers. The Real-Time Clock occupies the lower
half of octal location 00017, is incremented each
millisecond, and recyeles back to zero every
32,768 milliseconds. The Delta Clock occupies the
upper half of octal location 00017, counts each mil-
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.
1/66
801:051. 120
• 12
UNIVAC 490
Description (Contd.)
lisecond, and can be set by the program to initiate
an interrupt after any time interval from 1 to
32, 768 milliseconds. The Day Clock is connected
to one of the two "computer-to-computer" data
channels, is controlled by REX, and presents the
time of day (in hours and minutes) via an interrupt
each minute.
Operation and
Variation
• 13
Availability: ••••••• discontinued .
• 14
First Delivery: ••••• December, 1961.
.2
PROCESSING FACILITIES
.21
Operations and Operands
Provision
Radix
Size
automatic
binary
29 bits + sign.
none.
automatic
binary
29 bits + sign
(60-bit product).
none.
automatic
binary
29 bits + sign
(60-bit dividend).
.212 Floating point Add-subtract:
Multiply:
subroutine
subroutine
binary
Divide:
subroutine
fraction: 28 bits +
sign.
exponent: 15 bits +
sign.
.211 Fixed point Add- subtract:
MultiplyShort:
Long:
DivideNo remainder:
Remainder:
.213 Boolean AND:
automatic
Inclusive OR:
binary
automatic
30
Exclusive OR:
automatic
.214 Comparison Numbers:
automatic
30
Letters:
automatic
30
Mixed:
automatic
30
Collating sequence: see Data Code Table, Section 800: 141.
Provision
.215 Code translation:
.216 Radix conversion:
.217 Edit format Alter size:
Suppress zero:
Round off:
Insert point:
Insert spaces:
Insert commas:
Float $, +, -:
Protection:
.218 Table look-up Equality:
Greater than:
Less than or equal:
Within limits:
Greatest:
Least:
Comment
bits.
bits.
bits (6 chars).
bits (6 chars).
Size
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
performed by
subroutines.
none.
semi-automatic
through use of
"Repeat" instruction
none.
none.
/
30 bits.
(Contd.)
1/66
A.
AUERBACH
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
801:051.219
.219 Others Shifts:
Add to storage:
Subtract from
storage:
Repeat:
.22
Provisions
Comment
automatic
left shifts are
30 or 60 bits.
circular; right
shifts with sign
extension
.
29 bits + sign.
automatic
automatic
automatic
Special Cases of Operands
.221 Negative numbers: ••• one's complement.
· 222 Zero: •••••••.•.•• +0 and -0 have zeros and
ones, respectively, in
all 30 bit positions; they
are considered unequal in
compare and certain arithmetic operations.
· 223 Operand size
determination: .•.•• k-designator in most instructions specifies full word
(30 bits), upper or lower
half-word (15 bits), or
literal operand (15 bits).
• 23
Instruction Formats
. 231 Instruction structure: 1 word.
• 232 Instruction layout:
Name:
f
j (or j*)
k (or k*)
b
Y
Size (bits):
6
3 (or 4)
3 (or 2)
3
15
• 233 Instruction parts Name
Purpose
f-designator .••.•• specifies operation code.
j-designator: ....•• specifies skip or jump condition, or special register.
j*-designator (I/O
instruction): •.••• specifies input or output
channel.
k-designator: •••.• controls the procedure by
which the operand is derived.
k*-designator (I/O
instruction): ••••• controls procurement and/
or storing of the operand.
b-designator: ••••• specifies 1 (or none) of 7
Index Registers, whose
contents are added to y.
y-designator: .•••• specifies an operand address or a literal
operand.
• 234 Basic address
structure: •••••.•• 1 + O.
Size
29 bits + sign.
executes next
instruction
specified
number of
times •
• 235 LiteralsArithmetic: .•••.•• 15 bits (i. e., up to
32, 767).
Comparisons
and tests: •.••••• 15 bits.
Incrementing
modifiers: .•.••. 15 bits.
.236 Directly addressed operandsInternal storage Minimum Maximum Volume
~
size
size
accessible
Core Memory: 15 bits
1 word
total
capacity
(16,384 or
32,768
words).
Wired Memory: 15 bits
1 word
16 words.
· 237 Address indexing.2371 Number of methods: 1•
.2372 Name: .••.••.••• indexing.
.2373 Indexing rule: •.•.• add contents of specified
index register to Y (loworder 15 bits of instruction word), modulo
32,768 •
• 2374 Index specification:
by b-designator in the instruction to be modified.
.2375 Number of potential
indexers: •••.••• 7•
• 2376 Addresses which
can be indexed: ••• operand address portion
(y-designator) of all instructions, including
literals.
.2377 Cumulative
indexing: ; . . . . . . none.
.2378 Combined index
and step: ••••••• none.
• 238 Indirect addressing: •• only by means of jump instructions.
· 239 Stepping.2391 Specification of
increment: ••.••• implied by operation code.
.2392 Increment sign: •••• + or -.
.2393 Size of increment: •• always 1 or 2 (depending on
skip conditions).
• 2394 End value: ..••..• zero, or any value specified
in instruction or storage
location.
.2395 Combined step and
test: •••••••••• yes.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
1/66
.UNIVAC 490
801:051.240
. 24
Special Processor Storage
.241 Category of
storage
Size in
bits
Number of
locations
Register:
Register:
1
1
30
30
Register:
1
15
Register:
7
15
Register:
1
30
Register:
1
15
Register:
1
30
Register:
Register:
1
1
30
Register:
2
30
Register:
2
30
• 242 Category of
storage
Register:
·3
SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES
· 31
Instruction Sequencing
6
flipflops
19
• 311 Number of sequence
control facilities: ..• 1 (P-register).
. 314 Special sub-sequence
counters: .•••..•. none (during repeated instructions, Index Register 7 holds the repeat
counter).
· 315 Sequence control step
size: .••.•....•• 1 word (2 words on skips).
.316 Accessibility to
routines: . • . . • . . . P-register contents can be
stored in Core Memory by
"Return Jump" instructions.
• 317 Permanent or optional
modifier: . . . . . • . • no.
.32
Look-Ahead:
• 33
Interruption
. . . . none.
.331 Possible causesIn-out units: •..••• see next entry.
In-out SUbsystems: .• completion of input-output
operation or input-output
error.
Storage access: .••. completion of magnetic
drum operation or drum
error.
Processor errors: •• illegal function code.
Other: •....••.•• Delta Clock overflow; Delta
Clock not updated.
1/66
Physical
form
Total number
of locations
A
Program usage
A-register; accumulator •
Q-register; auxiliary
arithmetic register;
combines with A-register
to form a single 60-bit
register.
P-register; holds address
of next instruction.
B-registers; index
registers.
X-register; arithmetic
communication register.
S-register; holds storage
address during storage
references.
Z-register; operand buffer
for storage references.
K-register; shift counter.
U-register; holds the instruction being executed.
R-registers; used for communication with index
registers.
C-registers; communication
buffer registers.
Access time,
Jlsec
overlapped with
Core Memory
access time.
· 332 Control by routineIndividual control: .. can enable internal interrupts on any or all inputoutput channels by means
of special input-ouput instructions •
Internal interrupts occur
when an input buffer is
filled or an output buffer
is emptied.
Method: .•.•..••.. when an interrupt occurs,
all other non-error interrupts are disabled until
they are re-E'mabled by a
special instruction.
Restriction: ••..
. error interrupts cannot be
locked out.
• 333 Operator control:
. none.
· 334 Interruption conditions: interrupt enabled.
• 335 Interruption processDisabling
interruption: •.•.. automatic.
Registers saved: ..• contents of P-register
(sequence counter) are
saved by "Return Jump"
instruction; other registers by program.
Destination: ••.••• one of 44 fixed locations,
depending upon cause.
.336 Control methodsDetermine cause: •.• automatic; destination depends upon cause.
Enable interruption: • by special instruction contained in REX before returning to main program.
(Contd.)
AUERBACH
~
/
/'
801:051. 340
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
,
\
.34
.42
Multiprogramming
.341 Method of control: ••. by REX (see Section 800: 191),
using the interrupt facilities described above.
• 342 Maximum number of
programs: ••••••. limited only by hardware
availability.
.343 Precedence rules: ••. see 800: 191.12.
.344 Program protectionStorage: •••••.••. none.
In-outs units: .••.• via assignment by REX of
specific units to specific
programs.
.35
.4
Multi-sequencing: •.. practical only in multicomputer complexes.
PROCESSOR SPEEDS
All processing times listed here are based on
use of the standard 6-microsecond memory. With
the optional 4. 8-microsecond memory, UNIVAC
490 Processor speeds will be the same as those of
the 491/492 Processors, as listed in Paragraph
802:051.4.
• 41
Instruction Times in Microseconds
.411 Fixed pointAdd-subtract: .•••• 12.0 t
Multiply: •••.••••. 37. 2 to 85. 2
Divide: •...•.••.• 86.4
\
"'-
• 412 Floating point (using standard subroutines)Add: ••.••..•••. 380.
Subtract: .••••.•.• 452.
Multiply: •••••••.• 406.
Divide: •••••••••• 446.
.413 Additional allowance forIndexing: .•••••.. O.
Indirect addressing: . 6 (jump instructions only).
Re-complementing: •. O.
.414 ControlCompare: •••••... 12.0
Branch: •••••••.• 6. 0
Compare and branch: 18.0
(~
\
t
.415 Counter controlStep and test: •.... 6.0 to 12.0
.416 Edit: ••••.....••.
.417 ConvertDecimal to binary: • .
Binary to decimal: •. *
.418 Shift: •••..•••..•• 7.2 to 15.6
*
*
t
,/
I
~
t
*
These times are based on use of operands in
Core Memory. Times are shorter if the
operand is a literal or is contained in the A- or
Q-register.
Performed by subroutines; timing data not
available.
Processor Performance in Microseconds
.421 For random addresses Fixed point
c = a + b: • • • • • •• 36. 0
b = a + b: • • • • . .. 30.0
Sum N items: •••. 12. ON
c = ab: ••..••..• 85.2
c = alb: ••••••.. 110.4
.422 For arrays of data Fixed point
ci = ai + b j: . . • .• 66. 0
bj = ai :- bj: • • . .• 60.0
Sum N items: ••..
7.2N
c = c + aibj= ...•• 121.2
.423 Branch based on comparison Numeric data: • • •. 81. 6
Alphabetic data: . •• 81.6
.424 Switching
Unchecked: . . . . .. 24. 0
Checked: •••••.• 60.0
List search: • • . .• 33. 6 + 7. 2N
.425 Format control per character Unpack: ••..•..• ?
Compose: •.••..• ?
.426 Table look-up per comparison For a match: • • . .•
8.4
For interpolation .•
pOint:. . • . . . . ..
8.4
.427 Bit indicators Set bit in separate
location: • . . • . .. 24. 0
Set bit in pattern: .. 30.0
Test bit in separate
location: • • • • . .. 12. 0
Test bit in pattern:. 24. 0
Test AND for B bits:. 48. 0
Test OR for B bits: . 48. 0
.428 Moving (per full word
or half-word): . • • .. 12.0 (using repeated "Replace" instruction).
.5
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Error
Overflow:
Zero divisor:
Invalid data:
Invalid operation:
Arithmetic
error:
Invalid address:
Receipt of
data:
Dispatch of
data:
Delta Clock
not updated:
Check or
Interlock
Action
none
none
none.
as programmed.
as programmed.
check
interrupt.
**
interrupt.
**
none.
none.
none.
none.
check
** Branch to a specific location in Wired Memory
occurs if Bootstrap switch is in "Automatic
Recovery" position.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
1/66
801:201.001
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
490 COMPUTER SYSTEM
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
GENERAIJZED FILE PROCESSING (801:201. 1)
These problems involve updating a master file from information in a detail file and
producing a printed record of the results of each transaction. This application is one of the most
typical of commercial data processing jobs and is fully described in Section 4:200. 1 of the Users'
Guide.
Because the UNIVAC 490 can process several independent programs at the same time
through multiprogramming, the amount of central processor time required by each program is
highly significant. The difference (if any) between the total elapsed time for a particular run and the
amount of central processor time required for that run represents processor time that is potentially available to other programs. Whether or not this processor time can be efficiently utilized
depends upon the system configuration, the over-all problem mix, and the effectiveness of the
scheduling and operating system.
In the graphs for Standard File Problems A, B, C, and D, the total time required for
each standard configuration to process 10,000 master file records is shown by solid lines. For
Configurations VIIA and VIIIA, where all four input-output files are on magnetic tape, total
times were computed for cases using both unblocked and blocked records in the detail and report
files. Central processor time is essentially the same for all configurations, and is shown by
the line marked "CP" on each graph. No addition has been made to the processor time to cover
the overhead requirements of the operating system.
Worksheet Data Table 1 (page 801: 201. 011) shows that the printer is the controlling
factor on total time required over most of the detail activity range for Configurations ID and V.
In these configurations the detail file is read by the on-line card reader and the report file is
produced by the on-line printer. The central processor is occupied for only a fraction of the
total processing time. When other programs with limited input and output can be run simultaneously in order to utilize the remaining processor time, it may be satisfactory to operate the
UNIVAC 490 as just described. In other cases, it will be more effiCient to divide the file processing problem into three separate runs: a card-to-tape transcription of the detail file, the
processing run with all files on magnetic tape, and a tape-to-print transcription of the report file.
The curves for Configurations VITA and VIIIA show the time required for the all-tape main processing run. The card-to-tape and tape-to-printer transcriptions will run at card reader and
printer-limited speeds, and their demands on the processor will be small. The elapsed time
and central processor time for the data transcription runs are shown on a separate graph
(801:201.150). It should be noted that in the case of Configurations VIIA and VIDA, the central
processor time, rather than the input-output time, is the controlling factor whether the detail
and report files are blocked or unblocked.
(
The master file record format is a mixture of alphameric and binary numeric items,
designed to minimize the number of time-consuming radix conversion operations required.
Even so, most of the central processor time is devoted to editing, radix conversion, and character manipulation operations. Packing was kept to a minimum because of the high demands it
would place upon the UNIVAC 490 central processor. The resulting master file record length
is 21 words (the equivalent of 105 6-bit characters).
SORTING (801:201. 2)
The standard estimate for sorting 80-character records by straightforward merging
on magnetic tape was developed from the time for Standard File Problem A according to the
method explained in the Users' Guide, Paragraph 4:200.213, using a three-way merge.
MATRIX INVERSION (801:201. 3)
In matrix inversion, the object is to measure central processor speed on the straightforward inversion of a non-symmetric, non-singular matrix. No input-output operations are
involved. The standard estimate is based on the time to perform cumulative multiplication
(c = c + aibj) using the standard single-precision floating-point subroutines. The processor
time required for a matrix inversion can be spread over a much longer total elapsed time when
the inversion is multi-run with other programs that utilize the available input-output equipment.
Multi-running of other programs necessarily decreases the amount of internal storage that can
be allocated to the matrix inversion.
GENERAIJZED MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING (801:201. 4)
The standard estimating procedure outlined in the Users' Guide, Paragraph 4:200.413,
was used. Computation includes 5 fifth-order polynomials, 5 divisions and 1 square root, all
of which were timed using SPURT floating-point subroutines.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
1/66
801:201.011
UNIVAC 490
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 1
CONFIGURATION
ITEM
1
Char/block
Records/block
loputOutput
Times
K
m,
1 050
1 050
1 050
(File 1)
10
10
10
~=File2
msee/switch
~=Flle2
f - - _ _ _O_ _ _ _. _
f-!1!ti- - - -
_ - - - _ . - t - - - - - _0_ _ _ t - - _ _ _O
~File2
1 - - - ___3 ._78_ _ _. - t--- - - -
"
0'
'<9
r
0'1>
2
II Ii
II
1.0
7
I#"
~
l/
4
0.1
V
V
"'-?
~~
4
2
~
,
7
/
/
III
Time in Minutes
to Transcribe
Records
V
I;'
4
/
/
V
~
,
,
"
~
/
1/
.... 1.0
L'
, ,,' 1/
.~/ /~
V
V
/
~
'0>-Q.
~.;;
/
/u
0-q.
7
/
/
4
0'l
~
/
/ ' .,/
2
I,l
0.01
100
2
4
V
7
2
1,000
4
7
2
10,000
4
7
100,000
Number of Records Transcribed
(Graph applies to Standard Configurations VITA and VIllA;
curves marked "CP" denote Central Processor times.)
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
1/66
UNIVAC 491/492
802: 20 1. 200
.2
SORTING
.21
Standard Problem Estimates
. 213 Timing basis: ••..•• using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.213; 3-way tape
merge .
• 214 Graph: • • • . . . . • . . • see graph below.
.211 Record size: ••••••• 80 characters.
• 212 Key size: ••••••.•• 8 characters.
1,000
7
4
2
100
7
I.J
4
1/
/
2
~V
Time in Minutes to
put Records into
Required Order
10
,
7
I
/
2
/
/
1
,
7
"
,
I
I'
4
I'
/
~
"
~~'I
III(
1,1
~
4
~
4,<:;.0/
~.
4::,.-<$
II~
/
..... 1.0
I
/
~
/
"
2
0.1
100
2
4
7
1,000
2
4
7
2
10,000
4
7
100,000
Number of Records
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
(Contd. )
1/66
A
AUERBACH
~
802:201. 300
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
.3
MATRIX INVERSION
.31
Standard Problem Estimates
.312 Timing basis: .•..•• using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.312 .
• 313 Graph:........... see graph below •
• 311 Basic parameters: ••• general, non-symmetric
matrices, using floating
point to at least 8 decimal
digits precision.
100.0
7
4
2
10.0
7
II
4
J
2
"'--
Time in Minutes
for Complete
Inversion
V
..... 1.0
1.0
~
II
7
I
4
I
1
V
2
0.1
II
7
I
/
(
"-
I
I
4
I
I
2
V
("
(,
0.01
1
2
4
7
10
2
4
7
100
2
4
7
1,000
Size of Matrix
(
',,-© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
1/66
802:201. 400
UNIVAC 491/492
.4
GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING
.41
Standard Mathematical Problem A Estimates
. 411 Record sizes: •.•••• 10 signed numbers; average
size 5 digits, maximum
size 8 digits •
• 412 Computation: ••••••• 5 fifth-order polynomials,
5divisions, and 1 square
root; computation is performed in 8-digit-precisio
floating-point mode, using
subroutines.
.413 Timing basis: ••••.• using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.413 •
• 414 Graph: .•.•••...•• see graph below .
10,000
7
4
2
o-q. 1'1
,?,:,'1
:s.:<$.
1,000
'?':"
7
~..,
4'
~,y
4
7
I;
2
,~
III, V (R:: 1. 0)
Time in
100
Milliseconds
per Input Record 7
::::::::::: III. V(R
.... 100
....
0.1. 0.01)
-'
I
C~
4
~
-,. /
..;J~~'~
~i\;"' .......
-;.:;--
2
10
7
4
2
1
2
0.1
4
7
2
4
7
2
4
10.0
1.0
C, Number of Computations per Input Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations;
R := number of output records per input record; curve
marked "CP" shows central processor time.)
1/66
A
AUERBACH
•
7
100.0
UNIVAC 494
Univac
(A Division of Sperry Rand Corporation)
(
I
\
"
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A,
UNIVAC 494
Univac
(A Division of Sperry Rand Corporation)
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
804:011. 100
A•
AUERBACH
STANIIARII
EDP
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
494 COMPUTER SYSTEM
INTRODUCTION
REPORTS
INTRODUCTION
The UNIVAC 494 computer system was announced in June 1965, and the first customer delivery is scheduled for the second quarter of 1966.
Among the characteristics of the UNIVAC 494 system that distinguish it from the
less powerful members of the 490 Series are the following:
•
A basic core storage cycle time of 0.75 microsecond; an effective cycle
time of 0.375 microsecond can be achieved through dual-bank overlapping
of memory accesses in all models with 32, 768 words or more.
•
Core storage capacities of 16,384 to 131,072 30-bit words.
II
An instruction repertoire consisting of 109 basic instructions (including all
of the 62 instructions used in the UNIVAC 490, 491, and 492 Processors).
•
Inclusion of standard facilities for floating-point, double-precision, and
decimal arithmetic.
•
A special 490-compatible mode that enables a 494 to execute programs
written for UNIVAC 490, 491, or 492 systems without alteration.
•
A core storage protection facility that permits individual 64-word blocks to
be guarded against unauthorized access.
•
Parity checking on all core storage operations.
II
A maximum of 24 input-output channels, 23 of which are available for
general-purpose use.
This subreport concentrates upon the characteristics and performance of the
UNIVAC 490 Central Processor and systems based upon it. All general characteristics
of the 490 Series hardware and software are described in Computer System Report 800:
UNIVAC 490 Series - General.
The System Configuration section that follows shows the UNIVAC 494 system
arranged in a number of standardized configurations according to the rules in the Users'
Guide, page 4:030. 120. A "Typical Multiprocessor Configuration" is also shown to illustrate the manner in which two or three independent Central Processors can be used in a
single UNIVAC 494 installation. The standardized equipment configurations form the basis
for a detailed analysis of the overall System Performance of the UNIVAC 494 on our standard benchmark problems, the results of which are presented in Section 804:201.
Section 804:051 contains a detailed description of the UNIVAC 494 Central Processor, its processing facilities, and its execution times for a series of standardized
tasks.
Omega, the comprehensive operating system that is being developed to take advantage of the 494's expanded hardware capabilities, is described in Section 804: 191 of this
subreport. All of the other UNIVAC 490 Series software is described in Report Sections
800: 151 thru 800: 191.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
1/66
804:031. 100
1&
STAHDAID
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
494 COMPUTER SYSTEM
ED]?
REPDItS
AUERBACH
~
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
For overall configuration rules, refer to Page 800:031.100 •
•1
6-TAPE AUXILIARY STORAGE SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION V
Deviations from Standard Configuration: ••...••••..••• magnetic drum is required for executive
system use.
auxiliary storage (Fastrand 11) is 448% larger.
core storage is 8 times larger.
card reader is 60% faster.
card punch is 200% faster.
printer is 40% faster.
all input-output channels can operate concurrently.
Equipment
Rental
FH-880 Drum & Synchronizer
$
3,420
Fastrand II Storage Unit &
Synchronizer:
25,952,256 words
5,250
Core Memory:
32,768 words - dual banks
6,500
Central Processor Set
9,500
Console
Card Control & Synchronizer
750
Card Reader: 800/900 cards/min.
380
Card Punch: 300 cards/min.
665
Printer
& Synchronizer
Uniservo VIC Control &
Synchronizer
2 Uniservo Simultaneous
Master Units
4 Uniservo Slave Units:
34,200 char/sec.
Notes:
1.
2.
1,550
700
1,100
1,200
TOTAL RENTAL:
$ 31,015
Standard Configuration ill if:; the same as Configuration V (shown here) less Fastrand II Unit
and Synchronizer; its rental is $25,765 per month.
Configuration V, with the addition of a Communication Terminal Module Controller and up to
16 Communication Line Terminals, each having 2 input and 2 output lines, represents a
typical communications system. The total monthly rental of such a system - including 16
medium-speed asynchronous Communication Line Terminals - is $32,865.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
1/66
804:031. 200
.2
UNIVAC 494
10-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (INTEGRATED); CONFIGURATION VIlA
Deviations from Standard Configuration: ••.••..•..•.• magnetic drum is required for executive
system use.
available core storage is 50% larger.
magnetic tape is 60% faster.
card reader is 60% faster.
card punch is 200% faster.
printer is 40% faster.
Equipment
FH-880 Drum & Synchronizer:
786,432 words
Core Memory:
32,768 words - dual banks
Rental
$ 3,420
6,500
Central Processor Set
9,500
Console
READ OR
WRITE
READ ONLY
Card Control & Synchronizer
750
Card Reader: 800/900 cards/min.
380
Card Punch: 300 cards/min.
665
Printer & Synchronizer:
700/922 lines/min.
1,550
Uniservo VIIIC Synchronizer:
dual-channel model.
1,450
10 Uniservo VIIIC Tape Units:
96,000 char/sec
8,500
TOTAL RENTAL:
$ 32,715
,/
,/
1/66
A.
AUERBACH
~
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
.3
804:031.300
20-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (INTEGRATED); CONFIGURATION VIllA
Deviations from Standard Configuration: ••.••••.••.•• magnetic drum is required for executive
system use.
available core storage is 50% larger.
magnetic tape is 20% slower.
printer is 30% slower.
card reader is 20% slower.
card punch is 50% faster.
Equipment
FH-880 Drum & Synchronizer:
786,432 words
Core Memory:
65,536 words - dual banks
Rental
$ 3,420
11,000
Central Processor Set
9,500
Console
~~ ,E.R...!".!llI!
REAO ONLY
------
Card Control & Synchronizer
750
Card Reader: 800/900 cards/min.
380
Card Punch: 300 cards/min.
665
Printer & Synchronizer
700/922 lines/min.
1,550
Uniservo VIIIC Synchronizer;
dual-channel model
1,450
10 Uniservo VIIC Tape Units:
96,000 char/sec.
8,500
Uniservo VIIIC Synchronizer;
dual-channel model
1,450
10 Uniservo VIIIC Tape Units:
96,000 char/sec.
8,500
READ OR WR ITE
READ ONLY
/
..
TOTAL RENTAL:
$ 47,165
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
1/66
804:031. 400
.4
UNIVAC 494
TYPICAL MULTIPROCESSOR CONFIGURATION
Equipment
FH-432 Magnetic Drum
Subsystem:
1 Drum Control & Synchronizer
Unit
4 FH-432 Drum Units with total
capaci ty of I, 048 , 576 words
1 Multiple Processor Adapter
Rental
$ 3,000
4,000
435
Core Memory: 2 banks of
65,536 words per bank
20,000
2 Multiple Module Access Units
1,470
Central Processors and Consoles (2)
19,000
Input/Output Controller with
8 Channels
4,500
Fastrand Dual-Channel,
Buffered Control & Synchronizer
Fastrand II Storage Units (2):
51,904,512 words
2,500
7,600
Uniservo VIIIC Control &
Synchronizer; dual channel:
Uniservo VIllC 7-Channel Tape
Units (10): 96,000 char/sec.
750
High-Speed Printer Control &
Synchronizer
High-Speed Printer: 700/922 lines/min.
750
Card Control & Synchronizer
Card Reader: 800/900 cards/min.
Card Punch: 300 cards/min.
750
380
665
TOTAL RENTAL:
fA.
AUERBACH
~
8,500
High-Speed Printer Control &
Synchronizer
High-Speed Printer: 700/922 lines/min.
Cost of Multiple Processor Adapters
for above subsystems:
1/66
1, 450
800
800
835
835
435
435
435
$80,325
804:051.100
A
STANDARD
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
494 COMPUTER SYSTEM
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
/AEDP
AUERBAC~
REPORTS
~
CENTRAL PROCESSOR: UNIVAC 494
GENERAL
.1
.11
Identity:
.12
Description
••......• UNIVAC 494 Central
Processor.
Type 3012-99.
The UNIVAC 494 Central Processor houses the
system's solid-state arithmetic and control circuitry. Of the 109 basic instructions provided
with the 494 Central Processor, 62 are common
to all the central processors in the 490 Series. The
47 instructions peculiar to the UNIVAC 494 offer:
• Increased power in the arithmetic functions,
including double-precision floating-point,
double-precision fixed-point, and decimal
arithmetic.
• Increased power in the control of multiprogramming operations.
• Several data-manipulation instructions to assist
the programmer in handling data produced by
or prepared for computer systems outside the
490 Series family. Specifically, the Pack and
Unpack instructions and the Scale Factor Shift
instruction facilitate data-handling operations.
Editing and radix-conversion instructions are
not directly provided.
Instruction Formats
The 3D-bit instruction word format for the 62 instructions shared with the other 490 Series central
processors is composed of the following elements:
•
(
A 6-bit f-designator that specifies the basic
operation to be performed.
• A 3-bit j-designator that usually specifies the
conditions under which a skip or jump will be
performed, such as jumping when the contents
of an arithmetic register are positive, negative, zero, or non-zero. The j-designator
can also specify the mode for a Repeat instruction, or the index register to be used in a loop
control instruction. In input-output instructions,
the j-designator is 4 bits long and specifies the
data channel to be used.
• A 3-bit k-designator that specifies whether an
associated operand is held in a full word or a
portion of a word.
• A 3-bit b-designator that specifies one of seven
index registers whose contents are to be added
to the y-designator portion to form an operand
or its effective address.
• A 15-bit y-designator that specifies the base
operand address, a literal operand, or a shift
count.
(
'",--
Each one of these 62 instructions can have up to
64 distinct variations, due largely to the functional
flexibility of the j- and k-designators. The jdesignator in most instructions can cause a conditional skip of the next instruction, depending
on the sign of the A-register (accumulator) or Qregister. The k-designator in most instructions
can specify whether the operand shall consist of
all 30 bits or only the high-order or low-order 15
bits of the Core Memory location specified by the
y-designator. When half-word operands are
specified, sign extension is optional.
The 47 instructions that are peculiar to the UNIVAC
494 Central Processor utilize a different 3~-bit
instruction word format, as illustrated in Figure 1.
These instructions share a common operation
code (octal 77) and obtain their individuality only
through variations in the g-designator, a 6-bit
instruction part that replaces the j- and kdesignators of the 62 common 490 Series instructions. Thus, the 494's instruction word is effectively shortened by 6 bits, and decreased instruction flexibility results.
Designator:
f
j
k b
Y
Size in bits:
6 1 31313 1 15
Format for instructions common to all 490 Series
Central Processors
Designator:
Size in bits:
f
g
b
Y
-'-6---'--"'-6---'1-3-'1--'1'-5- - - - - ,
rl
Format for instructions peculiar to 494 Central
Processor.
Figure 1. UNIVAC 494 Series Instruction Formats
Execution time for most UNIVAC 494 instructions,
when alternate banks of core storage are accessed,
is 0.75 microsecond. This time is obtained by
overlapping one instruction's execution cycle with
the next instruction's interpretation cycle. A description of the functions of each of these cycles
follows.
Interpretation Cycle
The contents of the Program Location Counter are
transferred to the 17-bit,P (Program) Register and
then to both core memory and the Internal Function
Register (IFR). The IFR is used to facilitate
user-to-executive routine jumps and returns. The
instruction word is then read from the indicated
address of core memory into the Instruction Register, the contents of the word are analyzed for
operation and function codes, and the execution
cycle is started.
Execution Cycle
The operand is determined according to the contents
of the 3D-bit Instruction Register. In some cases
(literals), the operand is a part of the instruction
word itself. In these cases, the execution cycle is
reduced to placement of the operand into its proper
register and then processing it as explained in
Step 5 below. In other cases, the instruction word
specifies the memory address of the operand.
The following steps are then executed:
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
1/66
UNIVAC 494
804:051.120
.12
Description (Contd.)
(1)
reserved instructions, while protecting specified
memory areas against writing~
.
The relative address contained in the instruc-
tion word is added to the contents of an index
register, resulting in an effective address.
(2)
The 494 Central Processor can also be directed to
run without any form of memory protection if this
should ever be desired.
The effective address is added to the contents
of the Relative Index Register to form the
absolute memory address.
Relative Addressing
Two modes of relative addressing canbe used in
the 494 Central Processor. When the Dual Relative
mode is used, the data addreSSing can be relative to
the Lower Limit of the Program Lock-In Register
while the instruction addressing is relative to the
Relative Index Register .. When the RIR Relative
Index mode is used, both data and instructions must
be addressed relative to the value stored in the
Relative Index Register.
(3) The absolute memory address is loaded into
the Operand Address Register and checked to
determine that it lies within the predetermined
program boundaries.
(4)
The operand is read from memory into the
applicable register.
(5)
The logic circuits, conditioned by timing and
execution controls, process the operand, retaining the result in one of the arithmetic
registers.
Multiprocessing
Two UNIVAC 494 Central Processors can share the
same core storage via a Multiple Module Adapter
(MMA). This adapter provides for the connection
of up to three Central Processors and/or Input!
Output Controllers. (The Input/Output Controller
is described in Paragraph 800:111. 6.) A third
processor may be of value for redundancy purposes
to ensure system reliability, but UNIVAC states
that no timing advantage over a two-processor
configuration will result.
(6) If required by the instruction, the result is
stored in a memory location specified in the
instruction word.
Communication Modes
The UNIVAC 494 Central Processor uses two modes
of communication with peripheral devices. The
Internally Specified Index (lSI) mode is used if the
I/O device is directly connected to a channel of
the Central Processor. If a multiplexor device
(such as a communications controller) interfaces
between a channel and the I/o device, the channel
operates in the Externally Specified Index (ESI)
mode, as explained in Report Section 800:101.
• Read and Write Protection with Guard Mode.
This mode of memory protection will cause a
program protection interrupt if an attempt is
made to read, write, or jump outside the limits
set by the Program Lock-In Register. Guard
Mode prohibits usage of I/o instructions or
reserved executive-routine instructions in the
user program.
With two processors, paired simultaneous core
memory accesses can be made to the odd and even
banks. Within a cabinet of two 32, 768-word memory
banks, the even addresses are assigned to one bank
and the odd addresses to the other. A program
loaded into core storage will be split, even/odd,
between the two banks. Since each module is independently accessible, a second Central Processor
can access instructions or data from the even bank
while the first Central Processor is accessing the
odd bank, and vice versa. Synchronization of the
dual accesses is accomplished by delaying one
processor whenever the other is executing an instruction that takes longer than the average execution period. The delayed processor is restarted
as soon as simultaneous odd/even accesses can
again be made.
• Write Protection with Guard Mode, allowing full
freedom to read any area of memory, while
protecting specified memory areas against
writing and prohibiting the use of I/O and reserved instructions.
Use of the Multiple Module Adapter currently introduces a 125-nanosecond delay upon each access
to core memory, but UNIVAC indicates that this
delay is likely to be reduced or eliminated in the
near future.
Program Protection
Program protection can be accomplished by the
UNIVAC 494 Central Processor in three ways:
• Write Protection without Guard Mode, permitting
unrestricted reading and the use of I/O and
.2
PROCESSING FACILITIES
.21
Operations and Operands
Operation
and Variation
.211 Fixed point Add-subtract:
. 13
Availability: . . . . . . . 9 months .
. 14
First Delivery: . . . . . 2nd quarter, 1966 .
Radix
Provision
/'
binary
automatic
decimal
Multiply Short:
Long:
1/66
Size
29 bits + sign or
59 bits + sign.
59 bits + sign.
none
automatic
binary
Divide No remainder: none
Remainder:
automatic
29 bits + sign.
(60-bit product).
binary
29 bits + sign
(60-bit dividend).
A
AUERBACH
~
(Contd.)
804:051. 212
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
.212 Floating point Add-subtract:
Multiply:
Divide:
• 213 BooleanAND:
Inclusive OR:
Exclusive OR:
. 214 ComparisonNumbers:
Letters:
Mixed:
Collating sequence:
• 215
• 216
.217
.218
Code translation:
Radix conversion:
Edit format:
Table look-up Equality:
Greater than: }
Less than or
equal:
Within limits:
Greatest:
Least:
. 219 OthersShifts:
Add to storage:
Subtract from
storage:
Repeat:
· 22
(
Provision
Radix
Size
automatic
automatic
automatic
binary
binary
binary
48 & 11 bits + sign.
48 & 11 bits + sign.
48 & 11 bits + sign •
automatic
automatic
automatic
binary
binary
binary
30 bits.
30 bits.
30 bits •
automatic
automatic
automatic
see Data Code Table, Page 800:141.100.
Provision
Comment
none
none
none
performed by subroutines .
performed by subroutines •
performed by subroutines.
none.
semi-automatic
through use of
"Repeat" instruction.
none.
none .
automatic
automatic
automatic
29 bits + sign.
executes next instruction a
specified number of times.
.223 Operand size
determination: •.... K-designator in most instructions specifies full
word (30 bits). upper or
lower half-word (15 bits),
or literal operand (15
bits) .
Instruction Formats
Instruction structure: .
Instruction layout: ...
Instruction parts: .•..
Basic address
structure: . . . . . . . .
30 or
60 bits.
29 bits + sign.
. 221 Negative numbers: ... one's complement - binary.
nine's complement decimal.
· 222 Zero: . . • . . . . • . . . +0 and -0 have zeros and
ones, respectively, in
all 30 bit positions;
they are considered unequal in compare and
certain arithmetic
ope rations.
· 23
left shifts
are circular;
right shifts
with sign
extension.
30 bits.
automatic
Special Cases of Operands
.231
.232
. 233
.234
30 bits.
30 bits.
30 bits.
one 30-bit word.
see Paragraph .12.
see Paragraph .12.
1 + O.
· 235 LiteralsArithmetic: • . . . . • . 15 bits (Le., up t032,767).
Comparisons and
tests: . . • . . . . • . . 15 bits .
Incrementing modifiers: . . . . . . . . . 15 bits.
.236 Directly addressed operands Internal storage type: core storage.
Minimum size: ...• 1/2 word (15 bits).
Maximum size: ••.. 3-1/2 words (Store Index
Registers) .
Volume accessible: . total capacity (up to
131,072 words).
. 237 Address indexing .2371 Number of methods: . 1.
.2372 Names: •.....•••. indexing.
.2373 Indexing rule: ••••• add contents of specified
index register to y (loworder 15 bits of instruction word).
.2374 Index specification: .. by b-designator in the
instruction to be modified.
. 2375 Number of potential
indexers: •.••••• 2 sets of 7 (one set for user
routines and one for
executive routine) .
.2376 Addresses which can
be indexed: .••••. operand address portion
(y-designator) of all instructions, including
literals.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
1/66
804:051. 237
UNIVAC 494
.2377 Cumulative indexmg:. none.
.2378 Combined index and
step: . • • • • • • . . • none.
.238 Indirect addressing: •. only by means of jump instructions.
• 239 Stepping.2391 Specification of increment: ••••••• implied by operation code.
. 2392 Increment sign: •..• + or -.
.2393 Size of increment: .• always 1 or 2 (depending on
skip conditions) .
.2394 End value: •••••••. zero, or any value specified
in instruction or storage
location.
• 2395 Combined step and
test: .•.•.•.••. yes.
.24 Special Processor
Storage: . • . . • . . . . see Table I.
.3
SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES
• 31
Instruction Sequencing
· 311 Number of sequence
control facilities: ..• 1 (P-register).
.314 Special sub-sequence
counters: ••••.••• none (during repeated instructions, the seventh
Index Register holds the
repeat counter).
.315 Sequence control
step size: .••••... 1 word (2 words on skips).
.316 Accessibility
to routines: •••••• P-register contents can
be stored in Core Memory
by "Return Jump" instructions •
. 317 Permanent or optional
modifier: .•••.••. no.
• 32
Look-Ahead: ••••. ,. none.
.33
Interruption
.334
.335
.336
· 34
Multiprogramming
.341 Method of control: •.. by Omega (see Section
804:191).
.342 Maximum number
of programs: ••.... 64 per processor.
.343 Precedence rules: ..• see Section 804:191.12.
· 344 Program protection Storage: .•...•..• by means of program
boundaries in 64-word
increments.
Input-output units: •• through assignment by
Omega of specific units
to specific programs.
.35
Multisequencing: ...• possible only with a multicomputer complex .
PROCESSOR SPEEDS
.4
.41
.331 Possible causes In-out subsystems: •. completion of input-output
operation, or inputoutput error.
In-out controllers: •• parity error in buffer word.
Storage access: ...• completion of magnetic
drum operation, or drum
operational error.
Processor errors: •• illegal function code.
memory parity error.
memory protection violation.
floating point underflow.
floating point overflow.
Other: .•••.••••• power loss.
day clock.
real-time clock.
data request from sending
processor.
.332 Control by routine Individual control: •• can enable internal interrupts on any or all inputoutput channels by means
of special input-output
instructions.
Method: ..•.•...• when an interrupt occurs,
all other non-error
interrupts are disabled
until they are re-enabled
by a special instruction.
1/66
. 333
Restriction: .•.••• error interrupts cannot
be locked out •
Operator control: •... operator can initiate a
request for an external
interrupt.
Interruption conditions: interrupt enabled •
Interruption process Disabling interruption: .•..•..• automatic .
Registers saved: •.• contents of P register
(sequence counter) and
users' index registers
are saved automatically.
Destination: •.•... one of 73 fixed locations,
depending on cause of
interrupt.
Control methods Determine cause: . . . automatic; destination
,
depends upon cause.
Enable interruption: . by special instruction contained in Omega before
returning to main program.
.411
.412
.413
.414
.415
.416
· 417
• 418
Instruction Times in Microseconds*
Single
Dual
Fixed point Mem"""O:i1TBank MemoryBanks
Add-subtract: •• , •
1. 5
0.75
Multiply: . • • . • • •
8.03
7.27
Divide:. • • . . • . . .
8.03
7.27
Floating point Add-subtract: . • • •
2. 99
2.35
12.84
Multiply: • . • • . . •
12.09
Divide:. . • • • • . . .
12.63
12.41
Additional allowance for Indexmg: • • • • • • •
0
0
Indirect addressing:
(not available)
Recomplementing: •
0.11
0.11
ControlCompare: .••.•.•
1.5
0.75
Branch: ••.••.••
0.11
0.11
Compare and branch:
0.21
0.21
Counter control Step and test: •.•.
1.5
0.75
Edit: ••••••• , • •• no instruction available.
Convert:......... no instruction available •
Shift:.... .. .. ...
1.5
0.75
* These times are based on instructions whose
operands are located in core storage. Times are
generally shorter if the operand is a literal or is
contained in the A or Q register.
fA
AUERBACH
•
(Contd.)
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
TABLE I:
804:051.418
CENTRAL PROCESSOR REGISTERS AND THEIR CHARACTERISTICS
Number of
Storage
Locations
Size
in
Bits
1
30
IFR - Internal Function Register
Captures the contents of the P register
for jump instructions.
Captures the relative address of a
Repeat instruction and its j-designator.
Determines type of program protection.
Indicates overflow or carry for BCD
arithmetic.
Activates the proper index register
sets depending on executive or user
routine usage.
Determines the bit capacity of the
index registers.
Activates the relative addressing mode.
1
15
P - Program Register
Holds address of next instruction; the
Memory Select Register combines
with P for determination of next
address within proper storage module.
1
2
MSR - Memory Select Register
See Program Register description,
above.
1
30
PLR - Program Lock-in Register
Defines the upper and lower memory
limits of each program.
1
30
RIR - Relative Index Register
Used as the base program address to
facilitate moving programs anywhere
within memory without modification.
1
30
U - Instruction Register
Holds the instruction being executed.
1
5
IASR - Interrupt Address Storage
Register
Used for channel number storage prior
to exiting to executive routine.
1
5
CSR - Channel Select Register
Used to select the proper input-output
device on the channel.
14
15
or
17
B1 to B7 - Index Registers
There are two sets of 7 index registers;
one set for user programs, one set
for the executive routine. The executive set can use 4 of the 7 registers
in an expanded length of 17 bits to
allow memory referencing of all
modules. The uses of the registers
include operand address modification, index codes, counters, and
modifier incrementation.
48
30
BCR - Buffer Control Register
Used to control I/O transfer operations
between a portion of core used as a
buffer and the peripheral device.
There are 24 input and 24 output buffer
control registers.
1
30
X - X Register
Controls communication between arithmetic circuits and core memory.
1
30
A - Accumulator
The principal arithmetic register.
1
30
Q - Quotient Register
The secondary arithmetic register;
A and Q are used in combination for
double-precision and BCD arithmetic
operations.
Register Name
(
/
(
I
\.
Program Usage
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
1/66
UNIVAC 494
804:051. 420
.42
Processor Performance in Microseconds
.421 For random addresses Fixed Point Floating Point
c = a + b: ••••.••• 2. 25
9.64
b = a + b: •••••..• 2. 25
9.64
Sum N items: ••••. O.75N
15.64N
c = ab: •••••••••• 8.7
18.09
c = alb: •.••••••. 8.7
18.41
.422 For arrays of data c1 = ai + bj: ••••••• 5.25
15.64
bj=ai+ bj: ••••••• 5.25
15.64
Sum N items: •.••• O. 75N
15.64N
c = c + aibj: •••••• 18.53
36.20
.423 Branch based on comparison Numeric data: ••••• 5.25
Alphabetic data: •.•• 5. 25
.424 Switching Unchecked: ••••••• 2. 25
Checked: .••••••• 4.5
List search: •••••• 2. 25
.425 Format control, per character Unpack: ••••••••• 5.9
Compose: •••.•••• 8.98
.426 Table look-up, per comparison For a match: •••.•• 0.75 per comparison, using
Repeat instruction.
For interpolation
point: .••••••.•• 0.75
.427 Bit indicators set bit in separate
location: •••••••• 1. 5
set bit in pattern: ••• 2.25
Test bit in separate
location: •••.•.•• 0.75
Test bit in pattern: •• 2.25
Test AND for B bits: 0.75
Test OR for B bitS: .3.0
.428 Moving (per full or half
word): •••••••••• 2.25 - loop.
1. 5 - straight-line coding.
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
.5
Error
Check or
Interlock
Action
Overflow:
Underflow:
Zero divisor:
check
check
Invalid data:
Invalid operation:
Invalid address:
Receipt of data:
Dispatch of data:
Power failure:
Guard Mode
violation:
check
check
check
check
check
check
interrupt.
interrupt.
testable by
program.
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
check
interrupt.
/'
1/66
A•
AUERBACH
804: 191. 100
&.
STAND ...
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
494 COMPUTER SYSTEM
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
OMEGA
/AEDP
AUER.AC~
....-
"PO'"
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: OMEGA
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity: •••••••••• Omega Operating System.
• 12
Description
Omega, the operating system announced for use
with the UNIVAC 494, takes advantage of UNIVAC's
several years of experience with the REX executive
system presently used with the UNIVAC 490, 491,
and 492 computer systems. Omega consists of a
comprehensive library of programs integrated under
supervisory control. It features a variety of language translators and a flexible control system for
directing the basic computer operations. The operating system is modular in design, a feature that
will permit future additions of language processors
and control functions without affecting the performance of existing programs. This modularity will
also be valuable in permitting UNIVAC to "retrofit" Omega to the UNIVAC 490, 491, and 492 systems in the future.
Basic machine requirements for Omega include
4,000 to 8,000 30-bit words of core memory and
786,432 words of auxiliary storage. The auxiliary
store is used to hold in residence all active system and problem programs, and to serve as a
backlog buffering device for input-output operations.
The following list of terms is used by UNIVAC in
the documentation that describes the functions of
Omega. A brief definition of each term is provided to assist in understanding the Omega concepts as developed by UNIVAC.
(
inhibited, thus ensuring the security of the programs that share internal storage •
•
Batch Processing - The operating system
controls program selection and joh-to-job
transition to maximize the utilization of the
full system configuration and to minimize the
job turn-around time.
•
Multiprogrammed Processing - This function
is also intended to achieve optimum computer
utilization. Omega's multiprogramming control facilities queue program requests, service a program for a certain time interval,
and then pass control to the next competing
program.
. 121 Job Control: External
Omega's External Job Control system refers to
the control routine and its control-card images
which regulate the programs that are to be executed and the manner in which they are to be executed. Mter the Job Control specifications have
been entered into the system, Omega assumes all
further responsibility for obtaining overall concurrent operating efficiency. A description of the
individual elements of the job control language
follows:
• JOB - identifies the beginning of a specific
job control package.
•
START - symbolically names the job to be executed.
LOAD -directs the connecting of discrete program elements to form a program capable of
execution.
•
Element - The smallest logical unit of programmed information that can be entered into the
system.
•
•
Element Library - a collection of elements, yet
not necessarily a complete program.
• GO - initiates the execution of a program.
•
Activity - two elements of a single task that
are capable of working concurrently.
•
Task - a logical collection of elements and
activities, equivalent to a program.
•
Job - a series of tasks that accomplish a complete data processing function, such as demand
deposit accounting. .
'.
Primary Input Stream - a series of job control
descriptions that represent the complete UNIVAC
494 scheduled workload for a given portion of
the computer center's day.
All of Omega's control facilities are organized to
accomplish the following operational objectives:
•
•
Real-Time/On-Line Processing - A priority
scheduling system gives the real-time, demand
processing requests highest priority. Non-delayed, real-time control is facilitated by a series
of hardware checks and interrupts. Programs
that attempt memory boundary violations are
•
ASG - calls for the peripheral devices required
for program execution.
•
FREE - releases peripheral devices when
they are no longer required for program execution.
•
SWITCH - swaps one peripheral assignment
for another.
e FROM - identifies an input stream from a remote terminal.
• CALL - overrides the standard action of Omega
and returns the program output to the site of
the input.
•
FIN - signals the end of information sent to a
particular device.
• LOG - supplies the system operator with information on the status of the scheduled workload.
• SOURCE - introduces corrections to the input
data.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
1/66
804; 191. 121
UNIVAC 494
.121 Job Control: External (Contd.)
•
IN, OUT, PRINT - used for Library Maintenance (see Paragraph. 126 for a description of
these functions).
•
FOR, COB, ASM, SPURT - select and activate
specific language processors (see Paragraph
. 128 for a listing of Omega-controlled processors).
•
In addition to the program-switching caused by the
200 millisecond rotational interrupt task interruption can also be caused by any other 'standard hardware interrupt (see Central Processor Section
Paragraph 804:051.33), by the completion of a~
executed task, or by a service request that cannot
be immediately performed.
• 123 Allocation Control
The function of Allocation Control is to maintain
and regulate the status and availability of the computer system's assignable hardware components.·
Dynamic control of all available facilities is an
essential element in real-time processing•
TEST, UTL, ELM - select and activate specific
utility routines.
• 122 Job Control: Internal
Allocation Control provides the routines to control
program "roll-out" and subsequent "roll-in" when
a high-priority task must usurp the facilities
(I/O and core storage) of a lower-priority task. In
performing a roll-out operation, Omega interrupts
the program that is using the desired facilities and
generates a status record sufficient to resume processing that program when the same or equivalent
facilities are again available. The assigned priority of the interrupted program is automatically increased to lessen the chance of repeated pre-emption of its required facilities. Since a program's
peripheral devices and memory locations are symbolically designated and then assigned at execution
time according to availability, it is possible that a
reinstated program will utilize facilities that are
different from those that were being utilized prior
to the interruption. If insufficient system facilities
are available to perform the roll-out operation the
low-priority program is aborted.
'
Omega's Internal Job Control system is basically
a scheduling system designed to control the flow of
jobs and to maximize the use of all available equipment. Omega performs its scheduling functions
by sequentially entering job decks into a job stack,
and then selecting each job for processing according to preset priorities.
If sufficient core storage and peripheral devices
are available, several jobs can be run concurrently
in a multiprogramming environment. Individual
tasks within each job are selected, and memory
allocations and peripheral device assignments are
made for as many tasks as possible. Upon completion of each task, the facilities which will no
longer be needed for the following task of the job
are surrendered. When the last task of each job
is completed, post-job processes are automatically
initiated to log accounting information and to return control to the next job in the stack.
Another system procedure performed by Omega 1 s
Allocation Control is called "compacting." Compacting is the process of rearranging programs and
data in core storage in order to have available at
all times, the largest possible area of contigu~us
core storage. In order for a program to be
eligible to be moved in the compacting process it
must be temporarily stable (i. e" not currentl~
engaged in an I/O data transfer operation), Since
real-time input-output operations are potentially
continuous, real-time programs aJ"e not moved in
the compacting process,
The scheduling routine generally attempts to select
for concurrent execution, tasks that have counter- '
balancing demands for peripheral operations and
pure bulk computations. Modification of this
scheme can be caused by the following factors:
•
Service Priority - Real-time processing can
demand a precedence over all other scheduled
processing. Similarly, non-production tasks,
such as program tests, have low priorities.
•
Response Priority - In order to obtain maximum
utilization and control of the available peripheral ,124 Input-Output Control
deVices, the Service Priority of specific eleOmega provides the centralized I/O control necesments within a task, such as input-output rousary in a multiprogramming environment cotines, can be dynamically assigned Response
ordinating the I/O demands of concurrent' users,
Priorities that will alter the task's original
This control is provided at three levels:
Service Priority. The Service Priority values
assigned to any task can range from a high of
• Device Control - Omega supplies generalized
o to a low of 17. Response Priority values
input-output routines to control the operations
range from 0 to 10. During the execution of each
of the available peripheral devices, Usertask, the combined Service and Response priorprovided parameter statements for a specific
ity value is called the task's Operating Priority.
device are referred to as a "packet request, "
Packet requests are implemented by system con• Rotation - It is conceivable that a given task
trol
elements called "I/O handlers." The most
could monopolize use of a Central Processor.
common I/O handlers, such as Read or Write
To prevent this situation from occurring, Omega
are retained in core as permanent residents. '
ensures that any task that has a lower priority
Less frequently used handlers, such as error
than that of the next queued task will not occupy
recovery routines, are generally held in secondthe Central Processor for more than 200 milary storage.
liseconds. This 200-millisecond limit can be
• Cooperative Control - Three input and output
altered by individual installations. Rotation
utility routines are provided by Omega for use
interrupts the processing of a task for one comby any or all of the concurrently-operating proplete turn through the processing of all other
grams, These cooperative control programs can
active tasks.
(Contd. )
1/66
fA..
AUERBACH
~
,/
,/
/
804:191. 124
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: OMEGA
• 124 Input-Output Control (Contd.)
be activated by the user by minimum parameter
specifications, such as PRINT and the associated
file name. The file items to be read, printed,
or punched must be of fixed size, and they can
be processed only sequentially.
• File Control - These routines provide automatic file handling operations at either the block
or item level. A file consists of a collection of
either fixed or variable items. Each variable
item must contain a length field within its first
word for use by the file control routines. File
control will handle non-standard as well as
standard file conventions in the areas of header
and trailer label checking, blocking and deblocking, sequence checking, and hash totaling.
Omega's I/O control system is modular in design,
permitting additional facilities to be added to it
without necessitating changes in existing user programs.
• 125 Logging and Accounting
Omega maintains an operational log for the collection and display of status information pertinent to
each task or job and to the system as a whole. The
logged accounting information includes a count of
I/O requests per peripheral unit, the time period
of peripheral unit assignment to each program, and
the total amount of central processor time utilized
in the execution of each program.
Logged hardware maintenance data includes a detailed history of various transient errors that occurred during a certain period of processing.
This information is used to pinpoint certain areas
of the system that require diagnostic examination.
Other, non-suspect portions of the system can continue to be used during the limited system testing.
• 126 System Library
The Omega library contains a table of contents that
identifies each element of every program by name,
version, and type, and includes any control information necessary for executing the program. The
name in the table of contents is a symbolic name
associated with the element at the time the program
element is written. The "version" designation is
used to differentiate similar elements with a program. Also, several different versions of the
same program can be contained in the library
system, such as a production version and a newer,
untested version that includes modifications to the
original.
Three logical levels of the Omega library can be
referenced: the job library, the group library,
and the system library. These levels represent
three degrees of permanence in storing the various
elements of the library, as described below.
,/
• Job Library - A job library is created by
Omega from control language statements each
time a given job is executed. The function
of the job library is to provide the linkage between the several tasks of each job. The Job
Library is initially created by Omega's library
maintenance function (IN) or by program elements that are generated or referenced during
job execution. A given job library is transient
and remains in the system only as long as the
program is being executed, unless the library
maintenance function (OUT) is called to save the
current job library.
•
Group Library - The group library is a compromise between· the impermanence of the job
library and the permanence of the system library. The group library consists of a set of
job library linkage elements that can be loaded
once and then shared by a series of successive
jobs.
•
System Library - The system library is a permanent part of the operating system and is held
in random-access storage. It consists of standard subroutines, standard object programs of
the manufacturer and the user, a master-file directory, and registered data files. The system
library cannot be altered by Omega's standard
library maintenance procedures. The question
of how system library modification can be accomplished has been left unanswered to date.
.127 User Programs and Language Processors
The creation of user programs is facilitated by the
provision of a group of language processors that
produce a common form of object code that allows
the effective merging of segments written in different source languages. Control of the various
compilers and integration of the final object program is managed by Omega. Program testing is
performed by an automatic system that provides
dynamic control of the test and protection of any
other programs that are concurrently being processed.
The language processors supplied with Omega include:
• SPURT II - a symbolic assembly language that
provides inter-family source language compatibility with the other 490 Series computer systems.
SPURT IT is the basic 490 Series assembly lan_
guage; see Report Section 800:171.
•
494 Assembler - a new assembly language designed to provide a language capable of fully
utilizing the 494' s improved facilities. This
assembler is quite similar to the SLEUTH assembler first used on the UNIVAC 1107 computer
system.
•
FORTRAN IV - a language and. compiler based
on the A. S. A. FORTRAN specifications as
defined in Communications of the ACM, October
1964; see Report Section 800: 162.
•
COBOL - a language and compiler based on
the Department of Defense report, COBOL Preliminary Edition, 1964; see Report Section
800: 161.
Other software facilities available through Omega
include UNIVAC routines to perform the following
functions: ·communications network Simulation,
linear programming, PERT/Cost, report program
generation, and sorting and merging.
• 128 Diagnostic Facilities
Omega's testing procedure can interpretively execute the program in test by using the symbol
tables generated by the compilers as sources of
symbolic program test points and data areas. Relative reference diagnostics are also provided for
testing absolute programs that lack symbol tables.
The test routines include conditional snapshot
dumps, a set value procedure for either inserting
program patches or setting test condition values,
and postmortem dumps of core storage and/or
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.
1/66
UNIVAC 494
804:191. 128
• 128 Diagnostic Facilities (Contd.)
specifically designated l~gical units. Each of these
functions is activated by control statements contained in the input job stream.
Programs initiated under control of Omega's test
system are interpretively executed until an "end
condition" occurs. The recognizable end conditions
include:
.2
PROGRAM LOADING
.21
Source of Programs: •• all programs available to
the system are held in
random-access storage.
Library Subroutines: •• library subroutines are held
in random-access storage
(except for the most common I/O routines, which
are held in core memory).
· 22
• Program end-of-job;
.23
• Program attempt to store or jump to a memory location outside its assigned limits;
•
An unsolicited operator entry indicating that
the program is in a loop;
• A program request for a common routine not
previously defined as legal;
.3
• Exceeding a pre-designated time limit on program execution.
.31
Storage: . . . . . . . . . . a program occupies one contiguous area of core memory. The location of this
area can be changed during
the execution of the program to better accommodate
other concurrently operating programs and data.
.32
Input-Output Units: •.• assignment of peripheral
units is controlled by Omega
as described in Paragraph
.124.
RUNNING SUPERVISION
An end condition will automatically result in dump-
ing of the operational registers and writing of other
descriptive diagnostics.
• 129 Summary
The Omega operating system provides a comprehensive foundation for the control of sophisticated
multiprogramming and multiprocessing installations
with real-time capabilities. However, considerable knowledge is required of the individual who is
responsible for designing such a 494 installation.
He must be completely familiar with the UNIVAC
494 hardware, all phases of the operating system,
and the data processing goals to be accomplished.
It may be true that the skill required of this individual need be no greater than that required of a
person who designs a good batch processing system;
but the penalty for poor design of a large-scale,
real-time 494 installation is potentially much
greater than that paid for an inefficient batch
processing system.
• 13
•4
.41
Simultaneous Working: controlled by Omega.
• 42
Multiprogramming: .•• controlled by Omega as described in Paragraph
.122.
.43
Multiprocessing:••••. the UNIVAC 494 has the
facility to allow up to three
central processors to share
core memory. Omega allows two processors to access core memory at a
time (one in the odd bank,
the other in the even).
Task activation by either
processor is based on the
waiting tasks' relative
priorities.
Errors, Checks, and Action
Availability
For UNIVAC 494: •••• June 1966.
For remainder of the .
UNIVAC 490 Series: • April 1967.
• 14
Originator: ••••••.• UNIVAC Division, Sperry
Rand Corp.
• 15
Maintainer: ••••••.• UNIVAC Division, Sperry
Rand Corp.
Error
Loading Sequence: .•. loading ofprograms into a
job stack from an external
device is performed sequentially. Execution of
the tasks within the jobs is
performed according to the
priority of each task.
HARDWARE ALLOCATION
.44
Action
Check or
Interlock
1/66
Parity error - instruction:
hardware cneck
Parity error - I/O:
hardware check
Power failure:
hardware check
Guard Mode interrupt:
hardware check
Floating-point overflow:
hardware check
Floating-poInt underflow:
hardware check
mega! Instruction:
hardware check
I/o Interrupts:
hardware check
interrupt, check read,
log or remove from the
system.
interrupt, exercise 'and
log, or remove from
system.
lock out interrupts, save
registers, and set
time delay.
drop the offending task
from further execution.
set program switch,
assume maximum magnitude
number, and continue
program.
set program switch,
assume zero value, and
continue program.
drop the offending task
from further execution.
repeat attempt and log.
,
(Contd.)
A
AUERBACH
~
804:191. 450
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: OMEGA
· 45
.82
Restarts
Core storage: ..••.• 4K to 8K words •
Auxiliary storage: ..• 786K minimum.
System input device*: • card reader or magnetic
tape unit.
System output device,
primary*: .•...••• high-speed printer or magnetic tape unit.
System output device,
secondary*: •...••• card punch or magnetic
tape unit.
System origin: •.••.. a tape unit is required for
constructing the system
library on random-access
storage.
System clocks:. • • . • • the day clock and internal
timer are required and
directly controlled by
Omega. Time functions
are available to the user
by direct service request.
System console: ••••. the console typewriter is
permanently assigned to
Omega.
. 451 Establishing restart
points: . . . . • . . . . • checkpoint facilities are provided to record the current
status of a program.
.452 Restarting process: .. can be operator-initiated; in
the case of a transient
power failure, Omega recovers automatically.
•5
PROGRAM DIAGNOSTICS: . . . . . . • . called as required (see
Paragraph. 128 for a description of Omega diagnostic facilities).
.6
OPERATOR
CONTROL: ...•
.7
communication is provided
through a console typewriter.
LOGGING: . . • . • • . . . provided by Omega (see
Paragraph. 125).
·8
PERFORMANCE
.81
Routine Loading
Time: •••••••...• the speed at which a program is entered into a
central processor is a
function of the priority assigned to that program and
the speed of the auxiliary
storage device.
Reserved Equipment
.83
Running Overhead: .•. UNIVAC states that the
amount of overhead time
imposed by Omega is
highly variable. The degree of efficiency in overall system design will
directly affect the operating efficiency of Omega.
*
These devices can also be used for the user's
problem programs.
I
\..
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
1/66
804: 201. 001
1&
AUERBACH
STAKDno
ED]?
UNIVAC 490 SERIES
494 COMPUTER SYSTEM
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
REPORTS
~
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING (804:201. 1)
These problems involve updating a master file from information in a detail file and producing a printed record of the results of each transaction. This application is one of the most
typical of commercial data processing jobs and is fully described in Section 4:200.1 of the Users'
Guide.
Because the UNIVAC 494 can process several independent programs at the same time
through multiprogramming, the amount of central processor time required by each program is
highly significant. The difference (if any) between the total elapsed time for a particular run and
the amount of central processor time required for that run represents processor time that is
potentially available to other programs. Whether or not this processor time can be efficiently
utilized depends upon the system configuration, the overall problem mix, and the effectiveness
of the scheduling and operating system.
In the graphs for Standard File Problems A, B, C, and D, the total time required for
each standard configuration to process 10, 000 master file records is shown by solid lines. For
Configurations VIlA and VIllA where all four input-output files are on magnetic tape, total times
were computed for cases using both unblocked and blocked records in the detail and report files.
Central processor time is essentially the same for all configurations, and is shown by the line
marked "CP" on each graph. No addition has been made to the processor time to cover the
overhead requirements of the operating system. All processor times are for dual-bank operation (i. e., overlapped core memory accesses).
Worksheet Data Table 1 (page 804:201. 011) shows that the printer is the controlling
factor on total time required over most of the detail activity range for Configurations III and V.
In these configurations the detail file is read by the on-line card reader and the report file is
produced by the on -line printer. The central processor is occupied for only a fraction of the
total processing time. When other programs with limited input and output can be run simultaneously in order to utilize the remaining processor time, it may be satisfactory to operate
the UNIVAC 494 as just described. In other cases, it will be more efficient to divide the file
processing problem into three separate runs: a card-to-tape transcription of the detail file,
the processing run with all files on magnetic tape, and a tape-to-print transcription of the report
file. The curves for Configurations VIlA and VIllA show the time required for the all-tape main
processing run. The card-to-tape and tape-to-printer transcriptions will run at card reader
and printer-limited speeds, and their demands on the processor will be small. The elapsed
time and central processor time for the data transcription runs are shown on a separate
graph (804:201.150).
The master file record format is a mixture of alphameric and binary numeric items,
designed to minimize the number of time-consuming radix conversion operations required. Even
so, most of the central processor time is devoted to editing, radix conversion, and character
manipulation operations. Packing was kept to a minimum because of the high demands it would
place upon the UNIVAC 494 Central Processor. The resulting master file record length is 21
words (the equivalent of 105 6-bit characters).
\
SORTING (804:201. 2)
The standard estimate for sorting 80-character records by straightforward merging
on magnetic tape was developed from the time for Standard File Problem A according to the
method explained in the Users' Guide, Paragraph 4:200.213, using a three-way merge.
MATRIX INVERSION (804:201. 3)
In matrix inversion, the object is to measure central processor speed on the straightforward inversion of a non-symmetric, non-singular matrix. No input-output operations are
involved. The standard estimate is based on the time to perform cumulative multiplication
(c = c + aibj) using the standard double-precision floating-point hardware. The processor time
required for a matrix inversion can be spread over a much longer total elapsed time when the
inversion is multi-run with other programs that utilize the available input-output equipment.
Multi-running of other programs necessarily decreases the amount of internal storage that can
be allocated to the matrix inversion.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
1/66
804:201.011
UNIVAC 494
GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING (804:201. 4)
The standard estimating procedure outlined in the Users I Guide, Paragraph 4:200.413,
was used. Computation includes 5 fifth-order polynomials, 5 divisions, and 1 square root. The
double-precision floating-point mode, which provides a precision of about 14 decimal digits, was
used because it is the only form of floating-point arithmetic for the UNIVAC 494.
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 1
CONFIGURATION
ITEM
1
Char/block
1,050
1,050
1,050
(File 1)
10
10
10
K
msee/block
File 1 = File 2
r----File 4
0
~--File 4
r---- ___O_ - - - - 1 - - - - - -0 - - - 0
0
r--- __0_ ._47 _ _ _. _ 1 - _ _ _ 0_.4_7_ _. -
msee/block
msee/record
msee/detail
msee/work
msee/report
Standard
File
Problem A
~---
~.---
~---
0.06
0.61*
0.022
0.022
al
c-=::--a2K
-=::---asK
~etails
Unit of measure
f-'-~O~~
~2~
13.392
~6
0.061
Total
(30-bit words)
14.132
14.132
1,277
50
50
4:200.1151
924
7,485
8,306
CONFIGURATION
REFERENCE
VIIA, VIllA
IlL V
Floating
Floating
Fixed/ Floating point
~.--outout
r---
700/922-lpm printer
Uniservo
80 char
Tl
T2
127.7
~,
msee penalty
~~
output
T4
T5
7.4
0.04
0.04
0.06
0.06
1. 045
msec/5 loops
T6
1.045
0.606
msee/report
T7
0.634
In
VIne
VIne
132 char
6.8
msee/block
~.eord.
Uniservo
80 ehar
outout
output
800/900-cpm reader
135 ehar
75.0
~,---
per block
165
f- - - - 2 3-46--- 1----'----
---- - - -1 - - - - - - 50
ITEM
Size of record
-
"_65_ _ _ _
1,680
104.72
1---------- -
2,34_6_ _ _ _
924
123.78
4:200.114
000 (Omega)
- - - 4,-----=---
4, 000 (Omega)
---
7,485
Total
14.132
21. 4
41. 0
1....~
Workinl?:
VIIA
VIIA
- -I - - -c-0-:527 - - ---.- - - - - r---o.5~
~392 - -c - - fJ3-:392 - 0.047
0.047
- - - - r---o.D47 - ~- 1 - - - -r---o. 047 - - I-- ---'----r---- ~6- ---w.-06 f - - - ---- ~
~ 1ii4.'72 - ~72
21.4
21.4
0.061
1,277
165
----
Ito 23)
~---
Unit name
4:200.1132
0.022
------
~s24t048
C.P.
VIIIA
VIIA
0.022
4, 000 (Omega)
routines
____
~d
~cks
C.P.
Printer
File 4: Reports
~
Standard
File
Problem A
Space
reeo.~ds
0.022
----O.~-
0.862
File 1: Master In ~7
- - ~7
*10
0.06
0.053
~MasterOut
Standard
Mathematical
Problem A
0.47
1 - - - - - - - - - . - I------O~- 1 - - - - - 0':"37"10.377
-------O.~- I-----o-:-~- 1 - - - - - "Q.Toi) 1 - - - - - - - - - - . - ~----o.~- f - - - - - - "ii':"862 C.P.
mseo/block
for C,P.
and
dominant
column.
F=1.0
4
4:200.112
0
- - - - -0- - - - - -0- -
~---.- f - - - - - - - - - . - ~----O.~
b7 + b8
3
------10.57
~L!k...L
------0.36'
~.--- r-----~---- - r--- - - - - - - - r-----~File 4
Central
Processor
Times
0
- - - - - -9.98
--
r---'---- 1------ - - - - 1----- - - - - . -
msee penalty
2
19.6
19.6
48.5
r----r----~--66-.7- - - · r--~7---- r----~---
File 1 = File 2
msee/switch
VIIA & VIIIA,
Files 3 & 4 Unblocked
(File 1)
Records/block
~---
Input
Output
Times
REFERENCE
VIIA & VIIIA,
Files 3 & 4 Blocked*
IlL V
-----
-----
-
4:200.413
-
0.606
0.634
FlIes 3 (detaIl) and 4 (report).
,/
(Contd. )
1/66
A
AUERBACH
~
804:201. 100
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING
Standard File Problem A
Record sizes Master file:
Detail file: .
Report file: .
Computation .
Timing basis:
. 114 Graph: ...
· .. 108 characters.
· .. 1 card.
· .. 1 line.
· .. standard.
· .. using estimating procedure
outlined in Users I Guide,
4:200.11.
. . see graph below .
. 115 Storage space required Configurations III,
V: . . . . . . . . . . 7,500 words. *
Configurations VIlA,
VIllA (unblocked
Files 3 & 4): . . . . 7,500 words. *
Configurations VIlA,
VIllA (blocked
Files 3 & 4): . . . . 8, 300 words. *
*Includes 4, 000 words reserved for Omega operating
system .
100.0
7
4
2
~
10.0
.-
7
4
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
/
/
2
I
1.0
\TllA
..., .-
7
4
""
/
""....
-
.------:::::::.
1.0
../
-~-
~--
~
\TlllA
-_ _ _ _-~---_ _ _ _ ......---.J:2.I~
2
~Cl'------
-
0.1
7
~v"?~
4
2
0.01
.-"..
V
("
0.0
O. 1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
(
LEGEND
- - - - - - - - - - - Elapsed time; unblocked Files 3 & 4
- - - - - Elapsed time; blocked Files 3 & 4
- C P - _ _ Central Processor time (all configurations)
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
1/66
804: 20 1. t 20
.12
UNIVAC 494
.121 Record sizes -
Master file: '"
Detail file: . . . .
Report file: . . . .
... standard .
.. using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,.
. 122 Computation:.
. 123 Timing basis:
Standard File Problem B
· 54 characters.
· 1 card.
· 1 line.
4:200.12.
.124 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . see graph below ..
100.0
7
4
/.
2
10.0
7
~
./
4
Time in Minutes to
Process 10.000
Master File Records.
~
--
/
~~
2
I
1.0
VlJ}.
VlIJ}.
-- ..
7
~~
.L . f
4
2
,r/
0.1
7
C~'
4
2
---............--- -
Vl~_---
/ L.,,------ -_ '.2lIi.,..- .,.,."'- __
~.:::i. -----
.-
-
"",..
...
.".,..-
_._-----
1.0
C'P-
/
II
1/'
0.01
0.0
O. 1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
\
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
LEGEND
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Elapsed time; unblocked Files 3 & 4
_ _ Elapsed time; blocked Files 3 & 4
_
-CP
_ _ Central Processor time (aU configurations)
(Contd.)
1/66
fA
AUERBACH
e
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
. 13
804:201. 1:30
Standard File Problem C
.131 Record sizes -
Master file: . . . . . 216 characters.
Detail file: .
. . 1 card.
Report file:. . . . . . 1 line.
~' .....
· . standard.
· . using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
. 132 Computation: .
.133 Timing basis:
4:200.13.
. 134 Graph: . . . . . . . . · . see graph below .
100.0
7
-
4
2
~
10.0
7
-'
./
4
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
2
V
W
1.0
7
~
-
--
/
------
VIIA
I"""
~
VIIA
.-
..... 1.0
VIlIA
--------~
4
2
,~
0.1
7
-'C~·
/'
(
\.
0.01
-
-
---
/
4
2
C'P--
/
/
V
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
LEGEND
- - - - - - - - - - - Elapsed time; unblocked Files 3 & 4
Elapsed time; blocked Files 3 & 4
-CP- - Central Processor time (all configurations)
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
1/66
UNIVAC 494
804: 20 1. 140
.14
.141 Record sizes Master file:
Detail file: .
Report file: .
· trebled .
· using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide.
4:200.14.
· see graph below .
. 142 Computation:
.143 Timing basis:
Standard File Problem D
· 108 characters.
· 1 card.
· 1 line.
. 144 Graph:
100.0
7
4
2
~
10.0
.-
7
L'
/'
4
Time in Minutes to
Process 10.000
Master File Records
/
2
/
I
1.0
7
JII'
4
~
~.-!""
.-
.-
.~
Z
~-
...............
-----
1----
2
0.1
7
..... C~'
/'
4
2
0.01
~
-
-
VIlA
VIllA
~-VIIIA
.... 1.0
---
.~
CP~
-
/
/'
/
0.0
O. 1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
/
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
LEGEND
- - - - - - - - - - - Elapsed time; unblocked Files 3 & 4
- - - - - - E l a p s e d time; blocked Files 3 & 4
-CP-- Central Processor time (all configurations)
,/
(Contd.)
1/66
fA
AUERBACH
~
804:201. 150
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
. 15
.153 Timing basis: . . . . . data is transcribed directly
from cards to tape or
tape to printer; no editing
is performed during these
runs.
.154 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . see graph below.
Data Transcription Runs for Standard File
Problems
. 151 Block sizes Detail file (on
cards):. . . . . . . . one card.
Report file (on
printer): . . . . . . . one print line.
100.0
7
/
4
V V
~III
II
10.0
V
~
7
.~
4
~
",0
~
I;"
e,
II'
",~r
'1>' e,
",0
",0-
Time in Minutes to 2
Transcribe Records
,IJ
'I
1.0
,,
7
4
0.1
V
/
2
2
V
I/'
V
1.0
f
I'
~
/
V /
V
.~
~
~
II
","
I~
7
•
'1>' e,
<',:
v~
4
/
",'1>'-Q
",0
",0'b'
/
II'
2
1111
c;"Y
V
l/
0.01
100
2
4
7
1,000
2
4
7
10,000
2
4
7
100,000
Number of Records Transcribed
(Graph applies to Standard Configurations VIIA and VIlIA;
lines marked "CP" denote Central Processor times.)
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
1/66
UNIVAC 494
804: 20t. 200
.2
SORTING
.21
Standard Problem Estimates
.213 Timing basis: . . . . . using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.213; 3-way tape
merge .
. 214 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . see graph below .
.211 Record size:. . . .
80 characters.
. 212 Key size: . . . . . . . . 8 characters.
1,000
7
4
2
100
7
4
1
~
2
Time in Minutes to
put Records into
Required Order
10
'/
4
~~
~y
7
/
I'
~
I
¢,."
4
~
1/
2
/
1
II
0/
V
V
I.J'
1.0
I
7
"
,/
I/'
4
7
2
/
"
.J
I/'
0.1
2
100
4
7
2
4
7
1,000
10,000
2
4
7
100,000
Number of Records
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
(Contd.)
1/66
A
AUERBACH
•
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
804: 20 1. 300
.3
MATRIX INVERSION
. 31
Standard Problem Estimates
.312 Timing basis: . . . . . using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.312; 14-digitprecision floating-point
arithmetic is used; indicated times are for dual
core memory banks;
single-bank times are
18% slower .
. 313 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . see graph below.
.311 Basic parameters: .. general, non-symmetric
matrices, using floating
point to at least 8 decimal
digits precision.
100.0
7
4
2
10.0
.
7
I
4
I
2
I
/
Time in Minutes
for Complete
1.0
Inversion
~
1.0
7
,
4
J
2
I
0.1
'I
,
1
7
'I
4
I
2
I
/
0.01
1
2
4
7
2
4
10
7
2
100
4
7
1,000
Size of Matrix
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
1/66
804: 20 I. 400
UNIVAC 494
.4
GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING
. 41
Standard Mat.hematical Problem A Estimates
.412 Computation: . . . . . . 5 fifth-order polynomials,
5 divisions, and 1 square
root; computation is
performed in 14-digitprecision floating-point
mode.
.413 Timing basis:
.. using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.413 .
. 414 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . see graph below.
.411 Record sizes: . . . . . 10 signed numbers; average
size 5 digits, maximum
size 8 digits.
10.000
7
4
/
2
1,000
7
4
2
III. V (R
Time in
100
Milliseconds
per Input Record 7
III, V (R
= 1. 0)
O. 1, 0.01)
4
-,
~
2
~
10
~~
,
~
VIlA, VIIIA
7
~~
_C~C~
4
2
1
C'P·
-
I
"",. ".
l- Cf'"
2
0.1
-
4
1\"''\'
~~~
I.).I:I\.
,
... 1-
~'"
7
1.),\.'
2
4
1.0
7
2
10.0
4
7
100.0
C, Number of Computations per Input Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations; R == number of
output records per input record; curve marked "CP" shows central processor time.)
1/66
/fA.
AUERBACH
~
'.
;
UNIVAC 9000 SERIES
I
I",
Univac
(A Division of Sperry Rand Corporation)
~_
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
I
UNIVAC 9000 SERIES
Univac
(A Division of Sperry Rand Corporation)
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
810:001. 010
1&•
SUNDARD
UNIVAC 9000 SERIES
ADVANCE REPORT
EDP
AUERBACH
REPORTS
ADVANCE REPORT:
UNIVAC 9000 SERIES
.01
INTRODUCTION
The UNIVAC Division of Sperry Rand Corporation unveiled the UNIVAC 9200 and 9300, the
first two members of its long-awaited 9000 Series computer family, on June 21, 1966. Although the 9200 and 9300 systems are small-scale computers designed for business applications, UNIVAC states that the 9000 Series will eventually span the small, medium, and
large-scale computer market. The UNIVAC 9500, a medium-scale computer with multiprogramming and real-time capabilities, will probably be announced this Fall. Still larger
models are being planned for future announcement.
The UNIVAC 9000 Series computers employ plated-wire main memories (the first commercial
use of this promising storage technique) and monolithic integrated circuits. Both of these
technological innovations promise iInproved performance, economy, and reliability. Perhaps
of even greater significance to prospective buyers, however, is UNIVAC' s decision to make
its 9000 Series computers System/360-compatible with respect to data structure, codes,
input-output media, and source-language programming. This decision by UNIVAC, which is
widely regarded as the number two computer manufacturer and a leader in technology, represents a giant step toward improved communication among computers, lower reprogramming
and retraining costs, lessened dependence upon a single equipment supplier, and greater
standardization throughout the industry.
The UNIVAC 9200 is an internally-programmed punched card computer that provides high
internal proceSSing speeds at rock-bottom prices, although its input-output speeds are somewhat below par for third-generation equipment. The 9200 will be marketed primarily as a
first step into stored-program data processing for users of punched card tabulating equipment
and of UNIVAC's own highly successful, plugboard-programmed 1004 Card Processors. The
9200 will be competing with systems such as the IBM System/360 Model 20, the Honeywell 120,
and the GE-1l5 - and it is clear that the 9200's lower cost will make it a formidable contender
for this important segment of the computer market.
Figure 1. An 8-tape UNIVAC 9300 system.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
810:00 t. 020
.01
UNIVAC 9000 SERIES
INTRODUCTION (Contd.)
A basic 9200 system, containing 8,192 bytes of plated-wire memory, 250-lpm printer, 400-cpm
reader, and 75-to-200-cpm punch, can be rented for $1,040 per month or purchased for approximately $40,000. Under a 5-year lease agreement, the monthly rate drops to $925. Deliveries
are scheduled to begin in June 1967.
The UNIVAC 9300 can be used either as a punched card system with higher computing and inputoutput speeds than the 9200 or as a low-cost magnetic tape system. It will be suitable for use
as a stand-alone computer for a wide range of business applications or as a satellite computer
to perform card-to-tape and tape-to-printer transcriptions for larger computer systems. The
9300's 600-nanosecond memory cycle time is the fastest in its price class. Instruction execution times are comparable to those of the more expensive IBM System/360 Model 30.
UNIVAC 9300 system rentals will range from about $1, 675 to $9,300 per month, and purchase
prices will range from about $63,000 to $350,000. A tape-oriented system. with sort/merge
capability (three tape handlers) can be rented for less than .$3,000 per month. Deliveries of the
9300 are scheduled to begin in September 1967.
Because of UNIVAC's decision to introduce the two low-end models first, it is too early to
evaluate the overall competitive position of tHe UNIVAC 9000 Series in relation to other thirdgeneration computer families such as the IBM System/360 and the Honeywell Series 200. The
limited line of peripheral equipment announced to date includes no mass storage, communications
controllers, display devices, high-performance magnetic tape units, optical character readers,
or punched tape equipment. The announced software facilities are more than adequate to support
the small-scale 9200 and 9300 systems but represent no significant innovations in software design.
Therefore, a definitive analysis of the new UNIVAC line's strengths and weaknesses in the hotly
competitive general-purpose computer market must be postponed at least until UNIVAC announces
the medium-scale UNIVAC 9500 and the associated peripheral equipment and software .
. 02
DATA STRUCTURE
The basic unit of data storage in the UNIVAC 9000 Series, as in the IBM System/360, is the
8-bit byte, which consists of eight data bits plus (in memory) a parity bit. The eight data bits
in a byte can represent one alphanumeric character, one or two decimal digits (depending upon
whether the "packed" or "unpacked" format is used), or a portion of a binary field.
Bytes can be handled individually or grouped together into fields. A "halfword" is a group of
two consecutive bytes, or 16 bits. Binary numbers in the UNIVAC 9200 and 9300 are represented by signed halfwords (sign plus 15 data bits). Instructions are four or six bytes (32 or
48 bits) in length.
Decimal arithmetic is performed upon 4-bit BCD digits packed two to a byte, with a sign in the
rightmost four bits of the low-order byte. Decimal operands can be up to 16 bytes (31 digits
and sign) in length.
,03
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
.031 UNIVAC 9200 Configurations
The basic UNIVAC 9200 system includes a 9200 Processor with a built-in 250 -lpm printer;
8K, 12K, or 16K bytes of plated-wire memory; a 400-cpm card reader; and a column card
punch rated at 75 to 200 cpm. Only one of each of the basic I/o devices can be connected.
Optional features available for the processor and I/o devices are described in the appropriate sections of this report.
A UNIVAC 1001 Card Controller can be connected via the optional Multiplexor I/O Channel
and a 1001 Control. The Multiplexor I/O Channel can accommodate up to eight control
units, but the 1001 is the only peripheral device currently offered for connection to a 9200
system in this manner.
Typical Card System; Standard Configuration 1*
Monthly Rental
Equipment
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
9200 Processor, including 250 -lpm Printer
Multiply/Divide/Edit feature
120 Print Positions feature
8K Wire Memory (8,192 bytes, 1.2 fJ.sec cycle)
400 -cpm Card Reader
Column Card Punch (75-200 cpm)
*
It should be noted that the 9200 IS printing, card reading, and card punching
Total Rental:
$330
75
120
375
135
200
/
$1,235
speeds are all significantly lower than the speeds called for by the specifications for Standard Configuration I (Section 4:030 of the Users' Guide).
(Contd. )
7 '66
A
AUERBACH
®
810:001. 032
ADVANCE REPORT
i
"'--
•
0 oJ·,·)
UNIVAC 9300 Configurations
.....
The basie UNIVAC 9300 system includes a 9300 Processor with a built-in 600 -lpm printer;
81(, 12K, 16K, or 32K bytes of plated-wire memory; a 600-cpm card rcader, and a column
card punch rated at 75 to 200 cpm. Only one of each of the basic I/O devices can be connocted.
(
I
The optionall\lultiplcxor I/O Channcl permits connection of a 1001 Card Controller, a 200cpm How Punch, and/or Uniservo VI C magnetic tape units. The Multiplexor Channel can
accommodate up to eight control units. The 1001 Card Controller can be connected to one
control-unit pOSition via a 1001 Control. Each Uniservo VI C Control occupies one controlunit position and can control up to eight tape handlers; see Paragraph. 091 for Uniservo
VI C configuration details.
\.
Typical Card System; Standard Configuration I
Monthly Rental
Equipmcnt
9:300 Processor, including 600 -lpm Printer
l\lultiplexor I/O Channel (for Row Punch)
8K Wire l\icmory (8,192 bytes; 0.6 /J.sec cycle)
I - 600-cpm Card Reader
1 - 200-cpm Row Punch
1
1 1 -
Total Rental:
$725
75
550
200
310
$1,860
6-Tape Business System; Standard Configuration III
Equipment
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
-
Monthly Rental
9300 Processor, including 600-lpm Printer
Multiplexor I/O Channel
16K Wire Memory (16,384 bytes; 0.6 /J.sec cycle)
600-cpm Card Reader
Column Care: Punch (75-200 cpm)
Uniservo VI C Magnetic Tape Subsystem
(control unit, 1 master handler, and 1 slave handler)
Uniservo VI C Master Tape Handler
Uniscrvo VI C Sla'le Tape Handlers
Total Rental:
. 0-1
$725
75
1,000
200
200
875
500
~
$4,475
INTERNAL STORAGE
.OH Plated-Wire Memory
Probably the most significant technical innovation in the UNIVAC 9000 Series is the use of
plated-wil'e memory for the main working storage. The plated-wire memory operates in a
nondestructive readout (NDRO) mode, eliminating the need for the regenerative cycle which
is required after every read operation in conventional magnetic core memories. Furthermore,
most of the plated-wire manufacturing and testing operations can be carried out in continuous,
automated pl'ocesses. For these reasons, UNIVAC claims that its plated-wire memories can
be offered with higher speeds and at lower costs than the core memories which are used in
nearly all current computer systems.
The plated-wire memory is a magnetic storage device of the thin-film type. The substrate
is a beryllium copper wire, O. 005 inch in diameter. The manufacturing process consists
of electroplating an iron nickel alloy over an initial plating of copper. Plating is performed
while the wire is in the presence of a circumferential magnetic field that is created by the
passage of current through the wire itself. The wire that provides a base for the thin-film
material also becomes an integral part of the read/write circuitry: it serves as the sense
line during read operations and carries write current during write operations.
The UNIVAC 9200 has a memory cycle time of 1. 2 microseconds per one-byte access, and
memory capacities of 8, 192, 12,288, and 16,384 bytes are available. The UNIVAC 9300's
memory cycle time is 600 nanoseconds (0.6 microsecond) per one-byte access, and the
available capacities are 8,192, 12,288, 16,384, and 32,768 bytes. Memory sizes can be
increased at any time by field-installing additional modules. Every byte read from memory
is checked for proper (odd) parity .
. 0-12 Mass Storage
No mass storage devices have been announced to date for use with the 9000 Series. It is
likely. however. that some of UNIVAC's existing drums, and other mass storage equipment
wh ich the company is currently developing, will be offered within the next few months.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
810:001. 050
.05
UNIVAC 9000 SERIES
CENTRAL PROCESSOHS
The UNIVAC 9200 and !):lOO Processors are functionally identical; they differ only in internal
speeds (thc 9:100 is twiel' as fast), in the eomplcment of I/O devices that can be connected,
and in the fact that the Multiply, Divide, and Edit facilities are extra-cost options in the
9200 and standard fcatures in thc 9:100. Table I summarizes the basic characteristics and
eapabilities of thc two systems.
TABLE I: CIIARACTERISTICS OF THE UNIVAC 9200 AND 9300
SYSTEM
Memory cycle time, microseconds
Bytes accessed pcr cyclc
9200
9300
1.2
0.6
1
8K, 12K, or 16K
Memory capacity, bytes
General registcrs
8
I/o control rcgistcrs
8
Multiply, Divide, Edit instructions
Pl'ocessor speeds, microseconds
(signed 5-digit operands) c=a+b
h=a+b
Move a to b
Compare a to b
Multiplexor I/O Channel rate, bytes/second
1
8K, 12K, 16K, or :12K
8
8
Optional
Standard
187.2
103.2
84.0
103.2
93.6
51. 6
42.0
51. 6
85,000
85,000
Card reading speed, cpm Basic reader
1001 Card Controller
400
1000/2000
600
1000/2000
Card punching speed, cpm
75-200
75-200 or 200
Alphanumeric printing speed, lpm
250
Not available
Magnetic tape speed, bytes/second
600
34,160
The overall architecture of the UNIVAC 9200 and 9300 Processors is closely similar to that
of the IBM System/360 processors. Perhaps the most Significant differences are in the
general registers, which serve as accumulators, index registers, and base address registers.
Whereas System/360 Models 30 through 75 each have one set of 16 general registers, the
UNIVAC 9200 and 9300 have two groups of eight registers each. Furthermore, each register
has a capacity of four bytes (32 bits) in the larger System/360 models and only two bytes (16
bits) in the 9200 and 9300.
One group of eight registers in the UNIVAC processors is used solely for internal processing
functions, while the other group is reserved for input-output control functions. The processing
group is used whenever the processor is operating in the normal mode, called Processor Progranl State Control (PPSC). Whenever an interrupt occurs, the processor switches automatically to the I/O Program State Control mode (I/OPSC) and uses the input-output group of
registers. This system improves processing efficiency by eliminating the need to store and
then reload the contents of the general registers whenever an interrupt occurs. Conversely,
programming flexibility will be somewhat restricted by the fact that only 8 general registers,
rather than 16, are accessible to the programmer.
ProgTam interrupts occur upon completion of input-output operations and upon detection of
input-output or processor errors. Standard software facilities interrogate a status byte to
determine the cause of the interrupt and then initiate the appropriate program action.
The UNIVAC 9200/9300 instruction repertoire (see Table II) emphasizes decimal arithmetic
operations upon variable-length fields. There are three basic instruction formats, which
correspond to System/360 instruction types RX, SI, and SS. Type RX instructions are four
bytes in length, specify one general register and one memory location, and are used primarily
for binary arithmetic and branching operations. Type SI instructions are four bytes in length,
specify one memory location and an 8-bit "immediate" operand value, and are used for logical
and input-output operations. Type SS instructions are six bytes in length, specify two memory
locations, and are used for the variable-length operations such as decimal arithmetic, code
translation, packing, unpacking, and data movement. The two-byte register-to-register (type
RR) instruction format used in the System/360 is not implemented in the UNIVAC 9200 and 9300.
Operands in plated-wire memory can be addressed either directly or by means of the base-plusdisplacement technique used in the System/360. If there is a 0 in the most significant bit pOSition of an instruction halfword containing a memory address, the remaining 15 bits of the halfword are interpreted as a direct address. If the most significant bit is a 1, the "base address"
(Contd. )
766
A
AUERBACH
®
,/
810:00 I. 060
ADVANCE REPORT
\.
'--
.05
CENTHAL PROCESSORS (Contd.)
contained in the general register specified by the next three bits is added to the "displacement"
contained in the last 12 bits of the halfword to form the required memory address.
.06
CONSOLE
The operator's consolc for both the 9200 and 9300 systems consists of a sloping panel located
to tllL' rig-ht of the printer in the cabinet module that houses both the processor and printer. Thc
top row of switchcs on thc panel permits control of system power and of the functions of thc basic
printcr, rcader, and punch. A row of display lights indicates the nature of errors and abnormal
conditions. Other switches and lights on the control panel are intended primarily for use in
program tcsting and equipment maintenance. The contents of any address in memory can be displayed and altered, and programs can be executed in step-by-step fashion.
.07
INPUT /OUTPUT; PUNCHED CARD
.071 -lOO-cpm Card Reader
This card reader is the basic input unit for the UNIVAC 9200 system. It reads standard 80column cards photoelectrically, in column-by-column fashion, at a peak speed of 400 cards per
minute. Optional features permit short cards of either 51 or 66 columns to be fed. The input
hopper holds 1200 cards and the single output stacker holds 1500 cards. Checks are made for
the following conditions: hopper empty, stacker full, misfeed, card jam, improper registration, photoccll malfunction, and improper parity in data transmitted to the reader. Photocell
malfunctions arc detected by a light/dark check at the beginning of each card cycle. Control
of card rcader operations occupies the 9200 Processor for less than 1 percent of each l50-millisecond card cycle.
.072 600-cpm Card Reader
This card reader is the basic input unit for the UNIVAC 9300 system. Except for its higher peak
speed of 600 cards per minute, its characteristics are similar to those of the 400-cpm reader
described above. Control of card reader operations 9ccupies the 9300 Processor for only 1
millisecond of each 100-millisecond card cycle .
. 073 Column Card Punch
UNIVAC's new Column Card Punch is the basic card output device for both the UNIVAC 9200 and
9300 systems. It punches standard 80-column cards in column-by-column fashion. Cards are
fed from a 1200-card input hopper past an optional pre-punch read station, a wait station, and
a punch station, and then into one of two 850-card stackers. Program selection of either the
normal output stacker or the reject stacker is an optional feature.
Rated punching speeds range from a maximum of 200 cards per minute when only the first 14
columns of each card are punched to a minimum of 75 cards per minute when all 80 columns are
punched. In all cases, control of card punch operations occupies the central processor for a
maximum of 1 millisecond per card. Checks are made for the following conditions: hopper
empty, stacker full, chip box full, card jam, misfeed, improper punch motion (echo check), and
improper parity .
. 07-1 :WO-cpm Row Card Punch
The Row Punch can be connected to a UNIVAC 9300 system via the optional Multiplexor I/o Channel.
Because it punches cards in row-by-row fashion, it can maintain its rated speed of 200 cards per
minute regardless of the number of columns punched per card. Standard 80-column cards are
fed from a 1000-card input hopper past an optional pre-punch read station, a wait station, a punch
station, and a post-punch read station used for hole-count checking purposes, and then into one of
two 1000-card stackcrs. Program selection of either stacker is a standard capability, and elTor
cards are automatically directed into the error stacker. Control of Row Punch operations occupies
the 9300 Processor for only 2 milliseconds of each 300-millisecond card cycle .
. 075 1001 Card Controller
The 1001 Card Controller, announced in May 1965, is a high-speed alphanumeric collator that can
be connected to a UNIVAC 9200 or 9300 system via the optional Multiplexor I/O Channel and a 1001
Control. The 1001 has two card feeds and seven stackers. Each of the two card feeds can operate
independently at up to 1000 cards per minute, and a column-by-column photoelectric read station
is associated with each card feed. Thus, a UNIVAC 9200 or 9300 equipped with a 1001 (in addition
to the basic 400-cpm or 600-cpm card reader) can simultaneously handle three separate card input
files and can perform merging and selection operations while processing.
The 1001 also contains 256 six-bit character positions of core memory and processing capabilities
such as addition, subtraction, comparison, and editing. It is externally programmed by means of
a plugboard. These facilities permit the 1001 to be disconnected from the computer system and used
for off-line collating, editing, sorting, or proving operations.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7.66
810:001. 080
.08
UNIVAC 9000 SERIES
INPUT-OUTPUT; PRINTEHS
.081 250-lpm Bar Printer
The 250-lpm printer is an integ-ral part of the UNIVAC 9200 Processor and is the only printer
currently offered for use in 9200 systems; its relatively low speed is likely to be the limiting
factor on system throughput in many applications. The printer uses a horizontally oscillating
type-bar - the first time UNIVAC has employed this printing technique. The advantages of
this technique are its SimpliCity, low cost, elimination of vertical misalignment, and ability
to use interchangcable type-bars.
The basic model has 96 print positions and a peak speed of 250 single-spaced or double-spaccd
lines per minutc using the standard 63-character set. Vertical spacing is 6 lines per inch,
and skipping speed is 25 inches per second. Control of printer operations occupies the 9200
Processor for about 31 milliseconds of each 240-millisecond print cycle.
/
Optional features permit the number of print positions to be expanded from 96 to either 120
or 1:12. Another option - Variable Speed Printing - provides a special type-bar that enables
the printer, under program control, to print lines requiring only a 16-character numeric
font at 500 lines per minutc and lines requiring a 48-character alphanumeric font at 250 lines
per minute .
. 082 600-lpm Bar Printer
The 600-lpm printer is integrated into the 9300 Processor cabinet. It, too, uses a removable,
horizontally oscillating type-bar, but its peak speed, using the standard 63-character set, is
600 single- or double-spaced lines per minute. The optional Numeric Print feature provides
an interchangeable 16-character type-bar that permits lines containing only the 10 numeric
digits plus 6 special symbols to be printed at the rate of 1200 lines per minute. Skipping speed
is 25 inches per second, and the basic 120 print pOSitions can be expanded to a maximum of
132. Control of printing operations occupies the 9300 Processor for 31 milliseconds per line
when the standard 63 -character set is used, and for only 8 milliseconds per line when the
optional 16-character numeric type-bar is in use .
. 09
INPUT-OUTPUT; MAGNETIC TAPE
.091 Uniservo VI C Magnetic Tape Handlers
The Uniservo VI C Magnetic Tape Handlers, which. have been used with most of UNIVAC's
second-generation computers, are the only tape units announced to date for the UNIVAC 9300
system. The standard models for use with the 9300 use 9-track tape with a recording density
of 800 bytes per inch; thus, they are compatible with the 2400 Series magnetic tape units used
with the IBM System/360. The tape speed of 42. 7 inches per second provides a data transfer
rate of 34,160 bytes per second, and tape can be read either forward or backward. Nominal
start-stop times are 16.7 milliseconds when reading and 21. 7 milliseconds when writing.
Rewind time is 180 seconds or less per 2400-foot reel.
Tape reading and writing is overlapped with computing, and full read/write/compute simultaneity is possible in systems that include two tape control units. Control of magnetic tape
operations occupies the 9300 Processor for approximately 10 microseconds per byte, or about
33% of the total data transfer time.
The basic Uniservo VI C Magnetic Tape Subsystem consists of one 9-track control unit, one
master tape handler, and one slave tape handler . Each master tape handler can control up to
three slave handlers, and one control unit can accommodate a maximum of eight tape handlers
(two masters and six slaves). Each control unit occupies one of the eight positions on the 9300
Processor's optional Multiplexor I/O Channel. Two control units with a total of 16 handlers
represent the maximum configuration that will be supported by the 9300 software.
/
The Uniservo VI C subsystem is also available in a 7 -track version that provides compatibility
with IBM 729 tape units and with many of the older Uniservo models. Recording densities of
200, 556, or 800 characters per inch result in data transfer rates of 8,540, 23,741, or 34,160
characters per second, respectively. The optional Data Conversion feature provides automatic
two -way format conversions between the 6 -bit characters on tape and the 8 -bit bytes in memory.
A 7 -track tape subsystem consists of a 7 -track control unit and up to eight 7 -track tape handlers, arranged in the same way as the 9-track subsystem described above. Alternatively, 7track slave handlers can be connected to a 9-track master handler and used in a 9-track subsystem
if the optional 7 -track feature is added .
. 10
INPUT-OUTPUT; OTHER
No communications controllers, display devices, optical or magnetic character readers, or
punched tape I/O devices have been officially announced to date for use with UNIVAC 9200 or
9300 systems, although UNIVAC plans to make an expanded line of peripheral equipment
available in the future. The initial line of input-output devices is oriented exclusively toward
the use of punched cards and magnetic tape.
(Contd. )
7/66
A
AUERBACH
®
,/
810:001. 110
ADVANCE REPORT
.11
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
Control circuits for the basic printer, card reader, and card punch are built into the 9200 and
9300 Processors; these three basic I/O devices, as well as devices connected via the optional
Multiplexor Channel, can operate simultaneously with one another and with internal processing
by interleaving their demands upon the plated-wire main memory. The Multiplexor Channel's
ma;;:imum data rate, when operating in the multiplex mode, is 85,000 bytes per second - fast
enough to permit read/write tape simultaneity in systems that include two Uniservo VI C control
units.
\
\
The demands imposed upon the processor by the various input-output devices are stated in
Paragraphs. 071 through. 09!.
1')
INSTRUCTION LIST
The UNIVAC 9200 and 9300 have the same repertoire of 35 instructions, as listed in Table
II; the only differences are that the Edit, Multiply, and Divide instructions are optional in
the 9200 and standard in the 9300. Most of these 35 instructions are identical with IBM
System/3GO instructions in format and function; the principal exceptions are the privileged
a~d input-output instructions, which differ from those used in the System/360.
The UNIVAC 9200/9300 instruction repertoire is similar to, though not identical with, that
of IBM's small-scale System/360 Model 20, and is far smaller and less comprehensive
than thc instruction set used in System/360 Models 30 through 75. No facilities are provided
for binary multiplication and division or for floating-point arithmetic, and there are fewer
variations of the basic data-handling instructions to choose from than in the System/360.
Nonetheless, the limited instruction set that UNIVAC has chosen to implement should be
entirely adequate for small-scale business applications - and the smaller number of instructions should make programming easier to learn and less error-prone. The UNIVAC 9500
and the larger 9000 Series models will probably contain most or all of the System/360 programming facilities, although the privileged instructions in all models of the 9000 Series
will differ from their System/360 counterparts (as do those in RCA's Spectra 70 series) .
. 13
COMPATIBILITY
Within the 9000 Series, UNIVAC promises hardware, software, and program compatibility.
The programming languages for the 9200 and 9300 are compatible subsets of the languages
for the larger models, so that source-language programs written for the smaller systems
will be usable on upgraded systems without reprogramming.
UNIVAC plans to make its 9000 Series computers compatible with the IBM System/3GO
with respect to data strudure, data codes, input-output media, and source..,language programming. Direct program compatibility at the machine-language level will be precluded
by the differences in privileged instructions (i. e., those instructions reserved for operating
system use). Therefore, reassembly or recompilation will be necessary before programs
written for a System/360 can be run on a 9000 Series system, but little or no reprogramming
should he required. In all of these respects, UNIVAC's plans appear to parallel the methods
RCA has used for achieving compatibility between its Spectra 70 Series and the System/3GO.
The restricted instruction repertoires of the small-scale UNIVAC 9200 ancl 9300, however,
will make it impractical for these systems to reassemble and execute most assembly-Iang1.1f1ge
programs written for the System/360 processors other than the Model 20. Only the larger.
yet-to-be-a!UlOunced 9000 Series systems will be able to provide real nssl'mbly··1ang'uage
compatibility with the System/360; and, as in all such cases, an equivalent complement of
peripheral devices and storage will be required.
(
No hardware or software facilities to enable 9000 Series systems to execute programs
written for any of the older UNIVAC computers have been announced to date .
\
. 14
DATA CODES
The basic internal code of the UNIVAC 9000 Series is the Extended Binary-Coded Decimal
Interchange Code (EBCDIC), as used in the IBM System/360. It will also be possible to perform arithmetic and comparison operations upon ASCII data, although all standard software
will be EBCDIC-oriented. Compatibility with the System/360 will also be maintained in
punched card and magnetic tape codes. The 8-bit byte data structure, coupled with an efficient code translation instruction, should enable 9000 Series systems to accept and manipulate
most present and future character codes of up to eight bits.
.15
SOFTWARE
.151 UNIVAC 9200 Software
The card-oriented UNIVAC 9200 system will be supported by the following software facilities:
•
Assel'nbler: Translates symbolic instructions into machine instructions on a one-to-one
basis. The source deck is read twice, a printed listing is produced, and a relocatable
object deck is punched.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
UNIVAC 9000 SERIES
810:001. 151
TABLE II: UNIVAC 9200/9300 INSTRUCTION REPERTOIRE
01' CODE
MNEMONIC
FORMAT
9300 EXECUTION TIME,
MICROSECONDS(l)
CLASS
INSTRUCTION
B1NAHY
Store lIalfword
Load lIalfword
Compare lIalfword
Add Immediate
Add Halfword
Subtract Halfword
40
48
49
A6
AA
AB
STH
LH
CH
AI
AH
SH
RX
RX
RX
RX
RX
20.4
20.4
20.4
19.2
20.4
20.4
Test Under Mask
Move Immediate
AND
Compare Immediate
OR
Halt and Proceed
91
92
94
95
96
A9
TM
MVI
NI
CLI
HPR
SI
SI
SI
SI
SI
SI
16.8 to 19.2
16.8
16.8
16.8
16.8
14.4
Move Numerics
Move Characters
AND
Compare Logical
OR
Translate
Edit
D1
D2
D4
D5
D6
DC
DE
MVN
MVC
NC
CLC
OC
TR
ED
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
16.8 + 8.4(N)
16.8 + 8.4(N)
16.8 + 8.4(N)
25.2 + 8.4(N)
16.8 + 8.4(N)
16.8 + 14.4(N)
See Note 3.
DECIMAL
Move with Offset
Pack
Unpack
Zero and Add
Compare Decimal
Add Decimal
Subtract Decimal
Multiply Decimal
Divide Decimal
Fl
F2
F3
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
MVO
PACK
UNPK
ZAP
CP
AP
SP
MP
DP
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
SS
25.2 + 3. 6(N2)
25.2 + 3. 6(N 2)
21. 6 + 7. 2(N 2)
26.4 + 3.6(N2)
26.4 + 3. 6(N 2)
26.4 + 3. 6(N2)
26.4 + 3. 6(N 2)
See Note 3.
See Note 3.
BRANCH
Branch and Link
Branch on Condition'
45
47
BAL
BC
RX
RX
18
15.6 to 18
PRIVILEGED
Store State
Load State
AO
A8
SPSC
LPSC
SI
SI
24
18 to 24
SPECIAL
Supervisor Call
Al
SRC
SI
12
I/O
Execute I/O
Test I/O
A4
A5
XIOF
TIO
SI
SI
18 to 22.8
18 to 22.8
01
LOGICAL
SI
+ 6(N 1)
+ 4. 8(N 1)
+ 4. 8(N1)
+ 4. 8(N1)
+ 4. 8(N1)
+ 4. 8(N 1)
+ 4. 8(N 1)
(1)
To determine 9200 execution times, multiply the indicated times by 2. Timing for all instructions
assumes no indexing; add 3.6 microseconds for each indexing operation.
(2)
N, N1, N2
(3)
Times for the ED, MP, and DP instructions have not been specified to date; these three instructions
are extra-cost options in the UNIVAC 9200 and standard equipment in the 9300 .
= the
number of bytes specified in the respective length fields (L + 1, L1 + 1, or L2 + 1).
. 151 UNIVAC 9200 Series (Contd.)
7 '66
•
Preassembly Macro Pass: Causes generalized macro routines from a punched-card
macro library to be particularized in accordance with parameters specified by the
programmer in a deck of macro instructions. The particularized routines are then
punched in source code for subsequent assembly.
•
Report Program Generator: Accepts problem-oriented specifications defining a required
report, and generates a program to produce the report. The UNIVAC RPG uses essentially the same coding forms and specifications as the IBM System/360 RPG; its principal
purpose is to ease the transition from punched card tabulating to stored-program
computing.
•
Gangpunch Reproducer: Permits gangpunching and reproducing functions to be described
in problem-oriented terms, and generates a program to perform the specified functions.
fA
AUERBACH
®
(Contd. )
810:001. 152
ADVANCE REPORT
.151 UNIVAC 9200 Series (Colltd.)
•
Subroutines: A group of standard routines to perform functions such as control of
input-output operations, loading of programs, linking of separately-assembled program
clements, simulation of the hardware multiply/divide and edit instructions, dumping
of specified memory areas, floating-point arithmetic, and evaluation of the common
mathematical functions (Mathpac) .
. 152 UNIVAC 9300 Software
Card-oriented UNIVAC 9300 systems will be able to utilize all of the 9200 software facilities
described above.
For tape-oriented 9300 systems, the following facilities will be provided in addition to the
card-oriented software:
•
Tape Assembler: Functionally similar to the card Assembler, but contains a builtin macro facility and uses magnetic tape to minimize card handling; requircs at
least four tape units and 16, :184 bytes of memory.
•
Tape Heport Program Generator: Functionally similar to the card RPG, but permits
magnetic tape input to the object program; requires four tape units and 16,384 bytes
of memory.
•
Tapc Input/Output Control System: Performs the housekeeping operations involved
in handling magnetic tape files, so that the programmer only needs to concern himsclf with the processing of logical records. Tape lacs operations are initiated by
macro instructions. At least two tape units and 8,192 bytes of memory are required.
•
Sort/Merge: Sorts and/or merges tape records of either fixed or variable length.
Upper limits on record Size, number of sort key fields, and total key size depend
upon memory capacity. At least three tape units and 8,192 bytes of memory are
required.
•
FORTRAN IV: Converts source programs written in the A. S. A. FORTRAN IV
language (with certain yet-to-be-defined extensions) into machine-language object
programs. At least four tape units and 16,384 bytes of memory are required for
FORTRAN compilation.
•
COBOL: Translates COBOL source programs into machine-language object programs. UNIVAC states that the 9300 COBOL language is based on D. O. D. COBOL
1965 and conforms with the proposed A. S. A. COBOL language modules. The exact
language facilities to be provided have not been defined to date. Six tape units and
32,768 bytes of memory are required for COBOL compilation.
•
Executive: Facilitates efficient system operation by coordinating operator-computer
communication, allocating memory space and peripheral devices to programs, locating programs and overlays stored on magnetic tape, handling input-output interrupts,
and providing restart capabilities.
"Control stream operation" is UNIVAC's term for stacked-job processing in which one program
at a time is loaded and executed in accordance with control cards entered by way of the card
reader. "Concurrency" is a limited form of multiprogramming that can be employed in
UNIVAC 9300 systems with sufficient memory capacity and magnetic tape units; in this mode
of operation, one or more data transcription functions (card to tape, tape to printer, etc.)
are performed concurrently with the execution of one main program. Control stream operation will require a 16K, 4-tape configuration, while 32K and at least 5 tape units will be
required for concurrency.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
810:221. 101
A•
SUMDnD
UNIVAC 9000 SERIES
PRICE DATA
EDP
AUERBACH
RIPIUTS
PRICE DATA
PRICES
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
No.
9200
CENTRAL
SYSTEM
3030-00
F0882-00
F0869-00
F0822-00
F0866-00
F0868-01
F0865-00
9200
I/O
DEVICES
Multiply, Divide, Edit Instructions
Multiplexer I/O Channel
1001 Control
120 Print Positions
132 Print Positions
Variable Speed Printing
Purchase
$
330
295
65
12,200
75
50
40
120
180
75
65
45
35
105
160
70
5
5
5
15
20
i5
3,220
2,070
1,610
4,830
7,360
2,760
Plated-Wire Memory:
8,192 Bytes
12,288 Bytes
16,384 Bytes
375
625
750
330
550
660
30
45
60
15,870
26,680
31,740
0711-00
F0872-00
F0872-01
Card Reader (400 cpm)
Short Card Feature (51-column)
Short Card Feature (66-column)
135
40
40
120
35
35
30
10
10
4,830
1,380
1,380
0603-04
F0870-00
F0871-00
Card Punch (75-200 cpm)
Read/Punch Feature
Selective Stacker Feature
200
75
10
180
65
8
60
15
-
6,440
2,760
415
1001
Card Controller (basic model)
1004 Interface (required on
1001 for connection to a 9200
system)
475
11
425
9
150
3
16,250
400
3030-02
9300 Processor (includes 600-lpm
printer with 120 print positions)
725
650
150
26,500
75
75
50
50
65
70
45
45
5
10
15
5
3,220
2,990
1,610
2,070
550
850
1,000
1,800
485
750
880
1,580
45
60
75
120
23,230
36,340
42,550
77,280
F0869-01
F0864-00
F0867-00
F0822-99
9300
I/O
DEVICES
9200 Processor (includes
250-lpm printer with 96 print
positions)
Monthly
Monthly Rental
5-year Maintenance
I-year
lease
lease
$
7007-00
7007-10
7007-12
-
9300
CENTRAL
SYSTEM
Name
Multiplexer I/O Channel
132 Print Positions
High-Speed Numeric Print Feature
1001 Control
7007-99
7007-98
7007-97
7007-14
Plated-Wire Memory:
8,192 Bytes
12,288 Bytes
16,384 Bytes
32,768 Bytes
0711-02
F0872-02
F0872-03
Card Reader (600 cpm)
Short Card Feature (51-column)
Short Card Feature (66-column)
200
40
40
180
35
35
60
10
10
6,440
1,380
1,380
0603-04
F0870-00
F0871-00
Card Punch (75-200 cpm)
Read/Punch Feature
Selective Stacker Feature
200
75
10
180
65
8
60
15
-
6,440
2,760
415
0604-00
F0875-00
Row Card Punch (200 cpm)
Read/Punch Feature
310
150
280
135
90
45
10,120
4,830
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
810:221. 102
PRICE DATA
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
9:100
I/o
DEVICES
(Contd. )
No.
Name
Purchase
$
Card Controller (basic model)
1004 Interface (required on
1001 for connection to a 9300
system)
475
11
425
9
150
3
16,250
400
0858-99
Uniservo VI C Magnetic Tape Subsystem (9-track;. includes control,
master handler, and 1 slave
handler)
7-Track Feature (permits
7-track handlers to be added
to a 9-track subsystem)
Data Conversion Feature
875
785
195
31,280
50
45
5
2,070
50
45
5
2,070
0858-14
0858-10
Uniservo VI C Slave Handler (9-track)
Uniservo VI C Master Handler
(9-track)
300
500
270
450
70
115
10,680
17,700
0858-98
Uniservo VI C Magnetic Tape Subsystem (7-track; includes control,
master handler, and 1 slave
handler)
Data Conversion Feature
875
785
195
31,280
50
45
5
2,070
Uniservo VI C Slave Handler (7 -track)
Uniservo VI C Master Handler
(7-track)
300
500
270
450
70
115
10,680
17,700
-
F0827-00
F0827-00
0858-01
0858-00
,
7/66
Monthly
Maintenance
$
1001
F0828-00
.~
PRICES
Monthly Hcntal
I-year 5-year
lease
lease
IA
AUERBACH
'"
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-21:37:19 Create Date : 2018:05:11 10:11:18-08:00 Modify Date : 2018:05:11 11:03:08-07:00 Metadata Date : 2018:05:11 11:03:08-07:00 Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.0 Paper Capture Plug-in Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:64958b52-d4ba-6044-bbcc-c3d066497ed3 Instance ID : uuid:151792c7-16db-9742-9d3b-5359376c20f3 Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 954EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools